From e0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Norbert Preining Date: Mon, 2 Sep 2019 13:46:59 +0900 Subject: Initial commit --- macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx | 60196 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 60196 insertions(+) create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx') diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b5db259b49 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,60196 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 +%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 +%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert +%% Copyright 2018 GitHub minitoc organisation (David Carlisle) +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in: +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% The Current Maintainer of this work is GitHub minitoc organisation +% https://github.com/minitoc/minitoc. +% +% This work consists of all the files listed in the file minitoc.l +% distributed with it. +% +% \fi +% +% \iffalse +%<*driver> +\ProvidesFile{minitoc.dtx}% +% +%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/05] +%\ProvidesPackage{minitoc} +%<*package> + [2018/07/12 v62 minitoc.dtx file] +% +%\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +%<*driver> +\listfiles +\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,oneside,openright]{book} +%\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,twoside,openright]{book} +\newlength{\iwidth} +\newlength{\awidth} +\newlength{\bwidth} +\newlength{\cwidth} +\newlength{\dwidth} +\newlength{\wkdim} +\setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +\addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% +% To add a kind of minitoc in the index +% +%\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\section*{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}\phantomsection} +\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\phantomsection\textbf{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}} +% +% To frame a flag. +\newlength{\flagframethickness} +\setlength{\flagframethickness}{.1pt} +\newcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{black}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup} +\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\flagframethickness}{1mm}} +\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{FBcolor}{gray}{.93}} +\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{FBcolor}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}} +\newcommand{\flagboxa}[1]{\raisebox{-2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}} +\newcommand{\flagboxu}[1]{\raisebox{2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}} +% +\def\ATOC#1{{#1}\stepcounter{section}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}#1}} +\newlength{\widthinc}\setlength{\widthinc}{3.5cm} +\makeatletter\@mparswitchfalse\makeatother % les notes marginales à gauche! +\makeatletter +\def\mydotfill#1{% Filling dots; #1 = separation (dimension) + \leavevmode + \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{\cdot}\hss}\hfill + \kern\z@} +\def\mysymbfill#1#2{% Filling symbols; #1 = separation (dimension) #2 = symbol; + \leavevmode + \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{#2}\hss}\hfill + \kern\z@} +\makeatother +\let\RR\raggedright % or \RaggedRight ? +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lan}{\input{\jobname.lan}}{\typeout{WARNING: \jobname.lan NOT FOUND}\def\LANG{0}} +\IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\usepackage{marvosym}\def\myCoffeecup{~\Coffeecup}}{\let\myCoffeecup\relax} +\IfFileExists{mparhack.sty}{\usepackage{mparhack}}{} % not used if oneside. +\usepackage{chngpage} % to enlarge the biblio +\IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort&compress,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}\citeindextrue}{} +\IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\usepackage[tight]{shorttoc}}{} +\IfFileExists{fnbreak.sty}{\usepackage{fnbreak}}{} % Checks split footnotes +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\usepackage{ifthen} +\newcounter{currlevel}\setcounter{currlevel}{-1} +\makeatletter +\gdef\@idxitem#1{% + \par + \hangindent 40\p@ + \ifthenelse{#1 > \value{currlevel}}{{% + \nobreak + }{\ifthenelse{#1 = \value{currlevel}}{% + \pagebreak[0]% + }{% + \pagebreak[2]% + }}% + \setcounter{currlevel}{#1}% + \hangindent 40pt +}}% +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\makeatletter +\providecommand*{\toclevel@chaptersom}{0} +\makeatletter\providecommand*{\toclevel@sectionsom}{0} +\let\nouppercase\relax +\def\Shorttableofcontents#1#2{\bgroup\c@tocdepth=#2\@restonecolfalse + \if@tightshtoc + \parsep\z@ + \fi + \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{{#1} + \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{sectionsom}{#1}}% + {\chapter*{{#1} + \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chaptersom}{#1}}% + \@startshorttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi\egroup} +\def\l@chaptersom{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \IfFileExists{repeatindex.sty}{\usepackage{repeatindex}}{}% To improve the index; DOES NOT WORK %% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\IfFileExists{sectsty.sty}{\usepackage[garrulous]{sectsty}% To fix long sectionning titles... + \partfont{\RR}% + \chapterfont{\RR}% + \sectionfont{\RR}% + \subsectionfont{\RR}% + \subsubsectionfont{\RR}}{} % NOT \paragraph or \subparagraph ! +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \usepackage[space,sort]{cite} % cite does not work well with hyperref... +%\RequirePackage[nocompress,sort]{cite}[2003/11/04] % cite[compress] or cite[sort] does not work well with hyperref; +% use a recent recent version of cite.sty to use its sort option. +% In fact, I use (above): \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}}{} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\providecommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak} +\providecommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]} +\providecommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak} +\or\relax +\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{-}\nolinebreak} +\fi +\let\bibpreamble\relax +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries This bibliography contains many URLs; you must be aware that +some of them might be inaccessible because they are obsolete, or because their site is down or encounters +some unexpected problem. Note also that the response of some sites may be slow (several seconds). +For instance, the entries +\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, from the \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/} +site, are very difficult to contact. + +The URLs beginning with ``\texttt{https:}'' to the TUGboat site may have a restricted access to the TUG members during +one year after publication. Being a member of TUG is useful and cheap! + +Some URLs may contain an extension not supported by your Web browser; in such cases, you should try to access to the +document manually. An example is~\cite{JMPL1}, whose extension is \suffix{.ps.gz}. + +Some URLs are too long for some tools; when possible, I shortened the URL to display only the contents the +directory, as for~\cite{pdftex}, or by using an URL to the catalogue entry (as for~\cite{arabi} +and~\cite{antomega}); when not possible, you should try +to access to the document manually.\par\lneed{12}% +}} +\or\relax +\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries Cette bibliographie contient de nombreux URLs; vous devez être +avertis que certains d'entre eux pourraient être inaccessibles parce qu'ils sont obsolètes, parce que leur site +est inactif ou subit un problème inattendu. Notez aussi que certains sites peuvent être lents à~répondre (quelques +secondes). +Par exemple, les entrées +\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, depuis le site \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/}, +sont très difficiles à~atteindre. + +Les URLs commençant par {\froff\og{} \texttt{https:}~\fg{}} vers le site de TUGboat peuvent avoir leur accès restreint +aux membres du TUG pendant un an après leur publication. Être membre du TUG est utile et n'est pas très cher! + +Certains URLs peuvent contenir un suffixe non supporté par votre navigateur Web; dans un tel cas, vous devriez +essayer d'accéder au document manuellement. Un exemple est~\cite{JMPL1}, dont le suffixe est \suffix{.ps.gz}. + +Certains URLs sont trop longs pour certains logiciels; lorsque c'était possible, j'ai raccourci l'URL pour +n'afficher que le contenu du répertoire, ainsi par exemple pour~\cite{pdftex}, ou en utilisant un URL vers +l'entrée dans le catalogue (comme pour~\cite{arabi} and~\cite{antomega}); lorsque ce n'était pas possible, +vous devrez essayer d'accéder manuellement au document.\par\lneed{12}% +}} +\fi +% inclusion graphique centrée verticalement +% #1=hauteur apparente [0pt] optionnelle, #2=largeur, #3=fichier image +% \newlength{\hivc}\setlength{\hivc}{0pt} +% \newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\setlength{\hivc}{#1}\leavevmode\rule[-.5\hivc]{0pt}{\hivc}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}} +\newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}} +% +\renewcommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]} +\renewcommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\usepackage[english2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} +\or\relax +\usepackage[french2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} +\fi +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\emph{see}} +\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{see}~#1} +\or\relax +\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\textit{voir}} +\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{voir}~#1} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% NEW INDEX COMMANDS +% -- packages +\newcommand{\pack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipack{#1}} +\newcommand{\upack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\ipack}[1]{\ipackA{#1}\ipackB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- packages with special names (#1=real name, #2=sort) +\newcommand{\packa}[2]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipacka{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\upacka}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\ipacka}[2]{\ipackaA{#1}{#2}\ipackaB{#1}{#2}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- classes +\newcommand{\class}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\iclass{#1}} +\newcommand{\uclass}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\iclass}[1]{\iclassA{#1}\iclassB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- scripts +\newcommand{\scrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iscrp{#1}} +\newcommand{\uscrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\iscrp}[1]{\iscrpA{#1}\iscrpB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +% -- tools +\newcommand{\tool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\itool{#1}} +\newcommand{\utool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\itool}[1]{\itoolA{#1}\itoolB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} +\fi +% -- examples +\newcommand{\exam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iexam{#1}} +\newcommand{\uexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\iexam}[1]{\iexamA{#1}\iexamB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(example document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Examples=\protect\leavevmode Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(exemple de document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Exemples=\protect\leavevmode Exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +% -- old examples +\newcommand{\oexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioexam{#1}} +\newcommand{\uoexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ioexam}[1]{\ioexamA{#1}\ioexamB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(old example document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Old Examples=\protect\leavevmode Old Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(ancien exemple de document)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Anciens exemples=\protect\leavevmode Anciens exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +% -- features +\newcommand{\feat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ifeat{#1}} +\newcommand{\ufeat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ifeat}[1]{\ifeatA{#1}\ifeatB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (feature)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Features=\protect\leavevmode Features\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (dispositif)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Dispositifs=\protect\leavevmode Dispositifs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- extensions/suffixes +\newcommand{\suffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\isuffix{#1}} +\newcommand{\usuffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\isuffix}[1]{\isuffixA{#1}\isuffixB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (extension)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Extensions=\protect\leavevmode Extensions\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (suffixe)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Suffixes=\protect\leavevmode Suffixes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- options (minitoc) +\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iopt{#1}} +\newcommand{\optd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptd{#1}} +\newcommand{\uopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\iopt}[1]{\ioptA{#1}\ioptB{#1}} +\newcommand{\ioptd}[1]{\ioptdA{#1}\ioptdB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default option)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option par défaut)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- options (other packages) +% \newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}\ioptp{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptp{#1}{#2}} +%\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}} +\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ioptp}[2]{\ioptpA{#1}{#2}\ioptpB{#1}{#2}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(\protect\textsf{#2} package)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(paquetage \protect\textsf{#2})}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- language options +\newcommand{\lopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ilopt{#1}} +\newcommand{\loptd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iloptd{#1}} +\newcommand{\ulopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ilopt}[1]{\iloptA{#1}\iloptB{#1}} +\newcommand{\iloptd}[1]{\iloptdA{#1}\iloptdB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(language option)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default language option)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(option de langue)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option de langue par défaut)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- names +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax} +\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- authors names in bib +\newcommand{\bname}[3]{\bnameA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bnameB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\newcommand{\bnamea}[4]{\bnameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\bnameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}} + +\newcommand\sksep{\ensuremath{\hookrightarrow}}% % put before the bib. refs in the index +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}} +\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}} +\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}} +\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}} +\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- tool names in bib +\newcommand{\btool}[2]{\btoolA{#1}{#2}\btoolB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\btoola}[3]{\btoolaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\btoolaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- pack names in bib +\newcommand{\bpack}[2]{\bpackA{#1}{#2}\bpackB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\bpacka}[3]{\bpackaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bpackaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- class names in bib -- nom, [ nom-tri ], clé-bib +\newcommand{\bclass}[2]{\bclassA{#1}{#2}\bclassB{#1}{#2}} +\newcommand{\bclassa}[3]{\bclassaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bclassaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} +\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- environments +\newcommand{\env}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ienv{#1}} +\newcommand{\uenv}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ienv}[1]{\ienvA{#1}\ienvB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environment)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environments=\protect\leavevmode Environments>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environnement)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environnements=\protect\leavevmode Environnements>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- files +\newcommand{\xfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixfile{#1}} +\newcommand{\uxfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\ixfileA{#1}\ixfileB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (file)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Files=\protect\leavevmode Files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (fichier)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Fichiers=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- graphic files +\newcommand{\xgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrf{#1}} +\newcommand{\uxgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ixgrf}[1]{\ixgrfA{#1}\ixgrfB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(graphic file)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Graphic files=\protect\leavevmode Graphic files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier graphique)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Fichiers graphiques=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers graphiques\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- flags (graphic) files +\newcommand{\xgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrfl{#1}} +\newcommand{\uxgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ixgrfl}[1]{\ixgrflA{#1}\ixgrflB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(flag file)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Flags files=\protect\leavevmode Flags files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier drapeau)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Fichiers drapeaux=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers drapeaux\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- .mld /mlo couples +\newcommand{\xmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}} +\newcommand{\ixmldo}[1]{\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}} +\newcommand{\uxmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- depth counters +\newcommand{\dcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\idcnt{#1}} +\newcommand{\udcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\idcnt}[1]{\idcntA{#1}\idcntB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(depth counter)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Depth counters=\protect\leavevmode Depth counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(compteur de profondeur)}\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs de profondeur=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs de profondeur\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- counters +\newcommand{\cnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\icnt{#1}} +\newcommand{\ucnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +\newcommand{\icnt}[1]{\icntA{#1}\icntB{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (counter)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Counters=\protect\leavevmode Counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (compteur)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- commands +\newcommand{\lit}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} % literal string +\newcommand{\clit}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} % literal command string +\newcommand{\com}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}\icom{#1}} +\newcommand{\ucom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} +\newcommand{\icom}[1]{\icomA{#1}\icomB{#1}} +\newcommand{\fkcom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[fake]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{fake#1}} +\newcommand{\ncom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[no]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{no#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (command)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commands=\protect\leavevmode Commands\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (commande)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commandes=\protect\leavevmode Commandes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- messages +%\newcommand{\mess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\imess{#1}} +%\newcommand{\umess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} +% \let\Buttonbox\Ovalbox % to be changed easily +\def\Buttonbox#1{\fbox{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily +% \def\Buttonbox#1{\keystroke{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily +\newcommand{\lmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\footnotesize + \hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}} +\newcommand{\phmess}{\footnotesize + \item[]{\textcolor{white}{\Buttonbox{\phantom{\texttt{M0000}}}}}} +\newcommand{\RMP}[1]{\reversemarginpar + \marginpar[{\raggedleft\strut\footnotesize\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}% + }\normalmarginpar} +\newcommand{\NMP}[1]{\normalmarginpar + \marginpar[{\raggedleft\Strutt\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}% + }\normalmarginpar} +\newcommand{\imess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\RMP{#1}} +\newcommand{\jmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\NMP{#1}} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\or\relax +\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}} +\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} +\fi +\newcommand{\HPH}{\footnotesize\hphantom{\fbox{\texttt{M0000}}}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% -- Stacked Messages in Margin \SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\ \lmess{W0055}} +\newcommand{\SMM}[1]{\bgroup% + \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. + \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \protect #1% + \end{tabular}}\egroup} +% -- idem. plus a Z dangerous bend above +\newcommand{\SMMZ}[1]{\bgroup% + \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. + \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex] + \protect #1% + \end{tabular}}\egroup} +% -- idem. plus a ZZ double dangerous bend above +\newcommand{\SMMZZ}[1]{\bgroup% + \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. + \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex] + \protect #1% + \end{tabular}}\egroup} +% Redefine \virage and \Virage (beware to the braces!) +\AtBeginDocument{% +\renewcommand{\virage}{% + \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt}\hfill\null\\ + \HPH + \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar} +\renewcommand{\Virage}{% + \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% + \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\ + \HPH + \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}% +} %%% ATBEGINDOCUMENT +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\gdef\envname{environment} +\gdef\envsname{environments} +\gdef\Envsname{Environments} +\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% + \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} +%\def\generalname{General} +\gdef\generalname{} +\or\relax +\gdef\envname{environnement} +\gdef\envsname{environnements} +\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} +\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% + \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} +%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} +\gdef\generalname{} +\fi +\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\setlength{\ptcindent}{0pt} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\makeatletter +\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}% +{\typeout{*************************************^^J% + * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J% + *************************************}} +{} +\RequirePackage{doc} +\renewenvironment{theglossary}{% +\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi +\columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@ +% \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]% +\onecolumn \glossary@prologue%JPFD +\raggedright +\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces} +{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}} +\AtBeginDocument{\providecommand{\phantomsection}{}} +\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{} +\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48} % '60 +\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{} +\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{} +\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{} +\CodelineNumbered +\DisableCrossrefs +\setlength{\textwidth}{375pt} % was 355pt +\newlength{\winf}\setlength{\winf}{\textwidth} % width in frame +\newlength{\winp}\setlength{\winp}{\textwidth} % width in minipage +\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} +\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} +\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt} +\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt} +\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} +\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} +\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} +\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} +\providecommand\marg[1]{% + {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}} +\providecommand\oarg[1]{% + {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}} +\providecommand\parg[1]{% + {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}} +\def\oc@scan#1{% + \ifx\oc@bslash#1% + \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else + \ifcat a\noexpand#1% + #1\let\next\oc@scan\else + \ifx\oc@percent#1% + \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}% + \else + #1\let\next\egroup + \fi\fi\fi\next} +\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}% +\def\oc@verb#1{% + \catcode`#1\active + \uccode`\~`#1% + \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}} +\begingroup + \obeyspaces% + \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\ + /catcode`/\/active + /catcode`<=/catcode`{% + /catcode`>=/catcode`}% + /catcode`/{/active% + /catcode`/}/active% + /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>% + /gdef/begmac< \begin{macrocode}>% + /gdef/obs>>% +/endgroup% +\begingroup + \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\ + \catcode`\\=13 + /catcode`/|=/catcode`/% + /catcode`/%=13 + /gdef/oldcomments{| + /makeatletter + /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials + /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs + /raggedright + /oc@verb/>| + /oc@verb/<| + /let\/oc@bslash + /let%/oc@percent + /obeylines + /parindent/z@ + /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font + /rmfamily + /hfuzz/maxdimen + } +/endgroup +\begingroup + \sloppy% + \obeylines% + \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{% + \ifvmode% + \def\commentline{#1}% + \ifx\commentline\oldc% + \end{oldcomments}% + \else% + \ifx\commentline\begmac% + \begin{macrocode}% + \else% + \leavevmode% + #1^^M% + \fi\fi% + \else% + {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M% + \fi}% +\endgroup% +% \@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part} +\def\partname{File} +\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{% + \relax + \clearpage + \docincludeaux + \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}% + \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux\relax + \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha + \else \@docinclude#1 \fi} +\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage +\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi +\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for +\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi +\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw +\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux +\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi +\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex +\let\PrintIndex\relax +\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges +%\let\PrintChanges\relax +\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary +\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary +\part{\currentfile}% + {\let\ttfamily\relax + \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}% +\DocInput{\currentfile}% +\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex +\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges +\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary +\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary +\clearpage +\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi +\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux} +\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw + \immediate\write\@indexfile + {\string\indexentry{#1}% + {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}% +\let\filesep\@empty +\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}} +\def\@aalph#1{% + \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or + j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or + t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or + D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or + N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or + X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi} +\def\docincludeaux{% + \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}% + \let\filekey\@gobble + \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{% + \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize + \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}% + \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% + \global\let\docincludeaux\relax + \gdef\@oddfoot{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax + File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} % + \else + \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}% + File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} % + Date: \filedate\ % + Version \fileversion + \fi + \hfill\thepage}% + \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% +\def\task#1#2{} +% ``Change History'' in TOC +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\gdef\envname{environment} +\gdef\envsname{environments} +\gdef\Envsname{Environments} +\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% + \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} +%\def\generalname{General} +\gdef\generalname{} +\or\relax +\gdef\envname{environnement} +\gdef\envsname{environnements} +\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} +\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% + \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} +%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} +\gdef\generalname{} +\fi +\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI +\let\sv@glossary@prologue\glossary@prologue +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Change History}} +\or\relax +\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Historique des modifications}} +\fi +%% redefine \glossaryentry +\def\nouse#1{\mbox{}} +%%% +% morefloats.sty ... +% \iffalse +%% This is morefloats.sty as of 27-July-1990 +%% Don Hosek, Quixote +% \fi +% +% The task at hand is to increase \LaTeX's current limit of 18 unprocessed +% floats in memory at once to 36. An examination of latex.tex reveals that +% this is accomplished by allocating an insert register for each unprocessed +% float. A quick check of lplain.lis reveals that there is room, in fact, +% for 230 additional unprocessed floats, but \TeX's main memory would be +% exhausted long before that happened. +% +% First we allocate the additional insert registers needed: +\newinsert\bx@S +\newinsert\bx@T +\newinsert\bx@U +\newinsert\bx@V +\newinsert\bx@W +\newinsert\bx@X +\newinsert\bx@Y +\newinsert\bx@Z +\newinsert\bx@AA +\newinsert\bx@BB +\newinsert\bx@CC +\newinsert\bx@DD +\newinsert\bx@EE +\newinsert\bx@FF +\newinsert\bx@GG +\newinsert\bx@HH +\newinsert\bx@II +\newinsert\bx@JJ +\newinsert\bx@KK +\newinsert\bx@LL +\newinsert\bx@MM +\newinsert\bx@NN +\newinsert\bx@OO +\newinsert\bx@PP +\newinsert\bx@QQ +\newinsert\bx@RR +\newinsert\bx@SS +\newinsert\bx@TT +\newinsert\bx@UU +\newinsert\bx@VV +\newinsert\bx@WW +\newinsert\bx@XX +\newinsert\bx@YY +\newinsert\bx@ZZ +\newinsert\bx@AAA +\newinsert\bx@BBB +% +% That accomplished, the next step is to define the macro \verb+\@freelist+ +% which is merely a list of the box registers each preceded by \verb+\@elt+. +% This approach allows processing of the list to be done far more efficiently. +% A similar approach is used by Mittelbach \& Sch\"opf's \texttt{doc.sty}~\cite{doc} to +% keep track of control sequences which should not be indexed. +\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E + \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J + \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N + \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R + \@elt\bx@S\@elt\bx@T\@elt\bx@U\@elt\bx@V + \@elt\bx@W\@elt\bx@X\@elt\bx@Y\@elt\bx@Z + \@elt\bx@AA\@elt\bx@BB\@elt\bx@CC\@elt\bx@DD + \@elt\bx@EE\@elt\bx@FF\@elt\bx@GG\@elt\bx@HH + \@elt\bx@II\@elt\bx@JJ\@elt\bx@KK\@elt\bx@LL + \@elt\bx@MM\@elt\bx@NN\@elt\bx@OO\@elt\bx@PP + \@elt\bx@QQ\@elt\bx@RR\@elt\bx@SS\@elt\bx@TT + \@elt\bx@UU\@elt\bx@VV\@elt\bx@WW\@elt\bx@XX + \@elt\bx@YY\@elt\bx@ZZ\@elt\bx@AAA\@elt\bx@BBB} +\makeatother +%%% +\EnableCrossrefs +\CodelineIndex +% \PageIndex +% \RecordChanges +\input{minitoc.pre} +\providecommand{\capstart}{\empty} +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\usepackage{fancybox} +% \usepackage[english]{keystroke} % ERRORS +\or\relax +\froff\usepackage{fancybox}\fron +% \usepackage[french]{keystroke} % ERRORS +\fi +% +%%%% FANCYHDR +% \usepackage{fancyhdr} +%%%% FANCYHDR +\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% + \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} +\providecommand{\hyperlink}[2]{\empty} +\providecommand{\hypertarget}[2]{\empty} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \makeatletter +% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble +% \string#1\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}% +% \@esphack} +% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\main}% +% \@esphack} +% \def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{% +% \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil +% \def\@tempb{ }% +% \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa +% \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}% +% \else +% \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax +% \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}% +% \else +% \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar +% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}% +% \fi}% +% \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax +% \@tempc +% \fi} + \makeatletter + \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{% + #1\actualchar + {\string\ttfamily\space#1} + (\envname)% + \encapchar \string\main}% + \special@index{\Envsname\levelchar{% + \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar + \string\main}\@esphack} + \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack + {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}% + \@esphack} + \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack + \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} + (\envname)\encapchar \string\usage}% + \index{Envsname\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar + \string\usage}\@esphack} +% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{} +% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{} +\gdef\main#1{\textsf{#1}} +\gdef\usage#1{\textit{#1}} +% \gdef\hyperpage#1{\textbf{#1}} + \makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% NEW ENV + \makeatletter + \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}% + \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}% + } +% + \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack + {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}% + \@esphack} + \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}% + \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}% + } +% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{} +% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{} +\let\ohyperpage\hyperpage +\gdef\main#1{\textbf{#1}} +\gdef\usage#1{\textsf{#1}} +\gdef\hyperpage#1{\textit{\ohyperpage{#1}}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\ifcase\LANG\relax + \includecomment{ENGLISH} + \excludecomment{FRENCH} + \typeout{ENGLISH DOC} +\or\relax + \excludecomment{ENGLISH} + \includecomment{FRENCH} + \typeout{FRENCH DOC} +\else\relax + \includecomment{ENGLISH} + \excludecomment{FRENCH} + \typeout{BAD LANGUAGE: ENGLISH DOC BY DEFAULT} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1} +\def\ABK{\penalty-1\xspace} +\def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} +\def\NC{\penalty-1\hspace{2em}\P~} +\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage +\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{% + \clearpage + {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}% + } +\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage +\interfootnotelinepenalty=9999 +\let\svfinalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits +\finalhyphendemerits=\maxdimen +\lefthyphenmin=3 +\righthyphenmin=3 +%%% pb \envname +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\gdef\envname{environment} +\gdef\envsname{environments} +\gdef\Envsname{Environments} +\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% + \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} +%\def\generalname{General} +\gdef\generalname{} +\or\relax +\gdef\envname{environnement} +\gdef\envsname{environnements} +\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} +\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% + \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} +%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} +\gdef\generalname{} +\fi +%%% fixed notes +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~and~\texttt{o} are the letter~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~is the zero digit.} +\or\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~et~\texttt{o} sont la lettre~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~est le chiffre zéro.} +\fi +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Spoken in Acadia and some parts of the south +of the USA, like Louisiane.} +\or\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Parlée en Acadie et dans certaines parties du +sud des États-Unis, comme la Louisiane; voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Français_cadien}\,.} +\fi +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{By \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) and the +\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. See the \upack{Farsi\TeX} site at~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}} +\or\relax +\froff\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{Par \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) et le +\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. Voir le site de \upack{Farsi\TeX} à~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}\fron +\fi +\ifx\KOMAScript\undefined% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\KOMAScript}{\textsf{K\kern.05em O\kern.05em M\kern.05em A\kern.1em-\kern.1em Script}} +\fi +\ifx\PLaTeX\undefined +\makeatletter +\DeclareRobustCommand\PLaTeX{% after latex.dtx + P\kern-.08em L\kern-.36em + {\setbox0\hbox{T}% + \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{% + \csname S@\f@size\endcsname + \fontsize\sf@size\z@ + \math@fontsfalse\selectfont + A} + \vss}% + }% + \kern-.15em + \TeX\@}% +\makeatother +\fi +\def\PLaTeXe{P\LaTeXe} +\def\quocngu{Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}} +%%%% Strings by language +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUAGE}} +\def\OFFSET{\mbox{OFFSET}} +\def\NB{\mbox{NUMBER}} +\def\NNN{\mbox{LINE}} +\def\PREPA{\mbox{PREPARATION}} +\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASS}} +\def\INAME{\mbox{INTERNAL\_NAME}} +\def\SEQ{\mbox{SEQUENCE}} +\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NEW\_TITLE}} +\def\FILE{\mbox{FILE}} +\def\CTR{\mbox{COUNTER}} +\def\VAL{\mbox{VALUE}} +\def\EXTEN{\mbox{EXTENSION}} +\def\STRING{\mbox{STRING}} +\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMAND}} +\def\PACK{\mbox{PACK}} +\or\relax +\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUE}} +\def\OFFSET{\mbox{DÉPLACEMENT}} +\def\NB{\mbox{NOMBRE}} +\def\NNN{\mbox{LIGNE}} +\def\PREPA{\mbox{PRÉPARATION}} +\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASSE}} +\def\INAME{\mbox{NOM\_INTERNE}} +\def\SEQ{\mbox{SÉQUENCE}} +\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NOUVEAU\_TITRE}} +\def\FILE{\mbox{FICHIER}} +\def\CTR{\mbox{COMPTEUR}} +\def\VAL{\mbox{VALEUR}} +\def\EXTEN{\mbox{SUFFIXE}} +\def\STRING{\mbox{CHAÎNE}} +\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMANDE}} +\def\PACK{\mbox{PAQUETAGE}} +\fi +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% On float pages, push the floats to the top +\makeatletter +\setlength{\@fptop}{\topskip} +\addtolength{\@fptop}{-10pt} +\setlength{\@fpsep}{1.5\baselineskip plus 0fil} +\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fill} +\makeatother +\usepackage{dblaccnt} % here! +\def\magicminitoc{\columnwidth=\linewidth\null\hfilneg\hspace*{-\itemindent}\hspace*{-\leftmargin}\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\minitoc\hfill\null} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newsavebox{\Citname}% See TLC2 p 849 +\newenvironment{Citation}[1]% + {\sbox\Citname{#1}\unskip\noindent}% + {\null\hspace*{\fill}\nolinebreak[1]% + \quad\hspace*{\fill}% + \finalhyphendemerits=0\relax + \usebox{\Citname}} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newsavebox{\BMTC} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Load hypernat.sty to compress citations; beware to the catcode of ``:''. +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{} +\or\relax +\froff\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}\fron +\fi +\begin{document} +\pagestyle{headings} +% \setcounter{lofdepth}{2} +% \mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2} +\raggedbottom +\addtolength{\marginparsep}{.5em}%ESSAI +\setlength{\marginparpush}{1.0ex}% +% % FANCYHDR +% \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% +% \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} +% \pagestyle{fancy} +% \fancyhf{} % RAZ +% %\newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\marginparwidth}\addtolength{\fancyoff}{\marginparsep} +% \newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\leftmargin} +% \fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{\fancyoff} +% \fancyhead[RO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage} +% \fancyhead[RE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage} +% \fancyhead[LO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark} +% \fancyhead[LE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark} +% \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.4pt} +% \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt} +% \addtolength{\headheight}{2pt} +% % FANCYHDR +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\let\fron\relax +\let\froff\relax +\selectlanguage{english}\nonfrenchspacing + \def\reftextfaceafter {on the \reftextvario{facing}{next} page}% + \def\reftextfacebefore{on the \reftextvario{facing}{preceding} page}% + \def\reftextafter {on the \reftextvario{next}{following} page}% + \def\reftextbefore {on the \reftextvario{page before}{preceding page}}% + \def\reftextcurrent {on \reftextvario{this}{this} page}% +%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}% + \def\reftextfaraway#1{on page~\pageref{#1}}% + \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{on pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}% + \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} to~\ref{#2}}% +\or\relax +\fron\selectlanguage{french}\frenchspacing + \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Liste des figures}% + \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Liste des tableaux}% + \renewcommand\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Fig.) + \renewcommand\tablename{{\scshape Tableau}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Tab.) + \def\reftextfaceafter {page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}% + \def\reftextfacebefore{page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}% + \def\reftextafter {page suivante}% + \def\reftextbefore {page pr\'ec\'edente}% + \def\reftextcurrent {sur cette page}% +%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}% + \def\reftextfaraway#1{page~\pageref{#1}}% + \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}% + \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} \`a~\ref{#2}}% +\fi +%% small in index +\let\svtheindex\theindex +%% preface of index + \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}% + \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}% +\ifcase\LANG\relax +\long\def\Indexhead{In this index, italic style numbers (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) are page numbers +(and hyperlinks, thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), normal roman numbers +(123) are code line +references for usage, bold roman numbers (\textbf{123}) are code line references for definitions; +colored numbers in square brackets, like this:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc}, are bibliographic references, eventually +sorted and compressed. + +The names of commands, environments, files, suffixes, options, features, messages identifiers\,\footnote{The +messages identifiers appear in the right margin of the text, near the points of usage.}, and languages, +are in \texttt{typewriter} font +(\textbf{\texttt{bold}} for default options or the default language). +The names of tools, packages and classes are in \textsf{sans serif} font. +The people names are in \textrm{roman} for the first names, in \textsc{Small Caps} for the family names, +separated by a comma, the +family name first\,\footnote{For some oriental names (like japanese, korean, vietnamese or indian names), +it is sometimes difficult to know which is the first or the last +name.}, like in ``\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie'' in the index.% + +Some commands (like the internal names of language specific letters) are not indexed. + +\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}} +% +\par\bigskip}% +\or\relax +\long\def\Indexhead{Dans cet index, les nombres en italique (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) sont des numéros de pages +(et des hyperliens, grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), +les nombres en fonte romaine normale (123) sont des références à~des lignes de code d'utilisation, +les nombres en fonte romaine grasse (\textbf{123}) sont des références à~des lignes de code de définition; +les nombres colorés entre crochets carrés, comme ceci:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc-fr}, sont des références bibliographiques, +éventuellement triées et compressées. + +Les noms des commandes, environnements, fichiers, suffixes, options, dispositifs, identificateurs de messages\,\footnote{Les +identificateurs de messages apparaissent dans la marge droite du texte, près des points d'utilisation.} et +langues sont en fonte de \texttt{machine à~écrire} (\textbf{\texttt{grasse}} pour les options et la langue par défaut). +Les noms des outils, des paquetages et des classes sont en fonte \textsf{sans empattement}. +Les noms de personnes sont en \textrm{romain} pour les prénoms, en \textsc{Petites Capitales} +pour les noms de familles, séparés par +une virgule, le nom de famille en premier\,\footnote{Pour certains noms orientaux (par exemple, japonais, coréens, +vietnamiens ou indiens), il est parfois difficile de savoir quel est le prénom ou le nom de famille.}, +comme dans «~\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie~» dans l'index.% + +Certaines commandes (comme les noms internes de lettres spécifiques de certaines langues) ne sont pas indexées. + +\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}} +% +\par\bigskip}% +\fi +\makeatletter + \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\hspace*{15pt}}% + \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\hspace*{30pt}}% +\makeatother +%% \def\theindex{\svtheindex\small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}\setlength{\columnsep}{45pt}\sloppy} +\makeatletter +\renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \columnsep=2.1em% + \def\item{\@idxitem{0}\relax}% + \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\relax\hspace*{15pt}}% + \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\relax\hspace*{30pt}}% + \begin{multicols}{2}[\chapter*{\indexname}\Indexhead][10\baselineskip]% + \mtcaddchapter[\indexname]% + \@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}% + \small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}% + \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% + \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}% + \setlength{\columnsep}{2.1em}% + \sloppy\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\thispagestyle{plain}\pagestyle{myheadings}\def\item{\@idxitem{0}}% +%% \raggedcolumns + \setcounter{collectmore}{-1}% Not perfect, but acceptable. + \raggedbottom}% + {\end{multicols}} +\makeatother +\nonfrenchspacing +\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\mtcsetformat{minilof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\mtcsetformat{minilot}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\raggedbottom +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\^^?=11} + \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} + \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1} + \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight} + \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt} + \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}% + \markboth{Index}{Index}% + Numbers written in italic refer to the page + where the corresponding entry is described; + numbers underlined refer to the + code line of the + definition; numbers in roman refer to the + code lines + where the entry is used.} + \DocInput{minitoc.dtx} + \clearpage +%% \begin{SMOOTH} + \xspaceskip=0.6em plus 0.1em minus .2em % tiny extensible +\def\pfill{\unskip\hspace*{1ex}\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak + \dotfil\hspace*{1ex}\ignorespaces}% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% \PrintChanges +% \end{RaggedRight} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \end{SMOOTH} + \flushbottom + \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\citeindexfalse}{} + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} + \mtcsetrules{minitoc}{on} + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.5ex}\relax\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.ex]\raggedcolumns}% + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\relax\vspace{-1.5ex}}% + \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}% + \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}% + \setlength{\awidth}{\textwidth} + \addtolength{\awidth}{-1pt} +% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxrule} +% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxsep} +% \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex} + \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-1\baselineskip\kern.5ex} + \makeatletter\savebox{\BMTC}{\relax{\begin{minipage}[t]{\awidth}\minitoc[l]\end{minipage}}}\makeatother% + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}% + \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}% + \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}% + \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}% + \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[0] + \PrintIndex + \end{mtchideinmaintoc} + \AtEndDocument{\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}} + \mtcfixindex[chapter] +\end{document} +% +% \fi +% +% \CheckSum{0} +% +% \CharacterTable +% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +% +% +% \lefthyphenmin=3 +% \righthyphenmin=3 +% \hyphenation{Mittelbach} +% \hyphenation{Jackowski} +% \hyphenation{Impatient} +% \hyphenation{make-index} +% \hyphenation{hyper-link} +% +% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty} +% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input} +% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle} +% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa} +% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue} +% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum} +% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin} +% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup} +% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\egroup} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist} +% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endinput,\endtrivlist} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global} +% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet} +% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcase} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item} +% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\ignorespaces,\index,\item} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower} +% \DoNotIndex{\let,\llap,\lower} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing} +% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage\nonfrenchspacing} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc} +% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\raggedleft,\rm,\sc} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut} +% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\small,\space,\string,\strut} +% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt} +% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@} +% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\z@} +% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary} +% \DoNotIndex{\`,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary} +% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\markboth,\mathcode} +% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\mathcode} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox} +% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle} +% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\raise,\rangle} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb} +% \DoNotIndex{\section,\TeX,\underline,\verb} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar} +% \DoNotIndex{\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar} +% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]} +% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode} +% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@} +% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q} +% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H} +% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z} +% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0} +% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\makeatletter,\makeatother} +% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother} +% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined} +% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc} +% \DoNotIndex{\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc} +% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode} +% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifmmode} +% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting} +% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\newtoks} +% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf} +% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse} +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault} +% \DoNotIndex{\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault} +% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault} +% \DoNotIndex{\*} +% \DoNotIndex{\ } +% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\MessageBreak} +% ^^A lettres de l'hébreu +% \DoNotIndex{\alef,\ayin,\bet,\finalmem,\finalnun,\kaf,\lamed,\mem,\nun,\resh,\shin,\tav,\tet,\vav,\yod} +% ^^A lettres hebrew2 +% \DoNotIndex{\hebalef} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebayin} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebbet} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalmem} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalnun} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebkaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\heblamed} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebmem} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebnun} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebresh} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebshin} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebtav} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebtet} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebvav} +% \DoNotIndex{\hebyod} +% ^^A lettres arabi +% \DoNotIndex{\T} +% \DoNotIndex{\alef} +% \DoNotIndex{\alefhamza} +% \DoNotIndex{\dal} +% \DoNotIndex{\fa} +% \DoNotIndex{\ha} +% \DoNotIndex{\jeem} +% \DoNotIndex{\kaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\lam} +% \DoNotIndex{\meem} +% \DoNotIndex{\qaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\ra} +% \DoNotIndex{\seen} +% \DoNotIndex{\sheen} +% \DoNotIndex{\waw} +% \DoNotIndex{\yahamza} +% ^^A lettres bulgares +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres du cyrillique +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyro} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyry} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres farsi3 +% \DoNotIndex{\alef} +% \DoNotIndex{\dal} +% \DoNotIndex{\fa} +% \DoNotIndex{\ha} +% \DoNotIndex{\jeem} +% \DoNotIndex{\kaf} +% \DoNotIndex{\lam} +% \DoNotIndex{\meem} +% \DoNotIndex{\nun} +% \DoNotIndex{\ra} +% \DoNotIndex{\seen} +% \DoNotIndex{\sheen} +% \DoNotIndex{\taa} +% \DoNotIndex{\waw} +% \DoNotIndex{\ya} +% ^^A lettres mongolb +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyry} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres russianb +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyro} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres serbianc +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} +% ^^A lettres ukrainian +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP} +% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} +% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu} +% ^^A not true macros +% \DoNotIndex{\PTC@,\MTC@,\STC@} +% +% \GetFileInfo{minitoc.dtx} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \title{{\Large The \textsf{minitoc} package}\thanks{This document +% corresponds to \textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}} +% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, et al.} +% \or\relax +% \title{{\Large Le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}}\thanks{Ce document +% correspond à~\textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, daté \filedate.}} +% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, et al.} +% \fi +% \makeatletter +% \let\SVtitle\@title +% \let\SVdate\@date +% \let\SVauthor\@author +% +% \def\@maketitle{% +% \newpage +% \null +% \vskip 2em% +% \begin{center}% +% \let \footnote \thanks +% {\LARGE \SVtitle \par}% +% \vskip 1.5em% +% {\large +% \lineskip .5em% +% \begin{tabular}[t]{c}% +% \SVauthor +% \end{tabular}\par}% +% \vskip 1em% +% {\large \SVdate}% +% \end{center}% +% \par +% \vskip 1.5em} +% \makeatother +% \maketitle +% \doparttoc +% ^^A \dopartlof \dopartlot +% \dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot +% {\parskip=0pt +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Summary}{0}}{} +% \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents} +% \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{List of figures} +% \renewcommand{\listtablename}{List of tables} +% \or\relax +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Sommaire}{0}}{} +% \fi +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \makeatletter +% \let\l@chaptersom\l@chapter +% \makeatother +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \tableofcontents +% \mtcaddchapter +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \listoffigures +% \mtcaddchapter +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +% \listoftables +% \mtcaddchapter +% } +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% \let\svmacro\macro +% \let\svendmacro\endmacro +% \let\svenvironment\environment +% \let\svendenvironment\endenvironment +% ^^A \renewenvironment{macro}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeMacro{#1}}{\egroup} +% ^^A \renewenvironment{environment}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeEnv{#1}}{\egroup} +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter*{About this document\markboth{About this document}{About this document}} +% \markboth{About this document}{About this document} +% \mtcaddchapter[About this document] +% This document is rather thick, but please, be not afraid: you do not need to read every page. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The most useful chapters are in the first part (``{User's Manual}'', page~\pageref{p+UM}): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item the chapter~``The \upack{minitoc} package'', page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, describes the essential commands to use +% the package; +% \item the chapter ``Frequently Asked Questions'', page~\pageref{FAQ}, may help you to solve some +% specific problems; +% \item the chapter ``Memento'', page~\pageref{c+memento}, is a set of tables to be used as a +% remainder of the commands of this package; +% \item the chapter ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, gives the code of some documents showing the +% basic usage of the \upack{minitoc} package and some interesting situations; +% \item the chapter ``Messages'', page~\pageref{c+messages}, is certainly boring, but it should be searched if you get some +% warning or error messages from the \upack{minitoc} package, because it explains them and also the informative +% messages (table~\vref{t+allmess} will help you to find the meaning of a message); +% \item the chapter ``Jargon'', page~\pageref{c+jargon}, attemps to explain +% most of the technical terms used here; +% \item the chapter ``Installation'', page~\pageref{c+installation}, describes +% all the files included in the distribution of the package; +% \item the chapter ``Postface'', page~\pageref{c+postface}, +% gives an abbreviated history of the package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item The second part, ``Implementation'', page~\pageref{p+ID}, is much more technical; you can read it if you are +% interested in the details of the coding of the package. +% The chapter ``Language definition (\suffix{.mld}) and object +% (\suffix{.mlo}) files'', page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, may be useful if you are interested by some language. +% This chapter contains many maps and illustrations. +% \item The third part, ``Complements'', page~\pageref{p+complements}, contains a bibliography, a detailed history of +% the package, a list of acknowlegments, and an index. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \bigskip +% +% For this document, I have used: +% \begin{itemize} +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{% +% \item a short table of contents (summary), with the \com{shorttoc} command from my \pack{shorttoc} +% package~\cite{shorttoc}, displaying only parts and chapters;}{\relax} +% \item a main table of contents (\com{tableofcontents}), with a maximum depth~(6); +% \item a main list of figures (\com{listoffigures}) and a main list of tables (\com{listoftables}); +% \item for each part, a table of contents displaying only the chapters (\com{parttoc} with +% \dcnt{parttocdepth} equal to~1); +% ^^A \item for each part, a list of figures (\com{partlof}) and a list of tables (\com{partlot}) when useful; +% \item for each chapter, a complete table of contents (\com{minitoc} with \dcnt{minitocdepth} equal to~6); +% \item for each chapter, a list of figures (\com{minilof}) and a list of tables (\com{minilot}) when useful; +% \item customized parameters for the layout of the mini-tables; as the PDF version of the documentation uses hyperlinks +% (with the help of the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}), +% these mini-tables should help you to navigate within the document; +% \item some hyperlinks, placed in the right margin, contain a message identifier; the link points to the description +% of the message in the ``Messages'' chapter; try this one:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001} +% \item some flags, with hyperlinks to articles (mainly in Wikipedia) about countries or languages; +% \item the \pack{calc} package~\cite{calc} to make some computations with comfort; +% \ifBT\relax +% \item the \pack{booktabs} package~\cite{booktabs} to format the tables; +% \else\fi +% \item the \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} and \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} packages to document the code; +% \item many other packages to improve the presentation of the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \chapter*{À~propos de ce document\markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}} +% \markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document} +% \mtcaddchapter[À~propos de ce document] +% Ce document est assez épais, mais s'il vous plaît, n'en soyez pas effrayés: vous n'avez pas besoin de lire toutes +% les pages. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les chapitres les plus utiles sont dans la première partie («~{Manuel de l'utilisateur}~», page~\pageref{p+UM}): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item le chapitre~«~Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~», page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, décrit les commandes essentielles +% pour utiliser le paquetage; +% \item le chapitre «~Questions fréquemment posées~», page~\pageref{FAQ}, peut vous aider à~résoudre certains +% problèmes spécifiques; +% \item le chapitre «~Mémento~», page~\pageref{c+memento}, est un ensemble de tableaux à~utiliser +% comme aide-mémoire des commandes de ce paquetage; +% \item le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, donne le code de quelques documents montrant +% l'utilisation basique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et quelques situations intéressantes; +% \item le chapitre «~Messages~», page~\pageref{c+messages}, est certainement +% fastidieux, mais il faut le consulter lorsque vous recevez des messages d'avertissement ou d'erreur du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, parce qu'il les explique ainsi que les messages informatifs (le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} +% vous aidera à~trouver la signification d'un message); +% \item le chapitre «~Jargon~», +% page~\pageref{c+jargon}, essaye d'expliquer la plupart des termes techniques utilisés ici; +% \item le chapitre «~Installation~», +% page~\pageref{c+installation}, décrit tous les fichiers inclus dans la distribution du paquetage; +% \item le chapitre «~Postface~», page~\pageref{c+postface}, donne un historique abrégé du paquetage. +% \end{itemize} +% \item La deuxième partie, «~Implantation~», page~\pageref{p+ID}, est bien plus technique; vous pouvez la lire si vous êtes +% intéressés par les détails du codage du paquetage. +% Le chapitre «~Fichiers de définition (\suffix{.mld}) et objets (\suffix{.mlo}) de langue~», +% page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, peut être utile si vous êtes intéressés par une certaine langue. +% Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses cartes et illustrations. +% \item La troisième partie, «~Compléments~», page~\pageref{p+complements}, contient une bibliographie, un historique +% détaillé du paquetage, une liste des remerciements et un index. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \bigskip +% +% Pour ce document, j'ai utilisé: +% \begin{itemize} +% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{% +% \item une table des matières abrégée (sommaire), avec la commande \com{shorttoc} de mon +% paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}, n'affichant que les parties et chapitres;}{\relax} +% \item une table des matières principale (\com{tableofcontents}), avec une profondeur maximale~(6); +% \item une liste principale des figures (\com{listoffigures}) et une liste principale des tableaux +% (\com{listoftables}); +% \item pour chaque partie, une table des matières ne montrant que les chapitres (\com{parttoc} avec +% \dcnt{parttocdepth} égale à~1); +% ^^A \item pour chaque partie, une liste des figures (\com{partlof}) +% ^^A et une liste des tableaux (\com{partlot}) lorsque c'est utile; +% \item pour chaque chapitre, une table des matières complète (\com{minitoc} avec \dcnt{minitocdepth} égale à~6); +% \item pour chaque chapitre, une liste des figures (\com{minilof}) et une liste des tableaux (\com{minilot}) +% lorsque c'est utile; +% \item des paramètres adaptés pour la mise en page mini-tables; comme la version PDF de la documentation utilise +% des hyperliens, (à~l'aide du paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}), ces mini-tables devraient +% vous aider à~vous déplacer dans le document; +% \item quelques hyperliens, placés dans la marge de droite, contiennent un identificateur de message; le lien +% renvoie à~la description du message dans le chapitre «~Messages~»; +% \item quelques drapeaux avec des hyperliens vers des articles (principalement de Wikipedia) sur des pays ou des langues; +% essayez celui-ci:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001} +% \item le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} pour faire certains calculs plus confortablement; +% \ifBT\relax +% \item le paquetage \pack{booktabs}~\cite{booktabs} pour formater les tableaux; +% \else\fi +% \item les paquetages \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} et \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} pour documenter le code; +% \item de nombreux autres paquetages pour améliorer la présentation de la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \part{User's Manual}\label{p+UM} +% \or\relax +% \part{Manuel de l'utilisateur}\label{p+UM} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \parttoc +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty} +% ^^A \partlof +% ^^A \partlot +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{The \upack{minitoc} package}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc} +% \or\relax +% \frenchspacing +% \chapter{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc} +% \fi +% ^^A \pagestyle{headings} +% \minitoc +% \lsneed{5} +% \mtcskip +% \minilof +% \lsneed{5} +% \mtcskip +% \minilot +% \section{Introduction} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package, initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} and \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, has been +% almost completely redesigned by \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse). +% A summary of the evolution of this package is given in the chapter~\vref{c+postface}. +% This package creates a mini-table of contents +% (a ``minitoc''\,\footnote{The \upack{minitoc} package introduces +% its own jargon, explained in this document. +% It should not be too difficult, however, to learn and use; it will be used here, of course.})% +% at the beginning of each chapter of a document. +% It is also possible to have a mini-list of +% figures (a ``minilof'') and a mini-list of tables (a ``minilot''). +% The document class should of course define chapters +% (classes like \class{book} or \class{report}~\cite{classes}) or sections +% (classes like \class{article}\,\footnote{As the standard \class{proc} class~\cite{proc}, and the \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} and +% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews} classes, load the standard +% \class{article} class, these classes will be just considered as variants of the \class{article} class.})~\cite{classes}. +% Thus, this package should not be used with +% document classes without standard sectionning commands (like \class{letter}). +% When the document class defines a ``part'' sectionning level +% (i.e.,~classes like \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article}), +% you can create a ``partial'' table of contents +% (a ``parttoc'') at the beginning of each part of a document. +% It is also possible to have a partial list of figures (a ``partlof'') +% and a partial list of tables (a ``partlot''). +% When the document class has no \com{chapter} command +% but has a \com{section} command, you may use section +% level tables of contents (``secttocs'') at the beginning of each section; and you can also have section level +% lists of figures (``sectlofs'') or of tables (``sectlots''). +% +% All these tables (``minitocs'', ``partlots'', ``sectlofs'', etc.) are collectively referenced as ``mini-tables'' +% (or sometimes ``mini-lists''). +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, écrit initialement par \name{Nigel}{Ward} et \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, a été presque +% complètement reconstruit par \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse). +% Un résumé de l'évolution de ce paquetage est donné dans le chapitre~\vref{c+postface}. +% Ce paquetage crée une mini-table des matières (une «~minitoc~»\,\footnote{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% introduit son propre jargon, expliqué dans ce document. Il ne devrait, cependant, pas être trop difficile de +% l'apprendre et de l'utiliser; il sera évidemment utilisé ici.}) au début de chaque chapitre d'un document. +% Il est aussi possible d'avoir une +% mini-liste des figures (une «~minilot~») et une mini-liste des tableaux (une «~minilot~»). La classe de document +% devrait, bien sûr, définir des chapitres (classes telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}) ou des sections +% (classes telles que \class{article}\,\footnote{Puisque la classe standard \class{proc}~\cite{proc}, ainsi que les classes +% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} et \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}, chargent la classe +% standard \class{article}, ces classes seront simplement considérées comme des variantes de la classe \class{article}.})~\cite{classes}. +% Donc, ce paquetage ne devrait pas être utilisé avec des classes de document ne possédant pas les commandes de +% sectionnement standard (classes telles que \class{letter}). +% Lorsque la classe de document définit un niveau de sectionnement «~partie~» (c'est-à-dire des classes telles +% que \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}), vous pouvez créer une table des matières +% «~partielle~» (une «~parttoc~») au début de chaque partie d'un document. Il est aussi possible d'avoir une liste +% des figures partielle (une «~partlof~») et une liste des tableaux partielle (une «~partlot~») au début de chaque +% partie d'un document. Lorsque la classe de document ne possède pas de commande \com{chapter} mais a une +% commande \com{section}, vous pouvez utiliser des tables des matières au niveau section («~secttocs~») au +% début de chaque section; et vous pouvez aussi avoir des listes des figures («~sectlofs~») ou des tableaux («~sectlots~») +% au niveau section. +% +% Toutes ces tables («~minitocs~», «~partlofs~», «~sectlots~», etc.) sont collectivement référencées sous le terme de +% «~mini-tables~» (ou parfois «~mini-listes~»). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Important restrictions}\label{note+sectionning}% +% \textbf{Note}\virage: you cannot use chapter level and section level mini-tables in the same document. +% This restriction is intented to avoid documents with full of local +% tables of contents, lists of figures and tables at every sectionning level. +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Restrictions importantes}\label{note+sectionning}% +% \textbf{Note}\virage: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser des mini-tables au niveau chapitre et au niveau section dans +% le même document. Cette restriction est destinée à~éviter des documents pleins de mini-tables des matières, +% listes de figures et listes de tableaux locales à~chaque niveau de sectionnement. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: the commands relative +% to the part level are defined only if the document class defines \com{part}. +% The commands relative +% to the section level are defined only if the document class +% defines \com{section} but does not define \com{chapter}. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: les commandes relatives au niveau partie ne sont définies que si la classe de document +% définit \com{part}. +% Les commandes relatives au niveau section ne sont définies que si la classe de document définit \com{section} +% mais ne définit pas \com{chapter}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Version} +% The current version of this package is~\#61. You will find a resumed history of the package in the ``Postface'' +% chapter (chapter~\vref{c+postface}) and a more detailed history in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Version} +% La version courante de ce paquetage est~\#61. Vous trouverez un historique résumé de ce paquetage dans le +% chapitre «~Postface~» (chapitre~\vref{c+postface}) et un historique plus détaillé dans «~Historique des +% modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{License} +% This package must be distributed and/or may be modified under the +% conditions of the \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (as convenient) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% \begin{quote} +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} +% \end{quote} +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{} +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% But please don't bother me about hacked versions; they will not be supported. +% However, suggestions for corrections and reasoned improvements are welcome. +% \or\relax +% \section{Licence} +% Ce paquetage doit être distribué et/ou peut être modifié sous les conditions de la +% \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, soit la version~1.3 de cette licence soit (au choix) toute version +% ultérieure. La plus récente version de cette licence est dans +% \begin{quote}\froff +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} +% \end{quote} +% et la version~1.3 ou ultérieure fait partie de toutes les distributions de \LaTeX{} version 2003/12/01 ou +% ultérieure. +% +% Mais, s'il vous plaît, ne me parlez pas de versions bricolées; elles ne seront pas maintenues. +% Cependant, les suggestions de corrections et d'améliorations raisonnables sont les bienvenues. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Using the \upack{minitoc} package} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Loading the package and creating the mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Charger le paquetage et créer les mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\usepackage} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To use the \upack{minitoc} package, you must insert a command: +% \or\relax +% Pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, vous devez insérer une commande: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% in the preamble of the document\,\footnote{This command must +% be placed \emph{after} any modification done on the sectionning +% commands; if you modify some sectionning commands after loading the +% \upack{minitoc} package, this one might not work properly.}. +% The mini-table of contents will be in the chapter, +% after the \com{chapter} command, at the point of the \com{minitoc} +% command. The \com{minitoc} command may occur \emph{almost anywhere}\,\footnote{``Almost anywhere'' means +% ``in a normal place'', like between two paragraphs of normal text, or in a (wide enough) minipage, but not in a +% too strange position (like a marginal note or a footnote). Even a multicolumn or a floating environment can be used, +% but with care. But note that a minitoc can be rather long, if the chapter is complex and if you are asking for +% details with a high value for \dcnt{minitocdepth}. +% As an example, I~once used a \com{afterpage} command +% (\pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage}) to place the long +% minilof of chapter~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (so the minilof was forced to begin at the top of the next page).} inside a chapter. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Of course, it is better +% to put it at the beginning of the chapter, eventually after some introductory material. But you can also decide +% to put it at the end of the chapter. You should use the same conventions in all chapters. If you want to add the +% mini-table of contents for a chapter, you must use the sequence given in table~\vref{mtc+minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% dans le préambule du document\,\footnote{Cette commande doit être placée \emph{après} toute modification faite sur +% les commandes de sectionnement; si vous modifiez des commandes de sectionnement après le chargement du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, celui-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement.}. +% La mini-table des matières sera dans le chapitre, après la commande \com{chapter}, à~l'emplacement de la +% commande \com{minitoc}. La commande \com{minitoc} peut se placer \emph{presque +% n'importe~où}\,\footnote{<<~Presque n'importe~où~>> signifie <<~en un endroit normal~>>, comme entre deux alinéas +% de texte normal, ou dans une minipage (suffisamment large), mais pas dans une position trop bizarre (comme une +% note marginale ou infrapaginale). Même un environnement multi-colonnes ou flottant peut être utilisé, mais avec +% soin. Mais notez qu'une minitoc peut être assez longue, si le chapitre est complexe et si vous demandez des +% détails avec une valeur élevée de \dcnt{minitocdepth}. +% Par exemple, il m'est arrivé d'utiliser une commande \com{afterpage} (paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage}) +% pour placer la longue minilof du chapitre~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (pour forcer la minilof à~commencer en haut de la +% page suivante).} à~l'intérieur d'un chapitre. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début du chapitre, éventuellement +% après un texte introductif. Mais vous pouvez aussi décider de la placer à~la fin du chapitre. Vous devriez +% utiliser les mêmes conventions dans tous les chapitres. Si vous souhaitez ajouter la mini-table des matières pour +% un chapitre, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[ht] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc} +% \centering +% {\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \emph{or:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \ldots&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dominitoc}&&\\ +% \com{dominilof}&&\\ +% \com{dominilot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{minitoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&&\\ +% \com{minilof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&&\\ +% \com{minilot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[ht] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc} +% \centering +% {\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \emph{ou:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dominitoc}&&\\ +% \com{dominilof}&&\\ +% \com{dominilot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{minitoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&\\ +% \com{minilof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&\\ +% \com{minilot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}}% +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For each mini-table of contents, an auxiliary file will be +% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, +% where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter number. +% ``Absolute'' means that this number is unique, +% and always increasing from the first chapter\,\footnote{The concept of an ``absolute'' counter for the +% mini-tables has solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis}, +% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}.}. +% The suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} for mini-lists of figures and +% is \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} for mini-lists of tables. +% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and +% section~\vref{.8+3}). There are similar commands for mini-tables at the part or section level, depending on the +% document class. +% \or\relax +% Pour chaque mini-table des matières, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme +% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu du chapitre. «~Absolu~» signifie que ce numéro est +% unique, et croit toujours depuis le premier chapitre\,\footnote{Le concept d'un compteur <<~absolu~>> pour les +% mini-tables a résolu certains problèmes ténébreux, et aussi frappé d'obsolescence certaines commandes, telles que +% \com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}.}. +% Le suffixe est \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de figures et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} pour +% les mini-listes de tableaux. +% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les +% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). Il y a des commandes similaires aux +% niveaux partie ou section, selon la classe du document. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Preparing the mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Préparation des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands\,\footnote{The code of these \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} commands is directly derived from that of +% the \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.} +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, and \com{dominilot} (for mini-tables at the chapter level), +% take respectively the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} files, +% and cut slices from them to create the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes\,\footnote{Le code de ces commandes \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} est directement dérivé de celui du +% paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.} +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre, prennent +% respectivement les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}, +% et en +% prélèvent des tranches pour créer les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} +% et \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, and \com{dosectlot} (for mini-tables at the section level) +% and \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, and \com{dopartlot} (for mini-tables at the part level) are analog. +% +% The\virage{} \com{mtcprepare} command invokes (and replaces) all these preparation commands when they are available +% with the document class and if the adequate contents file exists. +% This command accepts also an optional argument to set the default position of the title +% for \emph{all} the mini-tables. +% +% All\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} the preparation commands are \emph{ignored} if the \com{nofiles} command is invoked +% in the preamble, to avoid to overwrite the mini-table auxiliary files. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% To\virage{} obtain a satisfactory result (i.e.,~non empty), please note that all these commands must +% \emph{imperatively be put before} any command analog to the \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures}, +% and \com{listoftables} commands, or their \verb|\fake...| siblings. +% +% It\virage{} is also \emph{strongly} recommended to put these commands \emph{before} any sectionning command producing an +% entry in the table of contents (for the \verb|\do...toc| commands), and \emph{before} +% any \com{caption}-like command +% producing an entry in the list of figures (for the \verb|\do...lof| commands) or in the list of tables +% (for the \verb|\do...lot|) commands; else disorder in the mini-tables might result. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Les commandes \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau section), +% et \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et \com{dopartlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau partie) sont +% analogues. +% +% La\virage{} commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque (et remplace) toutes ces commandes de préparation lorsqu'elles sont +% disponibles pour la classe du document et si le fichier de contenu adéquat existe. +% Cette commande accepte aussi un argument optionnel pour établir la position par défaut du titre +% pour \emph{toutes} les mini-tables. +% +% Toutes\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} les commandes de préparation sont \emph{ignorées} si +% la commande \com{nofiles} est invoquée dans le préambule, pour éviter d'écraser les fichiers auxiliaires des mini-tables. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Pour\virage{} obtenir un résultat satisfaisant (c'est-à-dire, non vide), veuillez noter que toutes ces commandes doivent +% \emph{impérativement être placées avant} toute commande analogue aux commandes \com{tableofcontents}, +% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}, ou leurs cousines \verb|\fake...|! +% +% Il\virage{} est aussi \emph{fortement} recommandé de placer ces commandes \emph{avant} toute commande de +% sectionnement produisant une entrée dans la table des matières (pour les commandes \verb|\do...toc|), et +% \emph{avant} toute commande analogue à~\com{caption} produisant une entrée dans la liste des figures (pour les +% commandes \verb|\do...lof|) ou dans la liste des tableaux (pour les commandes \verb|\do...lot|); sinon les +% mini-tables pourraient être dans le désordre. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Placing the mini-tables}\label{s+placing} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Placement des mini-tables}\label{s+placing} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcskip} command may be used to add a vertical +% skip between two mini-tables. Its height is +% \com{mtcskipamount} (equal to \com{bigskipamount} by default). +% \com{mtcskip} eliminates any immediate previous vertical +% skip, to not accumulate vertical space when a mini-table is +% empty and skipped by the \optd{checkfiles} option. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcskip} peut être utilisée pour ajouter un saut vertical entre deux mini-tables. Sa hauteur +% est \com{mtcskipamount} (égale à~\com{bigskipamount} par défaut). \com{mtcskip} élimine tout saut vertical +% qui précède immédiatement, afin de ne pas accumuler des espaces verticaux lorsqu'une mini-table est vide et donc +% ignorée par l'option \optd{checkfiles}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The section-level table of contents will be in the section, +% after the \com{section} command, at the point of the \com{secttoc} command. The \com{secttoc} command +% may occur \emph{almost anywhere} inside a section. It is often better to put it at the beginning of the section, +% or after some short introductory material. You should use the same conventions in all sections. If you want to add +% a~section-level table of contents for a section, you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières au niveau section sera dans la section, après la commande \com{section}, à~l'emplacement +% de la commande \com{secttoc}. La commande \com{secttoc} peut être placée \emph{presque n'importe~où} +% à~l'intérieur d'une section. Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début de la section, ou éventuellement +% après un texte introductif. Vous devriez utiliser les mêmes conventions dans toutes les sections. Si vous +% souhaitez ajouter la table des matières au niveau section pour une section, vous devez utiliser la séquence +% donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \emph{or:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlof}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{secttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{sectlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{sectlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[t!] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \emph{ou:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlof}&&\\ +% \com{dosectlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{secttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{sectlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{sectlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For each section-level table of contents, an auxiliary file will be +% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, +% where \meta{N} is the absolute section number. +% The suffix is \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} for section-level lists of figures and +% is \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} for section-level lists of tables. +% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and +% section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \or\relax +% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau section, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme +% \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section. +% Le suffixe est \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} pour les +% listes de figures au niveau section et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau section. +% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les +% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\usepackage} +% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{rem+FB}As\imess{W0056} floats (figures and tables) could drift\footnote{% +% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}% +% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. +% There is a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places +% relative to the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship +% that slips its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}} +% somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and +% sectlots can be rather strange. In order to have a better +% behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the +% \opt{insection} option in the \com{usepackage} command: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}| +% \end{verse} +% if you want more consistent sectlofs and sectlots. +% The \opt{insection} option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its \optp{verbose}{placeins} +% and \optp{section}{placeins} options. +% Sometimes, it might be necessary to use the \com{FloatBarrier} command of this package to correctly place the +% figure or table and have a correct mini-table. +% The options \optp{above}{placeins} or \optp{below}{placeins} options should not be used, because they allow +% floats to drift above +% or below a \com{FloatBarrier} (or a section limit): the barrier becomes ``porous'' upwards\footnote{But a float +% can not drift upwards beyond the top of the current page.}~($\uparrow$) or +% downwards~($\downarrow$), or both~($\updownarrow$). The \optp{section}{placeins} option makes a more ``watertight'' +% barrier~($\equiv$). This is illustrated by the figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% The \pack{placeins} package, by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, is available +% on CTAN archives; note that the file \xfile{placeins.sty} contains its own +% documentation, with a copy in \xfile{placeins.txt}. You need a version whose date is at least 2005/04/18. +% \begin{figure}[p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{section}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{below}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \caption{Float barriers}\label{f+barrier} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{figure} +% +% Since version~\#45, this option also loads the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput} +% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}) to force a float to appear \emph{after} its reference. +% The \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options of the \pack{placeins} package are no more used, +% because they allowed the floats to move out of the section. +% +% In\virage{} all cases, it is \emph{strongly} recommended to verify the position of +% the floats and, if necessary, to look at the messages of the \pack{placeins} package +% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% The placement of floats is a very complex problem, so some manual intervention may be necessary, like the use +% of the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} or, better, of the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow}. +% \or\relax +% \label{rem+FB}Comme\imess{W0056} les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) pourraient +% dériver\,\footnote{\selectlanguage{english}% +% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}% +% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. There is +% a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places relative to +% the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship that slips +% its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}} +% quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression +% du texte de la section, les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur +% comportement de ces mini-tables, il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option +% \opt{insection} dans la commande \com{usepackage}: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}| +% \end{verse} +% si vous désirez des sectlofs et sectlots plus cohérentes. +% L'option \opt{insection} charge le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}. +% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} ou \optp{below}{placeins} ne devraient pas être utilisées, car elles permettent aux éléments +% flottants de dériver au-dessus ou en dessous d'une \com{FloatBarrier} (ou d'une limite de section): +% la barrière devient «~poreuse~» vers l'amont\,\footnote{Mais un élément flottant ne peut pas dériver vers +% l'amont au-delà du sommet de la page courante.}~($\uparrow$) ou vers l'aval~($\downarrow$), ou dans les +% deux sens~($\updownarrow$). +% Il peut même être nécessaire d'utiliser la commande \com{FloatBarrier} de ce paquetage pour placer +% correctement la figure ou la table et avoir une mini-table correcte. +% L'option \optp{section}{placeins} place une barrière plus étanche~($\equiv$). +% Ceci est illustré par la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% Le paquetage \pack{placeins}, de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, est disponible sur les archives CTAN; +% notez que le fichier \xfile{placeins.sty} +% contient sa propre documentation, dont une copie est dans \xfile{placeins.txt}. Il vous faut une version plus +% récente que 2005/04/18. +% \begin{figure}[p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{section}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{above}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% +% \bigskip +% +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\ +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ +% \midrule +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \caption{Barrières pour les flottants}\label{f+barrier} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{figure} +% +% Depuis la version~\#45, cette option charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} +% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}) pour forcer un élément flottant à~n'apparaître qu'\emph{après} sa référence. +% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins} du paquetage \pack{placeins} ne sont plus utilisées, +% car elles permettaient aux éléments de sortir de la section. +% +% Dans\virage{} tous les cas, il est \emph{fortement} recommandé de +% vérifier la position des éléments flottants et, si nécessaire, de regarder les messages du paquetage \pack{placeins} +% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Le placement des éléments flottants est un problème très complexe, donc une intervention manuelle peut être nécessaire, +% comme l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float}, ou, mieux, du paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want to add the partial table of contents for a part, +% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtc+parttoc}. +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez ajouter une table des matières partielle pour une partie, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée +% dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+parttoc}. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[t!] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \emph{or:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{doparttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlof}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{parttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{partlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \com{partlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[t] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc} +% \centering{\small\ttfamily +% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ +% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ +% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \emph{ou:}&&\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{doparttoc}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlof}&&\\ +% \com{dopartlot}&&\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ +% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ +% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\ +% \com{parttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{partlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \com{partlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ +% \ldots&&\\ +% \end{tabularx}}} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For each partial table of contents, an auxiliary file will be +% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, +% where \meta{N} is the absolute part number. +% The suffix is \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} for partial lists of figures and +% is \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} for partial lists of tables. +% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short +% extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \or\relax +% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau partie, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme +% \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie. +% Le suffixe est \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} pour les +% listes de figures au niveau partie et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau partie. +% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les +% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: the user is responsible of asking or not asking +% a mini-table (mini-toc, -lof or -lot) for some chapter. Asking a minilof for a +% chapter without any figure would result in an empty and ugly mini-list +% of figures (i.e.,~the title and two horizontal rules). +% He is also responsible of requiring or not requiring +% a partial toc (lof or lot) for some part. Asking a partlof for a +% part without any figure would result in an empty and ugly part +% list of figures (i.e.,~the title alone on a page). Analogous remarks +% apply to section-level mini-tables (secttoc, sectlof, and +% sectlot) and to the part-level mini-tables (parttoc, partlof, and partlot). +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note}\virage: l'utilisateur est responsable de demander ou non une mini-table (mini-lof, -lof ou -lof) pour +% un certain chapitre. Demander une minilof pour un chapitre sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une mini-liste +% des figures vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre et deux filets horizontaux). Il est aussi responsable de demander +% ou non une table des matières partielle (ou une liste partielle des figures ou des tableaux) pour une certaine +% partie. Demander une partlot pour une partie sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une liste partielle des figures +% vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre seul sur une page). Des remarques analogues s'appliquent aux mini-tables +% au niveau section (secttoc, sectlof et sectlot) et aux mini-tables au niveau partie (parttoc, partlof et partlot). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% But since version \#35, empty mini-tables are just ignored and +% this problem should disappear in normal circumstances. Nevertheless, it is recommended +% to put no \com{minitoc} command in +% a chapter without sections and no \com{minilof} or +% \com{minilot} command in a chapter without figures or tables. +% The \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package option +% (default) skips empty mini-tables (with a note in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file); +% the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option restores +% the old behaviour (empty mini-tables are displayed). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Mais depuis la version~\#35, les mini-tables vides sont simplement ignorées et ce problème devrait disparaître +% dans des circonstances normales. Néanmoins, il est recommandé de ne pas mettre de commande \com{minitoc} dans un +% chapitre sans sections ni de commande \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot} dans un chapitre sans figures ou sans +% tableaux. L'option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir la section~\vref{s+placing}), active par +% défaut, saute les mini-tables vides (avec un note dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}); l'option de paquetage +% \opt{nocheckfiles} rétablit l'ancien comportement (les mini-tables vides sont imprimées). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, the mini-tables and partial tables of contents +% contain only references higher and to sections and +% subsections. The counters \dcnt{parttocdepth}, +% \dcnt{minitocdepth} and \dcnt{secttocdepth}, +% similar to \dcnt{tocdepth}, allow the user to modify this behaviour. Mini or partial +% lists of figures or tables are not affected by the value of +% these counters, but if there are depth counters for these lists (\dcnt{lofdepth} and +% \dcnt{lotdepth}), as done by the \pack{subfigure} and +% \pack{subfig} packages~\cite{subfigure,subfig}\label{h.subfig} from +% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, new depth counters are created if necessary, with obvious names like +% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, +% and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Par défaut, les mini-tables et tables des matières partielles ne contiennent que les références jusqu'aux sections et +% sous-sections. Les trois compteurs \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} +% et \dcnt{secttocdepth}, similaires à~\dcnt{tocdepth}, permettent à~l'utilisateur de +% modifier ce comportement. Les mini-listes des figures ou des tableaux ne sont pas affectées par ces compteurs, mais +% s'il existe des compteurs de profondeur pour ces listes (\dcnt{lofdepth} et +% \dcnt{lotdepth}), comme cela est fait par les paquetages\label{h.subfig} +% \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} et +% \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, de nouveaux compteurs sont créés si +% nécessaire, portant des noms évidents tels que \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, +% \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Starred chapters, parts and sections}\label{s+starred.chap} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Chapitres, parties et sections étoilés}\label{s+starred.chap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{NOTE}: if using \com{chapter*} and a +% \or\relax +% \textbf{NOTE}: si vous utilisez \com{chapter*} et une commande +% \fi +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% command\Virage{} to add something in the +% table of contents, the numbering of the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files would be altered. +% To avoid that problem, a first method is to say: +% \or\relax +% pour\Virage{} ajouter quelque chose dans la table des matières, la numérotation des fichiers auxiliaires de +% \upack{minitoc} serait altérée. Pour éviter ce problème, une première méthode est de dire: +% \fi +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addstarredpart}\verb|{...}|\\ +% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{...}|\\ +% \com{addstarredsection}\verb|{...}| +% \end{quote} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands apply only for the level of a part-, mini- or +% sect-toc; for lower levels, the usual command is sufficient: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes ne s'appliquent que pour le niveau d'une part-, mini- ou +% sect-toc; pour des niveaux inférieurs, utilisez, comme d'habitude: +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| +% \end{quote} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So, to add a section-level entry in the global toc and in the +% minitoc of a starred chapter: +% \or\relax +% Donc, pour ajouter une entrée de niveau section dans la table des matières globale et dans la minitoc +% d'un chapitre étoilé: +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{verse} +% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\ +% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{First section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{First section}|\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{Second section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Second section}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% \begin{verse} +% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\ +% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{Première section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Première section}|\\ +% \com{section*}\verb|{Seconde section}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Seconde section}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There is sometimes a problem with mini-tables when +% you use \com{chapter*} (or \com{section*}): the minitocs +% appear in the wrong chapter. You can add a \com{adjustmtc} +% (or \com{adjuststc} or \com{adjustptc}) command at the end +% of the starred chapter (or section or part) to increment the +% corresponding counter. Do not use commands like \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| or \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| +% (which should work, but it is cheating), because the \pack{mtcoff} package (see section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) knows +% what to do about \com{adjustmtc} (and others), but can do +% nothing about \com{stepcounter} or \com{addtocounter}, as they are a standard basic commands +% of \LaTeX, not \upack{minitoc} specific commands. Syntax:\nopagebreak +% \or\relax +% Il y a parfois un problème avec des mini-tables lorsque vous utilisez \com{chapter*} (ou \com{section*}):\ les +% minitocs apparaissent dans le mauvais chapitre. Vous pouvez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} (ou +% \com{adjuststc}, ou \com{adjustptc}) à~la fin du chapitre étoilé (ou de la section ou partie étoilée) pour +% incrémenter le compteur correspondant. N'utilisez pas de commandes telles que \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| +% ou \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| (ceci +% devrait marcher, mais c'est de la triche), parce que le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (voir la section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) +% sait quoi faire avec \com{adjustmtc} (et autres), mais ne sait pas quoi faire de \com{stepcounter} ou +% \com{addtocounter}, car ce sont des +% commandes \LaTeX{} basiques standard, pas des commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}. Syntaxe:\nopagebreak +% \fi +% \begin{quote} +% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad +% \com{adjustmtc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad +% \com{adjuststc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% where \emph{n} is the increment (default:~1). +% \or\relax +% où \emph{n} est l'incrément (défaut:~1). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are similar commands to \emph{decrement} or \emph{increment} by~1 these counters: +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}; +% the same remarks as above apply. These commands have no argument. +% But a more clever way to solve this problem would be using commands similar to: +% \or\relax +% Il y~a des commandes similaires pour \emph{décrémenter} ou \emph{incrémenter} de~1 ces compteurs: +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}; +% les mêmes remarques que ci-dessus s'appliquent. Ces commandes n'ont pas d'argument. +% Mais une manière plus élégante de résoudre ce problème serait d'utiliser des commandes similaires~à: +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% This\virage{} command adds an entry in the table of contents (and adjusts the +% counter, because it calls \com{adjustmtc}). The +% table~\vref{t+mtcadd} summarizes these commands, that you put +% \emph{after} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ +% If the optional argument is omitted or empty or blank, no entry will +% be visible in the table of contents nor in the minitocs. +% If the optional argument is something invisible +% (like~\verb|~|, \com{space} or \com{quad}), the result will be strange +% but still logically correct. See also section~\vref{faq.30} for the problems with \com{mtcaddpart}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% Cette\virage{} commande ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières (et ajuste le compteur, +% car elle appelle \com{adjustmtc}). +% Le tableau~\vref{t+mtcadd} liste ces commandes, que vous placez \emph{après} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ Si +% l'argument optionnel est omis, ou est vide ou blanc, aucune entrée ne sera visible dans la table des matières ni +% dans les minitocs. Si l'argument optionnel est quelque chose d'invisible (comme~\verb|~|, \com{space} ou \com{quad}), +% le résultat sera étrange mais cependant logiquement correct. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.30} pour les +% problèmes avec \com{mtcaddpart}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[th] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Adding an entry in the ToC for +% a starred part, chapter, or section}\label{t+mtcadd} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Level}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\ +% \midrule +% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \thickline +% \textbf{Level}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\ +% \hline +% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[th] +% \changeskips +% \caption[Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une +% section étoilés]{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une +% section étoilés}\label{t+mtcadd} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Niveau}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\ +% \midrule +% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \thickline +% \textbf{Niveau}&% +% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\ +% \hline +% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Typesetting of the mini-tables} +% The mini-tables are typeset in a \env{verse}-like environment, and can be split over several pages. +% \or\relax +% \section{Composition des mini-tables} +% Les mini-tables sont composées dans un environnement analogue à~\env{verse}, et donc peuvent s'étendre sur +% plusieurs pages. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Chapter-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The mini-table of contents is typeset in the \com{mtcfont} +% font, which is \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. +% In fact, the font \com{mtcfont} is selected at the beginning of a minitoc, minilof or minilot. More +% selective choices are made with the following fonts. +% Section entries are typeset +% in the \com{mtcSfont} font, which is \verb|\small\bfseries| by default. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% La mini-table des matières est composée dans la fonte \com{mtcfont}, qui est +% \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut. +% En fait, la fonte \com{mtcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une minitoc, minilof ou minilot. Des choix +% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. +% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte +% \com{mtcSfont}, qui est \verb|\small\bfseries| par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the +% commands \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} are available +% (by default, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) to enable the use of various fonts. Mini lists of figures and tables are +% typeset in the fonts \com{mlffont} and \com{mltfont}, which are \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. +% There are also \com{mlfSfont} and \com{mltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. +% See tables~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Thanks to \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, +% who contributed these tables initially.}. +% \or\relax +% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, +% paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} sont disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) pour permettre +% l'utilisation de fontes diverses. Les mini-listes de figures et de tableaux sont composées dans les fontes +% \com{mlffont} et \com{mltfont}, qui sont \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut. +% Il y a aussi \com{mlfSfont} et \com{mltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. +% Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Merci à~\name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, +% qui a fourni ces tableaux initialement.}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note\Virage{} that the default choice of fonts is certainly not perfect and hence it is not definitive. A~symptom of this +% imperfection is the presence of poor alignments in the mini-tables, if bold and non-bold fonts are mixed\,\footnote{This +% appears, e.g., if you are using the Computer Modern Roman (CMR) fonts~\cite{cmt}. +% The symptom disappears if you do not use bold +% CMR fonts or if you use the TX fonts (\pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts}), +% for instance\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, like in this document}{\relax}. See also section~\vref{faq.29}.} +% (the true length of +% \texttt{1em} is not the same for the fonts). This can often be adjusted by changing some fonts.\par +% \or\relax +% Notez\Virage{} que le choix de fontes par défaut n'est certainement pas parfait et n'est donc pas définitif. +% Un symptôme de +% cette imperfection est la présence d'alignements imprécis dans les mini-tables, si des fontes grasses et non-grasses +% sont mélangées\,\footnote{Ceci apparaît notamment si vous utilisez les fontes Computer Modern Roman (CMR)~\cite{cmt}. +% Le symptôme disparaît si vous n'utilisez plus de fontes CMR grasses ou si vous utilisez les fontes TX (paquetage +% \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts}), par exemple\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, comme dans ce document}{\relax}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.29}.} +% (la longueur effective de \texttt{1em} n'est pas la même pour ces fontes). +% Ceci peut souvent être corrigé en changeant quelques fontes. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \footnotesize +% \caption{Fonts and titles for the mini-table commands}\label{t+mtc+f1} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \toprule +% Command +% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with +% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with +% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english; +% changed by the language definition files or +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries\ by default.} +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \thickline +% Command +% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting} +% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with +% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with +% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english; +% changed by the language definition files or +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries{} by default.} +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \footnotesize +% \caption{Fontes et titres pour les commandes de mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f1} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \toprule +% Commande +% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Fonte du titre}{choix par défaut}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais; +% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.} +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +% \thickline +% Commande +% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut} +% &\FontDefault{Fonte du }{choix par défaut}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex] +% \com{parttoc}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{partlof}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{partlot}% +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} +% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex] +% \com{minitoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{minilof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{minilot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex] +% \com{secttoc}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlof}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \com{sectlot}% +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} +% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] +% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} +% & +% &\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau +% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais; +% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou +% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ +% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.} +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \small +% \caption{Fonts for the mini-table entries}\label{t+mtc+f2} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% Level&Font&Default setting\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapter\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Subsection +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \thickline +% Level&Font&Default setting\\ +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapter\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsection +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Subsection +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Subsubsection +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraph +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Subparagraph +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter} +% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \small +% \caption{Fontes pour les entrées des mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f2} +% \centering +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapitre\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Sous-section +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \thickline +% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\ +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\ +% \Strut +% Chapitre\Chap +% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ +% Section +% &\com{ptcSfont} +% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ +% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{ptcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{ptcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{ptcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\ +% \Strut +% Section +% &\com{mtcSfont} +% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{mtcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{mtcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{mtcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \hline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\ +% \Strut +% Sous-section +% &\com{stcSSfont} +% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ +% Sous-sous-section +% &\com{stcSSSfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Paragraphe +% &\com{stcPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ +% Sous-paragraphe +% &\com{stcSPfont} +% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter} +% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% \fi +% ^^A \ifFLP\floatpagestyle{plain}\fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% \caption{Available languages}\label{t+languages} +% \ilopt{afrikaan}% +% \ilopt{afrikaans}% +% \ilopt{albanian}% +% \ilopt{arab}% +% \ilopt{arabic}% +% \ilopt{arab2}% +% \ilopt{arabi}% +% \ilopt{armenian}% +% \ilopt{bahasai}% +% \ilopt{bahasa}% +% \ilopt{indon}% +% \ilopt{indonesian}% +% \ilopt{bahasam}% +% \ilopt{malay}% +% \ilopt{meyalu}% +% \ilopt{bangla}% +% \ilopt{basque}% +% \ilopt{bengali}% +% \ilopt{bicig}% +% \ilopt{uighur}% +% \ilopt{bicig2}% +% \ilopt{uighur2}% +% \ilopt{bicig3}% +% \ilopt{uighur3}% +% \ilopt{bithe}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{brazil}% +% \ilopt{brazilian}% +% \ilopt{breton}% +% \ilopt{bulgarian}% +% \ilopt{bulgarianb}% +% \ilopt{buryat}% +% \ilopt{buryat2}% +% \ilopt{catalan}% +% \ilopt{chinese1}% +% \ilopt{chinese2}% +% \ilopt{croatian}% +% \ilopt{czech}% +% \ilopt{danish}% +% \ilopt{devanagari}% +% \ilopt{hindi}% +% \ilopt{dutch}% +% \iloptd{english}% +% \ilopt{american}% +% \ilopt{australian}% +% \ilopt{british}% +% \ilopt{canadian}% +% \ilopt{newzealand}% +% \ilopt{UKenglish}% +% \ilopt{USenglish}% +% \ilopt{english1}% +% \ilopt{english2}% +% \ilopt{esperant}% +% \ilopt{esperanto}% +% \ilopt{estonian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopia}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian2}% +% \ilopt{farsi1}% +% \ilopt{farsi2}% +% \ilopt{farsi3}% +% \ilopt{finnish}% +% \ilopt{finnish2}% +% \ilopt{french}% +% \ilopt{frenchb}% +% \ilopt{frenchle}% +% \ilopt{frenchpro}% +% \ilopt{francais}% +% \ilopt{acadien}% +% \ilopt{canadien}% +% \ilopt{french1}% +% \ilopt{french2}% +% \ilopt{galician}% +% \ilopt{german}% +% \ilopt{austrian}% +% \ilopt{germanb}% +% \ilopt{germanb2}% +% \ilopt{greek}% +% \ilopt{greek-mono}% +% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}% +% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}% +% \ilopt{guarani}% +% \ilopt{hangul1}% +% \ilopt{hangul2}% +% \ilopt{hangul3}% +% \ilopt{hangul4}% +% \ilopt{hangul-u8}% +% \ilopt{hanja1}% +% \ilopt{hanja2}% +% \ilopt{hanja-u8}% +% \ilopt{hebrew}% +% \ilopt{hebrew2}% +% \ilopt{hindi-modern}% +% \ilopt{icelandic}% +% \ilopt{interlingua}% +% \ilopt{irish}% +% \ilopt{italian}% +% \ilopt{italian2}% +% \ilopt{japanese}% +% \ilopt{japanese2}% +% \ilopt{japanese3}% +% \ilopt{japanese4}% +% \ilopt{japanese5}% +% \ilopt{japanese6}% +% \ilopt{kannada}% +% \ilopt{latin}% +% \ilopt{latin2}% +% \ilopt{latinc}% +% \ilopt{latinc2}% +% \ilopt{latvian}% +% \ilopt{latvian2}% +% \ilopt{letton}% +% \ilopt{letton2}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian2}% +% \ilopt{lowersorbian}% +% \ilopt{lsorbian}% +% \ilopt{magyar}% +% \ilopt{hungarian}% +% \ilopt{magyar2}% +% \ilopt{magyar3}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-b}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{mexican}% +% \ilopt{mongol}% +% \ilopt{mongolb}% +% \ilopt{mongolian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb}% +% \ilopt{ngerman}% +% \ilopt{naustrian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb2}% +% \ilopt{norsk}% +% \ilopt{norsk2}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk2}% +% \ilopt{occitan}% +% \ilopt{occitan2}% +% \ilopt{polish}% +% \ilopt{polish2}% +% \ilopt{polski}% +% \ilopt{portuguese}% +% \ilopt{portuges}% +% \ilopt{romanian}% +% \ilopt{romanian2}% +% \ilopt{romanian3}% +% \ilopt{russian}% +% \ilopt{russianb}% +% \ilopt{russianc}% +% \ilopt{russian2m}% +% \ilopt{russian2o}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca1}% +% \ilopt{russian-lh}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}% +% \ilopt{samin}% +% \ilopt{scottish}% +% \ilopt{serbian}% +% \ilopt{serbianc}% +% \ilopt{slovak}% +% \ilopt{slovene}% +% \ilopt{spanish}% +% \ilopt{castillan}% +% \ilopt{castillian}% +% \ilopt{spanish2}% +% \ilopt{spanish3}% +% \ilopt{spanish4}% +% \ilopt{swahili}% +% \ilopt{swedish}% +% \ilopt{swedish2}% +% \ilopt{thai}% +% \ilopt{turkish}% +% \ilopt{ukrainian}% +% \ilopt{ukraineb}% +% \ilopt{uppersorbian}% +% \ilopt{usorbian}% +% \ilopt{vietnam}% +% \ilopt{vietnamese}% +% \ilopt{welsh}% +% \ilopt{xalx}% +% \ilopt{khalkha}% +% \ilopt{xalx2}% +% \ilopt{xalx3}% +% \centering +% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small +% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing +% \begin{multicols}{4} +% \begin{itemize} +% ^^A \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em +% ^^A \def\labelitemi{--} +% \item afrikaan (afrikaans) +% \item albanian +% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{c}$ +% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$ +% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item armenian\,$^c$ +% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$ +% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$ +% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$ +% \item basque +% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$ +% \item brazil (brazilian) +% \item breton +% \item bulgarian\,$^c$ +% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$ +% \item buryat\,$^c$ +% \item buryat2\,$^c$ +% \item catalan +% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item croatian +% \item czech +% \item danish +% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$ +% \item dutch +% \item english$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish) +% \item english1 +% \item english2 +% \item esperant (esperanto) +% \item estonian +% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$ +% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$ +% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item finnish +% \item finnish2 +% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien) +% \item french1 +% \item french2 +% \item galician +% \item german (austrian) +% \item germanb +% \item germanb2 +% \item greek\,$^c$ +% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item guarani\,$^h$ +% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$ +% \item icelandic\,$^f$ +% \item interlingua +% \item irish +% \item italian +% \item italian2 +% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item kannada\,$^c$ +% \item latin +% \item latin2 +% \item latinc +% \item latinc2 +% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$ +% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$ +% \item lithuanian +% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian) +% \item magyar (hungarian) +% \item magyar2 +% \item magyar3 +% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$ +% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$ +% \item mexican +% \item mongol\,$^c$ +% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$ +% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian) +% \item ngermanb2 +% \item norsk +% \item norsk2 +% \item nynorsk +% \item nynorsk2 +% \item occitan +% \item occitan2 +% \item polish +% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item polski\,$^c$ +% \item portuguese (portuges) +% \item romanian +% \item romanian2 +% \item romanian3 +% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item samin +% \item scottish +% \item serbian +% \item serbianc\,$^c$ +% \item slovak +% \item slovene +% \item spanish (castillan, castillian) +% \item spanish2 +% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$ +% \item spanish4 +% \item swahili +% \item swedish +% \item swedish2 +% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$ +% \item turkish +% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item uppersorbian (usorbian) +% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$ +% \item welsh +% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$ +% \item xalx2\,$^c$ +% \item xalx3\,$^c$ +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \hrule +% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[()]The languages between parentheses are aliases of a main language +% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file +% of that main language. +% \item[$^{\dagger}$] The presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory. +% \item[$^a$] The \ulopt{arab(ic)}\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} and \lopt{arab2} languages require the use of the +% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}). +% \item[$^b$] The \ulopt{russian} language is not yet supported +% by the \pack{babel} system~\cite{babel,babel-user}, but +% \lopt{russianb}~\cite{russianb} is supported if you use +% babel-3.6 or a higher version; \lopt{russianc} is an extra. Look also at other \suffix{.mld} files for russian. +% \item[$^c$] Some languages may require specific fonts. +% \item[$^d$] Requires the \pack{CJK} package~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[$^e$] Requires \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), the version of \LaTeX\ for Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). +% \item[$^f$] Requires a 8-bits input encoding. +% \item[$^g$] Uses also a \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \item[$^h$] Requires a specific input encoding. +% \item[$^i$] The \lopt{bicig} language is also known as \lopt{uighur}. +% \item[$^j$] The \lopt{arabi} and \lopt{farsi3} languages require the use of the +% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% ^^A \vspace*{2\baselineskip} +% \caption{Langues disponibles}\label{t+languages} +% \ilopt{afrikaan}% +% \ilopt{afrikaans}% +% \ilopt{albanian}% +% \ilopt{arab}% +% \ilopt{arabic}% +% \ilopt{arab2}% +% \ilopt{arabi}% +% \ilopt{armenian}% +% \ilopt{bahasai}% +% \ilopt{bahasa}% +% \ilopt{indon}% +% \ilopt{indonesian}% +% \ilopt{bahasam}% +% \ilopt{malay}% +% \ilopt{meyalu}% +% \ilopt{bangla}% +% \ilopt{basque}% +% \ilopt{bengali}% +% \ilopt{bicig}% +% \ilopt{uighur}% +% \ilopt{bicig2}% +% \ilopt{uighur2}% +% \ilopt{bicig3}% +% \ilopt{uighur3}% +% \ilopt{bithe}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{brazil}% +% \ilopt{brazilian}% +% \ilopt{breton}% +% \ilopt{bulgarian}% +% \ilopt{bulgarianb}% +% \ilopt{buryat}% +% \ilopt{buryat2}% +% \ilopt{catalan}% +% \ilopt{chinese1}% +% \ilopt{chinese2}% +% \ilopt{croatian}% +% \ilopt{czech}% +% \ilopt{danish}% +% \ilopt{devanagari}% +% \ilopt{hindi}% +% \ilopt{dutch}% +% \iloptd{english}% +% \ilopt{american}% +% \ilopt{australian}% +% \ilopt{british}% +% \ilopt{canadian}% +% \ilopt{newzealand}% +% \ilopt{UKenglish}% +% \ilopt{USenglish}% +% \ilopt{english1}% +% \ilopt{english2}% +% \ilopt{esperant}% +% \ilopt{esperanto}% +% \ilopt{estonian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopia}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian}% +% \ilopt{ethiopian2}% +% \ilopt{farsi1}% +% \ilopt{farsi2}% +% \ilopt{farsi3}% +% \ilopt{finnish}% +% \ilopt{finnish2}% +% \ilopt{french}% +% \ilopt{frenchb}% +% \ilopt{frenchle}% +% \ilopt{frenchpro}% +% \ilopt{francais}% +% \ilopt{acadien}% +% \ilopt{canadien}% +% \ilopt{french1}% +% \ilopt{french2}% +% \ilopt{galician}% +% \ilopt{german}% +% \ilopt{austrian}% +% \ilopt{germanb}% +% \ilopt{germanb2}% +% \ilopt{greek}% +% \ilopt{greek-mono}% +% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}% +% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}% +% \ilopt{guarani}% +% \ilopt{hangul1}% +% \ilopt{hangul2}% +% \ilopt{hangul3}% +% \ilopt{hangul4}% +% \ilopt{hangul-u8}% +% \ilopt{hanja1}% +% \ilopt{hanja2}% +% \ilopt{hanja-u8}% +% \ilopt{hebrew}% +% \ilopt{hebrew2}% +% \ilopt{hindi-modern}% +% \ilopt{icelandic}% +% \ilopt{interlingua}% +% \ilopt{irish}% +% \ilopt{italian}% +% \ilopt{italian2}% +% \ilopt{japanese}% +% \ilopt{japanese2}% +% \ilopt{japanese3}% +% \ilopt{japanese4}% +% \ilopt{japanese5}% +% \ilopt{japanese6}% +% \ilopt{kannada}% +% \ilopt{latin}% +% \ilopt{latin2}% +% \ilopt{latinc}% +% \ilopt{latinc2}% +% \ilopt{latvian}% +% \ilopt{latvian2}% +% \ilopt{letton}% +% \ilopt{letton2}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian}% +% \ilopt{lithuanian2}% +% \ilopt{lowersorbian}% +% \ilopt{lsorbian}% +% \ilopt{magyar}% +% \ilopt{hungarian}% +% \ilopt{magyar2}% +% \ilopt{magyar3}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-b}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}% +% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}% +% \ilopt{manju}% +% \ilopt{mexican}% +% \ilopt{mongol}% +% \ilopt{mongolb}% +% \ilopt{mongolian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb}% +% \ilopt{ngerman}% +% \ilopt{naustrian}% +% \ilopt{ngermanb2}% +% \ilopt{norsk}% +% \ilopt{norsk2}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk}% +% \ilopt{nynorsk2}% +% \ilopt{occitan}% +% \ilopt{occitan2}% +% \ilopt{polish}% +% \ilopt{polish2}% +% \ilopt{polski}% +% \ilopt{portuguese}% +% \ilopt{portuges}% +% \ilopt{romanian}% +% \ilopt{romanian2}% +% \ilopt{romanian3}% +% \ilopt{russian}% +% \ilopt{russianb}% +% \ilopt{russianc}% +% \ilopt{russian2m}% +% \ilopt{russian2o}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca}% +% \ilopt{russian-cca1}% +% \ilopt{russian-lh}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}% +% \ilopt{samin}% +% \ilopt{scottish}% +% \ilopt{serbian}% +% \ilopt{serbianc}% +% \ilopt{slovak}% +% \ilopt{slovene}% +% \ilopt{spanish}% +% \ilopt{castillan}% +% \ilopt{castillian}% +% \ilopt{spanish2}% +% \ilopt{spanish3}% +% \ilopt{spanish4}% +% \ilopt{swahili}% +% \ilopt{swedish}% +% \ilopt{swedish2}% +% \ilopt{thai}% +% \ilopt{turkish}% +% \ilopt{ukrainian}% +% \ilopt{ukraineb}% +% \ilopt{uppersorbian}% +% \ilopt{usorbian}% +% \ilopt{vietnam}% +% \ilopt{vietnamese}% +% \ilopt{welsh}% +% \ilopt{xalx}% +% \ilopt{khalkha}% +% \ilopt{xalx2}% +% \ilopt{xalx3}% +% \centering +% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small +% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing +% \begin{multicols}{4} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item afrikaan (afrikaans) +% \item albanian +% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$ +% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$ +% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item armenian\,$^c$ +% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$ +% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$ +% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$ +% \item basque +% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$ +% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$ +% \item brazil (brazilian) +% \item breton +% \item bulgarian\,$^c$ +% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$ +% \item buryat\,$^c$ +% \item buryat2\,$^c$ +% \item catalan +% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$ +% \item croatian +% \item czech +% \item danish +% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$ +% \item dutch +% \item english\,$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish) +% \item english1 +% \item english2 +% \item esperant (esperanto) +% \item estonian +% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$ +% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$ +% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$ +% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$ +% \item finnish +% \item finnish2 +% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien) +% \item french1 +% \item french2 +% \item galician +% \item german (austrian) +% \item germanb +% \item germanb2 +% \item greek\,$^c$ +% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item guarani\,$^h$ +% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ +% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$ +% \item icelandic\,$^f$ +% \item interlingua +% \item irish +% \item italian +% \item italian2 +% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$ +% \item kannada\,$^c$ +% \item latin +% \item latin2 +% \item latinc +% \item latinc2 +% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$ +% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$ +% \item lithuanian +% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$ +% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian) +% \item magyar (hungarian) +% \item magyar2 +% \item magyar3 +% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$ +% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$ +% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$ +% \item mexican +% \item mongol\,$^c$ +% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$ +% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian) +% \item ngermanb2 +% \item norsk +% \item norsk2 +% \item nynorsk +% \item nynorsk2 +% \item occitan +% \item occitan2 +% \item polish +% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item polski\,$^c$ +% \item portuguese (portuges) +% \item romanian +% \item romanian2 +% \item romanian3 +% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$ +% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$ +% \item samin +% \item scottish +% \item serbian +% \item serbianc\,$^c$ +% \item slovak +% \item slovene +% \item spanish (castillan, castillian) +% \item spanish2 +% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$ +% \item spanish4 +% \item swahili +% \item swedish +% \item swedish2 +% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$ +% \item turkish +% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$ +% \item uppersorbian (usorbian) +% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$ +% \item welsh +% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$ +% \item xalx2\,$^c$ +% \item xalx3\,$^c$ +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \hrule +% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[()] Les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} +% chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de celle-ci. +% \item[$^{\dagger}$] La présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire. +% \item[$^a$] Les langues <<~\ulopt{arab(ic)}~>>\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} et <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage +% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}). +% \item[$^b$] La langue <<~\uopt{russian}~» n'est pas encore supportée par le +% système \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, +% mais <<~\lopt{russianb}~>>~\cite{russianb} est supportée si vous utilisez +% babel-3.6 ou une version supérieure; <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est un supplément. Regardez aussi les autres +% fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour le russe. +% \item[$^c$] Certaines langues peuvent requérir des fontes spécifiques. +% \item[$^d$] Requiert le paquetage \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[$^e$] Requiert \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). +% \item[$^f$] Requiert un codage en entrée sur 8~bits. +% \item[$^g$] Utilise aussi un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. +% \item[$^h$] Requiert un codage en entrée spécifique. +% \item[$^i$] La langue \lopt{bicig} est aussi connue sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{\lopt{uighur}}). +% \item[$^j$] Les langues <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> et <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage +% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% ^^A \vspace*{-2\baselineskip} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi +% ^^A \afterpage{\clearpage} +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Titles for chapter-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Titles are typeset in the \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| by +% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by +% \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} +% and \com{mlttitle}, which +% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default. +% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for +% languages other than english. +% +% \lneed{6} +% The language definition files like +% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (the suffix +% \suffix{.mld} means ``minitoc language definition (file)'') +% (and many others, see the list in table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available. +% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). +% You can change the language of these titles by using the +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. +% \or\relax +% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des +% titres sont définis par \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} et \com{mlttitle}, qui sont les +% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. Ces titres devraient être redéfinis +% par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} pour les langues autres que l'anglais. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Les fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} +% et \xfile{english.mld} (le suffixe \suffix{.mld} signifie «~\emph{minitoc language definition +% (file)}~») (et bien d'autres, voir la liste dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont +% disponibles. Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée +% (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). +% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces +% titres en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Part-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau partie} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The partial table of contents is typeset in the \com{ptcfont} +% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% In fact, the font \com{ptcfont} is selected at the beginning of a parttoc, partlof or partlot. More +% selective choices are made with the following fonts. +% Chapter entries are typeset in the \com{ptcCfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default. +% Section entries are typeset in the \com{ptcSfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières au niveau partie est composée dans la fonte \com{ptcfont}, qui est définie comme +% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% En fait, la fonte \com{ptcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une parttoc, partlof ou partlot. Des choix +% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. +% Les entrées de type chapitre sont composées dans la fonte +% \com{ptcCfont}, qui est \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut. +% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte \com{ptcSfont}, qui est +% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the +% commands \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, +% \com{ptcPfont}, and \com{ptcSPfont} are available +% (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you +% want to use various fonts. +% \or\relax +% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, paragraphes et +% sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, \com{ptcPfont} et \com{ptcSPfont} sont +% disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous souhaitez utiliser diverses fontes. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Partial lists of figures and tables are +% typeset in the fonts \com{plffont} and \com{pltfont}, which are +% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% There are also \com{plfSfont} and \com{pltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. +% \or\relax +% Les listes de figures et de tableaux au niveau partie sont composées dans les fontes \com{plffont} et \com{pltfont}, qui +% sont \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% Il y a aussi \com{plfSfont} et \com{pltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Titles for part-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau partie} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Titles are typeset in the \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| by +% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by +% \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} +% and \com{plttitle}, which +% are the strings ``Table of Contents'', +% ``List of Figures'' and ``List of Tables'' by default. +% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for +% languages other than english. +% +% \lneed{3} +% The language definition files like +% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and many others; for a complete list, see +% table~\vref{t+languages}) are available. Read also section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). +% You can change the language of these titles by using the +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. +% \or\relax +% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des +% titres sont définis par \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} et \com{plttitle}, qui sont les +% chaînes «~Table of Contents~», «~List of Figures~» et «~List of Tables~» par défaut. +% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} +% pour les langues autres que l'anglais. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de +% nombreux autres; pour une liste complète, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}) sont disponibles. Lire aussi +% la section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). +% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres +% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Section-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau section} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The section-level table of contents +% is typeset in the \com{stcfont} +% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% In fact, the font \com{stcfont} is selected at the beginning of a secttoc, sectlof or sectlot. +% +% More selective choices are made with the following fonts. +% Subsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default. +% Subsubsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSSfont} font, +% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières au niveau section est composée dans la fonte \com{stcfont}, qui est définie comme +% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% En fait, la fonte \com{stcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une secttoc, sectlof ou sectlot. +% +% Des choix plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. +% Les entrées de sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSfont}, qui est +% \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut. +% Les entrées de sous-sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSSfont}, qui est +% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For paragraphs and subparagraphs, the +% commands \com{stcPfont} and \com{stcSPfont} +% are available (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you +% want to use various fonts. Section-level lists of figures and tables are +% typeset in the fonts \com{slffont} and \com{sltfont}, which are +% defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. +% There are also \com{slfSfont} and \com{sltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. +% \or\relax +% Pour les paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{stcPfont} et \com{stcSPfont} sont disponibles +% (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous désirez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de figures et de +% tableaux au niveau section sont composées dans les fontes \com{slffont} et \com{sltfont}, qui sont définies +% comme étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. +% Il y a aussi \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Titles for section-level mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Titles are typeset in the \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by +% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by +% \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} +% and \com{slttitle}, which are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default. +% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for +% languages other than english. +% +% \lneed{3} +% The language definition files like \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and also many others, as listed in +% table~\vref{t+languages} and explained in section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available. +% You can easily prepare a similar file for your preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). +% You can change the language of these titles by using the +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. +% \or\relax +% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des +% titres sont définis par \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} et \com{slttitle}, qui sont les +% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. +% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} ou \com{mtcsettitle} +% pour les langues autres que l'anglais. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de +% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez +% facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). +% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres +% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Position of the titles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Position des titres} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the part level} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau partie} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{doparttoc}, +% \com{dopartlof} and \com{dopartlot} accept an optional argument +% to change the default position of the +% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title). +% The change is global for all the document. +% If you want to change the position of the title for only one parttoc +% (or partlof or partlof), just use such an optional argument with the +% command \com{parttoc} (or \com{partlof} or \com{partlot}). +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et +% \com{dopartlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: +% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou +% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. +% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule parttoc (ou partlof ou partlot), il vous suffit +% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande +% \com{parttoc} (ou \com{partlof} ou \com{partlot}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the chapter level} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dominitoc}, +% \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} accept an optional argument +% to change the default position of the +% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for ``empty'' (``no'' title). +% The change is global for all the document. +% If you want to change the position of the title for only one minitoc +% (or minilof or minilof), just use such an optional argument with the +% command \com{minitoc} (or \com{minilof} or +% \com{minilot}). +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et +% \com{dominilot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: +% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou +% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. +% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule minitoc (ou minilof ou minilot), il vous suffit +% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande +% \com{minitoc} (ou \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the section level} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dosecttoc}, +% \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} accept +% an optional argument to change the default position of the +% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title). +% The change is global for all the document. +% If you want to change the position of the title for only one secttoc +% (or sectlof or sectlof), just use such an optional argument with the +% command \com{secttoc} (or \com{sectlof} or +% \com{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et +% \com{dosectlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: +% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou +% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. +% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlot), il vous suffit +% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande +% \com{secttoc} (ou \com{sectlof} ou \com{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Summary of the positionning of titles} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Résumé du positionnement des titres} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To summarize: by default, all titles are on the left. However, each one of the +% following preparation commands: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}\\ +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% accepts an optional argument to change the positionning of the +% title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, +% \texttt{[r]} for right, \texttt{[e]} or \texttt{[n]} for empty (no +% title), for all the corresponding mini-tables (for all mini-tables in the case of \com{mtcprepare}). +% \or\relax +% Pour résumer, par défaut, tous les titres sont sur la gauche. Cependant, chacune des commandes de préparation +% suivantes: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}\\ +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% accepte un argument optionnel pour modifier le positionnement du titre: \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), +% \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, \texttt{[e]} ou \texttt{[n]} pour vide (pas de +% titre), pour toutes les mini-tables correspondantes (de toutes les mini-tables dans le cas de +% \com{mtcprepare}). +% \fi +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following insertion commands: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% accept the same optional arguments, but these options change the +% positionning only for the title of the current mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes d'insertion suivantes: +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} +% \end{tabular}\par\noindent +% acceptent les mêmes arguments optionnels, mais ces options changent le positionnement seulement pour le +% titre de la mini-table courante. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Line spacing in the mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\tightmtctrue} +% \begin{macro}{\tightmtcfalse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% With the commands \com{tightmtctrue} (or the \opt{tight} +% package option) and \com{tightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{loose} +% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space +% between contents lines. +% \or\relax +% Avec les commandes \com{tightmtctrue} (ou l'option de paquetage \opt{tight}) et +% \com{tightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les +% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\parsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But\imess{I0043} with the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl}, +% \class{scrbook} and \class{scrreprt}), it may sometimes be necessary +% to use the following options or commands, because we need to set \com{parskip} to zero in place of +% \com{parsep} to tighten the mini-table. The efficiency of the following options depends on the options given +% to these \KOMAScript{} classes (\optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script} option, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} option and variants). +% \or\relax +% Mais\imess{I0043} avec les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl}, +% \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}), il peut être +% nécessaire d'utiliser les options ou commandes suivantes, car il nous faut forcer à~zéro \com{parskip} au lieu +% de \com{parsep} pour resserrer la mini-table. L'efficacité des options ci-dessous dépend des options données +% à~ces classes \KOMAScript{} (options \optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} et variantes). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtctrue} +% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtcfalse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \KOMAScript{} classes, with the commands \com{ktightmtctrue} (or the \opt{k-tight} +% package option) and \com{ktightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{k-loose} +% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space +% between contents lines. +% \or\relax +% Pour les classes \KOMAScript, avec les commandes \com{ktightmtctrue} (ou l'option de +% paquetage \opt{k-tight}) et +% \com{ktightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{k-loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les +% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified commands for fonts}\label{s+simp-font-commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commandes simplifiées pour les fontes}\label{s+simp-font-commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the fonts for mini-tables, there are two +% useful commands: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{sectionning-level}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% will redefine \com{mtcSSfont} and \com{mlfSfont} with the given font commands. +% +% Note that \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| allows also to redefine \com{ptcfont}, etc. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Moreover, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}| +% \end{quote} +% will redefine \com{ptifont} (for titles in the parttocs, partlofs and partlofs) with the given font commands. +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des fontes des mini-tables, il y~a deux commandes utiles: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% Par exemple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\ +% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| +% \end{quote} +% redéfinira \com{mtcSSfont} et \com{mlfSfont} avec les commandes de fontes données. +% +% Notez que \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| permet aussi de redéfinir \com{ptcfont}, etc. +% +% \lneed{5} +% De plus, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}| +% \end{quote} +% redéfinira \com{ptifont} (pour les titres dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlofs) avec les commandes de fontes +% données. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table titles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les titres des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the titles for mini-tables, the +% \com{mtcsettitle} command is also available: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{title string}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description of contents}| +% \end{quote} +% will redefine \com{mtctitle} with the given string. This command checks that you redefine a title for a +% mini-table type available in your document class. +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des titres des mini-tables, la commande +% \com{mtcsettitle} est aussi disponible: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{chaîne titre}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% Par exemple, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description du contenu}| +% \end{quote} +% redéfinira \com{mtctitle} avec la chaîne donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous redéfinissez un titre pour un +% type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table depths} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les profondeurs des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the depths for mini-tables, the +% \com{mtcsetdepth} command is also available: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}| +% \end{quote} +% will set the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} with the given value. This command checks that you set a depth for a +% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its depth). +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des profondeurs des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande +% \com{mtcsetdepth}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% Par exemple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}| +% \end{quote} +% forcera le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez une profondeur +% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer sa +% profondeur). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table offsets} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les déplacements des mini-tables} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To simplify the redefinition of the offsets for mini-tables, the +% \com{mtcsetoffset} command is also available: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{offset}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{3} +% For instance, +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}| +% \end{quote} +% will set the macro \com{mtcoffset} to the given value. This command checks that you set a offset for a +% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its offset). +% \or\relax +% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des déplacements des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande +% \com{mtcsetoffset}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{déplacement}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{3} +% Par exemple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}| +% \end{quote} +% forcera la macro \com{mtcoffset} à~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez un déplacement +% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer son +% déplacement). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} the argument of \com{mtcsetoffset} is \emph{not} verified. It must be a length value, +% without shrink nor stretch part. A positive offset is towards the right, a negative one towards the left. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} l'argument de \com{mtcsetoffset} \emph{n'est pas} vérifié. Ce doit être une valeur de +% longueur, sans partie compressible ou extensible. Un déplacement positif se fait vers la droite, un déplacement +% négatif se fait vers la gauche. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Polymorphic entries in the mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{polymorphic entry} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Entrées polymorphes dans les mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The title of a sectionning command can appear in several places: +% a)~at the beginning of the section, of the chapter or of the part; +% b)~in the page header; +% c)~in the main TOC; +% d)~in the minitoc of the chapter (for a section title or lower); +% e)~in the parttoc of the part (for a chapter title or lower). +% A sectionning command has two arguments: an optionnal one, \textsl{OA}, and a mandatory one, \textsl{MA}, like in: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\section[|\textsl{OA}\verb|]{|\textsl{MA}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \textsl{OA} is taken as \textsl{MA} if omitted. Normaly, \textsl{OA} is used in the TOC and in the minitables, as in +% the page headers when necessary. \textsl{MA} is used as title for the sectionning unit and is the default for +% \textsl{OA}. But, some times, you may need to have a different version (a~variant) for a sectionning unit title +% in a minitable. So, it is now possible to define such variants by detecting if that title is used inside some +% minitable: the following flags are defined (when meaningful): +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag:}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% But these flags are used to build three new commands, to be called from inside the optionnal argument +% (\textsl{OA}) of a +% sectionning command or that of a caption: +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% Such entries are ``polymorphic''. +% See the example~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, for a short demonstration. +% \or\relax +% Le titre d'une commande se sectionnement peut apparaître en plusieurs endroits: +% a)~au début de la section, du chapitre ou de la partie; +% b)~dans l'en-tête de page; +% c)~dans la table des matières principale; +% d)~dans la minitoc du chapitre (pour un titre de section ou inférieur); +% e)~dans la parttoc de la partie pour un titre de chapitre ou inférieur). +% Une commande de sectionnement a deux arguments: un facultatif, \textsl{AF}, et un obligatoire, \textsl{AO}, comme dans: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\section[|\textsl{AF}\verb|]{|\textsl{AO}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \textsl{AF} est pris égal à~\textsl{AO} si omis. Normalement, \textsl{AF} est utilisé dans la table des +% matières principale et dans les minitables, ainsi que dans les en-têtes de page si nécessaire. +% \textsl{AO} est utilisé comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement est la valeur par défaut pour~\textsl{OA}. +% Mais, parfois, vous pouvez vouloir une version différente (une variante) comme titre d'unité de +% sectionnement dans une minitable. Donc, il est maintenant possible de définir de telles variantes en détectant +% si ce titre est utilisé à~l'intérieur d'une minitable: les indicateurs suivants sont définis (lorsqu'ils ont un sens): +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur:}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% Mais ces indicateurs sont utilisés pour construire trois nouvelles commandes, devant être appelées depuis +% l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel +% (\textsl{AO}) d'une commande de sectionnement ou de celui d'un caption: +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~». +% Voir l'exemple~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, pour une courte démonstration. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Languages for the titles}\label{fo+lang} +% Most of the strings defined in the language definition files (\suffix{.mld}) were taken from the +% superb \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} of \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, +% some were adapted, others were made available by gentle users +% or taken from specific packages, like \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, +% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, +% \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} (armenian)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bangla, bengali)~\cite{bangtex}, +% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (spanish)~\cite{spanish4}. +% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, +% \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, +% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinese, +% korean-hangûl/hanja, japanese, thai)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, +% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polish), +% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (swedish), +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi or iranian), or \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} +% --- latvian (letton), +% \lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}, \lopt{polish2}, \lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o} and \lopt{spanish3} +% need \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), i.e.,~the Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) version of \LaTeX, (see~\cite{antomega}), +% or even found by searching on the Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} for upper cyrillic bulgarian, +% \xfile{japanese.mld} for japanese, \xfile{serbianc.mld} for cyrillic serbian). +% Other languages are welcome\,\footnote{I~am searching for the titles in corsican, in +% particular.}. See table~\vref{t+languages}. +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Langues pour les titres}\label{fo+lang} +% La plupart des chaînes définies dans les fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) ont été prises +% dans le superbe paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, certaines ont été adaptées, +% d'autres ont été mises à~disposition par d'aimables utilisateurs ou prises dans des paquetages spécifiques, tels +% que \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} +% (arménien)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bânglâ, bengalî)~\cite{bangtex}, +% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (espagnol)~\cite{spanish4}. +% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} pour \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and +% \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinois, +% coréen-hangûl/hanja, japonais, thaï)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, +% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polonais), +% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (suédois), +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi ou iranien) +% \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} --- le latvien (letton), des variantes de grec +% (\lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}), de polonais (\lopt{polish2}), de russe (\lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o}) et +% d'espagnol (\lopt{spanish3}) ont besoin +% de \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), c'est-à-dire de la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), +% (voir~\cite{antomega}), --- ou ont même été trouvées en +% cherchant sur le Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} pour le haut bulgare cyrillique, \xfile{japanese.mld} pour le +% japonais, \xfile{serbianc.mld} pour le serbe cyrillique). D'autres langues sont les bienvenues\,\footnote{Je recherche +% notamment les titres pour le corse (\emph{corsican}).}. +% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But\Virage{} for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi, hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese, +% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai and some variants of russian.}, the sources of the titles use some exotic encodings which +% are difficult to manipulate in a +% \suffix{.dtx} file, hence the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper which loads a special file, +% nicknamed a \suffix{.mlo} +% file\,\footnote{The extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the +% \suffix{.dtx} file in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package, but via \env{filecontents} +% environments in the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file, and playing with the ``catcode'' of +% the ``delete'' character. +% \or\relax +% Mais\Virage{} pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour le chinois, le farsi, le coréen (hangûl et +% hanja), le japonais, le \lopt{malayalam-omega}, le thaï et certaines variantes du russe.}, les sources des titres +% utilisent quelques +% codages exotiques qu'il est difficile de manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, donc le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors +% un simple emballage qui charge un fichier spécial, surnommé fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le +% suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langue pour minitoc).}, qui n'est pas +% engendré par le fichier \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais via des +% environnements \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}, +% et en jouant sur le «~catcode~» du caractère «~delete~». +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Altering the layout of the mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Modifier la mise en page des mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The layout of a mini-table is described in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (this figure is adapted from~\cite{tocloft}), +% which defines some internal commands (these are not \emph{dimensions}, but \LaTeX{} commands, created by +% \com{newcommand}, modifiable via \com{renewcommand}). +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, which is the separation between the dots in the dotted line. It is a pure number +% expressing \emph{math units}; 18~math units make \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' +% in the current font. As the real size of \texttt{1em} is font dependent, the separation between the dots +% may vary if you use different fonts for different types of entries in the mini-tables. +% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, is the width of the space reserved for the page number. It is a \LaTeX\ command +% containing the representation of a length (e.g.,~\texttt{1.55em}). +% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, is the distance (margin) between the right border of the table and the end of the +% dotted line. It should be larger than \com{@pnumwidth}, and can be a rubber length (i.e.,~contain +% some glue, like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); if you specify the ``\texttt{...~plus~1fil}'' portion, +% the text of the entry will be ragged on right; it is useful if you have long entries, and it can avoid +% most hyphenations. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% La mise en page est décrite dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (cette figure a été adaptée de~\cite{tocloft}), qui +% définit certaines commandes internes (ce ne sont pas des \emph{dimensions}, mais des commandes \LaTeX, crées par +% \com{newcommand}, modifiables via \com{renewcommand}). +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, qui est la séparation entre les points de conduite dans une ligne de points. C'est un +% nombre pur exprimant des \emph{unités mathématiques}; 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un +% cadratin), qui est à~peu près la largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Comme la taille effective de +% \texttt{1em} dépend de la fonte, la séparation entre les points peut varier si vous utilisez des fontes +% différentes pour des types différents d'entrées dans les mini-tables. +% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, qui est la largeur de l'espace réservé pour le numéro de page. C'est une commande +% \LaTeX\ contenant la représentation d'une longueur (par~ex., \texttt{1.55em}). +% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, est la distance (marge) entre le bord droit de la table et la fin de la ligne de +% points de conduite. Elle devrait être plus grande que \com{@pnumwidth}, et peut être une longueur +% élastique (c'est-à-dire contenir de la glu, comme \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); si vous spécifiez la +% portion «~\texttt{...~plus~1fil}~», le texte de l'entrée sera en déchiqueté sur la droite; ceci est utile si +% vous avez des entrées longues, et peut éviter la plupart des coupures de mots. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \newcommand{\maxx}{120} ^^A picture width +% \newcommand{\maxxm}{118} ^^A \maxx - 2\ +% \newcommand{\maxy}{55} ^^A picture height +% \newcommand{\maxym}{53} ^^A \maxy - 2 +% \newcommand{\maxyp}{57} ^^A \maxy + 2 +% \newcommand{\findent}{20} ^^A indent +% \newcommand{\findentp}{22} ^^A \findent + 2 +% \newcommand{\fnumwidth}{10} ^^A numwidth +% \newcommand{\ftocrmarg}{30} ^^A \@tocrmarg +% \newcommand{\fpnumwidth}{20} ^^A \@pnumwidth +% \newcommand{\fipn}{30} ^^A \findent + \fnumwidth +% \newcommand{\frmarg}{90} ^^A \maxx - \ftocrmarg +% \newcommand{\frnum}{100} ^^A \maxx - \fpnumwidth +% \newcommand{\fyi}{10} ^^A 1st y height +% \newcommand{\fyim}{8} ^^A \fyi - 2 +% \newcommand{\fyii}{20} ^^A 2nd y height +% \newcommand{\fyiii}{25} ^^A 3rd y height +% \newcommand{\fyiv}{30} ^^A 4th y height +% \newcommand{\fyv}{40} ^^A 5th y height +% \newcommand{\fyvp}{42} ^^A \fyv + 2 +% \newcommand{\flin}{4} ^^A length of leader lines +% \newcommand{\frmargm}{89} ^^A \frmarg (90) - a little bit +% \begin{figure}[tp] +% \centering +% \setlength{\unitlength}{\linewidth} +% \divide \unitlength by \maxx +% \icom{mtcindent}\icom{@pnumwidth}\icom{@tocrmarg}\icom{numwidth}\icom{@dotsep}% +% \icom{linewidth}\icom{mtcindent}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp) +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}} +% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}} +% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}} +% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}} +% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyii){title end} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){continue\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}} +% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){Heading\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}} +% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.} +% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}} +% \end{picture} +% \caption{Layout of a ToC (LoF, LoT) entry}\label{fig+ltoc} +% \or\relax +% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp) +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} +% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}} +% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}} +% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}} +% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}} +% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}} +% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} +% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyii){fin du titre} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){suite\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}} +% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}} +% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){En-tête\ldots} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}} +% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.} +% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}} +% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}} +% \end{picture} +% \caption{Mise en page d'une entrée dans une table des matières (liste des figures, liste des tableaux)}\label{fig+ltoc} +% \fi +% \end{figure} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As these commands are internal (their names contain the ``\texttt{@}'' character) and must have a local effect only +% on the specified kinds of mini-tables, you should alter them indirectly via the \com{mtcsetformat} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; \emph{parameter} is +% one of the \texttt{dotinterval} (for \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (for \com{@pnumwidth}), or +% \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) keywords; so: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}| +% \end{quote} +% will set the right margin to \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} in the lists of tables at the part level. The elasticity +% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) is useful if the table captions are long (it prevents most hyphenations). +% \or\relax +% Puisque ces commandes sont internes (leurs noms contiennent le caractère «~\texttt{@}~») et doivent avoir un +% effet local seulement sur les types spécifiés de mini-tables, vous devriez les modifier indirectement via la commande +% \com{mtcsetformat}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; \emph{paramètre} est +% l'un des mots-clés \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (pour \com{@pnumwidth}) +% ou \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}); ainsi: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}| +% \end{quote} +% établira la marge de droite à~\texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} dans la liste des tableaux au niveau partie. L'élasticité +% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) est utile si les captions des tableaux sont longs (elle évite bien des coupures de mots). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that the \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) parameter should obviously be greater than the +% \texttt{pagenumwidth} parameter (this appears in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}). +% +% If the \texttt{dotinterval} parameter (for \com{@dotsep}) is large enough (try 450, then increase or decrease), +% the dots of leaders will be so much spread out that they will disappear. +% \or\relax +% Notez que le paramètre \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}) devrait manifestement être plus grand que +% le paramètre \texttt{pagenumwidth} (ceci est visible dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}). +% +% Si le paramètre \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}) est suffisamment grand (essayez 450, puis augmentez ou +% diminuez), les points de conduite seront tellement espacés qu'ils disparaîtront. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Horizontal rules}\label{t+horiz} +% \ifBT +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){5-7} +% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \midrule +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{pltrule}&partlots&\com{nopltrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§lofs&\com{noslfrule}§lofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§lots&\com{nosltrule}§lots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \else +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\ +% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \hline +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&partlots&\com{noplfrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§lofs&\com{noslfrule}§lofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§lots&\com{nosltrule}§lots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \fi +% +% \bigskip +% +% \medfigrule +% +% \bigskip +% +% \caption{Page numbers}\label{t+pn} +% {\ttfamily% +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Filets horizontaux}\label{t+horiz} +% \ifBT +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){5-7} +% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \midrule +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{pltrule}&parttocs&\com{nopltrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§tocs&\com{noslfrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§tocs&\com{nosltrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \else +% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\ +% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ +% \hline +% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ +% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{slfrule}§tocs&\com{noslfrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \com{sltrule}§tocs&\com{nosltrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ +% \thickline +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.} +% \end{tabular}} +% \fi +% +% \bigskip +% +% \medfigrule +% +% \bigskip +% +% \caption{Numéros de pages}\label{t+pn} +% {\ttfamily% +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&% +% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabular}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Special Features} +% \or\relax +% \section{Dispositifs spéciaux} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Horizontal Rules} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Filets horizontaux} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, most of mini-tables have horizontal rules after their +% titles and at their ends. The exception is the ``parttoc'' in a \class{book}- or +% \class{report}-like document (i.e.,~when \com{chapter} is defined). To activate +% or deactivate these rules, the commands of the table~\vref{t+horiz} are available. +% But you can also use the following command, which is simpler: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; +% if the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected; +% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, la plupart des mini-tables ont des filets horizontaux après leurs titres et à~leurs fins. L'exception +% est la «~parttoc~» dans un document de type analogue à~\class{book} ou \class{report} (c'est-à-dire lorsque +% la commande \com{chapter} est définie). Pour activer ou désactiver ces filets, les commandes du +% tableau~\vref{t+horiz} sont disponibles. Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante, plus simple: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; +% si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées; +% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lsneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Page Numbers, Leaders} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Numéros de pages, points de conduite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, the page numbers are listed in each minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Some authors want only the section +% titles (with the section numbers), +% but without page numbers. Hence the obvious declarations of table~\vref{t+pn} are available. +% But you can also use the following command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; +% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, +% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, +% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4] +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, +% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, +% \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% If the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les numéros de page sont cités dans chaque minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Certains auteurs désirent avoir +% seulement les titres des sections (avec les numéros des sections), mais pas les numéros des pages. Donc les +% déclarations évidentes du tableau~\vref{t+pn} sont disponibles. +% Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, +% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; +% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ: +% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, +% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, +% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4] +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, +% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, +% \texttt{-}, et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{samepage} +% Si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In the mini-tables, they are leaders of dots between +% the section titles and the page numbers. The \opt{undotted} +% package option removes these dots. The \optd{dotted} package option +% is the default. See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \or\relax +% Dans les mini-tables, il y~a des points de conduite entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages. +% L'option de paquetage \opt{undotted} supprime ces points de conduite. L'option de paquetage +% \optd{dotted} est le choix par défaut. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Features for parttocs and other mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Dispositifs pour les parttocs et autres mini-tables} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, a parttoc (or a partlof or a +% partlot), in a \class{book}- or \class{report}-class document, is preceded and followed by a +% \com{cleardoublepage} (which acts like \com{clearpage} in a one-side document), and has a page style of +% \texttt{empty}. Since version~\#32, you can modify this +% behaviour by redefining the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, whose meaning +% is often obvious. A feature defined as \com{empty} does nothing. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, une parttoc (ou une partlof ou une partlot), dans un document de classe \class{book} ou +% \class{report}, +% est précédée et suivie par une \com{cleardoublepage} (qui agit comme \com{clearpage} dans un document en recto), +% et a un style de page \texttt{empty}. Depuis la version~\#32, vous pouvez modifier ce comportement en +% redéfinissant les commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, dont la signification est souvent évidente. +% Un dispositif défini comme étant \com{empty} ne fait rien. +% \fi +% \afterpage{\clearpage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[p] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Features for mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features} +% {\small\ttfamily% +% \let\Strut\relax +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}% +% \else +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcX{1}@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\\hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabularx}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[p] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Dispositifs pour les mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features} +% {\small\ttfamily% +% \let\Strut\relax +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}% +% \else +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} +% \thickline +% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&% +% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\\hline +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% %% +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\ +% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\ +% \thickline +% \end{tabularx}% +% \fi} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The command: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{keyword}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% allows you to redefine any of these commands. \emph{mini-table} is one of the mini-table names: +% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{keyword} is one of the followings: \feat{before}, +% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} or \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commands} is either a sequence of commands like \com{clearpage}, +% \com{cleardoublepage}, +% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., either \com{empty} (does nothing). +% \or\relax +% La commande: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{mot-clé}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% vous permet de redéfinir chacune de ces commandes. \emph{mini-table} est l'un des noms de type de mini-table: +% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{mot-clé} est l'un des suivants: \feat{before}, +% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commandes} est soit une séquence de commandes telles que \com{clearpage}, +% \com{cleardoublepage}, \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., soit \com{empty} (ne fait rien). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection[Remark about page styles]{Remark about page styles\,\footnote{This remark is taken and adapted +% from a draft of the second edition of the JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, by +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, where he comments the \upack{minitoc} package.}} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection[Remarque sur les styles de page]{Remarque sur les styles de page\,\footnote{Cette remarque est +% tirée et adaptée d'une version préliminaire de la seconde édition du JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, par +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, où il commente le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \Virage{}default commands for +% part-level mini-tables page styles are defined as being simply a standard \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}| command, +% because in document classes defining the \com{chapter} command (like \class{book} or \class{report}), +% the part-level mini-tables are on their own pages. +% If the document is printed +% recto-verso, the first page is recto. Usually, these pages are not numbered and have no header and no footer. This +% behaviour is a consequence from the default definitions of the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. If you want an +% other behaviour, you can change these definitions. Note that, by default, only the \emph{first} page of these +% mini-tables are in the \texttt{empty} page style. You can set the style of this first page by using +% \com{thispagestyle} and set the style of the following pages by using \com{pagestyle}, but you must not forget +% to reset the normal style after the mini-table. Look at this short theorical example\,\footnote{This example shows that +% the third argument can be a \emph{sequence} of commands: we set the style of the current page and the style of the +% following pages.}: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{pagestyle}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}| +% \end{verse} +% where we add a \com{cleardoublepage} before each parttoc, then we set the \texttt{empty} page style for +% the first page of the parttocs, +% the \texttt{myheadings} page style for the following pages of the parttocs, +% and set \texttt{headings} page style for the pages after the mini-table, after a +% \com{cleardoublepage}. +% \or\relax +% Les\Virage{} commandes par défaut pour les styles de page des mini-tables au niveau partie +% sont définies comme étant simplement \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|, car +% dans les classes de document définissant la commande \com{chapter} (comme \class{book} ou \class{report}), +% les mini-tables au niveau partie sont sur +% leurs propres pages. Si le document est imprimé recto-verso, la première page est recto. Habituellement, ces pages +% ne sont pas numérotées et n'ont ni en-tête ni bas de page. Ce comportement est une conséquence des définitions par défaut +% des commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. Si vous désirez un comportement différent, vous pouvez changer +% ces définitions. Notez que, par défaut, seule la \emph{première} page de ces mini-tables est composée dans le +% style de page \texttt{empty}. Vous pouvez établir le style de cette première page en utilisant +% \com{thispagestyle} et établir le style des pages suivantes en utilisant \com{pagestyle}, mais vous ne devez +% pas oublier de rétablir le style normal après la mini-table. Regardez ce court exemple théorique\,\footnote{Cet exemple +% montre que le troisième argument peut être une \emph{séquence} de commandes: nous établissons le style de la page +% courante et le style des pages suivantes.}: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\ +% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}| +% \end{verse} +% où nous ajoutons une commande \com{cleardoublepage} avant chaque parttoc, puis nous établissons le style de page +% \texttt{empty} pour la première page des parttocs, le style de page \texttt{myheadings} pour les pages +% suivantes des parttocs, et établissons le style de page \texttt{headings} pour les pages après la mini-table, +% après une commande \com{cleardoublepage}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The ``Chapter~0'' Problem (solved)}\label{faq.5} +% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter +% number zero (or even a weirder number). +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Le problème du <<~Chapitre~0~>> (résolu)}\label{faq.5} +% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro~un, mais par le chapitre numéro~zéro (ou même +% portant un numéro plus bizarre). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \begin{description} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item[Before version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \or\relax +% \item[Avant la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To make the \upack{minitoc} +% package work with such documents, you must insert the command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}} +% \end{quote} +% before the \com{dominitoc} and analogous commands. \meta{N}~is the number +% of the first chapter. This command \emph{does not} +% modify the numbering of chapters, you must use a +% \begin{verse} +% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}| +% \end{verse} +% command to get a first chapter +% numbered~0. The \com{firstpartis} and +% \com{firstsectionis} commands are similar for parts and sections with +% a non standard numbering. +% \or\relax +% Pour que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec de tels documents, vous devez insérer la commande: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}} +% \end{quote} +% avant la commande \com{dominitoc} et les commandes analogues. \meta{N}~est le numéro du premier chapitre. Cette +% commande \emph{ne modifie pas} la numérotation des chapitres, vous devez utiliser une commande +% \begin{verse} +% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}| +% \end{verse} +% pour obtenir un premier chapitre numéroté~0. Et les deux commandes \com{firstpartis} +% et \com{firstsectionis} sont similaires pour des parties et sections avec une numérotation non standard. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item[Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \or\relax +% \item[Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commands are now obsolete, as this +% problem has been solved (via the ``absolute'' numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files). +% Thus now they just produce harmless warnings. +% \or\relax +% Ces\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commandes sont désormais obsolètes, car ce problème +% a été résolu (via la numérotation «~absolue~» +% des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables). Elles produisent désormais seulement des avertissements bénins. +% \fi +% \end{description} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \subsection{Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index}\label{special.entries} +% \subsection{Special Entries in the TOC}\label{special.entries} +% \or\relax +% ^^A \subsection{Entrées spéciales pour la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la +% ^^A bibliographie et l'index}\label{special.entries} +% \subsection{Entrées spéciales dans la TdM}\label{special.entries} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} you want to add entries in the Table of Contents for +% objects like the Table of Contents itself, the List of +% Figures, the List of Tables, the Bibliography or the Index, +% you should use the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} +% (package available from the CTAN archives). +% \or\relax +% Si\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} vous souhaitez ajouter des entrées dans la table des matières pour des objets tels que la table de +% matières elle-même, la liste des figures, la liste de tableaux, la bibliographie ou l'index, vous devriez +% utiliser le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} (paquetage disponible sur les archives CTAN). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But these entries are considered as chapters (or sections in +% an article class document) when the \suffix{.toc} file is +% scanned to prepare the minitocs (the \com{dominitoc} phase). +% \or\relax +% Mais ces entrées sont considérées comme des chapitres (ou des sections dans un document de classe article) +% lorsque le fichier est analysé pour préparer les minitocs (la phase \com{dominitoc}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note\imess{I0043} that the same problems appear if you use one of the \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or +% \class{scrartcl} \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} with some options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, +% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, and \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}). +% The solutions are the same ones. +% \or\relax +% Notez\imess{I0043} que les mêmes problèmes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez l'une des classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} +% \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or \class{scrartcl} avec certaines options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, +% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script} et \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}). +% Les solutions sont les mêmes. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So you must add an \com{mtcaddchapter} command, \emph{without +% argument}, after each of the involved commands \com{tableofcontents}, +% \com{listoffigures}, and \com{listoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Donc vous devez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}, \emph{sans argument}, après chacune des commandes +% \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables} mises en jeu. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the bibliography, you should add a \com{adjustmtc} command after the \com{bibliography} command. +% \or\relax +% Pour la bibliographie, vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} après la commande \com{bibliography}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\printglossary} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the glossary, it is a bit more complicated, you should add the +% following commands just after the \com{printglossary} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} this can be done by: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% where the optional argument is the level for the glossary entry in the TOC\@. +% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else +% the \texttt{section} level. +% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is +% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, +% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. +% \or\relax +% Pour le glossaire, c'est un peu plus compliqué; +% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printglossary}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} ceci peut être remplacé par: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée du glossaire dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si +% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. +% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est +% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} de vérifier le résultat et, si +% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the index, it is like for the glossary, you should add the +% following commands just after the \com{printindex} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} this can be done by: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% where the optional argument is the level for the index entry in the TOC\@. +% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else +% the \texttt{section} level. +% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is +% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, +% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. +% \or\relax +% Pour l'index, c'est comme pour le glossaire: +% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printindex}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} ceci peut être remplacé par: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée d'index dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si +% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. +% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est +% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si +% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the nomenclature\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or the \pack{nomentbl} +% package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} calls \pack{nomencl}).}, +% it is like for the glossary, you should add the +% following commands just after the \com{printnomenclature} command: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{W0096}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{E0040}} this can be done by: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% where the optional argument is the level for the nomenclature entry in the TOC\@. +% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else +% the \texttt{section} level. +% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is +% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, +% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. +% \or\relax +% Pour la nomenclature\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le paquetage +% \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} appelle \pack{nomencl}).}, c'est comme pour le glossaire, +% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printnomenclature}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter} +% \end{quote} +% \lneed{3} +% Mais ceci peut être remplacé par: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ +% \end{quote} +% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée de la nomenclature dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si +% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. +% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est +% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \virage\emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si +% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Of course, in documents were the TOC, LOF, LOT, bibliography +% and/or glossary (or index or nomenclature) are processed as starred sections, you must +% modify these additions to use section level commands. +% +% \lneed{5} +% And proceed \virage\emph{with extreme care}, tracking in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file the +% insertion of \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files (and siblings). They are +% some examples in the \exam{mtc-add.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}), +% and \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) files distributed with +% \upack{minitoc}. The \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example shows how much that problem is difficult. +% \or\relax +% Bien sûr, les documents dans lesquels la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la +% bibliographie et/ou le glossaire (ou l'index ou la nomenclature) sont traités comme des sections étoilées, +% modifiez ces additions pour utiliser des commandes au niveau section. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Et procédez \virage\emph{avec grand soin}, en suivant dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} l'insertion des +% fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (et +% analogues). Il y~a divers exemples dans les fichiers +% \exam{mtc-add.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}) et +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) +% distribués avec \upack{minitoc}. +% L'exemple \exam{mtc-ads.tex} montre combien ce problème est difficile. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cite} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This option loads the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in +% sectionning commands or captions: if you then run \BibTeX{} using the \texttt{unsrt} (unsorted) style, or a +% similar style, these citations get numbered starting +% from the page in the table of contents where is the parasite citation, not the number they should have in the main text. +% The \pack{notoccite} package prevents this. As \upack{minitoc} prints TOCs, it is subject to the same problem. +% See also \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}. +% \or\relax +% Cette option charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% Elle évite des problèmes avec des commandes \com{cite} situées dans des commandes de sectionnement ou des +% captions: si vous exécutez alors \BibTeX{} en utilisant le style \texttt{unsrt} (non trié), ou un +% style similaire, ces citations seront numérotées en commençant à~la page de la table des matières où se trouve la +% citation parasite, et non avec le numéro qu'elles auraient dans le texte principal. Le paquetage +% \pack{notoccite} évite ceci. Comme \upack{minitoc} imprime des tables des matières, il est sujet au même +% problème. +% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% The \optd{listfiles} package option creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary files into the +% file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\footnote{This package option is now (since version~\#48) the default (list created).}. +% This feature can help you to remove these auxiliary +% files which are no more necessary after the \LaTeX\ run. +% Under Unix or Linux, you can try: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+ +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} crée une liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc dans le +% fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Cette option de paquetage est désormais (depuis la version~\#48) +% le choix par défaut (liste créée).}. +% Ce dispositif peut vous aider à~supprimer ces +% fichiers auxiliaires qui ne sont plus nécessaires après l'exécution de \LaTeX. +% Sous Unix ou Linux, vous pouvez essayer: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+ +% \end{quote} +% \fi +% ^^A \clearpage +% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This package option detects some actions and the loading of some packages and classes +% known as interacting with \upack{minitoc}, +% and also some frequent misuses and errors. This list of interacting packages and classes is, of course, not closed. +% If a known package is loaded, +% this option writes some hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and +% emits a warning. The hints written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file may suggest you to consult the +% present document or +% the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file. \virage\emph{Your advice about this option will be welcome.} +% This option is activated by default, but you can inhibit it via the \opt{nohints} option. +% The following (potential) problems are currently detected: +% \or\relax +% Cette option du paquetage détecte certaines actions et le chargement de certains paquetages et classes connus pour +% interagir avec \upack{minitoc}, ainsi que certaines mauvaises utilisations et erreurs fréquentes. La liste des +% paquetages et classes qui interagissent n'est évidemment pas close. Si un tel paquetage (ou classe) est chargé, +% cette option écrit quelques indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% et émet un avertissement. Les +% indications écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} peuvent vous suggérer de consulter +% le présent document ou le +% fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}. \virage\emph{Votre avis sur cette option sera le bienvenu.} Cette +% option est activée par défaut, mais vous pouvez l'inhiber via l'option \opt{nohints}. +% Les problèmes (potentiels) suivants sont actuellement détectés: +% \fi +% \begin{itemize} +% \lneed{11} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Alteration of some of the following commands\,\footnote{The commands containing the ``\texttt{@}'' character +% in their names are internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of a package or of a class; they are sometimes altered by +% another packages; reconsider then the loading order of the packages.}: +% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter}, +% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect}, and \com{@ssect}. +% Note that the \pack{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) package alters these commands at +% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, hence this problem might be reported if you use this package, +% but these alterations seem harmless. Note that the \pack{hyperref} must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% L'altération de certaines des commandes suivantes\,\footnote{Les commandes contenant le caractère <<~\texttt{@}~>> +% dans leurs noms sont des commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; elles sont parfois +% altérées par d'autres paquetages; reconsidérez l'ordre de chargement des paquetages.}: +% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter}, +% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect} et \com{@ssect}. +% Mais le paquetage \pack{hyperref} (voir la section~\vref{faq.17}) altère ces commandes lors de +% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, donc ce problème pourrait être signalé si vous utilisez ce paquetage, mais +% ces altérations semblent bénignes. Notez que le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Presence\virage{} of the following packages or classes, which need some precautions: +% \class{amsbook} (class), +% \class{memoir} (class), +% \pack{appendix}, +% \pack{placeins} (beware to its options and its release date (2005/04/18 at least)), +% \class{scrbook} (class), +% \class{scrreprt} (class), +% \class{scrartcl} (class), +% \pack{tocbibind}, and +% \pack{tocloft}. +% \or\relax +% Présence\virage{} des paquetages et classes suivants, qui demandent certaines précautions: +% \class{amsbook} (classe), +% \pack{appendix}, +% \pack{placeins} (attention à~ses options et à~sa date (au moins 2005/04/18)), +% \class{scrbook} (classe), +% \class{scrreprt} (classe), +% \class{scrartcl} (classe), +% \pack{tocbibind} et +% \pack{tocloft}. +% \fi +% \lneed{7} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Presence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}} +% of the following packages or classes, which, unfortunately, are \emph{incompatible} +% with the \upack{minitoc} package: +% \class{amsart} (class), +% \class{amsproc} (class), +% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{This package has its own system for minitocs.}, \class{jura} (class), +% \pack{titlesec}, and +% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}The \upack{titlesec} package redefines +% the sectionning commands in a way +% completely alien to the standard \LaTeX\ way; hence \upack{minitoc} and \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} are +% fundamentaly \emph{incompatible}, and it is very sad.}. +% \or\relax +% Présence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}} +% des paquetages ou classes suivants, qui, malheureusement, sont \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}: +% \class{amsart} (classe), +% \class{amsproc} (classe), +% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage a son propre système de minitocs.}, \class{jura} (classe), +% \pack{titlesec} et +% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}Le paquetage \upack{titlesec} redéfinit les +% commandes de sectionnement d'une manière complètement étrangère à~la manière standard de \LaTeX; +% donc \upack{minitoc} et \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} sont fondamentalement incompatibles, +% et ceci est fort regrettable.}. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~, +% usage of \com{sectlot} without calling \com{dosectlot}; +% or the reverse. +% \or\relax +% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~, +% utilisation de \com{sectlot} sans appeler \com{dosectlot}; +% ou l'inverse. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, of \com{sectlot} +% without calling \fkcom{listoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, de +% \com{sectlot} sans appeler \fkcom{listoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{8} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Usage of \com{sectlof} and/or \com{sectlot} without +% using the \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option of \upack{minitoc} +% (or the \pack{placeins} package without +% its \optp{section}{placeins} option). +% \or\relax +% Utilisation de \com{sectlof} et/ou \com{sectlot} sans utiliser l'option de paquetage +% \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} de \upack{minitoc} (ou le paquetage \pack{placeins} +% sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} +% you are using short extensions (because of your operating system or the \opt{shortext} +% package option, see section~\vref{MS-DOS}) and go beyond the limit of 99~parts, chapters or sections, +% the \optd{hints} package option displays a warning. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} +% vous utilisez des suffixes courts (à~cause de votre système d'exploitation ou de l'option de paquetage +% \opt{shortext}, voyez à~la section~\vref{MS-DOS}) et que vous allez au-delà de la +% limite de 99~parties, chapitres ou sections, +% l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} signale un avertissement. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.abstract} +% If the \pack{abstract}\imess{I0040} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its +% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents, +% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section. +% This is detected and you should add a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| +% command after your \env{abstract} environment. +% \or\relax\label{h.abstract} +% Si le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé +% avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou équivalente) est ajoutée +% à~la table des matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe de document définit \com{chapter}, sinon +% comme une section étoilée. Ceci est détecté et vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou +% \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sectsty} +% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. The interaction has been pointed out +% by \name{Bil}{Kleb}. +% \or\relax\label{h.sectsty} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. L'interaction a été signalée par +% \name{Bil}{Kleb}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.varsects} +% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} +% (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.varsects} +% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} +% (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.fncychap} +% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} +% (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.fncychap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} +% (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.hangcaption} +% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} +% (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.hangcaption} +% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} +% (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.quotchap} +% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} +% (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.quotchap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} +% (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.romannum} +% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} +% (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.romannum} +% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} +% (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sfheaders} +% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} +% (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.sfheaders} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} +% (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.alnumsec} +% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} +% (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.alnumsec} +% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} +% (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.captcont} +% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} +% (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.captcont} +% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} +% (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \item +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption} +% If one of the \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; +% now use the \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (written by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (written by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption} +% Si l'un des +% paquetages \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez +% maintenant le paquetage \upack{caption}.}, (tous deux écrits par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{4} +% \bigskip +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat} +% If one of the\imess{I0053} \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, or \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages +% is used, you must remember that \emph{you can not use} the \upack{minitoc} facilities for preparing +% mini-tables of floats of the new defined types. +% \or\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat} +% Si\imess{I0053} l'un des paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} ou \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} +% est utilisé, vous devez vous souvenir que \emph{vous ne pouvez pas utiliser} les facilités +% de \upack{minitoc} pour préparer des mini-tables de flottants des types nouvellement définis. +% \fi +% \bigskip +% \lneed{4} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{I0006} you try to insert empty mini-tables, the \optd{hints} option gives a global warning (except if you +% used also the \opt{nocheckfiles} option, see section~\vref{s+placing}). +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{I0006} vous essayez d'insérer des mini-tables vides, l'option \optd{hints} vous donne un avertissement +% global (sauf si vous avez aussi utilisé l'option \opt{nocheckfiles}, voyez la +% section~\vref{s+placing}). +% \fi +% \bigskip +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you use\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} one of the obsolete commands +% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris}, or \com{firstsectionis}), +% a warning is issued for each use, of course, but also a global hint as reminder. +% \or\relax +% Si vous utilisez\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} l'une des commandes obsolètes +% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} ou +% \com{firstsectionis}), un avertissement est émis pour chaque utilisation, bien sûr, mais aussi une +% indication (\emph{hint}) globale comme rappel. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{2} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you invoke a same preparation command more than once, an informative hint is issued for each spurious +% invocation. +% \or\relax +% Si vous invoquez une même commande de préparation plus d'une fois, un \emph{hint} informatif est émis pour +% chaque invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \end{itemize} +% ^^A +% ^^A \clearpage +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Usage with MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Under\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS (and other PC oriented old operating systems), +% the filename extensions are limited to 3 characters. +% The \upack{minitoc} package determines dynamically the type of +% extensions available and will use it. +% All other modifications will be done automatically. +% The \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} +% extensions will become \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter +% number. +% The extensions \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} become +% \suffix{.F}\meta{N} and \suffix{.T}\meta{N}. +% The \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} +% extensions become \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute part number. +% The extensions \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} become +% \suffix{.G}\meta{N} and \suffix{.U}\meta{N}. +% The \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} +% extensions become \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute section +% number. +% The extensions \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} become +% \suffix{.H}\meta{N} and \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. All these extensions are listed in table~\vref{t+suffixes}. +% Of course, this implies a limit of 99~chapters in a +% document, but do you really need so many chapters (or sections in an +% article)? The limit of 99~parts does not seem too serious for +% most documents, but for sections, it could be tragical. +% The \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+hints}) will report such situations. +% See also section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \begin{table}[th] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Extensions of the auxiliary files}\label{t+suffixes} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{long extensions}&\textbf{short extensions}\\ +% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\ +% \midrule +% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\ +% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\ +% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\ +% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\ +% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% Sous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS +% (et autres vieux systèmes d'exploitation pour PC), les suffixes des noms de fichiers sont +% limités à~3~caractères. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} détermine dynamiquement le type de suffixes disponible et +% l'utilisera. Toutes les autres modifications seront faites automatiquement. Les suffixes \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} deviendront +% \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de chapitre. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.F}\meta{N} et \suffix{.T}\meta{N}. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.G}\meta{N} et \suffix{.U}\meta{N}. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section. +% Les suffixes \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.H}\meta{N} et \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. +% Tous ces suffixes sont listés dans le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes}. +% Bien sûr, ceci implique une limite de 99~chapitres dans un document, mais avez-vous vraiment besoin d'autant de +% chapitres (ou de sections dans un article)? La limite de 99~parties ne semble pas trop grave pour la plupart des +% documents, mais pour les sections, ceci pourrait être tragique. L'option \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+hints}) +% signalera de telles situations. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \begin{table}[th] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Suffixes des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{t+suffixes} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{suffixes longs}&\textbf{suffixes courts}\\ +% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\ +% \midrule +% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\ +% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\ +% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\ +% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\ +% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\ +% \midrule +% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\ +% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Why several \LaTeX{} runs are required?} +% The mini-tables, at part, chapter and section levels, +% are using some space on the first pages on each chapter, part or section, +% thus the page numbers are altered. After the first \LaTeX\ run, the +% mini-tables and lists, partial tables and lists +% and section-level tables and lists +% will be empty (in fact skipped since version \#35); +% after the second run, they appear (if not empty), +% but because they modify the page numbering, page numbers +% are wrong; after the third \LaTeX\ run, the mini, part- and section-level +% tables and lists should be correct (see figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}). +% \or\relax +% \section{Pourquoi plusieurs exécutions de \LaTeX\ sont-elles nécessaires?} +% Les mini-tables, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section, occupent un certain espace sur les premières pages de +% chaque partie, chapitre ou section, donc la numérotation des pages est altérée. Après la première exécution de +% \LaTeX, les mini-tables (aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section) seront vides (et en fait sautées depuis la +% version~\#35); après la deuxième exécution, elles apparaissent (lorsqu'elles ne sont pas vides), mais puisqu'elles +% modifient la numérotation des pages, les numéros des pages y~sont faux; après la troisième exécution, les +% mini-tables devraient être correctes (voir la figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le paquetage \upack{mtcoff} }\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If a document has been prepared with the \upack{minitoc} package, +% it contains many \upack{minitoc} specific commands, most of them being +% \com{dominitoc}, +% \com{faketableofcontents}, and \com{minitoc} commands (and their +% equivalents for lists of figures and tables). +% If you want to typeset +% this document without any mini-table, you have just to replace the +% \upack{minitoc} package by the \pack{mtcoff} package (without option), and all these +% commands will be ignored, eventually writing warning messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% At least two \LaTeX\ runs will be necessary to get a correct page numbering and cross references. +% It also sanitizes the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, +% \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files from \upack{minitoc} specific +% commands which are now spurious. +% \or\relax +% Si un document a été préparé avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il contient de nombreuses commandes +% spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}, dont la plupart sont des commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{faketableofcontents} et +% \com{minitoc} (et leurs équivalentes pour les listes de figures et de tableaux). +% Si vous souhaitez composer ce document sans aucune mini-table, il vous suffit de remplacer le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (sans option), et toutes ces commandes seront ignorées, en +% écrivant éventuellement des messages d'avertissement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% Au moins deux exécutions +% de \LaTeX\ seront nécessaires pour avoir une numérotation des pages et des références croisées correctes. +% Ceci nettoie aussi les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} en y~éliminant les +% commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc} devenues superflues. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \cleardoublepage +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{FAQ} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Questions fréquemment posées}\label{FAQ} +% \fi +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \minitoc +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \mtcskip +% ^^A \lsneed{5} +% \lneed{6} +% ^^A \mtcskip +% \minilof +% \mtcskip +% \minilot +% +% \addtocounter{section}{-1} ^^A % Trick to get a section numbered zero +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction} +% \or\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about +% the \upack{minitoc.sty} package. If the version has a number less than~61, please +% upgrade to version~\#61. This list is also given in the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file, +% in pure text form. The numbering of this list is done by date of the first occurrence of the question. +% +% If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a)~use the \optd{hints} option (see section~\vref{s+hints}), +% which is activated by default, and b)~read the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, which may contain pertinent +% messages. If you do not find a solution, ask a question on an adequate news group, like \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} +% (in french) or \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english) preferably, groups which I try to follow, or send me a mail +% in last ressort (please join a minimal but complete example~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{See also: +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} +% and \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.} (or~``MCE'') +% reproducing the problem; this example should use the \opt{hints} option). +% \or\relax +% Voici une liste de problèmes et de questions fréquemment posées («~foire aux questions~») à~propos du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. Si votre version a un numéro plus petit que~61, vous êtes priés de faire une mise à~jour +% à~la version~\#61. Cette liste est aussi donnée dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}, sous +% forme de texte pur (et en anglais). La numérotation de cette liste est faite selon la date de la première occurrence +% de la question. +% +% Si un problème survient, il est souvent avisé: a)~d'utiliser l'option \optd{hints} (voir la +% section~\vref{s+hints}), qui est activée par défaut, et b)~de lire le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, qui +% peut contenir des messages pertinents. Si vous ne trouvez pas de solution, posez une question sur un groupe de +% discussion adéquat, tel que \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français), ou \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais) de préférence, +% que j'essaye de suivre, ou envoyez moi un courrier en dernier recours (prière de joindre un exemple complet +% minimal~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{Voir aussi: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} +% et \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.} (ou «~ECM~»\/) reproduisant +% le problème; cet exemple devrait utiliser l'option \opt{hints}). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (1) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Avoiding a page break near the rules before and after a mini-table} +% \or\relax +% \section{Éviter une coupure de page près des filets avant et après une mini-table} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This problem seemed solved since version~\#8, but version~\#12 added better fixes. +% You may have to make some final tuning with \com{enlargethispage}. +% See the \LaTeX\ manual~\cite{latex-manual}. +% The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} may also be useful. +% \or\relax +% Ce problème semblait résolu depuis la version~\#8, mais la version~\#12 a ajouté de meilleures corrections. Vous +% pouvez devoir faire quelques ajustements ultimes avec \com{enlargethispage}. Voir le manuel +% \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual}. Il peut aussi être utile d'utiliser le paquetage +% \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (2) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Implementing others layouts for a mini-table} +% \or\relax +% \section{Implanter d'autres mises en page pour une mini-table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Suggestions are welcome, but look at the section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% There are yet some examples in chapter~\vref{c+exdocs}, for some layouts, like mini-tables on two or three columns. +% \or\relax +% Les suggestions sont les bienvenues, mais voyez la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% Il y~a quelques exemples dans le chapitre~\vref{c+exdocs}, pour quelques mises en page, comme des mini-tables +% sur deux ou trois colonnes. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (3) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{A ``\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}'' command in a contents line makes an error} +% \or\relax +% \section{Une commande «~\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}~» dans une entrée de contenu provoque une erreur} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macro}{\linebreak} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Use \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. The \verb|\\| command should be used only in tabular material (\env{tabular} +% environment and similar, or in the +% \env{tabbing} environment) and in math arrays and equations, or in the \env{quote}-like environments. +% \or\relax +% Utilisez \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. La commande \verb|\\| ne devrait être utilisée que dans du matériel +% de tableau (environnement \env{tabular} ou similaire, ou dans l'environnement \env{tabbing}) et dans les +% tableaux (\emph{arrays}) et équations mathématiques, ou dans des environnements similaires à~\env{quote}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (4) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Reordering chapters makes havoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{Changer l'ordre des chapitres crée le chaos} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{If you reorder chapters, havoc follows\ldots\ mini-tables +% going in wrong chapters.} +% \or\relax +% \emph{Si vous changez l'ordre des chapitres, le chaos en découle,\ldots\ +% avec les mini-tables allant dans les mauvais chapitres.} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The best way seems to make one run with the \pack{mtcoff} +% package replacing the \upack{minitoc} package, then restore +% the \upack{minitoc} package and re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times +% (yes, it is time consuming\ldots). See figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}\footnote{I~used the \pack{pict2e} +% package~\cite{pict2e}, by \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} and \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, to prepare this figure.}. +% Running with the \pack{mtcoff} package ensures that the standard auxiliary files +% are cleared from ``spurious'' commands introduced by \upack{minitoc}. +% A more radical solution is to delete the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, +% \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files relative to the document, then +% re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times. +% \or\relax +% La meilleure méthode semble d'effectuer une exécution avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} remplaçant +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, puis de rétablir le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au +% moins trois fois (oui, cela prend du temps\ldots). Voir la figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le +% paquetage \pack{pict2e}~\cite{pict2e}, de \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} +% et \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, +% pour préparer cette figure.}. +% Exécuter avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} +% garantit que les fichiers auxiliaires standard seront purgés des commandes «~superflues~» introduites par +% \upack{minitoc}. Une solution plus radicale est de détruire les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} +% et \suffix{.lot} relatifs au document, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au moins trois fois. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{figure}[tp] +% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize +% \def\NUM{\meta{N}} +% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{% +% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0) +% \thicklines +% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}} +% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}} +% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}} +% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}} +% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}} +% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}} +% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}} +% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}} +% \end{picture}} +% \egroup +% \begin{flushleft} +% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt +% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of +% contents, which is likely inaccurate. +% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are likely inaccurate. +% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of contents, which is accurate. +% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are accurate. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{minipage} +% \end{flushleft} +% \caption{Three compilations for \upack{minitoc}}\label{fig+mtc+3comp} +% \end{figure} +% \or\relax +% \begin{figure}[tp] +% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize +% \def\NUM{\meta{N}} +% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{% +% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0) +% \thicklines +% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}} +% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}} +% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} +% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} +% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} +% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}} +% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}} +% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}} +% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}} +% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}} +% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}} +% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} +% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}} +% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}} +% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}} +% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} +% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} +% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}} +% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}} +% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}} +% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}} +% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}} +% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}} +% \end{picture}} +% \egroup +% \begin{flushleft} +% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize +% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt +% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement inexacte. +% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement inexactes. +% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement exacte. +% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement exactes. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{minipage} +% \end{flushleft} +% \caption{Trois compilations pour \upack{minitoc}}\label{fig+mtc+3comp} +% \end{figure} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (5) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Extensions for the names of auxiliary files}\label{.8+3} +% \or\relax +% \section{Suffixes pour les noms des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{.8+3} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{This package creates auxiliary files with extensions like \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. +% Some operating systems allow only 3~characters extensions. What to do?}\par +% \lneed{3} +% No\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification is needed: all became automatic since +% version \#28! If you insist to use 3~characters extensions, +% even on operating systems allowing more, just use the package +% option \opt{shortext}. Then you will get first the +% autoconfiguration messages, then a message saying that you +% will use short extensions. But then be careful to not have more +% than 99~mini-tables of the same kind (even empty)! +% \or\relax +% \emph{Ce paquetage crée des fichiers auxiliaires ayant des suffixes tels que \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. Certains +% systèmes d'exploitation ne permettent que des suffixes limités à~3~caractères. Que faire?}\par +% \lneed{3} +% Aucune\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification n'est nécessaire: +% tout est devenu automatique depuis la version \#28! Si vous voulez vraiment +% utiliser des suffixes de 3~caractères, utilisez simplement l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}. +% Alors vous recevrez d'abord les messages d'autoconfiguration, puis un message disant que vous allez +% utiliser des suffixes courts. +% Mais alors faites attention à~ne pas avoir plus 99~mini-tables du même type (même vides)! +% \fi +% +% ^^A (6) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Playing with the chapter number} +% \or\relax +% \section{Jouer avec le numéro de chapitre} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{Do not cheat}\virage{} with the ``\texttt{chapter}'' counter, i.e.,~do not write ugly things like: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}| +% \end{verse} +% The mechanism would break. It is better to add \com{chapter} commands, +% to create empty (but numbered in a legal way) chapters. +% Since version~\#10, the \upack{minitoc} package works with appendices. +% Version \#19 allows to begin with a chapter other that number~1. +% ^^A And look at~``Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index'', section~\vref{special.entries}. +% And look at~``Special Entries in the TOC'', section~\vref{special.entries}. +% +% Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08), the numbering of chapters and that of minitocs are independent, so that problem just +% vanished. +% +% The same remarks apply to the \texttt{part} and \texttt{section} counters. +% \or\relax +% \emph{Ne trichez pas}\virage{} avec le compteur «~\texttt{chapter}~», donc n'écrivez pas des horreurs telles que: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}| +% \end{verse} +% Ceci casserait la mécanique du paquetage. Il vaut mieux ajouter des commandes \com{chapter}, afin de +% créer des chapitres vides (mais numérotés d'une manière légale). Depuis la version~\#10, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% fonctionne avec les appendices. +% La version \#19 vous permet de commencer par un chapitre numéroté autrement que un. +% Et regardez «~Entrées spéciales dans la TdM~», section~\vref{special.entries}. +% +% Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08), la numérotation des chapitres et celle des minitocs sont indépendantes, +% donc ce problème a disparu. +% +% Les mêmes remarques s'appliquent aux compteurs \texttt{part} et \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (7) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Supported document classes}\label{s+supported+classes} +% \or\relax +% \section{Classes de document supportées}\label{s+supported+classes} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{W0017} \upack{minitoc} package is restricted to document classes which define +% chapters in the standard way, like ``\class{book}'' and ``\class{report}'', +% or sections in the standard way, like ``\class{article}''~\cite{classes}. +% There are ``parttocs'' if the document class defines the \com{part} command. +% Note that classes like ``\class{letter}''~\cite{letter}, which have not the classical sectionning structure, cannot be +% supported. Classes using sectionning commands with other names are not supported\,\footnote{This would be +% very difficult: any user can create new sectionning commands (often with the help from some packages) with +% standard or new names; this is only limited by the imagination. The \upack{minitoc} package relies on the +% names of the standard sectionning commands and on the syntax of these commands.}. +% See also section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{W0017} paquetage \upack{minitoc} est restreint aux classes de document qui définissent les chapitres +% de la manière standard, comme «~\class{book}~» et «~\class{report}~», ou les sections de la manière standard, +% comme «~\class{article}~»~\cite{classes}. Il y~a des «~parttocs~» si la classe de document définit +% la commande \com{part}. Notez que des classes telles que «~\class{letter}~»~\cite{letter}, +% qui n'ont pas la structure de sectionnement classique, ne +% peuvent pas être supportées. Les classes utilisant des commandes de sectionnement portant d'autres noms ne sont +% pas supportées\,\footnote{Ce serait très difficile: tout utilisateur peut créer de nouvelles commandes de +% sectionnement (souvent à~l'aide de certains paquetages) portant des noms standard ou nouveaux; ceci n'est limité +% que par l'imagination. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} s'appuie sur les noms des commandes de sectionnement standard +% et sur la syntaxe de ces commandes.}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (8) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX{} versions} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compatibilité avec les versions de \LaTeX{}} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{W0021} users have failed to make \upack{minitoc} to work. They got a message like: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.| +% \verb|Trying to continue...| +% \end{verse} +% or:\imess{W0022} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| +% \end{verse} +% The \com{reset@font} command has been added to \xfile{latex.tex} +% on September~29th, 1991 and the \com{@inputcheck} command +% on March~18th, 1992 and this version of \xfile{latex.tex} has been +% released on March~25th, 1992. If you get this message, you +% have an old version of \xfile{latex.tex}. Get a recent one from +% the archives (or a recent distribution) +% and regenerate a \xfile{latex.fmt} format via \texttt{initex} (or your configuration tool). +% \or\relax +% Certains\imess{W0021} utilisateurs ne sont pas parvenus à~faire fonctionner \upack{minitoc}. +% Ils ont reçu un message tel que: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.| +% \verb|Trying to continue...| +% \end{verse} +% ou:\imess{W0022} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ +% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\ +% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| +% \end{verse} +% La commande \com{reset@font} a été ajoutée à~\xfile{latex.tex} le 29~septembre 1991, et la commande +% \com{@inputcheck} le 18~mars 1992, et cette version de \xfile{latex.tex} a été distribuée le 25~mars 1992. Si +% vous obtenez un tel message, vous avez une vieille version de \xfile{latex.tex}. Obtenez une version récente +% depuis les archives (ou une distribution récente) +% et régénérez un format \xfile{latex.fmt} via \texttt{initex} (ou votre outil de configuration). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (9) +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Other mini-tables}\label{faq.9} +% \or\relax +% \section{Autres mini-tables}\label{faq.9} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some demanding users want to have minilof, minilot and +% minibbl (mini-bibliographies per part, chapter or section). First, ``minibbl'' is another problem, strongly +% related to the \BibTeX's dealing with \suffix{.aux} files. Look +% at the \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits}, +% \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic}, and \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib} packages. +% Version~\#13 has implemented basic minilofs and minilots. +% Minibbls are not the aim of this package\footnote{See {\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}. +% \or\relax +% Certains utilisateurs exigeants désirent avoir des minilofs, minilots et minibbls. Tout d'abord, les «~minibbls~» +% (mini-bibliographies par partie, chapitre ou section) sont un autre problème, +% fortement lié au traitement par \BibTeX\ des fichiers \suffix{.aux}. +% Regardez les paquetages \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits}, +% \pack{multibib}~\cite{bibunits}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic} et \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib}. +% La version~\#13 a implanté les minilofs et minilots basiques. Les minibbls ne sont pas l'objet de ce +% paquetage{\froff\,\footnote{Voir~: \froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (10) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Why so many auxiliary files?}\label{faq.10} +% \or\relax +% \section{Pourquoi autant de fichiers auxiliaires?}\label{faq.10} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This package creates a lot of auxiliary files and some users +% have argued that it is too many. A deep redesign would be +% necessary to avoid that. Using only one big auxiliary file +% (or one for all minitocs, one for all minilofs, \ldots) +% would make the reading of such file very slow, as it would +% be read for each \ucom{miniXXX} macro! +% Moreover, this would make the \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package +% option impractical to implement. +% Note that the many files \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., may be +% deleted after the \LaTeX{} run. They are rebuilt by the preparation commands +% (like \com{dominitoc} and siblings). +% But, since version \#35, +% \upack{minitoc} is able to detect and skip empty \uxfile{*.mtc*} files +% (and siblings) to avoid ugly titles with just two thin rules. +% It would not be easy to do with only one big auxiliary file. +% Since version \#44, the \optd{listfiles} package option is available to create a list of these auxiliary +% files; see section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \or\relax +% Ce paquetage crée des tas de fichiers auxiliaires et certains utilisateurs ont argué qu'il y en avait trop. +% Une réorganisation profonde serait nécessaire pour éviter ce grand nombre. Utiliser un seul grand fichier +% auxiliaire (ou un pour toutes les minitocs, un pour toutes les minilofs, etc.) rendrait la lecture de ce +% fichier très lente, car il devrait être lu pour chaque commande \ucom{miniXXX}! De plus, ceci +% rendrait l'implantation de l'option \optd{checkfiles} (section~\vref{s+placing}) pratiquement impossible. +% Notez que les nombreux fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., peuvent être détruits après l'exécution de \LaTeX. +% Ils sont reconstruits par les commandes de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc} et ses analogues). +% Mais, depuis la version \#35, \upack{minitoc} est capable de détecter et sauter les fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*} (et +% analogues) vides pour éviter des titres isolés avec seulement deux filets fins. +% Tout ceci ne serait pas facile à~faire avec un seul gros fichier auxiliaire. +% Depuis la version \#44, l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est disponible pour créer une liste de ces +% fichiers auxiliaires; voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{5} +% These files contain the mini-tables extracted from the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files. +% They are no more useful after the \LaTeX\ run. If you run \LaTeX\ via a script or a ``makefile'', it may be +% useful to add to it a cleaning feature (which should be optional, to allow debugging). The +% table~\vref{t+suffixes} gives the list of the extensions for these files (note that a \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} +% auxiliary file is also created as a scratch file). +% +% As an example, you can look at the \tool{rubber} tool~\cite{rubber} +% (written in Python) provided by \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}: +% \begin{quote} +% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% Ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables extraites des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. +% Ils ne sont plus utiles après l'exécution de \LaTeX. Si vous exécutez \LaTeX\ au moyen d'un script ou +% d'un «~makefile~», il peut être utile de lui ajouter un dispositif de nettoyage (qui devrait être optionnel, +% pour permettre la mise au point). Le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} donne la liste des suffixes pour ces fichiers +% (notez qu'un fichier auxiliaire \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi créé comme fichier de travail). +% +% Comme exemple, vous pouvez regarder l'outil \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} +% (écrit en Python) fourni par \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}: +% {\froff\begin{quote} +% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} +% \end{quote}} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (11) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-tables at levels other than chapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-tables à~des niveaux autres que le chapitre} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here also, some redesign was needed. From version~\#15, there are parttocs, partlofs and +% partlots for the part level in \class{book}\texttt{\BAR}\class{report}-like and \class{article}-like documents, +% secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots for the section level in \class{article}-like +% documents. Note that you can not have minitocs features at chapter +% and section level in the same document, because doing so would make +% an almost unreadable monster. The user must choose the main class of +% the document according to the size of it (e.g.,~do not write an article +% of more than 100~sections: this is a report, or even a book!). +% +% \begin{center}\ttfamily +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{center} +% \or\relax +% Ici aussi, une reconstruction a été nécessaire. Depuis la version~\#15, il y a des parttocs, partlofs et partlots +% pour le niveau partie dans les documents dont la classe est similaire +% à~\class{book}, \class{report} ou \class{article}, +% des secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots pour le niveau section dans les documents dont la classe est similaire +% à~\class{article}. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas avoir les dispositifs de \upack{minitoc} aux niveaux chapitre et +% section dans le même document, car cela produirait un monstre presque illisible. L'utilisateur doit choisir la classe de +% base du document selon la taille de celui-ci (par exemple, ne pas écrire un article de plus de 100~sections: c'est +% un rapport, ou même un livre!). +% \begin{center}\ttfamily +% \ifBT +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \midrule +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \else +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \thickline +% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ +% \hline +% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline +% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{center} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (12) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Incompatibility with \LaTeX2.09} +% \or\relax +% \section{Incompatibilité avec \LaTeX2.09} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The more recent version of \LaTeXe{} adds \com{protect} before +% \com{contentsline} in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lof} +% files. The version~\#17 of \upack{minitoc} attempts to be compatible with \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX2.09. +% This will be the \emph{last} +% version usable with \LaTeX2.09. Versions~\#18 and later are \LaTeXe{} specific, and no more compatible +% with \LaTeX2.09, which is completely obsolete. +% \or\relax +% La version la plus récente de \LaTeXe{} ajoute \com{protect} avant \com{contentsline} dans +% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lof}. La version~\#17 de \upack{minitoc} tente d'être compatible +% avec \LaTeXe{} et \LaTeX2.09. Ce sera la \emph{dernière} version utilisable avec \LaTeX2.09. Les versions~\#18 et +% ultérieures sont spécifiques de \LaTeXe, et ne sont plus compatibles avec \LaTeX2.09, qui est totalement obsolète. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (13) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Documents resetting the chapter number at each part} +% \or\relax +% \section{Documents ré-initialisant le numéro de chapitre pour chaque partie} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} works with document classes resetting +% chapter (or section) number at each part (or chapter). This is possible because the auxiliary files for the +% mini-tables have now an \emph{absolute} number. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec les classes de document qui ré-initialisent le numéro de +% chapitre (ou de section) pour chaque partie (ou chapitre). Ceci est possible car les fichiers auxiliaires pour les +% mini-tables ont désormais un numéro \emph{absolu}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (14) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The mini-tables have too much spaced lines} +% From version~\#29, you can have tight mini-tables with the \opt{tight} option, and +% with the \opt{k-tight} option for the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (since version~\#43). +% \or\relax +% \section{Les mini-tables ont leurs lignes trop espacées} +% Depuis la version~\#29, vous pouvez avoir des mini-tables plus resserrées avec l'option \opt{tight}, +% avec l'option \opt{k-tight} pour les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (depuis la version~\#43). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (15) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The secttocs are wrong} +% Secttocs did not work: corrected (version~\#38). +% \or\relax +% \section{Les secttocs sont fausses} +% Les secttocs ne fonctionnent pas: corrigé (version~\#38). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (16) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Removing the lines of dots} +% The lines of dots (leaders) between section titles and page numbers are removed by the \opt{undotted} +% option (\#29). See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Retirer les points de conduite} +% Les lignes de points (points de conduite) entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages sont retirés par +% l'option \opt{undotted} (\#29). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (17) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Using the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version~\#31, \upack{minitoc} works correctly with the powerful \pack{hyperref} +% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% using the work of \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and should no more be used. +% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.} +% If you add the loading of the \pack{hyperref} package to a document yet using \upack{minitoc}, +% you will get error message about spurious closing braces. Just let finish the \LaTeX\ run, +% then re-\LaTeX\ the document. There will be no problem if you remove the loading of +% \pack{hyperref} and add it again: the problem occurs only when upgrading from +% \upack{minitoc}~\#30 to \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) with a document already processed and adding +% \pack{hyperref} at the same time! It seems better to process the document with \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) +% without \pack{hyperref}, then with \pack{hyperref}, because some internal commands written +% into the auxiliary files have been modified. If used, the \pack{hyperref} package must be loaded \emph{before} +% \upack{minitoc}. Note that the documents \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} show (not so) basic examples +% of the use of the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne enfin correctement avec le puissant paquetage +% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, grâce à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a utilisé les travaux de +% \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \emph{Donc\Virage{} le paquetage \pack{minitoc-hyper}~\cite{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être +% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.} +% Si vous ajoutez le chargement du paquetage \pack{hyperref} à~un +% document utilisant déjà \upack{minitoc}, vous recevrez un message d'erreur concernant des accolades fermantes en +% trop. Il suffit de laisser se terminer l'exécution de \LaTeX, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ sur le document. Il n'y +% aura aucun problème si vous enlevez le chargement de \pack{hyperref} puis l'ajoutez de nouveau; ce problème ne +% se produit que lorsque vous passez de \upack{minitoc} version~\#30 à~\upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) +% avec un document déjà traité et en ajoutant \pack{hyperref} en même temps! Il semble préférable de traiter le +% document avec \upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) sans \pack{hyperref}, puis avec \pack{hyperref}, +% parce que certaines commandes internes écrites dans les fichiers auxiliaires ont été modifiées. S'il est utilisé, +% le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}. Notez que les documents +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} montrent des exemples (qui ne sont pas vraiment) basiques de +% l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (18) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Problem while upgrading \upack{minitoc}} +% If upgrading from version~\#30 or lower to +% version~\#31 or higher, you should delete the \suffix{.aux}, +% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} files of the document, +% else the first \LaTeX{} run with version~\#31 or higher will +% produce a lot of errors (the next run should be ok). See also the section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Problème lors de la mise à~jour de \upack{minitoc}} +% Lors de la mise à~jour de la version~\#30 ou inférieure vers la version~\#31 ou supérieure, vous devriez détruire +% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} du document, sinon la première exécution de \LaTeX{} avec +% la version~\#31 ou supérieure produira beaucoup d'erreurs (l'exécution suivante devrait être correcte). Voir aussi +% la section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (19) +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{A local TOC for the set of appendices}\label{faq.19}% +% \or\relax +% \section{Une TdM locale pour l'ensemble des appendices}\label{faq.19}% +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some users need a table of contents for the appendices, +% but without putting the entries of it into the main table of +% contents. The solution is to put the appendices in a \com{part} +% subdivision of the document and ask for a table of contents at +% the \com{part} level: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % after \begin{document}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \com{appendix}\\ +% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % create a part level subdivision|\\ +% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % create a local table of contents|\\ +% \verb|% To suppress the appendix part in the main toc|\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\ +% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{First appendix}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \verb|% Add this at the end of appendices if there is something|\\ +% \verb|% after the appendices (like an index or a bibliography)|\\ +% \verb|% to put a bound to the contents of \parttoc|\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}| +% \end{verse} +% See also section~\vref{faq.25}. +% \or\relax +% Certains utilisateurs ont besoin d'une table des matières pour les appendices, mais sans mettre les entrées de +% cette table dans la table des matières principale. Une solution est de mettre les appendices dans une subdivision +% \com{part} du document et de demander une table des matières au niveau de cette partie: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % après \begin{document}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \com{tableofcontents}\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \icom{appendix}\verb|\appendix|\\ +% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % crée une subdivision de niveau partie|\\ +% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % crée une table des matières locale|\\ +% \verb|% Pour supprimer la partie appendices dans la TdM principale|\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\ +% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{Premier appendice}|\\ +% \verb|. . .|\\ +% \verb|% Ajoutez ceci à la fin des appendices s'il y a quelque chose|\\ +% \verb|% après les appendices (comme un index ou une bibliographie)|\\ +% \verb|% pour placer une borne au contenu de \parttoc|\\ +% \icom{atttocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}| +% \end{verse} +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.25}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (20) +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{environment}{appendices} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you use the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} +% you will observe a serious problem with minitocs in the \env{appendices} environment +% (and after it): they do not +% match with their respective appendices. In fact, the environnement opening \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| hides a +% \com{addcontentsline} command for a chapter or a section, putting trouble +% in the numbering of minitocs or secttocs. Several solutions are available. The first one is to add a +% \com{adjustmtc} or \com{adjuststc} command +% (depending on the level of the appendices, chapter or section) after \emph{each} +% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}} command. +% An other solution is to add the following commands in the preamble +% \emph{after} the loading of the \pack{appendix} package: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}| +% \end{verse} +% if appendices are at the chapter level, OR: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}| +% \end{verse} +% if appendices are at the section level. +% +% These two solutions may be modified by replacing \com{adjustmtc} by the sequence: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\ +% OR\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}| +% \end{quote} +% when it is necessary to delimit the end of the preceding chapter or section\,\footnote{In fact, the commands +% \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} and \com{sectend} should not be used directly by the user, in normal circumstances.}. +% +% A rather more elegant solution is to add an entry into the TOC via the \com{addappheadtotoc} command offered by +% the \pack{appendix} package. As this entry is a chapter-level (or section-level) entry, it delimits correctly +% the end of the preceding chapter or section. +% +% See also the \exam{mtc-amm.tex} example file (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}), +% which uses the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, +% which includes itself the \pack{appendix} package functionnality (these packages and this class are from the same author). +% \or\relax +% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} vous observerez un +% sérieux problème avec les minitocs dans l'environnement \env{appendices} (et après lui): elles ne correspondent +% pas avec leurs appendices respectifs. En fait, l'ouverture de l'environnement par \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| dissimule une +% commande \com{addcontentsline} pour un chapitre ou une section, semant le trouble dans la numérotation des +% minitocs ou secttocs. Plusieurs solutions sont disponibles. La première consiste à~ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} +% ou \com{adjuststc} (selon que les appendices sont au niveau chapitre ou section) après \emph{chaque} commande +% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}}. Une autre solution est d'ajouter les commandes suivantes dans le préambule +% \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \pack{appendix}: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}| +% \end{verse} +% si les appendices sont au niveau chapitre, OU: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ +% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}| +% \end{verse} +% si les appendices sont au niveau section. +% +% Ces deux solutions peuvent être modifiées en remplaçant \com{adjustmtc} par la séquence: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\ +% OU\\ +% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}| +% \end{quote} +% lorsqu'il est nécessaire de délimiter la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) précédent(e)\,\footnote{En fait, les +% commandes \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} et \com{sectend} ne devraient pas être appelées directement par +% l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales.}. +% +% Une solution plus élégante consiste à~ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières via la +% commande \com{addappheadtotoc} fournie par le paquetage \pack{appendix}. Comme cette entrée est une entrée +% au niveau chapitre (ou au niveau section), elle délimite correctement la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) +% précédent(e). +% +% Voir aussi le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex} (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}), +% qui utilise la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, +% qui inclut elle-même la fonctionnalité du paquetage \pack{appendix} (ces paquetages et cette classe sont du même auteur). +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (21) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% (This\imess{I0047} answer is given in the documentation of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}.) +% The \pack{tocloft} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) and \upack{minitoc} packages +% have an unfortunate interaction\,\footnote{Discovered by \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, which fortunately can be fixed. +% In the normal course of events, when \upack{minitoc} is used in a chaptered +% document it will typeset section +% entries in the minitocs in bold font. If \pack{tocloft} is used in +% conjunction with \upack{minitoc}, then the minitoc section entries are +% typeset in the normal font, except for the page numbers which are in +% bold font, while the ToC section entries are all in normal font. +% +% One cure, if you want the minitoc section entries to be all in normal small +% font, is to put: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% or: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% in the preamble. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Otherwise, the cure is the following incantation: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}| +% \end{verse} +% To have the section entries in both the ToC and the minitocs in bold then +% put the incantation in the preamble. To have only the minitoc section +% entries in bold while the ToC entries are in the normal font, +% put the incantation between the \com{tableofcontents} +% command and the first \com{chapter} command. +% +% As \pack{tocloft} is a very powerful and useful package, these cures are worth to be added if you need the +% benefits of this package. See also section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \or\relax +% (Cette\imess{I0047} réponse est donnée dans la documentation du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}.) +% Les paquetages \pack{tocloft} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) et \upack{minitoc} ont une fâcheuse +% interaction\,\footnote{Découverte par \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, qui, heureusement, peut être corrigée. +% Dans le cours normal des choses, lorsque \upack{minitoc} est utilisé dans un document avec chapitres, il +% composera les entrées de sections dans une fonte grasse. Si \pack{tocloft} est utilisé en conjonction avec +% \upack{minitoc}, alors les entrées de sections dans les minitocs sont composées dans la fonte normale, sauf pour +% les numéros de pages qui sont en fonte grasse, tandis que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières +% principale sont entièrement en fonte normale. +% +% Un remède, si vous voulez que toutes des entrées de sections dans les minitocs soient en fonte normale, est de +% placer: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% ou: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}| +% \end{verse} +% dans le préambule. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Sinon, le remède est l'incantation suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\ +% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}| +% \end{verse} +% Pour que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs soient toutes en gras, +% placez l'incantation dans le préambule. Pour que ces entrées soient en gras dans les minitocs mais en fonte +% normale dans la table des matières principale, placez l'incantation entre la commande \com{tableofcontents} et +% la première commande \com{chapter}. +% +% Puisque \pack{tocloft} est un paquetage très puissant et très utile, cela vaut la peine d'ajouter ces remèdes si +% vous voulez profiter des avantages de ce paquetage. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (22) +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir} +% \fi +% \SMMZZ{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offers basically the functionnalities +% of the \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} +% and \pack{tocloft} packages (this class and these packages have the same author, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), +% hence it has the same problems; +% see above the available solutions (sections~\vref{faq+appendix}, +% \vref{special.entries}, and~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectively). +% If your version of the \class{memoir} class is recent, the syntax of the \com{chapter} command is +% different and the \class{memoir} class \emph{could be no more compatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, but a +% patch is inserted to fix the problem. Hopefully, if your version of the \class{memoir} class +% is more recent than 2005/09/25, the patch is no more necessary. +% +% If you are using the \class{memoir} class (or the \pack{tocloft} package), +% the \com{mtcsetfont} command has no effect (\com{mtcsettitlefont} works); you should use the font +% commands which are specific of the \class{memoir} class (or of the \pack{tocloft} package). +% +% If you still want to use the \com{mtcsetfont} commands while using the \class{memoir} class (or of the +% \pack{tocloft} package), you must disable the \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft} font commands. This is done by +% the following commands: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax| +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% La classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offre essentiellement les fonctionnalités des +% paquetages \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} et \pack{tocloft} (cette classe et ces paquetages ont +% le même auteur, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), +% et donc elle a les mêmes problèmes; voir ci-dessus les solutions disponibles (sections~\vref{faq+appendix}, +% \vref{special.entries} et~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectivement). +% Si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente, la syntaxe de la commande \com{chapter} +% est différente et la classe \class{memoir} \emph{pourrait n'être plus compatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% mais une modification est insérée pour corriger le problème. Heureusement, si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} +% est plus récente que 2005/09/25, la correction n'est plus nécessaire. +% +% Si vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir} (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), la commande \com{mtcsetfont} +% n'a aucun effet (\com{mtcsettitlefont} fonctionne); vous devriez utiliser les commandes de fontes qui +% sont spécifiques de la classe \class{memoir} (ou du paquetage \pack{tocloft}). +% +% Si vous souhaitez quand même utiliser les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} tout en utilisant la classe \class{memoir} +% (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), vous devez désactiver les commandes de fontes de \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft}. +% Ceci peut être fait par les commandes suivantes: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\ +% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax| +% \end{quote} +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (23) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{There are too many commands for fonts, titles, and depths} +% \or\relax +% \section{Il y a trop de commandes pour les fontes, les titres et les profondeurs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version \#41, the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands are available. You do not need anymore +% to know \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#41, les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} sont disponibles. Vous +% n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version \#42, the \com{mtcsettitle} command is available. +% You do not need anymore to know \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#42, la commande \com{mtcsettitle} est disponible. +% Vous n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since version \#43, the \com{mtcsetdepth} command is available. +% You do not need anymore to know the counters \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc. +% \or\relax +% Depuis la version \#43, la commande \com{mtcsetdepth} est disponible. +% n'avez plus besoin de connaître les compteurs \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (24) +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section[Compatibility with the \texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}} document classes]% +% {Compatibility with the {\AmS} document classes}\label{s+AMS} +% This problem has been pointed out by \name{Henri}{Massias}. +% \or\relax +% \section[Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'\texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}}]% +% {Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'{\AmS}}\label{s+AMS} +% Ce problème a été signalé par \name{Henri}{Massias}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Unfortunately, the \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart} +% and \class{amsproc} document classes are +% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}. +% The \class{amsbook} document class requires the insertion of commands if you want +% a list of figures and/or a list of tables: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{listoffigures}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|\\ +% \com{listoftables}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% Malheureusement, les classes de document \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart} +% et \class{amsproc} sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% La classe de document \class{amsbook} requiert l'insertion de commandes si vous désirez +% une liste des figures et/ou une liste des tableaux: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{listoffigures}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|\\ +% \com{listoftables}\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% ^^A (25) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Hiding some entries from the main table of contents}\label{faq.25}% +% \or\relax +% \section{Cacher certaines entrées dans la table des matières principale}\label{faq.25}% +% \fi +% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is a problem similar to that of section~\vref{faq.19}. +% An example is having a local table of contents for a chapter (\com{minitoc}) whose entries should not appear in +% the main table of contents. Just use the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Title}\texttt{\}}\\ +% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{level}\texttt{]}\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sub-title}\texttt{\}}\\ +% .{}.{}.\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}} +% \end{quote} +% This environment accepts an optional numeric argument, which is the depth of hiding in the main toc (default: +% \texttt{-1}, complete hiding). +% You can look at the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file:\label{mtc-apx.tex} +% \or\relax +% C'est un problème similaire à~celui de la section~\vref{faq.19}. +% Un exemple est d'avoir une table des matières locale pour un chapitre (\com{minitoc}) dont les entrées ne +% doivent pas apparaître dans la table des matières principale. Utilisez simplement l'environnement +% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Titre}\texttt{\}}\\ +% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{niveau}\texttt{]}\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sous-titre}\texttt{\}}\\ +% .{}.{}.\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}} +% \end{quote} +% Cet environnement accepte un argument optionnel numérique, qui est la profondeur de masquage dans la table des +% matières principale (par défaut: \texttt{-1}, masquage complet). Vous pouvez regarder le fichier d'exemple +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}:\label{mtc-apx.tex} +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-apx> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-apx.tex}% + [2007/03/22]% +\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text +\usepackage{tocbibind} % adds some entries in the main TOC. +\usepackage[tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} \setcounter{parttocdepth}{3} +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc % prepare the mini-tables +\tableofcontents +\mtcaddchapter % because tocbibind adds a chapter entry in the TOC +\chapter{First} +\minitoc +First chapter +\section{First section} \lipsum[1] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[2] +\chapter{Second} +\minitoc +Second +\section{First section of second chapter} \lipsum[3] +\section{Second section of second chapter} \lipsum[4] +\appendix % begins the appendices +\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices} % adds a part entry in the TOC +\adjustptc % fixes the parttoc counter ptc +\mtcsettitle{parttoc}{List of Appendices} % changes the parttoc title +\parttoc % adds a partial toc for the appendices +\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] % hides the details of the appendices in the main TOC, +% % but chapter-level entries would be still visible in the main TOC +% % if you use 0 in place of -1 as optional argument. +\chapter{First appendix} +\minitoc +First appendix +\section{First section} \lipsum[5] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[6] +\chapter{Second appendix} +\minitoc +Second appendix +\section{First section of second appendix} \lipsum[7] +\section{Second section of second appendix} \lipsum[8] +\end{mtchideinmaintoc} % end of hiding +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Of course, the environments \env{mtchideinmainlof} +% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} are also available, to hide some entries in the main +% list of figures or of tables. +% +% Note\virage{} that the position of the end of these environments must be adjusted to include a page break (like +% the one done by a \com{chapter} command), else the restore command might be inserted too early into the +% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} or \suffix{.lot} file. There is an example file +% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex} +% \or\relax +% Bien sûr, les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont aussi disponibles, pour +% masquer certaines entrées dans la liste principale des figures ou des tableaux. +% +% Notez\virage{} que la position de la fin de ces environnements doit être ajustée pour inclure un saut de page +% (comme celui fait par une commande \com{chapter}), sinon la commande de restauration pourrait être insérée +% trop tôt dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} ou \suffix{.lot}. Voici un fichier d'exemple +% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex} +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hi1> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi1.tex}% + [2007/01/04]% +\usepackage% + [tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominilof \listoffigures +\dominilot \listoftables +\chapter{First} +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA2} +\end{table} +\chapter{Second} +\minilof \minilot +%%---------------------- +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the environment forms. +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements. +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{mtchideinmainlof} +\begin{mtchideinmainlot} +\begin{figure} +\caption{BBBB1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{BBBB2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TBBBB1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TBBBB2} +\end{table} +\chapter{Third} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the environment forms. +% \or\relax +% Nous terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements. +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\end{mtchideinmainlot} +\end{mtchideinmainlof} +%%---------------------- +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC2} +\end{table} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But\virage{} it is also possible to use \emph{commands} in place of these environments: +% you place a \com{mtchideinmainlof} +% (or \com{mtchideinmainlot}) command in the first figure (or table) to +% hide, \emph{before} its caption and a \com{endmtchideinmainlof} (or \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) command at the end of +% the last figure (or table) to hide, \emph{after} its caption, like in this example file +% (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex} +% \or\relax +% Mais\virage{} il est aussi possible d'utiliser des \emph{commandes} à~la place de ces environnements: vous placez une +% commande \com{mtchideinmainlof} (ou \com{mtchideinmainlot}) dans +% la première figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{avant} son caption et une commande \com{endmtchideinmainlof} +% (ou \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) à~la fin de la dernière figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{après} son caption, +% comme dans cet exemple de fichier (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hi2> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi2.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage% + [tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominilof \listoffigures +\dominilot \listoftables +\chapter{First} +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{AAAA2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TAAAA2} +\end{table} +\chapter{Second} +\minilof \minilot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\virage{} begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{before} the caption of the first ``hidden'' +% entry. +% \or\relax +% Nous\virage{} commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{avant} +% le caption de la \emph{première} entrée «~masquée~». +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{figure} +\mtchideinmainlof % <-- +\caption{BBBB1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{BBBB2} +\endmtchideinmainlof % <-- +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\mtchideinmainlot % <-- +\caption{TBBBB1} +\end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\virage{} terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. +% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{after} the caption of the \emph{last} ``hidden'' +% entry. +% \or\relax +% Nous\virage{} terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la +% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{après} +% le caption de la \emph{dernière} entrée «~masquée~». +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table} +\caption{TBBBB2} +\endmtchideinmainlot % <-- +\end{table} +\chapter{Third} +\minilof \minilot +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC1} +\end{figure} +\begin{figure} +\caption{CCCC2} +\end{figure} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC1} +\end{table} +\begin{table} +\caption{TCCCC2} +\end{table} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \flushcolumns +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This method, recommended while more delicate to apply, is much more reliable in delimiting the hiding domain: +% it solves the problem of the asynchronism between the writing of floats and the writing of the normal text. +% \or\relax +% Cette méthode, recommandée bien que plus délicate à~appliquer, est bien plus fiable dans la délimitation du domaine de +% masquage: elle résout le problème de l'asynchronisme entre l'écriture des éléments flottants et celle du texte normal. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (26) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Defining your own \usuffix{.mld} file}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}% +% \or\relax +% \section{Définir votre propre fichier \usuffix{.mld}}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}% +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, you should not directly modify one of the distributed \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. +% The simplest way to alter some +% title is to redefine the corresponding command via \com{renewcommand} or better via +% \com{mtcsettitle}. +% If you really want to have your own \suffix{.mld} file, you copy an existing \suffix{.mld} file +% into one with a new name (not +% the name of a distributed \suffix{.mld} file). Then you modify this new \suffix{.mld} file and you can use it via +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}. You can always contact me to add this new \suffix{.mld} file to the +% distribution. These remarks apply also to the \emph{language}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} pairs of language definition files. +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, vous ne devriez pas modifier directement l'un des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo} de la +% distribution. La +% manière la plus simple de modifier un certain titre est de redéfinir la commande correspondante via +% \com{renewcommand} ou mieux, via \com{mtcsettitle}. Si vous souhaitez vraiment avoir votre propre fichier +% \suffix{.mld}, vous copiez un fichier \suffix{.mld} existant vers un fichier portant un nouveau nom +% (pas le nom d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} de la distribution). Puis vous modifiez ce nouveau fichier \suffix{.mld} et +% vous pourrez l'utiliser via \com{mtcselectlanguage}. Vous pouvez toujours me contacter pour ajouter ce nouveau +% fichier \suffix{.mld} à~la distribution. Ces remarques s'appliquent aussi aux paires +% \emph{langue}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} de fichiers de définition de langues. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (27) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{abstract} package}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{environment}{abstract} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its +% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents, +% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section. +% This problem is detected by the \optd{hints} option and you should add +% a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| +% command after your \env{abstract} environment. +% \or\relax +% Lorsque le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé avec son option +% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou similaire) est ajoutée dans la table des +% matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe du document définit \com{chapter}, sinon comme une section +% étoilée. Ce problème est détecté par l'option \optd{hints} et vous devriez ajouter une commande +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}. +% \fi +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (28) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty} +% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (29) +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Strange alignment in the minitocs}\label{faq.29} +% \emph{In minitocs, subsections titles are not aligned with sections, as they are in the main table of contents.} +% \or\relax +% \section{Alignement bizarre dans les minitocs}\label{faq.29} +% \emph{Dans les minitocs, les titres des sous-sections ne sont pas alignés avec les sections, +% alors qu'ils le sont dans la table des matières principale.} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@part} +% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@section} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax % +% The entries of a table of contents are formatted via internal commands like +% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc. +% +% The ``part'' and ``chapter'' levels (and ``section'' for an article) use +% specific commands which are somewhat complex for a more elaborated formatting. +% For the ``section'' (in the \class{report} and \class{book} classes) and lower levels, +% these commands are (\class{book} class, \xfile{book.cls}) by default: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}| +% \end{quote} +% which will be applied in the main table of contents and in the minitocs. The +% arguments of \com{@dottedtocline} are +% \begin{enumerate}[1)] +% \item the logical depth (which will be compared to \dcnt{tocdepth} or \dcnt{minitocdepth}). +% \item the indentation. +% \item the width reserved for the section/subsection/\ldots\ number. +% \end{enumerate} +% In the standard \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article} classes~\cite{classes}, the dimensions +% (second and third arguments) are given in ``em'' units, and this unit +% depends on the current font. In the main table of contents, +% the section and subsection entries are witten in the \emph{same} font, hence +% usually the alignment is correct. But in the minitocs, the section entries +% are written in a bold font while the subsection entries are written in +% a non bold font (the default font choices are given in table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), hence one ``em'' has +% different sizes in these two fonts and the alignement is changed. +% +% There are several solutions: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Redefine the \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} commands +% to use font independent units (pt, mm, pc, etc.). This +% redefinition must be performed in a package or via a command defined by a package or between \com{makeatletter} +% and \com{makeatother}, because these commands have a~\verb|@| in +% their names; you must use \com{renewcommand*} to redefine +% these commands. +% \item Use\virage{} the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} to change the indentation, with +% font independent units. But then see \emph{also} section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \item Use the same font for the section and subsection entries +% in the minitocs, using the \com{mtcsetfont} command (see section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) or +% redefining the \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} commands (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), or similar. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% +% Les entrées d'une table des matières sont mises en forme par des commandes internes telles que +% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc. +% +% Les niveaux «~partie~» et «~chapitre~» (et «~section~» pour un article) utilisent des +% commandes spécifiques qui sont assez complexes pour une mise en forme plus élaborée. +% Pour les niveaux «~section~» (dans les classes \class{report} et \class{book}) et inférieurs, +% ces commandes sont (class \class{book}, \xfile{book.cls}) par défaut: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\ +% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}| +% \end{quote} +% qui seront appliquées dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs. Les +% arguments de \com{@dottedtocline} sont +% \begin{enumerate}[1)] +% \item la profondeur logique (qui sera comparée à~\dcnt{tocdepth} ou \dcnt{minitocdepth}); +% \item l'indentation; +% \item la largeur réservée pour le numéro de section/sous-section/\ldots +% \end{enumerate} +% Dans les classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}~\cite{classes}, les dimensions +% (deuxième et troisième arguments) sont données en unités «~em~», et cette unité +% dépend de la fonte courante. Dans la table des matières principale, les entrées de sections et de sous-sections +% sont écrites dans la \emph{même} fonte, donc normalement l'alignement est correct. Mais dans les +% minitocs, les entrées pour les sections sont écrites dans une fonte grasse tandis que celles des sous-sections +% sont écrites dans une fonte non grasse (les choix par défaut pour ces fontes sont donnés dans +% le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), donc un «~em~» a des tailles différentes +% dans ces deux fontes et l'alignement est altéré. +% +% Il y a plusieurs solutions: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Redéfinir les commandes \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} pour utiliser +% des unités indépendantes de la fonte (pt, mm, pc, etc.). Cette +% redéfinition doit être effectuée dans un paquetage ou via une commande définie dans un paquetage +% ou entre \com{makeatletter} +% et \com{makeatother}, puisque ces commandes contiennent un~\verb|@| dans leurs noms; +% vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand*} pour redéfinir ces commandes. +% \item Utiliser\virage{} le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} pour changer l'indentation, avec des unités +% indépendantes de la fonte. Mais alors regardez \emph{aussi} la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \item Utiliser la même fonte pour les entrées de sections et de sous-sections dans les minitocs, +% en utilisant la commande \com{mtcsetfont} (voir la section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) ou +% en redéfinissant les commandes \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, +% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} (voir le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), ou analogues. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Useful precautions with starred sectionning commands}\label{faq.30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The\virage{} headers are not modified by \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} or \com{section*}; +% it is \emph{necessary} to use \com{markboth} or \com{markright} to get correct page headers for +% the current and following pages. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item If\virage{} you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{chapter*} or a \com{section*} command, you +% must use \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} or \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} +% \emph{after} the starred sectionning command. +% If you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{part*} command, the page number in the +% table of contents would be wrong, because \com{part*} implies a \com{clearpage} or a +% \com{cleardoublepage} before the first page of the part. Use the sequence +% \begin{quote}\small +% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage if openany option.|\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ +% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \section{Précautions utiles avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées}\label{faq.30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les\virage{} en-têtes ne sont pas modifiés par \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} ou \com{section*}; +% il est \emph{nécessaire} d'utiliser \com{markboth} ou \com{markright} pour obtenir des en-têtes de +% pages corrects pour la page courante et les suivantes. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item Si\virage{} vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande \com{chapter*} ou +% \com{section*} command, vous devez utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} ou +% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} \emph{après} la commande de sectionnement étoilée. +% Si vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande pour une commande \com{part*}, +% le numéro de page dans la table des matières serait erroné, car \com{part*} implique une commande +% \com{clearpage} ou \com{cleardoublepage} avant la première page de la partie. Utilisez la +% séquence +% \begin{quote}\small +% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage si option openany.|\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ +% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]| +% \end{quote} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% +% ^^A (31) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with packages for captions}\label{faq.31} +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}} +% one of the \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; now use a recent +% version of the +% \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used, +% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package, because such packages alter (redefine) the +% commands listing figures and tables. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec des paquetages pour les captions}\label{faq.31}\ipack{caption}\ipack{caption2}\ipack{ccaption}\ipack{mcaption} +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}i +% l'un des paquetages \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, +% \pack{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez +% maintenant une version récente du paquetage \upack{caption}.}~\cite{caption2}, (qui ont tous deux été écrits +% par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), +% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou +% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car de tels paquetages altèrent (redéfinissent) +% les commandes de listage des figures et tableaux. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (32) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Bad interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32} +% When the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} packages are used in a document +% of class \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, +% the chapter header ``Chapter'' does not appear on the first page of the chapter. +% +% This problem is fixed in version~\#44 of \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Mauvaise interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32} +% Lorsque les paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} sont utilisés dans un document +% dont la classe est \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, l'en-tête de chapitre «~Chapitre~» n'apparaît pas +% sur la première page du chapitre. +% +% Ce problème est corrigé dans la version~\#44 de \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (33) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{varsects} package}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects} +% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects} +% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (34) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Initial font settings}\label{faq.34} +% The setting of the fonts in the mini-tables is a rather complex problem. If we take the parttocs as an example, +% there is a \com{ptcfont} font-command which is used for two purposes\footnote{The same remarks apply +% to the other mini-tables.}: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item First, to be used as default value for some other font-commands (like \com{ptcSPfont}). As its +% default value is used in the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, the value of these other +% commands is \emph{not altered} if you modify \com{ptcfont}. You must modify these commands one at a +% time. +% \item Second, it is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc, partlof or partlot to set an initial font command. +% Then each entry of the mini-table calls its own font command (like \com{ptcSPfont}). Thus, if you +% modify \com{ptcfont}, you can obtain a global effect on the fonts in the parttocs, partlofs, and +% partlots. So you can play with the various parameters of the fonts (family, shape, series, size), if +% you want fancy mini-tables; but it is rather difficult. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \lneed{6} +% In\Virage{} the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, we have a sequence of commands: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% to define some default fonts. But this sequence is executed only once. If you alter \com{ptcfont}, the modification is +% not applied to these font commands. The command \com{ptcfont} is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc. +% \com{ptcCfont} is invoked for each chapter entry in a parttoc (\com{ptcSfont} for each section entry, etc.). +% So \com{ptcfont} can be used to define some global characteristics for the fonts in the parttocs, while +% \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) can be used to customize the fonts for each level of entries. +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Note that if you say: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% after loading the \upack{minitoc} package, these font commands will be ``associated'' to \com{ptcfont}, hence if you +% modify \com{ptcfont} (by via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| or \com{renewcommand}), they will follow the +% modification. But if you modify one of these commands via \com{renewcommand} or +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} is an example), +% the association is broken. But you could be more clever by saying something like +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% to preserve the association and modify only some parameters of a minitoc font command. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% For levels above subsection (part, chapter and section), the fonts a more specific in general, but you can, of course, +% say something like \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| to make a similar association. +% You can even make other associations, like this: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|% for high sectionning levels:|\\ +% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% for low sectionning levels:|\\ +% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% then for each level:|\\ +% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% Then you can redefine \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| to act on several fonts in one step, but you must +% use \com{renewcommand}. You cannot act on \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| with \com{mtcsetfont}. +% +% Note that only the fonts for parttocs are used in the examples above; but, of course, the situation is the same for +% minitocs and secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| and \verb|\lowlevelsfont| are macro names that you can choice, they are not +% part of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% \section{Choix initiaux des fontes}\label{faq.34} +% Le choix des fontes dans les mini-tables est un problème assez compliqué. Si nous prenons par exemple les +% parttocs, il y~a une commande de fonte \com{ptcfont} qui est utilisée dans deux buts\,\footnote{Les mêmes +% remarques s'appliquent aux autres mini-tables.}: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Premièrement, pour être utilisée comme valeur par défaut pour quelques autres commandes de fontes (telles +% que \com{ptcSPfont}). Comme sa valeur par défaut est utilisée dans l'initialisation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, la valeur de ces autres commandes \emph{n'est pas modifiée} si vous modifiez +% \com{ptcfont}. Vous devez modifiez ces commandes une à~la fois. +% \item Deuxièmement, elle est invoquée au début de chaque parttoc, partlof ou partlot pour établir une commande +% de fonte initiale. Puis chaque entrée de la mini-table appelle sa propre commande de fonte (comme +% \com{ptcSPfont}). Donc, si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont}, vous pouvez obtenir un effet global sur les +% fontes dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. Vous pouvez ainsi jouer avec les divers paramètres des +% fontes (famille, forme, graisse, taille), si vous voulez des mini-tables enjolivées; mais ceci est assez +% difficile. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \lneed{6} +% Dans\Virage{} l'initialisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, nous avons une séquence de commandes: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% pour définir quelques fontes par défaut. Mais cette séquence n'est exécutée qu'une seule fois. Si vous altérez +% \com{ptcfont}, la modification n'est pas appliquée à~ces commandes de fontes. La commande \com{ptcfont} est +% invoquée au début de chaque parttoc. \com{ptcCfont} est invoquée pour chaque entrée de chapitre dans une parttoc +% (\com{ptcSfont} pour chaque entrée de section, etc.). Ainsi \com{ptcfont} peut être utilisée pour définir +% quelques caractéristiques globales pour les fontes dans les parttocs, tandis que \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) peuvent +% être utilisées pour personnaliser les fontes pour chaque niveau d'entrées. +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Notez que si vous dites: +% \begin{quote} +% \icom{def}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections)|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs)|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs)|\\ +% \icom{plffont}\verb|\def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures)|\\ +% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures)|\\ +% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables)|\\ +% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables)| +% \end{quote} +% après avoir chargé le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ces commandes de fontes seront «~associées~» à~\com{ptcfont}, +% donc si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont} (par une commande \com{renewcommand} ou via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}|), +% elles suivront la modification. Mais si vous modifiez l'une de ces commandes via +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} est un exemple) ou \com{renewcommand}, +% l'association est rompue. Mais vous pourriez agir plus subtilement en disant quelque chose comme +% \begin{quote} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% pour préserver l'association et modifier seulement quelques paramètres d'une commande de fonte minitoc. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Pour les niveaux au-dessus de la sous-section (partie, chapitre et section), les fontes sont plus spécifiques en +% général, mais vous pouvez, bien sûr, utiliser une définition telle que +% \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| pour faire une +% association similaire. Vous pouvez même faire d'autres associations, comme ceci: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|% pour les hauts niveaux de sectionnement:|\\ +% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% pour les bas niveaux de sectionnement:|\\ +% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\ +% \verb|% puis pour chaque niveau:|\\ +% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ +% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\ +% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}| +% \end{quote} +% Puis vous pouvez redéfinir \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou \verb|\lowlevelsfont| pour agir sur plusieurs fontes en une +% seule fois, mais vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand}. Vous ne pouvez pas agir sur \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou +% \verb|\lowlevelsfont| avec \com{mtcsetfont}. +% +% Notez que seules les fontes pour les parttocs ont été utilisées dans les exemples ci-dessus; mais, bien sûr, la +% situation est la même pour les minitocs et les secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| et \verb|\lowlevelsfont| sont des +% noms de macros que vous pouvez choisir, ils ne font pas partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (35) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \KOMAScript{} classes}\label{faq.35} +% If\imess{I0043} a \KOMAScript{} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible with \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or +% \class{scrartcl}), is used, some class options may cause problems with the \upack{minitoc} package, because these +% options add chapter or section entries in the table of contents. See section~\vref{special.entries}. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec les classes \KOMAScript}\label{faq.35} +% Si\imess{I0043} une classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible avec \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} ou +% \class{scrartcl}), est utilisée, certaines options de la classe peuvent poser des problèmes avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, car elles ajoutent des entrées de chapitre ou de section dans la table des matières. Voir la +% section~\vref{special.entries}. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (36) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \uclass{jura} class or the \upack{alphanum} package}\label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum} +% The \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} class loads the \pack{alphanum} package, +% which redefines the sectionning structure in a +% non-standard way, after the loading of the \class{report} class. +% This class and this package are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{jura} ou le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}% +% \label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum} +% La classe \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} charge le paquetage \pack{alphanum}, +% qui redéfinit la structure de sectionnement d'une +% manière non-standard, après le chargement de la classe \class{report}. +% Cette classe et ce paquetage sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (37) +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \usuffix{.mld} files and the \upack{babel} package}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld} +% If you are using the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, you can automatize the loading of the +% \suffix{.mld} file by adding some code in the preamble of your document, like this: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\ +% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{language1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{language2}\verb|}}}| +% \end{quote} +% where \emph{language1} is the language name for \pack{babel} and \emph{language2} the language name for +% \upack{minitoc}; there are often identical, but there are exceptions (when you use a locally customized \suffix{.mld} +% file, for instance). +% \or\relax +% \section{Les fichiers \usuffix{.mld} et le paquetage \upack{babel}}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld} +% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, vous pouvez automatiser le chargement du +% fichier \suffix{.mld} en ajoutant du code dans le préambule de votre document, comme ceci: +% \begin{quote} +% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\ +% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{langue1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{langue2}\verb|}}}| +% \end{quote} +% où \emph{langue1} est le nom de langue pour \pack{babel} et \emph{langue2} le nom de langue pour \upack{minitoc}; +% ils sont souvent identiques, mais il y~a des exceptions (lorsque vous utilisez un fichier \suffix{.mld} adapté +% localement, par exemple). +% \fi +% +% ^^A (38) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap} +% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (39) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap} +% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap} +% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (40) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{romannum} package}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum} +% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the numbering of +% the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum} +% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (41) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders} +% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the +% sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders} +% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (42) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec} +% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the +% numbering of the sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec} +% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (43) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{captcont} package}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont} +% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the caption +% commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont} +% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) +% les commandes pour les captions. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (44) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Vertical spaces (gaps) for parttocs, partlofs, and partlots titles}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps} +% These vertical gaps were hard-coded like for the chapter +% heads in the \class{book} and \class{report} document classes. +% The values were 50pt and 40pt, but some users want +% to adjust them for the titles of the part-level mini-tables. +% Since version~\#45, these gaps are defined by \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} +% and \com{mtcgapafterheads}, with these defaults values. These +% commands apply globally to parttocs, partlofs and partlots. +% They are \emph{commands}, \virage\emph{not} dimensions, so they must be +% modified via \com{renewcommand} (but \emph{not} via \com{setlength}). +% An example of use is given in the \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file:\label{mtc-gap.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Espacements verticaux (\emph{gaps}) pour les titres des parttocs, +% partlofs et partlots}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps} +% Ces sauts verticaux (\emph{gaps}) étaient codés «~en dur~» comme pour +% les têtes de chapitres dans les classes de document \class{book} +% et \class{report}. Les valeurs étaient 50pt et 40pt, mais +% certains utilisateurs désirent les ajuster pour les titres +% des mini-tables au niveau partie. +% Depuis la version~\#45, ces sauts sont définis par \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} +% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}, avec ces valeurs par défaut. +% Ces commandes s'appliquent globalement aux parttocs, partlofs et partlots. +% Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \virage\emph{pas} des dimensions, +% donc elles doivent être modifiées via \com{renewcommand} +% (mais \emph{pas} via \com{setlength}). +% Un exemple d'utilisation est donné dans le fichier document \exam{mtc-gap.tex}:\label{mtc-gap.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-gap> +\documentclass[a4paper,oneside,12pt]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-gap.tex}[2007/01/04]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use the \pack{vruler} package (by \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) to display a vertical ruler showing the position of the titles: +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{vruler} (de \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) pour placer une échelle verticale montrant la position +% des titres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{txfonts,vruler} % vertical graduation to note positions (Zhuhan Jiang) +\usepackage[english2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\setvruler[1cm][0][10][3][0][0pt][0pt][0pt][] % with vruler package +\doparttoc \faketableofcontents +\part{First part} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A normal parttoc, with the normal gaps before and after it. +% \or\relax +% Une parttoc normale, avec des sauts verticaux normaux avant et après elle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\parttoc +\chapter{First chapter of first part} \chapter{Second chapter of first part} +\part{Second part} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We set large gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons de plus grands sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{100pt} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{80pt} +\parttoc +\chapter{First chapter of second part} \chapter{Second chapter of second part} +\part{Third part} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We set small gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons de plus petits sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{20pt} +\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{10pt} +\parttoc +\chapter{First chapter of third part} \chapter{Second chapter of third part} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (45) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Vertical spacing before the bottom rule of a minitable}\label{faq.45} +% The little spacing between a minitable and its bottom rule is implemented as a vertical kern that should +% be sufficient to allow the +% descending parts of the letters of the last entry of the mini-table. The values should depend on +% the line spacing and of the font size. They are defined as macros that you can adjust by redefining them via +% \com{renewcommand}. The (empirical) default values are given in table~\vref{t+kernafters}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Espacement vertical avant le filet inférieur d'une minitable}\label{faq.45} +% Le petit espacement entre une minitable et le filet qui est en-dessous d'elle est réalisé par un crênage +% vertical qui devrait suffire pour les jambages des lettres de la dernière entrée de la +% minitable. Les valeurs devraient dépendre de l'interlignage et de la taille de la fonte. +% Elles sont définies comme des macros que vous pouvez ajuster en les redéfinissant via \com{renewcommand}. +% La table~\vref{t+kernafters} donne les valeurs par défaut (empiriques). +% \fi +% \begin{table}[!htb] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption{Kernings before minitable bottom rules}\label{t+kernafters} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default value}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \or\relax +% \caption{Crênage avant le filet inférieur des minitables}\label{t+kernafters} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Valeur par défaut}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \fi +% \end{table} +% +% ^^A (46) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Another interaction between the \upack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc} packages}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft} +% \emph{I~encountered an interaction between \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}. +% I want to force \upack{minitoc} to not display the page numbers, but because +% of \pack{tocloft} it doesn't. Here is an example code:} +% \else\relax +% \section{Une autre interaction entre les paquetages \upack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft} +% \emph{J'ai rencontré une interaction entre \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}. +% Je veux forcer \upack{minitoc} à~ne pas afficher les numéros de pages, +% mais, à~cause de \pack{tocloft}, il n'y arrive pas. Voici +% un exemple de code:} +% \fi\relax +% \begin{quote} +% \com{documentclass}\verb|[12pt,a4paper]{book}|\\ +% \com{usepackage}\verb|{tocloft}|\\ +% \com{usepackage}\verb|{minitoc}|\\ +% \ienv{document}\verb|\begin{document}|\\ +% \com{frontmatter}\\ +% \com{dominitoc}\com{tableofcontents}\\ +% \com{mainmatter}\\ +% \com{chapter}\verb|{Chapter}|\\ +% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\ +% \verb|\chapter{Second Chapter}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|\\ +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{minitoc}{off}|\\ +% \com{minitoc}\\ +% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\ +% \verb|\end{document}| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \emph{If I comment the line loading the \pack{tocloft} package, +% I~will get a minitoc without page numbers as I~wanted.} +% \else\relax +% \emph{Si je commente la ligne chargeant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, +% j'obtiens bien une minitoc sans numéros de pages comme désiré.} +% \fi\relax +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% When using together \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}, the \pack{tocloft} package must be +% loaded first, and its commands take precedence to format the entries +% in the TOC (and in minitocs). To suppress the page numbers, you should try +% the \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| command (from \pack{tocloft}), which is described +% in the \xfile{tocloft.pdf} documentation~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} is the level +% of entry (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). There are similar remarks about +% font related commands. +% +% The \pack{tocloft} package is more specialized in that job than \upack{minitoc}, so if it is +% loaded, \upack{minitoc} uses the \pack{tocloft} tools. +% There is the corrected example (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}): +% \else\relax +% Lors de l'utilisation simultanée de \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}, +% le paquetage \pack{tocloft} doit être chargé le premier, et ses +% commandes prennent le pas pour mettre en forme les +% entrées dans la table des matières (et les minitocs). Pour +% supprimer les numéros de pages, vous devriez essayer la +% commande \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| (de \pack{tocloft}), qui est décrite dans la documentation +% \xfile{tocloft.pdf}~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} +% est le niveau de l'entrée (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). +% Il y a des remarques similaires sur les commandes concernant les fontes. +% +% Le paquetage \pack{tocloft} est davantage spécialisé dans +% ce travail que \upack{minitoc}, donc s'il est chargé, \upack{minitoc} +% se sert des outils de \pack{tocloft}. Voici l'exemple +% corrigé (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}): +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tlo> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlo.tex}[2007/06/13]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must load \pack{tocloft} \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous devons charger \pack{tocloft} \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{tocloft} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the global font for the minitoc entries: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la fonte globale pour les entrées des minitocs: +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{*}{\normalfont\small} +\frontmatter +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the section entries in the minitocs, we suppress the page numbers and change the font +% by using commands from the \pack{tocloft} package: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, nous supprimons les numéros de pages et changeons la fonte en +% utilisant des commandes venant du paquetage \pack{tocloft}: +% \fi\relax +% \begin{macrocode} +\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} +\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalfont\small} +\mainmatter +\chapter{First Chapter} \minitoc +\section{Section A} \section{Section B} +\chapter{Second Chapter} \minitoc +\section{Section A} \section{Section B} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A (47) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption} +% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) +% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, +% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption} +% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé, +% il doit être chargé +% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, +% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. +% \fi +% +% ^^A (48) +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with the \upack{flowfram} package}\label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram} +% The \pack{flowfram}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, which +% has its own system of minitocs, is hence \emph{incompatible} +% with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}% +% \label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram} +% Le paquetage \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}}\pack{flowfram}, qui a son propre +% système de minitocs, est donc \emph{incompatible} +% avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Memento}\label{c+memento} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Mémento}\label{c+memento} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \minilot +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[!hbtp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Package options}\label{t+OPT} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NO*}&Short extensions for auxiliary files.\\ +% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables.\\ +% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ +% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Presence of leaders (dotted lines).\\ +% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NO*}&Keeps floats (figures and tables) from drifting +% outside of their section. Useful if you use sectlofs/sectlots.\\ +% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NO*}&Useful if you have \com{cite} commands +% in sectionning titles and use an unsorted bibliographic style.\\ +% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Lists the minitoc auxiliary files +% into \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\ +% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Adds hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% file. Useful to detect some problems. Option \opt{nohints} is inadvisable.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Language options are listed in +% table~\vref{t+languages}. Default: \loptd{english}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[!hbtp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Options du paquetage}\label{t+OPT} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NON*}&Suffixes courts pour les fichiers auxiliaires.\\ +% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables.\\ +% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables (classes \KOMAScript).\\ +% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Présence de points de conduite.\\ +% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NON*}&Empêche les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) de dériver en dehors de +% leur section. Utile si vous utilisez des sectlofs/sectlots.\\ +% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NON*}&Utile si vous avez des commandes \com{cite} dans les titres de +% sectionnements et utilisez un style de bibliographie sans tri.\\ +% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Liste les fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc +% dans \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\ +% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Ajoute des indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Utile pour détecter certains problèmes. L'option \opt{nohints} est déconseillée.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Les options de langue sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages}. +% Défaut: \loptd{english}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{General commands}\label{t+SUC} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{faketableofcontents}&Replaces \com{tableofcontents} +% if you want mini-tables of contents but no main table of contents.\\ +% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Replaces \com{listoffigures} +% if you want mini-lists of figures but no main list of figures.\\ +% \com{fakelistoftables}&Replaces \com{listoftables} +% if you want mini-lists of tables but no main list of tables.\\ +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Loads \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to select a language for mini-tables titles.\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the depth for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{offset}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the offset for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{sectionning-level}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Redefines a minitoc font command.\\ +% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{value}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the layout of some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{title string}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the title for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Changes the font of the title for some mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&To add a vertical skip between the mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskipamount}&Length of \com{mtcskip}. Default: \com{bigskipamount}.\\ +% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default.\\ +% \com{tightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables.\\ +% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ +% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ +% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number). Default.\\ +% \com{undottedmtctrue}&No dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number).\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes générales}\label{t+SUC} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{faketableofcontents}&Remplace \com{tableofcontents} +% si vous souhaitez des mini-tables des matières mais pas de table des matières principale.\\ +% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Remplace \com{listoffigures} +% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des figures mais pas de liste des figures principale.\\ +% \com{fakelistoftables}&Remplace \com{listoftables} +% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des tableaux mais pas de liste des tableaux principale.\\ +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Charge \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour sélectionner une langue pour les titres des mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change la profondeur pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{déplacement}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change le déplacement pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\\ +% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de +% fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Redéfinit une commande de fonte minitoc.\\ +% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{valeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change la mise en page de certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{chaîne titre}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change le titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Change la fonte du titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskip}&Pour ajouter un saut vertical entre les mini-tables.\\ +% \com{mtcskipamount}&Longueur de \com{mtcskip}. Défaut: \com{bigskipamount}.\\ +% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut.\\ +% \com{tightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées.\\ +% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\ +% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\ +% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Points de conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page). Défaut.\\ +% \com{undottedmtctrue}&Pas de points conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page).\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Part level commands}\label{t+SUC-P-a} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \texttt{partlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a parttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a partlof is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &After each \com{part} command for which a partlot is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Depth of the following parttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2.\\ +% &Has no action on partlofs and partlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcindent}&Left/right indentation of a partial table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{ptcoffset}&Horizontal offset for parttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{plfoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{pltoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcfont}&Font command for parttoc.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\ +% &or: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcCfont}&Font command for parttoc, chapter entries.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{ptcSfont}&Font command for parttoc, section entries.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\ +% &or: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcPfont}&Font command for parttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSPfont}&Font command for parttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{plffont}&Font for partlof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{plfSfont}&Font for partlof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltfont}&Font for partlot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltSfont}&Font for partlot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{ptctitle}&Title of parttocs. Default: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\ +% \com{plftitle}&Title of partlofs. Default: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\ +% \com{plttitle}&Title of partlots. Default: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\ +% \com{ptifont}&Font for partXXX titles.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\ +% &or: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\ +% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Vertical gap before part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 50pt\\ +% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Vertical gap after part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 40pt\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the +% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{partXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dopartXXX} +% commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, +% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{ptcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{t+SUC-P-a} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{partlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une parttoc est +% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlof est +% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Profondeur des parttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ +% &N'a aucune action sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une table partielle. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{ptcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les parttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{plfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{pltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ +% \com{ptcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\ +% &ou: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcCfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées chapitres.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{ptcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sections.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\ +% &ou: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\ +% \com{ptcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{ptcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{plffont}&Fonte pour les partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{plfSfont}&Fonte pour les partlofs (sous-figures). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltfont}&Fonte pour les partlots. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{pltSfont}&Fonte pour les partlots (sous-tables). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{ptctitle}&Titre des parttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\ +% \com{plftitle}&Titre des partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\ +% \com{plttitle}&Titre des partlots. Défaut: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\ +% \com{ptifont}&Fonte pour les titres des partXXX.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\ +% &ou: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\ +% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Saut vertical avant le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 50pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Saut vertical après le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 40pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la +% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{partXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dopartXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, +% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{ptcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Chapter level commands}\label{t+SUC-C} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minitoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilof is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilot is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Depth of the following minitocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on minilofs and minilots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcoffset}&Horizontal offset for minitocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mlfoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mltoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcfont}&Font command for minitoc.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSfont}&Font command for minitoc, section entries.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcPfont}&Font command for minitoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for minitoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mlffont}&Font for minilof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mlfSfont}&Font for minilof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltfont}&Font for minilot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltSfont}&Font for minilot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtctitle}&Title of minitocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{mlftitle}&Title of minilofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{mlttitle}&Title of minilots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{mtifont}&Font for miniXXX titles.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the +% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{miniXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dominiXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, +% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{mtcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{t+SUC-C} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minitoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Profondeur des minitocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ +% &N'a aucune action sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minitocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mlfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ +% \com{mtcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sections.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \com{mtcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mlffont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mlfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{mtctitle}&Titre des minitocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{mlftitle}&Titre des minilofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{mlttitle}&Titre des minilots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{mtifont}&Fonte pour les titres des miniXXX.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la +% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{miniXXX}, +% global pour les commandes \ucom{dominiXXX}. +% Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, +% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{mtcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Section level commands}\label{t+SUC-S} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a secttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a sectlof is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% +% &After each \com{section} command for which a sectlot is needed$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Depth of the following secttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ +% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{stcoffset}&Horizontal offset for secttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{slfoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{sltoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcfont}&Font command for secttoc.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stcSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcSSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcPfont}&Font command for secttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for secttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{slffont}&Font for sectlof.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{slfSfont}&Font for sectlof (subfigures).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltfont}&Font for sectlot.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltSfont}&Font for sectlot (subtables).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stctitle}&Title of secttocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{slftitle}&Title of sectlofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{slttitle}&Title of sectlots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{stifont}&Font for sectXXX titles.\\ +% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the +% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{sectXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dosectXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, +% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{stcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes au niveau section}\label{t+SUC-S} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une secttoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ +% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Profondeur des secttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ +% &N'a aucune action sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ +% \ucom{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ +% \com{stcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les secttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{slfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{sltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ +% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ +% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ +% \com{stcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{stcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ +% \com{slffont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{slfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{sltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ +% \com{stctitle}&Titre des secttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\ +% \com{slftitle}&Titre des sectlofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\ +% \com{slttitle}&Titre des sectlots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\ +% \com{stifont}&Fonte pour les titres des sectXXX.\\ +% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la +% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{sectXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dosectXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, +% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{stcfont}.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for horizontal rules}\label{t+SUC-rules} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{mtcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{stcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{slfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilots.\\ +% \ncom{sltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Vertical kerning between a parttoc and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Vertical kerning between a partlof and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Vertical kerning between a partlot and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Vertical kerning between a minitoc and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&Vertical kerning between a minilof and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&Vertical kerning between a minilot and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Vertical kerning between a secttoc and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Vertical kerning between a sectlof and its bottom rule.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Vertical kerning between a sectlot and its bottom rule.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{By default, parttocs have no rules; minitocs and secttocs have rules. In +% articles, parttocs have rules.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{t+SUC-rules} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{mtcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{stcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{slfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilots.\\ +% \ncom{sltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une parttoc et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Crênage vertical entre une partlof et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Crênage vertical entre une partlot et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Crênage vertical entre une minitoc et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilof}&Crênage vertical entre une minilof et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernafterminilot}&Crênage vertical entre une minilot et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une secttoc et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlof et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlot et son filet inférieur.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Par défaut, les parttocs n'ont pas de filets; les minitocs et secttocs ont +% des filets. Dans les articles, les parttocs ont des filets.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for page numbers}\label{t+SUC-pn} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilots.\\ +% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{By default, the page numbers are present.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour les numéros de pages}\label{t+SUC-pn} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les parttocs.\\ +% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlofs.\\ +% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlots.\\ +% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minitocs.\\ +% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilofs.\\ +% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilots.\\ +% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les secttocs.\\ +% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlofs.\\ +% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlots.\\ +% \midrule +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Par défaut, les numéros de pages sont présents.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commands for mini-tables features}\label{t+SUC-P-b} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a parttoc.\\ +% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlof.\\ +% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlot.\\ +% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a parttoc.\\ +% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlof.\\ +% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlot.\\ +% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a parttoc file.\\ +% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlof file.\\ +% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlot file.\\ +% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a parttoc file.\\ +% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlof file.\\ +% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlot file.\\ +% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a parttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlof.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlot.\\ +% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a minitoc.\\ +% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilof.\\ +% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilot.\\ +% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a minitoc.\\ +% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilof.\\ +% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilot.\\ +% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minitoc file.\\ +% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilof file.\\ +% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilot file.\\ +% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minitoc file.\\ +% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilof file.\\ +% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilot file.\\ +% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minitoc.\\ +% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilof.\\ +% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilot.\\ +% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a secttoc.\\ +% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlof.\\ +% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlot.\\ +% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a secttoc.\\ +% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlof.\\ +% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlot.\\ +% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a secttoc file.\\ +% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlof file.\\ +% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlot file.\\ +% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a secttoc file.\\ +% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlof file.\\ +% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlot file.\\ +% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a secttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlof.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlot.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\ +% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{t+SUC-P-b} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \null\hspace*{-.35em}\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth+.35em}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une parttoc.\\ +% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlof.\\ +% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlot.\\ +% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une parttoc.\\ +% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlof.\\ +% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlot.\\ +% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\ +% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\ +% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\ +% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\ +% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\ +% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\ +% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une parttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlof.\\ +% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlot.\\ +% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minitoc.\\ +% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilof.\\ +% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilot.\\ +% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une minitoc.\\ +% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilof.\\ +% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilot.\\ +% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\ +% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\ +% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\ +% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\ +% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\ +% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\ +% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minitoc.\\ +% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilof.\\ +% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilot.\\ +% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une secttoc.\\ +% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlof.\\ +% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlot.\\ +% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une secttoc.\\ +% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlof.\\ +% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlot.\\ +% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\ +% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\ +% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\ +% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\ +% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\ +% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\ +% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une secttoc.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlof.\\ +% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlot.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\ +% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Preparation and insertion commands}\label{t+SUC-PI} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Level}}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){3-5} +% & &\textbf{part}&\textbf{chapter}&\textbf{section}\\ +% \midrule +% table of contents&preparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% list of figures &preparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% list of tables &preparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% all &preparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Each of these commands accepts one optional argument~\emph{p}, +% which specifies the position of the +% title of the mini-table. This argument~\emph{p} has a global effect for the preparation commands, but local for the +% insertion commands. It is a letter: \texttt{[l]}~for left aligned (default), \texttt{[c]}~for centered, +% \texttt{[r]}~for right aligned, \texttt{[e]}~or \texttt{[n]}~for empty (no title).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes de préparation et d'insertion}\label{t+SUC-PI} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Niveau}}\\ +% \cmidrule(l){3-5} +% & &\textbf{partie}&\textbf{chapitre}&\textbf{section}\\ +% \midrule +% table des matières&préparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% liste des figures &préparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% liste des tableaux &préparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ +% \midrule +% tous &préparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Chacune de ces commandes accepte un argument optionnel~\emph{p}, +% qui spécifie la position du titre de la mini-table. Cet argument~\emph{p} a un effet global dans les commandes de +% préparation, mais local dans les commandes d'insertion. C'est une lettre: \texttt{[l]}~pour aligné à~gauche +% (défaut), +% \texttt{[c]}~pour centré, \texttt{[r]}~pour aligné à~droite, \texttt{[e]}~ou \texttt{[n]}~pour vide (pas de titre).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Adjustment commands}\label{t+SUC-A} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc} by~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc} by~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc} by~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{decrementptc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{decrementmtc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{decrementstc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{incrementptc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{incrementmtc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{incrementstc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{part*} in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{chapter*} in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{section*} in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Adjusts the entry for the glossary in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Adjusts the entry for the index in the ToC.\\ +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Adjusts the entry for the nomenclature in the ToC.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environment to hide entries in the main ToC.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environment to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environment to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: recommended form.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes d'ajustement}\label{t+SUC-A} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc} de~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc} de~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc} de~\emph{n}.\\ +% \com{decrementptc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{decrementmtc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{decrementstc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{incrementptc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\ +% \com{incrementmtc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\ +% \com{incrementstc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{part*} dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{chapter*} dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{section*} dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Ajuste l'entrée pour le glossaire dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Ajoute l'entrée pour l'index dans la TdM.\\ +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Ajoute l'entrée pour la nomenclature dans la TdM.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la TdM principale.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\ +% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\ +% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. +% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ +% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: forme recommandée.} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tpb] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Classes and packages needing some precautions with \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs} +% \centering +% \bgroup\mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Names}&\textbf{Author(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Reference(s)}\\ +% \midrule +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} and\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, and \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lass.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}ackage.}\\ +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Any class not defining the main standard sectionning commands is +% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.}\\ +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[tpb] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Classes et paquetages nécessitant quelques précautions avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs} +% \centering +% \bgroup\mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Noms}&\textbf{Auteur(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Référence(s)}\\ +% \midrule +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} et \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} et\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn} et \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\ +% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lasse.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}aquetage.}\\ +% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Toute classe ne définissant pas les principales commandes de sectionnement standard +% est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.}\\ +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Checking if inside a minitable}\label{t+ifinside} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Commands for polymorphic entries}\label{t+polym}\index{polymorphic entry} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \else\relax +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Tester si à~l'intérieur d'une minitable}\label{t+ifinside} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% \begin{table}[tbph] +% \capstart +% \caption{Commandes pour des entrées polymorphes}\label{t+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} +% \medskip +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ +% \midrule +% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ +% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ +% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{table}[btp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Obsolete commands}\label{t+SUC-O} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first part.\\ +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first chapter.\\ +% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first section.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{These commands have no effect (except a harmless warning).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% \begin{table}[btp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes obsolètes}\label{t+SUC-O} +% \centering +% \bgroup +% \mysize +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première partie.\\ +% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro du premier chapitre.\\ +% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première section.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Ces commandes n'ont aucun effet (excepté un avertissement bénin).} +% \end{tabularx} +% \egroup +% \end{table} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Examples of documents}\label{c+exdocs} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Exemples de documents}\label{c+exdocs} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \minitoc +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}% +% \raggedcolumns +% \mtcskip +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter shows the code of some examples of documents. +% Some are extracted or derived from real documents, others are just demonstrations to illustrate problems or features. +% The code of some specific example files has been shown earlier: +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}, +% and \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre montre le code de quelques exemples de documents. +% Certains ont été extraits ou inspirés de documents réels, les autres sont de simples démonstrations pour illustrer +% des problèmes ou des possibilités. +% Le code de fichiers d'exemples spécifiques a déjà été montré: +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}), +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}) et +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} is often used to provide filling text. +% \or\relax +% Notez que le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} est souvent utilisé pour fournir du texte de bourrage. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2c.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2c.tex}}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a two columns layout. +% The layout uses the \pack{multicol} standard package~\cite{multicol} and its \env{multicols} environment. +% We set \com{mtcindent} to zero. We test several combinations. If a minitoc is long enough to be splitted on +% both columns, the result may be funny. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document avec une mise en page sur deux +% colonnes. +% La mise en page utilise le paquetage standard \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} et son environnement \env{multicols}. +% Nous forçons \com{mtcindent} à~zéro. Si une minitoc est assez longue pour se répartir sur les deux colonnes, +% le résultat peut être bizarre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-2c> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% + {report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-2c.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage% + [tight,latin,listfiles]{minitoc} +\usepackage[latin]{babel} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Two first chapters with a standard chapter head, a minitoc on one full width column, then the body of the chapter +% on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Deux premiers chapitres avec un en-tête standard, une minitoc sur la largeur complète, puis le corps du chapitre sur +% deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Primum capitulum} +\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc] +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[1-2] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[3-4] +\end{multicols} +\chapter{Secundum capitulum} +\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc] +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[5-6] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[7-8] +\section{Tertia sectio} +\lipsum[9-10] +\end{multicols} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A third chapter entirely on two columns, so the chapter head and the minitoc are in the first column: +% \or\relax +% Un troisième chapitre entièrement sur deux colonnes, dont l'en-tête du chapitre et la minitoc sont +% dans la première colonne: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{multicols}{2} +\chapter{Tertium capitulum} +\minitoc +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[11-12] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[13-14] +\section{Tertia sectio} +\lipsum[15-16] +\end{multicols} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A fourth chapter, with the chapter head on one column, and the minitoc and the chapter body on two columns (the +% minitoc is in the first column): +% \or\relax +% Un quatrième chapitre, avec l'en-tête de chapitre sur une seule colonne, mais la minitoc et le corps du chapitre +% sur deux colonnes (la minitoc est dans la première colonne): +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Quadrum capitulum} +\begin{multicols}{2} +\minitoc +\section{Prima sectio} +\lipsum[16-17] +\section{Secunda sectio} +\lipsum[18-19] +\section{Tertia sectio} +\lipsum[20-21] +\end{multicols} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} +% This document tests the \xfile{french2.mld} minitoc language definition file +% (section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) and its +% supporting code in the \upack{minitoc} package. First, the preamble of the document uses the \lopt{french2} +% minitoc package language option\footnote{The \pack{franc}, \pack{frnew} and \pack{mypatches} packages are local +% additions, provided with the \upack{minitoc} package documentation sources.}: +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} +% Ce document teste le fichier minitoc de définition de langue \xfile{french2.mld} +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) et le code +% qui en assure le support dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tout d'abord, le préambule du document utilise +% l'option de langue \lopt{french2} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}\,\footnote{Les paquetages \pack{franc}, +% \pack{frnew} et \pack{mypatches} sont des additions locales, fournies avec les sources de la documentation +% française du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-2nd> +%% Test de french2.mld: +%% « seconde » ou « deuxième » partie? +%% compilez 3 fois. +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-2nd.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[french2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc} +\usepackage[french]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew} +\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{mypatches} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test if there is only two parts: if yes, we will use ``seconde''. +% Else (three or more parts), we will use ``deuxième''. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons s'il y a seulement deux parties: si oui, nous utiliserons «~seconde~». +% Sinon (trois parties ou plus), nous utiliserons «~deuxième~». +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifmtcsecondpart +Il n'y a que 2 parties: seconde. +\else +Il y a une partie ou plus de deux parties: deuxième. +\fi +\clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document, with two parts: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document, avec deux parties: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\doparttoc +\faketableofcontents +\part{P1} +\parttoc +\chapter{P1C1} +\chapter{P1C2} +\part{P2} +\parttoc +\chapter{P2C1} +\chapter{P2C2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want also a third part, comment out this line and recompile 3~times: +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez aussi une troisième partie, commentez la ligne suivante et recompilez 3~fois: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Commentez la ligne suivante puis recompilez 2 ou 3 fois. +\end{document} +\part{P3} +\parttoc +\chapter{P3C1} +\chapter{P3C2} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Observe the titles of the parttocs when the document has two then three parts. Note the changes after each +% compilation. You can play by adding and removing parts. It would be interesting to add a starred part, with +% starred chapters, at the beginning of the document, this part and these chapters having their entries in the TOC. +% For instance, try to add the following lines after \com{faketableofcontents}: +% \or\relax +% Observez les titres des parttocs lorsque le document a deux puis trois parties. Notez les changements après +% chaque compilation. Vous pouvez jouer en ajoutant et enlevant des parties. Il serait intéressant d'ajouter une +% partie étoilée, avec des chapitres étoilés, au début du document, cette partie et ces chapitres ayant leurs +% entrées dans la table des matières. Par exemple, essayez d'ajouter les lignes suivantes +% après \com{faketableofcontents}: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{part*}\verb|{Partie étoilée}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[Partie étoilée]|\\ +% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[-2] % IMPORTANT <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<|\\ +% \com{parttoc}\\ +% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Premier chapitre étoilé}|\\ +% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[Premier chapitre étoilé]|\\ +% \verb|\chapter*{Second chapitre étoilé}|\\ +% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[Second chapitre étoilé]| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% and you will see how the parttoc of the new starred part is titled. +% \or\relax +% et vous verrez comment la parttoc de la nouvelle partie étoilée est titrée. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-3co.tex} document file}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} +% This document shows how to prepare a minitoc on three columns, +% with some modifications of the code the \env{mtc@verse} environment. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-3co.tex}}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} +% Ce document montre comment préparer une minitoc sur trois +% colonnes, grâce à~quelques modifications du code de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we will use a wide paper format (A3) to set the text +% on two columns and the main TOC on three columns, with the +% \pack{multitoc} package~\cite{multitoc} (by \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}). +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous utiliserons un format de papier large (A3) +% pour composer le texte sur deux colonnes et la table des +% matières principale sur trois colonnes, avec le paquetage +% \pack{multitoc}~\cite{multitoc} (de \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-3co> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-3co.tex}% + [2007/02/19] +\usepackage[a3paper]{geometry} +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage[toc]{multitoc} +\renewcommand{\multicolumntoc}{3} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\multicolumnmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtc@verse} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we load the \upack{minitoc} package, set some +% parameters and define the number of columns for the +% minitocs. We alter the \env{mtc@verse} environment to add a +% \env{multicols} environment\footnote{Some vertical adjustments are necessary.}: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% établissons quelques paramètres et définissons le nombre de +% colonnes pour les minitocs. +% Nous altérons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse} pour lui +% ajouter un environnement \env{multicols}\,\footnote{Quelques ajustements verticaux sont nécessaires.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} +\newcommand{\multicolumnmtc}{3} +\makeatletter +\let\SV@mtc@verse\mtc@verse +\let\SV@endmtc@verse\endmtc@verse +\def\mtc@verse#1{\SV@mtc@verse#1\removelastskip% + \begin{multicols}{\multicolumnmtc}\raggedcolumns\leavevmode\unskip + \vskip -1.5ex \vskip -1\baselineskip} +\def\endmtc@verse{\end{multicols}\SV@endmtc@verse} +\makeatother +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the document, preparing the minitocs and the main TOC. +% The (first) chapter begins with its minitoc, then the text +% on two columns. We use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} to provide filling text; +% the section number is used to select a \emph{lipsum} paragraph. +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le document, en préparant les minitocs et la +% table des matières principale. Le (premier) chapitre commence +% avec sa minitoc, puis le texte sur deux colonnes. Nous +% utilisons le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} pour +% fournir du texte de bourrage; +% le numéro de section est utilisé pour choisir un paragraphe \emph{lipsum}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\chapter{First chapter} +\minitoc +\begin{multicols}{2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use a lot of sections, to have a minitoc large enough to +% use the three columns. A subsection with a long title gives +% a good result (we have used \com{mtcsetformat} to avoid hyphenations). +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons beaucoup de sections, pour avoir une minitoc +% suffisamment grande pour utiliser les trois colonnes. Une +% sous-section avec un titre long donne un bon résultat (nous avons utilisé \com{mtcsetformat} pour éviter les +% coupures). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{First section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Tenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Eleventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twelfth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fourteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Sixteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Seventeenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Eighteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Nineteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twentieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\subsection{A very long subsection title, for the fun in +a multicolumn table of contents} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Twenty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirtieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Thirty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fortieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Forty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fiftieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fifty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\end{multicols} +\clearpage +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-add.tex} document file}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-add.tex}}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows how to add special entries in the table of contents, and the interaction with the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre comment ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, ainsi que l'interaction avec +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-add> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} +%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-add.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{url} +\usepackage{tocbibind} +\usepackage{makeidx} +\makeatletter +\newif\ifscan@allowed +\scan@allowedtrue +\makeatother +\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}% +\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak + \dotfil~\ignorespaces}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Load the \upack{minitoc} package, or \pack{mtcoff}. +% \or\relax +% Charger le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ou \pack{mtcoff}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeindex +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call the mini-table preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons les commandes de préparation des mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We are using the \pack{tocbibind} package to add special entries in the table of contents, so we must take +% the precautions specified in section~\vref{special.entries}: +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, +% donc nous devons prendre les précautions spécifiées dans la section~\vref{special.entries}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents \mtcaddchapter +\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter +\listoftables \mtcaddchapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a chapter, we want a minitoc, a minilof and a minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Pour un chapitre, nous voulons une minitoc, une minilof et une minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{First chapter}\index{chapter!normal} +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the text of the chapter, with sections, figures and tables: +% \or\relax +% Puis le texte du chapitre, avec des figures et des tableaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{First section} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table} + +\section{Second section} +A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ +\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}\index{a}% +\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}\index{cannot}% +\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}\index{I}% +\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}\index{land}% +\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}\index{to}\index{tree}% +\index{would}\index{yes}% +\textsf{A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. +But I imagine that he would, yes.}\\ +\hbox{}\hfill +Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks}~(1993),~\textsl{Against~a~dark~background.}% +\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred chapter requires a special treatment; three solutions are possible. +% You can test variations on +% the \com{mtcaddchapter} command. Just uncomment one (and +% only one) of the \com{mtcaddchapter} commands after +% \com{chapter*} in the source code of \exam{mtc-add.tex}. +% For each case, look at the Table of Contents +% and the involved chapter. +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre étoilé nécessite un traitement spécial; trois solutions sont possibles. Vous pouvez tester des +% variations sur la commande \com{mtcaddchapter}. Il suffit de décommenter une et une seule des trois +% commandes \com{mtcaddchapter} après \com{chapter*} dans le code source de \exam{mtc-add.tex}. Pour chaque +% cas, regardez la table des matières et le chapitre concerné. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Second chapter, starred} +\index{chapter!starred} +%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 3 FOLLOWING LINES +\mtcaddchapter[Second chapter, starred] % OK +%% \mtcaddchapter[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. OK +%% \addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \mtcaddchapter[] % BAD SOLUTION +%% \mtcaddchapter % BAD SOLUTION +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\index{tests} + +This is a starred chapter; you can test here variations on +the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| command. Just uncomment one (and +only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| commands after +\verb|\chapter*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. +For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents +and at this chapter. +\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% +\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{chapter}\index{code}% +\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}\index{each}% +\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}% +\index{index}\index{is}\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}% +\index{lot}\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}% +\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}% +\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}% +\index{variations}\index{you}% +I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. + +\chapter{Third chapter} +\index{chapter!normal} +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +\section{Third section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table} + +\section{Fourth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As we want to add an entry for the bibliography in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package +% for that, we must add a correction with \com{adjustmtc}: +% \or\relax +% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour la bibliographie dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons +% donc le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous ajoutons une correction avec \com{adjustmtc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\nocite* +\def\noopsort#1{\relax} +\bibliographystyle{plain} +\bibliography{mtc-add} +\adjustmtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As we want to add an entry for the index in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package +% for that, we must add a correction; two solutions are available: use \com{mtcfixindex} or +% the other given three lines: +% \or\relax +% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour l'index dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour cela, nous devons ajouter une correction; deux solutions sont +% disponibles: utiliser \com{mtcfixindex} ou les trois autres lignes données: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\printindex +\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines +%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{} +%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{} +%% \mtcaddchapter +%% + +\appendix +\chapter{App.~1} +\index{chapter!appendix} +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +\section{Fifth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Fifth table} \end{table} + +\section{Sixth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The next chapter asks for a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot, but contains no tables; hence +% the \upack{minitoc} package will give some warnings. +% \or\relax +% Le chapitre suivant demande une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot, mais ne contient aucun tableau; donc le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} émettra quelques avertissements. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{App.~2} +\index{chapter!appendix} +%% contains no tables but asks for a minilot! No minilot printed. +\minitoc \mtcskip +\minilof \mtcskip +\minilot +\section{Seventh section} +\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure} + +\section{Eighth section} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure} + +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we need also its small bibliographic data base: +% \or\relax +% Et nous avons aussi besoin de sa petite base bibliographique: +% \fi +% \begin{itemize} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% \item la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-addbib> +@MISC{minitoc, + TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}", + MONTH=jul, + YEAR=2008} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr}: +% \or\relax +% \item la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +@MISC{minitoc-fr, + TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}", + MONTH=jul, + YEAR=2008} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item the documentation of the \upack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc}: +% \or\relax +% \item la documentation du paquetage \upack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +@MISC{shorttoc, + TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", + AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", + NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}", + MONTH=aug, + YEAR=2002} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \item a novel~\cite{dark} from which a short citation is taken: +% \or\relax +% \item un roman~\cite{dark} d'où une courte citation est extraite: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +@BOOK{dark, + TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}", + AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies", + PUBLISHER="Bantam Books", + ISBN="0553292240 (pb)", + YEAR=1993} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But the database created this way must be trimmed of some spurious lines; +% on Unix-like systems, do\footnote{Note that we should use no preamble for +% this file in \xfile{minitoc.ins}; nevertheless, some spurious lines are still generated. This +% problem is not yet corrected now, so we keep the solution.}: +% \or\relax +% Mais la base ainsi créée doit être purgée des lignes superflues; +% sur les systèmes analogues à~Unix, faites\,\footnote{Notez que nous +% ne devrions pas utiliser de préambule pour ce fichier dans \xfile{minitoc.ins}; néanmoins, des lignes +% superflues sont encore produites. Ce problème n'est pas encore corrigé, donc nous conservons cette solution.}: +% \fi +% \begin{verse}\small +% \verb"cat mtc-add.bib | grep -v '^%%' > addbib;mv addbib mtc-add.bib" +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ads.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} +% This document uses the \class{article} class and shows some problems for adding special entries in the +% table of contents and some problems with floating objects. We need to use the \pack{tocbibind} +% package~\cite{tocbibind} for the first ones and the \upack{minitoc} \opt{insection} package option to avoid +% the drift if floating objects outside of their section. That gives the following document preamble: +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ads.tex}}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} +% Ce document utilise la classe \class{article} et montre quelques problèmes pour ajouter des entrées spéciales +% dans la table des matières et quelques problèmes avec les objets flottants. Il nous faut utiliser le paquetage +% \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} pour les premiers et l'option \opt{insection} du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour éviter la dérive des objets flottants hors de leur section. Ceci donne le +% préambule suivant: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ads> +\documentclass[oneside,12pt,a4paper]{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ads.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{url,tocbibind,makeidx} +\makeatletter \newif\ifscan@allowed \scan@allowedtrue \makeatother +\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}% +\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak + \dotfil~\ignorespaces}% +\usepackage[tight,hints,insection]{minitoc} +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +\makeindex +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de préparation: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dopartlof \dopartlot +\dosecttoc \dosectlof \dosectlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands to prepare the table of contents, the list of figures and the list of tables. As we use the +% \pack{tocbibind} package, we must add some \com{mtcaddsection} commands: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes pour préparer la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. Comme nous +% utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous devons ajouter quelques commandes \com{mtcaddsection}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{6} +\setcounter{parttocdepth}{6} +\setcounter{secttocdepth}{6} +\tableofcontents \mtcaddsection +\listoffigures \mtcaddsection +\listoftables \mtcaddsection +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document: a part with its part-level mini-tables, some sections with their section-level +% mini-tables. The document has an index and contains figures and tables. +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document: une partie avec ses mini-tables au niveau partie, quelques sections leurs mini-tables au +% niveau section. Le document a un index et contient des figures et des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part{Part~1} +\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot + +\section{First section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{First subsection} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Second subsection} +A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ +\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}% +\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}% +\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}% +\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}% +\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}% +\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}% +A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. +But I imagine that he would, yes.\\ +\hbox{}\hfill Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}% +\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here, we try a starred section, with its entry in the table of contents. You can try several solutions (good or bad). +% \or\relax +% Ici, nous essayons une section étoilée, avec son entrée dans la table des matières. Vous pouvez essayer plusieurs +% solutions (bonnes ou mauvaises). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section*{Second section, starred} +\index{section!starred} +%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES +\mtcaddsection[Second section, starred] % OK +%% \mtcaddsection[] % BAD +%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. +%% \mtcaddsection % BAD +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\index{tests} + +This is a starred section; you can test here variations on +the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and +only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after +\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. +For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents +and at this section. +\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% +\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}% +\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}% +\index{Contents}\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}% +\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}% +\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}% +\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}\index{source}% +\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}\index{the}% +\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}% +\index{variations}\index{you}% +I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. + +\section{Third section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Third subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Fourth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table} + +\subsubsection{Even a sub-sub-section!} +\subsubsection{And yet another one} + +\part{Part~2} +\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot + +\section{Fourth section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Fifth subsection} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table}[tp] \caption{Fifth table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Sixth subsection} +A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ +\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}% +\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}% +\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}% +\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}% +\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}% +\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}% +A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. +But I imagine that he would, yes.\\ +\hbox{}\hfill +Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}% +\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} + +\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table} + +\section*{Fifth section, starred} +\index{section!starred} +%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES +\mtcaddsection[Fifth section, starred] % OK +%% \mtcaddsection[] % OK +%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. +%% \mtcaddsection % OK +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\index{tests} + +This is a starred section; you can test here variations on +the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and +only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after +\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. +For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents +and at this section.\index{a}% +\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% +\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}% +\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}% +\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}% +\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}% +\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}% +\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}% +\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}% +\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}% +\index{uncomment}\index{variations}\index{you}% +I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. + +\section{Sixth section} +\index{section!normal} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Seventh subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Seventh table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Eighth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Eighth table} \end{table} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The bibliography: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{adjuststc}: +% \or\relax +% La bibliographie: comme nous voulons une entrée pour elle dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{adjuststc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\nocite* +\def\noopsort#1{\relax} +\bibliographystyle{plain} +\bibliography{mtc-add} +\adjuststc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The index: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{mtcfixindex}: +% \or\relax +% L'index: comme nous voulons une entrée pour lui dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{mtcfixindex}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\printindex +\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines +%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{} +%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{} +%% \mtcaddsection + +\appendix +\section{App.~1} +\index{section!appendix} +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Ninth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Ninth table} \end{table} + +\subsection{Tenth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Tenth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{table} \caption{Tenth table} \end{table} + +\section{App.~2} +\index{section!appendix} +%% contains no tables but asks for a sectlot! No sectlot printed. +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot +\subsection{Eleventh subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Twelfth figure} \end{figure} + +\subsection{Twelfth subsection} + +\begin{figure} \caption{Thirdteenth figure} \end{figure} +\begin{figure} \caption{Fourteenth figure} \end{figure} + +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-amm.tex} document file}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-amm.tex}}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This example shows the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a \class{memoir} class document when +% the \upack{minitoc} package is loaded. First, the preamble: +% \or\relax +% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} +% lorsque le paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été chargé. Tout d'abord, le préambule: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-amm> +\documentclass[oneside]{memoir} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-amm.tex}% + [2007/08/29] +\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text +\usepackage{hyperref} +\usepackage{memhfixc} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +\adjustmtc +\chapter{First chapter} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] +\section{First section} +\lipsum[2] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{environment}{appendices} +% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The appendices are set in an \env{appendices} environment; we can add an entry in the TOC with +% \com{addappheadtotoc} (a command from the \class{memoir} class): +% \or\relax +% Les appendices sont composés dans un environnement \env{appendices}; nous pouvons ajouter une entrée dans la table +% des matières avec \com{addappheadtotoc} (une commande fournie par la classe \class{memoir}): +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{appendices} +\addappheadtotoc +\adjustmtc %correction! +\chapter{Afterthoughts} +\minitoc +\lipsum[3] +Afterthoughts appendix +\section{Further remarks} +\lipsum[4] +\chapter{Last wills} +\minitoc +\section{Testament} +\lipsum[5] +\end{appendices} +\chapter{Conclusion} +\minitoc +\section{Bye} +\lipsum[6] +\chapter{Back from Hell} +\minitoc +\section{Not dead yet!} +\lipsum[7] +\section{I will survive} +\lipsum[8] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-apx.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-apx.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-apx.tex}}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-apx.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-art.tex} document file}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-art.tex}}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains sections but no chapters, so it must use an +% \class{article}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and +% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows: +% \or\relax +% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des sections mais pas de chapitres, +% donc il doit utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\class{article}. Vous devriez travailler sur +% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec +% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-art> +%% mtc-art.tex +%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc +%% package. You can alter most of parameters to test. +%% article (\section must be defined) +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-art.tex}% + [2007/06/06] +\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text +%% \usepackage{hyperref} % If used, load it BEFORE minitoc +\usepackage[tight,insection]{minitoc} +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents +\setlength{\stcindent}{24pt} % indentation of secttocs, default +%% % font for secttocs, default +\renewcommand{\stcfont}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% +%% % font for secttocs, subsections +%% \renewcommand{\stcSSfont}{\small\sf}% +%% % you can make experiments with +%% % \stcSSSfont, \stcPfont and \stcSPfont +%% % but it is ``fontomania''... +\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want to use sections numbered in each part (the section number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each +% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the secttoc files is +% independent on the numbering of the sections (it is absolute). +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez utiliser des sections numérotées dans chaque partie (le numéro de section repart à~1 au début de +% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers +% secttoc est indépendante de celle des sections (elle est absolue). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test +%%% resetting section number in each part +%%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{section}{part} \makeatother +%%% END TEST +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in +% the mini-tables): +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et +% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables): +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dosecttoc +\dosectlof[c] % center titles of the sectlofs +\dosectlot +\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff +\dopartlof % added in version #15 +\dopartlot % added in version #15 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print. +% \or\relax +% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\faketableofcontents % or \tableofcontents +\fakelistoffigures % to check compatibility +\fakelistoftables % to check compatibility +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands; +% we define a part, with a parttoc, a partlof (with the title on the right) and a parttoc: +% \or\relax +% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement; +% nous définissons une partie, avec une parttoc, une partlof (avec le titre sur la droite) et une parttoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part{First Part} \parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A section, in two columns mode, with a secttoc (title on the right), and a sectlof; this section contains +% subsections to make a non-empty secttoc but no figures (to detect an empty sectlof). +% \or\relax +% Une section, en mode deux colonnes, avec une secttoc (titre sur la droite), et une sectlof; cette section contient +% des sous-sections pour que la secttoc ne soit pas vide mais pas de figures (pour détecter une sectlof vide). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\twocolumn\sloppy % the secttoc in twocolumn layout is ugly, + % but works. Ideas to make it better? +\section{AAAAA} % a section with a lot of sections +\secttoc[r] % secttoc title on the right +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +\lipsum[1] +\subsection{S1} \lipsum[2] +\subsection{S2} \lipsum[3] +\subsection{S3} \lipsum[4] +\subsection*{S4} +%% \addcontentsline{toc}{starsubsection}{*S4*} +\lipsum[5] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A lot of subsections: +% \or\relax +% Un tas de sous-sections: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\subsection{S5} \lipsum[6] +\subsection{S6} \lipsum[7] +\subsection{S7} \lipsum[8] +\subsection{S8} \lipsum[9] +\subsection{S9} \lipsum[10] +\subsection{S10} \lipsum[11] +\subsection{S11} \lipsum[12] +\subsection{S12} \lipsum[13] +\subsection{S13} \lipsum[14] +\subsection{S14} \lipsum[15] +\subsection{S15} \lipsum[16] +\subsection{S16} \lipsum[17] +\subsection{S17} \lipsum[18] +\subsection{S18} \lipsum[19] +\subsection{S19} \lipsum[20] +\subsection{S20} \lipsum[21] +\subsection{S21} \lipsum[22] +\subsection{S22} \lipsum[23] +\subsection{S23} \lipsum[24] +\subsection{S24} \lipsum[25] +\subsection{S25} \lipsum[26] +\subsection{S26} \lipsum[27] +\subsection{S27} \lipsum[28] +\subsection{S28} \lipsum[29] +\subsection{S29} \lipsum[30] +\subsection{S30} \lipsum[31] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We return to the one column mode. Then a section with a secttoc and a sectlof (there are subsections and figures). +% The \opt{insection} package option should ensure that floating objects (like figures) do not drift outside +% their section. +% \or\relax +% Nous revenons au mode une colonne. Puis une section avec une secttoc et une sectlof (il y~a des sous-sections et +% des figures). +% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} devrait garantir que les objets flottants (tels que les figures) ne +% dérivent pas en dehors de leur section. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column +\section{BBBBB} +\secttoc +\mtcskip % put some skip here +\sectlof % a sectlof +\lipsum[32] +\subsection{T1} \lipsum[33] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F1} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\subsubsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command +\lipsum[34] +\paragraph{TTT1} \lipsum[35] +\subparagraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[36] +\begin{figure}[t] +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\subsection{T2} \lipsum[37] +\section*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-section. should have no secttoc +%% \addstarredsection{CCCCC} +\mtcaddsection[CCCCC] +\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +\lipsum[38] +\subsection{U1} \lipsum[39] +\subsubsection{UU1} \lipsum[40] +\paragraph{UUU1} \lipsum[41] +\subparagraph{UUUU1} \lipsum[42] +\subsection{U2} \lipsum[43] +\part{Second Part} +\parttoc +\partlof[c] +\partlot +%% % the following section should have no secttoc, +\section{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \secttoc, +%% \secttoc +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +% % the secttoc appears +\lipsum[44] +\subsection{V1} \lipsum[45] +\subsubsection{VV1} \lipsum[46] +\paragraph{VVV1} \lipsum[47] +\subparagraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[48] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\lipsum[49] \subsection{V2} \lipsum[50] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We change the depth of the secttocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces): +% \or\relax +% Nous changeons la profondeur des secttocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{EEEEE} % this section should have a secttoc +{% % left brace, see below +\setcounter{secttocdepth}{3} % depth of sect table of contents; + % try with different values. +\secttoc +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +} % right brace +%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change on secttocdepth. +\lipsum[51] +\subsection{W1} % with the given depth +\lipsum[52] +\subsubsection{WW1} \lipsum[53] +\paragraph{WWW1} \lipsum[54] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla +\subparagraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[55] +\subsection{W2} \lipsum[56] +% no chapter in article class \chapter*{} +\part{Appendices} +\parttoc \mtcskip +\partlof \mtcskip +\partlot +\FloatBarrier +\appendix +\section{Comments} \lipsum[57] +\secttoc +\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED +\subsection{C1} \lipsum[58] +\subsection{C2} \lipsum[59] +\subsection{C3} \lipsum[60] +\begin{figure}[hb] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} +\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\FloatBarrier +\subsection{C4} \lipsum[61] +\FloatBarrier +\section{Evolution} +\secttoc +\sectlof % empty +\sectlot % empty +\lipsum[62] +\subsection{D1} \lipsum[63] \subsection{D2} \lipsum[64] +\subsection{D3} \lipsum[65] \subsection{D4} \lipsum[66] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bk.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bk.tex}}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains chapters, so it must use a +% \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and +% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows: +% \or\relax +% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des chapitres, donc il doit +% utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\upack{book} ou à~\class{report}. Vous devriez travailler sur +% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec +% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-bk> +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% A example file (differs from previous versions) +%% mtc-bk.tex +%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc package file. +%% You can alter most of parameters to test. +%% Class: book/report (\chapter must be defined). +%% You can use a copy of this file to play with minitoc commands and parameters. +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} % the report class uses less pages +%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-bk.tex}% + [2007/06/06] +\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text +%% \usepackage{hyperref} % if used, load it BEFORE minitoc +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} % tight option make shorter mini-tables +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents +\setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} % indentation of minitocs, default +\renewcommand{\mtcfont}{\small\rm} % font for minitocs, default +\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\small\bf} % font for minitocs, sections, default +%% \renewcommand{\mtcSSfont}{\small\sf} % font for minitocs, subsections +%% you can make experiments with \mtcSSSfont, \mtcPfont and \mtcSPfont +%% but it is ``fontomania''... +\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you want to use chapters numbered in each part (the chapter number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each +% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the minitoc files is +% independent on the numbering of the chapters (it is absolute). +% \or\relax +% Si vous voulez utiliser des chapitres numérotés dans chaque partie (le numéro de partie repart à~1 au début de +% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers +% minitoc est indépendante de celle des chapitres (elle est absolue). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test resetting chapter number in each part +%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{chapter}{part} \makeatother +%%% END TEST +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in +% the mini-tables): +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et +% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables): +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\mtcpagenumbers +\noptcrule +%% \nomtcrule % suppresses minitoc rules +%% \nomtcpagenumbers % suppresses minitoc page numbers +%% \nomlfpagenumbers % ---------- minilof ---- ------- +%% \nomltpagenumbers % ---------- minilot ---- ------- +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\dominilof[c] % centers title of minilof's +\dominilot +\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff +\dopartlof % added in version #15 +\dopartlot % added in version #15 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print. +% \or\relax +% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents % or \faketableofcontents +\listoffigures % or \fakelistoffigures +\fakelistoftables % or \listoftables +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Uncomment the following line if the first chapter must be numbered~``0'': +% \or\relax +% Décommentez la ligne suivante si le premier chapitre doit être numéroté~«~0~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % to begin with Chapter 0 +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part{First Part} +\parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot[r] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter, in two column mode, with a minitoc (title on the right): +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre, en mode deux colonnes, avec une minitoc (titre sur la droite): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\twocolumn\sloppy % the minitoc in twocolumn layout is ugly, +\chapter{AAAAA} % a chapter with a lot of sections +\minitoc[r] % minitoc title on the right +\lipsum[1] +\section{S1} \lipsum[2] +\section{S2} \lipsum[3] +\section{S3} \lipsum[4] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred section; we want an entry in the TOC, so we add it the normal way: +% \or\relax +% Une section étoilée: nous voulons une entrée dans la table des matières, donc nous l'ajoutons de la manière +% normale: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section*{S4} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}{S4}} +\lipsum[5] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A lot of subsections: +% \or\relax +% Un tas de sous-sections: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{S5} \lipsum[6] +\section{S6} \lipsum[6] +\section{S7} \lipsum[7] +\section{S8} \lipsum[9] +\section{S9} \lipsum[10] +\section{S10} \lipsum[11] +\section{S11} \lipsum[12] +\section{S12} \lipsum[13] +\section{S13} \lipsum[14] +\section{S14} \lipsum[15] +\section{S15} \lipsum[16] +\section{S16} \lipsum[17] +\section{S17} \lipsum[18] +\section{S18} \lipsum[19] +\section{S19} \lipsum[20] +\section{S20} \lipsum[21] +\section{S21} \lipsum[22] +\section{S22} \lipsum[23] +\section{S23} \lipsum[24] +\section{S24} \lipsum[25] +\section{S25} \lipsum[26] +\section{S26} \lipsum[27] +\section{S27} \lipsum[28] +\section{S28} \lipsum[29] +\section{S29} \lipsum[30] +\section{S30} \lipsum[31] +\subsection{SS1} \lipsum[32] +\section{S31} \lipsum[33] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We return to one column mode. A new chapter, with a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot: +% \or\relax +% Nous revenons au mode sur une colonne. Un nouveau chapitre, avec une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column +\chapter{BBBBB} +\minitoc +\mtcskip % put some skip here +\minilof % a minilof +\mtcskip % put some skip here +\minilot % a minilot +\lipsum[34] +\section{T1} \lipsum[35] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F1} % (tables are similar) +\end{figure} +\begin{table}[b] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{T1} % (tables are similar) +\end{table} +\clearpage +\subsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command +\lipsum[36] +\subsubsection{TTT1} \lipsum[37] +\paragraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[38] +\begin{figure} +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption +\end{figure} +\section{T2} \lipsum[39] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph*} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred chapter with an entry added in the TOC; all subordinate (lower) +% sectionning commands must also be starred. +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée ajoutée dans la table des matières; +% toutes les commandes de sectionnement subalternes (plus basses) doivent aussi être étoilées. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-chapter; could have a minitoc. +\addstarredchapter{CCCCC} +\lipsum[40] +\section*{U1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U1} +\lipsum[41] +\subsection*{UU1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{UU1} +\lipsum[42] +\subsubsection*{UUU1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsubsection}{UUU1} +\lipsum[43] +\paragraph*{UUUU1} +\addcontentsline{toc}{paragraph}{UUUU1} +\lipsum[44] +\section*{U2} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U2} +\lipsum[45] +\part{Second Part} +\parttoc +\partlof[c] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter has no minitoc, but if you uncomment \com{minitoc}, +% the minitoc will appear. +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre n'a pas de minitoc, mais si vous décommentez \com{minitoc}, +% la minitoc apparaîtra. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% % the following chapter should have no minitoc, +\chapter{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \minitoc, +%% \minitoc % the minitoc appears +\lipsum[46] +\section{V1} \lipsum[47] +\subsection{VV1} \lipsum[48] +\subsubsection{VVV1} \lipsum[49] +\paragraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[50] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\lipsum[51] +\section{V2} \lipsum[52] +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We change the depth of the minitocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces): +% \or\relax +% Nous changeons la profondeur des minitocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{EEEEE} % this chapter should have a minitoc +{% % left brace, see below +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} % depth of mini table of contents; + % try with different values. +\minitoc +} % right brace +%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change +%% on minitocdepth. +\lipsum[53] +\section{W1} % with the given depth +\lipsum[54] +\subsection{WW1} \lipsum[55] +\subsubsection{WWW1} \lipsum[56] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables here, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\lipsum[57] +\paragraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[58] +\subparagraph{WWWWW1} \lipsum[59] +\section{W2} \lipsum[60] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Here, we encounter a classical problem: to make a local table of contents for a set +% of appendices, while hiding these entries in the main table of contents. First, we +% create a part, with its parttoc: +% \or\relax +% Ici, nous rencontrons un problème classique: faire une table des matières locale pour un ensemble d'appendices, +% et tout en masquant ces entrées dans la table des matières principale. Tout d'abord, nous créons une partie, avec sa +% parttoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\appendix +\part{Appendices} +\parttoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we begin a \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, with the hiding depth as optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous commençons un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, avec la profondeur de masquage requise: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] +\chapter{Comments} +\minitoc +\section{C1} \lipsum[61] +\section{C2} \lipsum[62] +\section{C3} \lipsum[63] +\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies +\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} +\begin{picture}(100,50) +\end{picture} +\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) +\end{figure} +\section{C4} +\chapter{Evolution} +\minitoc +\minilof %Empty => invisible +\minilot %Empty => invisible +\section{D1} \lipsum[64] +\section{D2} \lipsum[65] +\section{D3} \lipsum[66] +\section{D4} \lipsum[67] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% We terminate the part by adding a marker in the TOC file, then we must close this \env{mtchideinmaintoc} +% environment: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Nous terminons la partie en ajoutant un marqueur dans le fichier table des matières, puis nous devons fermer +% cet environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% this line closes the omitted part +\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin} +%% this line restore the depth in the main TOC +\end{mtchideinmaintoc} +\lipsum[68] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bo.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bo.tex}}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a two column layout for some +% portions and the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. The aim is to begin a chapter with a special head and a +% preliminary block containing a minitoc and some indications, on two columns. +% The preamble loads the \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry}, which defines the global page layout, +% the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, the \pack{color} package~\cite{color}, because we want a colored +% background +% for the minitoc, the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}, to change some parameters of the minitoc, and, at +% least, the \upack{minitoc} package itself: +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant une mise en page sur +% deux colonnes pour certaines portions et le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Le but est de commencer +% un chapitre avec un en-tête spécial et un bloc préliminaire contenant une minitoc et quelques indications, sur +% deux colonnes. +% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry}, +% qui définit la mise en page globale, le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, +% le paquetage \pack{color}~\cite{color}, +% car nous voulons un fond coloré pour la minitoc, le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour changer +% quelques paramètres de la minitoc, et, enfin, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lui-même: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-bo> +\documentclass[10pt]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-bo.tex}% + [2007/04/17] +\usepackage[paperwidth=8.5in,paperheight=11in,% + lmargin=1.25in,rmargin=1.25in,tmargin=1in,bmargin=1in]{geometry} +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage{color} +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\addtolength} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecnumwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use the \pack{tocloft} package and its commands to set the indentations in the TOC and the minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocloft} et ses commandes pour établir les indentations dans la table des +% matières et la minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{tocloft} +\setlength{\cftsecindent}{0cm} +\setlength{\cftsecnumwidth}{15 pt} +\setlength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecindent} +\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecnumwidth} +\setlength{\cftsubsecnumwidth}{20 pt} +\setlength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecindent} +\addtolength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecnumwidth} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that if we want to suppress the page numbers in the minitoc, we must use the commands from \pack{tocloft}: +% \or\relax +% Notez que si nous voulons supprimer les numéros de page dans la minitoc, nous devons utiliser les commandes +% de \pack{tocloft}: +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} +\cftpagenumbersoff{subsec} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and change the indentation, suppress the rules and change the minitoc +% title. The \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref} can also be loaded (\emph{after} \upack{minitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et changeons l'indentation, supprimons les filets et changeons le +% titre. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref} peut aussi être chargé (\emph{après} \upack{minitoc}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[francais,tight]{minitoc} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\nomtcrule % pas de filets en haut et en bas de la mini-tdm +\nomtcpagenumbers % pas de numéro de pages +% (non fonctionnel avec tocloft) +\renewcommand{\mtctitle}{Contenu de la rencontre} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load also some packages for the french language (some are local): +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons aussi quelques paquetages pour la langue française: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[francais]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{mypatches} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code redefines the format of the chapter head: +% \or\relax +% Ce code redéfinit le format de l'en-tête de chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% MACRO POUR AVOIR LE MOT « RENCONTRE » AU LIEU DE « CHAPITRE » % +% Sans saut de ligne (modification du code qui se trouve dans la FAQ) % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\makeatletter +\def\@makechapterhead#1{% + \vspace*{10\p@}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \normalfont + \interlinepenalty\@M + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne + \Huge\bfseries\sffamily Rencontre \thechapter\\% \quad + \fi + \Huge\bfseries\sffamily #1\par\nobreak + \vskip 10\p@ +}} +\def\@makeschapterhead#1{% + \vspace*{10\p@}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont + \interlinepenalty\@M + \Huge \sffamily #1\par\nobreak + \vskip 10\p@ +}} \makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define an environment (\env{pageUn}) for the block placed at the beginning of a chapter. This block +% contains a minitoc, then a sequence of informations given by the 6~parameters of the environment. The block +% uses a \env{multicols} environment to typeset on two columns. Some decorations are added: rules, colored +% background for the minitoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons un environnement (\env{pageUn}) pour le bloc placé en début de chapitre. Ce bloc contient +% une minitoc, puis une séquence d'informations données par les 6~paramètres de l'environnement. Ce bloc utilise +% un environnement \env{multicols} pour composer sur deux colonnes. Quelques décorations sont ajoutées: des +% filets, un fond coloré pour la minitoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%: ENVIRONNEMENT POUR LA PAGE 1 DES RENCONTRES % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% param1: date de la rencontre +% param2: nombre de périodes +% param3: liste des documents distribués +% param4: messages +% param5: lecture +% param6: exercices +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newenvironment{pageUn}[6]{% +\parindent = 0.0in +\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} +\begin{multicols}{2} + {\large \bfseries Math. pour médecine nucléaire\\ + \textit{(#2)}} + \vfill\columnbreak + \raggedleft\bfseries Automne 2003\\ + #1 +\end{multicols} +\vspace{-18pt} +\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} + +\setlength{\columnseprule}{.3pt} \setlength{\columnsep}{1cm} +\begin{multicols}{2}% + +%: TABLE DES MATIÈRES (col. gauche) +\colorbox[cmyk]{.1,0,0,0}{% + \parbox{\linewidth}{% + \setcounter{minitocdepth}{3}% + \minitoc% + }} +%\vfill \columnbreak ~ \vfill + +\mtcskip + +%: DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUÉS (début col. droite) + +{\large \bfseries Documents distribués} +\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$} #3 \end{itemize} + +%: MESSAGES AUX ÉTUDIANTS + +\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Messages} +\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$}#4\end{itemize} + +%: LECTURE +\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Lecture}\vspace{-6pt} \par#5 \par + +% EXERCICES +\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Exercices}\vspace{-6pt}\par#6\par + +%\newpage +\end{multicols}% +} +%{\newpage} +{\hrule} + +%\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.2} %interligne + +%\pagestyle{empty} %pas de # de page +%\parindent = 0.0in +\parskip = 0.1in + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%: REDÉFINIR LES SECTIONS % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}} +%\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter-\Alph{section}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%%%%%%%%%% +%: BEGIN % +%%%%%%%%%% +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \faketableofcontents +\chapter{Première étape (début)} +%\minitoc +\begin{pageUn} + {%1 Date du cours + lundi 25 août + } + {%2 Durée du cours + 2 périodes + } + {%3 Liste des documents à~distribuer + \item Plan de cours + \item Fiche d'identification + \item Grille horaire + \item Feuilles d'exercices supplémentaires + } + {%4 Ne pas oublier + \item Acheter le livre de référence + \item Apporter une disquette + } + {%5 Lecture + Lire les pages ppp à~ppp et ppp à~ppp + } + {%6 Exercice + Faire les exercices nnn de la page ppp + } +\end{pageUn} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Titre de la section} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Texte dans la section + +%% +\subsection{Une sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + +%% +\subsection{Une autre sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Titre d'une autre section} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Texte dans la section + +%% +\subsection{Une sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + +%% +\subsection{Une autre sous-section} +%% +Bla bla bla + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Encore une autre section} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +Texte dans la section + +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a starred first chapter, +% inducing the ``Chapter Zero'' problem. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant un premier chapitre +% étoilé, induisant le problème du «~Chapitre~zéro~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ch0> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ch0.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[tight,english]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first chapter is starred, but contains real numbered sections. We add an entry in the TOC for this chapter +% and see that its sections are using ``0'' as chapter number: +% \or\relax +% Le premier chapitre est étoilé, mais contient de vraies sections numérotées. Nous ajoutons une entrée pour ce +% chapitre dans la table des matières et voyons que ses sections utilisent «~0~» comme numéro de chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Chapter One (starred)} +\mtcaddchapter[Fake chapter one] +\minitoc +\section{Chap 1, section 1} +That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and +Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize +worldwide parties to celebrate. + +Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved +Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for +one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, +organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to +organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, +dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do +things by halves around here. + +\subsection{Chap 1, section 1, subsection 1} +That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and +Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize +worldwide parties to celebrate. + +Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved +Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for +one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, +organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to +organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, +dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do +things by halves around here. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second chapter is normal: +% \or\relax +% Le second chapitre est normal: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Chapter Two (numbered one)} +\minitoc +\section{Chapter 2, section 1} +That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and +Thunderbird 1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize +worldwide parties to celebrate. + +Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved +Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for +one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, +organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to +organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, +dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do +things by halves around here. +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-cri.tex} document file}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-cri.tex}}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\part*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document +% with a starred part and starred chapters. Note the use of the adjustment commands. +% This example is not commented: just follow the insertion of the mini-tables in the \xfile{mtc-cri.log} file. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document +% avec une partie étoilée et des chapitres étoilés. Notez l'utilisation des commandes d'ajustement. +% Cet exemple n'est pas commenté: suivez simplement l'insertion des mini-tables dans le fichier \xfile{mtc-cri.log}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-cri> +\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% + {report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-cri.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[francais]{babel} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage% + [french2,tight]% + {minitoc} + +\mtcsetdepth{parttoc}{2} + +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\part*{Présentation générale} +\mtcaddpart[Présentation générale] +\adjustptc[-2] +\parttoc + +Texte de la +présentation générale\ldots + +\chapter*{Les auteurs} +\mtcaddchapter[Les auteurs] +Présentation des auteurs\ldots + +\chapter*{Les lecteurs} +\mtcaddchapter[Les lecteurs] +Présentation des lecteurs\ldots + +\part{Première partie} +\parttoc +\chapter*{Introduction} +\mtcaddchapter[Introduction] +\chapter{Premier chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~A} +\section{Deuxième section~A} +\chapter{Deuxième chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~B} +\section{Deuxième section~B} + +\part{Deuxième partie} +\parttoc +\chapter{Premier chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~C} +\section{Deuxième section~C} +\chapter{Deuxième chapitre} +\minitoc +\section{Première section~D} +\section{Deuxième section~D} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}}% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fko.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fko.tex}}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is a document using the \class{scrbook} class. Without any precaution, some entries in the minitocs are +% not in the right font (bold sans serif) like in the main table of contents; moreover, the language of the +% minitoc titles is not correct because the options of the \pack{babel} package are not transferred to the +% \upack{minitoc} package. To solve the language problem, we just set ``\lopt{german}'' as a \emph{global} option in +% the \com{documentclass} command (\pack{babel} and \upack{minitoc} will hence use this global option). +% \or\relax +% C'est un document qui utilise la classe \class{scrbook}. Sans aucune précaution, certaines entrées dans les minitocs ne +% sont pas dans la fonte correcte (grasse et sans empattements) comme dans la table des matières principale; de +% plus, la langue des titres des minitocs n'est pas correcte car les options du paquetage \pack{babel} ne sont +% pas transmises au paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Pour résoudre ce problème de langue, nous mettons +% simplement «~\lopt{german}~» comme option \emph{globale} dans la commande \com{documentclass} (\pack{babel} +% et \upack{minitoc} utiliseront donc cette option globale). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-fko> +\documentclass[german,a4paper,oneside]{scrbook} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-fko.tex}% + [2007/02/19] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we load the packages and set some parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous chargeons les paquetages et établissons quelques paramètres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[germanb]{babel} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} % optional +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \begin{macro}{\sectfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we set explicitly the fonts for the entries\footnote{Here we only gave the commands for the section entries in +% the minitocs, but analog commands may be used for lower entries.} and the font of the titles of the minitocs, +% knowing that the font command \com{sectfont} is defined in \xfile{scrbook.cls}; we change also the title for +% the minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous établissons explicitement les fontes pour les entrées\,\footnote{Nous ne donnons ici que les commandes +% pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, mais des commandes analogues peuvent être utilisées pour des +% entrées inférieures.} et la fonte des titres des minitocs, en sachant que la commande de fonte \com{sectfont} +% est définie dans \xfile{scrbook.cls}; nous changeons aussi le titre des minitocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\sectfont\small} +\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\sectfont\large} +\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Inhalt} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the body of the document, with a chapter (with a minitoc) containing a section. The section entry did not +% appear in bold sans serif in the original document (before the corrections). +% \or\relax +% Et voici le corps du document, avec un chapitre (et sa minitoc) contenant une section. L'entrée de section +% n'apparaissait pas en gras sans empattement dans le document original (avant les corrections). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% +\chapter{Ein serifenloses Kapitel} +\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc +\section{Dieser Text ist in minitoc serifenlos} +Auch der Text \glqq Inhaltsangabe\grqq\ will +so wie koma es definiert. +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level +% entries); you can compare the results. +% \or\relax +% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau +% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-fo1> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo1.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc \tableofcontents +\part{Introduction} \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A first copy, with default fonts: +% \or\relax +% Une première copie, avec les fontes par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A second copy, roman bold font for chapter entries: +% \or\relax +% Une deuxième copie, fonte romaine grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A third copy, typewriter bold font for chapter entries: +% \or\relax +% Une troisième copie, fonte bâton grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A fourth copy, not bold typewriter font for chapter entries: +% \or\relax +% Une quatrième copie, fonte bâton non grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +\chapter{A very short chapter} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] +\section{First section} \lipsum[2] +\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] +\subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[5] +\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] +\subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level +% entries); you can compare the results. As the fonts are not declared the same way, compare the results +% with those of \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}). +% \or\relax +% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau +% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. Comme les fontes ne sont pas déclarées de la même manière, +% comparez les résultats avec ceux de \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-fo2> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo2.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{11} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We declare the fonts with the old method: +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons les fontes avec l'ancienne méthode: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections) + \def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections) + \def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs) + \def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs) + \def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures) + \def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures) + \def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables) + \def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables) +\begin{document} +\doparttoc \dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\part{Introduction} +\clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A first version of the parttoc, with the fonts defined above: +% \or\relax +% Une première version de la parttoc, avec les fontes définies ci-dessus: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A second version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a roman bold font: +% \or\relax +% Une deuxième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte romane grasse: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A third version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a typewriter bold font: +% \or\relax +% Une troisième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton grasse: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A fourth version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a non bold typewriter font: +% \or\relax +% Une quatrième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton non grasse: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries} +\parttoc \clearpage +\chapter{A very short chapter} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] +\section{First section} \lipsum[2] +\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] \subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[5] +\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-gap.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-gap.tex}}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-gap.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hia.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hia.tex}}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables +% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{article} class. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains +% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{article}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hia> +\documentclass% + [oneside,a4paper]{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hia.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage% + [tight,insection]% + {minitoc} +\dosectlot +\begin{document} +\listoftables +\section{First section} +\sectlot +\lipsum[1] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My first visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[2] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[3] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\mtchideinmainlot +\caption{My first hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[4-6] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[7] +\section{Second section} +\sectlot +\lipsum[8] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My last hidden table} +\endmtchideinmainlot +\end{table} +\lipsum[9] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A third visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[10] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{A fourth visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[11] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hir.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hir.tex}}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables +% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{report} class. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains +% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{report}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hir> +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hir.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\dominilot +\begin{document} +\listoftables +\chapter{First chapter} +\minilot +\lipsum[1] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My first visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[2] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[3] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\mtchideinmainlot % <-- +\caption{My first hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[4-6] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A second hidden table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[7] +\chapter{Second chapter} +\minilot +\lipsum[8] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption: +% \or\relax +% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{My last hidden table} +\endmtchideinmainlot % <-- +\end{table} +\lipsum[9] +\begin{table}[ht] +\caption{A third visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[10] +\begin{table}[hb] +\caption{A fourth visible table} +\end{table} +\lipsum[11] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}}% +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hop.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hop.tex}}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of class \class{scrbook}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de la classe \class{scrbook}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-hop> +\documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-hop.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage[hints]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the minitocs and the minilofs, we print the TOC but not the LOF (while the LOF file is prepared): +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les minitocs et les minilofs, nous imprimons la table des matières mais pas la liste des figures +% (cependant son fichier est préparé): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +\dominilof \fakelistoffigures +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\part*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred part with its entry in the TOC: +% \or\relax +% Une partie étoilée avec son entrée dans la table des matières: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\part*{Part 1: Strategic Marketing} +\mtcaddpart[Part 1: Strategic Marketing] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then two chapters with their minitocs and minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Puis deux chapitres avec leurs minitocs et minilofs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Chapter 1} +\minitoc \minilof +\section{Section one of first chapter} \lipsum[1] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture one of first chapter} +\end{figure} + +\section{Section two of first chapter} \lipsum[2] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture two of first chapter} +\end{figure} + +\chapter{Chapter 2} +\minitoc \minilof + +\section{Section one of second chapter} \lipsum[3] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture one of second chapter} +\end{figure} +\cleardoublepage +\section{Section two of second chapter} \lipsum[4] +\begin{figure} + \centering Test + \caption{Picture two of second chapter} +\end{figure} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-liv.tex} document file}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-liv.tex}}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of \class{book} class, with +% customized TOC and minitocs. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{book}, avec +% une table de matières et des minitocs personnalisées. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-liv> +\documentclass[10pt,twoside,openright]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-liv.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we want that empty pages be really empty, without page number nor headers, +% so we redefine \com{cleardoublepage}: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous souhaitons que les pages vides le soient vraiment, sans numéro de page ni en-tête, donc nous +% redéfinissons \com{cleardoublepage}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeatletter +\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% +\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage + \if@twoside + \ifodd\c@page\else + \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage + \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi + \fi + \fi + }% +\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the encodings, for input and output, because the document is in french and uses accented letters: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les codages, en entrée et en sortie, car le document est en français et utilise des lettres +% accentuées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load two packages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, to customize the TOC and the minitocs, and +% \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, to customize the sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons deux paquetages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour adapter la table des matières et les minitocs, +% et \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, pour adapter les commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{tocloft} +\usepackage{sectsty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package then some complementary local packages for the french language: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} puis quelques paquetages locaux complémentaires pour le français: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[french,undotted,tight]{minitoc} +\usepackage[english,francais]{babel} +\usepackage{franc,frnew,mypatches} +\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\addtolength} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsetrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterfont} +% \begin{macro}{\thesection} +% \begin{macro}{\sectionfont} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We make some customizations: indentation for the subsection entries in the TOC and the minitocs, depth of the +% TOC, numerotation depth, depth of the minitocs, some fonts: +% \or\relax +% Nous faisons quelques adaptations: indentation pour les entrées de sous-sections dans la table des matières et +% les minitocs, profondeur de la table des matières, profondeur de la numérotation, profondeur des minitocs, +% quelques fontes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{1em} % for tocloft +\cftsetrmarg{2.55em plus 1fil} % to avoid hyphenations in the ToC (tocloft). +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1} +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{4} +\chapterfont{\huge\bfseries\sffamily} % for sectsty +\renewcommand{\thesection}{\arabic{section}} +\sectionfont{\Large\raggedright} % for sectsty (to avoid hyphenations in section titles) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some informations for the title page: +% \or\relax +% Des informations pour la page de titre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\title{Systèmes d'occultation} \author{Laurent~\textsc{Bloch}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection*} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the document body\footnote{The text has been shortened, so there is an undefined reference; do not worry.}: +% \or\relax +% Et le corps de document\,\footnote{Le texte a été abrégé, donc il reste une référence non satisfaite; ne vous +% inquiétez pas.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\dominitoc \tableofcontents + +\chapter{Définition et contrôle du travail à~faire}% +\label{chap+controle} +\minitoc + +\section{Le modèle de la grande industrie et le taylorisme}% +\index{taylorisme} +C'est au \textsc{xviii}\fup{e}~siècle que la vision du travail comme +marchandise est vraiment devenue dominante, pour s'imposer au +\textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle dans l'organisation type de la grande usine +industrielle. + +\subsection*{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}\index{centre d'appel} +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel} +Aujourd'hui le taylorisme\index{taylorisme} au sens +strict est en déclin parce qu'il n'est plus guère adapté aux +besoins de la production industrielle contemporaine non plus qu'aux +nouvelles normes de comportement individuel et collectif. + +\section{Tout travail émet de la pensée} +Le travail a vocation à~produire du sens, pour son auteur comme pour +son destinataire. + +\section{Théorie et pratique de la commande publique} +En France, les prestations de service commandées par les +services publics à~des entreprises font l'objet de contrôles +de leur bonne réalisation selon des procédures et des règles +qui sont des cas particuliers d'un ensemble plus vaste, la +réglementation des marchés publics de l'État, dont nous +allons donner ci-dessous une brève description. + +\subsection{Réglementation des marchés publics} +Le dispositif juridique, réglementaire et comptable qui encadre les +actes contractuels de la puissance publique en France est très~[...] + +\subsubsection{Premier principe: séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable} +Le premier élément du dispositif est le principe de +séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable. Il a été +instauré en 1319 par l'ordonnance portant création de la~[...] + +\subsubsection{Second principe: contrôle \emph{a~priori}} +Le second élément du dispositif est le principe du contrôle +\emph{a~priori}. Lorsque le directeur de l'organisme public +de recherche pris ici comme exemple (l'ordonnateur) décide~[...] + +\subsubsection{Le Code des Marchés Publics} +Le troisième pilier de la commande publique est le Code des Marchés +Publics (CMP), qui régit tous les contrats, conclus par des organismes +publics ou des collectivités territoriales, dont le montant excède un~[...] + +\subsection{La pratique des marchés publics} +Lorsque l'administration française fait réaliser un système +informatique par un prestataire, elle est en position de maître +d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}. Elle rédige (ou fait rédiger) un +cahier des charges\index{cahier des charges} qui décrit les +spécifications du système à~réaliser. Ce cahier des charges constitue~[...] + +\subsection{Quels sont les services publics «~rentables~»?} +Pour parler comme les informaticiens, nous pouvons identifier un +« effet de bord », c'est-à-dire une conséquence non intentionnelle de +la réglementation des marchés publics: les administrations ne disposent +d'aucun moyen pour envisager la notion d'investissement. Le~[...] + +\section{Projet et cahier des charges}\index{cahier des charges} +Jean-Pierre~\textsc{Boutinet} nous guidera ici pour ce qui concerne +l'histoire de la notion de~[...] + +\subsection{La frontière entre conception et fabrication} +La vision classique de la conduite d'un projet informatique de gestion +est la suivante: le maître d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}~[...] + +\subsection{Bâtiment, mécanique, programmation} +Nous y reviendrons au chapitre~\ref{chap+travail}, mais nous savons +déjà que la mise en {\oe}uvre de l'informatique s'est beaucoup +inspirée des procédures de travail les plus élaborées du +\textsc{xx}\fup{e}~siècle~[...] + +\chapter{Le travail informatique} +\minitoc + +\section{De la nature de l'informatique} + +\subsection{Premières croyances}\label{sub+premcroyances} +Les premiers ordinateurs, qui entrèrent en fonction à~l'extrême fin +des années 1940 et durant les années 1950, étaient consacrés à~des +travaux militaires ou scientifiques puisque, à~cette époque, +on pensait~[...] + +\subsection{Comment l'informatique diffère des mathématiques} +J'aimerai à~l'occasion de cette analyse attirer l'attention du +lecteur sur une question qui est une source constante de malentendus +au sujet de la programmation. + +\subsubsection{Les preuves de programme} +L'écriture de programmes informatiques obéit à~de tout autres principes. +Il convient de préciser cette affirmation pour la préserver~[...] + +\section{Programmation dans le monde réel} +\subsection{La vraie nature de la programmation des ordinateurs} + +Alors, comment s'écrivent les programmes informatiques? Et +d'ailleurs, qu'est-ce qu'une erreur\index{erreur} de programmation? +Ces questions sont liées et elles sont, bien sûr, au c{\oe}ur de notre +préoccupation. + +\subsection{Méthodes de programmation} +Un processeur quelconque est caractérisé par le jeu des actions +élémentaires qu'il est capable d'effectuer. Ces actions élémentaires +sont appelées les \emph{primitives} du processeur, ou, si le +processeur est une machine, les «~instructions machine~». Un~[...] + +\subsection{Méthodes de construction de programmes} +Nous avons décrit ci-dessus le processus élémentaire de la +programmation, celui qui consiste à~écrire les instructions ou les +expressions qui vont composer un programme. + +\subsubsection{La programmation structurée} +Le premier courant de pensée qui associa la recherche d'une syntaxe +claire et expressive à~une organisation logique et commode des unités +de programme fut la \emph{programmation +structurée}\index{programmation!structurée} des années 1970, dont~[...] + +\subsubsection{La programmation par objets} +Après la programmation structurée vint un autre courant significatif: +la programmation par objets\index{programmation!par objets}, inventée +en Norvège à~la fin des années 1960 par l'équipe de~[...] + +\subsubsection{Excès dans la pensée} +Il y a eu beaucoup de verbiage autour de l'aptitude supposée du +modèle~[...] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mem.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mem.tex}}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document. +% First, the preamble: +% \or\relax +% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}. +% Tout d'abord, le préambule: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-mem> +\documentclass% + [oneside]{memoir} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-mem.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} +%% \usepackage{hyperref} +%% \usepackage{memhfixc} +\usepackage% + [tight]{minitoc} +%% \usepackage{mtcoff} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We use the starred form \com{tableofcontents*} specific of the \class{memoir} class. Note that the +% the \com{chapter} command has \emph{two} optional arguments in the \class{memoir} class. +% \or\relax +% Nous utilisons la forme étoilée \com{tableofcontents*} spécifique de la classe \class{memoir}. Notez que la +% commande \com{chapter} a \emph{deux} arguments optionnels dans la classe \class{memoir}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents* + +\chapter[oneA][oneB]{oneC} +\minitoc +\lipsum[1] \newpage \lipsum[2] +\section{S-1-one} \lipsum[3] +\section{S-1-two} \lipsum[4] + +\chapter[twoA][twoB]{twoC} +\minitoc +\lipsum[4] \newpage \lipsum[5] +\section{S-2-one} \lipsum[6] +\section{S-2-two} \lipsum[7] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document and shows some of +% the necessary adaptations for fonts. +% First, the preamble: +% \or\relax +% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} et +% montre certaines des adaptations nécessaires pour les fontes. +% Tout d'abord, le préambule: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-mm1> +\documentclass[oneside]{memoir} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-mm1.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We inhibit some font commands of the \class{memoir} class: +% \or\relax +% Nous inhibons certaines commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty} +\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we redefine them: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous les redéfinissons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape} +\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and try to use some minitoc font +% commands, but without any success: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et essayons d'utiliser quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour +% les fontes, mais sans aucun succès: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% hyperref before minitoc, optional +%% \usepackage[linktocpage=true]{hyperref}\usepackage{memhfixc} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalsize\scshape} % <- no scshape +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}{\normalsize\scshape}% <- no scshape +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But if we use the font commands of the \class{memoir} class, it works! +% \or\relax +% Mais si nous utilisons les commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}, cela marche! +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty} +\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty} +\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape} +\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But for mini-table titles (font and text), we can use the \upack{minitoc} commands: +% \or\relax +% Mais pour les titres des mini-tables (fonte et texte), nous pouvons utiliser les commandes de \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\Large\scshape} +%% this is working beautifully -> +\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Chapter Contents} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The document body: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents* + +\chapter[OneA][OneB]{OneC} +\minitoc +\section{This section} \lipsum[1] +\section{Second section} \lipsum[2] +\section{Third section} \lipsum[3] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mu.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mu.tex}}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document, +% the minitoc being inserted in the text with the \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document, +% la minitoc étant incrustée dans le texte grâce au paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-mu> +\documentclass[12pt]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-mu.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\usepackage{wrapfig} +\newcommand{\LangSig}[1]{\textsc{[#1]}} % smallcaps +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{environment}{wrapfigure} +% \begin{environment}{minipage} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\linewidth} +% \begin{macro}{\vspace} +% \begin{macro}{\baselineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter, with its minitoc set in a \env{minipage}, included in a \env{wrapfigure} environment on the half +% of the text width, with some vertical adjustements: +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre, avec sa minitoc composée dans une \env{minipage}, incluse dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure} +% sur la moitié de la largeur du texte, avec quelques ajustements verticaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Mulspren}\label{chapter+mulspren} +\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\linewidth} +\begin{minipage}{\linewidth} +\vspace{-2.\baselineskip} +\minitoc +\vspace{-1.\baselineskip} +\end{minipage} +\end{wrapfigure} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The remaining of the text: +% \or\relax +% Le reste du texte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +The previous chapter examined many end-user programming environments +and found that most contain cognitive programming gulfs. +These gulfs were often created when programing environments used +multiple notations, and could manifest themselves in a variety of +usability problems, ranging from users being unable to understand +a program representation, to not wanting to execute their programs. +Conversely, the previous chapter also found circumstances where multiple +notations helped users understand programs. +It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming +environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating +programming gulfs. +It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming +environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating +programming gulfs. + +This chapter introduces our programming environment, Mulspren. +Mulspren was designed to avoid these gulfs and gain the potential +benefits of multiple notations. +Users program using two notations, one similar to English and one +similar to conventional code. +Changes in one notation are immediately reflected in the other notation, +and users can move rapidly and seamlessly between the notations. +This is programming using dual notations. +When the program is executed, both notations are animated. +Mulspren's language signature is \LangSig{Re/Wr/Wa + Re/Wr/Wa + Wa}. + +Papers describing Mulspren have been published in~\cite{Wright02-2} +and~\cite{Wright03-3}. + +\section{section 1} +\section{section 2 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla +bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla} +\section{section 3} +\section{section 4} +\section{section 5 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla +bla bla bla bla bla} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\bibitem} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% I tried to find some articles of the net to fill the citations: +% \or\relax +% J'ai essayé de trouver quelques articles pour remplir les citations: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{thebibliography}{1} +\bibitem{Wright02-2} +Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. +\newblock Mulspren: a multiple language simulation programming + environment. +\newblock In {\em HCC '02: Proceedings of the IEEE 2002 Symposia + on Human Centric Computing Languages and Environments (HCC'02)}, + page 101, Washington, DC, USA, 2002. IEEE Computer Society. + +\bibitem{Wright03-3} +Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. +\newblock Evaluation of two textual programming notations for children. +\newblock In {\em AUIC '05: Proceedings of the Sixth Australasian + conference on User interface}, pages 55--62, Darlinghurst, Australia, + Australia, 2005. + Australian Computer Society, Inc. +\end{thebibliography} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-nom.tex} document file}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-nom.tex}}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document\,\footnote{It is derived from the example given in the documentation of \pack{nomencl}.} shows +% the interaction of the \upack{minitoc} package with the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}, +% when this package uses its option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'exemple donné dans la documentation de \pack{nomencl}.} montre +% l'interaction du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}, lorsque celui-ci +% utilise son option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-nom> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-nom.tex}% + [2007/04/02] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\makenomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the packages and prepare the nomenclature: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons les paquetages et préparons la nomenclature: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[intoc]{nomencl} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\makenomenclature +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the minitocs and the table of contents: +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les minitocs et la table des matières: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A first chapter, with its minitoc, a section and some +% entries for the nomenclature: +% \or\relax +% Un premier chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section et +% quelques entrées pour la nomenclature: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Angels} +\minitoc +\section{Main equations} +\begin{equation} + a=\frac{N}{A} +\end{equation}% +\nomenclature{$a$}{The number of angels per unit area}% +\nomenclature{$N$}{The number of angels per needle point}% +\nomenclature{$A$}{The area of the needle point}% +The equation $\sigma = m a$% +\nomenclature{$\sigma$}{The total mass of angels per unit area}% +\nomenclature{$m$}{The mass of one angel} +follows easily. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We print the nomenclature; but that adds a chapter entry in +% the TOC because of the \optp{intoc}{nomencl} option of the +% \pack{nomencl}, hence we add a correction with +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (try to remove the correction and +% look at the result: the next minitocs are wrong): +% \or\relax +% Nous imprimons la nomenclature; mais ceci ajoute une entrée +% de chapitre dans la table des matières à~cause de +% l'option \optp{intoc}{nomencl} de \pack{nomencl}, donc nous +% ajoutons une correction avec \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (essayez +% de retirer correction et regardez le résultat: les minitocs +% suivantes sont fausses): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\printnomenclature \mtcfixnomenclature +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A second chapter, with its minitoc, a section, and an entry +% in the nomenclature. This entry will be present in the +% nomenclature printed above. +% \or\relax +% Un second chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section, et une +% entrée dans la nomenclature. Cette entrée sera présente dans la +% nomenclature imprimée plus haut. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Demons} +\minitoc +\section{False equations} +\begin{equation} i=\sqrt{-1} \end{equation} +\nomenclature{$i$}{The imaginary unit}% +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \feat{open} and +% \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package +% to prepare a minitoc on three columns. +% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation des dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. +% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ocf> +\documentclass[oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ocf.tex}% + [2007/04/02] +\usepackage{multicol} % to make multi-columns. +\usepackage[french]{babel} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{fullpage} +% to allow a page breaks before a section +\let\osection\section \def\section{\penalty-1\relax\osection} +% +\usepackage[french,tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\feat{open}'' feature for minitocs opens a \env{multicols} +% environment, with 3~columns: +% \or\relax +% Le dispositif «~\feat{open}~» pour les minitocs ouvre un +% environnement \env{multicols}, avec 3~colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{3}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\feat{close}'' feature for minitocs close the \env{multicols} environment: +% \or\relax +% Le dispositif «~\feat{close}~» pour les minitocs ferme l'environnement \env{multicols}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the \env{multicols} environment adds some vertical spacing before and after it, we added some corrections. +% +% \or\relax +% Comme l'environnement \env{multicols} ajoute un peu d'espacement avant et après lui, nous avons ajouté quelques +% corrections. + +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns} +% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the number of sections is not a multiple of three (or some entries are long), we cannot always balance the +% columns nicely, so we use ragged columns, using the ``\feat{before}'' and ``\feat{after}'' features: +% \or\relax +% Comme le nombre de sections n'est pas un multiple de trois (ou lorsque certaines entrées sont longues), nous ne +% pouvons pas toujours équilibrer les colonnes agréablement, donc nous utilisons des colonnes inégales, grâce aux +% dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» et «~\feat{after}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the body of the document, a chapter with many sections, +% listed in a~minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Et le corps du document, un chapitre avec beaucoup de +% sections, listées dans une minitoc: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc +\tableofcontents +\chapter{Premier chapitre} +\minitoc +% A lot of sections +\section{Alfa} +\section{Bravo} +\section{Charlie} +\section{Delta} +\section{Echo} +\section{Fox-Trot} +\section{Golf} +\section{Hotel} +\section{India} +\section{Juliet} +\section{Kilo} +\section{Lima} +\section{Mike} +\section{November} +\section{Oscar} +\section{Papa} +\section{Quebec} +\section{Romeo} +\section{Sierra} +\section{Tango} +\section{Uniform} +\section{Victor} +\section{Whiskey} +\section{X-Ray} +\section{Yankee} +\section{Zulu} +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \com{mtcsetoffset} command to shift a minitoc to the left, trying to put it +% along the left margin of the text. The \feat{open} and \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package are +% also used to prepare the minitoc on three columns. +% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler vers la gauche une minitoc, en +% essayant de la placer le long de la marge gauche du texte. Les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont aussi utilisés pour préparer la minitoc sur trois colonnes. +% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-ofs> +\documentclass[a4paper]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-ofs.tex}% + [2007/04/17] +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{multicol} +\usepackage{fullpage} +%\usepackage[a4paper]{geometry} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns} +% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns} +% \begin{environment}{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We remove the minitoc indentation and set up the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features: +% \or\relax +% Nous retirons l'indentation de la minitoc et mettons en place les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.1ex}\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.5ex]} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\kern-2.ex} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns} +\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin the document with a chapter and its minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Nous commençons le document par un chapitre et sa minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \faketableofcontents +\chapter{Introduction} +\minitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the minitoc is not aligned on the left margin of the text, we set a negative offset and print again the minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Comme la minitoc n'est pas alignée sur la marge gauche du texte, nous établissons un décalage négatif et +% ré-imprimons la minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-1.75em} +\mtcskip \minitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But then the minitoc does not use the full width of the text; it would be better to modify both the offset and the +% indentation, each by the half of the total correction: +% \or\relax +% Mais alors la minitoc n'utilise pas toute la largeur du texte; il serait mieux de modifier à~la fois le décalage +% et l'indentation, par moitiés de la correction nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.875em} +\setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.875em} +\mtcskip \minitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then a lot of sections, with some text: +% \or\relax +% Puis un tas de sections, avec du texte quelconque: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{Alfa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Bravo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Charlie} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Delta} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Echo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Fox-Trot} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Golf} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Hotel} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{India} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Juliet} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Kilo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Lima} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Mike} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{November} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Oscar} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Papa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Quebec} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Romeo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Sierra} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Tango} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Uniform} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Victor} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Whiskey} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{X-Ray} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Yankee} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\section{Zulu} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} if you add a sub-section in this example, the corresponding entry in the minitoc +% may stick out if it appears in the last column, and the offset and the indentation should then be corrected again. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} si vous ajoutez une sous-section dans cet exemple, l'entrée correspondante dans la minitoc +% peut dépasser si elle apparaît dans la dernière colonne, et alors le décalage et l'indentation doivent de +% nouveau être corrigés. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedxxxline} +% \begin{macro}{\ext@subfigure} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the +% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth. +% +% The preamble loads the \pack{subfigure} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures +% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et +% ajuster leur profondeur. +% +% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfigure} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la +% liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-sbf> +\documentclass[12pt]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-sbf.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{subfigure} +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\l@subfigure}{\@dottedxxxline{\ext@subfigure}{2}{3.9em}{3.3em}} +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} package (to have nice cross-references) and the \upack{minitoc} package: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} (pour avoir de meilleures références croisées) et le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{varioref} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\newcommand} +% \begin{macro}{\goodap} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigtopskip} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigbottomskip} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some features for the layout of the subfigures, then the depth of the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques dispositifs pour la mise en place des sous-figures, puis la profondeur de la liste des +% figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\goodap}{% + \hspace{\subfigtopskip}% + \hspace{\subfigbottomskip}} +\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the depth of the mini-lists of figures, then some fonts: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la profondeur des mini-listes des figures, puis quelques fontes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2} +\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{partlof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{partlof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{minilof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +\mtcsetfont{minilof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +%% no tables in this document +%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} +%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the minilofs, the table of contents and the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les minilofs, la table des matières et la liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominilof \listoffigures \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter, with is minilof, twice but with different depths: +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre, avec sa minilof, deux fois mais avec des profondeurs différentes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{First Chapter} +\minilof \mtcskip +\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} \minilof +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A figure containing three subfigures and their captions: +% \or\relax +% Une figure contenant trois sous-figures et leurs captions: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{figure} +\centering + \fbox{% + \begin{minipage}{3.5in}% + \raggedright + \begin{center} + \subfigure[First]{% + \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 15mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}% + \hspace{\subfigtopskip}\hspace{\subfigbottomskip}% + \subfigure[Second Figure]{% + \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\ + \subfigure[Third]{\label{3figs-c}% + \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\ + \caption{Three subfigures.}\label{3figs}% + \end{center} + \vspace{4pt}% + This figure contains two top `subfigures' and + Figure~\ref{3figs-c}. + \end{minipage}} +\end{figure} +Figure~\vref{3figs} contains two top ``subfigures'' and +Figure~\vref{3figs-c}. +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-scr.tex} document file}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-scr.tex}}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} document class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, +% \class{scrreprt}. +% Some precautions are needed, because these classes have specific interfaces with the TOC (class options and +% commands). +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une classe de document +% {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, +% \class{scrreprt}. Certaines précautions sont nécessaires, car ces classes ont des interfaces spécifiques avec la +% table des matières (options de classe et commandes). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-scr> +\documentclass[12pt,halfparskip,liststotoc,bibtotoc]{scrreprt} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-scr.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{4} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{longtable} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{hyperref} package, if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, s'il est utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{hyperref} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% With a {\KOMAScript} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, use the \opt{k-tight} package option in place of \opt{tight}; +% as it is a document in german, use also a language package option: +% \or\relax +% Avec une classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, utilisez l'option de paquetage \opt{k-tight} au lieu +% de \opt{tight}; comme c'est un document en allemand, utilisez aussi une option de langue pour le paquetage: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[k-tight,germanb]{minitoc} +\usepackage[germanb]{babel} +\begin{document} +\pagenumbering{Roman} % page number in Roman, reset to 1 (I) +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In this document class, with the \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, the \com{listoftables} macro +% adds a chapter entry in +% the TOC, so we must add \com{mtcaddchapter} after \com{listoftables}: +% \or\relax +% Dans cette classe de document, avec l'option de classe \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, la macro \com{listoftables} ajoute une +% entrée de niveau chapitre dans la table des matières, donc nous devons ajouter \com{mtcaddchapter} +% après \com{listoftables}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\listoftables \mtcaddchapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% With the \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, it is necessary to add a \com{adjustmtc} command after \com{bibliography}. +% This problem is similar to the one of compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package. +% \or\relax +% Avec l'option de classe \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, il est nécessaire d'ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} +% après \com{bibliography}. +% Ce problème est similaire à~celui de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\clearpage +\pagenumbering{arabic} % page number in arabic digits +\setcounter{page}{1} % forced to 1 + +\chapter{Test 1}\label{cha:test-1} + +Text. + +\section{Tabelle}\label{sec:tabelle} + +\begin{table} + \centering + \begin{longtable}[l]{ll} + \underline{Ausbildungsbetrieb} \hspace{10mm} & Kommanditgesellschaft +\\ + \underline{Ausbildender} & Hammer \\ + Ausbildungsstätte & XXXXX Ort + \end{longtable} + \caption{Ausbildungsbetrieb} +\end{table} + +Text. + +\appendix +\chapter{Dokumente} +\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc + +\section{Anhang}\label{sec:anhang} +Text.\\ +Hier sollte nun der Anhang sein, davor das Verzeichnis dafür. +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-syn.tex} document file}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-syn.tex}}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when +% the table of contents is not at the beginning of the +% document, but is preceded by some starred chapters. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% lorsque la table des matières n'est pas au début du +% document, mais est placée après quelques chapitres étoilés. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We have the preamble, then we invoke \com{dominitoc} to +% prepare the minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Nous avons le préambule, puis nous invoquons \com{dominitoc} +% pour préparer les minitocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-syn> +\documentclass[a4paper,twoside,12pt]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-syn.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +\usepackage{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some starred chapters, with calls to \com{mtcaddchapter} +% to synchronize. The optional argument is used when an entry +% in the ToC is wanted: +% \or\relax +% Quelques chapitres étoilés, avec des appels +% à~\com{mtcaddchapter} pour synchroniser. L'argument +% optionnel est utilisé lorsque quune entrée dans la table des +% matières est désirée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{ } % Dedication chapter, no title +\mtcaddchapter % Added for a starred chapter + % without entry in the ToC +Dedication goes here + +\chapter*{Abstract} +\mtcaddchapter[Abstract] % Added for a starred chapter + % with an entry in the ToC +Abstract goes here + +\chapter*{Declaration} +\mtcaddchapter[Declaration] % Added for a starred chapter + % with an entry in the ToC +Declaration goes here +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The table of contents comes here. Looking at the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file shows that the minitoc files inserted +% after here are from one chapter to far: we add a correction. +% \or\relax +% La table des matières vient ici. En regardant le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, nous voyons que les fichiers minitoc insérés +% après ce point correspondent à~un chapitre de trop: nous ajoutons +% une correction: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents \decrementmtc % Synchro added (look at the .log file) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following chapters are normal (unstarred): +% \or\relax +% Les chapitres suivants sont normaux (non étoilés): +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Chapter One} +\minitoc +\section{Section 1} Some text. +\section{Section 2} Some text. + +\chapter{Chapter Two} +\minitoc +\section{Another Section 1} +Some more text. +\section{Another Section 2} +Some more text. +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document using +% the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document utilisant le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tbi> +\documentclass[a4paper]{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tbi.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We dont want an entry for the TOC in the TOC: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} for the \pack{tocbibind} package: +% \or\relax +% Nous ne voulons pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} pour +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage[nottoc]{tocbibind} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +\dominitoc \tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As there is no entry for the TOC in the TOC, no correction is necessary; we comment out the usual +% correction\,\footnote{It is recommended to keep this comment; you could change your mind.}: +% \or\relax +% Puisqu'il n'y a pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières, aucune correction n'est +% nécessaire: nous mettons la correction habituelle en commentaire\,\footnote{Il est recommandé de conserver ce +% commentaire; vous pourriez changer d'avis.}: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%% tocbibind compatibility +%% not used if nottoc option : +%% \mtcaddchapter[] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A starred chapter with an entry in the TOC; we add it; +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée dans la table des matières; nous l'ajoutons: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Introduction} +\mtcaddchapter[Introduction] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some normal chapters: +% \or\relax +% Quelques chapitres normaux: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Title of chapter~1} +\minitoc +\section{as1} \section{as2} +\chapter{Title of chapter~2} +\minitoc +\section{bs1} \section{bs2} +\chapter{Title of chapter~3} +\minitoc +\section{cs1} \section{cs2} +\chapter{Title of chapter~4} +\minitoc +\section{ds1} \section{ds2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC: +% \or\relax +% Un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Conclusion} +\mtcaddchapter[Conclusion] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\section*} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Yet another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC, but with starred sections, also listed in the TOC: +% \or\relax +% Encore un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières, mais avec des sections étoilées, +% elles aussi listées dans la table des matières: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter*{Appendices} +\mtcaddchapter[Appendices] +\minitoc +\section*{first appendix} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}% + {first appendix} +\section*{second appendix} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}% + {second appendix} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The list of figures has an entry in the TOC (via the \pack{tocbibind} package), so a correction must be applied: +% \or\relax +% La liste des figures a une entrée dans la table des matières (via le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}), donc une +% correction doit être appliquée: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%% tocbibind compatibility +\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\bibitem} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{tocbibind} package adds an entry in the TOC for the bibliography, so we must add the recommended +% correction: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières pour la bibliographie, donc nous +% devons ajouter la correction recommandée: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{thebibliography}{3} + \bibitem {s1}{title ...} +\end{thebibliography} +%% tocbibind compatibility +\adjustmtc +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of the \class{article} class. +% It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. +% \or\relax +% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{article}. +% C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tlc> +\documentclass{article} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlc.tex}% + [2007/01/04] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\textwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\textheight} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Dimensions of the text on the page: +% \or\relax +% Dimensions du texte sur la page: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength{\textwidth}% + {124.20126pt} +\setlength{\textheight}% + {19\baselineskip} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{4} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\setlength} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and set some parameters (indentation, base font and depth) for the secttocs: +% \or\relax +% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et établissons quelques paramètres (indentation, fonte de base et +% profondeur) pour les secttocs: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\usepackage{minitoc} +\setlength{\stcindent}{0pt} +\mtcsetfont{secttoc}{*}% + {\footnotesize} +\mtcsetdepth{secttoc}{3} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We prepare the secttocs, without title, and the table of contents which is not printed: +% \or\relax +% Nous préparons les secttocs, sans titre, et la table des matières qui n'est pas imprimée: +% \fi +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\dosecttoc[e] \faketableofcontents + +\section{Afghanistan} \secttoc +\subsection{Geography} +\subsubsection{Total area} + 647,500 km2 +\subsubsection{Land area} + 647,500 km2 +\subsection{History} \ldots + +\section{Albania} \secttoc +\subsection{Geography} +\subsubsection{Total area} + 28,750 km2 +\subsubsection{Land area} + 27,400 km2 +\subsection{History} \ldots +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{multicols}}% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} +% The \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} +% Le document \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This document\footnote{It is derived from one of the examples distributed with +% the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.} shows +% the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the +% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth. +% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. +% +% The preamble loads the \pack{subfig} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'un des exemples distribués avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.} +% montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures +% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et +% ajuster leur profondeur. +% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. +% +% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfig} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la +% liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-tsf> +\documentclass{report} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-tsf.tex}[2008/04/03]% +\usepackage{fullpage} +\usepackage[config=altsf]{subfig} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is utility code to make graduated rules and a box around a figure. +% \or\relax +% Ceci est du code utilitaire pour faire un trait gradué et une boîte autour d'une figure. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\testtemp +\newcommand{\ru}[1]{% + \testtemp #1% + \advance\testtemp .5pt \divide\testtemp 2% + \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{% + \vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt\hfil}\hfil}% + \hbox to 0pt{\hss\vrule height3mm depth0pt width.25pt\hss}% + \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{% + \hfil\vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt}\hfil}} +%% +\fboxsep=-\fboxrule +\newcommand{\figbox}[1]{% + \fbox{\vbox to 1in{% + \vfil\hbox to 2in{\parbox{2in}{\centering #1}}\vfil + \vbox to 0pt{\vss\hbox to 2in{\hfil\ru{1.1in}\hfil}}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The body of the document. We set the depth of the list of figures and prepare the minilofs and the list of +% figures: +% \or\relax +% Le corps du document. Nous définissons la profondeur de la liste des figures et préparons les minilofs et la liste +% des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document} +\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} \dominilof \listoffigures +\newpage +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A chapter containing a figure with subfigures. We print its minilof twice, with different depths: +% \or\relax +% Un chapitre contenant une figure avec des sous-figures. Nous imprimons sa minilof deux fois, avec des +% profondeurs différentes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Reference Test} +\minilof \mtcskip +\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} +\minilof + +\begin{figure}[ht]% + \centering + \subfigure{% + \label{fig+A}\figbox{SUBFIGURE ONE:\\(no opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[]{% + \label{fig+B}\figbox{SUBFIGURE TWO:\\(empty opt)}}\\ + + \subfigure[Subfigure Three.]{% + \label{fig+C}\figbox{SUBFIGURE THREE:\\(opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[][Subfigure Four.]{% + \label{fig+D}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FOUR:\\(empty opt and opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[][]{% + \label{fig+E}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FIVE:\\(both empty opt)}}\\ + + \subfigure[The Sixth Subfigure.][Subfigure Six.]{% + \label{fig+F}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SIX:\\(both opt)}} + \quad + \subfigure[The Seventh Subfigure][]{% + \label{fig+G}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SEVEN:\\(opt and empty opt)}} + + \caption{Optional argument test.}% + \label{fig+main}% +\end{figure} + +The figure~\ref{fig+main} on page~\pageref{fig+main} is composed +of the seven subfigures~\subref{fig+A} (aka: \ref{fig+A}), +\subref{fig+B} (aka: \ref{fig+B}), \subref{fig+C} (aka: \ref{fig+C}), +\subref{fig+D} (aka: \ref{fig+D}), \subref{fig+E} (aka: \ref{fig+E}), +\subref{fig+F} (aka: \ref{fig+F}), and \subref{fig+G} (aka: \ref{fig+G}). + +\section{Centering Test} +Note that figures~\ref{fig+B}, \ref{fig+E} and \ref{fig+G} are centered. +This means that \verb|\subfigcapskip| has been set to zero and is not +offsetting the simple label to the left. Also the remaining captioned +subfigures (figures~\ref{fig+C}, \ref{fig+D}, and \ref{fig+F}) should +have centered labels. +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \flushcolumns +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uexam{mtc-vti.tex} document file}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-vti.tex}}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \exam{mtc-vti.tex} example shows how to change the sectionnal titles when they appear in a mini-table: a +% section title (or a chapter title) can have variants in a parttoc or in a minitoc (similar effects are possible +% with figure ou table titles). Such entries are said ``polymorphic'' (section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% First, the preamble of the document, with utility packages: +% \or\relax +% L'exemple \exam{mtc-vti.tex} montre comment changer des titres de sectionnements lorsqu'ils apparaissent dans +% une mini-table: un titre de section (ou de chapitre) peut avoir des variantes dans une parttoc ou une minitoc +% (des effets similaires sont possibles avec des titres de figures ou de tableaux). +% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~» (section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% Tout d'abord, le préambule du document, avec les paquetages utilitaires: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtc-vti> +\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,oneside]{book} +\ProvidesFile{mtc-vti.tex}[2008/06/26]% +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} +\begin{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the demonstration, we will use a parttoc and a minitoc, so we must prepare them: +% \or\relax +% Pour la démonstration, nous utiliserons une parttoc et une minitoc, donc nous devons les préparer: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\dominitoc +\doparttoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will use a multi-form title for the first section: a form to appear in the parttoc (``Alfa in parttoc''), +% a form to appear in the minitoc of the chapter (``Alfa in minitoc''), a form to appear elsewhere (``Alfa out subtoc''), +% and a form as title at the beginning othe section (``Alfa the first section''). So we define a command +% \ucom{alfati} using the flags \com{ifinparttoc} and \com{ifinminitoc} to select which title is used in each of +% its instances. +% \or\relax +% Nous utiliserons un titre multi-forme pour la première section: une forme devant apparaître dans la parttoc +% («~Alfa in parttoc~»), une forme pour apparaître dans la minitoc du chapitre (<<~Alfa in minitoc~»), +% une forme pour apparaître ailleurs («~Alfa out subtoc~»), et une forme comme titre en début de la section +% («~Alfa the first section~»). Donc nous définissons une commande \ucom{alfati} utilisant les +% indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc} et \com{ifinminitoc} pour sélectionner le titre à~utiliser dans chacune des ses instances. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\alfati{\ifinparttoc Alfa in parttoc + \else\ifinminitoc Alfa in minitoc + \else Alfa out subtoc + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But we can define a more general macro, \ucom{varsecti}, with three arguments for the three variants +% of a section title\,\footnote{You will eventually need to define similar macros for other sectionning commands or for +% figures or table titles; proceed with care from this model.}: +% \or\relax +% Mais nous pouvons définir une macro plus générale, \ucom{varsecti}, avec trois arguments pour les trois variantes +% d'un titre de section\,\footnote{Vous aurez éventuellement besoin de définir des macros similaires pour d'autres +% commandes de sectionnement ou pour les titres de figures ou de tableaux; procédez avec soin à~partir de ce modèle.}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\varsecti}[3]% + {\ifinparttoc{#1}\relax + \else\ifinminitoc{#2}\relax + \else{#3}\relax + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the document with a table of contents, a part with its parttoc and a chapter with its minitoc. And an other +% chapter. You can verify that the entry for the ``Alfa'' section varies in the main toc, the parttoc, the +% minitoc and the effective title of the section. +% Note that the variable title (here \ucom{alfati}) should be defined \virage\emph{before} any use, like in the main +% toc or any minitable. +% \or\relax +% Puis le document avec une table des matières, une partie avec sa parttoc et un chapitre avec sa minitoc. Puis un +% autre chapitre. Vous pouvez vérifier que l'entrée pour la section «~Alfa~» change dans la table des matières +% principale, la parttoc, la minitoc et dans le titre effectif de la section. +% Notez que le titre variable (ici \ucom{alfati}) doit être défini \virage\emph{avant} toute utilisation, comme +% dans la table des matières principale ou dans une des minitables. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\protect} +% \begin{macrocode} +\tableofcontents +\part{Part~A} +\parttoc + +\chapter{One} +\minitoc +\section[\protect\alfati]{Alfa the first section} +\lipsum[1] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We can use the more general macro \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{This macro is not part of the \upack{minitoc} package, it is +% just an example.}, with its three arguments given when the section begins; but that macro must +% be \virage\emph{protected} (or look at the \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} package by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), +% or declared ``robust'' by \com{DeclareRobustCommand} as above: +% \or\relax +% Nous pouvons utiliser la macro plus générale \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{Cette macro ne fait pas partie du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}, c'est simplement un exemple.}, avec ses trois arguments fournis lors du début de la section; +% mais cette macro doit être \virage\emph{protégée} (ou regardez le paquetage \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} +% de \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), ou déclarée «~robuste~» par \com{DeclareRobustCommand} comme plus haut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\section[\varsecti{Bravo in parttoc}% + {Bravo in minitoc}% + {Bravo out of subtoc}]% % in maintoc and headers + {Bravo the second section} % local title +\lipsum[2] +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But is is even easier to use a ``polymorphic'' entry in the optionnal argument\,\footnote{They are no secttocs +% in a book-class document, but all the four arguments of \com{mtcpolymtoc} must be specified, even empty!}: +% \or\relax +% Mais il est encore plus facile d'utiliser une entrée «~polymorphique~» dans l'argument optionnel\,\footnote{Il +% n'y~a pas de secttocs dans un document de classe book, mais les quatre arguments de \com{mtcpolymtoc} doivent +% tous être spécifiés, même vides!}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\chapter{Two} +\minitoc +\section[\mtcpolymtoc% + {Charlie in parttoc}% + {Charlie in minitoc}% + {Charlie in secttoc}% % <- see/voir note + {Charlie out subtoc}]% + {Charlie} +\lipsum[3] +\end{document} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% \minilot +% \mtcskip +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \def\mstrut{\rule[-5pt]{0pt}{5pt}} +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption[Message identifiers]{Message identifiers (click on a message identifier to see its meaning).}\label{t+allmess} +% \or\relax +% \caption[Identificateurs des messages]{Identificateurs des messages (cliquez sur un identificateur de message +% pour voir sa signification).}\label{t+allmess} +% \fi\relax +% ^^A {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}} +% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}} +% \toprule +% \mstrut\lmess{E0001}&&\lmess{E0002}&&\lmess{E0003}&&\lmess{E0004}&&\lmess{E0005}&&\lmess{E0006}&&\lmess{E0007}&&\lmess{E0008}&&\lmess{E0009}&&\lmess{E0010}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0011}&&\lmess{E0012}&&\lmess{E0013}&&\lmess{E0014}&&\lmess{E0015}&&\lmess{E0016}&&\lmess{E0017}&&\lmess{E0018}&&\lmess{E0019}&&\lmess{E0020}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0021}&&\lmess{E0022}&&\lmess{E0023}&&\lmess{E0024}&&\lmess{E0025}&&\lmess{E0026}&&\lmess{E0027}&&\lmess{E0028}&&\lmess{E0029}&&\lmess{E0030}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0031}&&\lmess{E0032}&&\lmess{E0033}&&\lmess{E0034}&&\lmess{E0035}&&\lmess{E0036}&&\lmess{E0037}&&\lmess{E0038}&&\lmess{E0039}&&\lmess{E0040}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{E0041}&&\lmess{E0042}&&\lmess{E0043}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{F0001}&&\lmess{F0002}&&\lmess{F0003}&&\lmess{F0004}&&\lmess{F0005}&&\lmess{F0006}&&\lmess{F0007}&&\lmess{F0008}&&\lmess{F0009}&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{I0000}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0001}&&\lmess{I0002}&&\lmess{I0003}&&\lmess{I0004}&&\lmess{I0005}&&\lmess{I0006}&&\lmess{I0007}&&\lmess{I0008}&&\lmess{I0009}&&\lmess{I0010}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0011}&&\lmess{I0012}&&\lmess{I0013}&&\lmess{I0014}&&\lmess{I0015}&&\lmess{I0016}&&\lmess{I0017}&&\lmess{I0018}&&\lmess{I0019}&&\lmess{I0020}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0021}&&\lmess{I0022}&&\lmess{I0023}&&\lmess{I0024}&&\lmess{I0025}&&\lmess{I0026}&&\lmess{I0027}&&\lmess{I0028}&&\lmess{I0029}&&\lmess{I0030}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0031}&&\lmess{I0032}&&\lmess{I0033}&&\lmess{I0034}&&\lmess{I0035}&&\lmess{I0036}&&\lmess{I0037}&&\lmess{I0038}&&\lmess{I0039}&&\lmess{I0040}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0041}&&\lmess{I0042}&&\lmess{I0043}&&\lmess{I0044}&&\lmess{I0045}&&\lmess{I0046}&&\lmess{I0047}&&\lmess{I0048}&&\lmess{I0049}&&\lmess{I0050}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{I0051}&&\lmess{I0052}&&\lmess{I0053}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{M0001}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ +% \midrule +% \mstrut\lmess{W0001}&&\lmess{W0002}&&\lmess{W0003}&&\lmess{W0004}&&\lmess{W0005}&&\lmess{W0006}&&\lmess{W0007}&&\lmess{W0008}&&\lmess{W0009}&&\lmess{W0010}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0011}&&\lmess{W0012}&&\lmess{W0013}&&\lmess{W0014}&&\lmess{W0015}&&\lmess{W0016}&&\lmess{W0017}&&\lmess{W0018}&&\lmess{W0019}&&\lmess{W0020}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0021}&&\lmess{W0022}&&\lmess{W0023}&&\lmess{W0024}&&\lmess{W0025}&&\lmess{W0026}&&\lmess{W0027}&&\lmess{W0028}&&\lmess{W0029}&&\lmess{W0030}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0031}&&\lmess{W0032}&&\lmess{W0033}&&\lmess{W0034}&&\lmess{W0035}&&\lmess{W0036}&&\lmess{W0037}&&\lmess{W0038}&&\lmess{W0039}&&\lmess{W0040}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0041}&&\lmess{W0042}&&\lmess{W0043}&&\lmess{W0044}&&\lmess{W0045}&&\lmess{W0046}&&\lmess{W0047}&&\lmess{W0048}&&\lmess{W0049}&&\lmess{W0050}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0051}&&\lmess{W0052}&&\lmess{W0053}&&\lmess{W0054}&&\lmess{W0055}&&\lmess{W0056}&&\lmess{W0057}&&\lmess{W0058}&&\lmess{W0059}&&\lmess{W0060}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0061}&&\lmess{W0062}&&\lmess{W0063}&&\lmess{W0064}&&\lmess{W0065}&&\lmess{W0066}&&\lmess{W0067}&&\lmess{W0068}&&\lmess{W0069}&&\lmess{W0070}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0071}&&\lmess{W0072}&&\lmess{W0073}&&\lmess{W0074}&&\lmess{W0075}&&\lmess{W0076}&&\lmess{W0077}&&\lmess{W0078}&&\lmess{W0079}&&\lmess{W0080}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0081}&&\lmess{W0082}&&\lmess{W0083}&&\lmess{W0084}&&\lmess{W0085}&&\lmess{W0086}&&\lmess{W0087}&&\lmess{W0088}&&\lmess{W0089}&&\lmess{W0090}\\ +% \mstrut\lmess{W0091}&&\lmess{W0092}&&\lmess{W0093}&&\lmess{W0094}&&\lmess{W0095}&&\lmess{W0096}&&\lmess{W0097}&&\lmess{W0098}&&\lmess{W0099}&&\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \end{table} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% This chapter lists and comments the messages given by the \upack{minitoc} package, and is associates, +% \pack{mtcoff} and \pack{mtcpatchmem}\footnote{The +% texts of the messages given in this chapter may slighty differ from the real text, because some messages contain +% variable elements and the layout may vary.}. +% The table~\vref{t+allmess} lists all messages; in this table, you can click on a message identifier to find quickly its meaning. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The first line of each message contains usually the name of the package and an unique identifier (this +% identifier may be useful to search in this chapter of the documentation, but has no special meaning, +% except the leading letter: \texttt{I}~for informative, \texttt{W}~for warning, and \texttt{E}~for error). +% \item Informative messages are written only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file; the prefix is~\texttt{F} +% for the warning messages from the \pack{mtcoff} package and~\texttt{M} for the informative message from +% the \pack{mtcpatchmem} package. +% \item Warning messages are shown on the screen (but often too quickly to be seen, because normally \LaTeX\ does not stop +% for warnings) and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% \item Error messages are shown on the screen and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, +% but \LaTeX\ stops, so you can ask for help by typing~``\texttt{h}''. +% \item In this chapter, some words in the messages are typeset in italic characters; they represent the variable +% parts of the message: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \emph{ARG1}~The first argument of the command. +% \item \emph{ARG2}~The second argument of the command. +% \item \emph{ARG3}~The third argument of the command. +% \item \emph{\CCC}~The name of the class of your document. +% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~The name of the command. +% \item \emph{\CTR}~The name of a \LaTeX\ counter. +% \item \emph{document}~The name of your document, without its \suffix{.tex} extension. +% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~The extension part of the name of a file. +% \item \emph{\FILE}~The name of a file (often a minitoc auxiliary file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} +% file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file, or the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file). +% \item \emph{\INAME}~The name of an internal macro redefined by a \verb|\mtcset...| command. +% \item \emph{\LLL}~The name of the language (for \com{mtcselectlanguage}). +% \item \emph{\NNN}~The number of the line in the source file. +% \item \emph{macro}~The name of a minitoc font command redefined by \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~The new value of a title redefined by \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item \emph{\NB}~The number of mini-tables of the given type in your document (when you are using short +% extensions and that number is greater than~99). +% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~The new value of an offset redefined by \com{mtcsetoffset}. +% \item \emph{\PREPA}~The name of a minitoc preparation command. +% \item \emph{\SEQ}~A sequence of commands used to redefine an internal macro via a \verb|\mtcset...| command. +% \item \emph{\STRING}~A string of characters, often part of a command name. +% \item \emph{\VAL}~The new value of a counter. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% The messages are produced using macros from the \pack{mtcmess} package, described in chapter~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Introduction} +% Ce chapitre liste et commente les messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, et ses associés \pack{mtcoff} et +% \pack{mtcpatchmem}\,\footnote{Les +% textes des messages donnés dans ce chapitre peuvent être légèrement différents du texte réel, car certains +% messages contiennent des éléments variables et la mise en page peut aussi varier.}. +% Le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} liste tous les messages; vous pouvez cliquer dans ce tableau sur un identifieur de message pour +% trouver rapidement sa signification. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item La première ligne de chaque message contient normalement le nom du paquetage et un identificateur unique +% (il peut être utile pour chercher dans ce chapitre de la documentation, mais n'a aucune signification +% particulière, sauf la lettre de tête: \texttt{I}~pour informatif, \texttt{W}~pour avertissement (\emph{warning}), +% et \texttt{E}~pour erreur); le préfixe est~\texttt{F} pour les messages d'avertissement émis par le +% paquetage \pack{mtcoff} et~\texttt{M} pour le message informatif émis par le paquetage \pack{mtcpatchmem}. +% \item Les messages informatifs ne sont écrits que dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \item Les messages d'avertissement (\emph{warning}) sont affichés sur l'écran (mais souvent trop rapidement pour +% être vus, car normalement \LaTeX\ ne s'arrête pas pour les avertissements) et sont écrits dans +% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \item Les messages d'erreur (\emph{error}) sont affichés sur l'écran et écrits dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, mais \LaTeX\ s'arrête, donc vous pouvez demander de l'aide +% en tapant~«~\texttt{h}~» (\emph{help}). +% \item Dans ce chapitre, certains mots dans les messages sont écrits en italique; ils représentent les parties +% variables du message: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \emph{ARG1}~Le premier argument de la commande. +% \item \emph{ARG2}~Le deuxième argument de la commande. +% \item \emph{ARG3}~Le troisième argument de la commande. +% \item \emph{\CCC}~Le nom de la classe de votre document. +% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~Le nom de la commande. +% \item \emph{\STRING}~Une chaîne de caractères, faisant souvent partie d'un nom de commande. +% \item \emph{\CTR}~Le nom d'un compteur \LaTeX. +% \item \emph{document}~Le nom de votre document, sans son suffixe \suffix{.tex}. +% \item \emph{\FILE}~Le nom d'un fichier (Souvent un fichier auxiliaire minitoc, le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, +% ou le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}). +% \item \emph{\LLL}~Le nom de la langue (pour \com{mtcselectlanguage}). +% \item \emph{\NNN}~Le numéro de la ligne dans le fichier source. +% \item \emph{macro}~Le nom d'une commande de fonte minitoc redéfinie par \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~La nouvelle valeur d'un titre redéfinie par \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item \emph{\NB}~Le nombre de mini-tables du type donné dans votre document (lorsque vous utilisez des +% suffixes courts et que ce nombre dépasse~99). +% \item \emph{\INAME}~Le nom d'une macro interne redéfinie par une commande \verb|\mtcset...|. +% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~La nouvelle valeur d'un déplacement (décalage) redéfinie par \com{mtcsetoffset}. +% \item \emph{\PREPA}~Le nom d'une commande minitoc de préparation. +% \item \emph{\SEQ}~Une séquence de commandes utilisée pour redéfinir une macro interne via une commande +% \verb|\mtcset...|. +% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~La partie suffixe du nom d'un fichier. +% \item \emph{\VAL}~La nouvelle valeur d'un compteur. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% Les messages sont produits en utilisant des macros du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}, +% décrit au chapitre~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}. +% \fi +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Messages from the \upack{minitoc} package} +% \or\relax +% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Informative messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages informatifs} +% \fi +% \begin{xmessage}[I0000] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package: minitoc 2015/07/13 v61 Package minitoc (JPFD/et al.)| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is the announce message of the \upack{minitoc} package, with its name, date and version. ``JPFD'' are my +% initials. This message has no real identifier because it is emitted by \com{ProvidesPackage}, but, for indexing it, +% we use \texttt{I0000}. +% \or\relax +% Ceci est le message annonçant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec son nom, sa date et sa version. «~JPFD~» sont +% mes initiales. Ce message n'a pas d'identificateur réel car il est émis par \com{ProvidesPackage}, mais, pour +% l'indexer, nous utilisons \texttt{I0000}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0001|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) *** minitoc package, version 61 ***.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Remember the version of the package. +% \or\relax +% Rappel de la version du paquetage. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0002|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Autoconfiguration of extensions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package tries to determine if short or long extensions for file names are used by the operating +% system. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye de déterminer si des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers ou longs sont +% utilisés par le système d'exploitation. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0003|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the chapter level, +% but \emph{not} the mini-table commands at the section level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des +% mini-tables au niveau chapitre, \emph{mais pas} les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% \begin{xmessage}[I0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0004|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros NOT available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} available, so you cannot use the mini-table commands at the +% chapter level, but, if the \com{section} sectionning command is available, you can use mini-table commands at +% the section level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les +% commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre, mais, si la commande de sectionnement \com{section} est +% disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0005|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) compatible with hyperref.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This version of \upack{minitoc} is compatible with the \pack{hyperref} package. +% \or\relax +% Cette version de \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0006|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb| is empty on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The auxiliary file for a mini-table is found empty (or inexistent) when \upack{minitoc} tries to insert it. If +% the \optd{checkfiles} option is active, it is skipped. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est trouvé vide (ou inexistant) lorsque \upack{minitoc} essaye de +% l'insérer. Si l'option \optd{checkfiles} est active, il est sauté. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0007|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are activated|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The horizontal rules will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les filets horizontaux seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0008|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are inhibited|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The horizontal rules will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les filets horizontaux seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0009|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Listing minitoc auxiliary files.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Creating the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.maf file.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used the \optd{listfiles} package option. A list of the minitoc auxiliary files is written in the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. It may be helpful to delete these files. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% This option is the default since version~\#48. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. Une liste des fichiers auxiliaires pour minitoc est +% écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Ceci peut être utile pour détruire ces fichiers. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% Cette option est active par défaut depuis la version~\#48. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0010] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0010|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: The |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language is selected.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has been successfully loaded for the \emph{\LLL} language\footnote{The +% \xfile{english.mld} file is always loaded first, to have english as default language.} +% by the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command at line~\emph{\NNN}. The titles for the mini-tables are changed. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} a été correctement chargé pour la langue \emph{\LLL},\footnote{Le +% fichier \xfile{english.mld} est toujours chargé d'abord, pour avoir l'anglais comme langue par défaut.} par la commande +% \com{mtcselectlanguage} à~la ligne~\emph{\NNN}. Les titres pour les mini-tables sont changés. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0011] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0011|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language object selected.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has successfully (indirectly) loaded +% the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc object file. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a (indirectement) chargé avec succès le fichier minitoc objet de langue +% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0012] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0012|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating system is able to use long extensions; this will be the +% default. +% \or\relax +% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation est capable d'utiliser des suffixes longs; ce sera +% le choix par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0013] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0013|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth redefines the counter|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\CTR}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetdepth} macro changes the value of the specified depth counter and forces it to \emph{\VAL}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetdepth} change la valeur du compteur de profondeur spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL} +% demandée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0014] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0014|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature redefines the macro| +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfeature} macro has redefined the internal macro \emph{\INAME} with the given \emph{\SEQ}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetfeature} a redéfini la macro interne \emph{\INAME} par la \emph{\SEQ} donnée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0015] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0015|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{macro}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfont} command redefines the (old style) \emph{macro} by the given \emph{\SEQ} of font +% commands. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} redéfinit la macro (en ancien style) par la \emph{\SEQ} de commandes de fontes +% donnée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0016] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0016|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as "|\emph{ARG3}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{mtcsetformat} redefines an internal macro with the value given by its third argument. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetformat} redéfinit une macro interne avec la valeur de son troisième argument. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0017] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0017|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\NTITLE}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A mini-table title is redefined via the \com{mtcsettitle} macro. +% \or\relax +% Un titre de mini-table est redéfini via la macro \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0018] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0018|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont redefines the macro|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro redefines the (old style) \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} macro which the given sequence +% \emph{\SEQ}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} redéfinit la macro \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} (ancien style) par la séquence \emph{\SEQ} +% donnée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0019] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0019|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) No hints have been written|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{hints} package option has detected no potential problem. +% \or\relax +% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} n'a détecté aucun problème potentiel. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0020] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0020|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) old version of the memoir class.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The version of the \class{memoir} class is old. The \upack{minitoc} package does not need to patch this class. +% \or\relax +% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est ancienne. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas besoin de corriger +% cette classe. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0021] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0021|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are activated|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The page numbers will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les numéros de pages seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0022] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0022|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are inhibited|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The page numbers will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. +% \or\relax +% Les numéros de pages seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0023] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0023|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) part level macros available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{part} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the part level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des +% mini-tables au niveau partie. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0024] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0024|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINITOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dominitoc} command prepares the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files for minitocs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dominitoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minitoc} pour les minitocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0025] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0025|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{doparttoc} command prepares the \texttt{parttoc} auxiliary files for parttocs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{doparttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{parttoc} pour les parttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0026] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0026|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dosecttoc} command prepares the \texttt{secttoc} auxiliary files for secttocs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dosecttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{secttoc} pour les secttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0027] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0027| +% \verb|(minitoc) recent version of the memoir class.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The version of the \class{memoir} class is recent. The \upack{minitoc} package will try to patch it. +% \or\relax +% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va essayer de corriger cette +% classe. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0028] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0028|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{section} sectionning command is available but the \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} +% available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the section level. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} est disponible mais la commande de sectionnement +% \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au +% niveau section. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0029] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0029|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros NOT available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{section} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the section level commands of +% the \upack{minitoc} package are not available. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au +% niveau section du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0030] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0030|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) the memoir class is loaded:|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) compatibility attempted.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \class{memoir} document class is used. The \upack{minitoc} package tries to ensure compatibility. +% \or\relax +% La classe de document \class{memoir} est utilisée. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye d'assurer la compatibilité. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0031] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0031|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for UNIX-like|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (long extensions) file names.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating uses UNIX-like (long extensions) file names. +% \or\relax +% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers à~la mode UNIX +% (suffixes longs). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0032] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0032|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) This version of the memoir class uses|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) a version of \chapter which is|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) incompatible with the minitoc package.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) We try to patch.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \class{memoir} class uses a version of the \com{chapter} command which needs to be corrected because its syntax has +% been changed. A patch is loaded. +% \or\relax +% La classe \class{memoir} utilise une version de la commande \com{chapter} qui a besoin d'être corrigée car sa +% syntaxe a changé. Une correction (\emph{patch}) est chargée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0033] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0033|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Writing |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% An auxiliary file for a mini-table is written by a \upack{minitoc} preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Un fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est écrit par une commande \upack{minitoc} de préparation +% (telle que \com{dominitoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0034] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0034|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dominilof} command prepares the \upack{minilof} auxiliary files for minilofs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dominilof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minilof} pour les minilofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0035] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0035|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dopartlof} command prepares the \texttt{partlof} auxiliary files for partlofs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dopartlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlof} pour les partlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0036] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0036|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dosectlof} command prepares the \texttt{sectlof} auxiliary files for sectlofs from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dosectlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlof} pour les sectlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0037] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0037|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dominilot} command prepares the \texttt{minilot} auxiliary files for minilots from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dominilot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{minilot} pour les minilots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0038] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0038|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dopartlot} command prepares the \texttt{partlot} auxiliary files for partlots from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dopartlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlot} pour les partlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0039] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0039|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \com{dosectlot} command prepares the \texttt{sectlot} auxiliary files for sectlots from \emph{\FILE}. +% \or\relax +% Une commande \com{dosectlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlot} pour les sectlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Informative messages for hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Messages informatifs pour les indications (\emph{hints})} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0040] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0040|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ``abstract'' package has been|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You need to look at the|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) documentation to adjust.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using the \pack{abstract} package with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, +% you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq.27}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{abstract} avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, +% vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq.27}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0041] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0041|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsbook class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using the \class{amsbook} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{amsbook}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0042] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0042|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The appendix package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \pack{appendix} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+appendix}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{appendix}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+appendix}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0043] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0043|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The KOMAScript |\emph{\CCC}\verb| class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \emph{\CCC} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}. +% The classes involved here are \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl}, i.e., the \KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi la classe \emph{\CCC}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. +% Les classes concernées ici sont \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl}, c'est-à-dire les +% classes \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatibles avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0044] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0044|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The memoir class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using the \class{memoir} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0045] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0045|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The |\texttt{\bs}\PREPA\verb| command|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) has been invoked more than once|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A minitoc preparation command has been invoked more than once. +% \or\relax +% Une commande minitoc de préparation a été invoquée plus d'une fois. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0046] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0046|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocbibind package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \pack{tocbibind} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0047] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0047|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocloft package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you are using also the \pack{tocloft} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation +% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0048] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0048|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Using \mtcprepare may induce some|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hints about the preparation commands,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) because it invokes ALL the preparation|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) commands allowed by the document class,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without any previous check.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcprepare} command invoke all the possible preparation commands, depending only on the document class and the +% available contents files. It does not known exactly what you want, so it can prepare too many mini-tables +% files. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque toutes les commandes de préparation possibles, selon la classe du document et +% les fichiers de contenu disponibles. Elle ne sait pas exactement ce que vous désirez, donc elle peut préparer trop +% de fichiers de mini-tables. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0049] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0049|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ==> You requested the hints option.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints are eventually given below.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As you have requested the \optd{hints} package option (which is set by default), some ``hints'' are eventually +% given in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can find them easily by searching for the string +% ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' with a text editor. +% \or\relax +% Puisque vous avez demandé l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} (qui est activée par défaut), quelques +% «~indications~» (\emph{hints}) sont éventuellement écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. Vous +% pourrez les trouver facilement en recherchant la chaîne «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0050] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0050|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld" file is missing.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or +% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution +% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue \emph{\LLL} ne sera pas +% disponible. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0051] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0051|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo" file is missing.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or +% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution +% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue ne sera pas +% disponible. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0052] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0052|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset redefines the offset|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\OFFSET}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetoffset} macro changes the value of the specified offset and forces it to \emph{\VAL}. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetoffset} change la valeur du déplacement spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL} +% demandée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[I0053] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0053|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You have loaded the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package;|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) please be aware that the minitoc package|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) facilities can not be used for new types|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) of floats defined by the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package does not manage new types of floats defined via the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} +% and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{As the +% \pack{trivfloat} and \pack{rotfloat} packages load the \pack{float} package, this message will then appear twice!}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne traite pas les nouveaux types de flottants définis via les +% paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{Comme les paquetages +% \pack{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat} chargent le paquetage +% \pack{float}, ce message apparaîtra alors deux fois!}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Warning messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0001|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixglossary without|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the +% \com{mtcfixglossary} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very +% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), +% donc la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). +% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0002|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixindex without|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the +% \com{mtcfixindex} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very +% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), +% donc la macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). +% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0003|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \firstchapteris is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0004|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \firstpartis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0005|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \firstsectionis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0006|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixglossary can only be used|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcfixglossary} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because +% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix +% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0007|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixindex can only be used|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcfixindex} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because +% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix +% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0008|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilof} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dominilof} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilof}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0009|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilot} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dominilot} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilot}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0010] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0010|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) MINITOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominitoc} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dominitoc} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominitoc}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dominitoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0011] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0011|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlof} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dopartlof} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlof}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0012] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0012|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlot} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dopartlot} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlot}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0013] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0013|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{doparttoc} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{doparttoc} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{doparttoc}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{doparttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0014] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0014|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlof} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dosectlof} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlof}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0015] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0015|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlot} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dosectlot} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlot}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0016] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0016|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosecttoc} command. Please check if +% you have called \com{dosecttoc} in the correct sequence of commands. +% \or\relax +% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosecttoc}. Vérifiez si +% vous avez invoqué \com{dosecttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0017] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0017|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) no section or chapter level macros available|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} and \com{section} sectionning commands are not defined. Your document class is likely +% without any sectionning command, so the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. \emph{Verify your main +% document class.} +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. Votre classe de document +% est probablement sans aucune commande de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. \emph{Vérifiez +% la classe principale de votre document.} +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0018] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0018|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: part level macros NOT available.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{part} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the part level commands of the +% \upack{minitoc} package are not available. It is a warning message because most classes with sectionning commands +% define the \com{part} command, so you should verify which class you are using. +% \or\relax +% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au +% niveau partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. C'est un message d'avertissement +% (\emph{warning}) car la plupart des classes ayant des commandes de sectionnement définissent la commande +% \com{part}, donc vous devriez vérifier quelle classe vous utilisez. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0019] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0019|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (8+3) file names.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The autofiguration has found that the operating system uses file names with short extensions (8+3 scheme). +% \or\relax +% L'autoconfiguration a trouvé que le système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts +% (schéma 8+3). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0020] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0020|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You have forced the use of short extensions.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used the \opt{shortext} package option to force the use of short extensions (8+3 scheme). This action +% limits the number of usable mini-tables of each kind and may be problematic if you have more that 99~mini-tables +% of the same kind. If your operating system allows for long extensions, do not use the \opt{shortext} package +% option, except for testing purposes. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez spécifié l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} pour forcer l'utilisation de suffixes courts (schéma +% 8+3). Cette action limite le nombre de mini-tables utilisables dans chaque sorte et peut poser des problèmes si +% vous avez plus de 99~mini-tables du même genre. Si votre système d'exploitation permet des suffixes longs, +% n'utilisez pas l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}, sauf à~des fins de test. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0021] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue...| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\virage{} are using an obsolete version of \LaTeX, but the \upack{minitoc} package will still try to continue. It would be +% better to update your \LaTeX\ installation. +% \or\relax +% Vous\virage{} utilisez une version obsolète de \LaTeX, mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va quand même essayer de continuer. Il +% serait préférable de mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0022] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Your\Virage{} version of \LaTeX\ is very obsolete, and almost unusable with the \upack{minitoc} package. You can try to +% continue the compilation, but you are urged to update your \LaTeX\ installation as soon as possible. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez une version totalement périmée de \LaTeX, presque inutilisable avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Vous pouvez essayer de continuer la compilation, mais vous êtes instamment priés de mettre à~jour votre installation +% de \LaTeX{} dès que possible. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0093] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0093|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in your installation.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in the \jobname.log file.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The full list of the missing language files|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is gigen in the W0094 warning message.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Please install the missing files from|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) a recent distribution|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system. +% Search for the \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} and +% \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} info messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file to find which files are missing. +% You can retrieve them from a recent distribution or from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, +% else some language options will not be available. +% The full list of the missing language files is given in the \texttt{W0094}\imess{W0094} +% warning message. +% \or\relax +% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. Cherchez les +% messages informatifs \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} et \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} pour +% trouver quels fichiers sont manquants. Vous pouvez les récupérer depuis une distribution récente ou depuis les +% archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon certaines options de langue ne seront pas disponibles. +% La liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants est donnée dans le message d'avertissement \imess{W0094}\texttt{W0094}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0094] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0094|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Missing minitoc language file(s):|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) ...|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system. +% The list is given in the message. +% \or\relax +% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. +% Leur liste est donnée dans le message. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0095] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0095|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixnomenclature without|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very +% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), +% donc la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). +% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0096] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0096|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixnomenclature can only be used|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because +% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix +% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0098] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0098|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) --- You have used the \nofiles command|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in your preamble; all preparation commands|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) in the body of the document will be ignored.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used the \com{nofiles} command in the preamble of your document; hence the preparation commands will be +% ignored in your document. Please verify that the mini-table auxiliary files are in their final state. +% See page~\pageref{x+W0098}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande \com{nofiles} dans le préambule de votre document; veuillez vérifier que les +% fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-ables sont dans leur état final. Voir page~\pageref{x+W0098}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Warning messages for hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Messages d'avertissement pour les indications (\emph{hints})} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0023] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0023|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- It may be the consequence|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) of loading the ``hyperref'' package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some sectionning commands have been altered \emph{after} the loading of the \upack{minitoc} package. The +% \pack{hyperref} package does that, but it is harmless. For other packages or user-made alterations, it is +% recommended to alter the sectionning commands only \emph{before} loading the \upack{minitoc} package. See +% section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \or\relax +% Certaines commandes de sectionnement ont été modifiées \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref} fait cela, mais sans dommages. Pour des altérations faites par d'autres paquetages +% ou par l'utilisateur, il est recommandé de modifier les commandes de sectionnement seulement \emph{avant} le +% chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{faq.17}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0024] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0024|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints have been written|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{hints} package option has detected some potential problems and written hints into the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can search it for the ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' string with a text +% editor. +% \or\relax +% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} a détecté des problèmes potentiels et écrit des indications (\emph{hints}) +% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Vous pouvez l'examiner en y cherchant la chaîne +% «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0025] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0025|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The alphanum package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{alphanum} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. The +% compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{alphanum} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La +% compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0026] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0026|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsart class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsart} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsart} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0027] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0027|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsproc class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsproc} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsproc} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0028] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0028|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \chapter command is altered|\\ +% \verb| after minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{chapter}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the +% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this +% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. +% \or\relax +% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{chapter}. La plupart d'entre-eux +% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est +% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans +% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0029] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0029|\\ +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: --- The jura class is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \class{jura} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{jura} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0030] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0030|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \part command is altered|\\ +% \verb| after minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{part}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the +% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this +% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. +% \or\relax +% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{part}. La plupart d'entre-eux +% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est +% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans +% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0031] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0031|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without the section option,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which implies it. Try to inverse the|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loading order and use consistent options.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You may have got a message|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using the \pack{placeins} package, but without its \optp{section}{placeins} option, while +% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which implies it. See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, +% near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol\DBEND. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}, alors que +% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui l'implique. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, +% près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~»\DBEND. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0032] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0032|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package loaded is|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) too old. You should use a version|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) dated of 2005/04/18 at least.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using an obsolete version of the \pack{placeins} package. Please update it from the CTAN archives or a +% recent distribution. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez une version obsolète du paquetage \pack{placeins}. Vous devriez le mettre à~jour depuis les +% archives CTAN ou une distribution récente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0033] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0033|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{caption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{caption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0034] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0034|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption2 package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{caption2} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. Note that the \pack{caption2} package is now obsolete; please use a recent version of +% the \pack{caption} package. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{caption2} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. Notez que le paquetage \pack{caption2} est désormais obsolète; veuillez utiliser +% une version récente du paquetage \pack{caption}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0035] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0035|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ccaption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{ccaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{ccaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0036] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0036|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The mcaption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{mcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{mcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0037] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0037|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sectsty package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{sectsty} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.28}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{sectsty} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.28}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0038] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0038|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The varsects package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{varsects} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.33}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{varsects} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.33}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0039] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0039|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \section command is altered|\\ +% \verb| after minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{section}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} +% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the +% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this +% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. +% \or\relax +% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{section}. La plupart d'entre-eux +% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est +% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans +% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0040] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0040|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titletoc package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titletoc} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with +% the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titletoc}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0041] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0041|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty minilofs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty minilofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0042] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0042|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty minilots.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty minilots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0043] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0043|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty minitocs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty minitocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minitocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0044] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0044|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty partlofs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty partlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0045] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0045|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty partlots.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty partlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0046] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0046|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty parttocs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty parttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des parttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0047] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0047|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty sectlofs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty sectlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0048] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0048|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty sectlots.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty sectlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0049] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0049|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ +% \verb| empty secttocs.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert empty secttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will +% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} +% package option), you will only get this harmless message. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des secttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, +% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut +% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0050] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0050|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb| command: \firstchapteris.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0051] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0051|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb| command: \firstpartis.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0052] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0052|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ +% \verb| command: \firstsectionis.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0053] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0053|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 chapters (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~chapters, so the number of the auxiliary +% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective chapters in your document. See +% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~chapitres, donc le numéro du fichier +% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de chapitres effectifs dans votre document. +% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0054] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0054|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 parts (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~parts, so the number of the auxiliary +% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective parts in your document. See +% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~parties, donc le numéro du fichier +% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de parties effectives dans votre document. +% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0055] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0055|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 sections (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~sections, so the number of the auxiliary +% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective sections in your document. See +% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~sections, donc le numéro du fichier +% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de sections effectives dans votre document. +% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0056] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0056|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You are using \dosectlof and/or|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \dosectlot, \sectlof and/or \sectlot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hence the ``insection'' package|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) option is recommended.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are asking for mini-lists of figures or tables at the section level. But as floats (figures and tables) could +% drift somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and sectlots can be rather strange. +% In order to have a better behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the \opt{insection} package option. +% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez demandé des mini-listes des figures ou des tables au niveau section. Mais Comme les éléments flottants +% (figures et tableaux) pourraient dériver quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression du texte de la section, +% les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur comportement de ces mini-tables, +% il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0057] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0057|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the minilofs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dominilof}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais les minilofs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dominilof}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0058] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0058|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the minilots have not been prepared +% (via \com{dominilot}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais les minilots n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dominilot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0059] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0059|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the minitocs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dominitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais les minitocs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dominitoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0060] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0060|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the partlofs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dopartlof}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais les partlofs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dopartlof}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0061] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0061|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the partlots have not been prepared +% (via \com{dopartlot}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais les partlots n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dopartlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0062] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0062|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \doparttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the parttocs have not been prepared +% (via \com{doparttoc}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais les parttocs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{doparttoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0063] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0063|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the sectlofs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dosectlof}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais les sectlofs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dosectlof}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0064] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0064|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the sectlots have not been prepared +% (via \com{dosectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais les sectlots n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dosectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0065] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0065|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosecttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have attempted to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the secttocs have not been prepared +% (via \com{dosecttoc}). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais les secttocs n'ont pas été préparées +% (via \com{dosecttoc}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0066] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0066|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \listoffigures nor|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoffigures.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0067] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0067|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables| nor\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoftables.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0068] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0068|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0069] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0069|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0070] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0070|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0071] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0071|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0072] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0072|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0073] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0073|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0074] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0074|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc but not|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have tried to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not +% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est +% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0075] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0075|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \doparttoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \parttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0076] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0076|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlof|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0077] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0077|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlot|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0078] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0078|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominitoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minitoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0079] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0079|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilof|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0080] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0080|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilot|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some minilots (via \com{dominilot}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des minilots (via \com{dominilot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0081] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0081|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosecttoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \secttoc.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0082] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0082|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlof|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlof.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0083] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0083|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlot|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlot.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have prepared some sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), but you never used one of them. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez préparé des sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0084] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0084|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the above option,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the above option and|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) use consistent options.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{above}{placeins} option, while +% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it. +% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{above}{placeins}, alors que +% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle. +% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~». +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0085] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0085|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the below option,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the below option|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and use consistent options.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{below}{placeins} option, while +% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it. +% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{below}{placeins}, alors que +% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle. +% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~». +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0086] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0086|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The fncychap package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{fncychap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.38}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{fncychap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.38}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0087] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0087|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The quotchap package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{quotchap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.39}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{quotchap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.39}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0088] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0088|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The romannum package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{romannum} package alters the numbering of some sectionning +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.40}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{romannum} altère la numérotation de certaines commandes +% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.40}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0089] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0089|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sfheaders package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{sfheaders} package alters the sectionning +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.41}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders} altère les commandes +% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.41}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0090] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0090|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The alnumsec package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{alnumsec} package alters the sectionning +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.42}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec} altère les commandes +% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.42}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0091] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0091|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The captcont package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{captcont} package alters the caption +% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.43}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{captcont} altère les commandes pour les captions +% et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.43}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0092] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0092|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The hangcaption package should be|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{hangcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{faq.47}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.47}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0097] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0097|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The flowfram package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{flowfram} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, +% because it has its own definitions for minitocs. The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{flowfram} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% car il a ses propres définitions pour des minitocs. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être +% insatisfaisant. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[W0099] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0099|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titlesec package is loaded.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titlesec} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with +% the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \or\relax +% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titlesec}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Error messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages d'erreur} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0001|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb| not usable| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro; even \com{part} is +% undefined. Verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixglossary}; +% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0002|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb| not usable| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixindex} macro; even \com{part} is +% undefined. Verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixindex}; +% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0003|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \env{mtchideinmainlof} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the +% hiding in the main list of figures will be strange. +% \or\relax +% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), +% donc le masquage dans la liste des figures principale sera étrange. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0004|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the +% hiding in the main list of tables will be strange. +% \or\relax +% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), +% donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux principale sera étrange. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0005|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|\\ +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the +% hiding in the main table of contents will be strange. +% \or\relax +% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmaintoc} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), +% donc le masquage dans la table des matières principale sera étrange. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0006|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known language,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\ +% \verb|Press RETURN| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} minitoc language definition +% file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your +% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mld} files of the \upack{minitoc} package, +% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mld} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local +% hierarchy) or be in the working directory. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger le fichier minitoc de définition de langue +% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de +% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers +% \suffix{.mld} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier +% \suffix{.mld} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le +% répertoire de travail. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0007|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known minitoc|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) language object file (.mlo),|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\ +% \verb|Press RETURN| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load indirectly the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc language +% object file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your +% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mlo} files of the \upack{minitoc} package, +% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mlo} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local +% hierarchy) or be in the working directory. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger (indirectement) le fichier minitoc objet de langue +% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de +% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers +% \suffix{.mlo} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier +% \suffix{.mlo} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le +% répertoire de travail. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0008|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth attempts to use|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined counter (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|depth).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are trying to set the depth for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the +% document class, and the loaded packages. +% \or\relax +% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et +% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0009|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. +% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0010] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0010|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0011] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0011|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0012] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0012|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a feature param|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (before, after, open, close, pagestyle).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be \feat{before}, \feat{after}, +% \feat{open}, \feat{close}, or \texttt{thispagestyle}. +% \or\relax +% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être \feat{before}, \feat{after} +% \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0013] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0013|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{arg1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; +% it should be the type of a mini-table (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0014] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0014|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a sectionning level|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (part...subparagraph) or * .|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; it should be a sectionning level (i.e., a sectionning +% command without its backslash), like \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}. +% \or\relax +% Le deuxième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un niveau de sectionnement (c'est-à-dire, +% une commande de sectionnement sans sa contre-oblique), comme \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0015] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0015|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0016] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0016|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\texttt{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a formatting param choosen from:|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetformat} macro is wrong. It should be one of the following keywords: +% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin}, or \texttt{dotinterval}. +% \or\relax +% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être l'un des mots-clés suivants: +% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin} ou \texttt{dotinterval}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0017] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0017|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong first|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|)..|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} macro must be a type of minitable (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0018] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0018|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong second|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes +% suivantes\,\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0019] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0019|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetrules} est incorrect. +% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0020] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0020|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong second argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetrules} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes +% suivantes\,\FZ: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, +% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, +% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; +% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, +% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0021] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0021|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a \com{mtcsettitle} macro is incorrect; it should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsettitle} est incorrect; +% ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0022] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0022|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} must be a mini-table type. You likely misspelt it. +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} doit être un type de mini-table. Vous avez probablement +% fait une faute de frappe. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0023] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0023|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfeature has incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro are \emph{incompatible}. You should verify them. +% \or\relax +% Les\Virage{} premier et deuxième arguments de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} sont \emph{incompatibles}. +% Vous devriez les vérifier. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0024] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0024|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfont has incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfont} macro takes a mini-table type as first argument, a sectionning level as second argument (or +% a star), and a sequence of font commands as third argument. The second argument must have a lower level than the first one +% (i.e., it is meaningless to specify the font for the chapter level entries for a minitoc or a secttoc). +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtcsetfont} prend un type de mini-table comme premier argument (ou une étoile), un niveau de +% sectionnement comme deuxième argument et une séquence de commandes de fontes comme troisième argument. Le deuxième +% argument doit être de plus bas niveau que le premier (par exemple, il est absurde de spécifier la fonte pour les +% entrées de niveau chapitre dans une minitoc ou une secttoc). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0025] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0025|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetformat has incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro are \emph{incompatible}. +% One is likely to be misspelt. +% \or\relax +% Les\Virage{} premier et second arguments d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} sont \Virage\emph{incompatibles}. +% Il est probable qu'il y~ait une faute de frappe dans l'un d'eux. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0026] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0026|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixglossary|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults +% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. +% \or\relax +% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris +% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0027] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0027|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixindex|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixindex} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults +% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. +% \or\relax +% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixindex} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris +% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0028] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0028|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unable to patch the memoir class.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|So it remains incompatible. Sorry.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Your\Virage{} version of the \class{memoir} class is really \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package +% and cannot be automatically patched. Please update the \class{memoir} class and/or the \upack{minitoc} package +% from the CTAN archives or a recent distribution. +% \or\relax +% Votre\Virage{} version de la classe \class{memoir} est vraiment \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et ne peut pas être corrigée automatiquement. Vous êtes priés de mettre à~jour +% la classe \class{memoir} et/ou le paquetage \upack{minitoc} depuis les archives ou une distribution récente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0029] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0029|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{mtchideinmainlof} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of figures could be incorrect. +% \or\relax +% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlof} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des figures +% principale pourrait être incorrect. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0030] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0030|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{mtchideinmainlot} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of tables could be incorrect. +% \or\relax +% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlot} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux +% principale pourrait être incorrect. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0031] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0031|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main table of contents could be incorrect. +% \or\relax +% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la table des matières +% principale pourrait être incorrect. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0032] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0032|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You are using the \mtcloadmlo command|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) outside of a .mld file.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It will be ignored| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is \emph{forbidden} to use the \com{mtcloadmlo} macro outside of a \suffix{.mld} file (which is loaded via +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). The command is ignored. +% \or\relax +% Il est \emph{interdit} d'utiliser la macro \com{mtcloadmlo} en dehors d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} (qui est chargé via +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). La commande est ignorée. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0033] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0033|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitle uses|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}. +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0034] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0034|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitlefont uses|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}. +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme +% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, +% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0035] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0035|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) You have used the `insection' option in|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) a document where chapters are defined.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) This is not compatible: option ignored.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Remove this option.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \opt{insection} package option is intended for \class{article}-like document classes, to prevent floats +% from drifting out of their section. It is pointless for \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document +% classes, where floats are contained in their chapter. +% \or\relax +% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} est destinée aux classes de document analogues à~\class{article}, +% pour empêcher les éléments flottants de dériver en dehors de leur section. Elle est sans objet pour les classes +% de document analogues à~\class{book} ou \class{report}, où les éléments flottants sont contenus dans leur +% chapitre. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0036] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0036|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The minitoc language object file (.mld),|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) english.mld is not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with default values.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.| +% \verb|Type to continue| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \xfile{english.mld} language definition file can not be found. You should verify your installation of the +% \upack{minitoc} package. As an interim solution, we provide the missing english titles. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \xfile{english.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. Vous devriez vérifier votre +% installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais manquants. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0037] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0037|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The \|\emph{\COMMAND}\verb| command is incompatible|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) with the document class.|\\ +% \verb||\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb| ... |\\ +% \verb| |\\ +% \verb|l.39 \dominitoc[r]|\\ +% \verb| |\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have used a preparation or insertion command +% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) which is not available for the +% document class you are using. Please verify that the document +% class is compatible with \upack{minitoc} and if the level of +% the mini-table is available in the document class +% (section-level mini-tables are not available in \class{book}- or +% \class{report}-like classes, chapter-level mini-tables are not +% available in \class{article}-like classes, mini-tables are not +% available in \class{letter}-like classes, etc.). +% \or\relax +% Vous avez utilisé une commande de préparation ou d'insertion +% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) qui n'est pas disponible pour la +% classe de document que vous utilisez. Veuillez vérifier que +% votre classe de document est compatible avec \upack{minitoc} +% et si le niveau de mini-table est disponible dans la classe de +% document (les mini-tables au niveau section ne sont pas +% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{book} ou +% \class{report}, les mini-tables au niveau chapitre ne sont pas +% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{article}, les mini-tables +% ne sont pas disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{letter}, etc.). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0038] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0038|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) A mandatory minitoc language object file,|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld, is not found.|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) current/default values.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ +% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.| +% \verb|Type to continue| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The mandatory \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} language definition file can not be found. +% You should verify your installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% As an interim solution, we provide the default english titles. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier obligatoire \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. +% Vous devriez vérifier votre installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais par défaut. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0039] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0039|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb| not usable| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro; even \com{part} is +% undefined. Verify your document class. +% \or\relax +% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature}; +% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0040] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0040|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixnomenclature|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults +% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. +% \or\relax +% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris +% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0041] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0041|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset attempts to use|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined mini-table type (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are trying to set the offset for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the +% document class, and the loaded packages. +% \or\relax +% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et +% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0042] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0042|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset has a wrong first argument|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, +% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. +% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[E0043] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0043|\\ +% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ +% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ +% \verb|Type H for immediate help.|\\ +% \verb|? h|\\ +% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ +% \verb|Type and rerun LaTeX| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \or\relax +% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table +% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Messages from the \upack{mtcoff} package}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \pack{mtcoff} package gives only warning messages; their numbers begin with~\texttt{F}. +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} ne donne que des messages d'avertissement; leurs numéros commencent par~\texttt{F}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Warning messages} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0001|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{addstarredchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{addstarredchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0002] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0002|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredpart{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{addstarredpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{addstarredpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0003] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0003|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredsection{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{addstarredsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{addstarredsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0004] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0004|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcaddchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcaddchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0005] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0005|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcaddpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcaddpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0006] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0006|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcaddsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} +% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| +% command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcaddsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée +% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0007] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0007|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) You should scan (backwards) your .log|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) file to find some commands needing|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) to be replaced if you decide to|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) document. It is more wise to keep the|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) \usepackage lines for minitoc and mtcoff|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) and to comment out only one of them.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You have replaced the use of the \upack{minitoc} package by its substitute \pack{mtcoff}. +% It is recommended to keep the \com{usepackage} lines for both \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} +% and to comment out only one of them. If you decide to \emph{definitely} stop using \upack{minitoc} for this document, +% it is wise to scan (backwards) the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file (after a compilation using \pack{mtcoff}) +% to locate some commands needing to be replaced. +% \or\relax +% Vous avez remplacé l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} par son substitut \pack{mtcoff}. +% Il est recommandé de conserver les lignes \com{usepackage} à~la fois pour \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff} +% et d'en mettre une seule en commentaire. Si vous décidez d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} d'utiliser \upack{minitoc} +% pour ce document, il est prudent d'examiner (en remontant depuis la fin) le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% (après une compilation utilisant \pack{mtcoff}) pour localiser quelques commandes qu'il faut remplacer. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0008] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0008|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \kernafter|\emph{\STRING}\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using one of the \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package. +% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust +% the position of the bottom rule of a type of minitables. Any other usage is +% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour +% ajuster la position du filet inférieur d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage +% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \begin{xmessage}[F0009] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0009|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\ +% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using one of the \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package. +% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust +% the horizontal position of a type of minitables. Any other usage is +% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour +% ajuster la position horizontale d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage +% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Message from the \upack{mtcpatchmem} package}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% \or\relax +% \section{Message émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcpatchmem}}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% \fi +% +% \begin{xmessage}[M0001] +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: M0001|\\ +% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class.| +% \end{quote} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% You are using a version of the \class{memoir} class which needs a correction. This correction has been +% automatically loaded if necessary. Very recent versions should not need it anymore. See +% chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}. +% \or\relax +% Vous utilisez une version de la classe \class{memoir} qui nécessite une correction. Cette correction a été +% chargée automatiquement si nécessaire. Les versions très récentes ne devraient plus en avoir besoin. Voir le +% chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}. +% \fi +% \end{xmessage} +% +% \def\jsection#1{\section*{\null\hspace*{-1cm}\fbox{\mbox{#1}}}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em} +% \minitoc +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt} +% \mtcskip +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +% \minilot +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} +% This chapter attempts to explain some terms used in this documentation, and describes some useful files and suffixes. +% Many data come from the documentations of various cited packages (often from the abstract), and +% from~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}. +% \clearpage +% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \jsection{.\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{``.''} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\usuffix{.aux}]\isuffix{.aux} The suffix of the name for an \emph{auxiliary} file of a \LaTeX{} document. It carries +% some information from a \LaTeX{} run to the next. +% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.cls} The suffix for the name of a document class file, loaded via \com{documentclass}. +% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} The suffix of the name for a documented source file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. This file +% is often associated with a \suffix{.ins} file to generate the package or class. Compiling a \suffix{.dtx} +% file with \LaTeX{} generates the documentation. +% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} The suffix of the name for an installation file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. When +% compiled with \LaTeX, it extracts the files of the package or class from an \suffix{.dtx} file. +% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lof} The suffix of the name of the ``list of figures'' file. +% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} The suffix of the name of the log file (compilation report). +% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} The suffix of the name of the ``list of tables'' file. +% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\isuffix{.maf} The suffix of the name of the file generated by the \optd{listfiles} package option. This file +% contains the list of the minitoc auxiliary files. +% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language definition file. A minitoc language definition file +% contains the definitions for the mini-table titles in a given language. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language object file. For some exotic languages, the encoding +% makes not easy to put direcly the titles in a \suffix{.mld} file; +% hence the \suffix{.mld} file must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\isuffix{.ptc} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} The suffix for the name of a package file, loaded via \com{usepackage}. +% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} The suffix of the name of a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ normal source file. +% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} The suffix of the name of the ``table of contents'' file. +% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. +% The full suffix is \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[absolute numbering] The auxiliary files for the mini-tables have a suffix containing an \emph{absolute +% number}, i.e.,~the number is unique and always increasing from the first part, chapter or section; this has +% solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis}, +% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}. The absolute numbering has been introduced in +% version~\#23. +% \item[\upack{abstract}] The \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) needs some +% precautions if used with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[adjustment] Some \upack{minitoc} commands and environments are known as ``adjustment commands'' because +% they are used in +% some circumstances to ``adjust'' a counter or to alter the displaying of contents files. These commands and +% environments are +% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc}, +% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, +% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, +% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, +% \env{mtchideinmainlof}, and +% \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% It is \virage\emph{strongly recommended} that the user verifies the result of such adjustments in the final document. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\feat{after}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{after} a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\pack{afterpage}] The \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} package is used to add code to be executed \emph{after} the +% next page break. +% \item[\upack{alnumsec}] +% The \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} allows you to use alphanumeric section +% numbering, e.g. A.~Introduction; III.~International Law. It's +% output is similar to the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}), +% but you can use the standard \LaTeX\ sectionning commands. Thus it is possible to switch numbering +% schemes easily. Greek letters, double letters~(bb) and different delimiters around them are supported. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.alnumsec} and +% section~\vref{faq.42}). +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{alphanum}] The \pack{alphanum}\imess{W0025} package, which is part of the specialized \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}, +% by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{3} +% \item[\AmS] The\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}} +% American Mathematical Society~\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}. This society has developped some document classes: +% unfortunately, \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package; +% \class{amsbook} is compatible but needs precautions. +% \item[\uclass{amsart}, \xfile{amsart.cls}]\iclass{amsart} A\imess{W0026} document class for articles~\cite{amslatex}, +% provided by the American Mathematical +% Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\uclass{amsbook}, \xfile{amsbook.cls}]\iclass{amsbook} A\imess{I0041} document class for books~\cite{amslatex}, +% provided by the American Mathematical +% Society (\AmS). This class is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package, but needs some precautions. +% See section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \item[\uclass{amsproc}, \xfile{amsproc.cls}]\iclass{amsproc} A\imess{W0027} document class for conference +% proceedings~\cite{amslatex}, +% provided by the American Mathematical Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is +% \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% is a language support package for \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), based on the original +% \xfile{omega.sty} file of the Omega project~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). However, it provides some additional useful +% functionalities. +% Some languages definition files (\suffix{.mld}) use titles taken from \pack{Antomega}: \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, +% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld}, and \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\env{appendices}] See \upack{appendix} below. +% \item[\upack{appendix}] The\imess{I0042} \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) +% provides various ways of formatting the titles of appendices. Also (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} +% environments\ienv{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} +% are provided that can be used, for instance, for per chapter/section appendices. If this package +% is used with \upack{minitoc}, some precautions are needed (see section~\vref{faq+appendix}). +% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} is a system (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents in the +% \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{farsi} languages. The titles in \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} come from the \xfile{arabic.ldf} +% and \xfile{farsi.ldf} files of this system. +% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} is a package (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents +% in the \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{hebrew} languages. The titles in \xfile{arab.mld} (or \xfile{arabic.mld}), +% \xfile{arab2.mld} and +% \xfile{hebrew.mld} come from \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, while those of \xfile{hebrew2.mld} come +% from \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} is a package (prepared by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, +% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) to prepare \LaTeX{} +% documents in the \lopt{armenian} language. The titles in \xfile{armenian.mld} come from Arm\TeX. +% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part} +% and \com{section} (and below), but not \com{chapter}. It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package +% and you can make mini-tables at the part and section levels (but, of course, not at the unavailable chapter level). +% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}] +% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the beginning of the document (if fact, at the very +% end of its preamble, but inside it, which implies some restrictions), at the point where \verb|\begin{document}| is +% processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any conflicts with other packages +% trying to do the same. +% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}] +% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the end of the document, at the point +% where \verb|\end{document}| is processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any +% conflicts with other packages trying to do the same. +% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Since version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} detects automaticaly if the extensions (suffixes) +% of the file names are limited to 3~characters (like under MS-DOS) or not. This process is named autoconfiguration. +% The package option \opt{shortext} forces the limitation to 3~characters. +% \item[auxiliary] During the preparation of a document, the \LaTeX\ system uses some \textbf{auxiliary} files to +% store information. The standard auxiliary files are \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (for cross-reference +% labels, counters, etc.), \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} for the table of contents, +% \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} for the list of figures, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} for the list of +% tables. The \upack{minitoc} package creates its own auxiliary files, to store the contents of each +% mini-table. These files are the \emph{minitoc auxiliary files}, whose names are +% \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{extension}, the table~\vref{t+suffixes} lists the possible extensions. +% See also the \suffix{.maf} extension above. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{babel}] The \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and others) is +% a large package useful to write \LaTeX\ documents in many languages, not only english. +% Many titles for mini-tables come directly from the \pack{babel} package. +% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} A package for typesetting documents in the \lopt{bangla} +% (\lopt{bengali}) language using the {\TeX/\LaTeX} systems; see~\cite{bangtex}. +% \item[\feat{before}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{before} a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\BibTeX] A program by \name{Oren}{Patashnik} to make bibliographies in \LaTeX{} documents. Distributed with \LaTeX. +% See~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}. +% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{bibtopic} for including several bibliographies in a document. +% These bibliographies might be considered to cover different topics (hence the name) or bibliographic +% material (e.g., primary and secondary literature) and the like. +% \item[\upack{bibunits}] The \pack{bibunits} package~\cite{bibunits} allows separate bibliographies for different +% units or parts of the text. The units can be chapters, sections or \env{bibunit} environments. This +% package is compatible with a wide variety of packages, including, but not limited to, \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, +% \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} and \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}, +% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and +% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many +% auxiliary files). +% \item[\pack{booktabs}] This nice package~\cite{booktabs} helps to the preparation of better tables, \emph{without} +% vertical rules nor double rules. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{calc}] The \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} package makes easier the numeric computations (on counters and dimensions) +% when preparing a \LaTeX{} document. +% \item[cappuccino] See ``minutes'' below. +% \item[\upack{captcont}] The \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} provides support for retaining +% a figure or caption number across several float environments --- usually over several pages. It allows +% control over the contents of the List-of-Figures and the List-of-Tables pages. It should be compatible +% with all other packages that modify or extend the float environment and with the \pack{subfig} +% package~\cite{subfig} in particular. +% \item[\upack{caption}] The \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} provides many ways to customize the captions +% in floating environments such \env{figure} and \env{table} and cooperates with many other packages. +% \item[\upack{caption2}] The\footnote{This text comes from the documentation of the \pack{caption} package. +% The \pack{caption} and \pack{caption2} packages have the same author, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.} +% \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} used to be an experimental side-version +% of the regular \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} and has been superseed by the new release of +% the regular \pack{caption} package version~\mbox{3.0} in December 2003. \pack{caption2} is still +% some kind of supported, that means it will be part of future releases and bugs will still be fixed, +% so existing documents using this package will still compile. But \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} will \emph{not} answer +% questions about this package anymore except questions on migrating to the regular version of +% the \pack{caption} package. And it will \emph{not} be adapted or enhanced in the future. +% +% So please don't use this package for new documents. It's old, it's obsolete and it starts to begin smell bad! +% +% Please ignore all hints in books or other documents which try to tell you that the \pack{caption2} package should +% be used instead of the \pack{caption} package -- these hints are outdated since December 2003. +% \item[catcode] Short for ``category code''. In\footnote{This definition is taken from +% ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} +% the first place, it's wise to have a precise idea of what your keyboard sends to the machine. There are 256~characters +% that \TeX\ might encounter at each step, in a file or in a line of text typed directly on your terminal. These +% 256~characters are classified into 16~categories numbered~0 to~15. See table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \def?{\phantom{0}} +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Category codes}\label{t+J+catcodes} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}cll@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{Category}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ +% \midrule +% ?0&Escape character&(\texttt{\bs}~usually)\\ +% ?1&Beginning of group&(\texttt{\{}~usually)\\ +% ?2&End of group&(\texttt{\}}~usually)\\ +% ?3&Math shift&(\texttt{\$}~usually)\\ +% ?4&Alignment tab&(\texttt{\&}~usually)\\ +% ?5&End of line&(\emph{return}~usually)\\ +% ?6&Parameter&(\texttt{\#}~usually)\\ +% ?7&Superscript&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~usually)\\ +% ?8&Subscript&(\texttt{\_}~usually)\\ +% ?9&Ignored character&(\emph{null}~usually)\\ +% 10&Space&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~usually)\\ +% 11&Letter&(\texttt{A}, \dots, \texttt{Z} and~\texttt{a}, \dots, \texttt{z})\\ +% 12&Other character&(none of the above or below)\\ +% 13&Active character&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~usually)\\ +% 14&Comment character&(\texttt{\%}~usually)\\ +% 15&Invalid character&(\emph{delete}~usually)\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% It's not necessary for you to learn these code numbers; the point is only that \TeX\ responds to 16~different +% types of characters. At first, ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}'' led you to believe that there were just two types --- the +% escape character and the others --- and then you were told about two more types, the grouping symbols~\texttt{\{} +% and~\texttt{\}}. The category code for any character can be changed at any time, but it is usually wise to stick to a +% particular scheme. +% \item[\upack{ccaption}] The \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} provides commands for ``continuation captions'', +% unnumbered captions, and a legend heading for any environment. Methods are provided to define captions +% for use outside float environments, and to define new float environments and subfloats. Tools are provided +% for defining your own captioning styles. +% \item[\upack{chngpage}] The \pack{chngpage} package (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) provides commands to change +% the page layout in the middle of a document, and to robustly check for typesetting on odd or even pages. +% \item[Chapter~0] +% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter number zero (or even a weirder number). +% This caused a serious problem in old versions of the \upack{minitoc} package: the minitocs appeared in the +% wrong chapters, and a first correction was the introduction of specific commands (\com{firstchapteris} and +% co.). With the addition of the absolute numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files (see \emph{absolute} above), +% the problem was solved in \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, and these commands became obsolete. +% See section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] The \pack{chapterbib} package~\cite{chapterbib} allows multiple bibliographies in a +% \LaTeX\ document, including items \com{cite}'d in more than one bibliography. Despite the name +% ``\pack{chapterbib}'', \emph{the bibliographies are for each included file}, not necessarily for each +% chapter. +% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles} +% A package option of \upack{minitoc}. It checks every mini-table to look if it is empty; then empty mini-tables +% are \emph{not} printed. This is the default. The opposite package option (\opt{nocheckfiles}) prints even the +% empty mini-tables, which look ugly. See section~\vref{o+checkfiles}. +% \item[\upack{CJK}] The \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and others), is a set of packages and fonts to +% prepare \LaTeX\ documents in some oriental language, like chinese, japanese, korean (with Hangûl or Hanja fonts), +% and thai, plus some variants of russian. +% The titles of mini-tables for these languages come from some \pack{CJK} files and were inserted in +% \suffix{.mld} files when possible, or in \suffix{.mlo} files when the encoding is incompatible with the +% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx} mechanism; +% then the \suffix{.mld} file must input the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \pack{CJK} implements the GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8, and CNS encodings (on 16~bits, except UTF~8 on 24~bits). +% See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Encoding schemes implemented in \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{1~byte}&\textbf{2~bytes}&\textbf{3~bytes}\\ +% \midrule +% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\ +% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\ +% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% Some encoding schemes (Big~5, SJIS) have gaps in the range of the second byte. +% It is difficult to input Big~5 and SJIS encoding directly into \TeX\ since some of the values used for the +% encodings' second bytes are reserved for control characters: `\texttt{\{}', `\texttt{\}}', and +% `\texttt{\bs}'. Redefining them breaks a lot of things in \LaTeX; to avoid this, preprocessors are normally +% used which convert the second byte into a number followed by a delimiter character. For further details, +% please refer to~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} discusses in great detail all \pack{CJK} encodings which are +% or have been in use. +% Please note that the \upack{minitoc} package uses the \suffix{.mlo} files as a workaround for this problem; +% see section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% \item[class] The \textbf{class}\footnote{This note is extracted from~\cite{NSSL2E}, then adapted.} is the first +% information \LaTeX{} needs to know when processing an +% input file; it is the type of document the author wants to create. This +% is specified with the \com{documentclass} command. +% \begin{quote} +% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{class}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \noindent Here \emph{class} specifies the type of document to be created. +% Table~\vref{t+documentclasses} lists the standard document classes~\cite{classes}. The \LaTeXe{} distribution provides additional +% classes for other documents, including letters and slides, but the \upack{minitoc} package has not +% been tested with all these classes. The +% \emph{options} parameters customize the behaviour of the document +% class. The options have to be separated by commas. +% The standard classes supported by the \upack{minitoc} package +% are listed in section~\vref{s+supported+classes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Standard document classes}\label{t+documentclasses} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Class}&\textbf{Usage}\\ +% \midrule +% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&For articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, program documentation, +% invitations, \ldots\\ +% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&For preparing conference proceedings; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ +% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&For preparing the documentation of a package or of a class; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ +% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&For preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ +% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&For longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD theses, \ldots\\ +% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&For real books.\\ +% \class{letter}~\cite{letter}&For letters; as this class has no sectionning commands, do not use \upack{minitoc} with +% this class.\\ +% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&For slides; the class uses big sans serif +% letters. You might want to consider using Beamer\TeX{}$^a$ instead. +% Do not use \upack{minitoc} with these classes.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}\hfill\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{close}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately after (\emph{close}) the insertion +% of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the documentation files in PostScript format from the ones in PDF format. +% This script should be adapted to your needs. +% \item[CMR] For ``Computer Modern Roman''. The roman subset of the Computer Modern fonts. See ``Computer Modern'' +% below. +% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in english. +% \item[Computer Modern] A set of fonts~\cite{cmt} designed by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} for \TeX. Initially +% they were built with {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (a program also created by \textsc{Knuth}), but PostScript +% type~1 (vector) versions +% exist today, with extensions (for accented characters, mainly): the EC-fonts (European Computer Modern), +% the cm-super fonts, etc. +% \item[counter] A \TeX\ register containing an integer value. There are 256 counters (from~0 to~255) in \TeX, but +% \LaTeX\ uses some of them, and many packages need some counters for their own usage. An extended version +% derived from \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, allows more counters. Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) also offers more counters. +% \item[CTAN] The \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, a~set of computer archives containing most of +% the \TeX\ related resources (like fonts, sofware, documentations, packages). They are accessible via +% Internet. See \url{http://ctan.org}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] I~needed to use the \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} package to typeset ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' +% entry~\cite{han} in the bibliography, because its author's first name contains a double +% accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}. +% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in german. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Depths for sectionning commands}\label{t+j+depths} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Class:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\ +% \midrule +% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\ +% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\ +% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\ +% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\ +% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\ +% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\ +% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\ +% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \item[depth] In the standard documents classes (and in most classes) with sectionning commands, we have a notion of +% \textbf{depth}. The depth of a sectionning command determines the numbering level in its title (from the value of the +% \dcnt{secnumdepth} counter), and the entries for a given sectionning command appear in the main table of contents +% if the depth of this sectionning command is lower than or equal to the value of the \dcnt{tocdepth} counter; see +% table~\vref{t+j+depths} for the depths of the sectionning commands in the main document classes. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The mechanism is analog for the parttocs, minitocs, and secttocs, using the values of the \dcnt{parttocdepth}, +% \dcnt{minitocdepth}, and \dcnt{secttocdepth} counters. If you use sub-figures or sub-tables, the corresponding +% mini-tables use counters like \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, +% \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[descriptor] (file descriptor). A software entity describing the interface between a program and a file. +% For most programs and operating systems, the number of file descriptors is limited. For \TeX{} (and \LaTeX), +% there are 16~file descriptors for writing and 16~file descriptors for reading. +% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] The \emph{\devnag{} for \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) package~\cite{devanagari} provides a +% way to typeset high-quality \devnag{} text with \TeX{}. \devnag{} is a script used for writing and printing +% Sanskrit and a number of languages in Northern and Central India such as Hindi and Marathi, as well as Nepali. +% The \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package was originally developed in May 1991 by Frans Velthuis for the University of Groningen, +% The Netherlands, and it was the first system to provide support for the \devnag{} script for \TeX{}. +% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] A PostScript header file, which tries to activate recto-verso printing. It works +% ^^A with some HP and Canon PostScript printers. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\texttt{em}] A length unit equal (approximatively) to the width of a~``m'' letter in the current font. +% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script +% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style derived from the \xfile{plain.bst}\isuffix{.bst} standard style, but +% modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst} to add an~\texttt{URL} field. Family names of authors +% and editors are in small caps, years are in old style digits. +% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the font (e.g., whether the 65th character is ``A''). +% The most common value for TeX font encoding is OT1. The other predefined option is T1 (extended \TeX). There's also +% US~ASCII (7~bit), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bit), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}), +% etc. See table~\vref{t+var-encodings} and ~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Various encodings}\label{t+var-encodings} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Comment}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ansinew}&Windows~3.1 ANSI encoding, extension of Latin-1.\\ +% \texttt{applemac}&Macintosh encoding.\\ +% \texttt{ascii}&ASCII encoding for the range 32--127.\\ +% \texttt{cp1250}&Windows 1250 (Central and Eastern Europe) code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp1251}&Windows 1251 (Cyrillic) code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonym for \texttt{ansinew}.\\ +% \texttt{cp1257}&Windows 1257 (Baltic) code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp437}&IBM~437 code page, which is the original +% American code page and contains letters, digits, +% mathematical symbols, and some characters useful in the +% construction of pseudographics.\\ +% \texttt{cp437de}&IBM~437 code page (German version).\\ +% \texttt{cp850}&IBM~850 code page, almost the same as +% ISO~Latin~1, but character arrangement is not the same.\\ +% \texttt{cp852}&IBM~852 code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp855}&IBM~855 code page (Cyrillic).\\ +% \texttt{cp865}&IBM~865 code page.\\ +% \texttt{cp866}&IBM~866 code page (MS-DOS Cyrillic).\\ +% \texttt{decmulti}&DEC Multinational Character Set encoding.\\ +% \texttt{latin1}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for most Western European languages, including Danish, +% Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, Flemish, French, +% German, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, +% Spanish, and Swedish. Some non-European languages, such as +% Hawaiian and Indonesian, are also written in this +% character set.\\ +% \texttt{latin2}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for most Central European languages, including Croatian, +% Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Slovak, and Slovenian.\\ +% \texttt{latin3}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for Esperanto, Maltese, Turkish, and Galicean. However, +% \texttt{latin5} is the prefered character set for +% Turkish.\\ +% \texttt{latin4}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed +% for the Baltic languages (Latvian, Estonian, and +% Lithuanian), Greenlandic, and Lappish (Sámi).\\ +% \texttt{latin5}&Is essentially the same as +% \texttt{latin1}, except that some Turkish characters replace +% less commonly used Icelandic letters.\\ +% \texttt{next}&Next encoding.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[environment] An environment is a delimited domain in a document, where special rules apply. Such a +% domain is delimited by \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| and may take +% arguments, like this: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\ +% \verb|\end{minipage}| +% \end{quote} +% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} is an extented version of \TeX, with much more +% registers and many new primitives; it supports also left-to-right and right-to-left writing. +% \item[ethiop]\ipack{ethiop} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{ethiop} giving the \lopt{ethiopian} language support for the \pack{babel} +% package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[extension] The name of a file is often made of 2~parts: a \emph{base name} and an \emph{entension}, +% separated by a dot. On some old operating systems, the base name is limited to 8~characters and the extension +% to 3~characters (the ``8+3'' scheme). See also sections~\vref{MS-DOS} and~\vref{.8+3}. +% It is strongly recommended to not have more than one dot in a file name. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] See \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} below. +% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} A package~\cite{farsi} to typeset a document in the \lopt{farsi} (iranian, persian) language. +% See~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}. But this package is today available only for \LaTeX2.09. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} and~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% \item[features] A feature (for the \upack{minitoc} package) is a set of actions executed at each occurrence of +% a mini-table of a given type. Five features are associated to each mini-table type: a ``\feat{before}'' feature +% (executed before the whole mini-table), an ``\feat{after}'' feature (executed after the whole mini-table), +% a ``\feat{open}'' feature, executed just before inserting the mini-table file, +% a ``\feat{close}'' feature, executed just after inserting the mini-table file, +% and a +% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature, which is executed with the mini-table to set its page style. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\env{filecontents}] +% A special \LaTeX{} environment. It allows to create a file (whose name is passed as an argument of the +% environment) by writing the contents of the environment into that file: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{file}\}}\\ +% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contents}~~\ldots}\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}} +% \end{quote} +% This environment should be used \emph{before} \com{documentclass}. It is used in \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% to prepare the \suffix{.mlo} files (see section~\vref{fo+lang}) and some files used in the compilation +% of the documentation. +% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] An obsolete command, temporarily used as a workaround for the Chapter~0 problem; +% see~\textbf{Chapter~0} and \textbf{absolute numbering} above, and section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above. +% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above. +% \item[\pack{float}] This package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} improves the interface for defining floating +% objects such as figures and tables in \LaTeX{}. It adds the notion of a `float style' that governs appearance +% of floats. New kinds of floats may be defined using a \com{newfloat} command analogous to \com{newtheorem}. +% This package also incorporates the functionality of \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}'s package \pack{here}, +% giving floating environments a \texttt{[H]} option which means `PUT IT HERE' (as opposed to the +% standard \texttt{[h]} option which means `You may put it here if you like'). +% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}] +% A macro from the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. It sets up a ``barrier'' against the drift of +% floats (like figures or tables). +% \item[\pack{floatrow}] This package~\cite{floatrow} (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} is an extension of the +% \pack{float} package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), reusing its code, with extensions from +% the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} (by \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}). +% \item[\pack{flowfram}] This\imess{W0097} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} is designed to enable you +% to create text \emph{frames} +% in a document such that the contents of the \env{document} environment flow from one frame to the next in the +% order that they were defined. This is useful for creating posters or magazines or any other form of document that +% does not conform to the standard one or two column layout. As this package defines its own system of +% minitocs, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script +% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{fncychap}] The \pack{fncychap}\imess{W0086} package~\cite{fncychap} provides a set of commands for changing +% the format used for some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: +% \class{book} and \class{report}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.fncychap} and +% section~\vref{faq.38}). +% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet newsgroup about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in french. +% \item[\upack{franc.sty}]\ipack{franc} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\upack{frbib.sty}]\ipack{frbib} A small package file used to prepare the bibliography of the french documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style file used to prepare the bibliography of the french +% documentation. +% It has been updated from the standard \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} for french by \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, then I added +% some adaptations for french (like last names in small caps for authors and editors, years in old style digits), +% then modified with the \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} tool to add an \texttt{URL} field. +% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{geometry}] The \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry} provides a flexible and complete user interface to page +% dimensions. You can specify them by using intuitive parameters to get your desired page layout. For instance, +% if you want to set margins (the left, right, top and bottom margins) to 2cm from each edge of +% the paper, what you need is just: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}| +% \end{quote} +% This powerful (and recommended) package is used in some example documents and in this documentation. +% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} A \LaTeX\ package to compose text in \ilopt{guarani}Guaraní, +% the main language spoken in Paraguay. +% The file \xfile{guarani.ldf}, included in this package, defines the titles. See~\cite{guarani} and +% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] The \pack{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} package~\cite{hangcaption} defines a variant of the +% \com{caption} command to produce captions with hanging indentation. This package is likely +% obsolete (1992, \LaTeX2.09). +% \item[Hindi] For the Hindi language, see the \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package~\cite{devanagari} above. The +% \upack{minitoc} package accepts the \lopt{devanagari} and \lopt{hindi} language options, which are +% synonyms. A \lopt{hindi-modern} language option is also available. +% See also~\cite{hindi99} about the Hindi language. +% \item[hint] An indication, a clue to detect a problem. It is also a message written (into the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file) by the \optd{hints} option (see below). +% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It verifies the loading order of some +% packages, the invocation order of some \upack{minitoc} commands, the consistency between main \upack{minitoc} +% commands, etc., and gaves warnings and other useful hints (mainly in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file). This is +% a default option (use the \opt{nohints} option to skip these checks). +% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} A system to write documents in the Korean language, using \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (see below). +% Written by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}. It uses special Hangûl or Hanja fonts and the UTF-8 input +% encoding. +% \item[hyperlink] In a document, a reference to another object which is dynamicaly found (via a click with the +% mouse). This requires a special type of document (PDF, PostScript with hypertext features) and a suitable +% viewer (PDF viewer, recent PS viewer). This is useful to navigate in a document or in many documents, +% which can be remote documents. +% \lneed{4} +% \item[\upack{hyperref}] The\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}} +% \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} is used to emend cross-referencing commands in +% \LaTeX\ to produce some sort of \com{special} commands; there are +% backends for the \com{special} set defined for \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} \texttt{dvi} processors, +% for embedded pdfmark commands for processing by \tool{Acrobat Distiller} +% (\tool{dvips} and \tool{dvipsone}), for \tool{dviwindo}, +% for \textbf{pdf\TeX}, for \textbf{\TeX4ht}, and for \tool{VTEX}'s pdf and HTML +% backends. +% +% This package derives from, and builds on, the work of the \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} +% project, described in \cite{hypertex}. It extends +% the functionality of all the \LaTeX\ cross-referencing commands +% (including the table of contents, bibliographies, etc.) to produce +% \com{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links; +% it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc} +% hypertext links (hyperlinks), including those to external documents and URLs. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] The \pack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{ifmtarg} provides an if-then-else command +% for testing if a macro argument is empty (``empty'' meaning zero or more spaces only). +% \item[\pack{ifthen}] The \pack{ifthen} package~\cite{ifthen} implements an \com{ifthenelse} command for \LaTeXe. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} +% An example of shell script, which prepares the \upack{minitoc} package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}. +% See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uopt{insection}] The \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} +% with adequate options to avoid the floats (like figures and tables) to drift outside of their sections. +% This package option is recommended if you use sectlofs or sectlots in your document. See +% section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \item[insertion] The insertion commands of the \upack{minitoc} package insert a mini-table in the document. +% A~corresponding \emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before. The insertion commands +% are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot},\\ +% \com{mtcprepare} +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] A text file describing the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. See +% chapter~\vref{c+installation}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{jobname}] A \TeX\ primitive containing the name of the document in preparation, i.e.,~the name of +% the file read first by \TeX{} (or \LaTeX), without its extension. Very useful to build the names of other +% files. +% \item[\uclass{jura}] The \class{jura}\imess{W0029} class~\cite{jura}, by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the +% \upack{minitoc} package. It is used for german judicial documents. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] A project~\cite{kannadatex} to use \LaTeX{} for typesetting in the +% Kannada language. See section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}. +% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. This option tries to set a loose line spacing in the mini-tables. +% Analog to the \optd{loose} +% package option for standard classes. +% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% This option tries to set a tight line spacing in the mini-tables. Analog to the \opt{tight} +% package option for standard classes. +% \lneed{3} +% \item[\KOMAScript] +% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} is a very complex bundle. You may see this, because it +% is not only one class or one package but a bundle of many classes and +% packages. The classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, +% \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2}, and \class{scrreprt}) +% are counterparts to the standard classes but never they come with +% only the same commands, environments, options and optional possibilities +% like the standard classes nor they result in the same look-a-like. +% +% \lneed{5} +% The \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl} classes are compatible with the +% \upack{minitoc} package, with some precautions (see section~\vref{special.entries}). +% The \class{scrlettr} and \class{scrlttr2} have no sectionning commands, so +% the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless with them. +% +% \lneed{5} +% \KOMAScript{} comes with a lot of classes, packages, commands, +% environments and possibilities. Some of these you may find also at the +% standard classes, many of them you wouldn't. Some are even supplements +% to the \LaTeX{} kernel. +% +% The main classes of the {\KOMAScript} bundle are designed as +% counterparts to the standard {\LaTeX} classes. This means that the +% {\KOMAScript} bundle contains replacements for the three standard +% classes \class{book}, \class{report}, and \class{article}. +% There is also a replacement for the standard class \class{letter}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[Lambda] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of +% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) is called ``\emph{Lambda}'' ($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% \item[Lamed] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of +% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) is called ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} is a typesetting system that is very +% suitable for producing scientific and mathematical +% documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable for +% producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters +% to complete books. \LaTeX{} uses \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} as its +% formatting engine (from~\cite{NSSL2E}). +% +% In fact, \LaTeX{} is a macro package that enables authors to typeset and print +% their work at the highest typographical quality, using a predefined, +% professional layout. \LaTeX{} was originally written by +% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. It uses the +% \TeX{} formatter as its typesetting engine. +% These days \LaTeX{} is maintained by \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} +% and his team. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% In 1994 the \LaTeX{} package was (deeply) updated by the +% \LaTeX3 team, led \mbox{by~\name{Frank}{Mittelbach}}, +% to include some long-requested improvements, and to re\-unify all the +% patched versions which had cropped up since the release of +% \LaTeX2.09 some years earlier. To distinguish the new version from +% the old, it is called \LaTeXe. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \LaTeX{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech'' or ``Lah-tech.'' If you refer to +% \LaTeX{} in an \texttt{ASCII} environment, you type \texttt{LaTeX}. +% \LaTeXe{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech two~e'' and typed \texttt{LaTeX2e}. +% \item[\LaTeX2.09] An obsolete version of the \LaTeX\ program, before 1994; it is no more supported. +% Do not use it\footnote{Except in the case of a very old document; if possible, try to convert +% it.}. Use the current version of \LaTeXe, which is supported and much more efficient. +% \item[\LaTeXe] The current version of the \LaTeX\ program, after 1994; it is supported. +% \item[\LaTeX3] The future version of \LaTeX, whose development is still in progress. +% \item[leaders] A repetitive sequence of dots (or of one another small character), regulary spaced, used to link +% two objects on the same line (leading from a title to a page number in a table of contents or the like). +% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} A\Virage{} standard document class~\cite{letter} to prepare letters for postal +% mail (mail on paper). As such documents have no sectionning commands nor structure, the \upack{minitoc} package +% is pointless (hence \emph{incompatible}) with them. +% \item[\upack{lipsum}] The \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} allows to easily insert sentences +% in a test file with a minimum of typing. The sentences are in latin but are modified and made nearly +% senseless. I have used this package in some of the examples of documents. +% See also~\url{http://lipsum.com} for the origin of this text (pieces of +% \emph{De Finibus Bonorum et Malorum} by Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero}). +% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary +% files (these files contains the mini-tables and may be removed after the \LaTeX\ run) in the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. Default. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[LOF, LoF] An acronym for ``list of figures''. +% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of figures. +% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a loose line spacing in the +% mini-tables. It is the default. The opposite option is \opt{tight}. +% \item[LOT, LoT] An acronym for ``list of tables''. +% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of tables. +% \item[LPPL] The \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, available at +% \begin{quote} +% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} +% \end{quote} +% Its current version is 1.3 (2003-12-01). The \upack{minitoc} package is distributed under this license. +% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltxdoc}, for preparing the documentation of a package or of a class. +% For the \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. +% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltnews}, for preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release. For the +% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{and} \com{makeatother}] Many\footnote{Informations +% from~\cite[page~843]{TLC2}.} internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of +% packages and classes contain the \texttt{@}~character in their names. This effectively prevents such names +% from being used in documents for user-defined commands. However, it also means that they cannot appear in a +% document, even in the preamble, without taking special precautions. As it is sometimes necessary to have +% such bits of ``internal code'' in the preamble, the commands \com{makeatletter} +% and \com{makeatother} make it easy to do: the difficult bit is to remember to add them, failure to do +% so can result in some strange errors. And these two commands \Virage\emph{should never be used in a package or class file}. +% \item[makefile] A special text file containing instructions describing the creation and the installation of a +% piece of software, using the ``\textbf{make}'' utility; \textbf{make} is a nice tool coming from the Unix +% operating system, but variants exists. +% \item[\upack{mcaption}] The \pack{mcaption}\imess{W0036} package~\cite{mcaption} provides a \env{margincap} +% environment for putting captions in the outer document margin with either a top or bottom alignment. +% \item[\textbf{MCE}] A minimal [complete] example is the smallest possible complete document that illustrates a problem. +% A minimal example file should not include any packages or code that do not contribute to the problem, but must +% include a document class and the \env{document} environment (from~\cite{talbot-mini}). See also~\cite{preusse}, +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} and +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices. +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{memoir}, \xfile{memoir.cls}]\iclass{memoir} A very% +% \SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} +% general and powerful document class +% (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, described in~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); this class +% is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package (with some precautions) if you use a recent version. See +% section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[mini-bibliography] See \textbf{minibbl} below. +% \item[mini-list] Synonym for ``mini-table'' below. +% \item[mini-lof] See ``minilof'' below. +% \item[mini-lot] See ``minilot'' below. +% \item[mini-table] This term refers to a local table of contents (like a table of contents, a list of figures or a +% list of tables) for a sectionning unit (part, chapter or section), by opposition to a global table (the +% table of contents, the list of figures or the list of tables for the whole document). The main aim of the +% \upack{minitoc} package is the creation of such mini-tables. But the term ``minitoc'' is also used to refer +% to such mini-table, as a generic term, because the first versions of the package allowed only tables of +% contents for chapters. +% \item[mini-toc] See ``minitoc'' below. +% \item[minibbl] Short for ``mini-bibliography'', i.e.,~to have a bibliography per part, chapter or section, or +% even by theme or subject. This is out of the domain of the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{faq.9}. +% \item[minilof] A list of figures for a chapter. +% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilofs. +% \item[minilot] A list of tables for a chapter. +% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilots. +% \item[minitoc] A table of contents for a chapter. Also used as a generic term for any mini-table (see +% ``mini-table'' above). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] The source file for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. In +% fact, it just sets \com{jobname} then loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, which itself loads +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}\isuffix{.lan} to select the language used in \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contains +% both english and french documentation fragments, selected by \com{ifcase} constructs with the +% \com{LANG} variable, set to~0 by \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} or to~1 by \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (i.e.,~by +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the french documentation. It +% is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the french language in the documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] The french documentation in PDF format. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] The french documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the +% \scrp{cmk} script). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] A plain text file containing a list of problems and questions about the \upack{minitoc} +% package. See chapter~\vref{FAQ}. +% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the minitocs. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] The file containing the documentation and the commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-hyper.sty}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} A special version~\cite{minitoc-hyper} of the \upack{minitoc} package which has been +% prepared by \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, +% \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} to work with the powerful \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}; +% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} has integrated their work so since version \#31, \upack{minitoc} is compatible with +% \pack{hyperref}. +% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and +% should no more be used. +% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.} +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] The installation file for the \upack{minitoc} package. Compiling it with \LaTeX\ +% produces most of the files of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the english documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] A text file containing the list of all the files being included in the +% \upack{minitoc} package. Files not listed in \xfile{minitoc.l} are files used only to install the package or +% to produce its documentation. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the english language in the documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] The english documentation in PDF format. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} This file contains a \LaTeX{} preamble for the documentation. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] The english documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the +% \scrp{cmk} scripts). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] This file contains the main part of the \upack{minitoc} package, with comments removed. +% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] A plain text file containing a commented list of the minitoc commands and environments. See +% chapter~\vref{c+memento}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] A ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy containing all files in the +% \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\upack{minutes}] The \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}) is used to prepare +% conference proceedings. The \upack{minitoc} package allows to add ``coffee breaks'' in the table of contents +% via commands like \com{addcoffeeline} and \com{coffeeline} (and internal commands) whose names contain +% the string ``\texttt{coffee}'', hence the footnote about ``cappuccino''{\myCoffeecup} in the +% installation chapter!% +% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{The little cups \myCoffeecup{} come from the \pack{marvosym} package~\cite{marvosym}.}}{} +% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} is a large package to prepare documents in various dialects +% of the Mongol language (Bicig and Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe and Manju, Buryat, Xalx and Khalkha) and in a +% dialect of Russian used in Mongolia (Russianc). Bicig is another name for Uighur. +% You can find many things about Mongolia and Mongolian at the web site~\cite{mongol-web}. +% See also: +% {\small\begin{quote} +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\ +% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\ +% \url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}\\ +% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\ +% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm} +% \end{quote}} +% +% The following description is extracted from~\cite{montex}. +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} is a package which offers support for writing documents in +% Mongolian, Manju, Buryat and Russian. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Mongolian +% can be represented in traditional Uighur script (also known as Classical or Traditional +% Script) and Cyrillic. Manju resembles the Traditional Mongolian script +% (from which it is derived) but uses a rich choice of diacritics in +% order to eliminate numerous ambiguities of the Mongolian script +% ancestor. Modern Buryat, like Mongolian in its present form, is written +% with a Cyrillic alphabet, +% but both Mongolian (35 letters) and Buryat +% (36 letters) use more letters than Russian (33 letters). +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{description} +% \item[Mongolian] +% The word \emph{Mongolian} is actually an umbrella term for +% several languages rather than the precise name of a single language. +% Things become more complicated when names of ethnic groups, languages +% and writing systems are mixed. +% \begin{description} +% \item [Xalx] or Khalkha is the name of the Mongolian +% nationality residing in Mongolia proper. Their +% dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with +% Cyrillic letters. Throughout this text, \emph{Modern +% Mongolian} is used as a synonym. +% \item [Buryat] +% is the name of the Mongolian nationality +% residing in Buryatia, north of Mongolia, east of +% Lake Baikal, being a part of the Russian Federation. +% The Buryat call themselves \emph{Buryaad} while Xalx +% Mongolians call them \emph{Buriad}. The English name +% follows the Russian orthography. +% Linguistically, Xalx and Buryat Mongol are fairly +% close languages; Buryat has a slightly different +% sound system in which the phoneme /s/ partially +% shifted to /h/; the modern Buryat Cyrillic alphabet +% (virtually identical with the Cyrillic alphabet used +% for writing Modern Mongolian) has one additional +% letter (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) for marking the difference to /s/. +% %\enlargethispage*{1ex} +% \item [Bicig] (literally \emph{script} in Mongolian) denotes +% text written in the traditional Mongolian script +% which is also referred to as Uighur. Throughout this +% document, the term \emph{Bicig} will be used on an +% equal footing with \emph{Classical} and +% \emph{Traditional} Mongolian. The latter term is +% used in the names of the Unicode/ISO10646 character +% plane U1800 which contains Mongolian, Manju, Sibe +% and sets of special characters called Ali Gali or +% Galig. In order to identify Mongolian script related +% commands distinct for Mongolian and Manju, the +% Mongolian commands have the name root \lopt{bicig} +% whereas the Manju commands have the name root +% \lopt{bithe}. +% \end{description} +% +% Xalx Mongolian, or Modern Colloquial Mongolian, is about as +% different from the form written in Classical script as modern +% English in phonetical spelling (assume it be written in Shavian +% letters) from the highly historical orthography of Standard English. +% Beyond these differences, Mongolian written in Classical Script +% usually preserves a substantial amount of historical grammatical +% features which make it look a bit like Elizabethan English. +% +% \item[Manju] +% Manju is a Tungusic language closely related to Mongolian. Though +% Manju is virtually not spoken anymore, it has been the official +% language during 300 years of Manju government in Qing Dynasty China. +% Vast amounts of official documents survive, as well as some of the +% finest multilingual dictionaries ever compiled, e.\,g. the +% Pentaglot, or Mirror in Five Languages, a dictionary with 18671 +% entries in five languages (Manju, Tibetan, Mongolian, Uighur and +% Chinese). See~\cite{pentaglot} for more details. Manju writing is derived from Uighur Mongolian by adding +% diacritics in the form of dots and circles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, script with dots and +% circles). +% \end{description} +% \item[MS-DOS] (Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System) An old operating system +% for personnal computers (PCs). +% From the \upack{minitoc} point of view, +% its main drawback is the use of filenames with short extensions (the ``8+3'' scheme), which limits to~99 the number +% of mini-tables for each kind. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns +% page layout. See section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package and its \lopt{french2} +% language option. See section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} A small bibliographic data base for the \exam{mtc-add.tex} +% and \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example documents. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package to +% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddchapter} and the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddsection} and the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}. +% It also shows how it is challenging to manage the mini-lists of floats at the section level. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a +% \class{memoir} class document with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment +% to hide the entries of the appendices in the main TOC and to create a part-level TOC for the appendices. See +% section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} An example of document (\class{article} class) using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} An example of document (\class{book} or \class{report} class) +% using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns +% page layout and using the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. See section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a +% starred first chapter. See section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with starred parts +% and chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} An example file showing the problem of fonts in minitocs when +% using the \class{scrbook} class. See section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Another example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and +% \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. See section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} +% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} specialized environments. See section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} An example file showing the use of the following pairs of commands: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} and \com{endmtchideinmainlof}, +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} and \com{endmtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% See section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for +% some tables in the main list of tables of an \class{article} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for +% some tables in the main list of tables of a \class{report} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \class{scrbook} document class. See section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{book} with +% customized table of contents and minitocs. See section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package +% with the \class{memoir} class. See section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package +% with the \class{memoir} class, if you want to change some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} A document using a minitoc set in a \env{wrapfigure} environment with the +% \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} A document swowing an interaction betwen the \upack{minitoc} +% package and the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}. See section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to +% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to +% prepare a minitoc on three columns and \com{mtcsetoffset} to shift the minitoc to align it on the left. +% See section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}. See section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} +% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. See section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when the table of +% contents is prededed by some starred chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. See section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of +% \class{article} class. It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. See section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} and their interaction about the page numbers in the mini-tables. +% See section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the +% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcpolymtoc} command +% and explaining \index{polymorphic entry}``polymorphic entries''. See section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} A package used to provide variants of the standard commands +% \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine}, and \com{PackageError} +% by adding an optional argument for an unique message identifier. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} A package which is used in place of the \upack{minitoc} package to +% ignore all the commands and environments of the \upack{minitoc} package. In fact, it defines them to +% do nothing. Useful if you want a version of your document without any mini-table. +% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} A\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} small package which is automatically loaded if +% necessary when you use the \class{memoir} document class with a version \emph{incompatible} with the +% \upack{minitoc} package, but correctible. It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\texttt{mu}] A length unit normaly used in math mode (\texttt{mu} means ``math unit''); 18~math units make +% \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' in the current font. So the size of \texttt{1mu} +% is font dependent. The separation between dots in the dotted lines in the mini-tables is expressed in math units. +% \item[\upack{multibib}] The \pack{multibib} package~\cite{multibib} allows to create references to multiple +% bibliographies within one document. It thus provides a complementary functionality to packages +% like \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} or \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, which allow +% to create one bibliography for multiple, but different parts of the document. +% \item[\upack{multicol}] The \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol} defines the \env{multicols} environment +% (with a~``\textbf{s}'') to typeset text on several columns. Used in some example documents. +% \item[\upack{multitoc}] This package~\cite{multitoc} allows setting only the table of contents, list of +% figures and/or list of tables in two or more columns (using the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, of course). +% The number of columns can be configured via commands; the +% multicolumn toc(s) can be selected via package options. +% The \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example document uses this package; see section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{natbib}] It is a \LaTeXe{} (but with some support for \LaTeX2.09) package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to act +% as generalized interface for standard and non-standard bibliographic style files (\BibTeX). +% \item[\upack{needspace}] The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} provides commands to reserve space +% at the bottom of a page. If there is not enough space on the current page (column) a new page (column) is started. +% \item[NFSS] The \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}. The \LaTeXe{} font selection system~\cite{fontsel} +% was first released as the ``New Font Selection Scheme'' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993. +% \LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard. +% +% \lneed{7} +% Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}: +% \begin{description} +% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the +% font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are +% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``\TeX{} text'' encoding (OT1), and the ``\TeX{} text extended'' +% encoding (T1) developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} +% Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name ``Cork encoding''). +% See~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under +% a common name by the font foundry. For instance, ``Adobe Times'', ``ITC +% Garamond'', and \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``Computer Modern Roman'' are all font families. +% \item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For instance, ``medium +% weight'', ``narrow'' and ``bold extended'' are all series. +% \item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For +% instance, ``italic'', ``oblique'' and ``upright'' (sometimes called +% ``roman'') are all font shapes. +% \item[size] The design size of the font, for instance ``10pt''. +% \end{description} +% +% \lneed{2} +% The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by +% \LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are given in table~\vref{t+nfss+1}. +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% \caption{Most common font encodings}\label{t+nfss+1} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{T1} &\LaTeX{} extended text (``Cork encoding'')\\ +% \texttt{TS1} &\LaTeX{} symbols (Latin)\\ +% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C}&\LaTeX{} text (Cyrillic)\\ +% \texttt{T3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet\\ +% \texttt{TS3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet (extra symbols)\\ +% \texttt{T4} &\LaTeX{} text (African languages)\\ +% \texttt{T5} &\LaTeX{} text (Vietnamese)\\ +% \texttt{T7} &\LaTeX{} text (reserved for Greek)\\ +% \texttt{OT1} &\TeX{} text (as defined by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OT2} &\TeX{} text for Cyrillic languages (obsolete)\\ +% \texttt{OT3} &International phonetic alphabet (obsolete)\\ +% \texttt{OT4} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Polish language\\ +% \texttt{OT6} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Armenian language\\ +% \texttt{OML} &\TeX{} math italic (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMS} &\TeX{} math symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMX} &\TeX{} math large symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{X2} &\LaTeX{} extended text (Cyrillic)\\ +% \texttt{U} &Unknown \\ +% \texttt{L}\meta{xx}&A local encoding\\ +% \texttt{L7x} &Encoding used for the Lithuanian language\\ +% \texttt{LTH} &Encoding used for the Thai language\\ +% \texttt{LV1} &Encoding used with some \texttt{VTeX} fonts\\ +% \texttt{LY1} &Alternative to \texttt{T1} encoding, for Y\&Y software\\ +% \texttt{PD1} &Implements the PDFDocEncoding for use with \LaTeXe's NFSS.\\ +% \texttt{PU} &Implements the Unicode encoding for use with \LaTeX's NFSS.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% ^^A \end{table} +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} +% ^^A \begin{table}[!tp] +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font families}\label{t+nfss+2} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Family}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{cmr} &Computer Modern Roman \\ +% \texttt{cmss}&Computer Modern Sans \\ +% \texttt{cmtt}&Computer Modern Typewriter \\ +% \texttt{cmm} &Computer Modern Math Italic \\ +% \texttt{cmsy}&Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ +% \texttt{cmex}&Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ +% \texttt{ptm} &Adobe Times \\ +% \texttt{phv} &Adobe Helvetica \\ +% \texttt{pcr} &Adobe Courier\\ +% \texttt{lazy}&Additional \LaTeX{} symbols\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font series}\label{t+nfss+3} +% \centering +% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Series}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ul}&Ultra light\\ +% \texttt{el}&Extra light\\ +% \texttt{l}&Light\\ +% \texttt{sl}&Semi light\\ +% \texttt{m} &Medium \\ +% \texttt{sb} &Semi bold \\ +% \texttt{b} &Bold \\ +% \texttt{eb} &Extra bold \\ +% \texttt{bx}&Bold extended \\ +% \texttt{ub}&Ultra bold \\ +% \texttt{c} &Condensed\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}\hfill\null +% \end{minipage} +% \end{tabularx} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font shapes}\label{t+nfss+4} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Shape}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{n} &Normal (that is ``upright'' or ``roman'') \\ +% \texttt{it}&Italic \\ +% \texttt{sl}&Slanted (or ``oblique'') \\ +% \texttt{sc}&Caps and small caps\\ +% \texttt{u}&Unslanted (upright italic)\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} +% \capstart +% \caption{Most common font widths}\label{t+nfss+4a} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Width}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensed\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensed\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensed\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensed\\ +% \texttt{m}&50.0&Medium\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi extended\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Extended\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra extended\\ +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra extended\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{minipage} +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% The ``local'' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only +% locally available, for instance a font containing an organisation's +% logo in various sizes. +% +% \lneed{4} +% There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common +% ones are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+2}. +% The most common values for the font series are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+3}. +% The most common values for the font shape are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4}. +% The most common values for the font width are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% The font size is specified as a dimension, for instance \texttt{10pt} or +% \texttt{1.5in} or \texttt{3mm}; if no unit is specified, \texttt{pt} is assumed. These five +% parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, see table~\vref{t+nfss+5}, for instance. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{The five font parameters of some fonts}\label{t+nfss+5} +% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{\LaTeX{} specification}}& +% \textbf{Font}&\textbf{\TeX{} name}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{OT1}&\texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} & +% Computer Modern Roman 10 point & +% \texttt{cmr10}\\ +% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} & +% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & +% \texttt{cmssi12} \\ +% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} & +% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & +% \texttt{cmmi10} \\ +% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} & +% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & +% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Author commands for fonts}\label{t+nfss+6} +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Author command} & +% \textbf{Attribute} & +% \textbf{Value in} \uclass{article} \textbf{class} \\ +% \midrule +% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{rmfamily} & family & \texttt{cmr} \\ +% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{sffamily} & family & \texttt{cmss} \\ +% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{ttfamily} & family & \texttt{cmtt} \\ +% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{mdseries} & series & \texttt{m} \\ +% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{bfseries} & series & \texttt{bx} \\ +% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{upshape} & shape & \texttt{n} \\ +% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{itshape} & shape & \texttt{it} \\ +% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{slshape} & shape & \texttt{sl} \\ +% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{scshape} & shape & \texttt{sc} \\ +% \com{tiny} & size & \texttt{5pt} \\ +% \com{scriptsize} & size & \texttt{7pt} \\ +% \com{footnotesize} & size & \texttt{8pt} \\ +% \com{small} & size & \texttt{9pt} \\ +% \com{normalsize} & size & \texttt{10pt} \\ +% \com{large} & size & \texttt{12pt} \\ +% \com{Large} & size & \texttt{14.4pt} \\ +% \com{LARGE} & size & \texttt{17.28pt} \\ +% \com{huge} & size & \texttt{20.74pt} \\ +% \com{Huge} & size & \texttt{24.88pt}\\ +% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{normal text}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull +% box warning, for instance: +% \begin{verse} +% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\ +% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,} +% \end{verse} +% \lneed{6} +% The table~\vref{t+nfss+6} lists the author commands for fonts which set these five attributes\footnote{The +% values used by these commands are determined by the document class.}. +% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{checkfiles} +% package option (see above). +% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{hints} +% package option (see above). +% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It is the opposite of the +% \optd{listfiles} above. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} This option of the \upack{minitoc} package loads +% the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in sectionning commands or captions. See +% section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[Omega] The Omega typesetting system\,\footnote{Most but not all of this note is taken in the Omega documentation +% \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}. +% See~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} for more information.} +% ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (by \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} and \xname{John}{Plaice}) +% is an extension of \TeX{} that is aimed primarily at improving \TeX's multilingual abilities. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% When the \TeX{} program was originally developed in the mid seventies [\emph{circa} 1975] by +% Professor \xname{Donald~E.}{Knuth} +% it was mainly aimed at typesetting mathematical texts in the english language. Since then \TeX{} has +% made inroads in broader and broader areas of scientific, literary and other scholarly activities in many +% countries all over the world. In 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} froze \TeX, mainly in the interest of stability. +% However, he allows the \TeX{} code to be used as the basis for further developments, so long as the resulting system is +% distributed under a different name. +% +% In Omega all characters and pointers into data-structures are 31-bit +% wide, instead of 8-bit, thereby eliminating many of the trivial +% limitations of \TeX. Omega also allows multiple input and output +% character sets, and uses programmable filters to translate from one +% encoding to another, to perform contextual analysis, etc. Internally, +% Omega uses the universal Unicode/ISO-10646 character set. Omega also +% includes support for multiple writing directions. +% +% These improvements not only make it a lot easier for \TeX{} users to cope +% with multiple or complex languages, like Arabic, Indic, Khmer, Chinese, +% Japanese or Korean, in one document, but also form the basis for future +% developments in other areas, such as native color support and hypertext +% features. +% +% The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of Omega is called +% ``\emph{Lambda}''~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% Extending Omega with the \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} extensions is a separate +% project, known as ``\pack{Aleph}'' ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} and led by \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}. +% The \LaTeX\ for \pack{Aleph} is known as +% ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% There is an experimental system, named \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, which will regroup +% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} and other developments. +% A promising development is \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} by~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, with +% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}. +% \begin{table}[tp!] +% ^^A \changeskips +% \caption{Some systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex} +% \centering +% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc} +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\ +% &&+&&&&+\\ +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\ +% &&&&&&\\ +% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7} +% &&&&&&\\ +% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}} +% \end{array} \] +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{open}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately before +% (\emph{open}) the insertion of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[package] Packages\footnote{This info is taken from~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} and adapted.} are a very important +% feature of \LaTeX. These are extensions to the basic \LaTeX{} commands that are written to files with names +% that end with \suffix{.sty} and are loaded with the command \com{usepackage} in the preamble. Packages can be +% classified by they origin. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{Core} packages (in fact, \textbf{base} and \textbf{required} packages) are an integral part of +% the \LaTeX{} basic installation and are therefore fully standard. +% \item \textbf{Tools} packages are a set written by members of the \LaTeX3 Team and should always be in the +% installation. +% \item \textbf{Graphics} packages are a standardized set for including pictures generated by other programs +% and for handling colors; they are at the same level as the tools packages. +% \item \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX} packages, published by the American Mathematical +% Society\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}, should be in any +% installation\footnote{They are indispensable if you use a lot of mathematics.}. +% \item \textbf{Contributed} packages have been submitted by actual users; certain of these have established +% themselves as ``essential'' to standard \LaTeX{} usage, but all are useful. +% \end{itemize} +% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed at each occurrence of +% a given type of mini-table, to force the page style to use for the current page. +% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[partlof] A list of figures for a part. +% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlofs. +% \item[partlot] A list of tables for a part. +% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlots. +% \item[parttoc] A table of contents for a part. +% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the parttocs. +% \item[PDF] Portable Document Format~\cite{pdfspec}. A descendant of the PostScript language from Adobe, +% optimized for navigation on the Internet. It adds hypertext, font substitution, and compression features. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{placeins}] The \pack{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}} +% package~\cite{placeins} keeps floats ``in their place'', +% preventing them from floating past a \com{FloatBarrier} command into another section. To use it, declare +% \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} in the preamble and +% insert \com{FloatBarrier} commands at places that floats +% should not move past, perhaps at every \com{section}. The \opt{insection} package option of the +% \upack{minitoc} package does that with adequate options, and loads also the \pack{flafter} package +% (described in~\cite{ltoutput} and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); +% see section~\vref{s+placing}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] A plain text file containing the documentation of +% the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. +% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} A\virage{} version of \LaTeX\ customized +% for the polish (\lopt{polski}) language. It has been replaced by the \pack{polski} package. See~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. +% But the \emph{same} name was referring also to a version of \LaTeX\ customized for the japanese language, +% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}. +% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk} +% An example of shell script to prepare the \upack{minitoc} package +% and its documentation; you should adapt it to your needs. +% See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[polymorphic entry] An entry\index{polymorphic entry} in the TOC, LOF or LOT which changes its aspect +% depending on the place where it appears (main TOC, minitable, etc.); see section~\vref{ss+polym}. +% \item[PostScript] A page description language, by Adobe. It describes the appearance of a page, including +% elements such as text, graphics, and scanned images, to a printer or visualization device. Introduced by +% Adobe in 1985, it has become the language of choice in high quality printing. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[preamble] In the main file of a \LaTeX{} source document, the part of it between the commands +% \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} and \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. In the preamble, +% you can insert global declarations and the loading of packages via \com{usepackage} commands. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[preparation] The preparation commands of the \upack{minitoc} package prepare the auxiliary files for the +% mini-tables of a given type. A~\emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before any +% insertion command for the mini-table type. The preparation commands are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(part level)\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(chapter level)\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(section level)\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}&(all levels) +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class, for preparing conference proceedings. For the +% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. +% \item[pseudo-chapter] +% Or starred chapter. A chapter introduced by a \com{chapter*} command. By default, it has no entry in +% the table of contents. \com{chapter*} needs some precautions with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% See section~\vref{s+starred.chap}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{quotchap}] The \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} provides a set of commands for adding quotations to +% some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: +% \class{book}, and \class{report}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.quotchap} and +% section~\vref{faq.39}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[README] is a plain text file (english) describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package, +% plus some useful infos. +% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}, +% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and +% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many +% auxiliary files). +% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} An example of shell script, which sorts the files +% of the \upack{minitoc} package into classes (one directory +% for each class). It should be run after the scripts +% \scrp{imk} (mandatory) and \scrp{emk} and/or +% \scrp{fmk}, in that sequence. See item~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{romannum}] The \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} changes the numbers (for sectionning commands) +% generated by \LaTeX{} from arabic digits to roman numerals. This package uses +% the \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.romannum} and +% section~\vref{faq.40}). +% \item[\pack{rotating}] The \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} package performs all the different sorts of +% rotation one might like, including complete figures. +% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] The pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} package provides commands to define new floats +% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, and userdefined ones); +% the \pack{rotating} package~\cite{rotating} provides new environments (\env{sidewaysfigure} +% and \env{sidewaystable}) which are rotated by $90^\circ$ or $270^\circ$. +% But what about new rotated floats, e.g.\ a rotated ruled one? +% This package makes this possible; it builds a bridge between both packages +% and extend the commands from the \pack{float} package to define rotated +% versions of the new floats, too. +% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} is a wrapper for \LaTeX\ and companion programs. +% Its purpose is, given a \LaTeX\ source to process, +% to compile it enough times to resolve all references, possibly running satellite programs such as \textbf{\BibTeX}, +% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., to produce appropriate data files. It has facilities to make +% some post-processing cleanup actions, like deleting the auxiliary files created by \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} See {\KOMAScript} above. +% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} See {\KOMAScript} above. +% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} See {\KOMAScript} above. +% \item[sectionning commands] These are the \LaTeX\ commands which specify the logical structure of your document. +% The main sectionning commands are \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section}, +% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph}, or \com{subparagraph}. +% Some standard document classes have not the \com{chapter} command (like the \class{article} and +% \class{proc} classes), some have no sectionning commands (like the \class{letter} class). In the later +% case, the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. If some of the \com{part}, \com{chapter}, +% or \com{section} commands are not defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands for that level are +% unavailable. If \com{chapter} is defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are not +% defined in the current and older versions of the \upack{minitoc} package, but if \com{chapter} is +% not defined and \com{section} is defined, then the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are +% defined. See section~\vref{note+sectionning}. +% In non-standard document classes, sectionning commands with non-standard names cannot be recognized by the +% \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[sectlof] A list of figures for a section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlofs. +% \item[sectlot] A list of tables for a section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlots. +% \item[\upack{sectsty}] The \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} provides a set of commands for changing +% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article}, +% \class{book}, and \class{report}. This package also works with the {\KOMAScript} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} +% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, and \class{scrreprt}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sectsty} and +% section~\vref{faq.28}). +% \item[secttoc] A table of contents for a section. +% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the secttocs. +% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] The \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (for \LaTeXe) borrows +% some definitions from the standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} classes +% and modifies them in order to print the part, chapter, section, subsection\ldots{} headers with +% the Sans-Serif variant of the current font. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sfheaders} and +% section~\vref{faq.41}). +% \item[shell] In the Unix, Unix-like and Linux operating systems, the \textbf{shell} is a program used as an +% interface between the operating system and the user. It can also be used as a scripting language to write +% programs or scripts to prepare routinely used sequences of tasks. The main shells are the +% Bourne shell (\textbf{sh}), the C~shell (\textbf{csh}), the Korn shell (\textbf{ksh}), +% and their many successors (like \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.). +% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} An\imess{W0020} option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It forces the use of short extensions +% (3~characters) in the names of the minitoc auxiliary files. This option is inactive by default, but is +% automatically activated if your operating system needs short extensions. See \textbf{autoconfiguration} +% above and the section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] The \pack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc} allows to create an other table of +% contents in a document, with an other title and an other depth than the main table of contents. +% \item[SJIS] The SJIS character encoding (for the japanese language), also known as MS-Kanji (Kanji for +% Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}), +% consists of two overlaid character sets: the so-called halfwidth Katakana (JIS X0201-1976, 1-byte characters +% encoded in the range \texttt{0xA1} to \texttt{0xDF}) and the (fullwidth) JIS character set (JIS X0208-1990, +% mapped to the remaining code points). This information is taken from~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} A version of \LaTeX\ customized for the swedish language. See~\cite{slatex}. +% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{splitbib} which allows for sorting a bibliography +% into categories and +% subcategories; this is interesting for lists of publications, for grouping references by subject, by year,~... +% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] The \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv} is intended to be used by the authors +% of \LaTeX{} packages that need to know about the sectional divisions provided by the document class. +% \item[strut] A vertical invisible rule used to force a minimal separation between two lines of text. +% \item[\upack{subfig}] The \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig} provides support for the +% inclusion of small, ``sub-figures'' and ``sub-tables''. It simplifies the positioning, captioning and labeling of +% them within a single \env{figure} or \env{table} environment. In addition, this package allows +% such sub-captions to be written to the List of Figures or List of Tables if desired. +% \item[\upack{subfigure}] The \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure} is an obsolete version (by the same +% author) of the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. +% \item[suffix] See ``extension'' above. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}The \TeX~Directory Structure~\cite{ftds,tds}; a directory structure highly recommended to +% store macros, fonts, and the other implementation-independent \TeX{} system files; it also suggests how to +% incorporate the rest of the \TeX{} files in a single structure; the \index{TDS}TDS has been designed to work on all +% modern systems. +% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} is a computer program created by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}. +% It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae. +% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} started writing the \TeX{} typesetting +% engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing +% equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at +% that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of +% deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own +% books and articles. \TeX{} as we use it today was released in 1982, +% with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit +% characters and multiple languages. \TeX{} is renowned for being +% extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of computers, +% and for being virtually bug free. The version number of \TeX{} is +% converging to $\pi$ and is now at $3.141592$. +% +% \TeX{} is pronounced ``Tech,'' with a ``ch'' as in the German word +% ``Ach'' or in the Scottish ``Loch.'' In an ASCII environment, \TeX{} +% becomes \texttt{TeX}. +% \item[\upack{thailatex}] The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} allows to typeset +% documents in the Thai language. You can also use the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a tight line spacing in the +% mini-tables. The opposite option is \optd{loose}. +% \item[\upack{titlesec}] The \pack{titlesec}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} package~\cite{titletoc} allows to change the sectioning titles. +% Amongst its many features it provides margin titles, different format in left and right pages, rules above +% and below the title, etc. Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \item[\upack{titletoc}] The\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} \pack{titletoc} package is useful for toc entries formatting, +% providing the possibility of changing the format in the middle of a document, grouping the entries +% in a single paragraph, pretty free-forms entries, partial tocs, etc. +% Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. +% +% The \xfile{titletoc.sty} file is not part of the \pack{titlesec} package; it's an independent package, +% but it's described in the \pack{titlesec} package documentation~\cite{titletoc}. +% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} A script file which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant +% hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} (to be ajusted to your system). +% \item[TOC, ToC] Acronym for ``table of contents''. +% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] The \pack{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} package~\cite{tocbibind} can be used to add the ToC +% and/or bibliography and/or the index etc., to the Table of Contents listing. But it needs some precautions +% when used with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the table of contents. +% \item[\upack{tocloft}] The \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} provides means of controlling the +% typographic design of the Table of Contents, List of Figures and List of Tables. +% New kinds of ``List of \ldots' can be defined. If you use the \pack{tocloft} package and the +% \upack{minitoc} package, see section~\vref{faq+tocloft} about fixing some minor compatibility issues. +% \item[\xfile{TODO}] is a plain text file (english) which lists some suggested developments of the package, +% not yet implemented. Comments and suggestions are welcome. +% \item[token] A token\footnote{This definition is taken from ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} is either +% (a)~a single character with an attached category code (see ``catcode'' above), or (b)~a control sequence. +% \virage{} You \emph{should} remember two chief things about \TeX's tokens: (1)~A~control sequence is considered to be +% a single object that is no longer composed of a sequence of symbols. Therefore long control sequence names +% are no harder for \TeX\ to deal with than short ones, after they have been replaced by tokens. Furthermore, +% spaces are not ignored after control sequences inside a token list; the ignore-space rule applies only in an +% input file, during the time that strings of characters are being tokenized. (2)~Once a category code has been +% attached to a character token, the attachment is permanent. For instance, if character `\verb|{|' were +% suddenly declared to be of category~12 instead of category~1, the characters `\verb|{|$_1$' already inside token +% lists of \TeX\ would still remain of category~1; only newly made lists would contain `\verb|{|$_{12}$' tokens. +% In other words, individual characters receive a fixed interpretation as soon as they have been read from a file, +% based on the category they have at the time of reading. Control sequences are different, since they can change +% their interpretation at any time. \TeX's digestive processes always know exactly what a character token signifies, +% because the category code appears in the token itself; but when the digestive processes encounter a control sequence +% token, they must look up the current definition of that control sequence in order to figure out what it means. +% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] The \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} (by \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} provides +% a quick method for defining new float types in \LaTeX. A single command sets up a new float in the +% same style as the \LaTeX{} kernel \env{figure} and \env{table} float types. +% \item[\pack{txfonts}] The \pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts} provides the \texttt{TX} fonts, which consist of +% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt +% \item virtual text roman fonts using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with +% some modified and additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings; +% \item \textsf{virtual text sans serif fonts using Adobe Helvetica (or URW NimbusSanL) with +% additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings}; +% \item {\smooth\texttt{monospaced typewriter fonts in the OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1\linebreak[4] encodings}}; +% \item math alphabets using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with modified metrics; +% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of Computer Modern math fonts (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX, +% and Greek letters of CMR); +% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of AmS{} fonts (MSAM and MSBM); +% \item additional math fonts of various symbols. +% \end{enumerate} +% All fonts are in the Type~1 format (in \suffix{.afm} and \suffix{.pfb} files). +% Necessary \suffix{.tfm} and \suffix{.vf} files together with \LaTeXe\ package files and font map files +% (\suffix{.map}) for \tool{dvips} are provided. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[UNIX] A modern operating system, available on many computers and in various flavors. From the +% \upack{minitoc} point of view, it has the advantage of using filenames with long extensions (the length +% limit is too high to be a problem with the number of mini-tables). +% \item[UNIX-like] Operating systems analog to Unix, with the same advantages. Linux is a good example, but others +% exist. +% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} A PERL script, by \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, +% to add a \texttt{webpage} \BibTeX{} entry type, +% and add support for general \texttt{url} and \texttt{lastchecked} fields, to (most) \BibTeX{} \suffix{.bst} files. +% Optionally adds basic support for \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{doi} fields, and \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref} +% support, too. See \cite{hypertex,hyperref.web}. +% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), also called UTF~2 or FSS-UTF, is a special representation +% of Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). It uses multibyte sequences of various lengths, but only 2-byte and 3-byte +% sequences are implemented in \pack{CJK}. ASCII characters will be used as-is --- without this property it would be +% impossible to use UTF~8 with \TeX. See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{varsects}] The \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} provides a set of commands for changing +% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article}, +% \class{book}, and \class{report}. +% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.varsects} and +% section~\vref{faq.33}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \par\reversemarginpar +% \item[Wikipedia] The \index{Wikipedia}Wikipedia\index{Wikipedia} +% is a free, multilingual, open content (neutral, verifiable, modifiable and improvable by anyone) +% encyclopedia project operated by the non-profit Wikimedia Foundation. +% Its name is a portemanteau of the words \emph{wiki} (a type of collaborative website) and \emph{encyclopedia}. +% Launched in 2001 by \name{Jimmy}{Wales} and \name{Larry}{Sanger}, it is the largest, fastest growing and most +% popular general reference work currently available on the Internet. +% \par\normalmarginpar +% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] The \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig} provides the \env{wrapfigure} and +% \env{wraptable} environments to place a figure or table at the side of the page and wrap text around~it. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\scrp{xmk}] An example of shell script, which typesets the example document files into PDF documents. +% \item[\upack{xr}] The \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr} implements a system for eXternal References. I wrote the +% first version of this package, but it had severe problems. \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} rewrote it in a much +% better and more robust way. With his permission, I used some of his code in the \upack{minitoc} package +% to implement the preparation commands (like \com{dominitoc}). If you use also the \pack{hyperref} +% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, use \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} in place of the \upack{xr} package. +% \end{wdesc} +% \end{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em} +% \minitoc +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt} +% \mtcskip +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} +% \minilot +% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} +% Ce chapitre tente d'expliquer certains termes utilisés dans cette documentation et décrit quelques fichiers et suffixes +% utiles. +% De nombreuses informations proviennent des documentations de divers paquetages cités (souvent du résumé ou +% \emph{abstract}), et +% de~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2F,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}. +% \clearpage +% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \jsection{<<~.~>>\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{<<~.~>>} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\suffix{.aux}] Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier \emph{auxiliaire} d'un document \LaTeX{}. Il transfère +% des informations d'une exécution de \LaTeX{} à~la suivante. +% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.aux} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier classe de document, +% chargé via la commande \com{documentclass}. +% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} Le suffixe du nom pour le fichier source documenté d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX. +% Ce fichier est souvent associé à~un fichier \suffix{.ins} pour engendrer le paquetage ou la classe. +% Compiler un fichier \suffix{.dtx} avec \LaTeX{} engendre la documentation. +% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier d'installation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX. +% Lorsque qu'il est compilé avec \LaTeX, il extrait les fichiers du paquetage ou de la classe depuis un +% fichier \suffix{.dtx}. +% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des figures\fg. +% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} Le suffixe du nom du fichier rapport de compilation. +% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des tableaux\fg. +% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\suffix{.maf} Le suffixe du nom du fichier engendré par l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. +% Option par défaut. +% Ce fichier contient la liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc de définition de langue. Un fichier minitoc de +% définition de langue contient les définitions des titres des mini-tables dans une langue donnée. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc objet de langue. Pour certaines langues +% exotiques, le codage rend difficile l'insertion directe des titres dans un fichier \suffix{.mld}; donc +% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. +% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\suffix{.ptc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof. +% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc. +% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier paquetage, chargé via \com{usepackage}. +% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot. +% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} Le suffixe du nom d'un fichier source \TeX\ ou \LaTeX\ normal. +% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} table des matières\fg. +% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot. +% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le +% suffixe complet est \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[absolue (numérotation)] Les fichiers auxiliaires pour les minitables ont un suffixe contenant un +% \emph{numéro absolu}, c'est-à-dire un numéro qui est unique et toujours croissant depuis la première +% partie, le premier chapitre ou la première section; ceci a résolu quelques problèmes obscurs, et aussi +% frappé d'obsolescence quelques commandes, telles que \com{firstpartis}, +% \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}. La numérotation absolue a été introduite dans +% la version~\#23. +% \item[\upack{abstract}] Le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) nécessite +% quelques précautions s'il est utilisé avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}. +% \item[\feat{after}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{après} un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[ajustement] Quelques commandes et environnements de \upack{minitoc} sont dits \og{} commandes +% d'ajustement\fg{} car ils sont utilisés dans certaines circonstances pour \og{} ajuster\fg{} un compteur ou +% altérer l'affichage de fichiers de contenu. Ces commandes et environnements sont +% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, +% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc}, +% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, +% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, +% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, +% \env{mtchideinmainlof} et +% \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% Il est \virage\emph{fortement recommandé} que l'utilisateur vérifie le résultat de tels ajustements dans le +% document final. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\pack{afterpage}] La paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} est utilisé pour ajouter du code qui sera +% exécuté \emph{après} la prochaine coupure de page. +% \item[\upack{alnumsec}] +% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} vous permet d'utiliser une numérotation alphanumérique des sections, +% c'est-à-dire: A.~Introduction; III.~Loi internationale. Ce résultat est similaire +% à~celui du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), +% mais vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de sectionnement standard de \LaTeX. Il est donc possible +% de changer facilement de schéma de numérotation. Lettres grecques, lettres doubles~(bb) et différents +% délimiteurs autour des numéros sont supportés. +% Ce paquetage doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.alnumsec} et la +% section~\vref{faq.42}). +% \item[\upack{alphanum}] Le\imess{W0025} paquetage \pack{alphanum}, qui fait partie de la +% classe spécialisée \class{jura}~\cite{jura}, +% de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \lneed{3} +% \item[\AmS] L'\emph{American Mathematical Society}~\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron.% +% \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}} +% Cette société savante a développé les classes de document suivantes: +% \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont, malheureusement, \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% \class{amsbook} est compatible mais demande des précautions. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}. +% \item[\uclass{amsart}]\iclass{amsart} Une\imess{W0026} classe de document pour des articles~\cite{amslatex}, +% fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette classe +% est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{amsbook}]\iclass{amsbook} Une\imess{I0041} classe de document pour des livres~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par +% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% mais requiert des précautions. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{amsproc}]\iclass{amsproc} Une\imess{W0027} classe de document pour des comptes-rendus de +% congrès~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette +% classe est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% est un paquetage de support de langues pour \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), fondé sur le +% fichier \xfile{omega.sty} original du projet Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). Cependant, il offre quelques +% fonctionnalités additionnelles utiles. +% Certains fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) utilisent des titres définis par \pack{Antomega}: +% \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, +% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld} et \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\env{appendices}] Voir \upack{appendix} ci-dessous. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{appendix}] Le\imess{I0042} paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) +% fournit diverses manières de formater les titres des appendices. Des environnements +% nommés (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} +% sont aussi fournis pouvant être utilisés, par exemple, pour des appendices par chapitre ou par section. Si +% ce paquetage est utilisé avec \upack{minitoc}, certaines précautions sont nécessaires (voir la +% section~\vref{faq+appendix}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} est un système (de \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) pour préparer des documents \LaTeX{} dans +% les langues arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou \lopt{farsi}. Les titres dans \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} proviennent +% des fichiers \xfile{arabic.ldf} et \xfile{farsi.ldf} de ce système. +% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} est un paquetage (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) pour préparer des +% documents en langue arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou hébraïque (\lopt{hebrew}). Les titres dans \xfile{arab.mld} (ou \xfile{arabic.mld}), +% \xfile{arab2.mld} et +% \xfile{hebrew.mld} proviennent d'\packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, mais ceux donnés par \xfile{hebrew2.mld} proviennent +% de \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} est un paquetage (réalisé par \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, +% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) pour préparer des +% documents \LaTeX{} en langue arménienne. +% Les titres dans \xfile{armenian.mld} proviennent du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}. +% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle offre des commandes de sectionnement: +% \com{part} et \com{section} (et en dessous), mais pas \com{chapter}. Elle est compatible avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et section (mais, bien +% sûr, pas au niveau chapitre indisponible). +% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}] +% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter au début du document (en fait, à~la fin exacte de +% son préambule, mais à~l'intérieur de celui-ci, ce qui implique quelques restrictions), à~l'endroit +% où \verb|\begin{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans +% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même. +% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}] +% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter à~la fin du document, à~l'endroit +% où \verb|\end{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans +% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même. +% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Depuis la version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} détecte automatiquement si les +% suffixes des noms de fichiers sont limités à~3~caractères (comme sous MS-DOS). Ce processus se nomme +% l'autoconfiguration. L'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} force la limitation à~3~caractères. +% \item[auxiliaire] Pendant la préparation d'un document, le système \LaTeX\ utilise quelques fichiers +% \textbf{auxiliaires} pour stocker des informations. Les fichiers auxiliaires standard sont +% \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (pour les labels de références croisées, les compteurs, etc.), +% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} pour la table des matières, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} pour la liste des figures +% et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} pour la liste des tableaux. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} crée ses propres +% fichiers auxiliaires, pour y~stocker les contenus de chaque mini-table. Ces fichiers sont les +% \emph{fichiers auxiliaires minitoc}, dont les noms sont de la forme \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{suffixe}, +% le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} liste les suffixes possibles. +% Voir aussi le suffixe \suffix{.maf} plus haut. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{babel}] Le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et autres) est un +% vaste paquetage permettant de préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans de nombreuses langues, et pas seulement en +% anglais. De nombreux titres pour les mini-tables proviennent directement du paquetage \pack{babel}. +% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} Un paquetage pour composer des documents dans la langue \lopt{bangla} +% (\lopt{bengali}) en utilisant les systèmes {\TeX/\LaTeX}; voir~\cite{bangtex}. +% \item[\feat{before}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{avant} un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[\BibTeX] Un programme écrit par \name{Oren}{Patashnik} pour produire des bibliographies dans des documents \LaTeX. +% Distribué avec \LaTeX. Voir~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}. +% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} Un paquetage~\cite{bibtopic} \LaTeX{} pour inclure plusieurs bibliographies dans +% un document. Ces bibliographies pourraient être considérées comme couvrant des sujets différents (d'où le nom) +% ou du matériel bibliographique (par exemple, documentation de premier et second niveaux), etc. +% \item[\upack{bibunits}] Le paquetage \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} permet de faire des bibliographies +% distinctes pour différentes unités ou partie du texte. Les unités peuvent être des chapitres, des sections ou +% des environnements \env{bibunit}. Ce paquetage est compatible avec une large variété de paquetages, dont +% (mais sans y~être limité) \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} +% et les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement: +% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous). +% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et +% chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires). +% \item[\pack{booktabs}] Ce beau paquetage~\cite{booktabs} vous aide à~préparer de plus belles tables, \emph{sans} +% filets verticaux ni filets doubles. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[cadratin] Voir «~em~» ci-dessous. +% \item[\pack{calc}] Le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} facilite les calculs numériques (sur des compteurs et +% des dimensions) lors le la préparation d'un document \LaTeX. +% \item[cappuccino] Voir «~minutes~» ci-dessous. +% \item[\upack{captcont}] Le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} fournit un support pour conserver +% un numéro de figure ou de caption pour plusieurs environnements flottants --- habituellement sur plusieurs pages. +% Il permet de contrôler le contenu des pages de la liste des figures et de la liste des tableaux. Il devrait +% être compatible avec tous les autres paquetages qui modifient ou étendent l'environnement flottant et avec +% le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} en particulier. +% \item[\upack{caption}] Le paquetage \upack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} offre de nombreuses façons d'adapter les +% captions (légendes) dans des environnements flottants tels que \env{figure} et \env{table}, et coopère +% avec de nombreux autres paquetages. +% \item[\upack{caption2}] Le paquetage\,\footnote{Ce texte provient de la documentation du paquetage \pack{caption}, +% et a été traduit. Les paquetages \pack{caption} et \pack{caption2} ont le même auteur, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.} +% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} était considéré comme étant une version expérimentale +% parallèle du paquetage normal \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} et a été supplanté par la nouvelle version~\mbox{3.0} +% du paquetage normal \pack{caption} en décembre 2003. \pack{caption2} est encore supporté +% d'une certaine manière, ce qui signifie qu'il fera partie des prochaines distributions et que les erreurs +% seront encore corrigées, afin que les documents existants utilisant ce paquetage puissent encore être +% compilés. Mais \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} \emph{ne répondra plus} aux questions concernant ce paquetage sauf +% pour les questions sur le passage à~la nouvelle version du paquetage \pack{caption}. Et ce paquetage +% \emph{ne sera ni adapté ni amélioré} dans le futur. +% +% Vous êtes donc priés de ne pas utiliser ce paquetage pour de nouveaux documents. Il est vieux, il est +% obsolète et il commence à~sentir mauvais! +% +% Vous êtes également priés d'ignorer tous les conseils dans des livres ou autres documents qui essayent de +% vous dire que le paquetage \pack{caption2} devrait être utilisé à~la place du paquetage \pack{caption} -- ces +% conseils sont démodés depuis décembre 2003. +% \item[catcode] Abréviation de «~code de catégorie~» (\emph{category code}). Tout\,\footnote{Cette définition +% est tirée du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} d'abord, il est sage d'avoir une idée précise de ce +% que votre clavier envoie à~la machine. Il y~a 256~caractères que \TeX\ peut rencontrer à~chaque étape, dans un +% fichier ou dans une ligne de texte frappé directement sur votre terminal. Ces 256~caractères sont classés en +% 16~catégories numérotées de~0 à~15. Voir la table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \def?{\phantom{0}} +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Codes de catégorie}\label{t+J+catcodes} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}clZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% &\textbf{Catégorie}&\textbf{Signification}\\ +% \midrule +% ?0&Caractère d'échappement&(\texttt{\bs}~habituellement)\\ +% ?1&Début de groupe&(\texttt{\{}~habituellement)\\ +% ?2&Fin de groupe&(\texttt{\}}~habituellement)\\ +% ?3&Début et fin de mode mathématique&(\texttt{\$}~habituellement)\\ +% ?4&Taquet d'alignement&(\texttt{\&}~habituellement)\\ +% ?5&Fin de ligne&(\emph{return}~habituellement)\\ +% ?6&Paramètre&(\texttt{\#}~habituellement)\\ +% ?7&Exposant&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~habituellement)\\ +% ?8&Indice&(\texttt{\_}~habituellement)\\ +% ?9&Caractère ignoré&(\emph{null}~habituellement)\\ +% 10&Espace&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~habituellement)\\ +% 11&Lettre&(\texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z} et~\texttt{a}, \ldots, \texttt{z})\\ +% 12&Autre caractère&(aucun de ceux ci-dessus ou ci-dessous)\\ +% 13&Caractère actif&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~habituellement)\\ +% 14&Caractère commentaire&(\texttt{\%}~habituellement)\\ +% 15&Caractère invalide&(\emph{delete}~habituellement)\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% Il n'est pas nécessaire que vous appreniez ces numéros de code; l'important est que \TeX\ connaisse 16~types +% différents de caractères. Tout d'abord, «~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~» vous laisse croire qu'il n'y a que deux +% types --- le caractère d'échappement et les autres --- puis il vous parle de deux types de plus, les symboles de +% groupement~\texttt{\{} et~\texttt{\}}. Le code de catégorie pour tout caractère peut être changé à~tout moment, +% mais il est habituellement prudent de se conformer à~un schéma particulier. +% \item[\upack{ccaption}] Le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} fournit des commandes pour des +% \og{} captions de continuation\fg, des captions non numérotés, et un en-tête de légende pour tout +% environnement. Des méthodes sont fournies pour définir des captions à~utiliser en dehors des environnements +% flottants et pour définir de nouveaux environnements flottants et des sous-flottants. Des outils sont fournis +% pour définir vos propres styles de captions. +% \item[\upack{chngpage}] Le paquetage \pack{chngpage} (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) fournit des commandes pour changer +% la mise en page au milieu d'un document et pour tester de manière robuste la mise en page pour les pages +% paires ou impaires. +% \item[Chapter~0] +% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro un, mais par un chapitre numéroté zéro (ou même +% avec un numéro plus bizarre). Ceci posait un sérieux problème dans les anciennes versions du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}: les minitocs n'apparaissaient plus dans les bons chapitres, et une première correction +% fut l'introduction de commandes spécifiques (\com{firstchapteris} et analogues). Avec l'ajout de la +% numérotation absolue des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables (voir \emph{absolue} plus haut), le +% problème fut résolu dans \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, et ces commandes devinrent obsolètes. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] Le paquetage \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib} permet d'avoir plusieurs bibliographies +% dans un document \LaTeX, y~compris des éléments cités (par \com{cite}) dans plus d'une bibliographie. +% Un dépit du nom \og{}\pack{chapterbib}\fg, \emph{les bibliographies sont pour chaque fichier inclus par +% \com{include}}, pas nécessairement pour chaque chapitre. +% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles} +% Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle teste chaque mini-table pour voir si elle est vide; puis les +% mini-tables vides \emph{ne sont pas} imprimées. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire +% (\opt{nocheckfiles}) imprime aussi les mini-tables vides, qui sont laides. Voir la +% section~\vref{o+checkfiles}. +% \item[\upack{CJK}] Le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et autres) est un ensemble de paquetages et de +% fontes pour préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans certaines langues orientales, telles que le chinois, +% le coréen (fontes Hangûl ou Hanja), le japonais et le thaï, ainsi que certaines variantes du russe. +% Les titres des mini-tables pour ces langues +% proviennent de fichiers du système \pack{CJK} et ont été insérés dans des fichiers \suffix{.mld} lorsque ceci +% était possible, ou dans des fichiers \suffix{.mlo} lorsque le codage est incompatible avec le mécanisme +% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx}; +% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit alors charger le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant. +% \pack{CJK} implante les codages GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8 et CNS (sur 16~bits, sauf UTF~8 sur 24~bits). +% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Schémas de codage implantés dans \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{1~octet}&\textbf{2~octets}&\textbf{3~octets}\\ +% \midrule +% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\ +% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\ +% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% Certains schémas de codage (Big~5, SJIS) ont des trous dans le domaine du deuxième octet. +% Il est difficile de lire avec les codages Big~5 et SJIS directement vers \TeX\ puisque certaines des valeurs +% utilisées pour les deuxièmes octets des codages sont réservées pour des caractères de contrôle: +% «~\texttt{\{}~», «~\texttt{\}}~» et «~\texttt{\bs}~». Le fait de les redéfinir casse beaucoup de choses dans +% \LaTeX; pour éviter ceci, normalement des préprocesseurs sont utilisés pour convertir le deuxième octet en +% un nombre suivi d'un caractère délimiteur. Pour plus de détails, voir~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} +% y~présente en grand détail tous les codages \pack{CJK} qui sont ou ont été utilisés. +% Notez que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} pour contourner ce problème; +% voir la section~\vref{fo+lang}. +% \item[classe] La \textbf{classe}\,\footnote{Cette note a été extraite de~\cite{NSSL2E}, puis adaptée.} +% est la première information que \LaTeX{} a besoin de connaître lors du traitement d'un fichier d'entrée; +% c'est le type de document que l'auteur souhaite produite. Ceci est spécifié par la commande +% \com{documentclass}. +% \begin{quote} +% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{classe}\verb|}| +% \end{quote} +% \noindent Ici \emph{classe} spécifie le type du document à~produire. +% Le tableau~\vref{t+documentclasses} liste les classes standard de documents~\cite{classes}. La distribution \LaTeXe{} +% fournit d'autres classes pour d'autres documents, y~compris des lettres et des transparents, +% mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas été testé avec toutes ces classes. +% Les paramètres \emph{options} adaptent le comportement de la classe du document. Les options doivent être +% séparées par des virgules. Les classes standard supportées par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont listées +% dans la section~\vref{s+supported+classes}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Classes standard de documents}\label{t+documentclasses} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Classe}&\textbf{Usage}\\ +% \midrule +% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&Pour des articles dans des journaux scientifiques, des présentations, des rapports courts, +% de la documentation de programmes, des invitations, \ldots\\ +% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&Pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\ +% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&Pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; analogue à~la classe +% \class{article}.\\ +% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&Pour préparer l'annonce d'une version de \LaTeX{}; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\ +% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&Pour des rapports plus longs contenant plusieurs chapitres, de petits livres, des thèses, \ldots\\ +% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&Pour de vrais livres.\\ +% \class{letter}&Pour des lettres; comme cette classe n'a pas de commandes de sectionnement, n'utilisez pas +% \upack{minitoc} avec cette classe.\\ +% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&Pour des transparents; cette classe utilise de grandes lettres sans empattements. Vous +% pouvez aussi envisager d'utiliser Beamer\TeX{}\,$^a$ à~la place. N'utilisez pas \upack{minitoc} avec ces classes.\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{{\froff$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}}\hfill\null}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{close}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement après +% (fermeture, \emph{close}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer les fichiers de documentation +% en format PostScript à~partir de ceux en format PDF. +% Vous devriez adapter ce script à~vos besoins. +% \item[CMR] Pour «~Computer Modern Roman~». Le sous-ensemble romain des fontes «~Computer Modern~». +% Voir «~Computer Modern~» ci-dessous. +% \item[codage] Un codage (\emph{encoding}) spécifie l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la +% fonte (par exemple, si le soixante-quinzième caractère est un «~A~»). Le codage de fonte le plus courant +% pour \TeX\ est OT1. L'autre option prédéfinie est~T1 (\TeX\ étendu). Il y~a aussi +% US~ASCII (7~bits), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bits), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}), +% etc. Voir la table~\vref{t+var-encodings} et~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Codages divers}\label{t+var-encodings} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Commentaire}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ansinew}&Codage ANSI pour Windows~3.1, extension de Latin-1.\\ +% \texttt{applemac}&Codage Macintosh.\\ +% \texttt{ascii}&Codage ASCII pour l'intervalle 32--127.\\ +% \texttt{cp1250}&Page de code Windows 1250 (Europe centrale et orientale).\\ +% \texttt{cp1251}&Page de code Windows 1251 (cyrillique).\\ +% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonyme de \texttt{ansinew}.\\ +% \texttt{cp1257}&Page de code Windows 1257 (baltique).\\ +% \texttt{cp437}&Page de code IBM~437, qui est la page de code +% américaine d'origine et contient les lettres, les +% chiffres, des symboles mathématiques et quelques +% caractères utiles pour construire des pseudo-graphiques.\\ +% \texttt{cp437de}&Page de code IBM~437 (version allemande).\\ +% \texttt{cp850}&Page de code IBM~850, presque identique à~ISO~Latin~1, +% mais la disposition des caractères n'est pas la même.\\ +% \texttt{cp852}&Page de code IBM~852.\\ +% \texttt{cp855}&Page de code IBM~855 (cyrillique).\\ +% \texttt{cp865}&Page de code IBM~865.\\ +% \texttt{cp866}&Page de code IBM~866 (MS-DOS cyrillique).\\ +% \texttt{decmulti}&Codage du jeu international de caractères DEC.\\ +% \texttt{latin1}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% à~la plupart des langues européennes occidentales, y~compris +% le danois, le néerlandais, l'anglais, le féroéen, le +% finnois, le flamand, le français, l'allemand, +% l'islandais, l'italien, le norvégien, le portugais, +% l'espagnol et le suédois. Certaines langues non +% européennes, comme l'hawaïen et l'indonésien, sont aussi +% écrites avec ce jeu de caractères.\\ +% \texttt{latin2}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% à~la plupart des langues d'Europe centrale, y~compris +% le croate, le tchèque, le hongrois, le polonais, le +% roumain, le slovaque et le slovène.\\ +% \texttt{latin3}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% à~l'espéranto, le maltais, le turc et le galicien. +% Cependant, \texttt{latin5} est le jeu de caractères +% préféré pour le turc.\\ +% \texttt{latin4}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires +% pour les langues baltes (latvien ou letton, estonien et +% lituanien), le groendlandais et le lapon (sâme, sámi).\\ +% \texttt{latin5}&Est essentiellement identique à~\texttt{latin1}, +% excepté que certains caractères turcs remplacent des +% lettres islandaises moins souvent utilisées.\\ +% \texttt{next}&Codage pour Next.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en anglais. +% \item[compteur] Un registre \TeX\ contenant une valeur entière. Il~y a 256 compteurs (de~0 à~255) dans \TeX, mais +% \LaTeX\ en utilise certains, et de nombreux paquetages ont besoin de quelques compteurs pour leur propre +% usage. Une version étendue, dérivée de \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, permet davantage de compteurs. +% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), lui aussi, permet davantage de compteurs. +% \item[Computer Modern] Pour \og Computer Modern\fg. Un ensemble de fontes~\cite{cmt} conçues +% par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} pour \TeX. Initialement, elles étaient construites avec +% {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (un programme lui aussi créé par \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}), +% mais aujourd'hui il en existe des versions PostScript type~1 (vectoriel), avec des extensions (pour les caractères +% accentués, principalement): les fontes EC (\emph{European Computer Modern}), les fontes cm-super, etc. +% \item[CTAN] Le \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network} (réseau d'archives \TeX\ complètes), un ensemble +% d'archives informatiques contenant la plupart des ressources relatives à~\TeX{} (telles que fontes, +% logiciels, documentations, paquetages). Elles sont accessibles par +% Internet. Voir \url{http://ctan.org}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] J'ai dû utiliser le paquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour préparer l'entrée +% <<~The pdf\TeX\ Program~>>~\cite{han} dans la bibliographie, parce que le prénom de son auteur comporte un +% accent double \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; I used it also to typeset some other vietnamese words. +% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en allemand. +% \item[\emph{depth}] Voir \textbf{profondeur} plus loin. +% \item[descripteur] (de fichier). Une entité logicielle décrivant l'interface entre un programme et un fichier. +% Pour la plupart des programmes et des systèmes d'exploitation, le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers est +% limité. Pour {\TeX} et {\LaTeX}, il y a 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture et 16~descripteurs de +% fichiers en lecture. +% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] Le paquetage \emph{\devnag{} pour \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari})\cite{devanagari} +% offre un moyen pour composer avec une haute qualité du texte \devnag{} avec \TeX{}. \devnag{} est une +% écriture utilisée pour écrire et imprimer le sanskrit et de nombreuses langues d'Inde du nord et centrale +% telles que l'hindi et le marathi, ainsi que le népalais. Le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} a été initialement +% développé en mai~1991 par \name{Frans}{Velthuis} pour l'Université de Groningen, aux Pays-Bas, et ce fut le +% premier système à~supporter l'écriture \devnag{} pour \TeX{}. +% \item[dispositifs] Un dispositif (\emph{feature}) (au sens du paquetage \upack{minitoc}) est un ensemble +% d'actions qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un certain type de mini-table. Cing dispositifs sont +% associés à~chaque type de mini-table: un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (exécuté avant la mini-table complète), un dispositif +% «~\feat{after}~» (exécuté après la mini-table complète), +% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (exécuté juste avant l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable), +% un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (exécuté juste après l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable), +% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~», qui est exécuté avec la +% mini-table pour forcer son style de page. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] Un fichier d'en-tête PostScript, qui essaye d'activer l'impression en recto-verso. +% ^^A Il fonctionne avec certaines imprimantes PostScript HP et Canon. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\textbf{ECM}] Un exemple minimal complet est le plus petit document complet possible qui illustre un +% problème. Un exemple minimal ne devrait aucun paquetegage ni code qui ne contribue pas au problème, mais +% il doit contenir une classe de document et l'environnement \env{document} (d'après~\cite{talbot-mini}). +% Voir aussi~\cite{preusse}, \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} et +% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils. +% \item[\texttt{em}] Une unité de longueur égale (approximativement) à~la largeur de la lettre~\og m\fg +% dans la fonte courante. En typographie, c'est un \og cadratin\fg. +% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] Un style bibliographique similaire au style \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} standard, mais +% modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} pour ajouter un champ \texttt{URL}. Les noms de famille +% des auteurs et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) sont en petites capitales, les années en chiffres de style ancien. +% \item[environnement] Un environnement (\emph{environment}) est un domaine délimité dans un document, où des +% règles spéciales s'appliquent. Un tel domaine est délimité +% par \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| et peut prendre des arguments, +% comme ceci: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\ +% \verb|\end{minipage}| +% \end{quote} +% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est une version étendue de \TeX, avec bien plus de +% registres et de nombreuses nouvelles primitives; elle supporte aussi l'écriture de gauche à~droite et de +% droite à~gauche. +% \item[\upack{ethiop}]\ipack{ethiop} Un paquetage~\cite{ethiop} \LaTeX\ offrant le support de la langue éthiopienne pour +% le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \item[extension] Voir «~suffixe~» plus loin. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] Voir \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} ci-dessous. +% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} Un paquetage~\cite{farsi} pour composer un document dans la langue \lopt{farsi} (iranien, persan). +% Voir~{\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}. Mais ce n'est actuellement disponible que pour \LaTeX2.09. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} et~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% \item[features] Voir «~dispositifs~» plus haut. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\env{filecontents}] Un environnement \LaTeX{} spécial. Il permet de créer un fichier (dont le nom est donné +% en argument de cet environnement) en écrivant le contenu de l'environnement dans ce fichier. +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{fichier}\}}\\ +% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contenu}~\ldots}\\ +% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}} +% \end{quote} +% Cet environnement devrait être utilisé \emph{avant} \com{documentclass}. +% Il est utilisé dans \xfile{minitoc.ins} pour préparer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} (voir la +% section~\vref{fo+lang}) et quelques fichiers utilisés dans la compilation de la documentation. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] Une commande obsolète, utilisée temporairement pour contourner le problème +% du Chapitre~0; +% voir~\textbf{Chapitre~0} et \textbf{absolue (numérotation)} plus haut, et la section~\vref{faq.5}. +% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus. +% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus. +% \item[\pack{float}] Ce paquetage~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} améliore l'interface de définition +% d'objets flottants tels que figures et tableaux en \LaTeX. Il ajoute la notion de <<~style de flottant~>> +% qui régit l'aspect des flottants. De nouvelles sortes de flottants peuvent être définies en utilisant une +% commande \com{newfloat} analogue à~\com{newtheorem}. Ce paquetage incorpore aussi la fonctionnalité du +% paquetage \pack{here} de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, donnant aux environnements flottants une option +% \texttt{[H]} qui signifie <<~METTEZ-LE ICI~>> (par opposition à~l'option standard \texttt{[h]} qui signifie +% <<~vous pouvez le mettre ici si vous voulez~>>). +% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}] +% Une macro du paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. Elle établit une «~barrière~» contre la dérive +% des éléments flottants (tels que figures ou tableaux). +% \item[\pack{floatrow}] Ce paquetage~\cite{floatrow} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} est une extension du paquetage +% \pack{float}~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), réutilisant son code, avec des extensions venant du +% paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} (de \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}). +% \item[\pack{flowfram}] Ce\imess{W0097} paquetage~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} est conçu pour vous permettre de créer des +% blocs (\emph{frames}) de texte dans un document de manière que le contenu de l'environnement \env{document} +% coule d'un bloc au suivant dans l'ordre où ils ont été définis. Ceci est utile pour créer des posters ou des +% magazines ou toute autre forme de document qui n'est pas conforme à~la mise en page standard sur une ou deux colonnes. +% Comme ce paquetage définit son propre système de minitocs, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{fncychap}] Le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} fournit diverses commandes pour changer +% le format utilisé pour certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes stantard de documents de \LaTeXe: +% \class{book} et \class{report}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.fncychap} et la +% section~\vref{faq.38}). +% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en français. +% \item[\upack{franc}]\ipack{franc} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est +% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\upack{frbib}]\ipack{frbib} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la documentation en +% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] Un fichier de style bibliographique utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la +% documentation en français. +% Il a été amélioré pour le français par \name{Ronan}{Keryell} en partant de la version standard +% \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst}, puis j'ai ajouté quelques adaptations pour le français (comme les noms de famille en +% petites capitales pour les auteurs et les éditeurs, les années en chiffres anciens), +% puis je l'ai modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. +% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est +% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{geometry}] Le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry} fournit une interface utilisateur flexible +% et complète pour les dimensions de la page. Vous pouvez les spécifier en utilisant des paramètres intuitifs +% pour obtenir votre mise en page désirée. Par exemple, si vous voulez établir des marges (à~gauche, à~droite, +% en haut et en bas) à~2\,cm de chaque bord du papier, il vous suffit de dire: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}| +% \end{quote} +% Ce paquetage puissant (et recommandé) est utilisé dans certains des exemples de documents et dans la présente +% documentation. +% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} Un paquetage \LaTeX\ pour composer du texte guarani, la principale langue parlée +% au Paraguay. +% Le fichier \xfile{guarani.ldf}, inclus dans ce paquetage, définit les titres. Voir~\cite{guarani} et la +% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] Le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} définit une variante de la +% commande \com{caption} pour produire des captions (légendes) avec une indentation pendante +% (\emph{hanging indentation}), c'est-à-dire dont la première ligne déborde sur la gauche. Ce paquetage est +% sans doute obsolète (1992, \LaTeX2.09). +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[Hindi] Pour la langue hindi, voir le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}~\cite{devanagari} plus haut. Le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} accepte les options de langue \lopt{devanagari} et \lopt{hindi}, qui sont +% synonymes. Une option de langue \lopt{hindi-modern} est également disponible. +% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\emph{hint}] Une indication, un indice pour détecter un problème. C'est aussi un message écrit (dans +% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}) par l'option \optd{hints} (voir ci-dessous). +% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle vérifie l'ordre ce chargement de certains +% paquetages, l'ordre des invocations de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}, la cohérence entre les +% principales commandes de \upack{minitoc}, etc., et produit des avertissements et d'autres indications +% (\emph{hints}) utiles (principalement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}). +% C'est une option active par défaut +% (utilisez l'option \opt{nohints} pour sauter ces vérifications). +% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} Un système pour écrire des documents en langue coréenne, en utilisant \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) +% (voir plus bas). +% Écrit par \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}. Il utilise des fontes Hangûl +% ou Hanja spéciales et le codage UTF-8 en entrée. +% \item[hyperlien] (\emph{hyperlink}) Dans un document, une référence à~un autre objet qui peut être trouvé de +% manière dynamique (en cliquant avec la souris). Ceci requiert un type spécial de document (PDF, PostScript +% avec dispositifs d'hypertexte) et un visualisateur adapté (visualisateur PDF, visualisateur PostScript +% récent). Ceci est pratique pour naviguer dans un document ou plusieurs documents, qui peuvent être des +% documents distants. +% \lneed{4} +% \item[\upack{hyperref}] Le\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}} +% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} est utilisé pour modifier les commandes +% de références croisées de \LaTeX\ afin de produire une certaine sorte de commandes \com{special}; +% elles sont des prémices de l'ensemble de commandes \com{special} définis pour les processeurs de +% \texttt{dvi} vers \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, pour les commandes \texttt{pdfmark} incluses pour le traitement par +% \tool{Acrobat Distiller} (\tool{dvips} et \tool{dvipsone}), pour \tool{dviwindo}, pour \textbf{pdf\TeX}, +% pour \textbf{\TeX4ht} et pour les outils de conversion en PDF et HTML de \tool{VTEX}. +% +% Ce paquetage dérive de, et est bâti sur, le travail du projet \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, +% décrit dans~\cite{hypertex}. Il étend la fonctionnalité de toutes les commandes de +% références croisées de \LaTeX\ (y~compris la table des matières, les bibliographies, etc.) pour produire des +% commandes \com{special} qu'un programme pilote (\emph{driver}) pourra transformer en liens +% hypertextes; il fournit aussi de nouvelles commandes permettant à~l'utilisateur d'écrire des liens +% hypertextes (hyperliens) \emph{ad hoc}, y~compris ceux vers des documents externes et des URLs. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] Le paquetage \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg} fournit une commande si-alors-sinon +% (\emph{if-then-else}) pour tester si un argument de macro est vide («~vide~» signifiant seulement zéro espaces ou +% plus). +% \item[\pack{ifthen}] Le paquetage \pack{ifthen}~\cite{ifthen} définit une commande \com{ifthenelse} pour \LaTeXe. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui prépare le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% depuis \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant +% de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uopt{insection}]\iopt{insection} L'option de paquetage \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} charge le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} +% avec les options adéquates pour éviter que les éléments flottants (tels que figures et tableaux) dérivent +% en dehors de leurs sections, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} +% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}). +% Cette option de paquetage est recommandée si vous utilisez des sectlofs ou +% des sectlots dans votre document. Voir la section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. +% \item[insertion] Les commandes d'insertion du paquetage \upack{minitoc} insèrent une mini-table dans le document. +% Une commande de \emph{préparation} correspondante doit avoir été invoquée (une seule fois) auparavant. +% Les commandes d'insertion sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} +% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ +% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+installation}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{jobname}] Une primitive \TeX\ contenant le nom du document en préparation, c'est-à-dire le nom +% du fichier lu en premier par \TeX{} (ou \LaTeX), sans son suffixe. Elle est très utile pour construire les +% noms d'autres fichiers. +% \item[\uclass{jura}] La classe \imess{W0029}\class{jura}~\cite{jura}, de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle est utilisée pour des documents juridiques en allemand. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des +% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement peu serré (\emph{loose}) +% dans les mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \optd{loose} pour les classes standard. +% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des +% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement serré (\emph{tight}) dans les +% mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \opt{tight} pour les classes standard. +% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] Un projet~\cite{kannadatex} pour utiliser \LaTeX{} pout la composition +% dans la langue Kannada language. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}. +% \item[\KOMAScript] +% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} est un ensemble très complexe. +% Vous pouvez le voir, car il n'y a pas seulement +% une seule classe ou un seul paquetage, mais tout un ensemble de classes et paquetages nombreux. Les +% classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2} et +% \class{scrreprt}) sont bien les contreparties des classes standard, mais elles n'ont jamais seulement les +% mêmes commandes, environnements, options et possibilités optionnelles que les classes standard et ne donnent +% pas un résultat de même aspect. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les classes \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl} sont compatibles avec le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec certaines précautions (voir la section~\vref{special.entries}). +% Les classes \class{scrlettr} et \class{scrlttr2} n'ont pas de commandes +% de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet avec elles. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \KOMAScript{} offre des tas de classes, paquetages, commandes, environnements et possibilités. Vous en +% trouverez certains aussi dans les classes standard, mais il y en a beaucoup que vous ne trouverez pas. +% Certains sont même des ajouts au noyau de \LaTeX. +% +% Les classes principales de l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} sont conçues comme des contreparties des classes +% \LaTeX{} standard. Ceci signifie que l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} contient des remplacements pour les trois +% classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}. Il y a aussi un remplacement pour la +% classe standard \class{letter}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[Lambda] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système +% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) est appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% \item[Lamed] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système +% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) est appelé «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} est un système de préparation de documents qui convient fort bien pour +% produire des documents scientifiques et mathématiques de haute qualité typographique. Il convient aussi pour +% produire toutes sortes d'autres documents, depuis de simples lettres jusqu'à des livres complets. +% \LaTeX{} utilise \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} comme moteur de composition (d'après~\cite{NSSL2E}). +% +% \LaTeX{} est en fait un ensemble de macros \TeX{} qui permet aux auteurs de +% composer et d'imprimer leur document avec la plus haute +% qualité typographique, en utilisant une mise en page +% prédéfinie professionnelle. \LaTeX{} avait été originellement +% écrit par \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. Il utilise le +% formateur \TeX{} comme moteur de composition typographique. +% Aujourd'hui, la maintenance de \LaTeX{} est faite par +% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} et son équipe. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% En 1994, le système \LaTeX{} fut (profondément) mis à~jour par l'équipe de \LaTeX3, +% conduite par \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, pour inclure certaines +% améliorations attendues depuis longtemps, et pour réunifier +% toutes les versions modifiées qui ont pullulé depuis la sortie +% de \LaTeX2.09 quelques années plus tôt. Pour distinguer la +% nouvelle version de l'ancienne, elle est appelée \LaTeXe. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \LaTeX{} se prononce \textbf{[latex]}. Si vous voulez faire référence à~\LaTeX{} dans un environnement +% \texttt{ASCII}, utilisez \texttt{LaTeX}. \LaTeXe{} se prononce \textbf{[latex d\o{}z\o{}]} et s'écrit +% \texttt{LaTeX2e}. +% +% En anglais, cela donne \textbf{[la\i{}tex]} et \usebox{\latexbox}. +% ^^A {\selectlanguage{english}\froff\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}\selectlanguage{french}}. +% \item[\LaTeX2.09] Une version obsolète du programme \LaTeX, antérieure à~1994; elle n'est plus supportée. +% Ne l'utilisez pas\,\footnote{Sauf exceptionnellement, pour un très vieux document; si possible, essayez de le +% convertir.}. Utilisez la version actuelle de \LaTeXe, qui est supportée et bien plus puissante. +% \item[\LaTeXe] La version actuelle du programme \LaTeX, après 1994; elle est supportée. +% \item[\LaTeX3] La future version de \LaTeX, toujours en cours de développement. +% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} Une\Virage{} classe de documents standard~\cite{letter} pour préparer des +% lettres postales (courrier papier). +% Comme de tels documents n'ont ni commandes ni structure de sectionnement, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est +% sans objet pour eux (et est donc \emph{incompatible} avec cette classe). +% \item[\upack{lipsum}] Le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} permet d'insérer facilement du +% texte dans un fichier de test avec un minimum de frappe. Les textes sont en latin mais ont été altérés et +% rendus incompréhensibles. J'ai utilisé ce paquetage dans certains des exemples de documents. +% Voir aussi~\url{http://lipsum.com} pour les origines du texte +% utilisé (des passages du \emph{De finibus bonorum et malorum} de Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero} (\textsc{Cicéron})). +% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle crée une liste des fichiers minitoc +% auxiliaires (ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables et peuvent être éliminés après l'exécution de \LaTeX) +% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Option par défaut. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[LOF, LoF] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of figures}~», ou «~liste des figures~». +% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des figures. +% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement lache des lignes dans +% les mini-tables. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire est \opt{tight}. +% \item[LOT, LoT] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of tables}~», ou «~liste des tableaux~». +% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des tableaux. +% \item[LPPL] La \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, disponible~à: +% \begin{quote} +% {\froff\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}} +% \end{quote} +% Sa version actuelle est (2003-12-01). Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est distribué sous cette licence. +% Une traduction en français de cette licence est disponible~à: +% \begin{quote} +% {\froff\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/french-translations/macros/latex/base/f-lppl.txt}} +% \end{quote} +% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltxdoc}, +% pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une +% classe. Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est +% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut. +% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltnews}, +% pour préparer l'announce d'une version de \LaTeX. +% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est +% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{et} \com{makeatother}] De\,\footnote{Ces informations proviennent +% de~\cite[page~857]{TLC2F}.} nombreuses commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, de paquetages et de classes contiennent +% le caractère~\texttt{@} dans leurs noms. Ceci empêche efficacement que de tels noms soient utilisés dans des +% documents pour des commandes définies par l'utilisateur. Cependant, ceci signifie aussi qu'ils ne peuvent +% pas apparaître dans un document, même pas dans le préambule, sans prendre des précautions spéciales. Comme +% il est parfois nécessaire d'avoir de tels morceaux de «~code interne~» dans le préambule, +% les commandes \com{makeatletter} et \com{makeatother} permettent de le faire facilement: ce +% qui est difficile, c'est de se rappeler qu'il faut les ajouter, faute de quoi des erreurs étranges +% surviennent. Et ces deux commandes \Virage\emph{ne devraient jamais être utilisées dans un fichier de paquetage ou de classe}. +% \item[makefile] Un fichier de texte particulier contenant des instructions pour construire et installer un +% logiciel, à~l'aide de l'utilitaire «~\textbf{make}~»; \textbf{make} est un outil pratique provenant du +% système d'exploitation Unix, mais il en existe des variantes. +% \item[\upack{mcaption}] Le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption}\imess{W0036} fournit un environnement +% \env{margincap} pour placer les captions (légendes) dans la marge externe du document, avec un alignement +% par le haut ou par le bas. +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uclass{memoir}]\iclass{memoir} +% Une\SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} +% très générale et puissante classe de document +% (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, décrite dans~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); +% cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (avec quelques précautions) si vous utilisez +% une version récente. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[mini-bibliographie] Voir \textbf{minibbl} ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-liste] Synonyme de «~mini-table~» ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-lof] Voir «~minilof~» ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-lot] Voir «~minilot~» ci-dessous. +% \item[mini-table] Ce terme désigne une table de contenu locale (comme une table des matières, une liste des +% figures ou une liste des tableaux) pour une unité de sectionnement (partie, chapitre ou section), par +% opposition à~une table globale (la table des matières, la liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux pour +% l'ensemble du document). Le but principal du paquetage \upack{minitoc} est la création de telles +% mini-tables. Mais le terme «~minitoc~» est aussi utilisé pour désigner une telle mini-table, comme un terme +% générique, car les premières versions du paquetage ne permettaient que des tables des matières par chapitre. +% \item[mini-toc] Voir «~minitoc~» ci-dessous. +% \item[minibbl] Abréviation pour «~mini-bibliographie~», c'est-à-dire avoir une bibliographie par partie, par +% chapitre ou par section, ou même par thème ou par sujet. Ceci est en dehors du domaine du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{faq.9}. +% \item[minilof] Une liste des figures pour un chapitre. +% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilofs. +% \item[minilot] Une liste des tableaux pour un chapitre. +% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilots. +% \item[minitoc] Une table des matières pour un chapitre. Aussi utilisé comme terme générique pour toute mini-table (voir +% «~mini-table~» plus haut). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en français du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] Le fichier source pour la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% En fait, il ne fait que définir \com{jobname} puis charger \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, qui lui-même charge +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan} pour choisir la langue utilisée dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contient +% à~la fois des fragments de documentation en anglais et en français, choisis par des constructions +% \com{ifcase} avec la variable \com{LANG}, forcée à~0 par \xfile{minitoc.lan} ou à~1 par +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (c'est-à-dire par \com{jobname}\suffix{.dtx}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est produit lors de la +% compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en +% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue française dans la documentation. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] La documentation en français, en format PDF. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] La documentation en français, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais +% regardez le script \scrp{cmk}). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en anglais du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste de problèmes et +% de questions concernant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir le chapitre~\vref{FAQ}. +% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des minitocs. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] Le fichier contenant la documentation et le code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\upack{minitoc-hyper}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} Une version spéciale~\cite{minitoc-hyper} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% préparée par \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, +% \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} pour fonctionner avec le puissant paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}; +% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} a intégré leur travail et donc depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec +% \pack{hyperref}. +% \emph{Donc le paquetage\Virage{} \pack{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être +% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.} +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] Le fichier d'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Compiler ce fichier avec +% \LaTeX\ produit la plupart des fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en +% anglais. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] Un fichier texte contenant la liste de tous les fichiers inclus dans le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. Les fichiers non listés dans \xfile{minitoc.l} sont des fichiers utilisés seulement pour +% installer le paquetage ou produire sa documentation. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue anglaise dans la documentation. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] La documentation en anglais, en format PDF. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} Ce fichier contient un préambule \LaTeX{} pour la documentation. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] La documentation en anglais, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais +% regarde les script \scrp{cmk}). +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] Ce fichier contient la partie principale du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec ses +% commentaires retirés. +% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste commentée des commandes +% et environnements minitoc. Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}. +% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] Une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et +% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\upack{minutes}] Le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}) est utilisé +% pour préparer des comptes-rendus de conférences. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} permet d'ajouter +% des «~pauses-café~» dans la table des matières grâce à~des commandes telles que \com{addcoffeeline} et +% \com{coffeeline} (et des commandes internes) dont les noms contiennent la chaîne «~\texttt{coffee}~», +% d'où la note de bas de page sur «~cappuccino~»{\myCoffeecup} dans le chapitre sur l'installation!% +% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{Les petites tasses \myCoffeecup{} proviennent du paquetage \pack{marvosym}~\cite{marvosym}.}}{} +% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} est un important paquetage utilisé +% pour préparer des documents +% dans divers dialectes de la langue mongole (Bicig et Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe et Manju, Buryat, Xalx et Khalkha) et dans +% un dialecte du russe utilisé en Mongolie (Russianc). Bicig est un autre nom pour le Ouïghour. +% Vous pourrez trouver beaucoup d'informations sur la langue mongole et la Mongolie sur le site web~\cite{mongol-web}. +% Voir aussi: +% {\small\froff\begin{quote} +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\ +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\ +% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\ +% \mbox{\url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}}\\ +% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\ +% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm} +% \end{quote}} +% La description suivante a été extraite de~\cite{montex} et traduite: +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} est un paquetage qui fournit le support pour écrire des documents en mongol +% (\emph{mongolian}), mandchou (\emph{manju}), bouriate (\emph{buryat}) et russe. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Le mongol peut être représenté en écriture ouïghure (\emph{uighur}) +% traditionnelle +% (appelée aussi écriture classique ou traditionnelle) et en écriture cyrillique. Le mandchou +% (\emph{manju}) ressemble à~l'écriture mongole traditionnelle (dont elle dérive) mais utilise un grand choix de +% signes diacritiques afin d'éliminer de nombreuses ambiguïtés de son ancêtre l'écriture mongole. Le bouriate +% (\emph{buryat}) moderne, comme le mongol dans sa forme actuelle, +% est écrit avec un alphabet cyrillique,% +% mais tant le mongol (35~lettres) que le bouriate (36~lettres) utilisent davantage de lettres +% que le russe (33~lettres). +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{description} +% \item[Mongol] +% Le terme \emph{mongol} (\emph{mongolian} en anglais) recouvre en fait plusieurs langues et n'est pas le nom précis +% d'une seule langue. Les choses se compliquent encore lorsque des noms de groupes ethniques, de langues et de +% systèmes d'écriture sont mélangés. +% \begin{description} +% \item [Xalx] ou Khalkha est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Mongolie proprement dite. +% Leur dialecte forme la base du mongol écrit avec des lettres cyrilliques. +% Dans le présent texte, \emph{mongol moderne} est utilisé comme synonyme. +% \item [Bouriate] (\emph{buryat}) est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Bouriatie +% (\emph{Buryatia}), au nord de la Mongolie, à~l'est du Lac Baïkal, et faisant partie de la +% Fédération Russe. Les Bouriates se nomment eux-mêmes \emph{Buryaad} tandis que les Mongols Xlax +% s'appellent \emph{Buriad}. Le nom anglais suit l'orthographe russe (tandis que le nom français +% est pris phonétiquement). +% Du point de vue linguistique, le mongol xalx et le mongol bouriate sont des langues assez proches; +% le bouriate a un système de sons légèrement différent dans lequel le phonème~\verb|/s/| est +% partiellement décalé vers~\verb|/h/|; l'alphabet moderne bouriate cyrillique (virtuellement +% identique à~l'alphabet cyrillique utilisé pour écrire le mongol moderne) a une lettre +% additionnelle (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) pour marquer la différence avec \verb|/s/|. +% \item [Bicig] (littéralement \emph{écriture} en mongol) désigne le texte écrit avec l'écriture mongole +% traditionnelle, qui est aussi dénommée Ouïghour (\emph{Uighur}). Ici, le texme \emph{bicig} sera +% utilisé sur un pied d'égalité avec le mongol \emph{classique} et \emph{traditionnel}. Ce dernier +% terme est utilisé dans les noms du plan de caractères U1800 de Unicode/ISO10646, qui contient le +% mongol (\emph{mongolian}), le mandchou (\emph{manju}), le Sibe et des ensembles de caractères +% spéciaux appelés Ali Gali ou Galig. Afin d'identifier les commandes concernant l'écriture mongole +% distinctes pour le mongol et le mandchou, les commandes mongoles (\emph{mongolian}) ont un nom +% avec le radical \lopt{bicig} tandis que les commandes manchoues (\emph{manju}) ont un nom +% avec le radical \lopt{bithe}. +% \end{description} +% +% Le Mongol Xalx, ou Mongol Moderne Courant (\emph{Modern Colloquial Mongolian}), est à~peu près aussi différent de +% la forme en écriture classique que l'anglais moderne est différent en orthographe phonétique (en supposant qu'il +% soit écrit en lettres Shaviennes) de l'orthographe hautement historique de l'Anglais Standard. +% Au-delà de ces différences. le mongol écrit en écriture classique conserve habituellement une quantité +% substantielle des aspects grammaticaux historiques qui le font ressembler un peu à~l'anglais élizabéthain. +% +% \item[Manchou] Le mandchou (\emph{mandju}) est une langue du groupe toungouze (\emph{tungusic}) étroitement +% liée au mongol. Bien que le +% mandchou ne soit virtuellement plus parlé, il a été la langue officielle pendant 300~ans de gouvernement mandchou +% sur la Chine de la dynastie Qing. De grandes quantités de documents officiels ont survécu, ainsi que certains +% des meilleurs dictionnaires multilingues jamais réalisés, par exemple le Pentaglote, ou Miroir des Cinq Langues, un +% dictionnaire avec 18671 entrées en cinq langues (mandchou, tibétain, mongol, ouïghour et chinois). +% Voir~\cite{pentaglot} pour plus de détails. L'écriture mandchoue est dérivée du mongol ouïghour par l'ajout +% de signes diacritiques sous la forme de points et de cercles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, écriture +% avec points et cercles). +% \end{description} +% \item[MS-DOS] (\emph{Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System}) Un ancien système +% d'exploitation pour ordinateurs personnels (PCs). Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, son principal +% inconvénient est l'utilisation de noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts (le schéma «~8+3~»), qui limite à~99 +% le nombre de mini-tables dans chaque sorte. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise +% en page sur deux colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et son option de +% langue \lopt{french2}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour +% préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} Une petite base de données bibliographiques pour les exemples +% de documents \exam{mtc-add.tex} et \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter} et le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddsection} et le +% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. +% Il montre aussi quel défi représente la gestion des mini-listes de flottants au niveau des sections. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} +% dans un document de classe \class{memoir} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant comment utiliser l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} +% pour masquer les entrées pour les appendices dans la table des matières principale et créer une table des +% matières au niveau partie pour les appendices. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{article}) utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{book} ou \class{report}) utilisant le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise +% en page sur deux colonnes et utilisant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document +% dont le premier chapitre est étoilé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage minitoc avec des parties et des +% chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant le problème des fontes lors de +% l'utilisation de la classe \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec +% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Un autre exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec +% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et +% \com{mtcgapafterheads}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des environnements +% spécialisés \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des paires de commandes: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} et \com{endmtchideinmainlof}, +% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} et \com{endmtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les +% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{article}. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les +% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{report}. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de +% document \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un +% livre avec une table des matières et des minitocs personnalisées. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la +% classe \class{memoir}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la +% classe \class{memoir}, dans le cas où vous souhaiteriez changer quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} Un document utilisant une minitoc composée, avec le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}, +% pour être placée dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} Un document montrant une interaction entre le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% et le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} +% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} +% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes et \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler la minitoc afin de +% l'aligner sur la gauche. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le +% paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une +% classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. Voir la +% section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} lorsque +% la table des matières est précédée de quelques chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec +% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document +% de la classe \class{article}. C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le +% paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} et leur interaction pour les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables. +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le +% paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcpolymtoc} +% et expliquant les \index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}«~entrées polymorphes~». +% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} Un paquetage qui est utilisé pour fournir des variantes des commandes +% standard \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine} et \com{PackageError} +% en leur ajoutant un argument optionnel pour un identificateur unique de message. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} Un paquetage qui est utilisé à~la place du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% pour ignorer toutes les commandes et tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. En fait, il les +% définit pour qu'elles/ils ne fassent rien. Utile si vous désirez une version de votre document sans aucune +% mini-table. +% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} Un\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} petit paquetage qui est chargé automatiquement si +% nécessaire lorsque vous utilisez la classe de document \class{memoir} dans une version \emph{incompatible} +% avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais corrigible. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item[\texttt{mu}] Une unité de longueur utilisée normalement en mode mathématique (\texttt{mu} signifie +% «~\emph{math unit}~»); 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un cadratin), qui est à~peu près la +% largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Donc la taille de \texttt{1mu} dépend de la fonte. +% La séparation entre les points des lignes de pointillés dans les mini-tables est exprimée en unités +% mathématiques. +% \item[\upack{multibib}] Le paquetage \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib} permet de créer des références +% à~plusieurs bibliographies à~l'intérieur d'un même document. Il fournit donc une fonctionnalité +% complémentaire à~des paquetages tels que \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} ou \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, +% qui permettent de créer une seule bibliographie pour plusieurs, mais différentes, parties du document. +% \item[\upack{multicol}] Le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} définit l'environnement \env{multicols} +% (avec un~<<~\textbf{s}~>>) pour composer du texte sur plusieurs colonnes. Utilisé dans certains exemples de documents. +% \item[\upack{multitoc}] Ce paquetage~\cite{multitoc} permet de composer seulement la table des matières, la +% liste des figures et/ou la liste des tableaux sur deux colonnes ou plus (en utilisant le paquetage +% pquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, bien sûr). +% Le nombre de colonnes peut être configuré par des commandes; les tables multi-colonnes peuvent être choisies +% par des options du paquetage. +% L'exemple de document \exam{mtc-3co.tex} utilise ce paquetage; voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\pack{natbib}] C'est un paquetage \LaTeXe{} (mais avec un certain support pour \LaTeX2.09)~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} +% qui agit comme interface généralisée pour des fichiers de styles bibliographiques standard et non-standard (\BibTeX). +% \item[\upack{needspace}] Le paquetage \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace} fournit des commandes pour réserver +% de l'espace en bas d'une page. S'il n'y a pas assez d'espace sur la page (colonne) courante, une nouvelle +% page (colonne) est commencée. +% \item[NFSS] Le «~Nouveau Schéma de Sélection de Fonte~» (\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}). +% Le système de sélection des fontes~\cite{fontsel} \LaTeXe{} +% a été publié pour la première fois sous le nom de «~\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~» (NFSS) en 1989, puis +% dans une seconde version en 1993. \LaTeXe{} inclut NFSS version~2 de manière standard. +% +% \lneed{7} +% Dans \LaTeX, chaque fonte (police) textuelle a cinq \emph{attributs}: +% \begin{description} +% \item[codage\,\footnotemark]\footnotetext{Et non \og{} encodage~\fg, qui est un anglicisme.} (\emph{encoding}) +% Un codage spécifie +% l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la fonte. Les deux codages les plus courants +% utilisés dans \LaTeX{} sont le codage «~texte \TeX~» de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} (OT1) et +% le codage «~texte \TeX{} étendu~» (T1) développé par les membres du \emph{\TeX{} Users Group} pendant une +% conférence sur \TeX{} à~Cork en~1990 (d'où son nom informel de «~codage de Cork~»). Voir~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. +% \item[famille] (\emph{family}) Le nom d'une collection de fontes, habituellement groupées sous un nom commun +% par le fondeur de ces fontes. Par exemple, «~Adobe Times~», «~ITC Garamond~» et «~Computer Modern Roman~» +% de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} sont toutes des familles de fontes. +% \item[graisse] (\emph{series}) Elle détermine comment une fonte est épaisse (\emph{heavy}) ou +% étirée (\emph{extended}). Par exemple, «~medium weight~», «~narrow~» et «~bold extended~» sont toutes des graisses. +% \item[forme] (\emph{shape}) La forme des lettres à~l'intérieur d'une famille de fontes. Par exemple, +% «~italique~» (\emph{italic}), «~oblique~» et «~droit~» (\emph{upright}) (parfois appelé +% «~romain~» (\emph{roman})) sont toutes des formes de fontes. +% \item[taille] (\emph{size}) La taille de conception (\emph{design size}) de la fonte, par exemple «~10pt~». +% \end{description} +% +% \lneed{2} +% Dans \LaTeX, les valeurs possibles pour ces attributs ont reçu des acronymes courts. Les valeurs les plus +% courantes pour le codage d'une fonte sont données dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+1}. +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \changeskips +% \caption{Codages de fontes les plus courants}\label{t+nfss+1} +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{T1} & texte \TeX{} étendu («~codage de Cork~») \\ +% \texttt{TS1} & codages des symboles pour \LaTeX{} (latin)\\ +% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C} & texte \LaTeX{} (cyrillique)\\ +% \texttt{T3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}\\ +% \texttt{TS3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}, symboles supplémentaires\\ +% \texttt{T4} & texte \LaTeX{} (langues africaines)\\ +% \texttt{T5} & texte \LaTeX{} (vietnamien)\\ +% \texttt{T7} & texte \LaTeX{} (réservé pour le grec)\\ +% \texttt{OT1} & texte \TeX{} (comme défini par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OT2} & texte \TeX{} pour les langues en cyrillique (obsolète)\\ +% \texttt{OT3} & Alphabet phonétique international (obsolète)\\ +% \texttt{OT4} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue polonaise\\ +% \texttt{OT6} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue arménienne\\ +% \texttt{OML} & italique mathématique \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMS} & symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{OMX} & grands symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ +% \texttt{X2} & texte \LaTeX{} étendu (cyrillique)\\ +% \texttt{U} & inconnu \\ +% \texttt{L}\meta{xx} & un codage local\\ +% \texttt{L7x} & codage utilisé pour la langue lithuanienne\\ +% \texttt{LTH} & codage utilisé pour la langue thaïe\\ +% \texttt{LV1} & codage utilisé par quelques fontes de \texttt{VTeX}\\ +% \texttt{LY1} & alternative au \texttt{T1}, pour les logiciels Y\&Y\\ +% \texttt{PD1} & réalise le codage PDFDocEncoding pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\ +% \texttt{PU} & réalise le codage Unicode pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% ^^A \end{table} +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} +% ^^A \begin{table}[!p] +% ^^A \changeskips +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.50\textwidth} +% ^^A \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Familles de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+2} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Famille}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{cmr} & Computer Modern Roman \\ +% \texttt{cmss} & Computer Modern Sans \\ +% \texttt{cmtt} & Computer Modern Typewriter \\ +% \texttt{cmm} & Computer Modern Math Italic \\ +% \texttt{cmsy} & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ +% \texttt{cmex} & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ +% \texttt{ptm} & Adobe Times \\ +% \texttt{phv} & Adobe Helvetica \\ +% \texttt{pcr} & Adobe Courier\\ +% \texttt{lazy} & Symboles \LaTeX{} additionnels\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}% +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} +% ^^A \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Graisses les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+3} +% \centering +% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Graisse}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{ul}&Ultra fin\\ +% \texttt{el}&Extra fin\\ +% \texttt{l}&Fin\\ +% \texttt{sl}&Semi fin\\ +% \texttt{m} & Moyen (\emph{medium})\\ +% \texttt{sb} & Demi-gras (\emph{semi-bold}) \\ +% \texttt{b} &Bold \\ +% \texttt{eb} &Extra gras \\ +% \texttt{bx} & Gras étendu (\emph{bold extended})\\ +% \texttt{ub}&Ultra gras \\ +% \texttt{c} & Condensé (\emph{condensed})\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular}\hfill\null +% \end{minipage} +% \end{tabularx} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% \newlength{\ww} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \centering +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} +% \setlength{\ww}{.64\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\ww}{-1.5em} +% \begin{minipage}[t]{\ww} +% \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Formes de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4} +% {\begin{tabularx}{\ww}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Forme}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{n} & Normale (c'est-à-dire «~droite~» (\emph{upright}) ou «~romaine~» (\emph{roman})) \\ +% \texttt{it} & Italique \\ +% \texttt{sl} & Penchée (\emph{slanted}) (ou «~oblique~») \\ +% \texttt{sc} & Capitales et petites capitales (\emph{caps and small caps})\\ +% \texttt{u} & Italique redressée (\emph{upright italic}) \\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \end{minipage}% +% &&% +% \begin{minipage}[t]{.35\textwidth} +% \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Largeurs de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4a} +% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Largeur}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensé\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensé\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensé\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensé\\ +% \texttt{m}&50.0&Normal\\ +% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi étendu\\ +% \texttt{c}&50.0&Étendu\\ +% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra étendu\\ +% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra étendu\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{minipage}% +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% Les codages «~locaux~» sont destinés aux codages de fontes qui ne sont disponibles que localement, par +% exemple une fonte contenant le logo d'une organisation dans diverses tailles. +% +% \lneed{4} +% Il y a bien trop de familles de fontes pour les lister toutes, mais certaines familles courantes sont +% listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+2}. +% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour les graisses (\emph{series}) sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+3}. +% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la forme de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4}. +% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la largeur de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% La taille de fonte est spécifiée comme une dimension, par exemple \texttt{10pt} ou +% \texttt{1.5in} ou \texttt{3mm}; si aucune unité n'est spécifiée, \texttt{pt} est pris par défaut. Ces cinq +% paramètres spécifient chaque fonte \LaTeX{}, voir le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+5}, par exemple. +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \capstart +% \caption{Les cinq paramètres de fontes de quelques fontes}\label{t+nfss+5} +% \centering +% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{Spécification \LaTeX}} & +% \textbf{Fonte} & +% \textbf{Nom \TeX{}} \\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} & +% Computer Modern Roman 10 point & +% \texttt{cmr10} \\ +% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} & +% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & +% \texttt{cmssi12} \\ +% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} & +% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & +% \texttt{cmmi10} \\ +% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} & +% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & +% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Commandes de l'utilisateur pour les fontes}\label{t+nfss+6} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Commande utilisateur} & +% \textbf{Attribut} & +% \textbf{Valeur dans la classe} \class{article} \\ +% \midrule +% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{rmfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmr} \\ +% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{sffamily} & famille & \texttt{cmss} \\ +% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{ttfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmtt} \\ +% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{mdseries} & graisse & \texttt{m} \\ +% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{bfseries} & graisse & \texttt{bx} \\ +% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{upshape} & forme & \texttt{n} \\ +% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{itshape} & forme & \texttt{it} \\ +% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{slshape} & forme & \texttt{sl} \\ +% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{scshape} & forme & \texttt{sc} \\ +% \com{tiny} & taille & \texttt{5pt} \\ +% \com{scriptsize} & taille & \texttt{7pt} \\ +% \com{footnotesize} & taille & \texttt{8pt} \\ +% \com{small} & taille & \texttt{9pt} \\ +% \com{normalsize} & taille & \texttt{10pt} \\ +% \com{large} & taille & \texttt{12pt} \\ +% \com{Large} & taille & \texttt{14.4pt} \\ +% \com{LARGE} & taille & \texttt{17.28pt} \\ +% \com{huge} & taille & \texttt{20.74pt} \\ +% \com{Huge} & taille & \texttt{24.88pt}\\ +% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{texte normal}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% +% Ces cinq paramètres sont affichés chaque fois que \LaTeX{} donne un avertissement de débordement de boîte, +% par exemple: +% \begin{verse} +% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\ +% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,} +% \end{verse} +% \lneed{6} +% Le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+6} liste les commandes de fontes que l'utilisateur peut invoquer pour établir ces +% cinq attributs\,\footnote{Les valeurs utilisées par ces commandes sont déterminées par la classe du document.}. +% +% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de +% paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir plus haut). +% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de +% paquetage \optd{hints} (voir plus haut). +% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est l'opposée de +% \optd{listfiles} ci-dessus. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. +% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} Cette option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} charge le paquetage +% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). Elle évite des problèmes avec des +% commandes \com{cite} dans des commandes de sectionnement ou dans des captions (légendes). +% Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[Omega] Le système de typographie\,\footnote{L'essentiel (mais pas la totalité) de cette note provient de +% la documentation d'Omega \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}. +% Voir~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} pour plus d'informations.} +% Omega ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (de \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} et \xname{John}{Plaice}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Omega est une extension de \TeX{} conçue surtout afin d'améliorer les capacités multilingues de TeX. +% +% Quand le programme \TeX{} a été développé au milieu des années [mille neuf cent] soixante-dix +% par le professeur \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}, +% il a surtout été conçu pour la mise en page de textes mathématiques en anglais. Depuis lors \TeX{} a fait de grandes +% avancées dans des domaines scientifiques, littéraires et autres, dans tous +% les pays du monde. En 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a gelé \TeX{} avec pour objectif la +% stabilité. Cependant, il permet que le code \TeX{} soit utilisé comme base +% pour des développements futurs, à~condition que le système résultant +% soit distribué sous un autre nom. +% +% En Omega, tous les caractères et les pointeurs dans les structures de +% données sont de 32 bits plutôt que 8 bits, éliminant ainsi beaucoup de +% limitations triviales de \TeX. Omega permet aussi l'utilisation de +% multiples jeux de caractères en entrée et en sortie, et utilise des +% filtres programmables afin de traduire d'un jeu de caractères à~un +% autre, afin de faire de l'analyse contextuelle, etc. En interne, Omega +% utilise le jeu de caractères Unicode/ISO-10646. Omega soutient aussi +% l'utilisation de multiples directions d'écriture. +% +% Ces améliorations non seulement facilitent la tâche des utilisateurs de \TeX{} +% pour gérer des langues multiples et complexes telles que l'arabe, les +% langues indiennes, le khmer, le chinois, le japonais ou le coréen, dans +% un seul document, mais aussi forment la base de développements futurs +% dans d'autres domaines, tels le soutien de la couleur et de l'hypertexte. +% +% Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales d'Omega est +% appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). +% L'ajout à~Omega des extensions de \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est un projet +% distinct, connu sous le nom de «~\pack{Aleph}~» ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} et conduit par \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}. +% La version de \LaTeX\ pour \pack{Aleph} est connue sous le nom de +% «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). +% Il~y~a un système expérimental, nommé \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, qui regroupera +% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} et d'autres développements. +% Une voie prometteuse est \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} par~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, avec +% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}. +% \begin{table}[tp!] +% ^^A \changeskips +% \caption{Quelques systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex} +% \centering +% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc} +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\ +% &&+&&&&+\\ +% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\ +% &&&&&&\\ +% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7} +% &&&&&&\\ +% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}} +% \end{array} \] +% \end{table} +% \item[\feat{open}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement +% avant (ouverture, \emph{open}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un +% type donné de mini-table, pour forcer le style de page à~utiliser pour la page courante. +% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. +% \item[paquetage] (\emph{package}) +% Les paquetages\,\footnote{Ces informations ont été extraites de~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} puis adaptées et +% traduites.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Notez que j'utilise le terme <<~paquetage~>> pour traduire +% le terme anglais \emph{package}. D'autres +% préféreront <<~extension~>> (qui signifie <<~suffixe~>> en anglais), <<~package~>> (anglicisme), ou <<~module~>>; +% c'est une question de goût et d'habitude, sans plus.} sont un dispositif très important de \LaTeX. Ce sont des +% extensions aux commandes de base de \LaTeX{} qui sont écrites dans des fichiers dont les noms se terminent par +% \suffix{.sty} et qui sont chargés via la commande \com{usepackage} dans le préambule du document. Les paquetages +% peuvent être classés selon leur origine: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item les paquetages \textbf{centraux} (\emph{core}) (en fait, les paquetages \textbf{basiques} et \textbf{requis}) +% sont une partie fondamentale de l'installation de base de \LaTeX{} et sont donc complètement standard; +% \item les paquetages \textbf{outils} (\emph{tools}) forment un ensemble écrit par les membres de l'équipe +% \LaTeX3 et devraient toujours être présents dans l'installation; +% \item les paquetages \textbf{graphiques} (\emph{graphics}) sont un ensemble standardisé pour l'inclusion de +% dessins produits par d'autres programmes et pour la gestion des couleurs; ils sont au même niveau que +% les paquetages outils; +% \item les paquetages \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX}, publiés par +% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron, devraient +% être présents dans toute installation\,\footnote{Ils sont indispensables si vous utilisez beaucoup +% de mathématiques.}; +% \item les paquetages des \textbf{contributions} (\emph{contributed}) ont été proposés par de vrais +% utilisateurs; certains de ces paquetages se sont révélés comme étant «~essentiels~» dans l'utilisation +% standard de \LaTeX, mais tous sont utiles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item[partlof] Une liste des figures pour une partie. +% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlofs. +% \item[partlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une partie. +% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlots. +% \item[parttoc] Une table des matières pour une partie. +% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des parttocs. +% \item[PDF] \emph{Portable Document Format}~\cite{pdfspec}. Un descendant du langage PostScript d'Adobe, +% optimisé pour la navigation sur l'Internet. Il ajoute des dispositifs d'hypertexte, de substitution de fontes +% et de compression. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[\upack{placeins}] Le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}} +% permet de forcer les éléments flottants à~«~rester à~leur place~», en les empêchant de dériver au-delà d'une +% commande \com{FloatBarrier} vers une autre section. Pour l'utiliser, +% déclarez \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} dans le préambule et insérez des commandes +% \com{FloatBarrier} aux endroits que les éléments flottants ne devraient pas franchir, peut-être +% à~chaque \com{section}. L'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} le fait avec des +% options adéquates de \pack{placeins}, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}; +% voir la section~\vref{s+placing}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant la documentation du paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. +% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} Une\virage{} version de \LaTeX\ adaptée +% à~la langue polonaise (\lopt{polski}). A~été remplacée par le paquetage \pack{polski}. Voir~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. +% Mais le \emph{même} nom désignait aussi une version de \LaTeX\ adaptée à~la langue japonaise, +% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}. +% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk} +% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% et sa documentation; vous devriez l'adapter à~vos besoins. +% Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[points de conduite] (\emph{leaders}) Une séquence répétive de points (ou d'un autre petit caractère), +% espacés régulièrement, utilisée pour relier deux objets sur la même ligne (conduisant d'un titre à~un +% numéro de page dans une table des matières ou analogue). +% \item[polymorphe (entrée)] Une entrée\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} dans la table des matières, la +% liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux, qui change d'aspect selon l'endroit où elle apparaît (TdM +% principale, minitable, etc.); voir la section~\vref{ss+polym}. +% \item[PostScript] Un langage de description de page, par Adobe. Il décrit l'apparence d'une page, y~compris +% d'éléments tels que texte, graphiques et images scannées, vers une imprimante ou un appareil de +% visualisation. Introduit par Adobe en 1985, il est devenu le langage de choix dans l'impression de haute +% qualité. +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \item[préambule] (\emph{preamble}) Dans le fichier principal d'un document \LaTeX{} source, la partie de ce +% fichier qui se trouve entre les commandes \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} et +% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. Dans le préambule, vous pouvez insérer des déclarations globales et le +% chargement de paquetages par des commandes \com{usepackage}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[préparation] Les commandes de préparation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} préparent les fichiers auxiliaires +% pour les mini-tables d'un type donné. Une commande de~\emph{préparation} doit avoir été invoqué +% préalablement (et une seule fois) à~toute commande d'insertion pour le type de mini-table. Les commandes +% de préparation sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): +% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} +% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(niveau partie)\\ +% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(niveau chapitre)\\ +% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(niveau section)\\ +% \com{mtcprepare}&(tous niveaux) +% \end{tabular} +% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX, pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence. +% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est très semblable à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir +% plus haut. +% \begin{table}[tp] +% \changeskips +% \caption{Profondeurs pour les commandes de sectionnement}\label{t+j+depths} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} +% \toprule +% \textbf{Classe:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\ +% \midrule +% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\ +% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\ +% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\ +% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\ +% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\ +% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\ +% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\ +% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{table} +% \item[profondeur] Dans les classes de documents standard (et dans la plupart des classes) ayant des commandes se +% sectionnement, nous avons une notion de \textbf{profondeur} (\emph{depth}). La profondeur d'une commande de +% sectionnement détermine le niveau jusqu'auquel descend la numérotation dans son titre (selon la valeur du compteur +% \dcnt{secnumdepth}), et les entrées pour une commande de sectionnement données apparaissent dans la table +% des matières principale si la profondeur de cette commande de sectionnement est inférieure ou égale à~la +% valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}; consultez le tableau~\vref{t+j+depths} pour les profondeurs des commandes +% de sectionnement dans les principales classes de document. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Le mécanisme est analogue pour les parttocs, minitocs et secttocs, en utilisant les valeurs des compteurs +% \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} et \dcnt{secttocdepth}. Si vous utilisez des sous-figures ou +% des sous-tableaux, les mini-tables correspondantes utilisent des compteurs tels que +% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} +% et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \item[pseudo-chapitre] +% Ou chapitre étoilé. Un chapitre qui commence par une commande «~étoilée~» \com{chapter*}. +% Par défaut, il n'a pas +% d'entrée dans la table des matières. \com{chapter*} nécessite quelques précautions avec le paquetage +% \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{s+starred.chap}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{quotchap}] Le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} fournit des commandes pour ajouter des +% citations à~certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes standard de document \LaTeXe: +% \class{book} et \class{report}. Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% (voir le point~\vref{h.quotchap} et la section~\vref{faq.39}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[README] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% plus quelques informations utiles. +% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement: +% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous). +% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie +% et chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires). +% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui trie les fichiers +% du paquetage \upack{minitoc} en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe). +% Il devrait être exécuté après les scripts +% \scrp{imk} (obligatoire) et \scrp{emk} et/ou +% \scrp{fmk}, dans cet ordre. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. +% \item[\upack{romannum}] Le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} change les numéros (pour les commandes de +% sectionnement) engendrés par \LaTeX{} de chiffres arabes en chiffres romains. Ce paquetage utilise le +% paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.romannum} et la +% section~\vref{faq.40}). +% \item[\pack{rotating}] Le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} effectue toutes les sortes de rotations +% que vous pouvez souhaiter, y~compris celles de figures complètes. +% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] Le paquetage pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} fournit des commandes pour définir de +% nouveaux flottants de divers styles +% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, et des styles non définis); +% le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} fournit de nouveaux environnements (\env{sidewaysfigure} +% et \env{sidewaystable}) qui sont tournés de $90^\circ$ ou $270^\circ$. +% Mais qu'en est-t-il de nouveaux flottants tournés, par exemple un flottant avec filets et tourné? +% Ce paquetage rend ceci possible; il établit un pont entre les deux paquetages et étend aussi les commandes du +% paquetage \pack{float} pour définir des versions tournées des nouveaux flottants. +% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} est un programme d'emballage (\emph{wrapper}) +% pour \LaTeX\ et ses programmes associés. Son +% but est, étant donné un source \LaTeX\ à~traiter, de le compiler un nombre de fois suffisant pour résoudre +% toutes les références, en exécutant éventuellement des programmes satellites tels que \textbf{\BibTeX}, +% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., pour produire les fichiers de données adéquats. Il a des +% dispositifs pour effectuer certaines actions de nettoyage en post-traitement, comme de détruire les fichiers +% auxiliaires produits par \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. +% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. +% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. +% \item[sectionnement (commandes de)] Ce sont les commandes \LaTeX\ qui spécifies la structure logique de votre document. +% Les principales commandes de sectionnement sont \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section}, +% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph} et \com{subparagraph}. +% Certaines classes standard de documents n'ont pas la commande \com{chapter} (ainsi les classes +% \class{article} et \class{proc}), certaines n'ont pas de commandes de sectionnement (ainsi la classe +% \class{letter}). Dans ce dernier cas, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. Si certaines des +% commandes \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ne sont pas définies, les +% commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour le niveau associé ne sont pas disponibles. Si \com{chapter} est définie, +% les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section ne sont pas définies dans la version courante du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et les antérieures, mais si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais que +% \com{section} l'est, alors les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section sont définies. +% Voir la section~\vref{note+sectionning}. +% Dans les classes non-standard de documents, les commandes de sectionnement portant des noms non-standard ne +% peuvent pas être reconnues par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[sectlof] Une liste des figures pour une section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlofs. +% \item[sectlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une section. +% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlots. +% \item[\upack{sectsty}] Le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer +% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe: +% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. Ce paquetage fonctionne aussi avec +% les classes {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}: +% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sectsty} et la +% section~\vref{faq.28}). +% \item[secttoc] Une table des matières pour une section. +% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des secttocs. +% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (pour \LaTeXe) emprunte +% quelques définitions des classes standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} +% et les modifie afin d'imprimer les en-têtes de partie, chapitre, section, sous-section\ldots{} avec la +% variante Sans-Serif de la fonte courante. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sfheaders} et la +% section~\vref{faq.41}). +% \item[shell] Dans les systèmes d'exploitation Unix, analogues à~Unix et Linux, le \emph{shell} est un programme +% utilisé comme interface entre le système d'exploitation et l'utilisateur. Il peut aussi être utilisé comme +% un langage de programmation pour écrire des programmes ou \emph{scripts} afin de préparer de séquences de +% tâches utilisées de manière routinière. Les principaux \emph{shells} sont le \emph{shell} de Bourne (\textbf{sh}), +% le C~\emph{shell} (\textbf{csh}), le \emph{shell} de Korn (\textbf{ksh}), et leurs nombreux descendants +% (tels que \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.). +% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} Une option\imess{W0020} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle force l'utilisation de suffixes courts +% (3~caractères) dans les noms des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc. Cette option est inactive par défaut, mais +% est automatiquement activée si votre système d'exploitation requiert des suffixes courts. Voir +% \textbf{autoconfiguration} plus haut et la section~\vref{.8+3}. +% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] Le paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} permet de créer une autre table des +% matières dans un document, avec un autre titre et une autre profonteur que la table des matières principale. +% \item[SJIS] Le codage SJIS de caractères (pour le japonais), aussi connu sous le nom de MS-Kanji +% (Kanji pour Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}), +% consiste en deux jeux de caractères se recouvrant: celui surnommé Katakana demi-largeur (JIS X0201-1976, +% caractères codés sur 1~octet dans l'intervalle de \texttt{0xA1} à~\texttt{0xDF}) et le jeu de caractères JIS +% (pleine largeur) (JIS X0208-1990, associé aux points de codage restants). +% Cette information provient de~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} Une version of \LaTeX\ adaptée pour la langue suédoise. Voir~\cite{slatex}. +% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} Un paquetage~\cite{splitbib} \LaTeX\ qui permet de trier une bibliographie +% en catégories et sous-catégories; ceci est intéressant pour des listes de publications, pour grouper les +% références par sujet, par année,~... +% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] Le paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv} est destiné à~être utilisé par les +% auteurs de paquetages \LaTeX{} qui ont besoin de savoir quelles divisions de sectionnement sont fournies par +% la classe du document. +% provided by the document class. +% \item[strut] Un trait vertical invisible utilisé pour forcer une séparation minimale entre deux lignes de texte. +% Ce terme anglais signifiant «~étai~» est conservé car il fait partie du jargon \TeX{} et \LaTeX. +% \item[\upack{subfig}] Le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} permet l'inclusion de petites, +% «~sous-~» figures et tables. Il en simplifie le positionnement, l'ajout de légendes (\emph{captions}) et +% l'étiquetage à~l'intérieur d'un seul environnement \env{figure} ou \env{table}. De plus, ce paquetage +% permet que de tels sous-captions (sous-légendes) soient écrits dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des +% tableaux si vous le désirez. +% \item[\upack{subfigure}] Le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} est une version obsolète (par le même +% auteur) du paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. +% \item[suffixe] (\emph{extension}) Le nom d'un fichier est souvent constitué de 2~parties: un \emph{nom de base} +% et un \emph{suffixe}, séparées par un point. Sous certains anciens systèmes d'exploitation, le nom de base +% est limité à~8~caractères et le suffixe à~3~caractères (le schéma «~8+3~»). Voir aussi les sections~\vref{MS-DOS} +% et~\vref{.8+3}. Il est fortement recommandé d'avoir au plus un seul point dans un nom de fichier. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[TDM, TdM] Acronyme pour «~table des matières~» (\emph{TOC, ``table of contents''}). +% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}La \emph{\TeX~Directory Structure}~\cite{tds,ftds}; une structure de répertoires fortement +% recommandée pour ranger les fichiers de macros, fontes et autres fichiers systèmes \TeX{} indépendants de +% l'implantation; elle suggère aussi comment incorporer le reste des fichiers \TeX{} dans une seule structure; +% la \index{TDS}TDS a été pensée pour fonctionner sur tous les systèmes modernes. +% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} est un programme écrit par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}. +% Il est conçu pour la composition de textes et d'équations mathématiques. +% +% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a commencé le développement de \TeX{} en 1977 parce qu'il était +% frustré par la manière avec laquelle ses articles étaient publiés par +% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}. Il avait arrêté de soumettre des +% articles vers 1974 parce que \og{} le résultat final était trop pénible +% à~regarder \fg{}. \TeX{}, tel que nous l'utilisons aujourd'hui, est sorti en +% 1982 et a été amélioré au fil des ans. Ces dernières années \TeX{} a +% atteint une grande stabilité. Aujourd'hui \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} affirme qu'il n'y a +% virtuellement plus de \og{} bug \fg{}. Le numéro de version de \TeX{} tend +% vers $\pi$ et est actuellement $3.141592$. +% +% \TeX{} se prononce \og{} Tech \fg{}, avec un \og{} ch \fg{} comme dans le mot +% écossais \og{} Loch \fg{}. En alphabet phonétique cela donne +% \textbf{[tex]}\dots Dans un environnement \texttt{ASCII}, \TeX{} +% devient \texttt{TeX}. +% \item[\upack{thailatex}] Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex} permet de composer +% des documents en langue thaïe. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement serré des lignes dans +% les mini-tables. L'option contraire est \optd{loose}. +% \item[\upack{titlesec}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} permet de changer les titres de +% sectionnement. Parmi ses nombreux dispositifs, il permet des titres dans la marge, un format différent dans +% les pages de gauche et de droite, des filets au-dessus et en dessous du titre, etc. +% Malheureusement, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \item[\upack{titletoc}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} paquetage \pack{titletoc} est utile pour la mise +% en forme des entrées de la table +% des matières, en offrant la possibilité de changer de format au milieu du document, de regrouper des entrées +% en un seul paragraphe, d'avoir de jolies entrées en format libre, de faire des tables des matières +% partielles, etc. +% Malheureusement, il est avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Le fichier \xfile{titletoc.sty} ne fait pas partie du paquetage \pack{titlesec}; c'est un paquetage +% indépendant, mais il est décrit dans la documentation~\cite{titletoc} du paquetage \pack{titlesec}. +% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} Un fichier script file qui crée une hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{tds,ftds} (à~adapter +% pour votre système). +% \item[TOC] Acronyme pour «~\emph{table of contents}~», ou «~table des matières~». +% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} peut être utilisé pour ajouter une +% entrée pour la table des matières et/ou pour la bibliographie et/ou pour l'index dans la table des matières. +% Mais il nécessite quelques précautions si vous l'utilisez avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. +% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur de la table des matières. +% \item[\upack{tocloft}] Le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} offre des outils pour contrôler +% la conception typographique de la table des matières, de la liste des figures et de la liste des tables. De +% nouvelles sortes de «~liste des \ldots~» peuvent être définies. Si vous utilisez le paquetage +% \pack{tocloft} et le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, regardez la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}, sur la manière de +% traiter quelques problèmes mineurs de compatibilité. +% \item[\xfile{TODO}] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui liste quelques propositions de développement du +% paquetage, pas encore réalisées. Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus. +% \item[token] Un \emph{token}\,\footnote{Cette définition est tirée +% du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Gardons cet anglicisme bien pratique!} +% est soit (a)~un seul caractère avec son code de +% catégorie attaché (voir «~catcode~» plus haut), soit (b)~une séquence de contrôle. \virage{} Vous \emph{devriez} +% vous souvenir de deux choses importantes à~propos des \emph{tokens} de \TeX: (1)~Une séquence de contrôle est +% considérée comme étant un seul objet qui n'est plus composée d'une suite de symboles. En conséquence, les noms longs +% de séquences de contrôle ne sont pas plus difficiles à~traiter par \TeX\ que les noms courts, une fois qu'ils +% ont été remplacés par des \emph{tokens}. De plus, les espaces ne sont pas ignorés après les séquences de +% contrôle à~l'intérieur d'une liste de \emph{tokens}; la règle d'ignorance des espaces ne s'applique que dans un +% fichier d'entrée, au moment où les chaînes de caractères sont découpées en \emph{tokens}. (2)~Une fois qu'un +% code de catégorie a été attaché à~un \emph{token} caractère, cet attachement est permanent. Par exemple, si le +% caractère~`\verb|{|' était soudainement déclaré comme étant de catégorie~12 au lieu de catégorie~1, les +% les caractères `\verb|{|$_1$' déjà à~l'intérieur de listes de \emph{tokens} de \TeX\ resteraient encore de +% catégorie~1; seules les listes nouvellement construites contiendraient des \emph{tokens} `\verb|{|$_{12}$'. +% En d'autres termes, les caractères individuels reçoivent une interprétation figée dès qu'ils ont été lus depuis +% un fichier, selon la catégorie qu'ils ont au moment de la lecture. Les séquences de contrôle sont différents, +% car elles peuvent changer d'interprétation à~tout moment. Les processus digestifs de \TeX\ savent toujours +% exactement ce qu'un \emph{token} signifie, parce que le code de catégorie apparaît dans le \emph{token} +% lui-même; mais lorsque les processus digestifs rencontrent un \emph{token} séquence de contrôle, ils doivent +% examiner la définition courante de cette séquence de contrôle afin d'en trouver la signification. +% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] Le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} (de \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} fournit une +% méthode rapide pour définir de nouveaux types de flottants en \LaTeX. Un seule commande définit un nouveau +% flottant dans le même style que les types de flottants \env{figure} et \env{table} du noyau \LaTeX{} kernel. +% \item[\pack{txfonts}] Le paquetage \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts} fournit les fontes \texttt{TX}, qui comprennent +% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt +% \item des fontes romanes textuelles virtuelles utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec quelques +% symboles textuels modifiés ou additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1; +% \item {\textsf{des fontes sans empattement (sans serif) utilisant Adobe Helvetica (ou URW NimbusSanL) avec +% quelques symboles textuels additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}}; +% \item {\smooth\texttt{des fontes à~chasse fixe (dites <<~machine à~écrire~>>) dans\linebreak[4] les +% codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}}; +% \item des alphabets mathématiques utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec des métriques modifiées; +% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes mathématiques +% Computer Modern (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX et les lettres grecques de CMR); +% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes \AmS{} fonts (MSAM et MSBM); +% \item des fontes mathématiques de divers symboles. +% \end{enumerate} +% Toutes ces fontes sont en format Type~1 (dans des fichiers \suffix{.afm} et \suffix{.pfb}). +% Les fichiers \suffix{.tfm} et \suffix{.vf} nécessaires ainsi que les fichiers de paquetage \LaTeXe{} et +% fichiers <<~font map~>> (\suffix{.map}) pour \tool{dvips} sont fournis. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[UNIX] Un système d'exploitation moderne, disponible sur divers types d'ordinateurs et dans diverses +% variantes. Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, il a l'avantage d'utiliser des noms de fichiers avec des +% suffixes longs (la limite est trop haute pour que le nombre de mini-tables soit un problème). +% \item[UNIX (analogues~à)] Les systèmes d'exploitation analogues à~Unix, avec les mêmes avantages. Linux en est +% un bon exemple, mais il en existe d'autres. +% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} Un script PERL script, par \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, pour ajouter un type +% d'entrée \BibTeX{} \texttt{webpage}, +% et ajouter le support des champs généraux \texttt{url} et \texttt{lastchecked}, aux fichiers \suffix{.bst} +% de \BibTeX{} (du moins à~la plupart d'entre eux). Ajoute optionnellement un support basique pour les champs +% \texttt{eprint} et \texttt{doi}, et aussi le support pour \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}. +% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), aussi appelée UTF~2 ou FSS-UTF, est une représentation +% spéciale d'Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). Elle utilise des séquences de plusieurs octets de longueurs +% diverses, mais seules les séquences d'un, de deux ou de trois octets sont implantées dans \pack{CJK}. +% Les caractères ASCII seront utilisés tels quels --- sans cette propriété, il serait impossible d'utiliser +% UTF~8 avec \TeX. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\upack{varsects}] Le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer +% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe: +% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. +% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.varsects} et la +% section~\vref{faq.33}). +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \par\reversemarginpar +% \item[Wikipédia] La Wikipédia\index{Wikipedia=Wikipédia}\marginpar{\null\hfill% +% \raisebox{0cm}[2.87cm][0cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}}} +% est un projet d'encyclopédie libre, multilingue et de contenu ouvert (libre, neutre et vérifiable +% que chacun peut éditer et améliorer) géré par la \emph{Wikimedia Foundation} +% à~but non lucratif. Son nom est un assemblage des mots \emph{wiki} (un type de site Web collaboratif) et +% \emph{encyclopedia}. Lancé en 2001 par \name{Jimmy}{Wales} et \name{Larry}{Sanger}, c'est le projet de travail +% de référence général le plus vaste, celui qui croît le plus vite, et le plus populaire disponible sur l'Internet. +% \par\normalmarginpar +% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] Le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig} fournit les environnements \env{wrapfigure} et +% \env{wraptable} pour placer une figure ou un tableau sur le côté de la page et faire que le texte +% enveloppe cette figure ou ce tableau. +% \end{wdesc} +% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X} +% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} +% \item[\scrp{xmk}] Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui compose les fichiers exemples de documents et produit +% des documents PDF. +% \item[\upack{xr}] Le paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr} met en place un système pour les références externes +% (\emph{eXternal References}). J'en ai écrit la première version, mais elle avait de graves problèmes. +% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} a réécrit ce paquetage d'une manière bien meilleure et plus robuste. Avec sa permission, +% j'ai utilisé une partie de son code dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour réaliser les commandes de +% préparation (telles que \com{dominitoc}). Si vous utilisez aussi le paquetage +% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, utilisez \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} au lieu du paquetage \upack{xr}. +% \end{wdesc} +% \end{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation} +% \fi +% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt +% \minilot +% \egroup +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter describes the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package (version~\#61). +% +% This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in \xfile{minitoc.l}. See +% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% The files are sorted into ``classes'' below (a file can appear in more than one class). Each class specifies +% the function and the placement of its files. +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre décrit l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} (version~\#61). +% +% Ce paquetage contient de nombreux fichiers. La liste de tous les fichiers est donnée dans +% \xfile{minitoc.l}. Voir le tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% Les fichiers sont répartis en «~classes~» ci-dessous (un même fichier peut apparaître dans plusieurs classes). +% Chaque classe spécifie la fonction et le placement de ses fichiers. +% \fi +% \begin{table}[!p] +% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \def\CLA{class} +% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), first part}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \or\relax +% \def\CLA{classe} +% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), première partie}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \fi +% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip} +% \medskip +% \fboxsep=1em +% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth +% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries +% \flushleft +% \smash{\vphantom{\mpfootnotemark[0]}}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}% +% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns +% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french} +% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN0}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN1}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.sty} +% \item \xfile{mtcoff.sty} +% \item \xfile{mtcmess.sty} +% \item \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} +% \item \xfile{acadian.mld} +% \item \xfile{acadien.mld} +% \item \xfile{afrikaan.mld} +% \item \xfile{afrikaans.mld} +% \item \xfile{albanian.mld} +% \item \xfile{american.mld} +% \item \xfile{arab.mld} +% \item \xfile{arab2.mld} +% \item \xfile{arabi.mld} +% \item \xfile{arabic.mld} +% \item \xfile{armenian.mld} +% \item \xfile{australian.mld} +% \item \xfile{austrian.mld} +% \item \xfile{bahasa.mld} +% \item \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% \item \xfile{bahasam.mld} +% \item \xfile{bangla.mld} +% \item \xfile{basque.mld} +% \item \xfile{bengali.mld} +% \item \xfile{bicig.mld} +% \item \xfile{bicig2.mld} +% \item \xfile{bicig3.mld} +% \item \xfile{bithe.mld} +% \item \xfile{brazil.mld} +% \item \xfile{brazilian.mld} +% \item \xfile{breton.mld} +% \item \xfile{british.mld} +% \item \xfile{bulgarian.mld} +% \item \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} +% \item \xfile{buryat.mld} +% \item \xfile{buryat2.mld} +% \item \xfile{canadian.mld} +% \item \xfile{canadien.mld} +% \item \xfile{castillan.mld} +% \item \xfile{castillian.mld} +% \item \xfile{catalan.mld} +% \item \xmldo{chinese1} +% \item \xmldo{chinese2} +% \item \xfile{croatian.mld} +% \item \xfile{czech.mld} +% \item \xfile{danish.mld} +% \item \xfile{devanagari.mld} +% \item \xfile{dutch.mld} +% \item \xfile{english.mld} +% \item \xfile{english1.mld} +% \item \xfile{english2.mld} +% \item \xfile{esperant.mld} +% \item \xfile{esperanto.mld} +% \item \xfile{estonian.mld} +% \item \xfile{ethiopia.mld} +% \item \xfile{ethiopian.mld} +% \item \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} +% \item \xmldo{farsi1} +% \item \xmldo{farsi2} +% \item \xfile{farsi3.mld} +% \item \xfile{finnish.mld} +% \item \xfile{finnish2.mld} +% \item \xfile{francais.mld} +% \item \xfile{french.mld} +% \item \xfile{french1.mld} +% \item \xfile{french2.mld} +% \item \xfile{frenchb.mld} +% \item \xfile{frenchle.mld} +% \item \xfile{frenchpro.mld} +% \item \xfile{galician.mld} +% \item \xfile{german.mld} +% \item \xfile{germanb.mld} +% \item \xfile{germanb2.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek-mono.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld} +% \item \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld} +% \item \xfile{guarani.mld} +% \item \xmldo{hangul1} +% \item \xmldo{hangul2} +% \item \xmldo{hangul3} +% \item \xmldo{hangul4} +% \item \xmldo{hangul-u8} +% \item \xmldo{hanja1} +% \item \xmldo{hanja2} +% \item \xmldo{hanja-u8} +% \item \xfile{hebrew.mld} +% \item \xfile{hebrew2.mld} +% \item \xfile{hindi.mld} +% \item \xfile{hindi-modern.mld} +% \item \xfile{hungarian.mld} +% \item \xfile{icelandic.mld} +% \item \xfile{indon.mld} +% \item \xfile{indonesian.mld} +% \item \xfile{interlingua.mld} +% \item \xfile{irish.mld} +% \item \xfile{italian.mld} +% \item \xfile{italian2.mld} +% \item \xmldo{japanese} +% \item \xmldo{japanese2} +% \item \xmldo{japanese3} +% \item \xmldo{japanese4} +% \item \xmldo{japanese5} +% \item \xmldo{japanese6} +% \item \xfile{kannada.mld} +% \item \xfile{khalkha.mld} +% \item \xfile{latin.mld} +% \item \xfile{latin2.mld} +% \item \xfile{latinc.mld} +% \item \xfile{latinc2.mld} +% \item \xfile{latvian.mld} +% \item \xfile{latvian2.mld} +% \item \xfile{letton.mld} +% \item \xfile{letton2.mld} +% \item \xfile{lithuanian.mld} +% \item \xfile{lithuanian2.mld} +% \item \xfile{lowersorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{lsorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{magyar.mld} +% \item \xfile{magyar2.mld} +% \item \xfile{magyar3.mld} +% \item \xfile{malay.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-b.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} +% \item \xmldo{malayalam-omega} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} +% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} +% \item \xfile{manju.mld} +% \item \xfile{mexican.mld} +% \item \xfile{meyalu.mld} +% \item \xfile{mongol.mld} +% \item \xfile{mongolb.mld} +% \item \xfile{mongolian.mld} +% \item \xfile{naustrian.mld} +% \item \xfile{newzealand.mld} +% \item \xfile{ngerman.mld} +% \item \xfile{ngermanb.mld} +% \item \xfile{ngermanb2.mld} +% \item \xfile{norsk.mld} +% \item \xfile{norsk2.mld} +% \item \xfile{nynorsk.mld} +% \item \xfile{nynorsk2.mld} +% \item \xfile{occitan.mld} +% \item \xfile{occitan2.mld} +% \item \xfile{polish.mld} +% \item \xfile{polish2.mld} +% \item \xfile{polski.mld} +% \item \xfile{portuges.mld} +% \item \xfile{portuguese.mld} +% \item \xfile{romanian.mld} +% \item \xfile{romanian2.mld} +% \item \xfile{romanian3.mld} +% \item \xfile{russian.mld} +% \item \xfile{russianb.mld} +% \item \xfile{russianc.mld} +% \item \xfile{russian2m.mld} +% \item \xfile{russian2o.mld} +% \item \xmldo{russian-cca} +% \item \xmldo{russian-cca1} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lh} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyralt} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} +% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} +% \item \xfile{samin.mld} +% \item \xfile{scottish.mld} +% \item \xfile{serbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{serbianc.mld} +% \item \xfile{slovak.mld} +% \item \xfile{slovene.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish2.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish3.mld} +% \item \xfile{spanish4.mld} +% \item \xfile{swahili.mld} +% \item \xfile{swedish.mld} +% \item \xfile{swedish2.mld} +% \item \xmldo{thai} +% \item \xfile{turkish.mld} +% \item \xfile{uighur.mld} +% \item \xfile{uighur2.mld} +% \item \xfile{uighur3.mld} +% \item \xfile{UKenglish.mld} +% \item \xfile{ukraineb.mld} +% \item \xfile{ukrainian.mld} +% \item \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{USenglish.mld} +% \item \xfile{usorbian.mld} +% \item \xfile{vietnam.mld} +% \item \xfile{vietnamese.mld} +% \item \xfile{welsh.mld} +% \item \xfile{xalx.mld} +% \item \xfile{xalx2.mld} +% \item \xfile{xalx3.mld} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN2}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{INSTALL}, \xfile{README}, \xfile{TODO}, +% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN3}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \footnotetext{See continuation in table~\vref{t+files2}.} +% \or\relax +% \footnotetext{Voir la suite dans le tableau~\vref{t+files2}.} +% \fi +% \end{minipage}} +% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!tp] +% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \def\CLA{class} +% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), second part}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \or\relax +% \def\CLA{classe} +% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace} +% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} +% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), seconde partie}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l} +% \fi +% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip} +% \medskip +% \fboxsep=1em +% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth +% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries +% \flushleft +% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns +% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french} +% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN4}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.bug} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.sum} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN5}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.bib} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre} +% \item \xfile{en-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN6}):}}}]\NL +% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax +% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \or\relax +% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \fi} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN7}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}\isuffix{.lan} +% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre} +% \item \xfile{franc.sty}, \xfile{frbib.sty}, \xfile{frnew.sty} +% \item \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN8}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.pdf} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN9}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN10}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk} +% ^^A \item \xfile{duplex2v.pro} +% \end{itemize} +% \medskip +% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN11}):}}}]\NL +% \begin{itemize} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \leftmargin=0pt +% \listparindent=1em +% \item \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}} +% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep +% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep) +% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}% +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth} +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption[List of the graphic files]{List of the graphic files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1} +% \or\relax +% \caption[Liste des fichiers graphiques]{Liste des fichiers graphiques (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1} +% \fi +% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \columnseprule=.4pt +% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns +% \xgrf{lamed3.png}, +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}} +% \end{table} +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep +% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep) +% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}% +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth} +% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} +% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption[List of the flag files]{List of the flag files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2} +% \or\relax +% \caption[Liste des fichiers drapeaux]{Liste des fichiers drapeaux (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2} +% \fi +% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight +% \columnseprule=.4pt +% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}} +% \end{table} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{enumerate}[(1)] +% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN0}The files \xfile{minitoc.ins} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% are the basic source files of this package. The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} loads +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} but selects the french documentation. +% The language selection is done by using +% \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN0}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx} +% sont les fichiers sources basiques de ce paquetage. Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} charge +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} mais sélectionne la documentation en français. La sélection de la +% langue est faite en utilisant des constructions \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} +% \ldots\ \com{fi}. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN1}The files \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, +% \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, +% and \emph{all}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} +% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} and \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} files are the package +% itself\,\footnote{The large number of \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files is (partially) a consequence +% of the fact that some languages have +% aliases (or dialects) and hence one \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file for each name (a \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file may load +% another one) and, if necessary, a \suffix{.mlo} file; the english and french languages are evident examples. +% For some languages, the multiplicity of the \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files corresponds to a multiplicity of fonts +% and/or encodings (chinese, greek, japanese, korean, malayalam, polish, russian, serbian), or even +% for spelling reforms (german, greek, norsk). \emph{Note that the presence of +% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.} Since version~\#50, the \upack{minitoc} package signals the +% missing \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files and gives their list in a warning message.}. +% +% The table~\vref{t+languages} lists the available languages; for each of these languages, a +% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file is available; the languages in parentheses are aliases of a main language +% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file of that main language. +% +% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} is a temporary fix for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class. +% +% The files of this class must be \emph{all} installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds the \suffix{.sty} files. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN1}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, +% \xfile{mtcmess.sty} +% et \emph{tous}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} +% les fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} et \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} constituent le +% paquetage lui-même\,\footnote{Le grand nombre de fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} est (en partie) +% une conséquence du fait que certaines +% langues ont des alias (ou dialectes) et donc un fichier \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque nom (un fichier +% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} peut en charger un autre) et, si nécessaire, un fichier \suffix{.mlo}; +% les langues \emph{english} et \emph{french} sont des exemples évidents. +% Pour certaines langues, la multiplicité des fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} correspond à~une multiplicité de fontes +% et/ou de codages (chinois, grec, japonais, coréen, malayalam, polonais, russe, serbe), ou même à~des +% réformes de l'orthographe (allemand, grec, norvégien). \emph{Notez que la présence du fichier +% \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.}. Depuis la version~\#50, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} signale les +% fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} manquants et en donne une liste dans un message d'avertissement.}. +% +% Le tableau~\vref{t+languages} liste les langues disponibles; pour chacune de ces langues, un fichier +% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} est disponible; les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue +% principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de cette langue principale. +% +% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} est une correction temporaire pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}. +% +% Les fichiers de cette classe doivent être \emph{tous} installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve +% les fichiers \suffix{.sty}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN2}Informative text files: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \xfile{INSTALL} is a file describing the installation of the package. +% You are (almost) reading it (but it is shorter). +% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contains the list of all files of the \upack{minitoc} distribution. See +% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \item \xfile{README} is a file describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package, +% plus some useful infos. +% \item \xfile{TODO} lists some suggested developments of the package, not yet implemented. +% Comments and suggestions are welcome. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \label{IN2}Fichiers informatifs textuels: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \xfile{INSTALL} est un fichier décrivant l'installation du paquetage. À~part la langue, +% vous êtes (presque) en train de le lire (mais il est plus court). +% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contient la liste de tous les fichiers de la distribution de +% \upack{minitoc}. Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \item \xfile{README} est un fichier décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, +% plus quelques informations utiles. +% \item \xfile{TODO} liste quelques propositions de développement du paquetage, pas encore réalisées. +% Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN3}Examples of documents: +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}, +% are example files, to play with. +% The associated \suffix{.pdf} files are provided. +% Another (\emph{short}) examples are welcome. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN3}Exemples de documents: +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}, +% sont des exemples de fichiers, avec lesquels vous pouvez jouer. +% Les fichiers \suffix{.pdf} associés sont fournis. +% D'autres exemples (\emph{courts}) sont les bienvenus. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum} +% are plain text documentation: list of problems (faq, see chapter~\vref{FAQ}) and summary of commands +% (see chapter~\vref{c+memento}). +% \or\relax +% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum} +% sont de la documentation en texte pur: liste des problèmes (questions fréquemment posées, voir le +% chapitre~\vref{FAQ}) et sommaire des commandes (voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}). +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, and +% \xfile{minitoc.bib} are the source of the documentation in (non perfect) english. +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} is the common preamble code for the documentation. +% \else\relax +% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et +% \xfile{minitoc.bib} forment le code source de la documentation en anglais (ou presque). +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} est le code de préambule commun pour la documentation. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN6} +% {\rmfamily\slshape The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}; +% they are images to include.} +% \or\relax +% \label{IN6} +% {\rmfamily\slshape La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}; +% ce sont des images à~inclure.} +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, +% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} are the source +% (and tools) of the documentation in french\,\footnote{This seems rather strange. In fact, the english and +% french documentations are both contained in the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file. \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sets +% a flag then +% loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; hence the file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is much smaller than \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. +% Thus, \xfile{minitoc.ins} contains also some utilitary files which are automatically created (some +% \suffix{.sty} files, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}). +% The english and french versions are not word-by-word translations, but they are in parallel in the +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file, and this helps the maintenance.}. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, +% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} sont les codes sources +% (et les outils) pour la documentation en français\,\footnote{Ceci peut sembler assez étrange. En fait, les +% documentations en anglais et en français sont toutes deux contenues dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} établit un indicateur puis charge \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; en conséquence, le fichier +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est bien plus petit que \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Donc, \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% contient aussi certains fichiers utilitaires qui sont créés automatiquement (quelques fichiers +% \suffix{.sty}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, +% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}). +% Les versions anglaise et française ne sont pas des traductions mot-à-mot, mais elles sont en +% parallèle dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, et ceci aide pour la maintenance.}. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf}, +% is the documentation in (non perfect) english, in PDF format. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf} +% forme la documentation en anglais (ou presque), en format PDF. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} +% is the documentation in french, in PDF format. The french documentation and its source +% files must not be left out. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} +% forme la documentation en français, en format PDF. La documentation en français +% et ses fichiers sources ne doivent pas être omis. +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} is a shell script\,\footnote{You can sip a big cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} +% while this script is running! Be patient.} +% to prepare the package and its documentation; +% the \scrp{pmk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} +% and \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} directories to not waste disk space under your home directory; +% there are also six partial scripts\footnote{In fact, \scrp{pmk} assembles the scripts +% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk}, and \scrp{tmk} (but \emph{not} \scrp{cmk}).} +% and a supplementary one, \scrp{cmk} (all to be adapted): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \scrp{imk}, which prepares the package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running +% \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}; it creates also some \suffix{.sty} files necessary to prepare +% the documentation but that are to be installed with it; +% the \scrp{imk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} directory to not waste disk space +% under your home directory; +% \item \scrp{emk}, which prepares the english documentation from +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{fmk}, which prepares the french documentation from +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{xmk}, which typesets the example files (in PDF format); +% \item \scrp{rmk}, which sorts the files into classes (one directory for each class); +% \item \scrp{tmk}, which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} +% (to be tailored to your system); see table~\vref{t+TDS}; this hierarchy is saved +% in \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}; +% \item \scrp{cmk}, which converts the PDF documentation files into PostScript files. +% \end{itemize} +% These scripts are currently written in C-shell, but they are very simple, and should be easy to +% convert in another classic shell. The documentation in PostScript format is no more distributed on +% the CTAN archives, but the \scrp{cmk} script can prepare it from the documentation in PDF format +% (recto-verso printing). +% \or\relax +% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} est un script \emph{shell}\,\footnote{Vous avez le temps de déguster un +% grand cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} pendant que ce script s'exécute! Soyez patients.} pour préparer le paquetage +% et sa documentation; +% le script \scrp{pmk} utilise les répertoires \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} +% et \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour ne pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% il y~a aussi six scripts partiels\,\footnote{En fait, \scrp{pmk} regroupe les scripts +% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (mais \emph{pas} +% \scrp{cmk}).} et un supplémentaire, \scrp{cmk} (tous à~adapter): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \scrp{imk}, qui prépare le paquetage en partant de +% \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}; +% il crée aussi quelques fichiers \suffix{.sty} nécessaires pour préparer la documentation et +% ils doivent être installés avec elle; +% le script \scrp{imk} utilise le répertoire \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} pour ne pas gâcher +% de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% \item \scrp{emk}, qui prépare la documentation anglaise en partant de +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{fmk}, qui prépare la documentation française en partant de +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; +% \item \scrp{xmk}, qui compose les fichiers d'exemples (en format PDF); +% \item \scrp{rmk}, qui trie les fichiers en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe); +% \item \scrp{tmk}, qui crée une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{ftds,tds} +% (à~adapter pour votre système); voir le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}; cette hiérarchie est sauvegardée +% dans \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}; +% \item \scrp{cmk}, qui convertit les fichiers PDF de la documentation en fichiers PostScript. +% \end{itemize} +% Ces scripts sont actuellement écrits en C-\emph{shell}, mais ils sont très simples et devraient être +% faciles à~convertir dans tout autre \emph{shell} classique. La documentation en format PostScript +% n'est plus distribuée sur les archives CTAN, mais le script \scrp{cmk} peut la préparer à~partir de +% celle en format PDF (impression recto-verso). +% \fi +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} is a ZIP-archive file containing a +% \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy with all the files of the \upack{minitoc} package. +% \or\relax +% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} est un fichier archive ZIP contenant une +% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS avec tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{enumerate} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some remarks about the \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} and \scrp{pmk} scripts (which you should tailor to your needs): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{with \scrp{rmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the hierarchy is \emph{not} \index{TDS}TDS-compliant; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN0}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.dtx} +% and \suffix{.ins} files; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN1}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.sty} files; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) and~(\ref{IN10}) +% must be installed in a separate directory, but must not be left out; +% \item the files of~(\ref{IN8}) and~(\ref{IN9}) must be installed as on-line documentation; +% \item the directories created by the \scrp{rmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} to not waste disk space +% under your home directory. +% \end{enumerate} +% \item \textbf{with \scrp{tmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the hierarchy is \index{TDS}TDS-compliant; +% \item each file appears only once in the hierarchy; +% \item the installation is much easier: you only need a \suffix{.zip} or a \suffix{.tar} (or \suffix{.tgz}) +% dump file\footnote{The \scrp{tmk} script creates the \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} file.} of the hierarchy +% to be deployed into the installed \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy; you should examine \emph{very carefully}\Virage{} (by +% comparison with your \index{TDS}TDS installation) and tailor the \scrp{tmk} script before using it; +% \item the directories created by the \scrp{tmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space +% under your home directory; +% \item the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) should not be installed; it is just a method to help making +% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant installation. +% \end{enumerate} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \item \textbf{with \scrp{pmk}:} +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item the \scrp{pmk} script performs the actions of \scrp{imk} (preparation of the basic files), \scrp{emk} and +% \scrp{fmk} (preparation of the english and french documentation), \scrp{xmk} (preparation of the +% examples of documents), \scrp{rmk} and \scrp{tmk} (repartition of files into classes and in +% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy);\par +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% \item the directories created by the \scrp{pmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and +% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory; +% ^^A \item the \scrp{pmk} script creates its directories under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and +% ^^A \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory. +% \par\end{RaggedRight} +% \item the \emph{same precautions}\Virage{} as for \scrp{tmk} are needed. +% \end{enumerate} +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Quelques remarques sur les scripts \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} et \scrp{pmk} (que vous devriez adapter à~vos besoins): +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{rmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item la hiérarchie \emph{n'est pas} conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN0}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} +% et \suffix{.ins}; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN1}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les +% fichiers \suffix{.sty}; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) et~(\ref{IN10}) +% doivent être installés dans un répertoire distinct, mais ne doivent pas être omis; +% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN8}) et~(\ref{IN9}) doivent être installés comme documentation en ligne; +% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{rmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} pour de pas gâcher de +% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base. +% \end{enumerate} +% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{tmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item la hiérarchie est conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS; +% \item chaque fichier n'apparaît qu'une seule fois dans la hiérarchie; +% \item l'installation est plus facile: il vous suffit d'un fichier de sauvegarde \suffix{.zip} ou \suffix{.tar} +% (ou \suffix{.tgz}) de la hiérarchie\,\footnote{Le script \scrp{tmk} crée le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.} +% pour le déployer dans la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS installée; +% vous devriez examiner \emph{très soigneusement}\Virage{} (par +% comparaison avec votre installation de la \index{TDS}TDS) et adapter le script \scrp{tmk} avant de l'utiliser; +% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{tmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de +% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% \item le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) ne devrait pas être installé; c'est juste une méthode +% pour aider à~faire une installation conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS. +% \end{enumerate} +% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{pmk}:} +% \nopagebreak[4] +% ^^A \begin{RaggedRight} +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item le script \scrp{pmk} effectue les actions de \scrp{imk} (préparation des fichiers de base), \scrp{emk} et +% \scrp{fmk} (préparation de la documentation en anglais et en français), \scrp{xmk} (préparation des +% exemples de documents), \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (répartition des fichiers en classes et dans une +% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS); +% \item le script \scrp{pmk} crée ses répertoires sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} et +% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; +% \item les \emph{mêmes précautions}\Virage{} que pour \scrp{tmk} sont nécessaires. +% \end{enumerate} +% ^^A \end{RaggedRight} +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \begin{table}[!t] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \def\TDSPH{\vphantom{\'TDSj}} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \caption{A TDS-compliant hierarchy for the \upack{minitoc} files}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS} +% \def\tdstitle{TDS~Root~Directory\TDSPH} +% \or\relax +% \caption{Une hiérarchie conforme à~la TDS pour les fichiers de \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS} +% \def\tdstitle{Répertoire~racine~TDS\TDSPH} +% \fi +% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}@{}} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{\large\textbf{\tdstitle}}\\ +% \midrule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c|}{\texttt{bibtex/}}&\texttt{doc/}&\texttt{makeindex/}&\texttt{scripts/}&\texttt{source/}&\texttt{tex/}\\ +% \cmidrule(r){1-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7} +% \texttt{bib/}&\texttt{bst/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{latex/}\\ +% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7} +% \texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\textbf{(D)}&\textbf{(E)}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}\\ +% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}% +% \textbf{(A)}&\textbf{(B)}&\textbf{(C)}&\multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(F)}&\textbf{(G)}\\ +% ^^A \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}% +% \cmidrule{3-4}% +% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\texttt{examples/}&\texttt{images/}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\ +% \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}% +% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(H)}&\textbf{(I)}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\ +% \morecmidrules\cmidrule[\heavyrulewidth]{1-7} +% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{% +% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize +% \raggedright +% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt} +% \begin{multicols}{2} %^^A \raggedcolumns\setcounter{unbalance}{5} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=2em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt +% \begin{description} +% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt +% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em +% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\textbf{(H)}} +% \parindent=0pt +% \def\sepitem{\vspace*{-1.5\baselineskip}\item[]\null\hspace*{-2em}\hrulefill\pagebreak[1]} +% \item[(A)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, \xfile{minitoc.bib}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(B)\hfill\null]~\unskip\isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(C)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{INSTALL}, +% \xfile{README}, +% \xfile{TODO}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, +% \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}, +% \xfile{minitoc.bug}, +% \xfile{minitoc.l}, +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, +% \xfile{minitoc.pdf}, +% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, +% \xfile{minitoc.sum}, +% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, +% \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, +% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(D)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(E)\hfill\null]~\unskip\scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, +% \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(F)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.ins}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(G)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty}, +% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld}, \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(H)\hfill\null]~\unskip\exam{mtc-2c.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, +% \exam{mtc-add.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-art.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.pdf}, +% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}; +% \sepitem +% \item[(I)\hfill\null] +% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax +% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \or\relax +% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. +% \fi} +% \end{description} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{minipage}}\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \smash{% +% \ixfile{acadian.mld}% +% \ixfile{acadien.mld}% +% \ixfile{afrikaan.mld}% +% \ixfile{afrikaans.mld}% +% \ixfile{albanian.mld}% +% \ixfile{american.mld}% +% \ixfile{arabic.mld}% +% \ixfile{arabi.mld}% +% \ixfile{arab.mld}% +% \ixfile{arab2.mld}% +% \ixfile{armenian.mld}% +% \ixfile{australian.mld}% +% \ixfile{austrian.mld}% +% \ixfile{bahasai.mld}% +% \ixfile{bahasa.mld}% +% \ixfile{bahasam.mld}% +% \ixfile{bangla.mld}% +% \ixfile{basque.mld}% +% \ixfile{bengali.mld}% +% \ixfile{bicig.mld}% +% \ixfile{bicig2.mld}% +% \ixfile{bicig3.mld}% +% \ixfile{bithe.mld}% +% \ixfile{brazilian.mld}% +% \ixfile{brazil.mld}% +% \ixfile{breton.mld}% +% \ixfile{british.mld}% +% \ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}% +% \ixfile{bulgarian.mld}% +% \ixfile{buryat.mld}% +% \ixfile{buryat2.mld}% +% \ixfile{canadian.mld}% +% \ixfile{canadien.mld}% +% \ixfile{castillan.mld}% +% \ixfile{castillian.mld}% +% \ixfile{catalan.mld}% +% \ixmldo{chinese1}% +% \ixmldo{chinese2}% +% \ixfile{croatian.mld}% +% \ixfile{czech.mld}% +% \ixfile{danish.mld}% +% \ixfile{devanagari.mld}% +% \ixfile{dutch.mld}% +% \ixfile{english.mld}% +% \ixfile{english1.mld}% +% \ixfile{english2.mld}% +% \ixfile{esperant.mld}% +% \ixfile{esperanto.mld}% +% \ixfile{estonian.mld}% +% \ixfile{ethiopia.mld}% +% \ixfile{ethiopian.mld}% +% \ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}% +% \ixmldo{farsi1}% +% \ixmldo{farsi2}% +% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}% +% \ixfile{finnish.mld}% +% \ixfile{finnish2.mld}% +% \ixfile{francais.mld}% +% \ixfile{french.mld}% +% \ixfile{french1.mld}% +% \ixfile{french2.mld}% +% \ixfile{frenchb.mld}% +% \ixfile{frenchle.mld}% +% \ixfile{frenchpro.mld}% +% \ixfile{galician.mld}% +% \ixfile{german.mld}% +% \ixfile{germanb.mld}% +% \ixfile{germanb2.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek-mono.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}% +% \ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}% +% \ixfile{guarani.mld}% +% \ixmldo{hangul1}% +% \ixmldo{hangul2}% +% \ixmldo{hangul3}% +% \ixmldo{hangul4}% +% \ixmldo{hangul-u8}% +% \ixmldo{hanja1}% +% \ixmldo{hanja2}% +% \ixmldo{hanja-u8}% +% \ixfile{hebrew.mld}% +% \ixfile{hebrew2.mld}% +% \ixfile{hindi.mld}% +% \ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}% +% \ixfile{hungarian.mld}% +% \ixfile{icelandic.mld}% +% \ixfile{indonesian.mld}% +% \ixfile{indon.mld}% +% \ixfile{interlingua.mld}% +% \ixfile{irish.mld}% +% \ixfile{italian.mld}% +% \ixfile{italian2.mld}% +% \ixmldo{japanese}% +% \ixmldo{japanese2}% +% \ixmldo{japanese3}% +% \ixmldo{japanese4}% +% \ixmldo{japanese5}% +% \ixmldo{japanese6}% +% \ixfile{kannada.mld}% +% \ixfile{khalkha.mld}% +% \ixfile{latin.mld}% +% \ixfile{latin2.mld}% +% \ixfile{latinc.mld}% +% \ixfile{latinc2.mld}% +% \ixfile{latvian.mld}% +% \ixfile{latvian2.mld}% +% \ixfile{letton.mld}% +% \ixfile{letton2.mld}% +% \ixfile{lithuanian.mld}% +% \ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}% +% \ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{lsorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{magyar.mld}% +% \ixfile{magyar2.mld}% +% \ixfile{magyar3.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}% +% \ixmldo{malayalam-omega}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}% +% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}% +% \ixfile{malay.mld}% +% \ixfile{manju.mld}% +% \ixfile{mexican.mld}% +% \ixfile{meyalu.mld}% +% \ixfile{mongol.mld}% +% \ixfile{mongolb.mld}% +% \ixfile{mongolian.mld}% +% \ixfile{naustrian.mld}% +% \ixfile{newzealand.mld}% +% \ixfile{ngermanb.mld}% +% \ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}% +% \ixfile{ngerman.mld}% +% \ixfile{norsk.mld}% +% \ixfile{norsk2.mld}% +% \ixfile{nynorsk.mld}% +% \ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}% +% \ixfile{occitan.mld}% +% \ixfile{occitan2.mld}% +% \ixfile{polish.mld}% +% \ixfile{polish2.mld}% +% \ixfile{polski.mld}% +% \ixfile{portuges.mld}% +% \ixfile{portuguese.mld}% +% \ixfile{romanian.mld}% +% \ixfile{romanian2.mld}% +% \ixfile{romanian3.mld}% +% \ixfile{russian.mld}% +% \ixfile{russian2m.mld}% +% \ixfile{russian2o.mld}% +% \ixfile{russianb.mld}% +% \ixmldo{russian-cca1}% +% \ixmldo{russian-cca}% +% \ixfile{russianc.mld}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}% +% \ixmldo{russian-lh}% +% \ixfile{samin.mld}% +% \ixfile{scottish.mld}% +% \ixfile{serbianc.mld}% +% \ixfile{serbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{slovak.mld}% +% \ixfile{slovene.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish2.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish3.mld}% +% \ixfile{spanish4.mld}% +% \ixfile{swahili.mld}% +% \ixfile{swedish.mld}% +% \ixfile{swedish2.mld}% +% \ixmldo{thai}% +% \ixfile{turkish.mld}% +% \ixfile{uighur.mld}% +% \ixfile{uighur2.mld}% +% \ixfile{uighur3.mld}% +% \ixfile{UKenglish.mld}% +% \ixfile{ukraineb.mld}% +% \ixfile{ukrainian.mld}% +% \ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{USenglish.mld}% +% \ixfile{usorbian.mld}% +% \ixfile{vietnamese.mld}% +% \ixfile{vietnam.mld}% +% \ixfile{welsh.mld}% +% \ixfile{xalx.mld}% +% \ixfile{xalx2.mld}% +% \ixfile{xalx3.mld}% +% }% +% \end{table} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contains a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of the +% \upack{minitoc} package. It has been prepared by the \scrp{pmk} or \scrp{tmk} scripts. +% \or\relax +% Le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contient une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS de tous les +% fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il a été préparé par l'un des scripts \scrp{pmk} ou \scrp{tmk}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and hence \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} are (not so trivial) examples of using \upack{minitoc} +% with \pack{hyperref}. They show how the combinaison of these two packages may be useful. +% \or\relax +% Notez que \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et donc \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sont des exemples (non triviaux) de l'utilisation de +% \upack{minitoc} avec \pack{hyperref}. Ils montrent combien la combinaison de ces deux paquetages peut être +% utile. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt +% \minitoc +% \egroup +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This chapter summarizes the evolution of the \upack{minitoc} package, year by year. A more detailed history is +% available in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. Many minor changes are skipped here. +% +% In fact, this chapter is for the average user of the package, who wants to have an overview ot its evolution; +% the chapter ``Changes History'' is more oriented towards peoples interested in the code of the package and the +% problems encountered during its development. +% \or\relax +% Ce chapitre résume l'évolution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, année par année. Un historique plus détaillé est +% disponible dans «~Historique des modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. De nombreuses modifications mineures ne +% sont pas citées ici. +% +% En fait, le présent chapitre s'adresse à~l'utilisateur normal du paquetage, qui voudrait avoir une idée générale +% de son évolution; le chapitre «~Historique des modifications~» s'adresse par contre aux personnes qui seraient +% intéressées par le code du paquetage et les problèmes rencontrés lors de son développement. +% \fi +% +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The origins} +% The \upack{minitoc} package was initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} in~1990 and~1991, with major contributions +% by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. But \upack{minitoc} suffered of a major weakness: when the number of chapters +% exceeded~9 or~10, you got a rather mysterious error message: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|No room for a new \write.| +% \end{quote} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les origines} +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fut initialement écrit par \name{Nigel}{Ward}, en~1990 et~1991, avec des contributions +% majeures de \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. Mais \upack{minitoc} souffrait d'une faiblesse majeure: lorsque le nombre de chapitres +% dépassait~9 ou~10, vous obteniez un message d'erreur assez mystérieux: +% \begin{quote} +% \verb|No room for a new \write.| +% \end{quote} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As I needed the basic fonctionnality of this package (printing mini-tables of contents for each chapter), I looked further +% in its code and finally found the culprit: \upack{minitoc} used a \com{newwrite} command to create a new file for the +% contents table of each chapter, allocating a new file descriptor each time. But the number of file descriptors for +% writing is limited to~16 under \LaTeX\ (in fact, by the underlying \TeX\ program itself). As some descriptors are already +% used by \LaTeX, writing more than 9~or~10~chapters was too much. Such errors are difficult to find when testing on +% too small documents: with few chapters, everything goes fine. But on a real document, with many chapters, the mysterious +% error happens. +% \or\relax +% Comme j'avais besoin de la fonctionnalité basique de ce paquetage (imprimer une mini-table des matières pour chaque +% chapitre), j'ai regardé de plus près son code et finalement trouvé le maillon faible: \upack{minitoc} utilisait +% une commande \com{newwrite} pour créer un nouveau fichier pour la table de manières de chaque chapitre, +% en allouant un nouveau +% descripteur de fichier chaque fois. Mais le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers en écriture est limité à~16 sous +% \LaTeX\ (en fait, par le programme \TeX\ sous-jacent lui-même). Comme quelques descripteurs sont déjà utilisés par +% \LaTeX, écrire plus de 9~ou~10~chapitres allait trop loin. De telles erreurs sont difficiles à~trouver lors de tests +% sur de trop petits documents: avec peu de chapitres, tout se passe bien. Mais sur un document réel, avec de nombreux +% chapitres, l'erreur mystérieuse survient. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{New design in~1993} +% So I~decided (June~1993, when I took the maintenance of the package) to change the allocation method to always +% use the same file descriptor for all the +% mini-table of contents files. Some major improvements happened in 1993: the addition of the \pack{mtcoff} +% (\pack{minitocoff} at this time) +% package and a rewrite of \upack{minitoc} to extract the data from the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file, with a +% selection mechanism. +% Then a first solution for the short extension problem was added (still manual). An elementary system for the fonts +% in the mini-tables was added. In December 1993, the minilofs and minilots were added. +% \or\relax +% \section{Nouvelle conception en~1993} +% Donc je décidai (en juin~1993, lorsque je repris le support du paquetage) de changer la méthode d'allocation +% pour toujours utiliser le même descripteur de fichier pour tous les fichiers des mini-tables des matières. +% Quelques améliorations majeures furent faites en 1993: l'addition du paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (\pack{minitocoff} +% à~cette époque) et une ré-écriture +% de \upack{minitoc} pour extraire les données depuis le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, avec un mécanisme de +% sélection. Puis une première solution +% pour le problème des suffixes courts fut ajoutée (encore manuelle). Un système élémentaire pour les fontes dans +% les mini-tables fut ajouté. En décembre~1993, les minilofs et minilots furent ajoutées. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1994} +% The first improvements in 1994 were about the formating of the mini-tables: spacing was improved and the position +% of the title became ajustable (with the optional parameter of \com{minitoc} or \com{dominitoc}). But a major +% addition was done: part-level mini-tables (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) and, for articles, section-level +% mini-tables (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots). +% +% With the emergence of \LaTeXe, replacing the ageing \LaTeX2.09, some work was necessary to support the +% compatibility with this new version. This was not easy, but \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} and \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} gave +% me many helpful hints. +% +% Another major addition is the language option feature, with the concept of the \emph{minitoc language definition +% file} (or \suffix{.mld} file), coming from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, +% by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}. +% But at this time, these files were still named as \suffix{.sty} files. +% +% An important simplification is introduced by the notion of ``absolute numbering'', with avoids many problems when the +% chapters are not numbered the standard way (consecutively, starting from~1, with arabic digits). +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1994} +% Les premières améliorations en 1994 concernaient la mise en forme des mini-tables: l'espacement fut ajusté et la +% position du titre devient adaptable (avec le paramètre optionnel de \com{minitoc} ou \com{dominitoc}). Mais +% une addition majeure fut faite: les mini-tables au niveau partie (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) et, pour les articles, +% les mini-tables au niveau section (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots). +% +% Avec l'émergence de \LaTeXe, remplaçant \LaTeX2.09 vieillissant, un certain travail était nécessaire pour +% supporter la compatibilité avec la nouvelle version. Ce ne fut pas facile, mais \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} et +% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} m'apportèrent bien des conseils utiles. +% +% Une autre addition majeure est le système des options de langue, avec le concept de fichier minitoc de définition de +% langue (\emph{minitoc language definition file} ou fichier \suffix{.mld}), provenant du paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}. +% Mais à~cette époque, ces fichiers étaient encore nommés comme des fichiers \suffix{.sty}. +% +% Une simplification importante est introduite par la notion de «~numérotation absolue~», qui évite de nombreux +% problèmes lorsque les chapitres ne sont pas numérotés de manière standard (consécutivement, en commençant à~1, avec +% des chiffres arabes). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{No developments in~1995} +% Sorry, I was busy with an other project. +% \or\relax +% \section{Pas de développements en~1995} +% Désolé, j'étais très occupé par un autre projet. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1996} +% The very annoying problem with the starred sectionning commands received some (rather primitive) solutions, but it +% is very complex, so manual interventions are often required. +% +% The names of the minitoc language definition files take now the extension \suffix{.mld}, more specific, and english +% is the default language. Some new languages are added. +% +% The work on the starred sectionning commands continues. +% +% The \pack{minitocoff} companion package is renamed \pack{mtcoff} to keep its name short. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1996} +% Le très gênant problème avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées a reçu quelques solutions (assez primitives), +% mais il est très complexe, donc des interventions manuelles sont souvent nécessaires. +% +% Les noms des fichiers minitoc de définition de langue prennent maintenant le suffixe \suffix{.mld}, +% plus spécifique, et l'anglais (\loptd{english}) est la langue par défaut. Quelques nouvelles langues sont +% ajoutées (ceci continue autant que possible). +% +% Le travail sur les commandes de sectionnement étoilées continue. +% +% Le paquetage compagnon \pack{minitocoff} est renommé \pack{mtcoff} pour que son nom reste court. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1997} +% The problem of short extensions for files names under some operating systems is addressed via the +% new \opt{shortext} package option and by the new autoconfiguration feature. +% +% For the starred sectionning commands, the \com{addstarredchapter} command is added (with analog commands for starred +% parts and sections). +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1997} +% Le problème des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers sous certains systèmes d'exploitation est résolu via la +% nouvelle option de paquetage \opt{shortext} et le nouveau système d'autoconfiguration. +% +% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées, la commande \com{addstarredchapter} est ajoutée (avec des +% commandes analogues pour les parties et sections étoilées). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1998} +% The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are added to improve the line spacing in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1998} +% Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont ajoutées pour changer l'interlignage dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~1999} +% The \optd{dotted} and \opt{undotted} package options are added to add or suppress some lines of dots +% (leaders) in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~1999} +% Les options de paquetage \optd{dotted} et \opt{undotted} sont ajoutées pour activer ou inhiber certaines lignes de +% points (points de conduite) dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2000} +% A major addition is the compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}, and I~ought to thank +% loudly \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}. +% +% Some corrections about the starred sectionning commands are added by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}. +% +% The mini-tables features (\com{beforeparttoc} and co.) commands are added. +% +% Some adjustment commands, like \com{mtcaddchapter}, are added, again about the problem with the starred +% sectionning commands. +% +% The\imess{I0046} compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} is documented. +% +% Aliases for some languages are added. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2000} +% Un ajout majeur est la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, et je dois +% remercier chaleureusement \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et +% \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}. +% +% Quelques corrections concernant les commandes de sectionnement étoilées ont été apportées par \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}. +% +% Les commandes relatives aux dispositifs pour les (\com{beforeparttoc} et co.) ont été ajoutées. +% +% Quelques commandes d'adjustement, telles que \com{mtcaddchapter}, sont ajoutées, encore pour le problème des +% commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% +% La\imess{I0046} compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} est documentée. +% +% Des alias pour certaines langues sont ajoutés. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2001} +% Added the \optd{checkfiles} and \opt{nocheckfiles} package options, to avoid the insertion of (ugly) empty +% mini-tables. +% +% Added the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command to change more easily the language of the mini-tables titles. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2001} +% Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} et \opt{nocheckfiles}, pour éviter d'insérer des minitables +% vides (et laides). +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage} pour changer plus facilement la langue des titres des mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2002} +% Correction of an interaction between \com{tableofcontents} (creating a hidden \com{chapter*} or +% \com{section*} command) and the numbering of the mini-table files. +% +% Added the \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount} commands. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Développements en~2002} +% Correction d'une interaction entre \com{tableofcontents} (qui crée une commande \com{chapter*} ou +% \com{section*} cachée) et la numérotation des fichiers mini-tables. +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2003} +% Added the \opt{insection} package option (which was temporarily done by the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} +% package options) +% to deal with floats drifting out of their section. The \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} (by +% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) is used. +% +% The font commands are made compatible with the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Added compatibility with the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2003} +% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{insection} (qui était temporairement réalisée par les options +% de paquetage \opt{flsection} +% et \opt{flsectionb}) pour traiter les éléments flottants dérivant hors de leur section. Le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) est utilisé. +% +% Les commandes de fontes sont rendues compatibles avec la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2004} +% Added comments in the \suffix{.mld} files needing special fonts. Better documentation about languages. +% +% Added an explanation about making a local table of contents for an appendix, eventually masking it in the main +% table of contents. Compatibility\imess{I0042} with the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}. +% +% A major addition is the \optd{hints} package option, to detect some programming and compatibility problems. +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2004} +% Amélioration de la documentation sur les langues. +% +% Ajout d'une explication sur la manière de faire une table des matières locale pour un appendice, éventuellement en +% la masquant dans la table des matières principale. Compatibilité\imess{I0042} avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}. +% +% Un ajout majeur est l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}, pour détecter certains problèmes de programmation et de +% compatibilité. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Developments in~2005} +% All messages are now written via the standard interface commands (\com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, and +% \com{PackageError}), so the \upack{minitoc} package is less verbose on the terminal. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Added the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands (from a suggestion by \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) to +% replace many font commands by only one command with a better user interface. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Comments about the \AmS\ classes (some ones are incompatible with \upack{minitoc}). +% +% Added the \com{mtcsetformat} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands, again to have a simpler user interface. +% +% Added various hints (\opt{insection} package option, order of minitoc basic commands, short extensions). +% +% Added the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} commands, again to have a simpler user interface. +% +% Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, to hide a group of entries in the main table of contents; added +% also the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% +% Added the \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands. +% +% Added the description of the installation of the package (a new chapter and the file \xfile{INSTALL}). +% +% Improved and added hints about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. +% +% Added the \com{mtcsetfeature} command (very complex). +% +% Added a hint about the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}. +% +% The \upack{minitoc} package is now written using the \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins} system. +% Some cleanup is done in the code. +% +% Added the \com{mtcfixglossary} command, like \com{mtcfixindex}. +% +% Some improvements are made to print the documentation. +% +% Some new hints are added (\pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package~\cite{sectsty}, empty mini-tables, obsolete commands). +% +% Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. Added the \com{mtcsetdepth} command. +% +% The \optd{hints} package option is now the default. +% +% Added a method for making a bilingual documentation in one file (the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file). This method could be used +% for more languages. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Added or improved some adjustement commands (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, \com{decrementptc}, etc.). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options, for the \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} document classes. +% +% Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files. +% +% Added the \com{mtcloadmlo} command to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. The +% extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}; such files contains characters not easily +% manipulated in a \suffix{.dtx} file. +% +% The history of changes is now displayed in a much simpler way (using a glossary was too cumbersome). +% +% Added the \optd{listfiles} package option, to create a list of the minitoc auxiliary files, which can be removed after +% the \LaTeX\ compilation of the document. It is the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. +% +% Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred +% sectionning commands. +% +% Added hints about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages +% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% +% A ``Jargon'' chapter is added. It will grow slowly. +% +% Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir} used together. +% +% Some bugs in the \verb|\mtcset...| commands are fixed. +% +% Added a hint about the \pack{varsects}\imess{W0038} package~\cite{varsects}. +% +% Added a hint on the number of mini-tables when short extensions are used. +% +% Added a chapter with all the (explained) messages. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Développements en~2005} +% Tous les messages sont désormais écrits via les commandes de l'interface standard (\com{PackageInfo}, +% \com{PackageWarning} et \com{PackageError}), donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est moins bavard sur le terminal. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} (d'après une suggestion de \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) +% pour remplacer de nombreuses commandes de fontes par une seule commande avec une meilleure interface avec +% l'utilisateur. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Commentaires sur les classes de l'\AmS\ (certaines sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}). +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetformat} et \com{mtcsettitle}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface avec +% l'utilisateur. +% +% Ajout de divers \emph{hints} (option de paquetage \opt{insection}, ordre des commandes minitoc basiques, suffixes +% courts). +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface +% avec l'utilisateur. +% +% Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, pour masquer un groupe d'entrées dans la table des matières +% principale; ajout aussi des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% +% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcsettitle}. +% +% Ajout d'une description de l'installation du paquetage (un nouveau chapitre et le fichier \xfile{INSTALL}). +% +% \emph{Hints} améliorés et ajoutés sur la cohérence des commandes \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature} (très complexe). +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}. +% +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est maintenant écrit en utilisant le système \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins}. Un peu de +% nettoyage a été fait dans le code. +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, analoque à~\com{mtcfixindex}. +% +% Quelques améliorations sont faites pour l'impression de la documentation. +% +% Ajout de quelques nouveaux \emph{hints} (paquetage\imess{I0043} \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, mini-tables vides, commandes +% obsolètes). +% +% Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-tables des figures/tableaux. Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}. +% +% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} est maintenant le choix par défaut. +% +% Ajout d'une méthode pour faire une documentation bilingue en un seul fichier (le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}). +% Cette méthode pourrait être utilisée pour plusieurs langues. +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Ajout ou amélioration de quelques commandes d'ajustement (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, etc.). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}, pour les classes de document +% \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Ajout d'une correction (\emph{patch}) pour une version récente de la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. +% +% Utilisation de \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} +% «~secondaires~». +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger un fichier +% \suffix{.mlo}. Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langage minitoc); de +% tels fichiers contiennent des caractères qui ne sont pas faciles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}. +% +% L'historique des modifications est maintenant imprimé d'une manière bien plus simple (utiliser un glossaire était +% trop pénible). +% +% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}, pour créer une liste des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc, qui +% peuvent être éliminés après la compilation \LaTeX\ du document. C'est le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% +% Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (et dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}) +% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% +% Ajout de \emph{hints} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et \pack{mcaption} +% (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% +% Un chapitre «~Jargon~» est ajouté. Il grossira lentement. +% +% Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir} utilisés ensemble. +% +% Quelques erreurs dans les commandes \verb|\mtcset...| sont corrigées. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le nombre de mini-tables lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. +% +% Ajout d'un chapitre avec tous les messages (expliqués). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Developments in~2006} +% Added the ``\texttt{*}'' keyword as first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} +% command, to get an action on all kinds of mini-tables. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% Corrections in the \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary}, and \com{mtcfixindex} commands. +% +% In the PDF documentation, the panel of bookmarks shows initialy only the bookmarks for parts and chapters, but you +% can open them to show deeper entries. +% +% Added a comment about the initialization of fonts in the FAQ (point~34). It is still an open domain and I am +% working on it. +% +% Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter +% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% +% Added the ``Postface'' chapter. +% +% Added the \com{mtcprepare} command. +% +% Added an~\texttt{URL} field in the bibliography (the styles are modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst}). +% +% Added the \pack{mtcmess} package to add unique identifiers to the messages. +% +% Suppressed the PostScript documentation files from the distribution (no more accepted on CTAN archives), but the +% scripts still creates them. +% +% Corrections in the \opt{insection} package option. +% +% Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I). +% +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2006} +% Ajout du mot-clé «~\texttt{*}~» comme premier argument des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, +% pour avoir une action sur toutes les sortes de mini-tables. +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Corrections dans les commandes \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary} et \com{mtcfixindex}. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% Dans la documentation en PDF, le panneau des signets (panneau de gauche) ne montre initialement que les signets +% pour les parties et les chapitres, mais vous pouvez les ouvrir pour accéder aux entrées plus profondes. +% +% Ajout d'un commentaire sur l'initialisation des fontes dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (point~34). +% C'est encore un sujet ouvert et je travaille dessus. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, et d'une note dans le chapitre des questions +% fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% +% Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~». +% +% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcprepare}. +% +% Ajout d'un champ \texttt{URL} dans la bibliographie (les styles ont été modifiés à~l'aide de l'outil +% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}). +% +% Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess} pour ajouter des identificateurs uniques aux messages. +% +% Suppression des fichiers de documentation en format PostScript dans la distribution (ils ne sont plus acceptés +% sur les archives CTAN), mais les scripts les créent encore. +% +% Corrections dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. +% +% Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I). +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2007} +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2007} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Removed the preparation of documentation in PostScript format. +% +% Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format to PostScript format. +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{raggedright} +% Added hints about the\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} +% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}, +% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}, +% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}, +% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}, +% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}, +% and +% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} packages. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Added FAQ~44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} formatting commands. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% Added the chapter~\ref{c+exdocs}, ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}. +% +% Added FAQ~45 and the \com{kernafterparttoc} and co. commands for the vertical space between a minitable and +% its bottom rule. +% +% Increased the text width and adjusted the format of the entries in the TOC in the documentation. +% +% Correction of the preamble in the generated files (spurious lines have been eliminated, at least). +% +% Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% +% The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% +% All example documents are renamed with names beginning with ``\uexam{mtc-}''. +% +% The ``\optd{listfiles}'' package option is active by default. +% +% Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands. +% +% Added \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% +% Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}. +% +% Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with +% \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. +% +% Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant structure for \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% +% Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of +% the package) to the distribution. +% +% Improving the index (entries for: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, option, +% language options). +% +% The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin. +% +% Indexing the environments and the files. +% +% Indexing the counters and depth counters. +% +% The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy. +% +% Indexing referenced commands (begin). +% +% Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% +% Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new T2 and X2 cyrillic encodings in \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example file. +% +% Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} (loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Improved the layout of the index. +% +% Indexing the names of authors. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-fko.tex} example file. +% +% Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index. +% +% Features in the index. +% +% Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file. +% +% Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file. +% +% Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin. +% +% Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin. +% +% Added internal hyperlinks for messages. +% +% Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table. +% +% Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type. +% +% Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file. +% +% Added flagging of macros in example files. +% +% Added a clickable table of all messages. +% +% Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% +% Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% +% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} +% package (incompatible). +% +% Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. +% +% Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions. +% +% Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class. +% +% Changed the color of hyperlinks. +% +% Revised the format of headers. +% +% Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Added \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% +% Added stuff (files) for maps of areas of some languages. +% +% Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}. +% +% Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% +% Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid +% erasing (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file). +% +% Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% +% The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part. +% +% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package. +% +% Complete indexing of the messages. +% +% Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to make increase the width of the pages of the bibliography. +% +% Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% +% Updated \xfile{czech.mld}. +% +% Removed \ucom{l@xsection}. +% +% Graphic files are indexed separately. +% +% Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy. +% +% Updated \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% +% Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld}, +% and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% +% Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% +% Suppressed parasite entries from the index. +% +% Added \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% +% Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% +% \or\relax +% Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript. +% +% Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript. +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Ajout de \emph{hints}\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} sur les paquetages +% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}, +% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}, +% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}, +% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}, +% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} +% et +% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% +% \begin{raggedright} +% Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes de mise en page \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} +% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}. +% +% \end{raggedright} +% Ajout du chapitre~\ref{c+exdocs}, «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}. +% +% Ajout du point~45 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{kernafterparttoc} et analogues pour l'espacement vertical +% entre une minitable et son filet inférieur. +% +% Augmentation de la largeur du texte et ajustement du format des entrées dans la table des matières pour la +% documentation. +% +% Correction du préambule des fichiers engendrés (les lignes superflues ont été enfin éliminées). +% +% Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% +% Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% +% Tous les exemples de documents sont renommés avec des noms commençant par «~\uexam{mtc-}~». +% +% L'option de paquetage «~\optd{listfiles}~» est active par défaut. +% +% Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{japanese6.mld} et \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}. +% +% Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de +% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}. +% +% Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}. +% +% Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». +% +% Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et contenant tous +% les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution. +% +% Amélioration de l'index (entrées pour: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options, +% options de langue). +% +% Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge. +% +% Indexation des environnements et fichiers. +% +% Indexation des compteurs et compteurs de profondeur. +% +% Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée). +% +% Indexation des commandes référencées (début). +% +% Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% +% Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. +% +% Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} (charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% +% Indexation des noms des auteurs. +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. +% +% Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index. +% +% Dispositifs dans l'index. +% +% Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~». +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% +% Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~». +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}. +% +% Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique. +% +% Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages. +% +% Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table. +% +% Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table. +% +% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% +% Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples. +% +% Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages. +% +% Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le +% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible). +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. +% +% Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement. +% +% Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}. +% +% Changement de la couleur des hyperliens. +% +% Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer correctement \com{mtc@toks}. +% +% Changement du format des en-têtes. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% +% Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) de régions où certaines langues sont parlées. +% +% Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}. +% +% Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% +% Remplacement du suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter +% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}). +% +% Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% +% Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~». +% +% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} +% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}. +% +% Indexation complète des messages. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% +% Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie. +% +% Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}. +% +% Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}. +% +% Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément. +% +% Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et +% \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% +% Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index. +% +% Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% +% Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Developments in~2008} +% Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}. +% +% Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% Added many maps about languages and dialects, etc. +% +% Better captions for maps. +% +% Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon. +% +% Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% +% The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% +% Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% Corrected an error of message number. +% +% Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16. +% +% Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references. +% +% Added flags for many countries. +% +% Added a figure about lusophonia. +% +% Added a figure about germanophonia. +% +% Added a figure about hispanophonia. +% +% Added a figure about italophonia. +% +% Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult (not trivial). +% +% Added figures about francophones countries. +% +% Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries. +% +% Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries. +% +% Added a figure about russian-speaking countries. +% +% Added a figure about english-speaking countries. +% +% Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}. +% +% Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% +% Added commands for polymorphic entries: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof}, and \com{mtcpolymlot}. +% +% Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries. +% +% Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts. +% +% Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% +% Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file +% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but +% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} +% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% +% Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options. +% +% ^^A MAJ-E +% \or\relax +% \section{Développements en~2008} +% Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}. +% +% Ajout de nombreuses cartes pour les langues et les dialectes, etc. +% +% Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% +% Amélioration des légendes des cartes. +% +% Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon. +% +% Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% +% Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% +% Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% +% Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message. +% +% Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16. +% +% Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes. +% +% Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie. +% +% Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation (pas trivial). +% +% Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais. +% +% Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}. +% +% Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% +% Ajout de commandes pour les entrées polymorphes: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof} et \com{mtcpolymlot}. +% +% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais. +% +% Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts. +% +% Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% +% Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux) +% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick} +% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier); +% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% +% Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}. +% +% ^^A MAJ-F +% \fi +% \par\end{RaggedRight} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \part{Implementation}\label{p+ID} +% \or\relax +% \part{Implantation}\label{p+ID} +% \fi +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% \let\macro\svmacro +% \let\endmacro\svendmacro +% \let\environment\svenvironment +% \let\endenvironment\svendenvironment +% \makeatletter +% \def\macro{\begingroup +% \catcode`\\12 +% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue} +% \def\environment{\begingroup +% \catcode`\\12 +% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse} +% \let\endmacro \endtrivlist +% \let\endenvironment\endmacro +% \makeatother +% ^^A FIX INDEX? +% \parttoc +% ^^A \partlof +% ^^A \partlot +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% \lneed{4} +% \minilof +% \mtcskip +% +% \lneed{6} +% \section{Introduction}\label{s+code+intro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This very long chapter presents the code of the \upack{minitoc} package and attempts to explain it. +% Some comments of the original source file\,\footnote{The source file of version~\#42. Version~\#43 includes the +% conversion of the package to \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx-.ins} format. +% Version~\#42 has not been distributed because of that.} +% are skipped, like the history, because they do not need further examination (they will be put in the change history). +% +% The code is split in sections to make the reading easier, and the sections are sometimes reordered to make the reading +% easier. +% +% Most of the \upack{minitoc} external commands have \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}, or one of the +% mini-table names (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) in their names. +% Most of the \upack{minitoc} internal commands +% have \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc}, or \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot@} in their names, or +% a similar convention. The few exceptions should be explicit enough to not conflict with other packages. +% \or\relax +% Ce très long chapitre présente le code du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et tente de l'expliquer. +% Certains commentaires du fichier source original\,\footnote{C'est-à-dire, celui de la version~\#42. La +% version~\#43 inclut la conversion du paquetage au format \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx/.ins}. +% La version~\#42 n'a pas été distribuée pour cette raison.} sont sautés, +% comme l'historique, car ils n'ont pas besoin d'être examinés davantage (ils seront mis dans l'historique des +% modifications). +% +% Le code est éclaté en sections pour faciliter la lecture, et ces sections sont parfois réordonnées, dans ce même +% but. +% +% La plupart des commandes externes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc} +% ou le nom de l'un des types de mini-tables (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) dans leurs noms. La plupart +% des commandes internes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc} ou \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, +% \texttt{sectlot@} dans leurs noms, ou suivent une convention similaire. Les quelques exceptions devraient être +% assez explicites pour ne pas entrer en conflit avec d'autres paquetages. +% \fi +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Identification code}\label{s+code+ident} +% \or\relax +% \section{Code d'identification}\label{s+code+ident} +% \fi +% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.375mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The code +% of \xfile{minitoc.sty} starts here: +% \or\relax +% Le code +% de \xfile{minitoc.sty} commence ici: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*minitoc> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat} +% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} +% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} code section identifies the package with its name, version number and date. +% A trace is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. This package will not work with \LaTeX2.09. +% \or\relax +% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} section de code identifie le paquetage par son nom, son numéro de version +% et sa date. Une trace est écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Ce paquetage ne fonctionnera pas avec \LaTeX2.09. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/02]% +\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}% + [2018/07/12 v62 Package minitoc] % message I0000 +\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +\mtcPackageInfo[I0001]{minitoc}% + {*** minitoc package, version 62 ***\@gobble} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{A file descriptor to write}\label{s+code+fd-write} +% \or\relax +% \section{Un descripteur de fichier pour écrire}\label{s+code+fd-write} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\newwrite} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A file descriptor is needed to write the files containing the mini-tables, it is \com{tf@mtc}. +% The \upack{minitoc} package uses only one file descriptor for writing. See section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}. +% \or\relax +% Un descripteur de fichier est nécessaire pour écrire les fichiers contenant les mini-tables, c'est \com{tf@mtc}. +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise un seul descripteur de fichier en écriture. Voir la +% section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newwrite\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Indentation and skip}\label{s+code+indent.skip} +% \or\relax +% \section{Indentation et saut}\label{s+code+indent.skip} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\addvspace} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the indentation \com{mtcindent} (both sides) of the mini-tables and the +% command \com{mtcskip} to make a vertical skip before a mini-table, its value is \com{mtcskipamount} +% (default: \com{bigskipamount}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons l'indentation \com{mtcindent} (des deux côtés) des mini-tables et la commande +% \com{mtcskip} pour faire un saut vertical avant une mini-table, sa valeur est \com{mtcskipamount} +% (défaut: \com{bigskipamount}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\mtcindent +\newskip\mtcskipamount +\setlength{\mtcskipamount}{\bigskipamount} +\def\mtcskip{{\parskip=\z@\addvspace{\mtcskipamount}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that \com{mtcskip} uses a local group to avoid the influence of \com{parskip}. +% \or\relax +% Notez que \com{mtcskip} utilise un groupe local pour éviter l'influence de \com{parskip}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the default values for the vertical gaps before and after titles part level mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les valeurs par défaut pour les sauts verticaux avant et après les titres des mini-tables au +% niveau partie. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} +\def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule. +% The names of these macros is rather explicit. The values are empirical and can be changed via \com{renewcommand}. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets horizontaux inférieurs. +% Les noms de ces macros sont assez explicites. Les valeurs sont empiriques et peuvent être changées +% via \com{renewcommand}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\kernafterparttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\kernaftersecttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterminilof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}% + \def\kernafterminilot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\pfloffset} +% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sfloffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We defines horizontal offets by which the margins in the mini-tables are corrected (added to the right margin and +% substracted from the left margin). These are \emph{commands}, \emph{not} lengths\,\footnote{We avoid to +% allocate a precious length register.}, to be redefined by \com{renewcommand}. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les décalages horizontaux servant à~corriger les marges dans les mini-tables (ajout à~la marge +% gauche et retrait à~la marge droite). Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \emph{pas} des longueurs\,\footnote{Nous +% évitons d'allouer un précieux registre de longueur.}, à~redéfinir via \com{renewcommand}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\ptcoffset{0pt}% + \def\plfoffset{0pt}% + \def\pltoffset{0pt}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\stcoffset{0pt}% + \def\slfoffset{0pt}% + \def\sltoffset{0pt}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\mtcoffset{0pt}% + \def\mlfoffset{0pt}% + \def\mltoffset{0pt}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We defines flags which will be true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui seront vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux +% à~l'extérieur. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse% +\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse% +\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse% +\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse% +\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse% +\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse% +\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse% +\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse% +\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Tests and flags}\label{s+code+test-flags} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tests et indicateurs}\label{s+code+test-flags} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We need to declare some flags\,\footnote{Not so many years ago, some authors had a preference for using counters +% rather than flags, +% because a flag costs 3~control sequences (\ucom{iffoo}, \ucom{foofalse} and \ucom{footrue}), +% which use memory. But the number of count registers is limited to 256 in the native \TeX\ engine (much more with +% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, but still limited in number), while memory has become rather cheap today. +% And a code programmed with flags (\texttt{\ucom{iffoo} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) is easier to structure +% and debug than a code programmed with counters, \textsc{imho}.} (via \com{newif}) to detect +% the loading of some packages or classes and the availability of some commands (this will be used by the +% \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) or to allow the definition of some \upack{minitoc} commands). +% \or\relax +% Nous avons besoin de déclarer quelques indicateurs\,\footnote{Il n'y a pas tant d'années, certains auteurs +% préféraient utiliser des compteurs plutôt que des indicateurs, car un indicateur coûte 3~séquences de contrôle +% (\ucom{iftoto}, \ucom{totofalse} et \ucom{tototrue}), qui consomment de la mémoire. Mais le +% nombre de registres compteurs est limité à~256 dans le moteur \TeX\ natif (bien plus avec +% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, mais encore en nombre limité), tandis que le coût de la mémoire a beaucoup baissé +% aujourd'hui. Et un code programmé avec des indicateurs (\texttt{\ucom{iftoto} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) est +% plus facile à~structurer et à~mettre au point qu'un code programmé à~l'aide de compteurs, à~mon humble avis.} +% (via \com{newif}) pour détecter le chargement de certains paquetages ou classes et la disponibilité de certaines +% commandes (ceci sera utilisé par l'option \optd{hints} (voir la section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) ou +% pour autoriser la définition de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Flags for the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Indicateurs pour l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@giben@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But first, we define some flags for the \optd{hints} option: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@} is true if the \optd{hints} option is required (default). +% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} is set true if we detect that some sectionning commands have been +% altered since the loading of the document class. +% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} is set true if the \optd{hints} option detects something curious +% and writes messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. It will be used at the end of the document to signal that +% you should look for hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% Mais tout d'abord, nous définissons quelques indicateurs pour l'option \optd{hints}: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@} est vrai si l'option \optd{hints} est demandée (défaut). +% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} est forcé à~vrai si nous détectons que certaines commandes de +% sectionnement ont été altérées depuis le chargement de la classe de document. +% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} est forcé à~vrai si l'option \optd{hints} détecte quelque +% chose de curieux et écrit des messages dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% Il sera utilisé en fin de document +% pour signaler que vous devriez chercher des \emph{hints} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@hints@ \@mtc@hints@true +\newif\if@mtc@hints@w@ \@mtc@hints@w@false +\newif\if@mtc@hints@given@ \@mtc@hints@given@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Use of section-level mini-lists of floats} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Utilisation de mini-listes d'éléments flottants, au niveau \texorpdfstring{\mbox{section}}{section}} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will check if the commands \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} are used: +% \or\relax +% Nous testerons si les commandes \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} ont été utilisées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@sect@floats@ \@mtc@sect@floats@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} %% ^^A 25 +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Presence of some packages and classes} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Présence de certains paquetages et classes} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will check if the \pack{placeins} package is loaded, then if the \class{memoir} +% is loaded (and if it is a recent enough version), then if the \pack{sectsty} package is loaded +% (before or after \upack{minitoc}). +% \or\relax +% Nous testerons si le paquetage \pack{placeins} est chargé, puis si la classe +% \class{memoir} est chargée (et si c'est une version suffisamment récente), puis si le +% paquetage \pack{sectsty} est chargé (avant ou après \upack{minitoc}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ \@mtc@memoirLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@memoirnew@ \@mtc@memoirnew@false +\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We do the same for some caption-related packages: +% \else\relax +% Nous faisons de même pour quelques paquetages relatifs aux captions: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the \pack{varsects} package and other packages altering the sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Et pour le paquetage \pack{varsects} et +% d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And yet other packages altering the sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Et encore d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@false +\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Flags for packages dealing with floats} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Indicateurs pour des paquetages traitant des flottants} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must warn about a limitation with the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons signaler une limitation avec les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, +% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@floatLoaded@ \@mtc@floatLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@ \@mtc@floatrowLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Insertion of empty mini-tables} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Insertion de mini-tables vides} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We will check if you have attempted to insert some empty mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous testerons si vous avez tenté d'insérer des mini-tables vides: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ \@mtc@empty@parttoc@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ \@mtc@empty@partlof@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ \@mtc@empty@partlot@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ \@mtc@empty@minitoc@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ \@mtc@empty@minilof@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ \@mtc@empty@minilot@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ \@mtc@empty@secttoc@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ \@mtc@empty@sectlof@false +\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ \@mtc@empty@sectlot@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Presence or absence of some sectionning commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Présence ou absence de certaines commandes de sectionnement} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define and set flags about the presence of the sectionning commands (in fact, the counters associated with +% these commands). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant la présence des commandes de sectionnement (en fait, +% celle des compteurs associés à~ces commandes). +% +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{part} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{part}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@part@def@ \@mtc@part@def@false + \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@def@false}{\@mtc@part@def@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{chapter} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@chapter@def@ \@mtc@chapter@def@false + \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@def@false}{\@mtc@chapter@def@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{section} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{section}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@section@def@ \@mtc@section@def@false + \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@def@false}{\@mtc@section@def@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define and set flags about the absence of the sectionning commands. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant l'absence des commandes de sectionnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@undef@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{part} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{part}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@part@undef@ \@mtc@part@undef@true + \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@undef@true}{\@mtc@part@undef@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{chapter} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \@mtc@chapter@undef@true + \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@true}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@undef@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \cnt{section} counter: +% \or\relax +% Le compteur \cnt{section}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@section@undef@ \@mtc@section@undef@true + \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@undef@true}{\@mtc@section@undef@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Flags to check if some commands are used} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Indicateurs pour tester si certaines commandes ont été utilisées} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a pair of flags for each mini-table type: one for the command itself and one for the preparation +% command (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). These flags will be used by the \optd{hints} package option +% (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons une paire d'indicateurs pour chaque type de mini-table: un pour la commande elle-même et un +% pour la commande de préparation (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). Ces indicateurs seront utilisés par l'option de +% paquetage \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the part level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@parttoc@used@ \global\@parttoc@used@false +\newif\if@partlof@used@ \global\@partlof@used@false +\newif\if@partlot@used@ \global\@partlot@used@false +\newif\if@doparttoc@used@ \global\@doparttoc@used@false +\newif\if@dopartlof@used@ \global\@dopartlof@used@false +\newif\if@dopartlot@used@ \global\@dopartlot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the chapter level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@minitoc@used@ \global\@minitoc@used@false +\newif\if@minilof@used@ \global\@minilof@used@false +\newif\if@minilot@used@ \global\@minilot@used@false +\newif\if@dominitoc@used@ \global\@dominitoc@used@false +\newif\if@dominilof@used@ \global\@dominilof@used@false +\newif\if@dominilot@used@ \global\@dominilot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the section level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@secttoc@used@ \global\@secttoc@used@false +\newif\if@sectlof@used@ \global\@sectlof@used@false +\newif\if@sectlot@used@ \global\@sectlot@used@false +\newif\if@dosecttoc@used@ \global\@dosecttoc@used@false +\newif\if@dosectlof@used@ \global\@dosectlof@used@false +\newif\if@dosectlot@used@ \global\@dosectlot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We also detect the use of some obsolete commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous détectons aussi l'utilisation de certaines commandes obsolètes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@firstpartis@used@ \global\@firstpartis@used@false +\newif\if@firstchapteris@used@ \global\@firstchapteris@used@false +\newif\if@firstsectionis@used@ \global\@firstsectionis@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the document has exactly 2~parts}\label{ss+2parts} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le document a exactement 2~parties}\label{ss+2parts} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In french, the ordinal adjective is ``deuxième'' if the second object is not the last object, but ``second'' +% (masculine) or ``seconde'' (feminine) when it is also the last one (see~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). So we define a specific flag: +% \or\relax +% En français, l'adjectif ordinal est \og deuxième \fg si le deuxième objet n'est pas le dernier objet, mais +% \og second \fg (masculin) ou \og seconde \fg (féminin) si c'est le dernier (voir~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). +% Donc nous définissons un indicateur +% spécifique: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% At the beginning of the document, we test this flag and make it global: +% \or\relax +% Au début du document, nous testons cet indicateur et le rendons global: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifmtcsecondpart + \global\mtcsecondparttrue + \else + \global\mtcsecondpartfalse + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% At the end of the document, we set and memorize the value of the flag in the \suffix{.aux} file: +% \or\relax +% À~la fin du document, nous établissons et mémorisons la valeur de l'indicateur dans le fichier \suffix{.aux}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{% +\ifnum\value{part}=2\relax + \mtcsecondparttrue +\else + \mtcsecondpartfalse +\fi +\if@filesw + \ifmtcsecondpart + \immediate\write\@mainaux + {\string\global\string\mtcsecondparttrue}% + \else + \immediate\write\@mainaux + {\string\global\string\mtcsecondpartfalse}% + \fi +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we need two \LaTeX\ runs to get a correct result. The \xfile{french2.mld} language definition file +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) uses this trick to form the titles of part level mini-tables. +% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \or\relax +% Il nous faut donc deux exécutions de \LaTeX\ pour obtenir un résultat correct. Le fichier de définition de +% langue \xfile{french2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) utilise cette astuce pour former les titres +% des mini-tables au niveau partie. +% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \section{Préparation pour l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We declare a flag for the presence of this option and the new internal ``hook'' command +% (redefinable command) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}, +% used by this option (this has been requested by \name{Donald}{Arseneau} for his \pack{notoccite} +% package~\cite{notoccite}). See section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons un indicateur pour la présence de cette option et la nouvelle commande interne «~\emph{hook}~» +% (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} utilisée par cette option +% (ceci a été demandé par \name{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage +% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}). Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@notoccite@ \@mtc@notoccite@false +\@ifundefined{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}% + {\let\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile\relax}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{tight} and \uopt{k-tight} options}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight} +% \or\relax +% \section{Préparation pour les options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{k-tight}}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We just declare a flag for each of these options; they are set false by default (\optd{loose} and +% \optd{k-loose} options): +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons simplement un indicateur pour chacune de ces options; ils sont faux par défaut (options \optd{loose} +% et \optd{k-loose}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse +\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Preparation to work with \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref} +% \or\relax +% \section{Préparation pour travailler avec \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{I0005} code prepares the interface with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}. +% A flag is defined, then this preparation is performed in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block if this package is loaded. +% This action defines some commands for the \pack{hyperref} package. +% \or\relax +% Ce\imess{I0005} code prépare l'interface avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}. +% Un indicateur est défini, puis cette préparation est effectuée dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} si ce +% paquetage est chargé. Cette action définit quelques commandes pour le paquetage \pack{hyperref}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcPackageInfo[I0005]{minitoc}{compatible with hyperref\@gobble} +\newif\if@mtc@hyper@used@ \global\@mtc@hyper@used@false +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% + \global\@mtc@hyper@used@true + \def\toclevel@xpart{1000}% + \def\toclevel@xchapter{1000}% + \def\toclevel@xsect{1000}% + \let\toclevel@starpart\toclevel@part + \let\toclevel@starchapter\toclevel@chapter + \let\toclevel@starsection\toclevel@section + \let\toclevel@starsubsection\toclevel@subsection + \let\toclevel@starsubsubsection\toclevel@subsubsection + \let\toclevel@starparagraph\toclevel@paragraph + \let\toclevel@starsubparagraph\toclevel@subparagraph + }{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{8} +% \section{Checking the presence of some packages} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tester la présence de certains paquetages} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sectsty} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sectsty} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{varsects} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{varsects} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{varsects}%{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@true}{} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{varsects}{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{fncychap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{fncychap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{hangcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{hangcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{quotchap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{quotchap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{romannum} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{romannum} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sfheaders} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sfheaders} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{alnumsec} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{alnumsec} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{captcont} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{captcont} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h2}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption2} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption2} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{ccaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{ccaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{mcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{mcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{mcaption} package~\cite{mcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we +% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been +% loaded. See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, +% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois +% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@true}{}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{float} package is loaded}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{float} est chargé}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+float.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{float}{\@mtc@floatLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{floatrow} package is loaded}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{floatrow} est chargé}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{floatrow}{\@mtc@floatrowLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{trivfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{trivfloat} est chargé}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{trivfloat}{\@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Check if the \upack{rotfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{rotfloat} est chargé}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must test if the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} is loaded +% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. +% See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} est chargé dans le préambule, +% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{rotfloat}{\@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@true}{}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Is the \uclass{memoir} class loaded?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir} +% \or\relax +% \section{La classe \uclass{memoir} est-elle chargée?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} +% test if the \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} class is loaded. +% This class needs some compatibility adjustments or may be \emph{incompatible} if too recent. +% In the later case, a patch +% is inserted (see chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}). This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version +% of \xfile{memoir.cls}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} testons si la +% classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée. +% Cette classe nécessite certains ajustements pour la compatibilité ou peut être \emph{incompatible} si +% elle est trop récente. +% Dans ce dernier cas, une correction est insérée (voir le chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}). Cette correction n'est +% plus nécessaire après la version de \xfile{memoir.cls} datée 2005/09/25. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ \@mtcpatchmemoir@false +\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{\@mtc@memoirLoaded@true\relax% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0030]{minitoc}% + {the memoir class is loaded: + \MessageBreak + compatibility attempted\@gobble}}% + {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@false} +\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ + \@ifundefined{@m@mchapter}% + {\@mtc@memoirnew@false\mtcPackageInfo[I0020]{minitoc}% + {old version of the memoir class\@gobble}} + {\@mtc@memoirnew@true\mtcPackageInfo[I0027]{minitoc}% + {recent version of the memoir class\@gobble} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0032]{minitoc}% + {This version of the memoir class uses + \MessageBreak + a version of \string\chapter\space which is + \MessageBreak + incompatible with the minitoc package. + \MessageBreak + We try to patch\@gobble}% + \@mtcpatchmemoir@true} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\imess{E0028} now the patch: +% \or\relax +% Et\imess{E0028} voici cette correction: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ +\IfFileExists{mtcpatchmem.sty}{% + \@ifclasslater{memoir}{2005/09/25}{}{\RequirePackage{mtcpatchmem}}}{% + \mtcPackageError[E0028]{minitoc}% + {Unable to patch the memoir class}% + {So it remains incompatible. Sorry.}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Testing the emptiness of a file}\label{s+code+emptiness} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tester la vacuité d'un fichier}\label{s+code+emptiness} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@xifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhilePreCondition} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileCondition} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileBody} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileNext} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some macros for testing if an argument of a macro is empty (taken from the package +% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} and +% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, and from \uxfile{while.tip}, +% by \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). The group is necessary to keep local the catcode +% change of ``Q'', hence a \com{gdef} is needed for \com{mtc@ifmtarg}. +% \or\relax +% Quelques macros pour tester si un argument d'une macro est vide (elles sont tirées du paquetage +% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} et +% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, et de \uxfile{while.tip}, +% de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). Le groupe est nécessaire pour garder local le +% changement de «~\emph{catcode}~» de «~Q~», il faut donc utiliser un \com{gdef} pour définir \com{mtc@ifmtarg}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup +\catcode`\Q=3 +\long\gdef\mtc@ifmtarg#1{% +\mtc@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} +\long\gdef\mtc@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} +\endgroup +\let\mtc@EndWhile = \fi +\def\mtc@While #1#2#3\mtc@EndWhile{% + \def\mtc@WhilePreCondition{#1}% + \def\mtc@WhileCondition{#2}% + \def\mtc@WhileBody{#3}% + \mtc@@While +} +\def\mtc@@While{% + \mtc@WhilePreCondition + \mtc@WhileCondition + \def\mtc@WhileNext{% + \mtc@WhileBody + \mtc@@While + }% + \else + \def\mtc@WhileNext{}% + \fi + \mtc@WhileNext +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@LI} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Body} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Rline} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some macros to test if a file is empty or not: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{file}\verb|}| returns \com{@mtc@FEtrue} if the file +% is empty, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} if the is file not empty. An inexistent file is empty. A file full of white +% space (space, tabulation, newline) is empty. Comments are empty. +% \or\relax +% Quelques macros pour tester si un fichier est vide ou non: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{fichier}\verb|}| +% rend \com{@mtc@FEtrue} si le fichier est vide, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} si le fichier n'est pas vide. +% Un fichier inexistant est vide. Un +% fichier rempli d'espace blanc (espace, tabulation, saut de ligne) est vide. Les commentaires sont vides. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \noindent +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \textbf{Note:} on a big empty file, the \com{mtc@While} loop may be +% time consuming, but not an eternity (33\,s for +% $10^6$~lines on my computer), and the first non-empty line stops the loop. +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is used as scratch file. Its contents is erased after use. +% \or\relax +% \textbf{Note:} sur un gros fichier vide, la boucle \com{mtc@While} peut prendre du temps, mais pas une +% éternité (33\,s pour $10^6$~lignes avec mon ordinateur), et la première ligne non vide arrête la boucle. +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est utilisé comme fichier de travail. Son contenu est effacé après usage. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@LI\@mtc@LItrue +\newif\if@mtc@FE\@mtc@FEtrue +\newif\if@mtc@checkfiles\@mtc@checkfilestrue +\def\mtc@Body{\immediate\read\@inputcheck to \mtc@Rline\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\@mtc@LIfalse\fi + \expandafter\ifx\mtc@Rline\par\relax + \def\mtc@Rline{} + \else + \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\global\@mtc@LIfalse\fi + \mtc@ifmtarg{\mtc@Rline}{\relax}{\@mtc@FEfalse\@mtc@LIfalse} + \fi} +\def\mtc@CkFile#1{% + \@mtc@LItrue\@mtc@FEtrue + \if@mtc@checkfiles + \IfFileExists{#1}{% + \immediate\openin\@inputcheck #1\relax + \mtc@While{}{\if@mtc@LI\relax}{\mtc@Body}\mtc@EndWhile}% + {\@mtc@FEtrue}% + \else + \@mtc@FEfalse% + \fi} +\closein\@inputcheck\relax +\def\mtc@CkStr#1{% + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc + \immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}% + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.mtc}% + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Internal macros to decrement \upack{minitoc} counters}\label{s+code+d.count} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros internes pour décrémenter les compteurs de \upack{minitoc}}\label{s+code+d.count} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackpart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksection} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It is sometimes necessary to decrement a \upack{minitoc} counter (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} or \cnt{stc}) by one. +% These macros are: +% \or\relax +% Il est parfois nécessaire de décrémenter un compteur de \upack{minitoc} (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} ou \cnt{stc}) +% de un. Ces macros sont: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@onebackpart{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}} +\def\mtc@onebackchap{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}} +\def\mtc@onebacksect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svspart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the \com{part} command is not defined (by the document class, usually), +% we cannot patch it and a warning is +% displayed\,\footnote{Document classes with sectionning commands but no \com{part} command are likely non +% standard, hence the warning displayed on the terminal.}. Else, we patch its two branches, +% \com{@part} (for the unstarred version) or +% \com{@spart} (for the starred version, \com{part*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| to increment the parttoc +% counter \cnt{ptc}. See also section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}. +% +% \lneed{5} +% The code\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} of the next section (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) is also skipped if \com{part} is not defined. +% \or\relax +% Si la commande \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas la +% modifier et un avertissement est émis\,\footnote{Une classe de document ayant des commandes de sectionnement mais +% pas de commande \com{part} est probablement non standard, d'où l'avertissement affiché sur le terminal.}. +% Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@part} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@spart} (pour la +% version étoilée, \com{part*}): nous ajoutons \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de parttocs +% \cnt{ptc}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}. +% +% \lneed{5} +% Le\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} code de la section suivante (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) est aussi sauté si \com{part} n'est pas +% définie. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0018]{minitoc}% + {part level macros NOT available} +}{%% else undefined part (\part defined) + \mtcPackageInfo[I0023]{minitoc}% + {part level macros available\@gobble} + \let\mtc@svspart\@spart + \def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svspart} + \let\mtc@svpart\@part + \def\@part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred part}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@part} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred part, we need the \com{mtcaddpart} macro, +% which has an optional +% argument, the title of the part as if should appear in the TOC. +% +% By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty +% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) +% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the +% \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the +% \cnt{ptc} counter, via \com{adjustptc} +% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}). +% Using \texttt{xpart} as first argument of +% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xpart} will be invoked in place of +% \com{l@part} to print the entry in +% the TOC, but \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed +% (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une partie étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro +% \com{mtcaddpart}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la partie tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la table +% des matières. +% +% Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (le test est fait par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou omis, nous ajoutons +% une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une +% ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous +% incrémentons le compteur \cnt{ptc}, via \com{adjustptc} (définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}). +% Utiliser \texttt{xpart} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xpart} sera invoquée +% au lieu de \com{l@part} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xpart} utilise une très +% grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc celle-ci ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{% + \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{}}% + {\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{}% + \adjustptc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code terminates (temporarily) the part level commands. +% \or\relax +% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau partie. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Section level macros}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros au niveau section}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}} +% section level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined, i.e.,~in +% document classes like \class{article}, but not in document classes +% like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we +% test if \com{chapter} is defined and if \com{section} is defined, with adequate warnings. If neither are +% defined, you are in big trouble to use the \upack{minitoc} package with the class of your document. +% \or\relax +% Les\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}} +% macros au niveau section sont définies si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais \com{section} est définie, +% c'est-à-dire dans les classes de document telles que \class{article}, mais pas dans les classes de +% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter} +% est définie et si \com{section} est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Si aucune de ces deux commandes +% n'est définie, vous avez un sérieux problème pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de votre +% document. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0004]{minitoc}% + {chapter level macros NOT available\@gobble}% + \@ifundefined{section}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0029]{minitoc}% + {section level macros NOT available\@gobble}% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0017]{minitoc}% + {no section or chapter level macros available + \MessageBreak + PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS}}% + {\mtcPackageInfo[I0028]{minitoc}% + {section level macros available\@gobble}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Corrections for numbering}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections} +% \or\relax +% \section{Corrections pour la numérotation}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksect} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoftables} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As the TOC, the LOF and the LOT are considered as (starred) sections, we must decrement the secttoc counter +% (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} when the corresponding commands are executed. Hence we patch these +% commands. +% \or\relax +% Comme la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux sont considérées comme des sections +% (étoilées), il nous faut décrémenter le compteur de secttocs (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} +% lorsque les commandes correspondantes sont exécutées. Donc nous modifions ces commandes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\mtcsv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents + \let\mtcsv@listoffigures\listoffigures + \let\mtcsv@listoftables\listoftables + \def\tableofcontents{\mtcsv@tableofcontents\mtc@onebacksect} + \def\listoffigures{\mtcsv@listoffigures\mtc@onebacksect} + \def\listoftables{\mtcsv@listoftables\mtc@onebacksect} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modification de la commande \ucom{section}}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svsection} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svss} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the \com{section} command is not defined (by the document class, usually), +% we cannot patch it and a warning is displayed. +% Else, we patch its two branches, \com{@sect} (for the unstarred version) +% or \com{@ssect} (for the starred version, \com{section*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| to increment +% the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}, +% only in the unstarred case\footnote{Version \#25 has removed a spurious decrementation of this counter.}. +% \or\relax +% Si la commande \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas +% la modifier et un avertissement est affiché. Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@sect} (pour la version +% non étoilée) ou \com{@ssect} (pour la version étoilée, \com{section*}): nous ajoutons +% \com{stepcounter}\verb}|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}, seulement dans le cas non +% étoilé\,\footnote{La version~\#25 a éliminé une décrémentation superflue de ce compteur.}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\mtc@svsection\section + \def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection} + \let\mtc@svss\@ssect +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred section}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une section étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\l@section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred section, we need the \com{mtcaddsection} macro, which has an optional +% argument, the title of the section as it should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty +% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) +% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| +% line in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. +% Then we increment the +% \cnt{stc} counter, via \com{adjuststc} (this command is defined in section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). +% Using \texttt{xsect} as first argument of +% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xsect} will be invoked +% in place of \com{l@section} to print the entry in +% the TOC, but \com{l@xsect} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed +% (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une section étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro +% \com{mtcaddsection}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la section tel qu'il doit apparaître dans la +% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou +% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|xsect}{}...| dans le fichier +% \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| +% dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| dans les +% fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{stc}, +% via \com{adjuststc} (cette commande est définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). +% Le fait d'utiliser +% \texttt{xsect} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xsect} sera invoquée au +% lieu de \com{l@section} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xsect} utilise une +% très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc elle ne sera jamais réellement imprimée (sauf si vous +% trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{% + \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xsect}{}}% + {\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}% + \adjuststc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code terminates (temporarily) the section level commands, and we continue with chapter level macros. +% \or\relax +% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau section et nous continuons avec les commandes au niveau chapitre. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + }}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Chapter level macros}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0003} chapter level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is defined, i.e.,~in +% document classes like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we +% test if \com{chapter} is defined, with adequate warnings. The test is already done above, we are in the +% ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}. +% \or\relax +% Les\imess{I0003} macros au niveau chapitre sont définies si \com{chapter} est définie, c'est-à-dire, dans les classes de +% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter} +% est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Ce test a déjà été fait plus haut, nous sommes dans la branche +% «~sinon~» de \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0003]{minitoc}{chapter level macros available\@gobble} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{chapter} command is defined (by the document class, usually). +% We patch its two branches, \com{@chapter} (for the unstarred version) or \com{@schapter} (for the +% starred version, \com{chapter*}): we add call to \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| to increment the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}. +% Only the unstarred branch (\com{@chapter}) is patched here. +% The other branch is patched later (section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{chapter} est définie (par la classe de document, habituellement). Nous modifions ses deux +% branches, \com{@chapter} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@schapter} (pour la version étoilée, +% \com{chapter*}): nous ajoutons un appel à~\com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}. +% Seule la branche non étoilée est modifiée ici. L'autre branche sera modifiée plus loin (voir la +% section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter \def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour un chapitre étoilé}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter, we need the \com{mtcaddchapter} macro, which has an optional +% argument, the title of the chapter as if should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty +% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) +% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line +% in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the +% \cnt{mtc} counter, via \com{adjustmtc} +% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). +% Using \texttt{xchapter} as first argument of +% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xchapter} will be invoked in place of +% \com{l@chapter} to print the entry in +% the TOC, but \com{l@xchapter} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed +% (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour un chapitre étoilé, nous avons besoin de la macro +% \com{mtcaddchapter}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre du chapitre tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la +% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou +% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et +% \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, via \com{adjustmtc} (définie dans la +% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). Le fait d'utiliser \texttt{xchapter} comme premier argument +% de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xchapter} sera invoquée au lieu de \com{l@chapter} pour imprimer +% l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xchapter} utilise une très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette +% entrée, et donc elle ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{% + \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}}% + {\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}% + \adjustmtc}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code terminates (temporarily) the chapter level commands, +% i.e.,~terminates the \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| at the beginning of +% section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}. +% \or\relax +% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau chapitre, c'est-à-dire termine la construction +% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| du début de la section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Miscellaneous declarations}\label{s+code+misc.decls} +% \or\relax +% \section{Déclarations diverses}\label{s+code+misc.decls} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\newread} +% \begin{macro}{\newtoks} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strutbox} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrut} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrutbox} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{newread} command must be redeclared as being \com{outer} (as \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} told me). +% We need a token register (\com{mtc@toks}), a temporary string (\com{mtc@string}), struts (two kinds, each +% one using a box containing an invisible vertical rule), a rule with all +% dimensions equal to zero (\com{mtc@zrule}) and a command discouraging page breaks (\com{mtc@BBR}, for ``bad +% break''). For the struts, which are boxes containing an invisible vertical rule, we use ``\texttt{ex}''~units, +% to follow the current font. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{newread} doit étre redéclarée comme étant \com{outer} (comme me l'a conseillé +% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}). +% Nous avons besoin d'un registre \emph{token} (\com{mtc@toks}), d'une chaîne temporaire (\com{mtc@string}), +% d'étais ou \emph{struts} (de deux sortes, dont chacune utilise une boîte contenant un filet vertical invisible) +% un filet dont toutes les dimensions sont à~zéro (\com{mtc@zrule}) et d'une commande pour décourager les +% coupures de page (\com{mtc@BBR}, pour «~\emph{bad break}~»). Pour les étais, qui sont des boîtes contenant un +% filet vertical invisible, nous utilisons des unités «~\texttt{ex}~», pour suivre la fonte courante. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n} +\newtoks\mtc@toks +\def\mtc@string{\relax} +\newbox\mtc@strutbox +\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.8ex]{\z@}{2.5ex}} +\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox + \else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi} +\newbox\mtc@hstrutbox +\setbox\mtc@hstrutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.ex]{\z@}{1.ex}} +\def\mtc@hstrut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@hstrutbox + \else\unhcopy\mtc@hstrutbox\fi} +\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode\mtc@strut} +\def\mtc@zrule{\rule[\z@]{\z@}{\z@}} +\def\mtc@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Autoconfiguration of extensions}\label{s+code+autoconf} +% \or\relax +% \section{Autoconfiguration des suffixes}\label{s+code+autoconf} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code is a trick to determine if the operating system is able or unable to use long extensions (${}>3$~characters) +% in file names. We define a file descriptor (\com{tf@mtc}) to write files\footnote{\samepage It is +% the \emph{only} new +% file descriptor created by the \upack{minitoc} package. All files written by \upack{minitoc} use this +% descriptor, or one of the standard descriptors, e.g., for the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% In fact, \upack{minitoc} writes also in the +% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files, but via file descriptors already used by standard commands +% like \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} and \com{listoftables}. We can conclude that +% \upack{minitoc} itself uses only one file descriptor (or write stream). Some other attempts to make per chapter +% TOCs have failed by quickly leading to exhaustion of file descriptors (\TeX\ offers only 16~file descriptors for writing), +% because they called the standard internal \com{@starttoc} macro, which invokes \com{newwrite}, +% for each mini-table. As \upack{minitoc} writes into only one file at a~time (and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% file, and in the standard contents files, +% of course), we can reuse the same file descriptor and avoid this serious problem (which was present in the +% original version of the package). +% The \upack{minitoc} package writes in the contents files when it encounters a major sectionning command +% (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, or \com{section}), if necessary. It writes into the mini-table +% auxiliary files only via the mini-table preparing commands (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, +% \com{dosectlot}), once at a time. +% You do not need a new hammer for each nail.}. +% This code is verbose if long extensions cannot +% be used, else the messages are only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% The sequencing of these operations is vital. The table~\vref{t+code+8.3} shows this sequence. +% A~star~($*$) denotes which file is read in phase~3. +% \end{macro} +% \begin{table}[t] +% \centering +% \changeskips +% \caption{Trick to detect the limitation to short extensions}\label{t+code+8.3} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (time runs from left to right):}}&1&2&3\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{OS with long extensions}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&TRUE&TRUE&$*$\\ +% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FALSE&\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{OS with short extensions}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&TRUE&FALSE&$*$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% \or\relax +% Ce code est une astuce pour déterminer si le système d'exploitation est capable ou non d'utiliser des suffixes +% longs (${}>3$~caractères) dans les noms de fichiers. Nous définissons un descripteur de fichier (\com{tf@mtc}) +% pour écrire des fichiers\,\footnote{C'est le \emph{seul} nouveau descripteur de fichier créé par +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tous les +% fichiers écrits par \upack{minitoc} utilisent ce descripteur, ou l'un des descripteurs standard, comme pour le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. En fait, \upack{minitoc} écrit aussi dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} +% et \suffix{.lot}, +% mais via des descripteurs de fichiers déjà utilisés par des commandes standard telles que \com{tableofcontents}, +% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}. Nous pouvons en conclure que \upack{minitoc} lui-même +% utilise un seul descripteur de fichier (ou flux d'écriture). Certaines autres tentatives pour faire des tables des +% matières par chapitre ont échoué en conduisant rapidement à~un épuisement des descripteurs de fichiers (\TeX\ +% offre seulement 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture), parce qu'elles appelaient la macro interne standard +% \com{@starttoc}, qui invoque \com{newwrite}, pour chaque mini-table. Puisque \upack{minitoc} écrit +% dans seulement un seul fichier à~la fois (et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, +% et dans les fichiers standard de +% contenus, bien sûr), nous pouvons réutiliser le même descripteur de fichier et éviter ce sérieux problème (qui +% était présent dans la version originale du paquetage). +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} écrit dans les fichiers de contenus lorsqu'il rencontre une commande de +% sectionnement majeure (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, ou \com{section}), si nécessaire. Il écrit +% dans les fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables seulement via les commandes de préparation des mini-tables +% (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, \com{dosectlot}), un à~la fois. Vous n'avez pas besoin d'un nouveau +% marteau pour chaque clou.}. Ce code est bavard si les suffixes longs ne peuvent pas être utilisés, sinon les +% messages sont écrits seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Le séquencement de ces opérations est vital. +% Le tableau~\vref{t+code+8.3} montre ce séquencement. Un astérisque~($*$) indique quel fichier est lu lors de la phase~3. +% \end{macro} +% \begin{table}[t] +% \changeskips +% \centering +% \caption{Astuce pour détecter la limitation à~des suffixes courts}\label{t+code+8.3} +% {\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (le temps s'écoule de gauche à~droite):}}&1&2&3\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes longs}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&VRAI&VRAI&$*$\\ +% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FAUX&\\ +% \midrule +% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes courts}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&VRAI&FAUX&$*$\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx}} +% \end{table} +% \fi +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\newif} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\immediate} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\write} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\input} +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \begin{enumerate}[(1)] +% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, a message and a new flag:\imess{I0002} +% \or\relax +% D'abord, un message et un nouvel indicateur:\imess{I0002} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtcPackageInfo[I0002]{minitoc}% + {Autoconfiguration of extensions\@gobble} +\newif\if@mtc@longext@\@mtc@longext@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@true}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the +% real name of the file will be truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@true}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système +% d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0 +\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@true} +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@false}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@false}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc +\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@false} +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We read \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the real name of the file will be +% truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du +% fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\input{\jobname.mtc0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Hence,\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} the flag is true if we read really +% from \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, but false if we read from +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. The text and the severity of the messages are different. +% \or\relax +% En\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} conséquence, +% l'indicateur est vrai si nous lisons effectivement depuis le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, mais faux +% si nous lisons depuis \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. Le texte et la sévérité des messages sont différents. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0012]{minitoc}% + {Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used\@gobble} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0031]{minitoc}% + {==> this version is configured for UNIX-like + \MessageBreak + \space\space\space\space(long extensions) file names\@gobble}% +\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0019]{minitoc}% + {Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used + \MessageBreak + ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like + \MessageBreak + \space\space\space\space(8+3) file names} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \item +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We erase the contents of the two files (because \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is also used later as a~scratch file, +% see section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}). +% \or\relax +% Nous effaçons le contenu des deux fichiers (car \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi utilisé comme fichier de +% travail plus tard, voir la section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0 +\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{enumerate} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Detecting obsolete versions of \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Détection des versions obsolètes de \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\reset@font} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code detects old versions of the \LaTeX\ kernel that are no more supported and +% with which the \upack{minitoc}% package can hardly work. The trick is to detect the absence of some +% internal \LaTeX\ commands, \com{@inputcheck} and \com{reset@font}. +% If you get one of these messages, your are in bad luck and should \emph{urgently} update your +% \LaTeX\ installation, which is just rusting since\ldots\ a~lot of years! +% \or\relax +% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code détecte les vieilles versions du noyau \LaTeX\ qui ne sont plus maintenues +% et avec lesquelles le paquetage \upack{minitoc} aura beaucoup de mal à~fonctionner. +% L'astuce est de détecter l'absence de certaines commandes +% internes de \LaTeX, \com{@inputcheck} et \com{reset@font}. Si vous recevez l'un de ces messages, vous êtes +% dans une mauvaise situation et devriez, \emph{dans l'urgence,} mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX, +% qui rouille depuis\ldots\ pas mal d'années! +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0021]{minitoc}% + {Your version of latex.tex is obsolete. + \MessageBreak + Trying to continue..}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{} +\@ifundefined{reset@font}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0022]{minitoc}% + {Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete. + \MessageBreak + Trying to continue... crossing fingers}% + \let\reset@font\relax}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Adding a TOC entry without leaders nor page numbers}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ajouter une entrée dans la TdM sans points de conduite ni numéro de page}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\undottedmtcfalse} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The (internal) macro \com{@undottedtocline} is a modified version of the standard command \com{@dottedtocline}. +% It will be used in customization macros. +% \or\relax +% La macro (interne) \com{@undottedtocline} est une version modifiée de la commande standard \com{@dottedtocline}. +% Elle sera utilisée dans les macros de personnalisation. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifundottedmtc\undottedmtcfalse +\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else + \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}% + \hskip -\leftskip + #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak + \null\par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Default values for the page-number customizations}\label{s+code+custom.defaults} +% \or\relax +% \section{Valeurs par défaut pour les personnalisations des numéros de page}\label{s+code+custom.defaults} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This section defines some customization macros for the presence or +% absence of page numbers in the mini-tables. But if the \class{memoir} +% class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded, +% it does the job. So, we test first \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} +% to use the commands of \class{memoir} when they are available. +% \or\relax +% Cette section définit quelques macros de personnalisation concernant la présence ou l'absence des numéros de +% pages dans les mini-tables. Mais si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée, elle +% sait faire ce travail. Donc, nous testons d'abord \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} pour utiliser les commandes de +% \class{memoir} lorsqu'elles sont disponibles. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in minitocs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les minitocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumberson{section} + \cftpagenumberson{subsection} + \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} + \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} +\def\nomtcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumbersoff{section} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in secttocs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les secttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumberson{subsection} + \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} + \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} +\def\nostcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in parttocs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les parttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumberson{chapter} + \cftpagenumberson{section} + \cftpagenumberson{subsection} + \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} + \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} +\def\noptcpagenumbers{% + \cftpagenumbersoff{chapter} + \cftpagenumbersoff{section} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} + \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} + \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in minilofs, sectlofs, and partlofs: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} + \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} + \def\slfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} + \def\noslfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} + \def\plfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} + \def\noplfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries in minilots, sectlots, and partlots: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées dans les minilots, sectlots et partlots: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} + \def\nomltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} + \def\sltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} + \def\nosltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} + \def\pltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} + \def\nopltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Else, \upack{minitoc} will use its own commands. +% \or\relax +% Sinon, \upack{minitoc} utilisera ses propres commandes. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, for minitocs, secttocs and parttocs: +% \or\relax +% D'abord, pour les minitocs, secttocs et parttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null} + \def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax} + \def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null} + \def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax} + \def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null} + \def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, for minilofs, sectlofs and partlofs: +% \or\relax +% Puis, pour les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null} + \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax} + \def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null} + \def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax} + \def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null} + \def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, for minilots, sectlots and partlots: +% \or\relax +% Puis, pour les minilots, sectlots et partlots: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null} + \def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax} + \def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null} + \def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax} + \def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null} + \def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the default values are set; page numbers are present: +% \or\relax +% Et enfin, les valeurs par défaut sont établies; les numéros de pages sont présents: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\ptcpagenumbers +\plfpagenumbers +\pltpagenumbers +\mtcpagenumbers +\mlfpagenumbers +\mltpagenumbers +\stcpagenumbers +\slfpagenumbers +\sltpagenumbers +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A \need{.85\textheight} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Features'' for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+features} +% \or\relax +% \section{<<~Dispositifs~>> pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+features} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each kind of mini-table has five ``features'': a ``\feat{before}'' feature, an ``\feat{after}'' feature, +% an ``\feat{open}'' feature, an ``\feat{close}'' feature, +% and a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature. +% +% A ``\feat{before}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{beforeparttoc} which contains code to be executed +% before any mini-table of a given type: \com{beforeparttoc} is executed before each parttoc. Usually such features +% contain only trivial commands like \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, or \com{empty}. +% +% An ``\feat{after}'' feature is analog but its code is executed after each mini-table of a given type. +% +% An ``\feat{open}'' feature contains code to be executed just before the insertion of the file containing the +% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either prepare some basic formatting (like multi-column). +% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules. +% +% An ``\feat{close}'' feature contains code to be executed just after the insertion of the file containing the +% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either finish some basic formatting (like multi-column). +% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules. +% +% A ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{thispageparttocstyle} which contains code to define the page +% style implied by mini-tables of a given type: the command \com{thispageparttocstyle} can be defined as +% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Usually, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is only defined for part-level mini-tables, +% which use page breaks in their \feat{before} and \feat{after} features. For chapter- and section-level +% mini-tables, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is usually defined as \com{empty}. +% +% We set the default values for the part-level features depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command, as +% \class{article}-like documents are different from the \class{book}- or \class{report}-like documents for the +% layout of part-level mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% À~chaque type de mini-table sont associés cinq «~dispositifs~» (\emph{features}): un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» +% (avant), un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (après), +% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (ouverture), un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (fermeture), +% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (style de cette page). +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» est défini par une macro telle que \com{beforeparttoc} qui contient du code à~exécuter +% avant toute mini-table d'un type donné: \com{beforeparttoc} est exécutée avant chaque parttoc. Habituellement, +% de tels dispositifs ne contiennent que des commandes triviales telles que \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| ou \com{empty}. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» est analogue mais son code est exécuté après chaque mini-table d'un type donné. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste avant l'insertion du fichier contenant la +% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit préparent une mise en forme basique +% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste après l'insertion du fichier contenant la +% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit achèvent une mise en forme basique +% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs. +% +% Un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est défini par une macro comme \com{thispageparttocstyle} qui contient du +% code pour définir le style de page impliqué par les mini-tables d'un type donné: la commande \com{thispageparttocstyle} +% peut être définie comme étant \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Habituellement, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» n'est +% défini que pour les mini-tables au niveau partie, qui utilisent des sauts de page dans leurs dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» +% et «~\feat{after}~». Pour les mini-tables aux niveaux chapitre et section, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est +% habituellement défini comme étant \com{empty}. +% +% Nous établissons les valeurs par défaut pour les dispositifs au niveau partie selon la présence de la commande +% \com{chapter}, car les documents du genre \class{article} sont différents des documents du genre \class{book} +% ou \class{report} pour la mise en page des mini-tables au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (par défaut): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \let\beforeparttoc\empty + \let\beforepartlof\empty + \let\beforepartlot\empty}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{before}'' feature: +% \or\relax +% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{before}~» par défaut +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + {\let\beforeparttoc\cleardoublepage + \let\beforepartlof\cleardoublepage + \let\beforepartlot\cleardoublepage} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforeminitoc\empty +\let\beforeminilof\empty +\let\beforeminilot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforesecttoc\empty +\let\beforesectlof\empty +\let\beforesectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (par défaut): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \let\afterparttoc\empty + \let\afterpartlof\empty + \let\afterpartlot\empty}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{after}'' feature: +% \or\relax +% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{after}~» par défaut +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + {\let\afterparttoc\cleardoublepage + \let\afterpartlof\cleardoublepage + \let\afterpartlot\cleardoublepage} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\afterminitoc\empty +\let\afterminilof\empty +\let\afterminilot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): +% \or\relax +% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\aftersecttoc\empty +\let\aftersectlof\empty +\let\aftersectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, the ``\feat{open}'' features do nothing: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{open}'' ne font rien: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\openparttoc\empty +\let\openpartlof\empty +\let\openpartlot\empty +\let\openminitoc\empty +\let\openminilof\empty +\let\openminilot\empty +\let\opensecttoc\empty +\let\opensectlof\empty +\let\opensectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, ``\feat{close}'' features do nothing: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{close}'' ne font rien: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\closeparttoc\empty +\let\closepartlof\empty +\let\closepartlot\empty +\let\closeminitoc\empty +\let\closeminilof\empty +\let\closeminilot\empty +\let\closesecttoc\empty +\let\closesectlof\empty +\let\closesectlot\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, all the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features (at part level) use the \texttt{empty} page style. +% It affects only the first page of the mini-table. If \com{chapter} is not defined, there is no default +% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features at the part level. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, tous les dispositifs «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (au niveau partie) utilisent le style de page \texttt{empty}. +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, il n'y a pas de dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» au niveau partie. +% Ceci affecte seulement la première page de la mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \def\thispageparttocstyle{\empty} + \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\empty} + \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\empty}}% +{\def\thispageparttocstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}} + \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}} + \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}} +\def\thispageminitocstyle{\empty} +\def\thispageminilofstyle{\empty} +\def\thispageminilotstyle{\empty} +\def\thispagesecttocstyle{\empty} +\def\thispagesectlofstyle{\empty} +\def\thispagesectlotstyle{\empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, we will define the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro which is +% a~much easier user interface to set the mini-tables ``features''. +% \or\relax +% Dans la section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, nous définirons la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} qui est une +% interface utilisateur bien plus facile pour mettre en place les «~dispositifs~» des mini-tables. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fake tables of contents}\label{s+code+fake} +% \or\relax +% \section{Tables des matières invisibles}\label{s+code+fake} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\fake@starttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw} +% \begin{macro}{\newwrite} +% \begin{macro}{\immediate} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs, +% you need to create the \suffix{.toc} file, without inserting it +% into your document. This \com{faketableofcontents} command is a stripped off version +% of the standard command \com{tableofcontents}. +% We define in the same way the analog commands \com{fakelistoffigures} and \com{fakelistoftables}, +% using in fact just a stripped version \com{fake@starttoc} of \com{@starttoc}. But it is nice to reset to zero the +% \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc}, and \cnt{stc} counters now, if they are defined\,\footnote{Remember the infamous +% ``\texttt{stc0}'' bug.}. +% \or\relax +% Si vous souhaitez ne pas avoir de table des matières, mais avoir quand même des minitocs, il vous faut créer le +% fichier \suffix{.toc}, sans l'insérer dans votre document. Cette commande +% \com{faketableofcontents} est une version restreinte de la commande \com{tableofcontents} standard. Nous +% définissons de la même manière les deux autres commandes analogues \com{fakelistoffigures} et \com{fakelistoftables}, +% en utilisant en fait simplement une version restreinte \com{fake@starttoc} de \com{@starttoc}. +% Mais il est bon de remettre à~zéro +% maintenant les compteurs \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} et \cnt{stc}, s'ils sont définis\,\footnote{Souvenez-vous +% de l'infâme erreur <<~\texttt{stc0}~>>.}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}% + \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% + \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}% + \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}% + } +\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}} +\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}} +\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup \makeatletter + \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname + \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname + \jobname.#1\relax \fi + \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code uses the same file descriptors (for writing) than the original commands. +% \or\relax +% Ce code utilise les mêmes descripteurs de fichier (en écriture) que les commandes d'origine. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Depth counters for minilofs and minilots} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les minilofs et les minilots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, +% we create the necessary new counters: +% \dcnt{minilofdepth} and \dcnt{minilofdepth}. +% These counters are initialized to~2. +% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons +% les nouveaux compteurs nécessaires: +% \dcnt{minilofdepth} et \dcnt{minilofdepth}. +% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. +% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{minilofdepth}\setcounter{minilofdepth}{2}}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{minilotdepth}\setcounter{minilotdepth}{2}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Chapter level commands}\label{s+code+chapter.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+chapter.level} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% From here, we define the chapter-level commands. +% \or\relax +% À~partir d'ici, nous définissons les commandes au niveau chapitre. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we memorize the marks (not used today, but\ldots): +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous mémorisons les marques (ceci n'est pas encore utilisé, mais\ldots): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth +\global\let\@mkboth\markboth +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Starred parts, chapters or sections}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections} +% \or\relax +% \section{Parties, chapitres et section étoilés}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@stc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define commands to manage the starred sectionning commands: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} and \com{section*}. +% The section-level is different depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command. +% Eventually, a counter is incremented. +% A~contents line is added in the \suffix{.toc} file, with the right depth to print it (see \verb|\l@star...| later, +% in section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons des commandes pour traiter les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} +% et \com{section*}. Le niveau section est différent selon que \com{chapter} est définie ou non. Éventuellement, +% un compteur est incrémenté. Une ligne de contenu est ajoutée dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, avec la bonne +% profondeur pour l'imprimer (voir \verb|\l@star...| plus loin, dans la section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addst@rred#1#2{% + \addcontentsline{toc}{star#1}{#2}% + \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax + \stepcounter{ptc}% + \fi + }% + \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix\relax + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \fi + }% + \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax +%% \@ifundefined{chapter}{\stepcounter{stc}}{}% + \stepcounter{stc}% + \fi + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is not defined, we just define \com{addstarredsection}: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, nous définissons simplement \com{addstarredsection}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% +\gdef\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Else we begin to define the stuff for chapter-level commands (the ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|): +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Sinon, nous commençons à~définir le matériel pour les commandes au niveau chapitre (branche «~sinon~» de +% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +{% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\The@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0003} define now: the internal format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{The@mtc}), the obsolete command +% \com{firstchapteris} (it just emits a harmless warning), the \cnt{mtc} counter (initialized to~0), +% the \com{adjustmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter, by~1 by default), +% the \com{decrementmtc} command (decrements the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1), +% the \com{incrementmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1), +% the format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{themtc}), +% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialized to~2, for the depth of a minitoc +% (analog to the standard \dcnt{tocdepth} counter). +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0003} définissons ensuite: le format interne du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{The@mtc}), la commande +% obsolète \com{firstchapteris} (elle ne fait qu'émettre un avertissement bénin), le compteur \cnt{mtc} (initialisé +% à~0), la commande \com{adjustmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc}, de~1 par défaut), +% la commande \com{decrementmtc} (décrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1), +% la commande \com{incrementmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1), +% le format du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{themtc}), +% le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialisé à~2, pour la profondeur d'une minitoc (analogue +% au compteur standard \dcnt{tocdepth}). +% \fi +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\The@mtc{\arabic{mtc}} +\def\firstchapteris#1% + {\mtcPackageWarning[W0003]{minitoc}% + {\string\firstchapteris \space is an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command}% + \@firstchapteris@used@true} +\newcounter{mtc} +\setcounter{mtc}{0} +\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{mtc}{#1}} +\def\decrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}} +\def\incrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{+1}} +\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} +\newcounter{minitocdepth} +\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the horizontal rules to draw before and after minitocs (\com{mtc@rule}), and we copy +% that definition into analog macros for other kinds of mini-tables. We also set the default value (24pt) of +% \com{mtcindent}, the indentation for minitocs (both sides). The rules are 0.4pt thick. They are defined via +% \com{hrule} to stay in vertical mode for the final \com{kern}. +% \or\relax % +% Nous définissons les filets horizontaux à~tracer avant et après les minitocs +% (\com{mtc@rule}), puis nous copions cette définition dans des macros analogues pour les autres sortes de +% mini-tables. Nous établissons aussi la valeur par défaut (24pt) de \com{mtcindent}, l'indentation pour les minitocs (des +% deux côtés). Les filets sont épais de 0.4pt. Ils sont définis via \com{hrule} pour rester en mode vertical +% pour le \com{kern} final. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width\columnwidth \kern2.6\p@} +\let\mlf@rule\mtc@rule +\let\mlt@rule\mtc@rule +\let\plf@rule\mtc@rule +\let\plt@rule\mtc@rule +\let\slf@rule\mtc@rule +\let\slt@rule\mtc@rule +\mtcindent=24\p@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{14} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Font commands for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes de fontes pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define these commands with full NFSS~\cite{fontsel} descriptions. These definitions are effective if \com{chapter} is +% defined. +% The fonts for titles are also defined here. See also the \com{mtcsetfont} macro +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) and the \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro later +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons ces commandes avec des descriptions NFSS~\cite{fontsel} complètes. Ces définitions sont effectives +% si \com{chapter} +% est définie. Les fontes pour les titres sont aussi définies ici. Voir aussi la macro \com{mtcsetfont} +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) et la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} plus loin +% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} +\def\mtcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +\let\mtcSSfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSSSfont\mtcfont +\let\mtcPfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSPfont\mtcfont +\let\mlffont\mtcfont \let\mlfSfont\mtcfont +\let\mltfont\mtcfont \let\mltSfont\mtcfont +\def\mtifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And \com{coffeefont} is used for ``coffee breaks{\myCoffeecup}'' in the \pack{minutes} +% package~\cite{minutes}. +% \or\relax +% Et \com{coffeefont} est utilisée pour les «~pauses café{\myCoffeecup}~» dans le +% paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\coffeefont{\small\rmfamily\slshape\mdseries} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Internal commands to position the mini-table titles}\label{s+code+position.title.mini} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes internes pour positionner les titres des mini-tables}\label{s+code+position.title.mini} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The commands \verb|\miniXXX| and \verb|\dominiXXX| accept an optional argument to left justify, center, +% right justify or omit the title of the chapter-level mini-tables. By default, these titles are left justified. +% The choice made in a \verb|\dominiXXX| command is global and memorized in \com{df@mtitc}, \com{df@mtilf} or +% \com{df@mtilt}; the choice made in a \verb|\miniXXX| command is local and stored in \com{do@mtitc}, +% \com{do@mtilf} or \com{do@mtilt}. See the \com{minitoc@} macro later +% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). An empty title needs a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \or\relax +% Les commandes \verb|\miniXXX| et \verb|\dominiXXX| acceptent un argument optionnel pour justifier à~gauche, +% centrer, justifier à~droite ou omettre le titre des mini-tables au niveau chapitre. Par défaut, ces titres sont +% justifiés à~gauche. Le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\dominiXXX| est global et mémorisé dans \com{df@mtitc}, +% \com{df@mtilf} ou \com{df@mtilt}; le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\miniXXX| est local et rangé dans +% \com{do@mtitc}, \com{do@mtilf} ou \com{do@mtilt}. Voir la macro \com{minitoc@} plus loin +% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). Un titre vide nécessite une correction verticale +% (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles: +% \or\relax +% Titres centrés, justifiés à~gauche, justifiés à~droite ou vides: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} +\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} +\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} +\def\e@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +\def\n@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Default: titles on left: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont justifiés à~gauche: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\do@mtitc\l@mti +\let\df@mtitc\l@mti +\let\do@mtilf\l@mti +\let\df@mtilf\l@mti +\let\do@mtilt\l@mti +\let\df@mtilt\l@mti +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{mtc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\list} +% \begin{macro}{\itemsep} +% \begin{macro}{\itemindent} +% \begin{macro}{\listparindent} +% \begin{macro}{\topsep} +% \begin{macro}{\parsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each minitoc is placed inside a \env{mtc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the +% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{mtc@verse} and \com{endmtc@verse}. +% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \verb|\\|, then call \com{list}\verb|{}| and set some +% dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} is set to zero if the \opt{tight} option is active (to reduce the spacing of the lines). +% \com{parskip} is set to zero if the \opt{k-tight} option is active +% (to reduce the spacing of the lines). +% Both margins are set to \com{mtcindent}. \com{endmtc@verse} terminates the list and discourages a page break. +% The \env{mtc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{mtcoffset}). +% \or\relax +% Chaque minitoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{mtc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue +% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et donc il est défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: \com{mtc@verse} et +% \com{endmtc@verse}. Comme c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord (de manière locale) \verb|\\|, +% puis nous appelons \com{list}\verb|{}| et établissons quelques dimensions telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, +% \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{tight} est active +% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes). +% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{k-tight} est active +% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes). +% Les deux marges sont établies à~\com{mtcindent}. +% L'environnement \env{mtc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{mtcoffset}). +% \com{endmtc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{% + \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \partopsep=\z@ + \listparindent=\itemindent \topsep=1ex + \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi + \leftmargin=\mtcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}% + \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}% + }% + \item[]} +\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof}, and \ucom{minilot} commands}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot} +% These three commands are very similar, with only cosmetic differences. +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof} et \ucom{minilot}}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot} +% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires, avec seulement des différences de détail. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{minitoc} command}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minitoc}}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minitoc} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minitoc} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minitoc (il n'y a pas de +% minitoc automatique). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a +% \com{dominitoc} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. +% \com{dominitoc} has itself an +% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. The default value of +% the optional argument of the \com{dominitoc} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: +% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of +% \com{dominitoc}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par +% une commande \com{dominitoc}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominitoc} a elle-même +% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. La valeur par +% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominitoc} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais +% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via +% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominitoc}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we define \com{minitoc} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in +% the \com{minitoc@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a +% left bracket for the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous définissons \com{minitoc} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis +% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minitoc@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce +% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The real code of \com{minitoc} is in \com{minitoc@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) +% specifying the position of the title. +% \or\relax +% Le véritable code de \com{minitoc} est dans \com{minitoc@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les +% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we set the global flag \com{@minitoc@used@true} to note that \com{minitoc} has been called (this will be +% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \or\relax +% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minitoc@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minitoc} a été +% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minitoc@[#1]{% +\global\@minitoc@used@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The name of the file containing the minitoc is constructed from \com{jobname} and a +% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mtc} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.M} (short extensions) +% followed by the absolute number of the minitoc. +% \or\relax +% Le nom du fichier contenant la minitoc est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, +% qui est \suffix{.mtc} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.M} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu +% de la minitoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@ + \def\@tocfile{mtc\The@mtc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{M\The@mtc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. +% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minitoc has been +% requested). +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le +% fichier est % vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minitoc vide +% a été demandée). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@minitoc@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{thispageminitocstyle} to set the page style +% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minitoc). +% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minitoc. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{thispageminitocstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par +% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, +% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispageminitocstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{beforeminitoc}, +% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minitoc) +% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the +% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), +% then the top rule of the minitoc (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page +% break between the title and the top rule). +% The font is set to \com{mtcfont}. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{beforeminitoc}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de +% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minitoc) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est +% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut +% de la minitoc (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une +% coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mtcfont}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeminitoc + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti + \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti + \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti + \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti + \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti + \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\mtctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtitc\e@mti\relax\fi + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\mtcfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent %% + \ifx\mtc@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin +% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: +% \or\relax +% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres +% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% + \begin{mtc@verse}{\mtcoffset}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minitocdepth}), +% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth} +% has been forced to \dcnt{minitocdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, +% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée +% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où +% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minitocdepth}, pour n'imprimer que +% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire +% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minitoc by inputing the minitoc file. +% But before reading the minitoc file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his +% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro +% \com{mtc@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via +% some \com{mtcsetformat} commands). +% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minitoc en insérant le +% fichier de minitoc. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minitoc, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) +% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mtc@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page +% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). +% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \mtc@setform% + \openminitoc \global\inminitoctrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inminitocfalse\closeminitoc + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the +% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminitoc}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), +% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminitoc}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) +% est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \end{mtc@verse}% + \kernafterminitoc + \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@bottom@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminitoc\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we define the bottom rule for a minitoc, with some space under the minitoc: +% \or\relax +% Et nous définissons le filet inférieur pour une minitoc, avec un peu d'espace en dessous de la minitoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@bottom@rule{% + \ifx\mtc@rule\relax\relax\else + \vskip -2.5ex + \rule[2.4\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{minilof} command}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilof}}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilof} command is very similar to the \com{minitoc} command. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilof} est très similaire à~la commande \com{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilof} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilof} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilof (il n'y a pas de +% minilof automatique). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a +% \com{dominilof} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. +% \com{dominilof} has itself an +% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilof}. The default value of +% the optional argument of the \com{dominilof} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: +% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of +% \com{dominilof}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilof}. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par +% une commande \com{dominilof}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilof} a elle-même +% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. La valeur par +% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilof} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais +% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via +% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilof}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we define \com{minilof} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in +% the \com{minilof@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a +% left bracket for the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous définissons \com{minilof} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis +% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilof@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce +% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The real code of \com{minilof} is in \com{minilof@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) +% specifying the position of the title. +% \or\relax +% Le véritable code de \com{minilof} est dans \com{minilof@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les +% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilof@used@true} to note that \com{minilof} has been called (this will be +% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \or\relax +% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilof@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilof} a été +% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilof@[#1]{% +\global\@minilof@used@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The name of the file containing the minilof is constructed from \com{jobname} and a +% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlf} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.F} (short extensions) +% followed by the absolute number of the minilof. +% \or\relax +% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilof est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, +% qui est \suffix{.mlf} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.F} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu +% de la minilof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{mlf\The@mtc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{F\The@mtc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. +% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilof has been +% requested). +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis +% si le fichier est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilof +% vide a été demandée). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@minilof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{thispageminilofstyle} to set the page style +% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilof). +% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilof. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilofstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par +% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, +% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispageminilofstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{beforeminilof}, +% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilof) +% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the +% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), +% then the top rule of the minilof (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit +% a page break between the title and the top rule). +% The font is set to \com{mlffont}. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilof}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de +% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilof) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est +% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut +% de la minilof (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mlffont}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeminilof + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti + \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti + \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti + \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti + \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti + \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\mlftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilf\e@mti\relax\fi + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@ + \reset@font\mlffont + \parindent=\z@ + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\mlf@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin +% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: +% \or\relax +% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres +% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% + \begin{mtc@verse}{\mlfoffset}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minilofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilofdepth}), +% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth} +% has been forced to \dcnt{minilofdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, +% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée +% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où +% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilofdepth}, pour n'imprimer que +% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire +% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\c@lofdepth=\c@minilofdepth + \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilof by inputing the minilof file. +% But before reading the minilof file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his +% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro +% \com{mlf@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some +% \com{mtcsetformat} commands). +% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilof en insérant le +% fichier de minilof. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilof, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) +% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlf@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page +% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). +% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \mlf@setform + \global\openminilof\inminiloftrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inminiloffalse\closeminilof + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the +% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), +% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) +% est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \end{mtc@verse}% + \kernafterminilof + \nopagebreak[4]\mlf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilof\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{minilot} command}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilot}}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilot} command is absolutely similar to the \com{minilof} command: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilot} est absolument similaire à~la commande \com{minilof}: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{minilot} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{minilot} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilot (il n'y a pas de +% minilot automatique). +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a +% \com{dominilot} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. +% \com{dominilot} has itself an +% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilot}. The default value of +% the optional argument of the \com{dominilot} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: +% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of +% \com{dominilot}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilot}. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par +% une commande \com{dominilot}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilot} a elle-même +% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. La valeur par +% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilot} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais +% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via +% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilot}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% So we define \com{minilot} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in +% the \com{minilot@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a +% left bracket for the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous définissons \com{minilot} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis +% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilot@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce +% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The real code of \com{minilot} is in \com{minilot@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) +% specifying the position of the title. +% \or\relax +% Le véritable code de \com{minilot} est dans \com{minilot@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les +% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilot@used@true} to note that \com{minilot} has been called (this will be +% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \or\relax +% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilot@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilot} a été +% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\minilot@[#1]{% +\global\@minilot@used@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The name of the file containing the minilot is constructed from \com{jobname} and a +% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlt} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.T} (short extensions) +% followed by the absolute number of the minilot. +% \or\relax +% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilot est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, +% qui est \suffix{.mlt} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.T} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu +% de la minilot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{mlt\The@mtc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{T\The@mtc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. +% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilot has been +% requested). +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le fichier +% est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilot vide a été demandée). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@minilot@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{thispageminilotstyle} to set the page style +% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilot). +% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilot. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilotstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par +% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, +% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispageminilotstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We call \com{beforeminilot}, +% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilot) +% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the +% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), +% then the top rule of the minilot (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment +% (to inhibit a page break between the title and the top rule). +% The font is set to \com{mltfont}. +% \or\relax +% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilot}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de +% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilot) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est +% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut +% de la minilot (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} +% (pour empêcher une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mltfont}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeminilot + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti + \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti + \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti + \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti + \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti + \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\mlttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilt\e@mti\relax\fi + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\mltfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\mlt@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin +% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: +% \or\relax +% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres +% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% + \begin{mtc@verse}{\mltoffset}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minilotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilotdepth}), +% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{lotdepth} +% has been forced to \dcnt{minilotdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, +% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée +% (\com{c@minilotdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où +% \dcnt{lotdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilotdepth}, pour n'imprimer que +% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire +% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\c@lotdepth=\c@minilotdepth + \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilot by inputing the minilot file. +% But before reading the minilot file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his +% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro +% \com{mlt@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some +% \com{mtcsetformat} commands). +% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilot en insérant le +% fichier de minilot. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilot, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) +% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) +% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlt@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page +% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). +% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \mlt@setform + \global\openminilot\inminilottrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inminilotfalse\closeminilot + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the +% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), +% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) +% est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \end{mtc@verse}% + \kernafterminilot + \nopagebreak[4]\mlt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilot\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{continued}}{continued}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{suite}}{suite}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}% +% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}% +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we define \com{l@xchapter} which is like \com{l@chapter}, but with a huge depth, to inhibit its +% printing (except if you cheat): +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous définissons \com{l@xchapter} qui est semblable à~\com{l@chapter}, mais avec une profondeur +% très grande, pour inhiber son impression (sauf si vous trichez): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} +\def\xchapter{xchapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}% +% \begin{macro}{\sv@chapter}% +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\ignorespaces} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we patch \com{@chapter} (the non-starred branch of \com{chapter}) +% to add pseudo-chapter entries in the LOF and the LOT (these entries will be used by +% the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to split the LOF and the LOT into slices). +% \or\relax +% Puis nous modifions \com{@chapter} (la branche non étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des entrées de +% pseudo-chapitres dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux (ces entrées seront utilisées par les +% commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| pour découper en tranches la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\sv@chapter\@chapter +\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax% + \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}% + \ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We also patch \com{@schapter} (the starred branch of \com{chapter}) +% to add marks in the TOC to delimit +% chapters; these marks will be used by the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to take slices from the LOF and the LOT; as +% they are defined as \com{relax}, they should not perturbate other packages. +% \or\relax +% Nous modifions aussi \com{@schapter} (la branche étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des marques dans la +% table des matières afin de délimiter les chapitres; ces marques seront utilisées par les commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| +% pour prélever des tranches dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux; comme elles sont définies comme +% étant \com{relax}, elles ne devraient pas perturber d'autres paquetages. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter +\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter} +\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{@@@}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter} +\let\chapterbegin\relax +\let\chapterend\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the command \com{chapter} is undefined, we define the command \com{addstarredsection} +% (only if \com{section} is defined). If the command \com{chapter} is defined, we define the command +% \com{addstarredchapter}. If the command \com{part} is defined, we define the command \com{addstarredpart}. +% We use the utility command \com{addst@rred} defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}. +% \or\relax +% Si la commande \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, alors nous devons définir la commande \com{addstarredsection} (mais +% seulement si \com{section} est définie). Si la commande \com{chapter} est définie, nous définissons la +% commande \com{addstarredchapter}. Si la commande \com{part} est définie, nous définissons la commande +% \com{addstarredpart}. Nous utilisons la commande utilitaire \com{addst@rred} définie dans la +% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\@ifundefined{section}% + {}{\def\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}}}% + {\def\addstarredchapter#1{\addst@rred{chapter}{#1}}} +\@ifundefined{part}% + {}{\def\addstarredpart#1{\addst@rred{part}{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{TOC entries without leaders}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders} +% \or\relax +% \section{Entrées de TdM sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define two internal macros to format TOC entries without leaders. The macro +% \com{@Undottedtocline} prints no page number, but \com{@Undottedtoclinep} prints~it. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons deux macros internes pour mettre en forme des entrées de table des matières sans points de +% conduite. La macro \com{@Undottedtocline} n'imprime pas de numéro de page, mais \com{@Undottedtoclinep} +% l'imprime. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else + \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax + \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip + {\coffeefont #4}\nobreak \nobreak\null + \par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The same but with the page number: +% \or\relax +% La même chose, mais avec le numéro de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else + \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ + {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip + \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue + \interlinepenalty\@M + \leavevmode + \@tempdima #3\relax + \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip + {#4}\nobreak \hfill \nobreak\null + \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}% + \par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-tables with or without leaders}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-tables avec ou sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@minitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This code sets the flag to false, then patches each mini-table command (its internal part). +% We alter the commands \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., to test the flag \com{ifundottedmtc} and, +% if true, replace locally \com{@dottedtocline} by its dotless version \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. Of course, +% we must also test the availability of the \com{chapter}, \com{part} and \com{section} commands, to avoid to +% define many unnecessary commands. +% \or\relax +% Ce code force l'indicateur à~faux, puis modifie chaque commande de mini-table (en fait, sa partie interne). Nous modifions +% les commandes \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., pour tester l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc} et, s'il +% est vrai, remplacer localement \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version sans points de conduite \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. +% Bien sûr, nous devons aussi tester la disponibilité des commandes \com{chapter}, \com{part} et \com{section}, +% pour éviter de définir de nombreuses commandes non nécessaires. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% + \let\sv@minitoc@\minitoc@ + \def\minitoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@minitoc@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@minilof@\minilof@ + \def\minilof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@minilof@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@minilot@\minilot@ + \def\minilot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@minilot@[#1]}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the part level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \let\sv@parttoc@\parttoc@ + \def\parttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@parttoc@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@partlof@\partlof@ + \def\partlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@partlof@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@partlot@\partlot@ + \def\partlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@partlot@[#1]}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the section level: +% \or\relax +% Pour le niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}{% + \let\sv@secttoc@\secttoc@ + \def\secttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@secttoc@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@sectlof@\sectlof@ + \def\sectlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@sectlof@[#1]}}% + \let\sv@sectlot@\sectlot@ + \def\sectlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi + \sv@sectlot@[#1]}}}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{dominitoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{dominitoc} et ses analogues}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\chapbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The three commands \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} are, of course, very similar. +% They take the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} file (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot} files) +% produced by the previous \LaTeX\ run and +% cut it in slices (one slice per chapter or starred chapter) into the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files +% (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), using specific +% lines in the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (resp. \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) file. These lines are +% essentially chapter-level entry commands (like \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|, +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) delimiting chapters in the TOC (or in the LOF or the +% LOT). Analog part-level lines delimit parts, hence also chapters. +% \or\relax +% Les trois commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} sont, bien sûr, très similaires. +% Elles prennent le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (respectivement les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) +% produit par l'exécution précédente de \LaTeX\ et l'éclatent en tranches (une tranche par chapitre ou chapitre +% étoilé) vers les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (respectivement, les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et +% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), en utilisant des lignes spécifiques dans le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} +% (respectivement, \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}). Ces lignes sont essentiellement des commandes pour +% des entrées au niveau chapitre (telles que \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|, +% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) délimitant les chapitres dans la table des matières (ou +% dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des tableaux). Des lignes analogues au niveau partie délimitent les +% parties, donc aussi les chapitres. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% As \com{dominitoc} has an optional argument, whose default value is~``\texttt{l}'' (left), it calls \com{dominitoc@} +% with a argument delimited by brackets. +% +% The macros are \com{dominitoc} (user interface), which calls \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (or with the optional argument +% of \com{dominitoc}). +% Then \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| processes its argument and calls \com{@@dominitoc}. +% \com{@@dominitoc} calls \com{@dominitoc} (passing \com{jobname} as argument) then close the minitoc file +% written. \com{@dominitoc} reset to zero the counter of mini-tables, calls \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (where +% \verb|#1| is the value of \com{jobname}), then reset again to zero the counter of mini-tables. Each call to +% \com{dominitoc@} (i.e.,~to \com{dominitoc}) sets the flag \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. This will be used later +% for a hint (which detects that you have correctly called \com{minitoc} \emph{after} \com{dominitoc} and that both +% or neither have been called). See section~\vref{ss+final.coh}. +% The code is similar for \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot}. +% \or\relax +% Puisque \com{dominitoc} a un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut est~«~\texttt{l}~» (gauche), elle +% appelle \com{dominitoc@} avec un argument délimité par des crochets. +% +% Les macros sont \com{dominitoc} (interface utilisateur), qui appelle \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (ou avec l'argument +% optionnel de \com{dominitoc}). Puis \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| traite son argument et appelle \com{@@dominitoc}. +% \com{@@dominitoc} appelle \com{@dominitoc} (en passant \com{jobname} comme argument) puis ferme le fichier +% minitoc écrit. \com{@dominitoc} remet à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables, appelle \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (où +% \verb|#1| est la valeur de \com{jobname}), puis remet encore à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables. Chaque appel +% à~\com{dominitoc@} (c'est-à-dire, à~\com{dominitoc}) établit l'indicateur \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. Ceci +% sera utilisé plus tard pour une indication (\emph{hint}) (qui détecte si vous avez appelé correctement \com{minitoc} +% \emph{après} \com{dominitoc} et que les deux ont été appelées). Voir la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}. +% Le code est similaire pour \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dominitoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and create the minitocs files, with the +% adequate extension. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dominitoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers minitocs, +% avec le suffixe adéquat. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dominitoc#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{mtc}{0} + \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\@dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dominilof} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lof} file and create the minilofs files, with the +% adequate extension. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dominilof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers minilofs, +% avec le suffixe adéquat. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dominilof#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{mtc}{0} + \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\@dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dominilot} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lot} file and create the minilots files, with the +% adequate extension. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dominilot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers minilots, +% avec le suffixe adéquat. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dominilot#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{mtc}{0} + \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minitoc title; +% a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minitoc; +% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominitoc@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dominitoc@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dominitoc \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dominitoc@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dominitoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilof title; +% a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilof; +% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominilof@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dominilof@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dominilof \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dominilof@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dominilof} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilot title; +% a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilot; +% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominilot@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dominilot@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dominilot \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dominilot@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dominilot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros invoke the \verb|\@domini...| macros to create the mini-table file, then close the file +% descriptor. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros invoquent les macros \verb|\@domini...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le +% descripteur de fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the TOC file}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier TdM}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros\,\footnote{This code is derived from the +% \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission. +% Some modifications were made by \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% \xname{Didier}{Verna}, and \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} for the support of \pack{hyperref}, essentially by adding an +% argument to some macros, to use the hyperlink argument in the contents lines.}: +% \or\relax +% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes\,\footnote{Ce code est dérivé du paquetage +% \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission. +% Des modifications ont été faites par +% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} pour le support de \pack{hyperref}, +% essentiellement en ajoutant un argument à~certaines macros, pour utiliser l'argument hyperlien dans les lignes de +% contenu.}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\MTC@list{#2}% + \MTC@loop{#1}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Teste si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@toc{% + \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{chapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter (which simulates the chapter counter, but is absolute) +% is incremented and a new minitoc file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues depuis le fichier table des matières et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{chapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} (qui simule le compteur de +% chapitre, mais est absolu) est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier minitoc est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it (after +% closing the file descriptor): +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} regardons si des suffixes longs ou courts ont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis l'ouvrir (après avoir fermé le descripteur de fichier): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} need a similar code to detect TOC entries for appendices in the \class{memoir} class\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} +% has signaled the problem; thanks!}: +% \or\relax +% Il\imess{I0033} nous faut un code similaire pour détecter les entrées dans la TdM pour les appendices dans +% la classe \class{memoir}\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} a signalé le problème; merci!}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines, the token register \com{mtc@toks} is used as a verbatim memory. +% \or\relax +% Maintenant, nous filtrons les lignes de contenu utiles, le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} étant utilisé +% comme mémoire \emph{verbatim}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each interesting contents line is copied, with a font command added before it. We begin with the standard +% sectionning commands, below \com{chapter}: +% \or\relax +% Chaque ligne de contenu intéressante est copiée, avec une commande de fonte ajoutée devant +% elle. Nous commençons par les commandes de sectionnement standard, en dessous de \com{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A coffee break contents line{\myCoffeecup} is written for \com{coffee}: +% \or\relax +% Une ligne de contenu de pause-café{\myCoffeecup} est écrite pour \com{coffee}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee + \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{I0033} it is \com{starchapter} (for a starred chapter), we increment the \cnt{mtc} counter, +% build a new minitoc file name, close the file descriptor and open it with this new file. +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{I0033} c'est \com{starchapter} (pour un chapitre étoilé), nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, +% construisons un nouveau nom de fichier minitoc, fermons le descripteur de fichier puis le ré-ouvrons avec ce +% nouveau fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% + \if@mtc@longext@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For starred sectionning commands lower than \com{chapter}, a contents line is written into the minitoc file, +% with a font command added: +% \or\relax +% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées plus basses que \com{chapter}, une ligne de contenu est écrite +% dans le fichier minitoc, en lui ajoutant une commande de fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; it expands the list of entries and call \com{MTC@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle +% \com{MTC@next} pour traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\openin} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en cherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, on traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0010]{minitoc}% + {No file #1. + \MessageBreak + MINITOCS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\MTC@toc + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0024]{minitoc}{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\MTC@read + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\read} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MTC@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line.....\MTC@% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to +% delimit chapters\footnote{The macro \com{MTC@test} has been patched to call \com{MTC@contentsline} with +% four parameters~instead of three (thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and +% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). The same remark applies to similar macros.}: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, +% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres\,\footnote{La macro \com{MTC@test} a été modifiée pour +% appeler \com{MTC@contentsline} avec quatre paramètres ~au lieu de trois +% (merci à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). +% La même remarque s'applique aux macros similaires.}: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. +% Finally process the next file in the list. +% ^^A Thanks to \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. +% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si +% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% ^^A Merci à~\name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MTC@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\chapterend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin + \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \expandafter\MTC@toc + \else + \expandafter\MTC@read + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-lists of figures}\label{s+code+mlf} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-listes des figures}\label{s+code+mlf} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize. +% \or\relax +% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of figures file} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des figures} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros: +% \or\relax +% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes: +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\MLF@list{#2}% + \MLF@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Checks if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Teste si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@lof{% + \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{xchapter} is found, the counter \cnt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des figures et détecte les mots-clés +% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et +% un nouveau fichier minilof est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfname} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilof file is built from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension: +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilof est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc\@gobble} + \def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc\@gobble} + \def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\figure} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% If we found a \com{figure} entry, we copy it into the minilof file: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{figure} ou \com{subfigure}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilof: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlf}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlfS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the LOF file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLF@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle +% \com{MLF@next} pour traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\openin} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lof} file: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lof}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0008]{minitoc}% + {No file #1. + \MessageBreak + MINILOFS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\MLF@lof + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0034]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\MLF@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\read} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lof} file: +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLF@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@line} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLF@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line.....\MLF@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to +% delimit chapters. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, +% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. +% Finally process the next file in the list. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. +% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si +% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLF@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\chapterend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin + \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof + \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Mini-lists of tables}\label{s+code+mlt} +% \or\relax +% \section{Mini-listes des tableaux}\label{s+code+mlt} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize. +% \or\relax +% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of tables file} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des tableaux} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros: +% \or\relax +% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes: +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\MLT@list{#2}% + \MLT@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Checks if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Teste si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@lot{% + \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{xchapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter is incremented and a new minilot file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les mots-clés +% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et +% un nouveau fichier minilot est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter + \stepcounter{mtc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\themtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mltname} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilot file it build from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension: +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilot est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc\@gobble}% + \def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\table} +% \begin{macro}{\subtable} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% If we found a \com{table} entry, we copy it into the minilot file: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{table}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilot: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlt}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mltS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the LOT file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLT@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle +% \com{MLT@next} pour traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\openin} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lot} file: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lot}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0009]{minitoc}% + {No file #1. + \MessageBreak + MINILOTS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\MLT@lot + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0037]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\MLT@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\read} +% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lot} file: +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MLT@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@line} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLT@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line.....\MLT@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to +% delimit chapters. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, +% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{13} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. +% Finally process the next file in the list. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. +% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si +% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLT@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\chapterend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin + \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot + \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Note that we terminate with a closing brace to end the chapter-level macros (end of the \emph{else} branch of a +% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| alternative). +% \or\relax +% Notez que nous terminons par une accolade fermante pour achever les macros du niveau chapitre (fin de la +% branche \emph{sinon} d'une alternative \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Macro to write a contents line}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macro pour écrire une ligne de contenu}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@dot} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@param} +% \begin{macro}{\write} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} macro makes the definition of \com{MTC@contentsline} shorter. An extra \com{edef} +% level is removed (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} rend la définition de \com{MTC@contentsline} plus courte. Un niveau +% supplémentaire de \com{edef} est retiré (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}): +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The arguments of \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} are: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] font shorthand $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname}; +% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the \texttt{\#4} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlink). +% \end{itemize} +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% \or\relax +% Les arguments de \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} sont: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] un raccourci pour la fonte $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname}; +% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] l'argument \texttt{\#4} de \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlien). +% \end{itemize} +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@dot{.} +\def\MTC@WriteContentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \def\mtc@param{#4}% + \immediate\write\tf@mtc{% + {\string\reset@font + \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname + \string\mtc@string + \string\contentsline{#1}% + {\the\mtc@toks}% + {\string\reset@font + \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname + \space #3% + }% + \ifx\mtc@dot\mtc@param + \else + {#4}% + \fi + }% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\write} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the same for a ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} line. The arguments of the macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} are: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}. +% \end{itemize} +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% \or\relax +% Et la même chose pour une ligne de «~pause café~»{\myCoffeecup}. Les arguments de +% la macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} sont: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; +% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}. +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\MTC@WriteCoffeeline#1#2#3{% + \immediate\write\tf@mtc{% + {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \string\mtc@string + {\the\mtc@toks}% + {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \space #3% + }% + }% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Depth counters for partlofs and partlots} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les partlofs et les partlots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create the corresponding new counters: +% \dcnt{partlofdepth} and \dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% These counters are initialized to~2. +% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons les nouveaux compteurs +% correspondants: \dcnt{partlofdepth} et \dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. +% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{partlofdepth}\setcounter{partlofdepth}{2}}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{partlotdepth}\setcounter{partlotdepth}{2}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Part level commands}\label{s+code+part.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{s+code+part.level} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{W0004} \com{part} is defined, we define some utility commands, a counter (\cnt{ptc}) +% for the parttocs and related commands (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, \com{decrementptc}, +% \com{incrementptc}), the +% obsolete command \com{firstpartis}, and the depth counter \dcnt{parttocdepth}. +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{W0004} \com{part} est définie, nous définissons quelques commandes utilitaires, un compteur (\cnt{ptc}) +% pour les parttocs et les commandes associées (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, +% \com{decrementptc}, \com{incrementptc}), la commande +% obsolète \com{firstpartis} et le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{parttocdepth}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}% +{% +\def\xpart{xpart} +\def\Thepart{\arabic{ptc}} +\def\firstpartis#1% + {\mtcPackageWarning[W0004]{minitoc}% + {\string\firstpartis \space is an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command}% + \@firstpartis@used@true} +\newcounter{ptc} +\setcounter{ptc}{0} +\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{ptc}{#1}} +\def\decrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}} +\def\incrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{+1}} +\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}} +\newcounter{parttocdepth} +\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But, sometimes, we need to make a difference between book/report and article classes (is \com{chapter} defined?), to +% have a different layout: the definition of \com{ptc@rule} is empty except if \com{chapter} is undefined. +% By default, there is no rule before/after parttocs, partlofs, and partlots for books. You should redeclare +% \com{ptc@rule} if you want these rules. +% \or\relax +% Mais, parfois, nous voulons faire une différence entre les classes \class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report} et \class{article} +% (\com{chapter} est-elle définie?), pour avoir une présentation différente: +% la définition de la macro \com{ptc@rule} est +% vide sauf si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie. Par défaut, il n'y~a pas de filets avant et après les parttocs, +% partlofs et partlots pour les livres. Vous devriez redéclarer \com{ptc@rule} si vous voulez ces filets. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}}% + {\let\ptc@rule\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we declare the default indentation (both sides) of the parttocs: +% \or\relax +% Et nous déclarons l'indentation (des deux côtés) par défaut des parttocs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\ptcindent +\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24\p@}{\ptcindent=\z@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fonts for the parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Fontes pour les parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the fonts for the parttocs. Note that they are larger if \com{chapter} is defined +% (\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}-like +% document classes) than when it is not (\class{article}-like document classes): +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les fontes pour les parttocs. Notez qu'elles sont plus grandes si \com{chapter} est définie +% (classes de document analogues à~\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}) que lorsqu'elle ne l'est pas (classes de +% document analogues à~\class{article}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \def\ptcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc + \def\ptcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (sections) + \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections) + \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections) + \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs) + \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs) + \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures) + \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures) + \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables) + \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables) + \def\ptifont{\Large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, the fonts are larger and \com{ptcCfont} must be defined: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, les fontes sont plus grandes et \com{ptcCfont} doit être définie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +{% + \def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc + \def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (chapters) + \def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% (sections) + \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections) + \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections) + \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs) + \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs) + \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures) + \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures) + \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables) + \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables) + \def\ptifont{\LARGE\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Default titles for part-level mini-tables}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Titres par défaut pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the default position, the fonts and the layout for titles of the part-level mini-tables (\com{parttoc}, +% \com{partlof} and \com{partlot}). This formating is different if \com{chapter} is defined or undefined. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la position par défaut, les fontes et la mise en page pour les titres des mini-tables du niveau +% partie (\com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot}). Cette mise en page est différente selon que +% \com{chapter} est définie ou non. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is undefined, the definitions are very simple, for +% centered, flushleft, flushright or empty titles. +% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les définitions sont très simples, pour des titres centrés, cadrés +% à~gauche, cadrés à~droite, ou vides. +% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} + \def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} + \def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} + \def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} + \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But, if \com{chapter} is defined, we must simulate the formatting of a chapter head, which is more complex. +% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \or\relax +% Mais, si \com{chapter} est définie, nous devons simuler la mise en page d'une tête de chapitre, qui est plus +% complexe. +% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +{% +\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} +% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} +% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a title on the left, we must test if the main text is on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Pour un titre cadré à~gauche, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]% + \else \@makephead@l{#1}\@afterheading \fi} +\def\@makephead@l#1{% + \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \ptifont #1\par \nobreak + \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} + }} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} +% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} +% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@r} +% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a title on the right, we must also test if the main text is on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Pour un titre cadré à~droite, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}] + \else \@makephead@r{#1}\@afterheading \fi} +\def\@makephead@r#1{% + \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% + {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \ptifont #1\par \nobreak + \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} + }} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} +% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} +% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c} +% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For a centered title, we must also test if the main text is on two columns: +% \or\relax +% Pour un titre centré, nous devons aussi tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]% + \else \@makephead@c{#1}\@afterheading \fi} +\def\@makephead@c#1{% + \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% + {\parindent \z@ \centering \ptifont #1\par \nobreak + \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} + }}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are on left: +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sont à~gauche: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\do@ptitc\l@pti \let\df@ptitc\l@pti +\let\do@ptilf\l@pti \let\df@ptilf\l@pti +\let\do@ptilt\l@pti \let\df@ptilt\l@pti +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{15} ^^A many macros +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{ptc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\endptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\\} +% \begin{macro}{\@centercr} +% \begin{macro}{\list} +% \begin{macro}{\itemsep} +% \begin{macro}{\itemindent} +% \begin{macro}{\listparindent} +% \begin{macro}{\topsep} +% \begin{macro}{\parsep} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\partopsep} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each parttoc is placed inside a \env{ptc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the +% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{ptc@verse} and +% \com{endptc@verse}. +% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, then call \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} and +% set some dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, +% \com{itemindent}, \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} is set to zero if +% the \opt{tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines). +% \com{parskip} is set to zero if +% the \opt{k-tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines). +% Both margins are set to \com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} terminates the list and discourages +% a page break. +% The \env{ptc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{ptcoffset}). +% \or\relax +% Chaque parttoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{ptc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue +% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et est donc défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: +% \com{ptc@verse} et \com{endptc@verse}. Puisque c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord +% (de manière locale)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, puis appelons \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} et établissons quelques dimensions +% telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{itemindent}, +% \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}. +% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si +% l'option \opt{tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes). +% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si +% l'option \opt{k-tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes). +% Les deux marges sont +% forcées à~\com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page. +% L'environnement \env{ptc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{ptcoffset}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{% + \topsep=1ex \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ + \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@ + \leftmargin=\ptcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin + \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi + \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1} + \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1} + }% + \item[]} +\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{raggedright} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The part level mini-tables: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof}, and \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les mini-tables au niveau partie: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof} et \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot} +% \fi +% \end{raggedright} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands are essentially similar to the \com{minitoc} command, except that they should be placed after a +% \com{part} command to produce a parttoc, a partlof or a partlot, and the formatting is different and depends on +% the availability of the +% \com{chapter} command (for the fonts and the horizontal rules). The code is very similar. The \com{partlof} +% and \com{partlot} commands are siblings of the \com{parttoc} command. +% Note that \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} use page styles, because \verb|\beforepart...| and +% \verb|\afterpart...| commands imply usually a \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| command, and hence +% \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| must be called. +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes sont essentiellement similaires à~la commande \com{minitoc}, sauf qu'elles devraient être placées +% après une commande \com{part} pour produire une parttoc, une partlof ou une partlot, et que la mise en page est +% différente et dépend de la disponibilité de la commande \com{chapter} (pour les fontes et les filets +% horizontaux). Le code est très similaire. Les commandes \com{partlof} et \com{partlof} sont les cousines +% de la commande \com{parttoc}. Notez que \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} utilisent des styles +% de page, car les commandes \verb|\beforepart...| et \verb|\afterpart...| impliquent habituellement une commande +% \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, et donc \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| doit être appelée. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{parttoc} command}\icom{parttoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{parttoc}}\icom{parttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc). +% First, \com{parttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{parttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une parttoc (pas de parttoc +% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{parttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur +% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{parttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme +% argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{parttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@parttoc@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the parttoc file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{parttoc@} fait le véritable travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@parttoc@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire +% le nom du fichier parttoc): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\parttoc@[#1]{% +\global\@parttoc@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the parttoc file and give a warning if it is not here: +% \or\relax +% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier parttoc et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: +% \fi +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@parttoc@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the parttoc file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforeparttoc}, of course: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; +% d'abord, \com{beforeparttoc}, bien sûr: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforeparttoc +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the parttoc title and set the page style: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la parttoc dans les marques de page et +% établissons le style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% + \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth \global\let\@mkboth\markboth + \thispageparttocstyle + \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of +% the parttoc title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la +% position du titre de la parttoc. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti + \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti + \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti + \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti + \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti + \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\ptctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptitc\e@pti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la parttoc, +% puis établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright \reset@font\ptcfont \parskip=\z@ \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]\kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the parttoc. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la parttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure +% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la parttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\ptc@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position close the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent + \itemindent=\z@ \labelwidth=\z@ \labelsep=\z@ \listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{parttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is +% necessary to avoid a negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la parttoc. La profondeur de table +% des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{parttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est +% nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une indentation négative. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{ptc@verse}{\ptcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth% + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% For chapter-level entries, we must invoke \com{l@chapter} ignoring the page number argument. +% A hook (redefinissable command) is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated +% via \com{ptc@setform}. +% Then the parttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa +% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en +% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et +% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{ptc@setform}. Puis le fichier parttoc est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% + {\let\l@chapter@SVPN\l@chapter% + \def\l@chapter##1##2{\l@chapter@SVPN{##1}{\hbox{}}}}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \ptc@setform + \openparttoc\global\inparttoctrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inparttocfalse\closeparttoc + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{ptc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is +% not defined), and \com{afterparttoc}. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page +% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterparttoc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernafterparttoc + \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% + \afterparttoc\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{partlof} command}\icom{partlof} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlof}}\icom{partlof} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof). +% First, \com{partlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{partlof@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlof (pas de partlof +% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur +% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme +% argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{partlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlof@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlof file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{partlof@} fait le véritable travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlof@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire +% le nom du fichier partlof): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\partlof@[#1]{% +\global\@partlof@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlof file and give a warning if it is not here: +% \or\relax +% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlof et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@partlof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the partlof file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforepartlof}, of course: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; +% d'abord, \com{beforepartlof}, bien sûr: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforepartlof +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlof title and set the page style: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlof dans les marques de page et +% établissons le style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% + {\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth + \global\let\@mkboth\markboth + \thispagepartlofstyle + \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of +% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la +% position du titre de la partlof. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti + \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti + \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti + \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti + \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti + \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\plftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilf\e@pti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlof, +% puis établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\plffont% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between the +% title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlof. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la partlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure +% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\plf@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\\hline + \mtc@hstrut\\ + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the partlof. +% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlofdepth}. +% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is necessary to avoid a negative indentation. +% \or\relax +% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlof. +% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlofdepth}. +% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une +% indentation négative. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{ptc@verse}{\plfoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\c@lofdepth=\c@partlofdepth + \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plf@setform}. +% Then the partlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa +% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en +% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et +% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plf@setform}. Puis le fichier partlof est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \plf@setform + \openpartlof\global\inpartloftrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inpartloffalse\closepartlof + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{ptc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is +% not defined), and \com{afterpartlof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page +% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernafterpartlof + \nopagebreak[4]\plf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% + \afterpartlof\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{partlot} command}\icom{partlot} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlot}}\icom{partlot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlot (no automatic partlot). +% First, \com{partlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{partlot@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlot (pas de partlot +% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur +% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme +% argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{partlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlot@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlot file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{partlot@} fait le véritable travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlot@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire +% le nom du fichier partlot): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +% +\def\partlot@[#1]{% +\global\@partlot@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlot file and give a warning if it is not here: +% \or\relax +% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlot et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@partlof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the partlot file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforepartlot}, of course: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; +% d'abord, \com{beforepartlot}, bien sûr: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforepartlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} +% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlot title and set the page style: +% \or\relax +% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlot dans les marques de page et +% établissons le style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% + \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth + \global\let\@mkboth\markboth + \thispagepartlotstyle + \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of +% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la +% position du titre de la partlot. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti + \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti + \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti + \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti + \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti + \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\plttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilt\e@pti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the partlot, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlot, +% puis établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\pltfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The partlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlot. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la partlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\plt@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\\hline + \mtc@hstrut\\ + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. +% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlot. +% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlotdepth}. +% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une +% indentation négative. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{ptc@verse}{\pltoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\c@lotdepth=\c@partlotdepth + \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plt@setform}. +% Then the partlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa +% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en +% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et +% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plt@setform}. Puis le fichier partlot est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \plt@setform + \openpartlot\global\inpartlottrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\inpartlotfalse\closepartlot + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{ptc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is +% not defined), and \com{afterpartlot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page +% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernafterpartlot + \nopagebreak[4]\plt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% + \afterpartlot\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Auxiliary commands for printing parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes auxiliaires pour l'impression des parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@psect} +% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\psect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following auxiliary commands are used in the printing of parttocs. Note that \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth +% to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). These commands are similar to +% \com{l@subsection}, only the arguments have been altered: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes auxiliaires suivantes sont utilisées dans l'impression des parttocs. Notez que \com{l@xpart} +% utilise une profondeur énorme pour inhiber l'impression de sa ligne de contenu (sauf si vous trichez). Ces +% commandes sont similaires à~\com{l@subsection}, seuls les arguments ont été altérés: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@psect{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\pchapter{pchapter} +\def\psect{psect} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command, continued}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}, suite}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\sv@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\sv@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We patch both branches of the \com{part} command: \com{@part} (unstarred \com{part}) and \com{@spart} +% (\com{part*}). We add the incrementation of the \cnt{ptc} counter to both branches. +% In the unstarred branch, +% we add \texttt{xpart} entries in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. In the starred branch, we add a \com{partbegin} +% line in the TOC. This command is just a marker and does nothing real (\com{relax}). +% \or\relax +% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{part}: \com{@part} (\com{part} non étoilée) et \com{@spart} +% (\com{part*}). Nous ajoutons l'incrémentation du compteur \cnt{ptc} dans les deux branches. Dans +% la branche non étoilée, nous ajoutons des entrées +% \texttt{xpart} dans les fichiers table des matières, liste des figures et liste des tableaux. Dans la branche +% étoilée, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{partbegin} dans le fichier table des matières. Cette commande est juste un +% marqueur et ne fait rien de concret (\com{relax}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\sv@part\mtc@svpart +\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax +\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}% +\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{#1}% +\stepcounter{ptc}} +\let\sv@spart\@spart +\def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\sv@spart} +\let\ptc@spart\@spart +\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart} +\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart} +\let\partend\relax +\let\partbegin\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{doparttoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{doparttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{doparttoc} command works like the \com{dominitoc} command, \com{dopartlof} like \com{dominilof} +% and \com{dopartlot} like \com{dominilot}. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{doparttoc} fonctionne comme la commande \com{dominitoc}, \com{dopartlof} comme \com{dominilof} +% et \com{dopartlot} comme \com{dominilot}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{doparttoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and creates the +% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.ptc} becomes \suffix{.P} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{doparttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.ptc} devient \suffix{.P} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@doparttoc#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{ptc}{0}% + \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dopartlof} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plf} becomes \suffix{.G} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dopartlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plf} devient \suffix{.G} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dopartlof#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{ptc}{0}% + \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dopartlot} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plt} becomes \suffix{.U} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dopartlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plt} devient \suffix{.U} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dopartlot#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{ptc}{0}% + \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user macros, who detect the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les macros pour l'utilisateur, qui détectent l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}} +\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}} +\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{doparttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of parttocs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{doparttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les +% titres des parttocs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@doparttoc@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\doparttoc \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@doparttoc@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@doparttoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs) +% and flag this macro as used, a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les +% titres des partlofs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dopartlof@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dopartlof@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dopartlof \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dopartlof@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dopartlof} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres +% des partlots) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dopartlot@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dopartlot@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dopartlot \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dopartlot@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dopartlot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\@@doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros invoke the \verb|@dopart...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file +% descriptor. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros invoquent les \verb|\@dopart...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le descripteur de +% fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing macros for the parttocs} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les parttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste puis la retirons de la tête de liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\PTC@list{#2}% + \PTC@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@toc{% + \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier parttoc +% est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part + \stepcounter{ptc}% + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc\@gobble}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc\@gobble}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starpart\relax + \stepcounter{ptc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}% + \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines; this code extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc.: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées; ce code extrait et écrit les informations pour les +% chapitres, sections, etc.: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\pchapter + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee + \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And for the starred sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Et pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PTC@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PTC@next} pour +% traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0013]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\PTC@toc + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0025]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\PTC@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PTC@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PTC@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line.....\PTC@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{PTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to +% delimit parts: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, +% principalement pour délimiter les parties: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the +% list. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si +% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la +% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PTC@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\partend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\partbegin + \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc + \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlofs} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlofs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\PLF@list{#2}% + \PLF@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@lof{% + \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\plfname} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlof +% est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart + \stepcounter{ptc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\plfname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}% + \def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}% + \def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\figure} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plf}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plfS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLF@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLF@next} pour +% traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0011]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\PLF@lof + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0035]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\PLF@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLF@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLF@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line.....\PLF@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{PLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to +% delimit parts: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, +% principalement pour délimiter les parties: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the +% list. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si +% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la +% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLF@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\partend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\partbegin + \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof + \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlots} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\PLT@list{#2}% + \PLT@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@lot{% + \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\theptc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\pltname} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords. +% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlot file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les +% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlot +% est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart + \stepcounter{ptc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\pltname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, +% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}% + \def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}% + \def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\table} +% \begin{macro}{\subtable} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plt}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{pltS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLT@next} to process the +% first one: +% \or\relax +% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLT@next} pour +% traiter la première: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées +% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0012]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\PLT@lot + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0038]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\PLT@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file. +% \or\relax +% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\PLT@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLT@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line.....\PLT@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{PLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to +% delimit parts: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{PLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, +% principalement pour délimiter les parties: +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the +% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the +% list. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si +% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la +% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLT@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\partend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\partbegin + \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot + \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% End of the part level stuff (begun in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}): +% \or\relax +% Fin du code pour le niveau partie (débuté dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Depth counters for sectlofs and sectlots} +% \or\relax +% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les sectlofs et les sectlots} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create new counters for the depths of +% the corresponding mini-tables: +% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% These counters are initialized to~2. +% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons de nouveaux compteurs pour les +% profondeurs des mini-tables correspondantes: +% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. +% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. +% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{sectlofdepth}\setcounter{sectlofdepth}{2}}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\newcounter{sectlotdepth}\setcounter{sectlotdepth}{2}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Section-level commands}\label{s+code+section.level.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes au niveau section}\label{s+code+section.level.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The section-level commands are defined only if \com{chapter} is \emph{not} defined, hence in article-like +% document classes, and only if \com{section} is defined: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes au niveau section sont définies seulement si \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} définie, donc dans +% les classes de document du genre article, et seulement si \com{section} est définie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \if@mtc@section@def@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0005} define the obsolete command \com{firstsectionis} (with its harmless warning), the counter \cnt{stc} +% of secttocs, the \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} and \com{incrementstc} commands, +% the depth counter \dcnt{secttocdepth} and its default +% value~2 (to include at least the subsections), the horizontal rule \com{stc@rule} (rule before/after +% secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), the indentation (both sides) \com{stcindent} for the secttocs (with its default +% values). +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0005} définissons la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis} (avec son avertissement bénin), +% le compteur \cnt{stc} de secttocs, les commandes \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} +% et \com{incrementstc}, +% le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{secttocdepth} et sa valeur par défaut~2 (pour inclure au moins +% les sous-sections), le filet horizontal \com{stc@rule} (filet avant/après la secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), l'indentation +% (des deux côtés) \com{stcindent} pour les secttocs (avec leurs valeurs par défaut). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\firstsectionis#1{\mtcPackageWarning[W0005]{minitoc}% + {\string\firstsectionis \space is an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command}% + \@firstsectionis@used@true} +\newcounter{stc}\setcounter{stc}{0}% +\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{stc}{#1}}% +\def\decrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}% +\def\incrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{+1}}% +\newcounter{secttocdepth}\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2}% +\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}% +\newlength\stcindent \stcindent=24\p@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fonts commands for secttocs and co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commands de fontes pour les secttocs et co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the fonts commands for the secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots and their titles: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les commandes de fontes pour les secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots et pour leurs titres: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % secttoc +\def\stcSSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % (subsections) +\let\stcSSSfont\stcfont % (subsubsections) +\let\stcPfont\stcfont % (paragraphs) +\let\stcSPfont\stcfont % (subparagraphs) +\let\slffont\stcfont % sectlof (figures) +\let\slfSfont\stcfont % sectlof (subfigures) +\let\sltfont\stcfont % sectlot (tables) +\let\sltSfont\stcfont % sectlot (subtables) +\def\stifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % titles +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Internal macros for title positionning}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs} +% \or\relax +% \section{Macros internes pour le positionnement du titre}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some internal macros for title positionning, from the optional arguments of \com{dosecttoc} and \com{secttoc} +% commands (and siblings). +% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles (with a vertical correction for empty titles, +% from \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}): +% \or\relax +% Voici quelques macros internes pour le positionnement du titre, selon les arguments optionnels des +% commandes \com{dosecttoc} et \com{secttoc} (et leurs cousines). +% Titres centrés, cadrés à~gauche, cadrés à~droite ou vides (avec un correction verticale pour les titres vides, +% d'après \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} +\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} +\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} +\def\e@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +\def\n@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% By default, titles are flushleft. +% \or\relax +% Par défaut, les titres sur cadrés à~gauche. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\do@stitc\l@sti +\let\df@stitc\l@sti +\let\do@stilf\l@sti +\let\df@stilf\l@sti +\let\do@stilt\l@sti +\let\df@stilt\l@sti +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{stc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+stc@verse} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}}\label{s+code+stc@verse} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \env{stc@verse} environment is a very simple list environment, analog to the standard \env{verse} environment. +% Some formatting parameters are adjusted. The \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} +% and \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} package options +% are honored. +% The \env{stc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{stcoffset}). +% \or\relax +% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} est un environnement de liste très simple, analogue à~l'environnement +% standard \env{verse}. Certains paramètres de mise en page sont ajustés. Les options de paquetage +% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} et \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} sont honorées. +% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{stcoffset}). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{% + \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \topsep=1ex + \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@ + \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi + \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi + \leftmargin=\stcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}% + \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}% + }% + \item[]}% +\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof}, and \ucom{sectlot} commands}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% These three commands are very similar. +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof} et \ucom{sectlot}}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{secttoc} command}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{secttoc}}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{secttoc} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc). +% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minitoc} (but simpler). +% First, \com{secttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{secttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{secttoc} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une secttoc (pas de secttoc +% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minitoc} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, +% \com{secttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il +% est omis. Puis, \com{secttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{secttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@secttoc@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the secttoc file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{secttoc@} effectue le vrai travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@secttoc@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour +% construire le nom du fichier secttoc): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\secttoc@[#1]{% +\global\@secttoc@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{S\thestc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the secttoc file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier secttoc, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou +% est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@secttoc@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the secttoc file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforesecttoc}, of course, and the page style feature: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier secttoc est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du +% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesecttoc}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \beforesecttoc + \thispagesecttocstyle +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we +% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est +% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}% + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti + \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti + \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti + \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti + \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti + \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\stctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stitc\e@sti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the secttoc, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la secttoc, puis nous +% établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\stcfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The secttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the secttoc. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la secttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la secttoc. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \nopagebreak[4]% + \ifx\stc@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{5} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the secttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{secttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la secttoc. La profondeur de table des +% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{secttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire +% pour ajuster le positionnement. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{stc@verse}{\stcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth% + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{stc@setform}. +% Then the secttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version +% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix +% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{stc@setform}. Puis le fichier secttoc est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \stc@setform% + \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \stc@setform% + \opensecttoc\global\insecttoctrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\insecttocfalse\closesecttoc + \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \leavevmode\mtc@strut + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{stc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersecttoc}. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersecttoc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernaftersecttoc + \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersecttoc\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlof} command}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlof}}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlof} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof). +% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilof} (but simpler). +% First, \com{sectlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlof@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{sectlof} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlof (pas de sectlof +% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilof} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, +% \com{sectlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il +% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlof@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlof file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{sectlof@} effectue le vrai travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlof@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour +% construire le nom du fichier sectlof): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlof@[#1]{% +\global\@sectlof@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{H\thestc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlof file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlof, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou +% est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@sectlof@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the sectlof file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforesectlof}, of course, and the page style feature: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier sectlof est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du +% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlof}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispagesectlofstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}% + \beforesectlof +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we +% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est +% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti + \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti + \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti + \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti + \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti + \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\slftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilf\e@sti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlof, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlof, puis nous +% établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\slffont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectlof title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between +% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlof. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la sectlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlof. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\slf@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \mtc@hstrut + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlof. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{sectlofdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlof. La profondeur de table des +% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlofdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire +% pour ajuster le positionnement. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{stc@verse}{\slfoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% + {\c@lofdepth=\c@sectlofdepth + \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slf@setform}. +% Then the sectlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version +% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix +% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slf@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlof est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \slf@setform% + \opensectlof\global\insectloftrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\insectloffalse\closesectlof + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{stc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlof}. +% The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlof}. +% La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernaftersectlof + \nopagebreak[4]\slf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlof\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlot} command}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlot}}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlot} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot). +% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilot} (but simpler). +% First, \com{sectlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if +% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlot@} is called with the effective position as argument: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{sectlot} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlot (pas de sectlot +% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilot} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, +% \com{sectlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il +% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{sectlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlot@used@} (for a consistency +% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlot file): +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{sectlot@} effectue le vrai travail. +% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlot@used@} +% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour +% construire le nom du fichier sectlot): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sectlot@[#1]{% +\global\@sectlot@used@true +\if@mtc@longext@% + \def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}% +\else + \def\@tocfile{I\thestc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlot file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlot, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou +% est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} + \if@mtc@FE + \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% + {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} + \@mtc@empty@sectlot@true + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the sectlot file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, +% \com{beforesectlot}, of course, and the page style feature: +% \or\relax +% Si le fichier sectlot est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du +% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlot}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \thispagesectlotstyle +%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}% + \beforesectlot +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we +% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est +% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax\begin{samepage}% + \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti + \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti + \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti + \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti + \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti + \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \mtc@CkStr{\slttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilt\e@sti\relax\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlot, then we set the font: +% \or\relax +% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlot, puis nous +% établissons la fonte: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \raggedright + \parskip=\z@% + \reset@font\sltfont% + \parindent=\z@% + \nopagebreak[4]% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{environment}{tabular} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\hline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The sectlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break +% between the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. +% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlot. +% \or\relax +% Le titre de la sectlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher +% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si +% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlot. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% + \par\noindent + \ifx\slt@rule\relax + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\ + \end{tabular}% + \else + \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} + \mtc@hstrut + \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\\hline + \end{tabular}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques +% paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR + \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent + \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% + \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlot. The toc depth is forced (locally) to +% \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. +% \or\relax +% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlot. La profondeur de table des +% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlotdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire +% pour ajuster le positionnement. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \begin{stc@verse}{\sltoffset}% + \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% + {\c@lotdepth=\c@sectlotdepth + \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} + \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@pgno} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. +% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slt@setform}. +% Then the sectlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. +% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. +% \or\relax +% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version +% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix +% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slt@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlot est +% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. +% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}% + {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} + \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile + \slt@setform% + \opensectlot\global\insectlottrue + \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% + \global\insectlotfalse\closesectlot + \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup + \end{stc@verse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} +% \begin{environment}{samepage} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlot}. +% \or\relax +% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlot}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \kernaftersectlof + \nopagebreak[4]\slt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% + \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% + \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlot\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Auxiliary internal commands, section level}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes internes auxiliaires, niveau section}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\l@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\schapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define auxiliary commands, used for the mini-tables and as delimiters in the TOC file (and LOF and LOT files). +% The depth of \texttt{xsect} is huge to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques commandes auxiliaires, utilisées pour les mini-tables et comme délimiteurs dans le +% fichier table des matières (et les fichiers liste des figures et liste des tableaux). +% La profondeur de \texttt{xsect} est énorme pour inhiber l'impression de ses lignes de contenu (sauf si vous +% trichez). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@xsection{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} +\def\xsect{xsect} \def\schapter{schapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command (continued)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section} +% \or\relax +% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{section} (suite)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We patch the both branches of the \com{section} command: \com{@sect} for the unstarred version and +% \com{@ssect} for the starred version. First, for the unstarred version (\com{@sect}), we add a +% \texttt{xsect} contents line in the LOF and in the LOT. The test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restricts the action to the +% section level macros (because \com{@sect} is also used by \com{subsection} and below, which have no +% mini-tables). +% \or\relax +% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{section}: \com{@sect} pour la version non étoilée et +% \com{@ssect} pour la version étoilée. Tout d'abord, pour la version non étoilée (\com{@sect}), nous ajoutons +% une ligne de contenu \texttt{xsect} dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux. +% Le test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restreint l'action aux macros de niveau section (parce que \com{@sect} est +% aussi utilisée par \com{subsection} et en dessous, qui n'ont pas de mini-tables). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\sv@sect\@sect +\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% +\ifnum #2=1\relax + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% +\fi +\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If it is a section (unstarred or starred via \com{starsection}), we add a \texttt{xsect} entry +% in the LOF and in the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Si c'est une section (non étoilée ou étoilée via \com{starsection}), nous ajoutons une entrée \texttt{xsect} +% dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{ +\expandafter +\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% +\fi +\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax + \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@svsec} +% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa} +% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\numberline} +% \begin{macro}{\@svsechd} +% \begin{macro}{\@xsect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the remainder of the section header formatting: +% \or\relax +% Et le reste de la mise en page d'un en-tête de section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax + \let\@svsec\@empty +\else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + \edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}% +\fi +\@tempskipa #5\relax +\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup #6\relax + \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% + {\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline + {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax + \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}% +\else + \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax + \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname + {#7}\addcontentsline + {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax + \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname} + \fi + #7}}% +\fi +\@xsect{#5}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we patch the unstarred branch (\com{@sect}). We define also the delimiting commands \com{sectbegin} and +% \com{sectend} commands. We do not add \com{sectbegin} if it is a subsection or deeper. +% \or\relax +% Puis nous modifions la branche non étoilée (\com{@sect}). Nous définissons aussi les commandes de délimitation +% \com{sectbegin} et \com{sectend}. Nous n'ajoutons pas \com{sectbegin} si c'est une sous-section ou plus +% profond. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\stc@sect\@sect +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2<1 \relax + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin} + \fi + \stc@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} +\let\sectend\relax +\let\sectbegin\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{dosecttoc} command and siblings}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{dosecttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosecttoc} command is very similar to \com{dominitoc}. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosecttoc} est très similaire à~\com{dominitoc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosecttoc} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.toc} file and creates the \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.stc} becomes \suffix{.S} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosecttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.stc} devient \suffix{.S} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dosecttoc#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{stc}{0} + \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosectlof} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slf} becomes \suffix{.H} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosectlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slf} devient \suffix{.H} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dosectlof#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{stc}{0} + \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{dosectlot} command extracts information from the +% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slt} becomes \suffix{.V} on MS-DOS). +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{dosectlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers +% \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slt} devient \suffix{.V} sous MS-DOS). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dosectlot#1{{% + \makeatletter + \setcounter{stc}{0} + \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user-level macros, who detect the optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les commandes pour l'utilisateur, commandes qui détectent l'argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}} +\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}} +\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosecttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of secttocs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosecttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des secttocs) +% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dosecttoc@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dosecttoc \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dosecttoc@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dosecttoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlofs) +% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosectlof@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dosectlof@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dosectlof \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dosectlof@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dosectlof} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt} +% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} +% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs) +% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlots) +% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosectlot@[#1]{% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \if@dosectlot@used@ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The \string\dosectlot \space command + \MessageBreak + has been invoked more than once + \MessageBreak} + \global\@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +\global\@dosectlot@used@true +\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti% +\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti% +\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti% +\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti% +\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti% +\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% +\@@dosectlot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dosect...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file +% descriptor. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros invoquent les commandes \verb|\@dosect...| pour créer le fichier mini-table, puis ferment le +% descripteur de fichier. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\STC@list{#2}% + \STC@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@toc{% + \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\stcname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file. +% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new secttoc file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières. +% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier secttoc est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section + \stepcounter{stc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\stcname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis +% nous l'ouvrons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} +% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} or \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline} ou +% \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee + \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\stcname} +% \begin{macro}{\closeout} +% \begin{macro}{\openout} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A\imess{I0033} starred section terminates the current section and creates a new secttoc file: +% \or\relax +% Une\imess{I0033} section étoilée termine la section courante et crée un nouveau fichier secttoc: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection + \stepcounter{stc}% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% + \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We process the entries for starred sectionning commands: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons les entrées pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{STC@next} to process the +% first one. +% \or\relax +% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier table des matières; nous expansons la liste des entrées et +% appelons \com{STC@next} pour traiter la première. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les +% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0016]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\STC@toc + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0026]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\STC@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\STC@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{STC@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{STC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line.....\STC@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@test} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} +% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{STC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to delimit sections; +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{STC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, +% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\STC@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\sectend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\sectbegin + \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc + \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\SLF@list{#2}% + \SLF@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@lof{% + \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\slfname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file. +% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlof file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures. +% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlof est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect + \stepcounter{stc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\slfname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis +% nous l'ouvrons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}% + \def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.H\thestc}% + \def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\figure} +% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slf}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slfS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLF@next} to process the +% first one. +% \or\relax +% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des figures; nous expansons la liste des entrées et +% appelons \com{SLF@next} pour traiter la première. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les +% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0014]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\SLF@lof + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0036]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\SLF@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLF@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLF@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line + \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line.....\SLF@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} +% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{SLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to delimit sections; +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, +% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLF@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\sectend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\sectbegin + \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof + \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: +% \or\relax +% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% + \edef\SLT@list{#2}% + \SLT@loop{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Check if the list is empty: +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si la liste est vide: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@lot{% + \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thestc} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\sltname} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file. +% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlot file is created. +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux. +% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlot est créé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% + \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect + \stepcounter{stc}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\sltname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis +% nous l'ouvrons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@mtc@longext@% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}% + \def\sltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}% + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% + {Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}% + \def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}% + \fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\table} +% \begin{macro}{\subtable} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: +% \or\relax +% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. +% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slt}{#3}{#4}% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable + \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{sltS}{#3}{#4}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLT@next} to process the +% first one. +% \or\relax +% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des tableaux; nous expansons la liste des entrées et +% appelons \com{SLT@next} pour traiter la première. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. +% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les +% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \mtcPackageWarning[W0015]{minitoc}% + {No file #1 + \MessageBreak + SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED}% + \expandafter\SLT@lot + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0039]{minitoc}% + {PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}% + \expandafter\SLT@read\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file. +% \or\relax +% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}. +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@line} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLT@test} has enough arguments: +% \or\relax +% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SLT@read{% + \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line + \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line.....\SLT@% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} +% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{SLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to delimit sections; +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{SLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, +% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLT@{% + \ifx#1\contentsline + \let\mtc@string\string + \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \let\mtc@string\relax + \else\ifx#1\@input + \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}% + \else\ifx#1\sectend + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc + \else\ifx#1\sectbegin + \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot + \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{End of section-level commands}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Fin des commandes du niveau section}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We terminate the \emph{else} branch of the test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, the \emph{true} branch of the +% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| and add an empty \emph{else} branch to that test: +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Nous terminons la branche \emph{sinon} du test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, la branche \emph{vraie} du +% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| et ajoutons une branche \emph{sinon} vide à~ce test: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi% end of \if@mtc@section@def@ +\fi% end of \if@mtc@chapter@undef@ +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{16} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcprepare} command}\icom{mtcprepare} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcprepare}}\icom{mtcprepare} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{I0048} command tests the availability of the \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} minitoc preparation commands and +% of the contents files, then calls as much as possible of these preparation commands. A hint is given. +% \or\relax +% Cette\imess{I0048} commande teste la disponibilité des commandes minitoc de préparation \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} et des +% fichiers de contenu, puis appelle autant de ces commandes de préparation que possible. Un \emph{hint} est +% émis. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\mtcprepare@}{\mtcprepare@[l]}}% +\def\mtcprepare@[#1]{% +\@ifundefined{part}{}{% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\doparttoc[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dopartlof[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dopartlot[#1]}{}% +}% +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dosecttoc[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dosectlof[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dosectlot[#1]}{}% + }% +}{% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dominitoc[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dominilof[#1]}{}% +\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dominilot[#1]}{}% +}% +\if@mtc@hints@ + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0048]{minitoc(hints)}% + {Using \string\mtcprepare\space may induce some + \MessageBreak + hints about the preparation commands, + \MessageBreak + because it invokes ALL the preparation + \MessageBreak + commands allowed by the document class, + \MessageBreak + without any previous check\@gobble}% +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Use with \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles} +% \or\relax +% \section{Utilisation avec \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\nofiles} +% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% In case the document uses the \com{nofiles} command (in its preamble), the auxiliary files for the mini-tables +% should not be overwritten by the preparation commands, so these ones must be just faked; as these commands may +% have an optional argument, they will be faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get +% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. Problem signaled by \name{Andreas}{Deininger}. +% \or\relax +% Dans le cas où le document utilise la commande \com{nofiles} (dans son préambule), les fichiers auxiliaires pour +% les mini-tables ne doivent pas être ré-écrits par les commandes de préparation, donc celles-ci doivent seulement être +% simulées; comme ces commandes peuvent avoir un argument optionnel, elles seront simulées en utilisant la +% macro interne de \LaTeX\ \com{@ifnextchar} (pour obtenir l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande +% utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. Problème signalé par \name{Andreas}{Deininger}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A test is placed in a \com{AtBeginDocument} and gives a warning if \com{nofiles} is used: +% \or\relax +% Un test est placé dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et donne un avertissement si \com{nofiles} est utilisée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{\if@filesw\relax\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0098]{minitoc}% + {--- You have used the \string\nofiles\space command + \MessageBreak + in your preamble; all preparation commands + \MessageBreak + in the body of the document will be ignored} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since \com{nofiles} has been used, we must disable all the +% preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Puisque \com{nofiles} a été utilisée, nous devons inhiber +% toutes les commandes de préparation: +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Command \com{mtcprepare}: +% \or\relax +% Commande \com{mtcprepare}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% End of the inhibition of the preparation commands and of the \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Fin de l'inhibition des commandes de préparation et du bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Necessary \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+necessary.l@} +% \or\relax +% \section{Commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} nécessaires}\label{s+code+necessary.l@} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@listof} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some \verb|\l@...| commands (analog to \com{l@section} or \com{l@paragraph}) are required to format some +% entries in the mini-tables, for starred sectionning commands essentially: +% \or\relax +% Quelques commandes \verb|\l@...| (analogues à~\com{l@section} ou \com{l@paragraph}) sont requises pour +% mettre en page certaines entrées dans les mini-tables, essentiellement pour les commandes de sectionnement +% étoilées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} +\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} +\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} +\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} +\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The horizontal rules and their default values}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les filets horizontaux et leurs valeurs par défaut}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\stcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define here the various commands to activate ou inhibit the horizontal rules in the various kinds of +% mini-tables. Each such command is an indirect definition of the corresponding horizontal rule. The rules are +% .4\,pt high horizontal rules. We begin with rules for mini-tables of contents. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons ici les diverses commandes pour activer ou inhiber les filets horizontaux dans les diverses +% sortes de mini-tables. Chacune de ces commandes est une définition indirecte du filet horizontal correspondant. +% Les filets sont des filets horizontaux épais de 0.4\,pt. Nous commençons par les filets pour les mini-tables des matières. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax} +\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax} +\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax} +\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\mtc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\slfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, the rules for mini-lists of figures: +% \or\relax +% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\noplfrule{\let\plf@rule\relax} +\def\nomlfrule{\let\mlf@rule\relax} +\def\noslfrule{\let\slf@rule\relax} +\def\plfrule{\def\plf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\mlfrule{\def\mlf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\slfrule{\def\slf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\plf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\mlf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\slf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\pltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\mltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} +% \begin{macro}{\sltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, the rules for mini-lists of tables: +% \or\relax +% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de tableaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\nopltrule{\let\plt@rule\relax} +\def\nomltrule{\let\mlt@rule\relax} +\def\nosltrule{\let\slt@rule\relax} +\def\pltrule{\def\plt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\mltrule{\def\mlt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\sltrule{\def\slt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} +\def\plt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\mlt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +\def\slt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands\,\footnote{The general concept of the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands was proposed +% by \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} have been introduced to build a nicer user interface, and each of them replaces +% numerous user commands, offering a rather unified and logical syntax. +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes\,\footnote{Le concept général des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} a été proposé par +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} ont été introduites pour construire une meilleure interface utilisateur, et chacune +% d'elles remplace de nombreuses commandes utilisateur, offrant une syntaxe assez unifiée et logique. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Keywords for the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Mots-clés pour les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some common keywords for the \verb|\mtcset...| commands. A keyword is created via +% the \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} mechanism the following way: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{family}\verb|@|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{abbreviation}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{family} is the name of a group of keywords relative to one or several \verb|\mtcset...| macros, +% \emph{name} is the keyword that the user gives as argument to the \verb|\mtcset...| macro, and +% \emph{abbreviation} is a string used to build the name of the macro effectively used. As some \verb|\mtcset...| +% macros have several keyword parameters, this method can reduce the number of macros at the user level, at the cost +% of few keyword families. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques mots-clés communs pour les commandes \verb|\mtcset...|. Un mot-clé est créé via le +% mécanisme \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} de la manière suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{famille}\verb|@|\emph{nom}\verb|}{|\emph{abréviation}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{famille} est le nom d'un groupe de mots-clés concernent une ou plusieurs macros \verb|\mtcset...|, +% \emph{nom} est le mot-clé que l'utilisateur donne comme argument à~la macro \verb|\mtcset...|, et +% \emph{abréviation} est une chaîne utilisée pour construire le nom de la macro effectivement utilisée. Comme +% certaines macros \verb|\mtcset...| ont plusieurs paramètres mots-clés, cette méthode peut réduire le nombre de +% macros au niveau de l'utilisateur, au prix de quelques familles de mots-clés. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a family (\texttt{typetable}) of keywords for the types of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{typetable}) de mots-clés pour les types de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@parttoc}{ptc}\def\mtc@typetable@parttoc{ptc} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlof}{plf}\def\mtc@typetable@partlof{plf} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlot}{plt}\def\mtc@typetable@partlot{plt} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minitoc}{mtc}\def\mtc@typetable@minitoc{mtc} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilof}{mlf}\def\mtc@typetable@minilof{mlf} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilot}{mlt}\def\mtc@typetable@minilot{mlt} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@secttoc}{stc}\def\mtc@typetable@secttoc{stc} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlof}{slf}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlof{slf} +\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlot}{slt}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlot{slt} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then another family (\texttt{typetitle}) for the titles of the mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Puis une autre famille (\texttt{typetitle}) pour les titres des mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@parttoc}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@parttoc{pti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlof}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlof{pti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlot}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlot{pti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minitoc}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minitoc{mti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilof}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilof{mti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilot}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilot{mti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@secttoc}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@secttoc{sti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlof}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlof{sti} +\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlot}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlot{sti} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a family (\texttt{YN}) of keywords to recognize the keywords ``\texttt{off}'' and ``\texttt{on}'', with their +% many synonyms\,\footnote{This (deliberately extreme) case shows the easyness for creating synonyms of frequently +% used keywords. Note also that when a keyword contains a non-letter character, we must use a hack with +% \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} \com{endcsname}.} +% and meaning false or true\FZ: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{YN}) de mots-clés pour reconnaître les mots-clés «~\texttt{off}~» et +% «~\texttt{on}~», avec leurs nombreux synonymes\,\footnote{Ce cas (délibérément extrême) montre la facilité de création de +% synonymes pour des mots-clés fréquemment utilisés. Notez aussi que lorsqu'un mot-clé contient un caractère qui +% n'est pas une lettre, nous devons ruser en utilisant \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} +% \com{endcsname}.} et signifiant faux ou vrai\,\FZ: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@off}{no}\def\mtc@YN@off{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@OFF}{no}\def\mtc@YN@OFF{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@no}{no}\def\mtc@YN@no{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@NO}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NO{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@n}{no}\def\mtc@YN@n{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@N}{no}\def\mtc@YN@N{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@false}{no}\def\mtc@YN@false{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@FALSE}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FALSE{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@faux}{no}\def\mtc@YN@faux{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@FAUX}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FAUX{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@f}{no}\def\mtc@YN@f{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@F}{no}\def\mtc@YN@F{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@NON}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NON{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@non}{no}\def\mtc@YN@non{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@0}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@0\endcsname{no} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@-}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@-\endcsname{no} +% +\@namedef{mtc@YN@on}{}\def\mtc@YN@on{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@ON}{}\def\mtc@YN@ON{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@yes}{}\def\mtc@YN@yes{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@YES}{}\def\mtc@YN@YES{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@y}{}\def\mtc@YN@y{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@Y}{}\def\mtc@YN@Y{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@true}{}\def\mtc@YN@true{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@TRUE}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUE{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@t}{}\def\mtc@YN@t{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@T}{}\def\mtc@YN@T{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@vrai}{}\def\mtc@YN@vrai{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@VRAI}{}\def\mtc@YN@VRAI{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@v}{}\def\mtc@YN@v{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@V}{}\def\mtc@YN@V{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@OUI}{}\def\mtc@YN@OUI{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@oui}{}\def\mtc@YN@oui{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@O}{}\def\mtc@YN@O{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@o}{}\def\mtc@YN@o{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@1}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@1\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@YN@+}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@+\endcsname{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfont}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the sectionning level keywords (note that \texttt{part} is not a member of this family (\texttt{sectlevel}), +% because no contents line for a +% part can appear in a mini-table, part being the highest sectionning level); ``\texttt{*}''~represents ``any level'', +% and is used to set the global default font for a given kind of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons les mots-clés pour les niveaux de sectionnement (notez que \texttt{part} n'est pas membre de +% cette famille (\texttt{sectlevel}), car aucune ligne de contenu pour une partie ne peut apparaître dans une +% mini-table, la partie étant le plus haut niveau de sectionnement); <<~\texttt{*}~>>~représente <<~tout +% niveau~>>, et est utilisée pour établir la fonte globale par défaut pour un genre donné de mini-table. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@chapter}{C}\def\mtc@sectlevel@chapter{C} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@section}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@section{S} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsection}{SS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsection{SS} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection}{SSS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection{SSS} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@paragraph}{P}\def\mtc@sectlevel@paragraph{P} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph}{SP}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph{SP} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@*}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@sectlevel@*\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@figure}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@figure{} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@table}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@table{} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subfigure}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subfigure{S} +\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subtable}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subtable{S} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfont} command has the following syntax: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{level-name}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} a la syntaxe suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-niveau}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|, the \emph{level-name} is a sectionning level like +% \verb|subsection| (no backslash). The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic +% commands usually. +% \or\relax +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|, le \emph{nom-niveau} est un niveau de +% sectionnement tel que \verb|subsection| (sans contre-oblique). Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une spécification +% de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setfont@\@mtc@setfont@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we begin the command, which has three arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis, nous commençons la commande, qui a trois arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetfont}[3]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{E0013} two first arguments of this command are keywords. They must be translated into the effective strings. +% We process the first argument, a keyword from the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc|, we get \cnt{mtc}. +% \or\relax +% Les\imess{E0013} deux premiers arguments sont des mots-clés. Ils doivent être traduits en chaînes effectives. +% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé dans +% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc|, nous obtenons \cnt{mtc}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setfont@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfont@false + \def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0013]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mta@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{E0014} second argument, a keyword from the family \texttt{sectlevel}, is processed the same way and +% the result is stored into a macro \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. +% Example: if \verb|#2| is the \verb|subparagraph| keyword, we get~\verb|SP|. +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{E0014} deuxième argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{sectlevel}, est traité de la même manière +% et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#2| est le mot-clé \verb|subparagraph|, +% nous obtenons~\verb|SP|. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@level@abbrev{X} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@sectlevel@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfont@false + \def\mtc@level@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0014]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2). + \MessageBreak + It should be a sectionning level + \MessageBreak + (part...subparagraph) or * }% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@level@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@sectlevel@#2}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we construct the effective macro to be applied: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous construisons la macro effective qui sera appliquée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc| and \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get \verb|mtcSSfont|, which is the +% name of the command for the font of a subsection entry in a minitoc (the backslash is missing, but we will use +% a \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pair to apply the constructed command). +% \or\relax +% Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc| et \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenons \verb|mtcSSfont|, qui +% est le nom de la commande pour la fonte d'une entrée de sous-section dans une minitoc (il manque la +% contre-oblique, mais nous utiliserons une paire \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pour appliquer la +% commande construite). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But all combinaisons are not legal (the level of the entry must be lower than the level of the mini-table, and +% the kind\,\footnote{``Kind'' being sectionning, (sub-)figure, or (sub-)table.} of the entry must be consistent +% with that of the mini-table), +% so we must test. Special care must be taken for testing via internal defined commands (\emph{quarks}) +% with \texttt{@mtcqk} at the end of their names). +% \or\relax +% Mais toutes les combinaisons ne sont pas légales (le niveau de l'entrée doit être plus bas que celui de la +% mini-table et le genre\,\footnote{Le <<~genre~>> étant sectionnement, (sous-)figure ou (sous)-table.} de +% l'entrée doit être cohérent avec celui de la mini-table),), donc nous devons tester. +% Un soin particulier doit être pris pour tester en utilisant +% des commandes internes définies (\emph{quarks} avec \texttt{@mtcqk} à~la fin de leurs noms). +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\parttoc@mtcqk{parttoc@mtcqk} +\def\minitoc@mtcqk{minitoc@mtcqk} +\def\secttoc@mtcqk{secttoc@mtcqk} +\def\partlof@mtcqk{partlof@mtcqk} +\def\minilof@mtcqk{minilof@mtcqk} +\def\sectlof@mtcqk{sectlof@mtcqk} +\def\partlot@mtcqk{partlot@mtcqk} +\def\minilot@mtcqk{minilot@mtcqk} +\def\sectlot@mtcqk{sectlot@mtcqk} +\def\part@mtcqk{part@mtcqk} +\def\chapter@mtcqk{chapter@mtcqk} +\def\appendix@mtcqk{appendix@mtcqk} +\def\section@mtcqk{section@mtcqk} +\def\subsection@mtcqk{subsection@mtcqk} +\def\subsubsection@mtcqk{subsubsection@mtcqk} +\def\paragraph@mtcqk{paragraph@mtcqk} +\def\subparagraph@mtcqk{subparagraph@mtcqk} +\def\figure@mtcqk{figure@mtcqk} +\def\table@mtcqk{table@mtcqk} +\def\subfigure@mtcqk{subfigure@mtcqk} +\def\subtable@mtcqk{subtable@mtcqk} +\@mtc@setfont@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\parttoc@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlof@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlot@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minitoc@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilof@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilot@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\secttoc@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlof@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlot@mtcqk\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi + \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} the combinaison is legal, +% we apply it, i.e.,~we redefine the meaning of the constructed macro with the sequence +% of commands given as third argument of \com{mtcsetfont} and we log that event (we store the third argument in a +% token register to can print it \emph{verbatim}); +% if the combinaison is not legal, an error message is displayed. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} la combinaison est légale, +% nous l'appliquons, c'est-à-dire que nous redéfinissons la signification de la +% macro construite comme étant la séquence de commandes donnée en troisième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} et nous +% notons cet événement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} (nous rangeons le troisième argument dans un registre +% \emph{token} pour pouvoir l'écrire \emph{verbatim}); +% si la combinaison n'est pas légale, un message d'erreur est affiché. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setfont@ + \def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font} + \mtc@toks{#3} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0015]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfont\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmp@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmp@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0024]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsetfont\space has incompatible + \MessageBreak + first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitlefont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitlefont}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsetfont} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsetfont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using +% NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic commands usually. The difference is the absence of the second keyword argument, because +% the \emph{font commands} will be applied to the title of each mini-table of the given kind. +% +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une +% spécification de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. La différence est +% l'absence du deuxième argument mot-clé, car les \emph{commandes de fonte} seront appliquées au titre de chaque +% mini-table du genre donné. +% +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@settitlefont@\@mtc@settitlefont@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we begin the definition of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command, which has two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Et nous commençons la définition de la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}, qui a deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsettitlefont}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0022} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetitle} family, then the result is stored into +% \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0022} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetitle}, puis le résultat est +% rangé dans \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@settitlefont@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetitle@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@settitlefont@false + \def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0022]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitlefont \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetitle@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmptf@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} we build the name of the effective command and apply this command: +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} nous construisons le nom de la commande effective et appliquons cette commande: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@settitlefont@ + \def\mtc@tmptf@name{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev font} + \mtc@toks{#2}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0018]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitlefont\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmptf@name" as + \MessageBreak + "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmptf@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0034]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\\mtcsettitlefont\space uses + \MessageBreak + an illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}{\relax} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitle} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitle}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{texte}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{text} is the text for a mini-table title. +% \or\relax +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Le \emph{texte} est le texte pour un titre +% de mini-table. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@settitle@\@mtc@settitle@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we define the \com{mtcsettitle} command, which has two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsettitle}, qui a deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsettitle}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0021} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0021} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé +% dans \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@settitle@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@settitle@false + \def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0021]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitle \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtati@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpti@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} we construct the name of the effective macro and apply it: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} nous construisons le nom de la macro effective et nous l'appliquons: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@settitle@ + \def\mtc@tmpti@name{\mtc@mtati@abbrev title}% + \mtc@toks{#2}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0017]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsettitle\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmpti@name" as + \MessageBreak + "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpti@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0033]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsettitle\space uses + \MessageBreak + an illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}{\relax} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetformat} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetformat}}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define first the keywords (family \texttt{formatparam}) for the three formatting parameters that this command +% can alter: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons d'abord les mots-clés (famille \texttt{formatparam}) pour les trois paramètres de mise en page +% que cette commande peut altérer: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@dotinterval}{dotsep}% +\def\mtc@arg@dotinterval{dotsep} +\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@tocrightmargin}{tocrmarg}% +\def\mtc@arg@tocrightmargin{tocrightmargin} +\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@pagenumwidth}{pnumwidth}% +\def\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth{\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth} +%% \@namedef{mtc@arg@numwidth}{numwidth} %not yet available +%% \def\mtc@arg@numwidth{\mtc@arg@numwidth} %not yet available +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetformat} command needs an initialization to be done at the beginning of the document, to set the +% defaults values of the formatting parameters: +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetformat} a besoin qu'une initialisation soit faite en début de document pour établir les +% valeurs par défaut des paramètes de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpnumwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpnumwidth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@pnumwith} for each type of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@pnumwith} pour chaque type de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ptcpnumwidth}{\let\ptcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{stcpnumwidth}{\let\stcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{mtcpnumwidth}{\let\mtcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{plfpnumwidth}{\let\plfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlfpnumwidth}{\let\mlfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{slfpnumwidth}{\let\slfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{pltpnumwidth}{\let\pltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{mltpnumwidth}{\let\mltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +\@ifundefined{sltpnumwidth}{\let\sltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mtclofrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\stclotrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\plftocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mlflofrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\slflotrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\plttocrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\mltlofrmarg} +% \begin{macro}{\sltlotrmarg} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@tocrmarg} for each type of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@tocrmarg} pour chaque type de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ptctocrmarg}{\let\ptctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{mtctocrmarg}{\let\mtctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{stctocrmarg}{\let\stctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{plftocrmarg}{\let\plftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlftocrmarg}{\let\mlftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{slftocrmarg}{\let\slftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{plttocrmarg}{\let\plttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlttocrmarg}{\let\mlttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +\@ifundefined{slttocrmarg}{\let\slttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\stcdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\plfdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\slfdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\pltdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\mltdotsep} +% \begin{macro}{\sltdotsep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@dotsep} for each type of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@dotsep} pour chaque type de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{ptcdotsep}{\let\ptcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{mtcdotsep}{\let\mtcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{stcdotsep}{\let\stcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{plfdotsep}{\let\plfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{mlfdotsep}{\let\mlfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{slfdotsep}{\let\slfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{pltdotsep}{\let\pltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{mltdotsep}{\let\mltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +\@ifundefined{sltdotsep}{\let\sltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And we terminate the \com{AtBeginDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Et nous terminons le bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The executive part is done via the following macros, which are invoked in the \env{mtc@verse}-like +% environments for each kind of mini-table. These commands activate the values recorded by \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \or\relax +% La partie exécutive est effectuée via les macros suivantes, qui sont invoquées dans les environnements analogues +% à~\env{mtc@verse} pour chaque genre de mini-table. Ces commandes activent les valeurs enregistrées par +% \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{ptc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{ptc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptc@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\ptcpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\ptctocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\ptcdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mtc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\mtcpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\mtctocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\mtcdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{stc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{stc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\stc@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\stcpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\stctocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\stcdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{plf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{plf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\plf@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mlf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mlf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mlf@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\mlfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\mlftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\mlfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{slf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{slf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\slf@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\slfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\slftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\slfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform} +% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{plt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{plt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\plt@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\pltpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plttocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\pltdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform} +% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mlt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{mlt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mlt@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform} +% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{slt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: +% \or\relax +% La macro \com{slt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\slt@setform{% +\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax +\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax +\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We now define a flag and the \com{mtcsetformat} command, with has the following syntax: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter-name}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, \emph{parameter-name} is a keyword of +% the \texttt{formatparam} family and \emph{value}, the value of this parameter for the given kind of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetformat}, avec syntaxe suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, \emph{nom-paramètre} est un mot-clé de la +% famille \texttt{formatparam} et \emph{valeur}, la valeur de ce paramètre pour le genre de mini-table donné. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setformat@\@mtc@setformat@true +\newcommand{\mtcsetformat}[3]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0021} now process the first argument and store the result in \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0021} nous traitons le premier argument et rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X} +\def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setformat@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setformat@false + \def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0015]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else \edef\mtc@mtf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0016} we process the second argument and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0016} le deuxième argument est traité et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@formatparam@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setformat@false + \def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0016]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2). + \MessageBreak + It should be a formatting param choosen from: + \MessageBreak + pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}% +\else + \edef\mtc@fparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@formatparam@#2}}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfm@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} name of the storage macro is built and it receives the third parameter +% as value (\emph{via}~\com{edef} because it can contain some complex code): +% \or\relax +% Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} nom de la macro de stockage est construit et elle reçoit le troisième paramètre +% comme valeur (\emph{via}~\com{edef} car il peut contenir du code complexe): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setformat@ + \mtc@toks{#3}% + \def\mtc@tmpfm@name{\mtc@mtf@abbrev\mtc@fparam@abbrev}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0016]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetformat\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmpfm@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"} + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfm@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0025]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsetformat\space has incompatible + \MessageBreak + first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}% +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers}}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command activates of inhibits page numbers in the mini-tables of a given kind. Its syntax is the following: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}), +% or \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the page numbers. \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} have many synonyms. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables du genre donné. Sa syntaxe est la +% suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}) +% et \texttt{on} ou \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les numéros de +% pages. \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some flags: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@ \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false +\newif\if@mtc@spn@ok@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro +% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once, +% for the specified type of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro +% interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro +% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié. +% +% \lneed{5} +% \fi % +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers}[2]{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax + \@ifundefined{part}{}% + {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{parttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlof}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% + {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{minitoc}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilof}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{secttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlof}{#2} + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlot}{#2}} + \else + \mtcsetpagenumbers@{#1}{#2}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumber@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} internal macro, with two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@}, avec deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0017} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, and store the result in +% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0017} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, et rangeons le résultat dans +% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setpagenumbers@true +\def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false + \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0017]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong first + \MessageBreak + argument (#1)}% + {It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, +% and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}. +% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed. +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN}, +% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}. +% Le nom de la macro effective est construit puis la macro exécutée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@spn@ok@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@spn@ok@false + \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} + \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false + \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0018]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong second + \MessageBreak + argument (#2)}% + {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}} + \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrevX{X} + \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX} + \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev\mtc@mttpn@abbrev pagenumbers} + \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@pnsw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX + \mtcPackageInfo[I0022]{minitoc}% + {Page numbers are inhibited + \MessageBreak + for the #1s} + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0021]{minitoc}% + {Page numbers are activated + \MessageBreak for the #1s} + \fi + \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetrules} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetrules}}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is very similar to \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and its syntax is the same: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}), +% or \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the horizontal rules. \texttt{on} and +% \texttt{off} have many synonyms. +% +% Hence the code is similar. +% \or\relax +% Cette macro ressemble beaucoup à~\com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et sa syntaxe est la même: +% \begin{verse} +% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}) +% et \texttt{on} ou +% \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les filets horizontaux. \texttt{on} et +% \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes. +% +% Donc le code est similaire. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define some flags: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setrules@ \@mtc@setrules@false +\newif\if@mtc@sru@ok@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro +% \com{mtcsetrules@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once, +% for the specified type of mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro +% interne \com{mtcsetrules@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro +% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié. +% \fi % +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetrules}[2]{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax + \@ifundefined{part}{}% + {\mtcsetrules@{parttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{partlof}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{partlot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% + {\mtcsetrules@{minitoc}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{minilof}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{minilot}{#2}} + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {\mtcsetrules@{secttoc}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{sectlof}{#2} + \mtcsetrules@{sectlot}{#2}} + \else + \mtcsetrules@{#1}{#2}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then the \com{mtcsetrules@} internal macro, which has two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetrules@}, qui a deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetrules@}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0019} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family and store the result in a macro +% \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0019} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable} puis rangeons le résultat +% dans \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setrules@true +\def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setrules@false + \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0019]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1)}% + {It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mttru@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{if@setrules@false} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@noX} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, +% and store the result in a macro \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}. +% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed. +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN}, +% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}. +% Le nom de la macro effective est construit et cette macro est exécutée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@sru@ok@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@sru@ok@false + \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} + \@mtc@setrules@false + \mtcPackageError[E0020]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2)}% + {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...) + \MessageBreak + Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@rusw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}} + \def\mtc@rusw@abbrevX{X} + \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX} + \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@rusw@abbrev\mtc@mttru@abbrev rule} + \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@rusw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX + \mtcPackageInfo[I0008]{minitoc}% + {Horizontal rules are inhibited + \MessageBreak + for the #1s} + \else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0007]{minitoc}% + {Horizontal rules are activated + \MessageBreak + for the #1s} + \fi + \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfeature} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfeature}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For this command, we must define three families of keywords, but the third is just used to add the word +% ``\texttt{style}'' for the ``\texttt{pagestyle}'' when ``\feat{pagestyle}'' is used. +% +% \or\relax +% Pour cette commande, nous devons définir trois familles de mots-clés, mais la troisième ne sert qu'à~ajouter le mot +% <<~\texttt{style}~>> pour le <<~\texttt{pagestyle}~>> lorsque <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>> est utilisé. +% +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A family (\texttt{ltypetable}) for the long names of the types of mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Une famille (\texttt{ltypetable}) pour les noms longs des types de mini-tables: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@parttoc}{parttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@parttoc{parttoc} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlof}{partlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlof{partlof} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlot}{partlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlot{partlot} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minitoc}{minitoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minitoc{minitoc} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilof}{minilof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilof{minilof} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilot}{minilot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilot{minilot} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@secttoc}{secttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@secttoc{secttoc} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlof}{sectlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlof{sectlof} +\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlot}{sectlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlot{sectlot} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A family (\texttt{featureparam}) for the type of feature: +% \or\relax +% Une famille (\texttt{featureparam}) pour le type de dispositif: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@before}{before}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@before{before} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@after}{after}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@after{after} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@open}{open}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@open{open} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@close}{close}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@close{close} +\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@pagestyle}{thispage}% + \def\mtc@featureparam@pagestyle{thispage} +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And a family (\texttt{ft3}) to add ``style'' if it is a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature: +% \or\relax +% Et une famille (\texttt{ft3}) pour ajouter <<~style~>> si c'est un dispositif <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>>: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@before}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@before\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@after}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@after\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@open}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@open\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@close}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@close\endcsname{} +\@namedef{mtc@ft3@pagestyle}{style}% + \expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@pagestyle\endcsname{style} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \com{mtcsetfeature} command has the following syntax: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{feature-name}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{feature-name} is a keyword of +% the \texttt{featureparam} family (but also of the \texttt{ft3} family), and \emph{commands} are the commands which +% constitute the selected feature. +% \or\relax +% La commande \com{mtcsetfeature} a la syntaxe suivante: +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-dispositif}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% où \emph{mini-table} est une mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{nom-dispositif} est un mot-clé +% de la famille \texttt{featureparam} (mais aussi de la famille \texttt{ft3}), et \emph{commandes} sont les +% commandes qui constituent le dispositif choisi. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We define a flag and the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, with three arguments: +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, qui a trois arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setfeature@\@mtc@setfeature@true +\newcommand{\mtcsetfeature}[3]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0011} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, and store +% the result in \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0011} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}, et rangeons le résultat +% dans \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X} +\def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setfeature@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfeature@false + \def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0011]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The\imess{E0012} second argument is a keyword of the \texttt{featureparam} family, the result is stored in +% \com{mtc@featparam@}; and the complement is computed from the first argument, interpreted as a keyword of the +% \texttt{ft3} family and whose result is stored in \com{mtc@featparam@third}. +% \or\relax +% Le\imess{E0012} deuxième argument est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{featureparam}, le résultat est rangé dans +% \com{mtc@featparam@}; et le complément est calculé d'après le premier argument, interprété comme un mot-clé de +% la famille \texttt{ft3} et dont le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@featparam@third}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@featureparam@#2\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setfeature@false + \def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X} + \def\mtc@featparam@third{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0012]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong second argument + \MessageBreak + (#2). + \MessageBreak + It should be a feature param + \MessageBreak + (before, after, open, close, pagestyle)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@featparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@featureparam@#2}} + \edef\mtc@featparam@third{\@nameuse{mtc@ft3@#2}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfeat@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} name of the effective macro is built by concatenating these three +% pieces (named \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},\space +% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev},\space and \com{mtc@featparam@third}\space respectively), then this macro is executed: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Le\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} nom de la macro effective est construit en concaténant ces trois +% morceaux (nommés \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev}, +% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} et \com{mtc@featparam@third} respectivement), puis cette macro est exécutée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setfeature@ + \def\mtc@tmpfeat@name% + {\mtc@featparam@abbrev\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev\mtc@featparam@third}% + \mtc@toks{#3}% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0014]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetfeature\space redefines the macro + \MessageBreak + "\csname mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname" as + \MessageBreak + "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0023]{minitoc}% + {The macro \string\mtcsetfeature\space has incompatible + \MessageBreak + first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetdepth} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetdepth}}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{depth} is the depth for a mini-table. +% If it is a mini-table for a list of figures or tables, the corresponding depth counter \virage\emph{must be +% available}, i.e.,~must have been created (often by an adequate package, like the \pack{subfig} +% package~\cite{subfig}). +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{profondeur} est la profondeur +% pour une mini-table. Si c'est une mini-table pour une liste de figures ou de tableaux, le compteur profondeur +% correspondant \virage\emph{doit être disponible}, c'est-à-dire qu'il doit avoir été créé (souvent par un paquetage +% adéquat, tel que le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setdepth@\@mtc@setdepth@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we define the \com{mtcsetdepth} command, with two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}, avec deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetdepth}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0009} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0009} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}. Le résultat est rangé +% dans \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setdepth@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setdepth@false + \def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0009]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtade@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpde@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} we construct the name of the effective counter +% and gave it the value: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} nous construisons le nom du compteur effectif +% et lui donnons la valeur: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setdepth@ + \def\mtc@tmpde@name{\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth} + \@ifundefined{c@\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0008]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth \space attempts to use + \MessageBreak + an undefined counter (#1depth).}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}}{% + \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the. + \mtcPackageInfo[I0013]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth\space redefines the counter + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@tmpde@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\csname c@\mtc@tmpde@name\endcsname=#2}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0010]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetdepth:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}% +\fi}% end of \mtcsetdepth +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetoffset} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetoffset}}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{value} is the offset value for a mini-table. +% \or\relax +% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: +% \begin{verse} +% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| +% \end{verse} +% +% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{valeur} est celle du déplacement +% latéral pour une mini-table. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we declare a flag, set true: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@setoffset@\@mtc@setoffset@true +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we define the \com{mtcsetoffset} command, with two arguments: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetoffset}, avec deux arguments: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcsetoffset}[2]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} +% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{E0042} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in +% \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{E0042} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé +% dans \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X} +\@mtc@setoffset@true +\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax + \@mtc@setoffset@false + \def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X} + \mtcPackageError[E0042]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset \space has a wrong first argument + \MessageBreak + (#1). + \MessageBreak + It should be a mini-table type + \MessageBreak + (parttoc...sectlot)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} +\else + \edef\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpof@name} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} we construct the name of the effective offset and gave it the value: +% \or\relax +% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} nous construisons le nom du déplacement effectif +% et lui donnons la valeur: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@setoffset@ + \def\mtc@tmpof@name{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset.} + \@ifundefined{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0041]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset \space attempts to use + \MessageBreak + an undefined offset (\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset).}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}}{% + \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the. + \mtcPackageInfo[I0052]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset\space redefines + \MessageBreak + "\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% + \expandafter\def\csname \mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset\endcsname{#2}}% +\else + \mtcPackageError[E0043]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcsetoffset:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}% +\fi}% end of \mtcsetoffset +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Polymorphic entries}\label{s+code+polym} +% \or\relax +% \section{Entrées polymorphes}\label{s+code+polym} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% A toc entry should be able to have variants when it appears in the normal text (like the mandatory argument of +% a sectionning command), in a page header or in the main TOC (like the optionnal argument of a sectionning +% command), in a minitable (parttoc, minitoc or secttoc). Similar behaviour should be available for entries in th +% LOF or the LOT. So we define three commands to be used inside the optionnal argument of a sectionning command or +% of \com{caption} for a figure or a table. These commands must be robust (because used in optionnal arguments) +% and have 4~arguments: (1)~the variant to appear in a parttoc (or partlof or partlof), +% (2)~the variant to appear in a minitoc (or minilof or minilof), +% (3)~the variant to appear in a secttoc (or sectlof or sectlof). +% (4)~the variant to appear in the main TOC (or LOF or LOT). +% The variant to appear locally as title of the sectionning unit or as local caption of the figure or table is +% the mandatory argument of the sectionning command or of the caption command (see section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% We use the \verb|\ifin...| flags. +% \or\relax +% Une entrée de table des matières devrait disposer de variantes selon qu'elle apparaît dans le texte normal +% (comme l'argument obligatoire d'une commande de sectionnement), dans un en-tête de page ou dans la table des +% matières principale (comme l'argument optionnel d'une commande de sectionnement), dans une minitable (parttoc, minitoc +% ou secttoc). Un comportement similaire devrait être possible pour les entrées de la liste des figures ou des +% tableaux. Donc nous définissons trois commandes à~utiliser à~l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel d'une commande +% de sectionnement ou de celui de \com{caption} pour une figure ou un tableau. Ces commandes doivent être robustes +% (car utilisées à~l'intérieur d'un argument optionnel) et ont 4~arguments: (1)~la variante apparaissant dans une +% parttoc (ou partlof ou partlof), +% (2)~la variante apparaissant dans une a minitoc (ou minilof ou minilof), +% (3)~la variante apparaissant dans une secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlof). +% (4)~la variante apparaissant la la table des matières (ou liste des figures ou liste des tableaux) principale. +% La variante apparaissant localement comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement ou comme légende locale de la figure +% ou du tableau est l'argument obligatoire de la commande de sectionnement ou de la commande de caption (voir la +% section~\vref{ss+polym}). +% Nous utilisons les indicateurs \verb|\ifin...|. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{% + \ifinparttoc\relax{#1}% + \else\ifinminitoc\relax{#2}% + \else\ifinsecttoc\relax{#3}% + \else\relax{#4} + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries of the list of figures: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées le la liste des figures: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{% + \ifinpartlof\relax{#1}% + \else\ifinminilof\relax{#2}% + \else\ifinsectlof\relax{#3}% + \else\relax{#4} + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For entries of the list of tables: +% \or\relax +% Pour les entrées le la liste des tableaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{% + \ifinpartlot\relax{#1}% + \else\ifinminilot\relax{#2}% + \else\ifinsectlot\relax{#3}% + \else\relax{#4} + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment and siblings}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} et ses comparses}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The flag \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} is used to detect an incorrect imbrication of this environment: +% \or\relax +% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} est utilisé pour détecter une imbrication incorrecte de cet environnement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@Himtoc@ \@mtc@Himtoc@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{9} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} define a macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} to save the current value +% of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}. +% Then we define this environment, which inserts into the TOC file this command and commands of the +% form \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. Note that \com{xdef} is necessary! +% It also save and restore the value of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}, as the optional argument is the hiding depth of +% the entries in the main TOC. +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} définissons une macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} pour sauvegarder la valeur +% courante du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}. +% Notez que \com{xdef} est nécessaire! +% Puis nous définissons cet environnement, qui écrit dans le fichier table des matières cette commande et +% des commandes de la +% forme \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. +% Il sauvegarde et restaure aussi la valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}, car +% l'argument optionnel est la profondeur de masquage des entrées dans la table des matières principale. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtc@savetocdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}}% +\newcommand{\mtc@restoretocdepth}{\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}}% +\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]% +{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\mtcPackageError[E0005]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments}% + {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himtoc@true + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% +{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\else\mtcPackageError[E0031]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment}% + {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlof@} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are similar, but we must verify the +% presence of the associated depth counter, so we have two versions of each of these environments. +% This must be done \emph{after} the loading of the packages. +% +% First, for the list of figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}} +% \or\relax +% Les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont similaires, mais nous devons +% véfifier la présence du compteur de profondeur associé, donc nous avons deux versions de ces environnements. +% Ceci doit être fait \emph{après} le chargement des paquetages. +% +% D'abord, pour la liste des figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@Himlof@ \@mtc@Himlof@false +\AtBeginDocument{% +\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{% + \providecommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\empty} + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@true + \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \def\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@false + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}% +}}% +{% + \newcommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{lofdepth}}}% + \newcommand{\mtc@restorelofdepth}{\setcounter{lofdepth}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}}% + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@true + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savelofdepth}% + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}% + {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlof@false + \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlot@} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\arabic} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then for the list of tables:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}} +% \or\relax +% Puis pour la liste des tableaux:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@Himlot@ \@mtc@Himlot@false +\AtBeginDocument{% +\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{% + \providecommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\empty} + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@true + \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \def\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@false + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}% +}}% +{% + \newcommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{lotdepth}}}% + \newcommand{\mtc@restorelotdepth}{\setcounter{lotdepth}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}}% + \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}% + {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@true + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savelotdepth}% + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% + {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}% + {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}% + {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi + \global\@mtc@Himlot@false + \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fixing the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary} +% \or\relax +% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: +% \or\relax +% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@glofix@level} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} on the document class, +% the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred +% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then +% stored in the macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning +% message: +% \or\relax +% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} la classe du document, +% l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé +% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La +% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui +% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0001]{minitoc}% + {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% + \MessageBreak + Cannot use \string\mtcfixglossary \space without + \MessageBreak + optional argument [part]}% + \@ifundefined{part}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0001]{minitoc}% + {But \string\part\space is undefined}% + {\string\mtcfixglossary\space not usable}}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0006]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcfixglossary\space can only be used + \MessageBreak + with the [part] optional argument, + \MessageBreak + which becomes the default}% + \def\mtc@glofix@level{part}% + }}% + {\def\mtc@glofix@level{section}}}% +{\def\mtc@glofix@level{chapter}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixglossary@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0026} we define a flag (\com{if@mtcfixglossary@}) and the command \com{mtcfixglossary}, which adds +% the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0026} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, qui ajoute les lignes +% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcfixglossary@ \@mtcfixglossary@false +\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][\mtc@glofix@level]{% + \@mtcfixglossary@false + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi + \if@mtcfixglossary@ + \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}% + \csname mtcadd\mtc@glofix@level\endcsname\relax + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0026]{minitoc}% + {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixglossary + \MessageBreak + is wrong}% + {It must be omitted (\mtc@glofix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fixing the ``Index'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: +% \or\relax +% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ixfix@level} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} on the document class, +% the ``Index'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred +% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then +% stored in the macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message: +% \or\relax +% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} la classe du document, +% l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé +% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La +% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui +% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0002]{minitoc}% + {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% + \MessageBreak + Cannot use \string\mtcfixindex \space without + \MessageBreak + optional argument [part]}% + \@ifundefined{part}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0002]{minitoc}% + {But \string\part\space is undefined}% + {\string\mtcfixindex\space not usable}}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0007]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcfixindex\space can only be used with + \MessageBreak + the [part] optional argument, + \MessageBreak + which becomes the default}% + \def\mtc@ixfix@level{part}% + }}% + {\def\mtc@ixfix@level{section}}}% +{\def\mtc@ixfix@level{chapter}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixindex@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0027} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixindex}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF +% and the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0027} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixindex}, qui ajoute les lignes nécessaires dans +% la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcfixindex@ \@mtcfixindex@false +\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][\mtc@ixfix@level]{% + \@mtcfixindex@false + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi + \if@mtcfixindex@ + \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}% + \csname mtcadd\mtc@ixfix@level\endcsname\relax + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0027]{minitoc}% + {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixindex + \MessageBreak + is wrong}% + {It must be omitted (\mtc@ixfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Fixing the ``Nomenclature'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+ature} +% \or\relax +% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+ature} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: +% \or\relax +% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ +% \end{verse} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@nomenclfix@level} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} on the document class, +% the ``Nomenclature'' entry\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or +% \pack{nomentbl} package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} calls \pack{nomentbl}).} +% in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred +% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then +% stored in the macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. +% This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message: +% \or\relax +% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} la classe du document, +% l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>>\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le +% paquetage \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} appelle \pack{nomentbl}).} +% dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé +% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La +% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui +% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0095]{minitoc}% + {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% + \MessageBreak + Cannot use \string\mtcfixnomenclature \space without + \MessageBreak + optional argument [part]}% + \@ifundefined{part}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0039]{minitoc}% + {But \string\part\space is undefined}% + {\string\mtcfixnomclature\space not usable}}% + {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0096]{minitoc}% + {\string\mtcfixnomenclature\space can only be used with + \MessageBreak + the [part] optional argument, + \MessageBreak + which becomes the default}% + \def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{part}% + }}% + {\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{section}}}% +{\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{chapter}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixnomclature@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\imess{E0040} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, +% the LOF and the LOT. +% \or\relax +% Puis\imess{E0040} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixnomclature}, qui ajoute les lignes +% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtcfixnomenclature@ \@mtcfixnomenclature@false +\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][\mtc@nomenclfix@level]{% + \@mtcfixnomenclature@false + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi + \expandafter% + \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi + \if@mtcfixnomenclature@ + \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}% + \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}% + \csname mtcadd\mtc@nomenclfix@level\endcsname\relax + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0040]{minitoc}% + {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixnomenclature + \MessageBreak + is wrong}% + {It must be omitted (\mtc@nomenclfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} command loads a minitoc language definition +% file \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to set the language-dependent +% titles for the mini-tables. +% But first, we verify that this file exists. +% The flag \com{if@mtc@insellang@} is true while we are in this macro. +% \or\relax +% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} commande charge un fichier minitoc de définition +% de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour établir les +% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables. +% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier existe. +% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@} est vrai tant que nous sommes dans cette macro. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@insellang@ \@mtc@insellang@false +\def\mtcselectlanguage#1{% + \@mtc@insellang@true + \InputIfFileExists{#1.mld}% + {\mtcPackageInfo[I0010]{minitoc}{The #1 language is selected.% + \MessageBreak + }}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0006]{minitoc}% + {#1 is not a known language, + \MessageBreak + #1.mld not found. + \MessageBreak + Command ignored}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Correct the source using a valid language name. + \MessageBreak + Press RETURN}}% + \@mtc@insellang@false +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \ucom{mtcloadmlo} internal command}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \or\relax +% \section{La commande interne \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\@input} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command loads a minitoc language object file \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} to set the language-dependent +% titles for the mini-tables when exotic characters are needed. +% This command is used only in some \suffix{.mld} files when the title strings can not be generated by the normal +% processing of \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. The \suffix{.mlo} files are generated by \env{filecontents} environments in the +% \xfile{minitoc.ins} file. +% But first, we verify that this \suffix{.mlo} file exists. +% +% \emph{This command}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}} +% \emph{should not be invoked directly by the user. This is verified via the flag +% \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.} +% \or\relax +% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc objet de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} pour établir les +% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables lorsque des caractères exotiques sont nécessaires. +% Cette commande n'est utilisée que dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld}, lorsque les chaînes de titres ne peuvent +% pas être produites par le traitement normal de \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} sont produits +% par des environments \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier \suffix{.mlo} existe. +% +% \emph{Cette commande}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}} +% \emph{ne devrait pas être invoquée directement par l'utilisateur. Ceci est vérifié grâce +% à~l'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcloadmlo#1{% + \if@mtc@insellang@ + \InputIfFileExists{#1.mlo}% + {\mtcPackageInfo[I0011]{minitoc}% + {#1 minitoc language object selected. + \MessageBreak}}% + {\mtcPackageError[E0007]{minitoc}% + {#1 is not a known minitoc + \MessageBreak + language object file (.mlo), + \MessageBreak + #1.mlo not found. + \MessageBreak + Command ignored}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Correct the source using a valid language name. + \MessageBreak + Press RETURN}}% + \else + \mtcPackageError[E0032]{minitoc}% + {You are using the \string\mtcloadmlo\space command + \MessageBreak + outside of a .mld file}% + {It will be ignored} + \@mtc@insellang@false + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The ``coffee breaks''}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les <<~pauses café~>>}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\l@coffee} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}), we need some commands to insert special +% entries, undotted, in the +% TOC to mark ``coffee breaks''{\myCoffeecup} in a conference. +% Hence we define \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} and +% \com{l@coffee}, and internal commands analog to the standard internal commands to format the TOC. +% \or\relax +% Pour le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}), nous avons besoin de quelques +% commandes pour insérer des entrées spéciales, sans points de conduite, dans la table des matières pour marquer les +% <<~pauses café~>>{\myCoffeecup} dans une conférence. Donc nous définissons \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} et +% \com{l@coffee}, et des commandes internes analogues aux commandes internes standard pour mettre en forme la +% table des matières. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{% + \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\coffeeline{#2}{#3}{\null}}} +\def\coffeeline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname} +\newcommand*\l@coffee{\@Undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Initialization of counters}\label{s+verse+init.counters} +% \or\relax +% \section{Initialisation des compteurs}\label{s+verse+init.counters} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% At the beginning of the document, we initialize the absolute counters for parts, chapters and sections, if they +% are defined. +% \or\relax +% Au début du document, nous initialisons les compteurs absolus pour les parties, chapitres et sections, s'ils +% sont définis. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}} +\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}} +\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Declarations for simple options}\label{s+code+simple.options} +% \or\relax +% \section{Déclarations pour les options simples}\label{s+code+simple.options} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options are just setting a flag. +% \or\relax +% Ces options ne font que positionner un indicateur. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} and \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} and \uopt{k-loose}}% +% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} et \uopt{k-loose}}% +% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options influence the interline separation in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Ces options influencent l'interlignage dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{tight}{\tightmtctrue} +\DeclareOption{loose}{\tightmtcfalse} % default +\DeclareOption{k-tight}{\ktightmtctrue} +\DeclareOption{k-loose}{\ktightmtcfalse} % default +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} and \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} et \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options activate or inhibit the checking for empty mini-table files. +% \or\relax +% Ces options activent ou inhibent les tests de vacuité sur les fichiers des mini-tables. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{checkfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilestrue} % default +\DeclareOption{nocheckfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilesfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} and \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} et \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These options activate or inhibit the leaders (lines of dots) in the mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Ces options activent ou inhibent les points de conduite dans les mini-tables. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{undotted}{\undottedmtctrue} +\DeclareOption{dotted}{\undottedmtcfalse} % default +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This option will later load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}. +% \or\relax +% Cette option chargera plus loin le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{notoccite}{\@mtc@notoccite@true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{W0020} option forces the use of short extensions. +% \or\relax +% Cette\imess{W0020} option force l'utilisation de suffixes courts. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{shortext}{% + \@mtc@longext@false + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0020]{minitoc}% + {You have forced the use of short extensions}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{insection} option}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{insection}}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This\imess{E0035} option is available only if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined. +% It is to be revised when chapter/section level commands will ever be allowed together, sometime in the far away future, +% with a lot of luck (and work)\footnote{Please, do not dream too much!}. +% \or\relax +% Cette\imess{E0035} option n'est disponible que si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie et \com{section} est définie. +% Il faudra la revoir si un jour les commandes aux niveaux chapitre et section sont éventuellement permises +% ensemble, peut-être dans un avenir lointain, avec beaucoup de chance (et de travail)\,\footnote{Ne révez pas trop +% quand même!}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@ss@insection@ \@mtc@ss@insection@false +\@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{\DeclareOption{insection}{% + \mtcPackageError[E0035]{minitoc}% + {You have used the `insection' option in + \MessageBreak + a document where chapters are defined. + \MessageBreak + This is not compatible: option ignored.}% + {Remove this option. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX} + }}% + {% + \DeclareOption{insection}% + {\@mtc@ss@insection@true}% + }% +}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% \or\relax +% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{listfiles} option creates a file containing a list of the auxiliary files created +% by the \upack{minitoc} package. This is the default. +% This file is named \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% The \opt{nolistfiles} option inhibits this listing. +% \or\relax +% L'option \optd{listfiles} crée un fichier contenant une liste des fichiers auxiliaires créés par +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est le choix par défaut. +% Ce fichier est nommé \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% L'option \opt{nolistfiles} inhibe ce listage. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@listfiles@ \@mtc@listfiles@true +\DeclareOption{listfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@true} +\DeclareOption{nolistfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Language options}\label{s+section+language.options} +% \or\relax +% \section{Options pour les langues}\label{s+section+language.options} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@LML} +% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we define an utility macro (\com{@gobblethree}), a list of the missing files +% (accumulated in the \com{mtc@listmisslanguages} macro), +% and a macro (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}) to add a file name to the list: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous définissons une macro utilitaire (\com{@gobblethree}), une liste des fichiers manquants +% (accumulée dans la macro \com{mtc@listmisslanguages}), et une macro pour ajouter un nom de fichier à~la liste +% (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{\empty} +\def\mtc@listmisslanguages{} +\def\mtc@addmisslanguage#1{% + \let\mtc@LML\mtc@listmisslanguages + \edef\mtc@listmisslanguages{\mtc@LML \MessageBreak #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Before\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} defining a language option, +% we must verify that the corresponding \suffix{.mld} file exists, and, if +% necessary, that the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file exists. +% Hence, we must first define a flag \com{if@mtc@misslang} and +% two macros to test the presence of these files; if the files are available, we define the language option. +% \or\relax +% Avant\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} de définir une option de langue, +% nous devons vérifier si le fichier \suffix{.mld} existe, et, si +% nécessaire, que le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant existe. Donc, nous devons d'abord définir un indicateur +% \com{if@mtc@misslang} et deux macros pour tester la présence de ces fichiers; si les fichiers sont +% disponibles, nous définissons l'option de langue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@misslang\@mtc@misslangfalse +\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopt}[1]{% + \IfFileExists{#1.mld}% + {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}% + {The required "#1.mld" file is missing. + \MessageBreak + The "#1" language option will not be available. + \MessageBreak + Please install it from a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}}% +}% +\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopto}[1]{% + \IfFileExists{#1.mlo}% + {\mtc@setlangopt{#1}}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mlo} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0051]{minitoc}% + {The required "#1.mlo" file is missing. + \MessageBreak + The "#1" language option will not be available. + \MessageBreak + Please install it from a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}% + \IfFileExists{#1.mld}{}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue + \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} + \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}% + {The required "#1.mld" file is missing. + \MessageBreak + The "#1" language option will not be available. + \MessageBreak + Please install it from a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}% + }% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} \suffix{.mld} files are mandatory (\xfile{english.mld} because english is the default language), +% so their absence is a serious error: +% \or\relax +% Certains\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} fichiers \suffix{.mld} sont obligatoires (\xfile{english.mld} car l'anglais est la langue +% par défaut), donc leur absence est une erreur sévère): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtc@setlangoptm}[1]{% + \IfFileExists{#1.mld}% + {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}% + {\@mtc@misslangtrue + \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} + \mtcPackageError[E0038]{minitoc}% + {Your minitoc installation is incomplete. + \MessageBreak + A mandatory minitoc language object file, + \MessageBreak + #1.mld, is not found. + \MessageBreak + We will try to continue with + \MessageBreak + current/default values}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Please fix your minitoc installation. + \MessageBreak + Press to continue}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must define the default titles (english): +% \or\relax +% Nous devons définir les titres par défaut (anglais): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}% + \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}% + \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}% + \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}% + \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}% +}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages} +% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, +% we signal that at the end of the document, with also the full list of the missing language files: +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} est manquant, +% nous le signalons en fin de document, avec aussi liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{% + \if@mtc@misslang + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0093]{minitoc}% + {Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing + \MessageBreak + in your installation. + \MessageBreak + Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages + \MessageBreak + in the \string\jobname.log file. + \MessageBreak + The full list of the missing language files + \MessageBreak + is given in the W0094 warning message. + \MessageBreak + Please install the missing files from + \MessageBreak + a recent distribution + \MessageBreak + or from the CTAN archives}% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0094]{minitoc}% + {Missing minitoc language file(s)\string: + \MessageBreak + \mtc@listmisslanguages\@gobblethree}% + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each language option reads the corresponding \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file via +% the specialized macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}, after verification by \com{mtc@setlangopt} or +% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (when a \suffix{.mlo} file is required), by \com{mtc@setlangoptm} when the language is +% mandatory. If the file +% does not exist, a standard error message is displayed. The language options are (should be) in alphabetical order +% (to make maintenance easier). +% Several options could load the same file, but, by convention, there should be a \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file for +% each language option, given that this file may load another one (as \xfile{american.mld} loads \xfile{english.mld}). +% \or\relax +% Chaque option de langue lit le fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} correspondant via +% la macro spécialisée \com{mtcselectlanguage}, après vérification par \com{mtc@setlangopt} ou +% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (lorsqu'un fichier \suffix{.mlo} est requis), par \com{mtc@setlangoptm} lorsque la +% langue est obligatoire. Si le fichier +% n'existe pas, un message d'erreur standard est affiché. Les options de langue sont (devraient) être par ordre +% alphabétique (pour faciliter la maintenance). Plusieurs options pourraient charger le même fichier, mais, +% par convention, il devrait y~avoir un +% fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque option de langue, étant donné que ce fichier peut en charger un autre +% (ainsi \xfile{francais.mld} charge-t-il \xfile{french.mld}). +% \fi +% \raggedcolumns +% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macrocode} +\mtc@setlangopt{acadian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{acadien}% +\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaan}% +\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaans}% +\mtc@setlangopt{albanian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{american}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arab}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arab2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arabi}% +\mtc@setlangopt{arabic}% +\mtc@setlangopt{armenian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{australian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{austrian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bahasa}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bahasai}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bahasam}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bangla}% +\mtc@setlangopt{basque}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bengali}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bicig}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bicig2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bicig3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bithe}% +\mtc@setlangopt{brazil}% +\mtc@setlangopt{brazilian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{breton}% +\mtc@setlangopt{british}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarianb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{buryat}% +\mtc@setlangopt{buryat2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{canadian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{canadien}% +\mtc@setlangopt{castillan}% +\mtc@setlangopt{castillian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{catalan}% +\mtc@setlangopto{chinese1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{chinese2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{croatian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{czech}% +\mtc@setlangopt{danish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{devanagari}% +\mtc@setlangopt{dutch}% +\mtc@setlangoptm{english}% +\mtc@setlangopt{english1}% +\mtc@setlangopt{english2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{esperant}% +\mtc@setlangopt{esperanto}% +\mtc@setlangopt{estonian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopia}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{farsi1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{farsi2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{farsi3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{finnish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{finnish2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{francais}% +\mtc@setlangopt{french}% +\mtc@setlangopt{french1}% +\mtc@setlangopt{french2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{frenchb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{frenchle}% +\mtc@setlangopt{frenchpro}% +\mtc@setlangopt{galician}% +\mtc@setlangopt{german}% +\mtc@setlangopt{germanb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{germanb2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek-mono}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polydemo}% +\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polykatha}% +\mtc@setlangopt{guarani}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul3}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul4}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hangul-u8}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hanja1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hanja2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{hanja-u8}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hindi}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hindi-modern}% +\mtc@setlangopt{hungarian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{icelandic}% +\mtc@setlangopt{indon}% +\mtc@setlangopt{indonesian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{interlingua}% +\mtc@setlangopt{irish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{italian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{italian2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese3}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese4}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese5}% +\mtc@setlangopto{japanese6}% +\mtc@setlangopt{kannada}% +\mtc@setlangopt{khalkha}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latin}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latin2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latinc}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latinc2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latvian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{latvian2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{letton}% +\mtc@setlangopt{letton2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lowersorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{lsorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{magyar}% +\mtc@setlangopt{magyar2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{magyar3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malay}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-b}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-mr}% +\mtc@setlangopto{malayalam-omega}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{manju}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mexican}% +\mtc@setlangopt{meyalu}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mongol}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mongolb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{mongolian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{naustrian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ngerman}% +\mtc@setlangopt{newzealand}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{norsk}% +\mtc@setlangopt{norsk2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk}% +\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{occitan}% +\mtc@setlangopt{occitan2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{polish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{polish2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{polski}% +\mtc@setlangopt{portuges}% +\mtc@setlangopt{portuguese}% +\mtc@setlangopt{romanian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{romanian2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{romanian3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russianb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russianc}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russian2m}% +\mtc@setlangopt{russian2o}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca1}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lh}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyralt}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrwin}% +\mtc@setlangopt{samin}% +\mtc@setlangopt{scottish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{serbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{serbianc}% +\mtc@setlangopt{slovak}% +\mtc@setlangopt{slovene}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{spanish4}% +\mtc@setlangopt{swahili}% +\mtc@setlangopt{swedish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{swedish2}% +\mtc@setlangopto{thai}% +\mtc@setlangopt{turkish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uighur}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uighur2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uighur3}% +\mtc@setlangopt{UKenglish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ukraineb}% +\mtc@setlangopt{ukrainian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{uppersorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{USenglish}% +\mtc@setlangopt{usorbian}% +\mtc@setlangopt{vietnam}% +\mtc@setlangopt{vietnamese}% +\mtc@setlangopt{welsh}% +\mtc@setlangopt{xalx}% +\mtc@setlangopt{xalx2}% +\mtc@setlangopt{xalx3}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \end{multicols}} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We declare the \optd{hints} (default) and \opt{nohints} options: +% \or\relax +% Nous déclarons les options \optd{hints} (défaut) et \opt{nohints}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{hints}{\@mtc@hints@true} +\DeclareOption{nohints}{\@mtc@hints@false} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \optd{hints} option is made of three parts: the first, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, is executed via +% \com{AtBeginDocument} and looks if some packages or classes are loaded, then gives warnings about their compatibility +% with \upack{minitoc}. +% \or\relax +% L'option \optd{hints} est constituée de trois parties: la première, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, est exécutée +% via \com{AtBeginDocument} et regarde si certains paquetages ou classes sont chargés, puis donne des +% avertissements à~propos de leur compatibilité avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The second part is made of tiny pieces of code inserted in the \upack{minitoc} code, to verify that some macros +% are called in the right order. +% \or\relax +% La deuxième partie est faite de petits fragments de code insérés dans le code de \upack{minitoc}, pour vérifier +% que certaines macros sont appelées dans le bon ordre. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The third and last part, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, is executed via \com{AtEndDocument} and examines the flags set +% by the first and the second parts. Then, if necessary, it writes some infos in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} +% file and/or warnings on the screen and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% The \optd{hints} option \virage\emph{does not signal errors}, only infos +% and warnings, so it does not stop the \LaTeX\ run. +% \or\relax +% La troisième et dernière partie, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument} et examine +% les indicateurs positionnés par les première et deuxième parties. Puis, si nécessaire, elle écrit quelques +% informations dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et/ou des avertissements sur l'écran +% et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% L'option \optd{hints} \virage\emph{ne signale pas d'erreurs}, seulement des informations et des avertissements, et +% donc n'interrompt pas l'exécution de \LaTeX. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{First part: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Première partie: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0049} declare some flags and the first part of the \optd{hints} option (for an \com{AtBeginDocument} block): +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0049} déclarons quelques indicateurs et la première partie de l'option \optd{hints} +% (pour un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@ \@mtc@abstract@loaded@false +\newif\if@mtc@toc@used@ \global\@mtc@toc@used@false +\newif\if@mtc@lof@used@ \global\@mtc@lof@used@false +\newif\if@mtc@lot@used@ \global\@mtc@lot@used@false +\def\mtc@hints@begindoc{% +\mtcPackageInfo[I0049]{minitoc(hints)}% + {==> You requested the hints option. + \MessageBreak + Some hints are eventually given below\@gobble}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{alphanum} package}\ipack{alphanum} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}\ipack{alphanum} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} test the presence of the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}), +% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la +% classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} +% avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{alphanum}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0025]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The alphanum package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0042} test the presence of the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0042} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{appendix}{% +\@mtc@hints@given@true +\mtcPackageInfo[I0042]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The appendix package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocbibind} package}\ipack{tocbibind} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocbibind}}\ipack{tocbibind} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0046} test the presence of the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0046} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{tocbibind}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0046]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The tocbibind package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \KOMAScript{} classes} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \KOMAScript} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0043} test the presence of each \upack{minitoc}-compatible \KOMAScript{} +% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0043} testons la présence de chaque classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible +% avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{scrbook}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The KOMAScript scrbook class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +\@ifclassloaded{scrreprt}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The KOMAScript scrreprt class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +\@ifclassloaded{scrartcl}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The KOMAScript scrartcl class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0047} test the presence of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0047} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0047]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The tocloft package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titlesec} package}\ipack{titlesec} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titlesec}}\ipack{titlesec} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} test the presence of the \pack{titlesec} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, +% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}, +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{titlesec}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0099]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The titlesec package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titletoc} package}\ipack{titletoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titletoc}}\ipack{titletoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} test the presence of the \pack{titletoc} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, +% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titletoc}~\cite{titletoc}, +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{titletoc}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0040]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The titletoc package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{placeins} package}\ipack{placeins} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{placeins}}\ipack{placeins} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} test if the \pack{placeins} +% package~\cite{placeins} is loaded and, if yes, we check if the selected options are correct (see section~\vref{rem+FB}): +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} testons si le paquetage +% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} est chargé et, si oui, nous regardons si les options choisies +% sont correctes (voir la section~\vref{rem+FB}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{placeins}% + {\if@mtc@ss@insection@ + \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{section}{}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0031]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package is loaded + \MessageBreak + without the section option, + \MessageBreak + but minitoc used the insection option + \MessageBreak + which implies it. Try to inverse the + \MessageBreak + loading order and use consistent options. + \MessageBreak + You may have got a message + \MessageBreak + ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins}% + }% + \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{above}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0084]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package is loaded + \MessageBreak + with the above option, + \MessageBreak + but minitoc used the insection option + \MessageBreak + which is incompatible with it. + \MessageBreak + Try to remove the above option + \MessageBreak + and use consistent options}% + }{}% + \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{below}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0085]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package is loaded + \MessageBreak + with the below option, + \MessageBreak + but minitoc used the insection option + \MessageBreak + which is incompatible with it. + \MessageBreak + Try to remove the below option + \MessageBreak + and use consistent options}% + }{}% + \fi + \@ifpackagelater{placeins}{2005/04/18}{}{% + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0032]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The placeins package loaded is + \MessageBreak + too old. You should use a version + \MessageBreak + dated of 2005/04/18 at least}% + }% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0044} test if the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0044} testons si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{memoir}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0044]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The memoir class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}{}% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsart} and \uclass{amsproc} classes}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \uclass{amsart} et \uclass{amsproc}}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} test if the \class{amsart} or \class{amsproc} class is loaded and emit a warning, +% because these classes are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} regardons si l'une des classes \class{amsart} ou \class{amsproc} a été chargée +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ces classes sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{amsart}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0026]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The amsart class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +\@ifclassloaded{amsproc}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0027]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The amsproc class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsbook} class}\iclass{amsbook} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{amsbook}}\iclass{amsbook} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0041} test if the \class{amsbook} class is loaded: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0041} testons si la classe \class{amsbook} est chargée: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{amsbook}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0041]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The amsbook class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + See the minitoc package documentation + \MessageBreak + for specific precautions\@gobble}{}% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{abstract} package}\ipack{abstract} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\ipack{abstract} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0040} test the presence of the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}, then its options: +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0040} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}, puis ses options: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{abstract}% + {\@mtc@abstract@loaded@true% + \@ifpackagewith{abstract}{addtotoc}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageInfo[I0040]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The ``abstract'' package has been + \MessageBreak + loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option. + \MessageBreak + You need to look at the + \MessageBreak + documentation to adjust. + \MessageBreak} + }}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{jura} class}\iclass{jura} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{jura}}\iclass{jura} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} test if the \class{jura} class is loaded and emit a warning, because this class is +% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} regardons si la classe \class{jura} a été chargée et émettons un +% avertissement, puisque cette classe est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifclassloaded{jura}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0029]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The jura class is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{flowfram} package}\ipack{flowfram} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}\ipack{flowfram} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} test the presence of the \pack{flowfram} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, +% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, +% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackageloaded{flowfram}% + {\@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0097]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The flowfram package is loaded. + \MessageBreak + It is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the minitoc package}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the alteration of the sectionning commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur l'altération des commandes de sectionnement} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To check if the sectionning commands \com{part}, \com{chapter} or \com{section} have been altered by some +% package or in the preamble, we compare them (when executing an \com{AtBeginDocument} block) with their saved +% versions (saved by the +% \upack{minitoc} package when it is loaded) \com{mtc@hints@part}, \com{mtc@hints@chapter} and +% \com{mtc@hints@section}. For each sectionning command, we must perform the comparaison for the command itself, +% its unstarred branch and its starred branch. But the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} may interfere, +% hence the formal precautions in the messages. +% \or\relax +% Pour vérifier si les commandes de sectionnement \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ont été altérées +% par un paquetage ou dans le préambule, nous les comparons (lors de l'exécution d'un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}) +% avec leurs versions sauvegardées (par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lors de son chargement) \com{mtc@hints@part}, +% \com{mtc@hints@chapter} et \com{mtc@hints@section}. Pour chacune de ces commandes de sectionnement, nous +% devons effectuer la comparaison pour la commande elle-même, sa branche non étoilée et sa branche étoilée. Mais le +% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} peut interférer, d'où les précautions formelles dans les messages. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{part}}\icom{part} +% \or\relax +% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{part}}\icom{part} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart} ont été altérées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@hints@w@false +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\part\mtc@hints@part\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@part\mtc@hints@@part\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@spart\mtc@hints@@spart\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0030]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The \string\part\space command is altered + \MessageBreak + after minitoc} + \if@mtc@hyper@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- It may be the consequence + \MessageBreak + of loading the ``hyperref'' package} + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter} +% \or\relax +% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter} ont été altérées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@hints@w@false +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\chapter\mtc@hints@chapter\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@chapter\mtc@hints@@chapter\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@schapter\mtc@hints@@schapter\relax + \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% +\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0028]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The \string\chapter\space command is altered + \MessageBreak + after minitoc} + \if@mtc@hyper@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- It may be the consequence + \MessageBreak + of loading the ``hyperref'' package} + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{section}}\icom{section} +% \or\relax +% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{section}}\icom{section} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect}: +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect} ont été altérées: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@mtc@hints@w@false +\@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\section\mtc@hints@section\relax\else + \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} + \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@sect\mtc@hints@@sect\relax\else + \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} + \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@ssect\mtc@hints@@ssect\relax\else + \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} +\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0039]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- The \string\section\space command is altered + \MessageBreak + after minitoc} + \if@mtc@hyper@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% + {--- It may be the consequence + \MessageBreak + of loading the ``hyperref'' package} + \fi + \relax\else\fi}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about the consistency of the calling sequences of the commands} +% And finally, we prepare the consistency tests about the calling sequences of triplets of associated commands +% like \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} and \fkcom{tableofcontents}, and similar: to be able to use +% \com{parttoc}, a table of contents file must have been +% created via \fkcom{tableofcontents} and splitted into parttoc files via \com{doparttoc}. +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la cohérence des séquences d'appel des commandes} +% Et enfin, nous préparons les tests de cohérence sur les séquences d'appel de triplets de commandes associées +% telles que \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} et \fkcom{tableofcontents}, et similaires: pour pouvoir +% utiliser \com{parttoc}, un fichier table des matières doit avoir été créé via \fkcom{tableofcontents} et +% éclaté en fichiers parttocs via \com{doparttoc}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Hence we initialize some flags: +% \or\relax +% Donc nous initialisons quelques indicateurs: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@hints@ +\global\@mtc@toc@used@false +\global\@mtc@lof@used@false +\global\@mtc@lot@used@false +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then we patch the involved commands to set the corresponding flag when they are used. First, the commands for +% the main summaries: +% \or\relax +% Puis nous modifions les commandes concernées pour positionner l'indicateur correspondant lorsqu'elles sont +% utilisées. Nous commençons par les commandes des sommaires principaux: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@sv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents +\def\tableofcontents% + {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@tableofcontents} +\let\mtc@sv@listoffigures\listoffigures +\def\listoffigures% + {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@listoffigures} +\let\mtc@sv@listoftables\listoftables +\def\listoftables% + {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@listoftables} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, their ``fake'' siblings: +% \or\relax +% Puis, leurs cousines <<~fake~>>: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents\faketableofcontents +\def\faketableofcontents% + {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents} +\let\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures\fakelistoffigures +\def\fakelistoffigures% + {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures} +\let\mtc@sv@fklistoftables\fakelistoftables +\def\fakelistoftables% + {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoftables} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} definition is finished (it begins in +% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}): +% \or\relax +% Et la définition de \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} est terminée (elle avait commencé à~la +% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Final part: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Partie finale: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The final part of the \optd{hints} option is executed via \com{AtEndDocument}. Its code is in the +% \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro. It is a sequence of tests on the packages or classes loaded and the flags set +% during the first and the second parts of this option. First, we declare the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro: +% \or\relax +% La partie finale de l'option \optd{hints} est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument}. Son code est dans la +% macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}. C'est une séquence de tests sur les paquetages et classes chargés et sur les +% indicateurs positionnés durant les première et deuxième parties de cette option. Tout d'abord, nous déclarons +% la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@hints@enddoc{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Hint about \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} and the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} et l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We look if some section-level lists of figures or tables have been requested. +% \or\relax +% Nous regardons si des listes de figures ou de tableaux ont été demandées au niveau section. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@dosectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@dosectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@sectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@sectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi +\if@mtc@section@def@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\imess{W0056} yes, we verify that the +% \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} has been loaded with the correct options or that the \opt{insection} +% option of the \upack{minitoc} package has been invoked. +% If not, a warning is given. +% \or\relax +% Si\imess{W0056} oui, nous +% vérifions que le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} a été chargé avec les options correctes ou que +% l'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été invoquée. +% Sinon, un avertissement est émis. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \else + \if@mtc@sect@floats@% + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0056]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You are using \string\dosectlof\space and/or + \MessageBreak + \string\dosectlot, \string\sectlof\space and/or \string\sectlot, + \MessageBreak + hence the ``insection'' package + \MessageBreak + option is recommended}% + \@mtc@hints@w@true \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the consistency tests}\label{ss+final.coh} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale des tests de cohérence}\label{ss+final.coh} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test if \com{parttoc} has been used without \com{doparttoc}, etc., for each pair +% of preparation/insertion commands. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons si \com{parttoc} a été utilisée \com{doparttoc}, etc., pour chaque paire de commandes +% préparation/insertion. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} the part level commands: +% \or\relax +% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} les commandes au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@part@def@ + \if@parttoc@used@ + \if@doparttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0062]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\parttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\doparttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlof@used@ + \if@dopartlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0060]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dopartlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlot@used@ + \if@dopartlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0061]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dopartlot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} the chapter level commands: +% \or\relax +% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} les commandes au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \if@minitoc@used@ + \if@dominitoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0059]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minitoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dominitoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilof@used@ + \if@dominilof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0057]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dominilof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilot@used@ + \if@dominilot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0058]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dominilot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} the section level commands: +% \or\relax +% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} les commandes au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@section@def@ + \if@secttoc@used@ + \if@dosecttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0065]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\secttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dosecttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlof@used@ + \if@dosectlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0063]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dosectlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlot@used@ + \if@dosectlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0064]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\dosectlot} + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (first part)} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (première partie)?} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Now, we test if a \com{doparttoc} macro has been called but without any matching \com{parttoc}, hence it is a +% vain call. We do the same for each analog command. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons maintenant si une macro \com{doparttoc} a été appelée sans aucune commande \com{parttoc} +% correspondante, car sinon cet appel est vain. Nous faisons de même pour chaque commande analogue. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@part@def@ + \if@doparttoc@used@ + \if@parttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0075]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\doparttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\parttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dopartlof@used@ + \if@partlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0076]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dopartlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\partlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dopartlot@used@ + \if@partlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0077]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dopartlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\partlot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \if@dominitoc@used@ + \if@minitoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0078]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dominitoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\minitoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dominilof@used@ + \if@minilof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0079]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dominilof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\minilof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dominilot@used@ + \if@minilot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0080]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dominilot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\minilot} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@section@def@ + \if@dosecttoc@used@ + \if@secttoc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0081]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dosecttoc, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\secttoc} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dosectlof@used@ + \if@sectlof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0082]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dosectlof, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\sectlof} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@dosectlot@used@ + \if@sectlot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0083]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\dosectlot, + \MessageBreak + but not \string\sectlot} + \fi + \fi +\fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (second part)} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (seconde partie)?} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Another consistency test verifies that if the macro \com{parttoc} has been called, +% then the macro \com{tableofcontents} or \com{faketableofcontents} has also been called +% (to create the necessary contents file); similar tests are made +% for the other mini-table commands. +% \or\relax +% Un autre test de cohérence vérifie que si la macro \com{parttoc} a été appelée, +% alors la macro \com{tableofcontents} ou +% \com{faketableofcontents} a aussi été appelée (créant le fichier de contenu nécessaire); des tests +% analogues sont faits pour les autres commandes de mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@part@def@ + \if@parttoc@used@ + \if@mtc@toc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0071]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\parttoc\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\tableofcontents + \MessageBreak + nor \string\faketableofcontents} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlof@used@ + \if@mtc@lof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0069]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlof\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoffigures + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoffigures} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@partlot@used@ + \if@mtc@lot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0070]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\partlot\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoftables + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoftables} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \if@minitoc@used@ + \if@mtc@toc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0068]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minitoc\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\tableofcontents + \MessageBreak + nor \string\faketableofcontents} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilof@used@ + \if@mtc@lof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0066]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilof\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoffigures + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoffigures} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@minilot@used@ + \if@mtc@lot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0067]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\minilot\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoftables + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoftables} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} level commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@section@def@ + \if@secttoc@used@ + \if@mtc@toc@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0074]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\secttoc\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\tableofcontents + \MessageBreak + nor \string\faketableofcontents} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlof@used@ + \if@mtc@lof@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0072]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlof\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoffigures + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoffigures} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi + \if@sectlot@used@ + \if@mtc@lot@used@\else + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0073]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used \string\sectlot\space but not + \MessageBreak + \string\listoftables + \MessageBreak + nor \string\fakelistoftables} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check the number of mini-tables, in case of short extensions} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester le nombre de mini-tables, dans le cas de suffixes courts} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@checklongext} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@true} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} short extensions are used, +% you can use only 99~mini-tables of each kind. If more are created, the auxiliary +% files can be overwritten: the hundredth minitoc file \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| has its name truncated to +% \com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, which is already the tenth minitoc file. Thus, we need a hint to signal this situation. The +% code is rather simple, but the remedy is bitter and costly: either use a better operating system\,\footnote{On +% the long term, a good investment.}, either redesign the document. +% \or\relax +% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} les suffixes courts sont utilisés, +% vous ne pouvez utiliser que 99~mini-tables de chaque genre. Si davantage de +% mini-tables sont créées, les fichiers auxiliaires seront écrasés; le centième fichier minitoc \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| +% a son nom tronqué à\com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, qui est déjà le dixième fichier minitoc. Donc nous avons besoin d'une +% indication (\emph{hint}) pour signaler cette situation. Le code est assez simple, mais le remède est amer et +% coûteux: soit utiliser un meilleur système d'exploitation\,\footnote{Dans le long terme, un bon investissement.}, +% soit revoir la conception du document. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@hints@checklongext{% +\if@mtc@longext@ +\else + \if@mtc@part@def@ + \ifnum 99 < \value{ptc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0054]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used short extensions + \MessageBreak + and more than 99 parts (\arabic{ptc})} + \fi + \fi + \if@mtc@chapter@def@ + \ifnum 99 < \value{mtc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used short extensions + \MessageBreak + and more than 99 chapters (\arabic{mtc})} + \fi + \else + \if@mtc@section@def@ + \ifnum 99 < \value{stc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0055]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have used short extensions + \MessageBreak + and more than 99 sections (\arabic{stc})} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi} +\mtc@hints@checklongext +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0037} test if \pack{sectsty} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0037} testons si \pack{sectsty} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0037]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The sectsty package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{varsects} package}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0038} test if \pack{varsects} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0038} testons si \pack{varsects} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0038]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The varsects package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0086} test if \pack{fncychap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0086} testons si \pack{fncychap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0086]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The fncychap package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0092} test if \pack{hangcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0092} testons si \pack{hangcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0092]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The hangcaption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0087} test if \pack{quotchap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0087} testons si \pack{quotchap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0087]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The quotchap package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{romannum} package}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0088} test if \pack{romannum} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0088} testons si \pack{romannum} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0088]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The romannum package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0089} test if \pack{sfheaders} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0089} testons si \pack{sfheaders} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0089]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The sfheaders package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0090} test if \pack{alnumsec} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0090} testons si \pack{alnumsec} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0090]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The alnumsec package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{captcont} package}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0091} test if \pack{captcont} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0091} testons si \pack{captcont} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0091]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The captcont package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption} package}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption}}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0033} test if \pack{caption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+caption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0033} testons si \pack{caption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@captionLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0033]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The caption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption2} package}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption2}}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0034} test if \pack{caption2} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0034} testons si \pack{caption2} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@\else + \if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0034]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The caption2 package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{ccaption} package}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{ccaption}}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0035} test if \pack{ccaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0035} testons si \pack{ccaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0035]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The ccaption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{mcaption} package}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{mcaption}}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{W0036} test if \pack{mcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{W0036} testons si \pack{mcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@\else + \if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0036]{minitoc(hints)}% + {The mcaption package should be + \MessageBreak + loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} + \@mtc@hints@given@true + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{float} package}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{float}}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{float} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+float.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{float} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@floatLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the float package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the float package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{floatrow} package}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{floatrow}}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{floatrow} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{floatrow} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the floatrow package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the floatrow package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{trivfloat} package}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{trivfloat}}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{trivfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{trivfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the trivfloat package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the trivfloat package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{rotfloat} package}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{rotfloat}}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{rotfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{rotfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@\ + \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have loaded the rotfloat package; + \MessageBreak + please be aware that the minitoc package + \MessageBreak + facilities can not be used for new types + \MessageBreak + of floats defined by the rotfloat package\@gobble} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if empty mini-tables have been detected} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester si des mini-tables vides ont été détectées} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We test for each kind of mini-tables. +% \or\relax +% Nous testons pour chaque sorte de mini-tables. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For parttocs:\imess{W0046} +% \or\relax +% Pour les parttocs:\imess{W0046} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0046]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty parttocs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For partlofs:\imess{W0044} +% \or\relax +% Pour les partlofs:\imess{W0044} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0044]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty partlofs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For partlots:\imess{W0045} +% \or\relax +% Pour les partlots:\imess{W0045} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0045]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty partlots} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For minitocs:\imess{W0043} +% \or\relax +% Pour les minitocs:\imess{W0043} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0043]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty minitocs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For minilofs:\imess{W0041} +% \or\relax +% Pour les minilofs:\imess{W0041} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0041]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty minilofs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For minilots:\imess{W0042} +% \or\relax +% Pour les minilots:\imess{W0042} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0042]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty minilots} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For secttocs:\imess{W0049} +% \or\relax +% Pour les secttocs:\imess{W0049} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0049]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty secttocs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For sectlofs:\imess{W0047} +% \or\relax +% Pour les sectlofs:\imess{W0047} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0047]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty sectlofs} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For sectlots:\imess{W0048} +% \or\relax +% Pour les sectlots:\imess{W0048} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0048]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have attempted to insert + \MessageBreak + empty sectlots} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG +% \subsubsection{Check if obsolete commands have been used} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester si des commandes obsolètes ont été utilisées} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG +% This hint is just a reminder if you have used obsolete commands, which are also signalled +% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. +% \or\relax +% Ce \emph{hint} est juste un rappel dans le cas où vous auriez utilisé des commandes obsolètes, qui sont aussi +% signalées dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Obsolete macro \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051} +% \or\relax +% Macro obsolète \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@firstpartis@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0051]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command: \string\firstpartis} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Obsolete macro \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050} +% \or\relax +% Macro obsolète \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@firstchapteris@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0050]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command: \string\firstchapteris} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Obsolete macro \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052} +% \or\relax +% Macro obsolète \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052} +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@firstsectionis@used@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0052]{minitoc(hints)}% + {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) + \MessageBreak + command: \string\firstsectionis} + \@mtc@hints@given@true +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsubsection{Check if some hints have been written} +% \or\relax +% \subsubsection{Tester si des \emph{hints} ont été écrits} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} come at the end of the third part of the \optd{hints} option: +% if problems have been detected, a warning is displayed; +% the warning is not displayed but only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file if no problems have been detected. +% And we terminate the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro by a closing brace. +% \or\relax +% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} arrivons à~la fin de la troisième partie de l'option \optd{hints}: +% si des problèmes ont été détectés, un +% avertissement est affiché; cet avertissement n'est pas affiché mais seulement écrit dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} si aucun problème n'a été détecté. Et nous terminons la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} +% par une accolade fermante. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@hints@given@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0024]{minitoc(hints)}% + {Some hints have been written + \MessageBreak + in the \jobname.log file} +\else + \mtcPackageInfo[I0019]{minitoc(hints)}% + {No hints have been written + \MessageBreak + in the \jobname.log file.\@gobble} +\fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Processing of options}\label{s+code+processing.options} +% \or\relax +% \section{Traitement des options}\label{s+code+processing.options} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, if possible, we apply the default language option, \loptd{english}: +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, si possible, nous exécutons l'option de langue par défaut, \loptd{english}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \InputIfFileExists{english.mld}% + {\ExecuteOptions{english}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Else,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} we signal a severe error and provide the missing default titles: +% \else\relax +% Sinon,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} nous signalons une erreur sévère et fournissons les titres par défaut manquants: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + {\mtcPackageError[E0036]{minitoc}% + {Your minitoc installation is incomplete. + \MessageBreak + The minitoc language object file (.mld), + \MessageBreak + english.mld is not found. + \MessageBreak + We will try to continue with default values}% + {See the minitoc documentation. + \MessageBreak + Please fix your minitoc installation. + \MessageBreak + Press to continue}% + \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}% + \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}% + \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}% + \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}% + \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}% + \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}% + \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then, we execute all requested options: for most options, it is just setting a flag, or loading a file for the +% language options. +% \or\relax +% Puis nous exécutons toutes les options demandées; pour la plupart des options, ceci consiste seulement +% à~positionner un indicateur, ou à~charger un fichier pour les options de langue. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProcessOptions* +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We now examine the flags for some options and execute the necessary actions. +% \or\relax +% Nous examinons maintenant les indicateurs pour certaines options et exécutons les actions nécessaires. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} +% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \opt{insection} option, we load the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its options +% \optp{verbose}{placeins} and \optp{section}{placeins}, after the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput} +% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); the correct loading is verified: +% \or\relax +% Pour l'option \opt{insection}, nous chargeons +% le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options +% \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}, après le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} +% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}); le chargement correct est vérifié: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@ss@insection@ + \RequirePackage{flafter}[2000/07/23]% + \RequirePackage[section,verbose]{placeins}[2005/04/18]% + \@ifpackageloaded{placeins}% + {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@true}{\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{notoccite} option}\iopt{notoccite} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} +% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \opt{notoccite} option, we just load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}: +% \or\relax +% Pour l'option \opt{notoccite}, nous chargeons simplement le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@notoccite@ + \RequirePackage{notoccite}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{listfiles} option}\ioptd{listfiles} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{listfiles}}\ioptd{listfiles} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@long} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@short} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addtomaf} +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{I0009} define the \com{mtc@maf} macro which closes \com{tf@mtc} +% and reopens it to write into the file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% It calls \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} (long or short extensions), then +% closes \com{tf@mtc}. \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} writes the names of the existing auxiliary +% files using decrementing loops on the associated counters, and includes \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} in the list +% (but \emph{not} the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Some users could made a cleanup using this file as a list of +% files to delete, so it must not be in the list.} file). +% We must also check the existence of \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} if long extensions are used. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{I0009} définissons la macro \com{mtc@maf} qui ferme \com{tf@mtc} +% puis le ré-ouvre pour écrire dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. +% Elle appelle \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} (suffixes longs ou courts), puis ferme \com{tf@mtc}. +% \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} écrit les noms des fichiers auxiliaires existants en utilisant des boucles +% par ordre décroissant sur les compteurs associés, et inclut \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} dans la liste +% (mais \emph{pas} le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Certains utilisateurs pourraient faire un nettoyage +% en utilisant ce fichier comme liste des fichiers à~détruire, donc il ne doit pas être dans la liste.}). +% Nous devons aussi tester l'existence de \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} si les suffixes longs sont utilisés. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@maf{% + \mtcPackageInfo[I0009]{minitoc}% + {Listing minitoc auxiliary files. + \MessageBreak + Creating the \jobname.maf file\@gobble} + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc + \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.maf + \if@mtc@longext@\mtc@maf@long\else\mtc@maf@short\fi + \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} +\def\mtc@addtomaf#1{% + \IfFileExists{#1}{\immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}}{}} +\def\mtc@maf@long{% + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc0} +\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.ptc\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plf\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plt\arabic{ptc}} + \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{% + \loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlf\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlt\arabic{mtc}} + \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.stc\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slf\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slt\arabic{stc}} + \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}} +\def\mtc@maf@short{% + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc} +\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.P\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.G\arabic{ptc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.U\arabic{ptc}} + \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.M\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.F\arabic{mtc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.T\arabic{mtc}} + \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat} +\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.S\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.H\arabic{stc}} + \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.V\arabic{stc}} + \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% If this option is active, we call \com{mtc@maf} in an \com{AtEndDocument} block. +% \or\relax +% Si cette option est active, nous appellons \com{mtc@maf} dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@listfiles@{\AtEndDocument{\mtc@maf}}\else\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \optd{hints} option, we set its first part in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block and its third (last) part +% in an \com{AtEndDocument} block: +% \or\relax +% Pour l'option \optd{hints}, nous plaçons sa première partie dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et sa +% troisième (dernière) partie dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@mtc@hints@ + \AtBeginDocument{\mtc@hints@begindoc}% + \AtEndDocument{\mtc@hints@enddoc}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \subsection{Saving the sectionning commands} +% \or\relax +% \subsection{Sauvegarde des commandes de sectionnement} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And, at least, we save the definitions of sectionning commands (and of their unstarred and starred branches), +% for comparaisons (this is a part of the \optd{hints} option executed in the preamble): +% \or\relax +% Et, enfin, nous sauvegardons les définitions des commandes de sectionnement (avec leurs branches non étoilées et +% étoilées), pour des comparaisons (ceci est une partie de l'option \optd{hints} exécutée dans le préambule). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} +% \begin{macro}{\part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part} +% \begin{macro}{\@part} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart} +% \begin{macro}{\@spart} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \com{part} command: +% \or\relax +% Pour la commande \com{part}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\mtc@hints@part\part + \let\mtc@hints@@part\@part + \let\mtc@hints@@spart\@spart} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \vspace{3\baselineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter} +% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \com{chapter} command: +% \or\relax +% Pour la commande \com{chapter}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\mtc@hints@chapter\chapter + \let\mtc@hints@@chapter\@chapter + \let\mtc@hints@@schapter\@schapter} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \vspace{3\baselineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For the \com{section} command: +% \or\relax +% Pour la commande \com{section}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\mtc@hints@section\section + \let\mtc@hints@@sect\@sect + \let\mtc@hints@@ssect\@ssect} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Trapping the undefined preparation and insertion commands}\label{s+undef+trap} +% \or\relax +% \section{Interception des commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies}\label{s+undef+trap} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@classck} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% It\imess{E0037} may happen that you use a preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}) or an insertion command +% (like \com{dominitoc}) in a document using a class where that command is not available (like +% \class{article}). To get a better diagnostic for such errors, we intercept such commands by providing a default +% definition which just emits an error message. These default definitions are made in an \com{AtBeginDocument} +% block. +% \or\relax +% Il\imess{E0037} peut arriver que vous utilisiez une commande de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc}) ou une commande +% d'insertion (comme \com{dominitoc}) dans un document utilisant une classe pour laquelle cette commande n'est pas +% disponible (comme \class{article}). Pour obtenir un meilleur diagnostic pour ce type d'erreurs, nous interceptons de +% telles commandes en fournissant une définition par défaut qui émet simplement un message d'erreur. Ces définitions +% par défaut sont faites dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtc@classck#1{% + \mtcPackageError[E0037]{minitoc}% + {The \csname #1\endcsname\space command is incompatible + \MessageBreak + with the document class}% + {Correct the source code. + \MessageBreak + Type and rerun LaTeX}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% An \com{AtBeginDocument} bloc: +% \or\relax +% Un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part-level preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes de préparation au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\doparttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{doparttoc}}% + \providecommand{\dopartlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlof}}% + \providecommand{\dopartlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter-level preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes de préparation au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\dominitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominitoc}}% + \providecommand{\dominilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilof}}% + \providecommand{\dominilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section-level preparation commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes de préparation au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\dosecttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosecttoc}}% + \providecommand{\dosectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlof}}% + \providecommand{\dosectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Part-level insertion commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes d'insertion au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\parttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{parttoc}}% + \providecommand{\partlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlof}}% + \providecommand{\partlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Chapter-level insertion commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes d'insertion au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\minitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minitoc}}% + \providecommand{\minilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilof}}% + \providecommand{\minilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilot}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Section-level insertion commands: +% \or\relax +% Commandes d'insertion au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\secttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{secttoc}}% + \providecommand{\sectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlof}}% + \providecommand{\sectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlot}}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% ^^A \vspace{3\baselineskip} +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{19.45525292mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.727626459mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And +% the package is terminated. +% \or\relax +% Et +% le paquetage est terminé. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{The \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} file}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \or\relax +% \section{Le fichier \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\jobname} +% \begin{macro}{\input} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This short file is necessary to create the french documentation. Its rôle is to +% set \com{jobname} to \texttt{minitoc-fr} in place of \texttt{minitoc}. As \xfile{minitoc.ins} +% generates the \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} and \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} files which set a language number \com{LANG}, +% and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} reads then the \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan} file, the documentation can be in several languages +% (english and french here) in +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, the language being selected by \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} +% \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. The \com{relax} primitives are necessary to avoid bad surprises. +% \or\relax +% Ce court fichier est nécessaire pour créer la documentation en français. Son rôle est de forcer \com{jobname} +% à~\texttt{minitoc-fr} au lieu de \texttt{minitoc}. Comme \xfile{minitoc.ins} engendre les fichiers +% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} et \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} qui établissent un numéro de langue \com{LANG}, et comme +% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} lit alors le fichier \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan}, la documentation peut être en plusieurs langues +% (anglais et français ici) dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, la langue étant choisie par des constructions +% \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{fi}. Les primitives +% \com{relax} sont nécessaires pour éviter de mauvaises surprises. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*minitoc-fr> +\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}% + [2018/07/12 minitoc v62 french documentation start file] +\input{minitoc.dtx} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Why \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \or\relax +% \section{Pourquoi \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requires that the user inserts many commands in the source +% code of her/his document, and not only into the preamble of the document. Hence the concept of a replacement +% package, \pack{mtcoff} (means ``minitoc off''), which substitutes to all commands and environments of the +% \upack{minitoc} package some alternative commands and environments with the same names and syntaxes, but doing nothing +% (except emitting some harmless warnings, for special cases). This way, to turn off easily the \upack{minitoc} package, +% you just have to write, in the preamble of your document, something like: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requiert que l'utilisateur insère de nombreuses commandes +% dans le code source de son document, mais pas seulement dans le préambule du document. D'où le concept d'un +% paquetage de remplacement, \pack{mtcoff} (c'est-à-dire, «~\emph{minitoc off}~»), qui substitue à~toutes les +% commandes et à~tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc} d'autres commandes et environnements ayant +% les mêmes noms et syntaxes, mais ne faisant rien (sauf émettre quelques avertissements bénins, dans des cas +% spéciaux). De cette manière, pour inhiber facilement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il vous suffit d'écrire, +% dans le préambule de votre document, quelque chose comme ceci: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|\\ +% \verb|%\usepackage{mtcoff}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% then the \upack{minitoc} package is activated with the specified options. If you modify this two lines this way: +% \or\relax +% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est activé avec les options spécifiées. Si vous modifiez ces deux lignes de +% la manière suivante: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \verb|%\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\ +% \com{usepackage}\verb|{mtcoff}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% then the \upack{minitoc} package is desactivated and all its commands and environments are ignored. This is much +% easier, faster and safer than commenting out all the commands and environments of \upack{minitoc}. Moreover, +% this operation is reversible. +% \or\relax +% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est désactivé et toutes ses commandes et environnements sont ignorés. Ceci +% est beaucoup plus facile, rapide et sûr que de mettre en commentaire toutes les commandes et environnements +% de \upack{minitoc}. De plus, cette opération est réversible. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Identification of the package}\label{s+mtcoff+ident} +% \or\relax +% \section{Identification du paquetage}\label{s+mtcoff+ident} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat} +% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% First, we identify the package and check the version of \LaTeX\,\footnote{This checking is not really useful for +% the \pack{mtcoff} package itself, but it is good to check that your version of \LaTeX\ is not too old to +% support \upack{minitoc}.}; we need the \pack{mtcmess} package to write messages with unique identifiers. +% \or\relax +% Tout d'abord, nous identifions le paquetage et vérifions la version de \LaTeX\,\footnote{Cette vérification +% n'est pas vraiment utile pour le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} lui-même, mais il est bon de vérifier que votre +% version de \LaTeX\ n'est pas trop ancienne pour supporter \upack{minitoc}.}; nous avons besoin du paquetage +% \pack{mtcmess} pour écrire des messages avec des identificateurs uniques. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtcoff> +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% +\ProvidesPackage{mtcoff}[2018/07/12 v62 The mtcoff package] +\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking counters and dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simuler compteurs et dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\count@} +% \begin{macro}{\dimen@} +% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} +% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% As \upack{minitoc} declares some counters and dimensions registers, we fake them using \com{count@} or +% \com{dimen@}. For \com{mtcskipamount}, we must use its default definition, \com{bigskipamount}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Puisque \upack{minitoc} déclare quelques registres compteurs et dimensions, nous les simulons en utilisant +% \com{count@} ou \com{dimen@}. Pour \com{mtcskipamount}, nous utilisons sa définition par défaut, +% \com{bigskipamount}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\c@minitocdepth\count@ +\let\mtcindent\dimen@ +\let\mtcskipamount\bigskipamount +\let\c@parttocdepth\count@ +\let\ptcindent\dimen@ +\let\c@secttocdepth\count@ +\let\stcindent\dimen@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc} +% \begin{macro}{\c@stc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The basic mini-table counters are provided by \com{count@}: +% \or\relax +% Les compteurs de mini-tables basiques sont fournis par \com{count@}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\c@mtc\count@ \let\c@ptc\count@ \let\c@stc\count@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The gaps before and after parttoc heads receive their default values: +% \or\relax +% Les intervalles avant et après les têtes de parttocs reçoivent leurs valeurs par défaut: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} \def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{F0008} must define the macros for the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule. +% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{F0008} devons définir les macros pour les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets +% horizontaux inférieurs. Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Nous devons émettre un avertissement si l'une de ces +% macros est utilisée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\kernafterparttoc{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterparttoc + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlof{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterpartlof + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterpartlot{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterpartlot + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\kernaftersecttoc{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernaftersecttoc + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlof{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernaftersectlof + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernaftersectlot{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernaftersectlot + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\kernafterminitoc{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterminitoc + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% + \def\kernafterminilof{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterminilof + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}% + \def\kernafterminilot{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\kernafterminilot + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We\imess{F0009} must define the macros for the horizontal offsets of the mini-tables. +% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used. +% \or\relax +% Nous\imess{F0009} devons définir les macros pour les corrections horizontales des mini-tables. +% Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Un avertissement sera émis si l'une de ces macros est utilisée. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{part}{}{% + \def\ptcoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\ptcoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\plfoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\plfoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\pltoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\pltoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + }% + \@ifundefined{chapter}{% + \@ifundefined{section}{}% + {% + \def\stcoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\stcoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\slfoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\slfoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\sltoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\sltoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + }% + }% + {% + \def\mtcoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\mtcoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\slfoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\slfoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + \def\mltoffset{% + \mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% + {The macro \string\mltoffset + \MessageBreak + should not be used out of context + \MessageBreak}% + 0pt}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking simple commands}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simuler les commandes simples}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} +% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some user commands are easy to fake: +% \or\relax +% Certaines commandes utilisateur sont faciles à~simuler: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\faketableofcontents\relax +\let\fakelistoffigures\relax +\let\fakelistoftables\relax +\let\mtcskip\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Basic adjustment commands are also easy: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes d'ajustement de base sont aussi faciles: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\relax} +\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\relax} +\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\relax} +\let\decrementptc\relax \let\incrementptc\relax +\let\decrementmtc\relax \let\incrementmtc\relax +\let\decrementstc\relax \let\incrementstc\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\partend} +% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} +% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} +% \begin{macro}{\sectend} +% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The following commands are not directly called by the user, in normal circumstances, but must be faked: +% \or\relax +% Les commandes suivantes ne sont pas appelées directement par l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales, +% mais il faut les simuler: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\partend\relax \let\partbegin\relax +\let\chapterend\relax \let\chapterbegin\relax +\let\sectend\relax \let\sectbegin\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking commands with one optional argument}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simulation des commandes ayant un \texorpdfstring{\mbox{argument}}{argument} optionnel}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The user commands with an optional argument are faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get +% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. +% \or\relax +% Les commandes utilisateur ayant un argument optionnel sont simulées en utilisant la macro interne \LaTeX{} +% \com{@ifnextchar} (pour prendre l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\partlof} +% \begin{macro}{\partlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} +% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} +% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\minilof} +% \begin{macro}{\minilot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Command \com{mtcprepare}: +% \or\relax +% Commande \com{mtcprepare}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Faking flags}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags} +% \or\relax +% \section{Simulation d'indicateurs}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We defines flags which were true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside. +% \or\relax +% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui étaient vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux +% à~l'extérieur. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse% +\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse% +\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse% +\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse% +\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse% +\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse% +\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse% +\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse% +\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the internal commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo} +% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} +% \begin{macro}{\appendixmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\psect} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\xpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} +% \begin{macro}{\xsect} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We need also to disable some \upack{minitoc} commands, with \com{relax} (macros with no argument) or +% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros with two arguments): +% \or\relax +% Il nous faut aussi inhiber quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc}, avec \com{relax} (macros sans argument) ou +% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros avec arguments): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\tf@mtc\count@ +\let\mtc@string\relax +\let\appendixmtc\relax +\let\l@xchapter\@gobbletwo +\let\xchapter\relax +\let\pchapter\relax +\let\psect\relax +\let\l@xpart\@gobbletwo +\let\xpart\relax +\let\l@xsect\@gobbletwo +\let\xsect\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the font commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Désactivation des commandes de fonte}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\empty} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We disable the \upack{minitoc} font commands (like \com{mtcSSfont}) with \com{empty}, because some users +% might have used: +% \or\relax +% Nous désactivons commandes de fonte de \upack{minitoc} (telles que \com{mtcSSfont}) avec \com{empty}, car +% certains utilisateurs pourraient avoir utilisé: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{mtcSSfont}\verb|}{...}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. +% \or\relax +% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\plffont} +% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Fonts for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ptcfont\empty +\let\ptcCfont\empty +\let\ptcSfont\empty +\let\ptcSSfont\empty +\let\ptcSSSfont\empty +\let\ptcPfont\empty +\let\ptcSPfont\empty +\let\plffont\empty +\let\plfSfont\empty +\let\pltfont\empty +\let\pltSfont\empty +\let\ptifont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Fonts for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcfont\empty +\let\mtcSfont\empty +\let\mtcSSfont\empty +\let\mtcSSSfont\empty +\let\mtcPfont\empty +\let\mtcSPfont\empty +\let\mlffont\empty +\let\mlfSfont\empty +\let\mltfont\empty +\let\mltSfont\empty +\let\mtifont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} +% \begin{macro}{\slffont} +% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} +% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} +% \begin{macro}{\stifont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Fonts for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\stcfont\empty +\let\stcSSfont\empty +\let\stcSSSfont\empty +\let\stcPfont\empty +\let\stcSPfont\empty +\let\slffont\empty +\let\slfSfont\empty +\let\sltfont\empty +\let\sltSfont\empty +\let\stifont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Font for ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} lines: +% \or\relax +% Fonte pour les lignes de «~pause-café~»{\myCoffeecup}: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\coffeefont\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands use two or three mandatory arguments: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes utilisent deux ou trois arguments obligatoires: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcsetdepth\@gobbletwo +\let\mtcsetoffset\@gobbletwo +\def\mtcsetfont#1#2#3{\empty} +\let\mtcsettitlefont\@gobbletwo +\let\mtcsettitle\@gobbletwo +\def\mtcsetformat#1#2#3{\empty} +\def\mtcsetfeature#1#2#3{\empty} +\let\mtcsetpagenumbers\@gobbletwo +\let\mtcsetrules\@gobbletwo +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcpolymXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetpolym.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We simulate these commands by keeping only the fourth argument; they must still be robust. +% \or\relax +% Nous simulons ces commandes en ne gardant que le quatrième argument; elles doivent encore être robustes. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{{#4}} +% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{{#4}} +% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{{#4}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the new \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des nouvelles commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph} +% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \upack{minitoc} package defines the \verb|\l@starXXX| commands to format TOC entries for starred sectionning +% commands. We reset to the unstarred version, when necessary: +% \or\relax +% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} définit les commandes \verb|\l@starXXX| pour la mise en forme d'entrées de la +% table des matières pour des commandes de sectionnement étoilées. Nous revenons à~la version non étoilée, lorsque +% cela est nécessaire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} +\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} +\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} +\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} +\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} +\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} +\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Ignore the obsolete commands}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Ignorer les commandes obsolètes}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} +% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} +% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} +% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We just ignore the obsolete commands (with one mandatory argument): +% \or\relax +% Nous ignorons simplement les commandes obsolètes (qui ont un seul argument, obligatoire): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\firstpartis\@gobble \let\firstchapteris\@gobble \let\firstsectionis\@gobble +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} and \ucom{mtcloadmlo} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} et \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These command have one mandatory argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes ont un seul argument, obligatoire: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcselectlanguage\@gobble \let\mtcloadmlo\@gobble +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{16} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the commands for the horizontal rules}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\stcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule} +% \begin{macro}{\plfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\slfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule} +% \begin{macro}{\pltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\mltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\sltrule} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule} +% % \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands have no argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ptcrule\relax +\let\noptcrule\relax +\let\mtcrule\relax +\let\nomtcrule\relax +\let\stcrule\relax +\let\nostcrule\relax +\let\plfrule\relax +\let\noplfrule\relax +\let\mlfrule\relax +\let\nomlfrule\relax +\let\slfrule\relax +\let\noslfrule\relax +\let\pltrule\relax +\let\nopltrule\relax +\let\mltrule\relax +\let\nomltrule\relax +\let\sltrule\relax +\let\nosltrule\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{15} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the commands for the page numbers}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les numéros de page}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} +% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These commands have no argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtcpagenumbers\relax +\let\nomtcpagenumbers\relax +\let\stcpagenumbers\relax +\let\nostcpagenumbers\relax +\let\ptcpagenumbers\relax +\let\noptcpagenumbers\relax +\let\mlfpagenumbers\relax +\let\nomlfpagenumbers\relax +\let\slfpagenumbers\relax +\let\noslfpagenumbers\relax +\let\plfpagenumbers\relax +\let\noplfpagenumbers\relax +\let\mltpagenumbers\relax +\let\nomltpagenumbers\relax +\let\sltpagenumbers\relax +\let\nosltpagenumbers\relax +\let\pltpagenumbers\relax +\let\nopltpagenumbers\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the mini-table features commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We disable the commands for features (like \com{beforeparttoc}) with \com{empty}, because some users may have +% used: +% \or\relax +% Nous inhibons les commandes pour les dispositifs (telles que \com{beforeparttoc}) avec \com{empty}, car +% certains utilisateurs ont pu avoir fait: +% \fi +% \begin{verse} +% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{beforeparttoc}\verb|}{...}| +% \end{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. These commands have no argument, +% \or\relax +% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument, +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for part level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau partie: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforeparttoc\empty +\let\beforepartlof\empty +\let\beforepartlot\empty +\let\afterparttoc\empty +\let\afterpartlof\empty +\let\afterpartlot\empty +\let\openparttoc\empty +\let\openpartlof\empty +\let\openpartlot\empty +\let\closeparttoc\empty +\let\closepartlof\empty +\let\closepartlot\empty +\let\thispageparttocstyle\empty +\let\thispagepartlofstyle\empty +\let\thispagepartlotstyle\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} +% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforeminitoc\empty +\let\beforeminilof\empty +\let\beforeminilot\empty +\let\afterminitoc\empty +\let\afterminilof\empty +\let\afterminilot\empty +\let\openminitoc\empty +\let\openminilof\empty +\let\openminilot\empty +\let\closeminitoc\empty +\let\closeminilof\empty +\let\closeminilot\empty +\let\thispageminitocstyle\empty +\let\thispageminilofstyle\empty +\let\thispageminilotstyle\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} +% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Commands for section level mini-tables: +% \or\relax +% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\beforesecttoc\empty +\let\beforesectlof\empty +\let\beforesectlot\empty +\let\aftersecttoc\empty +\let\aftersectlof\empty +\let\aftersectlot\empty +\let\opensecttoc\empty +\let\opensectlof\empty +\let\opensectlot\empty +\let\closesecttoc\empty +\let\closesectlof\empty +\let\closesectlot\empty +\let\thispagesecttocstyle\empty +\let\thispagesectlofstyle\empty +\let\thispagesectlotstyle\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling miscellaneous flags and commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de divers indicateurs et commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} +% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} +% \begin{macro}{\l@listof} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \begin{macro}{\chapter} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are some flags and commands that it is wise to declare: +% \or\relax +% Il y~a quelques indicateurs et commandes qu'il est bon de déclarer: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@mtc@longext@ \@mtc@longext@true +\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse +\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse +\newif\ifundottedmtc \undottedmtcfalse +\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse +\let\l@listof\chapter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Caution for some commands}\label{s+mtcoff+caution} +% \or\relax +% \section{Précaution pour certaines commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+caution} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Some\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} \upack{minitoc} commands should eventually be replaced if you decide to \emph{definitely} +% stop using the \upack{minitoc} package with your document. So we declare a flag and an \com{AtEndDocument} block to signal +% that you have used these commands: +% \or\relax +% Certaines\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} commandes de \upack{minitoc} devraient éventuellement être remplacées si vous décidez +% d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec votre document. Donc nous déclarons un +% indicateur et un bloc \com{AtEndDocument} pour signaler que vous avez utilisé ces commandes: +% \fi +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifmtcoffwarn@ \mtcoffwarn@false +\AtEndDocument{\ifmtcoffwarn@ + \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[F0007]{mtcoff}% + {You should scan (backwards) your .log + \MessageBreak + file to find some commands needing + \MessageBreak + to be replaced if you decide to + \MessageBreak + DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this + \MessageBreak + document. It is more wise to keep the + \MessageBreak + \string\usepackage\space lines for minitoc and mtcoff + \MessageBreak + and to comment out only one of them} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ck} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Then\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} these commands are disabled +% and they set the flag and give a warning (useful to get the line number): +% \or\relax +% Puis\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} ces commandes sont inhibées +% de manière qu'elles positionnent l'indicateur et donnent un avertissement (ce +% qui est utile pour avoir le numéro de ligne): +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0004]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced + \MessageBreak + by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...} + \MessageBreak} +\def\mtc@ck{#1} +\ifx\mtc@ck\empty +\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% +\fi} +\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0006]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced + \MessageBreak + by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...} + \MessageBreak} +\def\mtc@ck{#1} +\ifx\mtc@ck\empty +\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% +\fi} +\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0005]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced + \MessageBreak + by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...} + \MessageBreak} +\def\mtc@ck{#1} +\ifx\mtc@ck\empty +\else + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling commands for ``coffee''}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les <<~pauses-café~>>}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline} +% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} +% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We disable the commands relative to ``coffee'' lines, and the specific version of contents lines without leaders +% of dots: +% \or\relax +% Nous inhibons les commandes concernant les lignes de contenu pour les «~pauses-café~», ainsi que la version +% spécifique de ligne de contenu sans points de conduite: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{\relax} +\let\coffeeline\@gobble +\let\l@coffee\relax +\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\relax} +\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.} environments}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs} +% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs} +% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% \fi +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} +% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These environments accept one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Ces environnements acceptent un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} +\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} +\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} and \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth} internal commands} +% \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth} internal commands} +% \or\relax +% ^^A \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} et \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth}} +% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth}} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelofdepth} +% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelotdepth} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% We must inhibit these commands, inserted in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files by the +% hiding commands. So we will not have to delete these files when switching from the \upack{minitoc} package to +% the \pack{mtcoff} package. +% \or\relax +% Nous devons inhiber ces commandes, insérées dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} par +% les commandes de masquage. Ainsi nous n'aurons pas à~détruire ces fichiers lors du passage du paquetage +% \upack{minitoc} au paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\mtc@savetocdepth\empty +\let\mtc@savelofdepth\empty +\let\mtc@savelotdepth\empty +\let\mtc@restoretocdepth\empty +\let\mtc@restorelofdepth\empty +\let\mtc@restorelotdepth\empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixglossary} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixglossary}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixindex} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixindex}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This command accepts one optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][]{\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Disabling the \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands} +% \or\relax +% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} +% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commands should be replaced by standard commands, +% but \pack{mtcoff} simulates and gives a warning, which will be reminded at the end of document: +% \or\relax +% Ces\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commandes devraient être remplacées par des commandes standard, +% mais \pack{mtcoff} les simule et donne un avertissement, qui sera rappelé en fin de document: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\addstarredpart#1{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0002]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\addstarredpart{...} should be replaced by + \MessageBreak + \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...} + \MessageBreak} + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}} +\def\addstarredchapter#1{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0001]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced by + \MessageBreak + \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...} + \MessageBreak} + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}} +\def\addstarredsection#1{\mtcoffwarn@true + \mtcPackageWarning[F0003]{mtcoff}% + {\protect\addstarredsection{...} should be replaced by + \MessageBreak + \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...} + \MessageBreak} + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% And the \pack{mtcoff} package is terminated. +% \or\relax +% Et le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} est terminé. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcmess} package}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcmess}}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo} +% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarning} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarning} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarningNoLine} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} +% \begin{macro}{\PackageError} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% To make easier the search of a message in the documentation\footnote{For instance, using the search facility of some PDF +% reader utility.}, we will assign an unique identifier to each +% message of the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} packages. As the standard commands for such messages do not +% include this feature, we make extended versions, with the same syntax, plus a first optional argument: +% \or\relax +% Pour faciliter la recherche d'un message dans la documentation\,\footnote{Par exemple, en utilisant le système de +% recherche d'un utilitaire de lecture de fichier PDF.}, nous attribuerons un identificateur unique à~chaque +% message des paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}. Puisque les commandes standard pour de tels messages +% n'offrent pas ce dispositif, nous en faisons des versions étendues, avec la même syntaxe, plus un premier argument +% optionnel: +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtcmess> +\ProvidesPackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageInfo}[3][]% + {\PackageInfo{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarning}[3][]% + {\PackageWarning{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}[3][]% + {\PackageWarningNoLine{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% +\newcommand{\mtcPackageError}[4][]% + {\PackageError{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}{#4}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Hence the first line of the message will contain the package name and the unique identifier of the message. +% \or\relax +% Donc la première ligne du message contiendra le nom du paquetage et l'identificateur unique du message. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% These macros are defined in a separate package because they are used by at least two packages +% (\upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}) and because they could be useful for other packages. +% \or\relax +% Ces macros sont définies dans un paquetage distinct car elles sont utilisées par au moins deux paquetages +% (\upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}) et parce qu'elles pourraient être utiles pour d'autres paquetages. +% \fi +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Patch for the \uclass{memoir} class}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code must be loaded to fix an \emph{incompatibility} of the \upack{minitoc} package +% with some recent versions of the \class{memoir} class. +% This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version of \class{memoir}. +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Correction pour la classe \uclass{memoir}}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} +% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code doit être chargé pour corriger une \emph{incompatibilité} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% avec certaines versions récentes de la classe \class{memoir}. +% Cette correction n'est plus nécessaire après la version datée 2005/09/25 de \class{memoir}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mtcpatchmem> +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]% +\ProvidesPackage{mtcpatchmem}% + [2018/07/12 v62 package mtcpatchmem] +\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] +\mtcPackageInfo[M0001]{mtcpatchmem}% + {mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class\@gobble} +\renewcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{% + \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg + \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}% +} +\def\@chapter[#1]#2{% +% if |\ch@pt@c| is empty, no [ was found at all. Use |#2| as +% entry for all fields. + \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty + \def\f@rtoc{#2}% + \def\f@rhdr{#2}% + \else +% otherwise at least one [ was found. If |#1| is empty then only +% one was found. + \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c + \else + \def\f@rhdr{#1}% + \fi + \fi + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax + \if@mainmatter + \refstepcounter{chapter}% + \fi + \fi + \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}% + \ifartopt + \@makechapterhead{#2}% + \@afterheading + \else + \insertchapterspace + \if@twocolumn + \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% + \else + \@makechapterhead{#2}% + \fi + \@afterheading + \fi + \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax + \if@mainmatter + \ifanappendix + \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{% + \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}% + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{% + \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}% + \fi + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}% + \fi + \else + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}% + \fi + \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi +} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter{Language definition (\usuffix{.mld}) and object (\usuffix{.mlo}) files}\label{c+code+mld.files}% +% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo} +% \or\relax +% \chapter{Fichiers de définition (\usuffix{.mld}) et objets (\usuffix{.mlo}) de langue}\label{c+code+mld.files}% +% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo} +% \fi +% \minitoc +% \mtcskip +% \lneed{7} +% ^^A MINILOF BLOCK WAS HERE +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \mtcindent=0pt +% \minilof +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\empty} +% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}% +% \raggedcolumns +% \mtcskip + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + + + +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{Overview} +% This chapter shows the code of each \suffix{.mld} file. A \suffix{.mld} file is a \emph{minitoc language +% definition} file, which defines the titles of the mini-tables for a given language. It contains often some +% comments about its origin, if you need further details. +% +% \lneed{6} +% For some languages, I~have added a map (and a flag) of the country or area where the language is spoken, if it is not +% trivial. The origin of each map is given by an URL to the graphic file or to the WEB page where I~found it. +% Note that the~\cite{tlfq} and~\cite{LMP} Web sites are useful sources. Maps from~\cite{LMP} are under the +% Creative Commons License, see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB}. +% The site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} allows to look at the maps of many countries (but not of France!). +% The Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection~\cite{texasmaps} (The University of Texas at Austin, +% \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contains countless maps. +% +% \reversemarginpar +% Many +% free maps were also found by a search in the vast Wikipedia +% (i.e. \url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org}, +% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.). +% If you are curious and brave, you can also find many +% maps and documents about Eastern Europa and about Asia at \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; that site give many +% historical informations. +% +% \lneed{8} +% \normalmarginpar +% A \suffix{.mld} file is loaded either via a +% package option in the \com{usepackage} command +% for the \upack{minitoc} package (or a global option for the document), either via the command: +% \or\relax +% \section{Généralités} +% Ce chapitre montre le code de chaque fichier \suffix{.mld}. Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est un fichier +% de définition de langue pour minitoc (\emph{minitoc language definition file}), qui définit les titres des +% mini-tables pour une langue donnée. Il contient souvent quelques informations sur son origine, si vous avez +% besoin de plus de détails. +% +% \lneed{6} +% \reversemarginpar +% Pour certaines langues, j'ai ajouté une carte (et un drapeau) du pays ou des zones où la langue est parlée, si ce n'est pas trivial. +% L'origine de chaque carte est donnée par un URL vers le fichier graphique ou vers la page où je l'ai trouvée. +% Notez que les sites Web~\cite{tlfq} et~\cite{LMP} sont des sources utiles. Les cartes de~\cite{LMP} sont sous la +% \emph{Creative Commons License}, voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr}. +% +% Le site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} permet de regarder les cartes de nombreux +% pays (mais pas de la France!). La \emph{Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection}~\cite{texasmaps} (Université du Texas +% à~Austin, \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contient d'innombrables cartes. +% +% \lneed{7} +% De +% nombreuses cartes publiques proviennent aussi de la Wikipédia ({\froff\url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org}, +% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.}). +% Si vous êtes curieux et courageux, vous pourrez aussi trouver de nombreux documents et cartes concernant l'Europe de +% l'Est et l'Asie sur le site \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; il donne de nombreuses informations historiques. +% +% \lneed{8} +% \normalmarginpar +% Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est chargé soit via une option du paquetage +% dans la commande \com{usepackage} pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% (ou une option globale pour le document), +% soit via la commande: +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \begin{verse} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{language} +% \or\relax +% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{langue} +% \fi +% \end{verse} +% \end{macro} +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} +% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Each \suffix{.mld} file must define the nine following commands (for the mini-tables of contents, +% mini-lists of figures and mini-lists of tables, at the part, chapter and section levels): +% \or\relax +% Chaque fichier \suffix{.mld} doit définir les neuf commandes suivantes (pour les mini-tables des +% matières, les mini-listes des figures et les mini-listes des tableaux, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section): +% \fi +% \begin{multicols}{3} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{ptctitle} +% \item \com{plftitle} +% \item \com{plttitle}\columnbreak +% \item \com{mtctitle} +% \item \com{mlftitle} +% \item \com{mlttitle}\columnbreak +% \item \com{stctitle} +% \item \com{slftitle} +% \item \com{slttitle} +% \end{itemize} +% \end{multicols} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Many \suffix{.mld} files require special fonts adequate for the corresponding language; as this is a +% language-dependent issue, the user must set up the correct language and font context for each language, like using +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, the +% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}, the \pack{Antomega} +% system~\cite{antomega}, the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex}, +% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, +% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, +% or \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} packages. +% Note that it is often the \virage\emph{english} name of the language which is used to name the corresponding +% \suffix{.mld} file. +% \or\relax +% De nombreux fichiers \suffix{.mld} ont besoin de fontes spéciales adéquates pour la langue +% correspondante; comme ceci est une question concernant la langue, l'utilisateur doit mettre en place un contexte +% linguistique et typographique correct pour la langue correspondante, en utilisant par exemple le paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, le système +% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}, le système \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}, +% les paquetages \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex}, +% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, +% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} +% et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} ou \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}. +% Notez que c'est souvent le nom en \virage\emph{anglais} de la langue qui est utilisé pour nommer le fichier \suffix{.mld} +% correspondant. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{environment}{filecontents} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% But for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi (iranian), hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese, +% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai, and russian variants.}, the source of the titles +% use some \virage\emph{exotic encodings}, difficult to manipulate +% in a \suffix{.dtx} file, the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper loading +% a \suffix{.mlo} file\,\footnote{The extension +% \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the +% \suffix{.dtx} files in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package. +% To go around this limitation, the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file uses +% \env{filecontents} environments to generate the \suffix{.mlo} files. +% The adequate input encoding must be set up +% by the user \emph{before}\virage{} loading the \suffix{.mld} file via the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command. +% \or\relax +% Mais pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour les variantes du chinois, du farsi +% (iranien), du coréen (hangûl et hanja), du japonais, du \lopt{malayalam-omega}, du thaï et du russe.}, le code source des +% titres utilise quelques \virage\emph{codages exotiques}, +% difficiles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors une simple enveloppe qui charge +% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object}, +% objet minitoc de langue.}, qui n'est pas engendré par les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. +% Pour contourner cette limitation, le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins} utilise simplement des +% environnements \env{filecontents} pour engendrer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. +% Le codage d'entrée adéquat doit être mis en place par l'utilisateur \emph{avant}\virage{} le +% chargement du fichier \suffix{.mld} via la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage}. +% \fi +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \lneed{4} +% {\bfseries +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Since\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} version~\#49, +% the \upack{minitoc} package checks the presence of the +% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file +% (and of the \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} file if necessary) for each language option of the package, +% before validating the option. If a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, the corresponding language option +% is not enabled and a warning message is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. But the presence of +% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language. +% If some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files are missing, +% the list of this files is given in the \suffix{.log} file. You should find these files on CTAN. +% \or\relax +% À~partir\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} de la version~\#49, +% le paquetage \upack{minitoc} vérifie la présence du fichier +% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (et du fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} si nécessaire) pour +% chaque option de langue du paquetage, avant de valider l'option. Si un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} +% est manquant, l'option de langue correspondante n'est pas validée et un message d'avertissement est écrit dans +% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Mais la présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car +% l'anglais est la langue par défaut. +% Si certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} sont manquants, +% la liste de ces fichiers est écrite dans le fichier \suffix{.log}. Vous devriez pouvoir les trouver sur CTAN. +% \fi +% \par} ^^A %BF> +% ^^A \clearpage ^^A %% BEGIN OF LANGUAGE SECTIONS +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Acadian'' language: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~acadian~>>: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld} +% \fi + +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% \lopt{acadian} language\,\FAC{} +% is just french, so we load the \xfile{french.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue \lopt{acadian} (acadien)\,\FAC{} est simplement du français, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*acadian> +\ProvidesFile{acadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Acadien'' language: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~acadien~>>: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{acadien}'' language\,\FAC{} +% is just french (``\texttt{acadien}'' is the french term for ``\texttt{acadian}''), so we load the \xfile{french.mld} +% file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La +% <<~\lopt{acadien}~>>\,\FAC{} +% est simplement du français (<<~\texttt{acadien}~>> est le terme français pour <<~\texttt{acadian}~>>, en anglais), +% donc nous chargons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*acadien> +\ProvidesFile{acadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Afrikaan'' language: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~afrikaan~>>: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld} +% \fi + +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{33.33333333mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{afrikaan}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in South Africa and Namibia, it has dutch origins; compare with +% section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}. +% See also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}. } +% come from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \lneed{5} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée en Afrique du Sud et en Namibie, elle a des origines +% néerlandaises; comparez avec la section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}. +% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*afrikaan> +\ProvidesFile{afrikaan.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Afrikaan(s) titles from dutch.dtx (babel) by Braams, Johannes~L. +\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% +\def\plftitle{Lys van figure}% +\def\plttitle{Lys van tabelle}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% +\def\mlftitle{Lys van figure}% +\def\mlttitle{Lys van tabelle}% +\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% +\def\slftitle{Lys van figure}% +\def\slttitle{Lys van tabelle}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Afrikaans'' language: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~afrikaans~>>: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The term ``\lopt{afrikaans}'' is a synonym of ``\lopt{afrikaan}'', so we just load \xfile{afrikaan.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}): +% \or\relax +% Le terme <<~\lopt{afrikaans}~>> est un synonyme de <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{afrikaan.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*afrikaans> +\ProvidesFile{afrikaans.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.25352113mm} +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Albanian'' language: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~albanian~>>: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% albanian language (\emph{shqip}) is spoken in Albania and some regions of Macedonia, Montenegro, Serbia and Kosovo. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{albanian}'' language are taken from the \xfile{albanian.dtx} file +% (with a contribution of \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}: +% \or\relax +% La +% langue albanaise (\emph{shqip}) est parlée en Albanie et quelques régions de Macédoine, du Montenegro, +% de Serbie et du Kosovo. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{albanian}~>> (albanais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{albanian.dtx} +% (avec une contribution de \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}: +% \fi + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*albanian> +\ProvidesFile{albanian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Albanian titles from albabian.dtx (babel). +%% Adi Zaimi (zami1st at yahoo.com / adizaimi at yahoo.com). +\def\ptctitle{P\"ermbajta}% +\def\plftitle{Figurat}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelat}% +\def\mtctitle{P\"ermbajta}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurat}% +\def\mltitle{Tabelat}% +\def\stctitle{P\"ermbajta}% +\def\slftitle{Figurat}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelat}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``American'' language: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~american~>>: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{american}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' +% (the languages themselves have some differences, +% like the hyphenation rules, some spellings and phonetics), +% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{american}~>> (américain) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> +% (les langues elles-mêmes ont quelques différences, +% par exemple les règles de coupure des mots, l'orthographe et la prononciation), +% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} (voir +% la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*american> +\ProvidesFile{american.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arab'' language: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arab~>>: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} + +% ^^A (ARAB +% ^^A ARAB) +% \par\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{arab}'' language (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) are taken +% from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} +% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab}~>> (arabe) (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) sont tirés +% du paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} +% (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The arabic language is spoken in: +% Algeria, Bahrain, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Libya, Mauritania, Morocco, Oman, Palestinian territories, +% Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Western Sahara, Yemen by a majority; it is also +% the liturgical language of Islam. +% \or\relax +% La langue arabe est parlée dans les pays suivants: +% Algérie, Bahrain, Égypte, Irak, Jordanie, Koweït, Liban, Libye, Mauritanie, Maroc, Oman, Territoires Palestiniens, +% Qatar, Arabie Saoudite, Soudan, Syrie, Tunisie, Émirats Arabes Unis, Sahara Occidental, Yémen par une +% majorité de la population; c'est aussi la langue liturgique de l'Islam +%.\looseness=-1 +% \fi +% \par\normalmarginpar +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arab> +\ProvidesFile{arab.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Arabic titles. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex) +\def\ptctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% +\def\plftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% +\def\plttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% +\def\mtctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% +\def\mlftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% +\def\mlttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% +\def\stctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% +\def\slftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% +\def\slttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arab2'' language: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arab2~>>: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcArabTok} +% \begin{macro}{\tcArabTok} +% \begin{macro}{\a@tok} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{arab2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} +% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts. +% It is a variant of the ``\lopt{arab}'' language. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> (arabe, variante) sont tirés du +% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), +% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arab2> +\ProvidesFile{arab2.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Arabic titles. Variant. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex) +{\makeatletter\global\let\mtcArabTok\a@tok}% +\def\ptctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% +\def\plftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% +\def\plttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% +\def\mtctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% +\def\mlftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% +\def\mlttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% +\def\stctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% +\def\slftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% +\def\slttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arabi'' language: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arabi~>>: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\R} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{arabi}'' language are taken from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi} +% (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), +% which should be used, with the associated fonts. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} +% (par \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arabi> +\ProvidesFile{arabi.mld}[2006/07/27]% +%% Arabic titles (strings taken from arabi.ldf; to be used with arabi) +%% Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of the Arabi package, by Youssef Jabri) +\def\ptctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% +\def\plftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\plttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\mtctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% +\def\mlftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\mlttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\stctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% +\def\slftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\slttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Arabic'' language: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~arabic~>>: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{arabic}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{arab}'', so we just load \xfile{arab.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+arab}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{arabic}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{arab}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{arab.mld} +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+arab}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*arabic> +\ProvidesFile{arabic.mld}[2005/02/10]\mtcselectlanguage{arab}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Armenian'' language: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~armenian~>>: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{6.213285133mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{armenian}'' language (\emph{hayeren}) are taken from the \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} package~\cite{armtex} +% (by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), which should be +% used, with the associated fonts. +% The armenian language is spoken in Armenia, in a part of Azerbaidjan and in the armenian diaspora. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{armenian}~>> (arménien, \emph{hayeren}) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} +% (de \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), +% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. +% La langue arménienne est parlée en Arménie, dans une partie de l'Azerbaïdjan et dans la diaspora arménienne. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*armenian> +\ProvidesFile{armenian.mld}[1999/06/28]% +%% Armenian titles from ArmTeX. Sergueï Dachian (Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr), +%% Arnak Dalalyan & Vartan Akopian +\def\ptctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% +\def\plftitle{Patkerneri cank}% +\def\plttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% +\def\mtctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% +\def\mlftitle{Patkerneri cank}% +\def\mlttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% +\def\stctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% +\def\slftitle{Patkerneri cank}% +\def\slttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Australian'' language: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~australian~>>: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{australian}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{australian}~>> (australien) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*australian> +\ProvidesFile{australian.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Austrian'' language: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~austrian~>>: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% For +% the mini-table titles, the ``\lopt{austrian}'' language is like the ``\lopt{german}'' language, so we load +% \xfile{german.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+german}): +% \or\relax +% Pour +% les titres des mini-tables, la langue <<~\lopt{austrian}~>> (autrichien) est comme la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> +% (allemand), donc nous chargeons \xfile{german.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+german}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*austrian> +\ProvidesFile{austrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{german}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bahasa'' language: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bahasa~>>: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{bahasa}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{bahasa}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bahasa> +\ProvidesFile{bahasa.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bahasai'' language: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bahasai~>>: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.321112516\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.678887484\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasai}'' language\,\footnote{Bahasa is spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, +% with different pronunciations and titles but the same writing. Bahasai is the indonesian variant. See +% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}.} (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) are +% taken from the file \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen} and \name{Terry}{Mart}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}. +% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. The word ``bahasa'' means ``language'' in bahasa. +% For other names for this language, see sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} and \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>\,\footnote{Le bahasa est parlé en Indonésie et en Malaisie, +% avec des prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasai est la variante indonésienne. +% Voir \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.} +% (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen} +% et \name{Terry}{Mart}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}. +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. Le mot «~bahasa~» signifie +% «~langage~» en bahasa. Pour d'autres noms pour cette langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} et +% \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bahasai> +\ProvidesFile{bahasai.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Bahasa Indonesia titles from bahasa.dtx in the babel package. +%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry +\def\ptctitle{Daftar Isi}% +\def\plftitle{Daftar Gambar}% +\def\plttitle{Daftar Tabel}% +\def\mtctitle{Daftar Isi}% +\def\mlftitle{Daftar Gambar}% +\def\mlttitle{Daftar Tabel}% +\def\stctitle{Daftar Isi}% +\def\slftitle{Daftar Gambar}% +\def\slttitle{Daftar Tabel}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{18} +% \section{``Bahasam'' language: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld} +% \or\relax +% \lneed{20} +% \section{Langue <<~bahasam~>>: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.293413174\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.706586826\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasam}'' language (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, with +% different pronunciations and titles +% but the same writing. Bahasam is the malaysian variant.} are taken from the file \xfile{bahasam.dtx} +% (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} and \name{Bob}{Margolis}) +% in the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}. +% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. For other names for this language, see +% sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} and~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>> (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Parlée en Indonésie et en Malaisie, avec des +% prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasam est la variante malaisienne.} sont +% tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasam.dtx} +% (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} et \name{Bob}{Margolis}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}. +% Des +% fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. Pour d'autres noms pour cette +% langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} et~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bahasam> +\ProvidesFile{bahasam.mld}[2006/12/19]% +%% Bahasa Malaysia titles from bahasam.dtx in the babel package +%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry & Margolis, Bob +\def\ptctitle{Kandungan}% +\def\plftitle{Senarai Gambar}% +\def\plttitle{Senarai Jadual}% +\def\mtctitle{Kandungan}% +\def\mlftitle{Senarai Gambar}% +\def\mlttitle{Senarai Jadual}% +\def\stctitle{Kandungan}% +\def\slftitle{Senarai Gambar}% +\def\slttitle{Senarai Jadual}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \lneed{4} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bangla'' language: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld} +% \suppressfloats +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bangla~>>: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}% +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}% +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}% +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}% + +% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0pt} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \noindent\begin{samepage} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' (\lopt{bengali}) language\,\footnote{Spoken in Bangladesh and some parts of India, +% like Occidental Bengal~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) and Tripura~(16).} are taken from +% the \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} package~\cite{bangtex} (by \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); they need specific fonts +% (the bengali alphabet is derived from sanskrit). +% \par\end{samepage} +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Bangladesh et dans certaines parties de +% l'Inde, comme le Bengale Occidental~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) et Tripura~(16).} (\lopt{bengali}) sont simplement tirés +% du paquetage \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex} (de \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); +% ils ont besoin de fontes spécifiques (l'alphabet bengalî est dérivé du sanskrit). +% \fi +% \par\normalmarginpar +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bangla> +\ProvidesFile{bangla.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Bangla titles from BangTeX. Needs specific fonts. +\def\ptctitle{suu\*c*ipotRo}% <----- +\def\plftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% +\def\plttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% +\def\mtctitle{suu\*c*i}% +\def\mlftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% +\def\mlttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% +\def\stctitle{suu\*c*i}% +\def\slftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% +\def\slttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Basque'' language: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~basque~>>: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{14mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{basque}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in the basque country, in the north of Spain and +% south-west of France.} (\emph{euskara}) are taken from the \xfile{basque.dtx} file +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, by \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} +% and \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, with help from \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}. +% It seems that 8~bits fonts are preferable. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{basque}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Pays Basque, qui est situé dans le nord de l'Espagne +% et le sud-ouest de la France.} (\emph{euskara}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{basque.dtx} dans le paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, par \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} et \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, avec +% l'aide de \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}. +% Il semble que des fontes 8-bits soient préférables. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*basque> +\ProvidesFile{basque.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Basque titles from basque.dtx (babel). +%% Aguirregabiria, Juan M. WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html +%% & Sanchez, Julio , +%% and help from Izaola Azkona, Zunbeltz +%% Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% +\def\plftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% +\def\plttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% +\def\mtctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% +\def\mlftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% +\def\mlttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% +\def\stctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% +\def\slftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% +\def\slttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bengali'' language: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bengali~>>: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{bengali}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' language, so we load +% the file \xfile{bangla.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{bengali}~>> (bengalî) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>> (bânglâ), +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{bangla.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bengali> +\ProvidesFile{bengali.mld}[2007/07/23]\mtcselectlanguage{bangla}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bicig'' language: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bicig~>>: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\bcg} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig} is a written form of the mongolian language. +% It is also known as Uighur or Bichig. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> est une forme écrite de la langue mongole. +% Il est aussi connu sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{uighur} en anglais) ou bichig. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bicig> +\ProvidesFile{bicig.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Mongol (Bicig) titles needs mongol fonts +\def\ptctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% +\def\plftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% +\def\mlftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% +\def\slftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bicig2'' language: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig2}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, +% \lopt{bicig2} is a variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also +% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, and~\vref{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bicig2~>>: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole, +% \lopt{bicig2} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} sont +% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, \vref{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bicig2> +\ProvidesFile{bicig2.mld}[2005/11/16]% +%% Mongol (Bicig2) titles (needs mongol fonts) +\def\ptctitle{garcag}% +\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\mtctitle{garcag}% +\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\stctitle{garcag}% +\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bicig3'' language: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig3}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, \lopt{bicig3} is a +% variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur3}.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~bicig3~>>: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole, +% \lopt{bicig3} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont +% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bicig3> +\ProvidesFile{bicig3.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Mongol (Bicig3) titles (needs mongol fonts) +\def\ptctitle{aguulag=a}% +\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\mtctitle{aguulag=a}% +\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +\def\stctitle{aguulag=a}% +\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% +\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{41.11842105mm} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bithe'' language: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{bithe}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bithe} is a written form of the \lopt{manju} variant of the mongolian language.} are taken +% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% The Manju writing, or \emph{bithe} system is a close relative +% of the Mongolian system; the basical letter shapes are the +% same. Yet for Manju, a set of diacritics (\emph{dots and circles}) +% was designed to eliminate all the ambiguities of Mongolian. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bithe~>>: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bithe}~>> est une forme écrite de la +% variante <<~\lopt{manju}~>> de la langue mongole.} sont +% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% L'écriture Manju (Manchou), ou le système \emph{bithe}, est une proche +% parente du système Mongol; les formes de base des lettres sont les mêmes. Mais pour le Manju, un +% ensemble de signes diacritiques (\emph{points et cercles}) a +% été conçu pour éliminer toutes les ambiguïtés du Mongol. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.386473430\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.613526570\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bithe> +\ProvidesFile{bithe.mld}[2005/11/16]% +%% Manju (bithe) titles (needs mongol fonts) +\def\ptctitle{garcag}% +\def\plftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% +\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% +\def\mtctitle{garcag}% +\def\mlftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% +\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% +\def\stctitle{garcag}% +\def\slftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% +\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Brazil'' language: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~brazil~>>: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{brazil}'' language (\emph{português brasileiro} or +% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{It is the main portuguese dialect spoken in Brazil. Note that these titles are +% \emph{different} in Brazil and in Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} contributed to brazilian translations. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file (for portugese titles by +% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) in the \pack{babel} +% package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{brazil}~>> (brésilien, \emph{português brasileiro} ou +% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{C'est le dialecte portugais principal parlé au Brésil. +% Notez que ces +% titres sont \emph{différents} au Brésil et au Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} a contribué aux +% traductions brésiliennes. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx} +% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete} pour les titres portugais) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*brazil> +\ProvidesFile{brazil.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Portugues (brazil) titles, from portuges.dtx (babel) +%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro & "de Lima", Arnaldo Viegas +\def\ptctitle{Sum\'ario}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\mtctitle{Sum\'ario}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\stctitle{Sum\'ario}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Brazilian'' language: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~brazilian~>>: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{brazilian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{brazil}'', so we just load \xfile{brazil.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{brazilian}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{brazil}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{brazil.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*brazilian> +\ProvidesFile{brazilian.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Breton'' language: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~breton~>>: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld} +% \fi + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{breton}'' language (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Spoken as a local celtic dialect in french Brittany. +% See also \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} and +% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} are taken from the +% \xfile{breton.dtx} file (by \name{Christian}{Rolland}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}: +% \or\relax +% \lneed{2} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{breton}~>> (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Parlée comme dialecte celtique local en Bretagne (France). Voir aussi \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, +% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} et +% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{breton.dtx} (de \name{Christian}{Rolland}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*breton> +\ProvidesFile{breton.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Breton titles from breton.dtx (babel) by Rolland, Christian +\def\ptctitle{Taolenn}% +\def\plftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% +\def\plttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% +\def\mtctitle{Taolenn}% +\def\mlftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% +\def\mlttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% +\def\stctitle{Taolenn}% +\def\slftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% +\def\slttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``British'' language: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~british~>>: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{british}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{british}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*british> +\ProvidesFile{british.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bulgarian'' language: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bulgarian~>>: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.317738791\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.682261209\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{bulgarian}'' language (\emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) are taken from the \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} +% (adapted from russian by \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) file in the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; they require +% specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarian}~>> (bulgare, \emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} (adapté du russe par \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) dans le +% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; ils ont +% besoin de fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bulgarian> +\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.mld}[2007/03/08]% +%% Bulgarian titles from bulgarian.dtx (babel) (needs special cyrillic fonts) +%% by Boshnakov, Georgi N. +\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\mtctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\stctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % + \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Bulgarianb'' language: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~bulgarianb~>>: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{bulgarianb}'' (upper bulgarian) language are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}; +% they require specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarianb}~>> (haut bulgare) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} +% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}; +% ils requièrent des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*bulgarianb> +\ProvidesFile{bulgarianb.mld}[2006/03/06]% +%% Upper bulgarian titles from russianb.dtx. Needs cyrillic fonts for upper bulgarian. +\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\plftitle{% Figuri + {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% +\def\plttitle{% Tablici + {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% +\def\mtctitle{% Sydyrzhanie + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\mlftitle{% Figurite + {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% +\def\mlttitle{% Tablici + {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% +\def\stctitle{% Sydyrzhanie + {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\def\slftitle{% Figuri + {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% +\def\slttitle{% Tablici + {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{13} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Buryat'' language: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~buryat~>>: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \begin{macro}{\sh} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in some regions of Mongolia and in the Buryatia republic, near +% Lake Baikal. } are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. +% This language requires specific fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée dans certaines régions de la Mongolie et dans la république +% de Buryatie, près du lac Baïkal. } (bouriate) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*buryat> +\ProvidesFile{buryat.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Buryat titles. Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Buryat2'' language: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~buryat2~>>: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{buryat2}'' language (a variant for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language, see section~\vref{s+mld+buryat}) +% are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat2}~>> (une variante du langage «~\lopt{buryat}~», voir la section~\vref{s+mld+buryat}) +% sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue +% requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*buryat2> +\ProvidesFile{buryat2.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Buryat2 titles. Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Canadian'' language: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~canadian~>>: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + +% \afterpage{\clearpage} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{canadian}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{a}n'')} is just the \loptd{english} language spoken +% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{canadian}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{a}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{anglaise} +% (\loptd{english}) parlée au Canada. +% Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*canadian> +\ProvidesFile{canadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Canadien'' language: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~canadien~>>: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{canadien}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{e}n'')} is just the \lopt{french} language spoken +% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{canadien}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{e}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{française} +% (\lopt{french}) parlée au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la +% section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*canadien> +\ProvidesFile{canadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{19.14587332mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Castillan'' language: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~castillan~>>: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{castillan}'' language is better known as ``\lopt{spanish}'', +% but is spoken mainly in Castile, +% a part of central Spain. We +% just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> est mieux connue sous le nom de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> +% (espagnol), +% mais est parlée principalement +% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*castillan> +\ProvidesFile{castillan.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Castillian'' language: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~castillian~>>: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ``Castillian'' is just the english name for ``castillan'', so +% we just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \or\relax +% <<~Castillian~>> est juste le nom anglais du castillan, donc +% nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*castillian> +\ProvidesFile{castillian.mld}[2005/07/01]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Catalan'' language: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~catalan~>>: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.502354788\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.497645212\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{3} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{catalan}'' language (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Spoken in Catalunya, the eastern part of Spain, +% around Barcelona, and in Roussillon, in France. } +% are taken from the \xfile{catalan.dtx} file (adapted from spanish by \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Parlée en Catalogne, +% la partie orientale de l'Espagne, autour +% de Barcelone, et dans le Roussillon, en France. } sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{catalan.dtx} (adapté de l'espagnol par \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} +% et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*catalan> +\ProvidesFile{catalan.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Catalan titles from catalan.dtx (babel) (Badenes, Gonçal) +\def\ptctitle{\'Index}% +\def\plftitle{\'Index de figures}% +\def\plttitle{\'Index de taules}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\'Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Taules}% +\def\stctitle{\'Index}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Taules}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Chinese1'' language: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~chinese1~>>: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1} +% \fi + + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.25mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There +% are several variants for the chinese language. +% The ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cap} file +% in the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}. +% See~\cite{china-h} about the history of China and the chinese language. +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}% +% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{chinese1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a +% plusieurs variantes pour la langue chinoise. +% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> (chinois première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cap} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}. +% Voir~\cite{china-h} sur l'histoire de la Chine et de la langue chinoise. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*chinese1> +\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese1}% +%% From file Bg5.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e +%% Created by Werner Lemberg . Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5 +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Chinese2'' language: \uxmldo{chinese2}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~chinese2~>>: \uxmldo{chinese2.mld}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cpx} file in the \pack{CJK} +% system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{chinese2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> (chinois seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cpx} dans +% le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la +% section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*chinese2> +\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese2}% +%% From file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e +%% Created by Werner Lemberg . Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5, preprocessed +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Croatian'' language: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~\lopt{croatian}~>>: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.556818182\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443181818\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{25mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{croatian}'' language (\emph{hrvatski}) are taken from the file \xfile{croatian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~croatian~>> (croate, \emph{hrvatski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{croatian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*croatian> +\ProvidesFile{croatian.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Croatian titles from croatian.dtx (babel). Pai\'{c}, Alan. +\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\plftitle{Popis slika}% +\def\plttitle{Popis tablica}% +\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\mlftitle{Popis slika}% +\def\mlttitle{Popis tablica}% +\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\slftitle{Slike}% +\def\slttitle{Tablice}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Czech'' language: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~czech~>>: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{czech}'' language (\emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the file \xfile{czech.dtx} +% (contributions by \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{czech}~>> (tchèque, \emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{czech.dtx} +% (contributions de \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*czech> +\ProvidesFile{czech.mld}[2007/12/04]% +%% Czech titles from czech.dtx (babel). Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek, Milo\v{s} V. +\def\ptctitle{Obsah}% +\def\plftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% +\def\plttitle{Seznam tabulek}% +\def\mtctitle{Obsah}% +\def\mlftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% +\def\mlttitle{Seznam tabulek}% +\def\stctitle{Obsah}% +\def\slftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% +\def\slttitle{Seznam tabulek}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Danish'' language: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~danish~>>: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.362204724\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.637795276\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.9189892mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{danish}'' language\,\footnote{The danish (\emph{dansk}) language is spoken in Denmark, in the Faeroe +% Islands and in Greenland.} are taken from the \xfile{danish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Henning}{Larsen}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{danish}~>> (danois\,\footnote{Le danois (\emph{dansk}) est parlé au Danemark, dans les Îles +% Féroé et au Groenland.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{danish.dtx} +% (de \name{Henning}{Larsen}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*danish> +\ProvidesFile{danish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Danish titles from danish.dtx (babel). Larsen, Henning (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch) +\def\ptctitle{Indhold}% +\def\plftitle{Figurer}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\mtctitle{Indhold}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\stctitle{Indhold}% +\def\slftitle{Figurer}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Devanagari'' language: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~devanagari~>>: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.845238095mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{devanagari}'' language are taken from the \xfile{devanagari.sty} and \xfile{captions.dn} files +% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% in the Devan\=agar\={\i} +% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>> (hindi) sont tirés des fichiers \xfile{devanagari.sty} et \xfile{captions.dn} +% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dn} +% \begin{macro}{\qva} +% \begin{macro}{\re} +% \begin{macro}{\rs} +% \begin{macro}{\8} +% \begin{macro}{\2} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Specific fonts are required. +% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. See also~\cite{hindi99} about the hindi language. +% \or\relax +% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. +% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}. +% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*devanagari> +\ProvidesFile{devanagari.mld}[2006/08/25]% +%% Devanagari (hindi) titles from devanagari.sty by +%% Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k & +%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik +\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Dutch'' language: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~dutch~>>: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld} +% \fi +% ^^A (DU +% ^^A DU) +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.381017882) +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.618982118) + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% \lneed{3} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{dutch}'' language\,\footnote{The dutch language (\emph{nederlands}) is spoken in +% the Netherlands and a part of Belgium.} are taken from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{dutch}~>> (néerlandais, \emph{nederlands})\,\footnote{La langue néerlandaise +% est parlée aux Pays-Bas et dans une partie de la Belgique.} sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) dans le +% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*dutch> +\ProvidesFile{dutch.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Dutch titles from dutch.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.) +\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% +\def\plftitle{L"yst van figuren}% +\def\plttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% +\def\mlftitle{L"yst van figuren}% +\def\mlttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% +\def\slftitle{L"yst van figuren}% +\def\slttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \normalmarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``English'' language: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~english~>>: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\loptd{english}'' language are taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}. +% \emph{The\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% See +% also sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK +% \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish},\ABK +% and~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\loptd{english}~>> (anglais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}. +% \emph{Notez que la\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car l'anglais est la langue par défaut.} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% Voir +% aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK +% \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish}\ABK et~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english> +\ProvidesFile{english.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.) +\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}% +\def\plftitle{List of Figures}% +\def\plttitle{List of Tables}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Contents}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tables}% +\def\stctitle{Contents}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tables}% +% +% \end{macrocode} + +% ^^A (ENG +% ^^A ENG) +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``English1'' language: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~english1~>>: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{english1}'' language come from the \xfile{english.dtx} file +% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} +% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres +% au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english1> +\ProvidesFile{english1.mld}[2006/03/30]% +%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L. +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Table of Contents of the First Part\relax + \else Table of Contents of Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + List of Figures in the First Part\relax + \else List of Figures in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + List of Tables in the First Part\relax + \else List of Tables in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Contents}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tables}% +\def\stctitle{Contents}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tables}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``English2'' language: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~english2~>>: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcEnglishIIpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifcase} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{english2}'' language are again taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file +% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with adaptations at the part level. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} +% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec adaptations au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*english2> +\ProvidesFile{english2.mld}[2006/03/30]% +%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L. +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\mtcEnglishIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}% +\or the First Part\or the Second Part\or the Third Part +\or the Fourth Part\or the Fifth Part\or the Sixth Part +\or the Seventh Part\or the Eighth Part\or the Ninth Part +\or the Tenth Part\or the Eleventh Part\or the Twelfth Part +\or the Thirteenth Part\or the Fourteenth Part \or the Fifteenth Part +\or the Sixteenth Part \or the Seventeenth Part \or the Eighteenth Part +\or the Nineteenth Part\or the Twentieth Part \else Part~\Roman{part}\fi} +\def\ptctitle{Contents of \mtcEnglishIIpart} +\def\plftitle{List of Figures in \mtcEnglishIIpart} +\def\plttitle{List of Tables in \mtcEnglishIIpart} +%% +\def\mtctitle{Contents}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tables}% +\def\stctitle{Contents}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tables}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Esperant'' language: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{esperant}'' (espéranto) language are taken from the \xfile{esperanto.dtx} file +% (by \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}. +% The esperanto artificial language was created in the 1877--1885 years +% by Doctor~\namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\footnote{See +% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L.L._Zamenhof}, +% \url{http://uea.org/} and \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} for more information; his first names are +% sometimes spelled ``Ludvic Lazarus'' or ``Louis-Lazare'', with small variations.} (1859--1917) of Warsaw, Poland. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~esperant~>>: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> (espéranto) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{esperanto.dtx} +% (de \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}. +% La langue artificielle esperanto a été créée dans les années 1877--1885 par le docteur +% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\,{\froff\footnote{Voir +% \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zamenhof}, +% \url{http://uea.org/} et \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} pour plus d'informations. Ses prénoms sont +% parfois écrits \og~Ludvic Lazarus~\fg{} ou \og~Louis-Lazare~\fg, avec quelques variantes.}} (1859--1917) de +% Varsovie en Pologne. +% \fi +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*esperant> +\ProvidesFile{esperant.mld}[2006/12/19]% +%% Esperanto titles from esperanto.dtx (babel) Ruiz-Altaba, Marti & Knappen, Jörg +\def\ptctitle{Enhavo}% +\def\plftitle{Listo de figuroj}% +\def\plttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% +\def\mtctitle{Enhavo}% +\def\mlftitle{Listo de figuroj}% +\def\mlttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% +\def\stctitle{Enhavo}% +\def\slftitle{Listo de figuroj}% +\def\slttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Esperanto'' language: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~esperanto~>>: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{esperanto}'' and ``\lopt{esperant}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{esperant.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues <<~\lopt{esperanto}~>> et <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{esperant.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*esperanto> +\ProvidesFile{esperanto.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Estonian'' language: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~estonian~>>: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{estonian}'' language\,\footnote{Estonian (\emph{eesti keel}) is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a +% language from the uralian family.} are taken from the \xfile{estonian.dtx} file +% (by \name{Enn}{Saar}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{estonian}~>> (estonien\,\footnote{L'estonien (\emph{eesti keel}) \emph{n'est pas} une langue +% balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{estonian.dtx} +% (de \name{Enn}{Saar}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}: +% \fi + +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*estonian> +\ProvidesFile{estonian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Estonian titles from estonian.dtx (babel) Saar, Enn +\def\ptctitle{Sisukord}% +\def\plftitle{Joonised}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelid}% +\def\mtctitle{Sisukord}% +\def\mlftitle{Joonised}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabelid}% +\def\stctitle{Sisukord}% +\def\slftitle{Joonised}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelid}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ethiopia'' language: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ethiopia~>>: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.447761194\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.552238806\iwidth} + +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.642441860mm} +% \begin{macro}{\eth@doaltchar} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language (amharic, \emph{\=amari\"{n}\"{n}a}) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop} +% (written by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). Specific +% fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. for the repartition of +% the various ethiopian dialects. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>> (éthiopien, amarique, \emph{amaregna}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop} +% (écrit par \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. +% pour la répartition des divers dialectes éthiopiens. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ethiopia> +\ProvidesFile{ethiopia.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Ethopian titles. Needs special fonts. +\def\ptctitle{yezate}% +\def\plftitle{% + ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\plttitle{% + yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\mtctitle{yezate}% +\def\mlftitle{% + ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\mlttitle{% + yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\stctitle{yezate}% +\def\slftitle{% + ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +\def\slttitle{% + yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ethiopian'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{ethiopian}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language, so we just load the +% \xfile{ethiopia.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}). +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian}~>> (éthiopien) est un simple synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{ethiopia.mld} +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ethiopian> +\ProvidesFile{ethiopian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ethiopian2'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{ethiopian2}'' language (for Omega) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop} +% (by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). +% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian2~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian2}~>> (éthiopien pour Omega) sont tirés +% du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop} +% (de \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ethiopian2> +\ProvidesFile{ethiopian2.mld}[2006/01/30]% +%% Ethopian titles with Omega. Needs special fonts +\def\ptctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% +\def\plftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\plttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 + ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\mtctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% +\def\mlftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\mlttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 + ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\stctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% +\def\slftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +\def\slttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 + ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Farsi1'' language: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% There are +% several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan. +% The ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} system{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, +% \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, +% \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{farsi1.mlo}. + +% +% \or\relax +% \lneed{8} +% \section{Langue <<~farsi1~>>: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1} + +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm} +% Il y~a +% plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan. +% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> (farsi première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du +% système +% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, +% par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. +% +% \normalmarginpar +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi1.mlo}. +% \fi + +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*farsi1> +\ProvidesFile{farsi1.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi1}% +%% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, +%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others. +%% http://www.farsitex.org +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Farsi2'' language: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2} +% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan. +% The ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}} +% system~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, +% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~farsi2~>>: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2} +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan. +% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> (farsi deuxième variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du +% système \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, développé par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, +% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, +% hence we load \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*farsi2> +\ProvidesFile{farsi2.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi2}% +%% From farsi.sty (FarsiTeX project: http://www.farsitex.org). Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, +%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others. +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Farsi3'' language: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}% +% \ixfile{farsi3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~farsi3~>>: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}% +% \ixfile{farsi3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\FR} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan. +% The ``\lopt{farsi3}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.ldf} file in the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system\cite{arabi}, +% by \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. Special fonts are needed, of course. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan. +% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.ldf} du +% système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, par \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*farsi3> +\ProvidesFile{farsi3.mld}[2006/07/27]% +%% From farsi.ldf of the Arabi system by Youssef Jabri. +\def\ptctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% +\def\plftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\plttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\mtctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% +\def\mlftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\mlttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +\def\stctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% +\def\slftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% +\def\slttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Finnish'' language: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~finnish~>>: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.437269373\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.562730627\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.505\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.495\iwidth} + + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15.28125mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{finnish}'' language (\emph{suomi}) are taken from the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish}~>> (finnois, \emph{suomi}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx} +% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*finnish> +\ProvidesFile{finnish.mld}[2006/03/20]% +%% Finnish titles from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen +\def\ptctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% +\def\plftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\plttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\mtctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% +\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\stctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% +\def\slftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\slttitle{Taulukot}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Finnish2'' language: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{finnish2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed by the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~finnish2~>>: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish2}~>> (finnois seconde variante) sont tirés d'une variante proposée +% par le fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx} +% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*finnish2> +\ProvidesFile{finnish2.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Finnish titles (variant) from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen +\def\ptctitle{Sis\"allys}% +\def\plftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\plttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\mtctitle{Sis\"allys}% +\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}% +\def\stctitle{Sis\"allys}% +\def\slftitle{Kuvat}% +\def\slttitle{Taulukot}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Francais'' language: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~francais~>>: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{francais}'' (\emph{français}) +% language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see +% section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{francais}~>> (\emph{français}) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*francais> +\ProvidesFile{francais.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``French'' language: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~french~>>: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld} +% \fi + + +% ^^A (FRANCO-EU +% ^^A FRANCO-EU) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AM +% ^^A FRANCO-AM) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AFN +% ^^A FRANCO-AFN) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AFW +% ^^A FRANCO-AFW) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AC +% ^^A FRANCO-AC) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AEOI +% ^^A FRANCO-AEOI) +% ^^A (FRANCO-AS +% ^^A FRANCO-AS) +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{4} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{french}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. See also +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais}, +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}. +% \or\relax +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>> (c'est-à-dire le français) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. Voir aussi +% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+francais},\ABK +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french> +\ProvidesFile{french.mld}[2006/03/21]% +%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel +\def\ptctitle{Table des mati\`eres}% +\def\plftitle{Liste des figures}% +\def\plttitle{Liste des tableaux}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% +\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``French1'' language: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~french1~>>: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{french1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres +% au niveau partie. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french1> +\ProvidesFile{french1.mld}[2006/03/29]% +%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Sommaire de la premi\`ere partie\relax + \else Sommaire de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Liste des figures de la premi\`ere partie\relax + \else Liste des figures de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax + Liste des tableaux de la premi\`ere partie\relax + \else Liste des tableaux de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% +\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``French2'' language: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~french2~>>: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcFrenchIIpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} +% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} +% \begin{macro}{\value} +% \begin{macro}{\Roman} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{french2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles\footnote{This +% is an example of a \suffix{.mld} file needing some support from code in the \upack{minitoc} package.}. +% See also section~\vref{ss+2parts}, for the subtle distinction between ``deuxième'' and ``seconde''. +% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} +% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres +% au niveau partie\,\footnote{C'est un exemple de fichier \suffix{.mld} ayant besoin de code de support dans le +% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{ss+2parts}, pour la subtile nuance entre «~deuxième~» et «~seconde~». +% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french2> +\ProvidesFile{french2.mld}[2006/07/07]% +%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel +%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) +\def\mtcFrenchIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}% +\or premi\`ere partie\or +{\ifmtcsecondpart seconde\else deuxi\`eme\fi} partie\or +troisi\`eme partie\or quatri\`eme partie\or cinqui\`eme partie\or +sixi\`eme partie\or septi\`eme partie\or huiti\`eme partie\or +neuvi\`eme partie\or dixi\`eme partie\or onzi\`eme partie\or +douzi\`eme partie\or treizi\`eme partie\or quatorzi\`eme partie\or +quinzi\`eme partie\or seizi\`eme partie\or dix-septi\`eme partie\or +dix-huiti\`eme partie\or dix-neuvi\`eme partie\or +vingti\`eme partie\else partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% +\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax + Sommaire \else Sommaire de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}% +\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax + Liste des figures\else + Liste des figures de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}% +\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax + Liste des tableaux\else + Liste des tableaux de la \mtcFrenchIIpart}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\mlftitle{Figures}% +\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% +\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% +\def\slftitle{Figures}% +\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Frenchb'' language: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~frenchb~>>: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{frenchb}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the +% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchb}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier +% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*frenchb> +\ProvidesFile{frenchb.mld}[2003/02/11]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Frenchle'' language: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~frenchle~>>: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{frenchle}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the +% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchle}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchle}~» est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier +% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchle}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*frenchle> +\ProvidesFile{frenchle.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Frenchpro'' language: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~frenchpro~>>: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{frenchpro}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the +% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchpro}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier +% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*frenchpro> +\ProvidesFile{frenchpro.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Galician'' language: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~galician~>>: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld} +% \fi + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{galician}'' language (\emph{galego})\,\footnote{Spoken in Galice, in the north-west part +% of Spain, around Santiago de Compostela.} are taken from the \xfile{galician.dtx} file, +% (by \name{Manuel}{Carriba} and \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}) derived from the +% \xfile{spanish.dtx} file (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien, \emph{galego})\,\footnote{Parlée en Galice, +% dans la partie nord-ouest de l'Espagne, autour de Saint-Jacques de Compostelle.} +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{galician.dtx} (de \name{Manuel}{Carriba} et +% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}), dérivé du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}), +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*galician> +\ProvidesFile{galician.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Galician titles from galician.dtx (babel). +%% Carriba, Manuel (mcarriba@eunetcom.net) +%% Javier A. Múgica de Rivera (jmugica@digi21.net) +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\mtctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\stctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``German'' language: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~german~>>: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + + + + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{german}'' language (\emph{deutsch}) are taken from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% See also the section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> (allemand, \emph{deutsch}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*german> +\ProvidesFile{german.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% German titles +\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% +\def\plftitle{Figuren}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% +\def\mlftitle{Figuren}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% +\def\slftitle{Figuren}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Germanb'' language: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld} +% The ``\lopt{germanb}'' language is a variant for the ``german'' language. The titles come from +% \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}: +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~germanb~>>: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld} +% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>. Les titres sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*germanb> +\ProvidesFile{germanb.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% German titles (variant) from germanb.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Raichle, Bernd +\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% +\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +%% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Germanb2'' language: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld} +% The ``\lopt{germanb2}'' language is a variant for the ``\lopt{german}'' language, with short titles. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}. +% The titles are taken from the file \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}: +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~germanb2~>>: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld} +% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb2}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>, avec des titres courts. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}. +% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*germanb2> +\ProvidesFile{germanb2.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% German titles (variant) +\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek'' language: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek~>>: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.6273522572\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.372647428\iwidth} + +% +% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount} +% + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{greek}'' language (modern greek, +% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) are taken from the \xfile{greek.dtx} file +% (by \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) in the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}. +% Greek fonts are required. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek}~>> (grec moderne, +% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{greek.dtx} +% (de \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}. +% Des fontes grecques sont requises. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek> +\ProvidesFile{greek.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Greek titles from greek.dtx (babel) by Syropoulos, Apostolos. Needs greek fonts. +\def\ptctitle{Perieq'omena}% +\def\plftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% +\def\plttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% +\def\mtctitle{Perieq'omena}% +\def\mlftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% +\def\mlttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% +\def\stctitle{Perieq'omena}% +\def\slftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% +\def\slttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek-mono'' language: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek-mono~>>: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-mono}'' language\,\footnote{Monotonic greek, from a recent (1982) but strongly +% contested -- and contestable -- reform of the greek language.} are taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-mono}~>> (grec dit monotonique\,\footnote{Le grec monotonique, selon une récente +% (1982) mais fortement contestée -- et contestable -- réforme de la langue grecque.}) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek-mono> +\ProvidesFile{greek-mono.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. +%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\mlftitle%{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\stctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek-polydemo'' language: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polydemo}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic demotic (popular) greek, for classical greek.} +% are taken from the file \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polydemo}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique <<~démotique~>> (populaire), +% pour le grec classique.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek-polydemo> +\ProvidesFile{greek-polydemo.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. +%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\plttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\stctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% + ^^^^03bd}}% +\def\slttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Greek-polykatha'' language: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polykatha}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic greek, <<~kathaverousa~>> (purified) style, +% a form of the Greek language created during the early \textsc{xix}-th century by \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, +% to purify the language from the Byzantine and non-greek vocabulary. +% It has now been obsoleted by the demotic (popular) greek, but it +% has left a very noticeable trace in the modern Greek language.} are +% taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polykatha}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique, en style <<~kathaverousa~>> (purifié), +% une forme de la langue grecque créée au début du \textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle par \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, pour purifier +% la langue du vocabulaire byzantin ou non grec. Il a maintenant été démodé par le grec démotique (populaire), +% mais a laissé d'importantes traces dans la langue grecque moderne.} +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*greek-polykatha> +\ProvidesFile{greek-polykatha.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. +%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\plftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\plttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\stctitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% + ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% +\def\slftitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +\def\slttitle{\localgreek% +{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% + ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Guarani'' language: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~guarani~>>: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{guarani}'' (guaraní) language is the main language spoken in Paraguay. +% Very often, a mixture of Guaraní and Spanish, known as Jopará or Yopará, is spoken. +% The titles are taken from the \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} file by \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. +% A special input encoding (\xfile{win-gn.def}) is needed. +% These files are available on the CTAN archives. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue «~\lopt{guarani}~» (guaraní) est la langue principale parlée au Paraguay. +% Très souvent, un mélange de guaraní et d'espagnol, appelé «~jopará~» ou «~yopará~», est utilisé. +% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} de \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. +% Un codage d'entrée spécial (\xfile{win-gn.def}) est nécessaire. +% Ces fichiers sont disponibles sur les archives CTAN. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*guarani> +\ProvidesFile{guarani.mld}[2005/08/26]% +%% Guaraní titles from guarani.ldf by Javier Bezos. Input encoding win-gn.def needed. +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul1'' language: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1} +% \else\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul1~>>: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.426693630\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.573306370\iwidth} + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.677187948\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.322812052\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% Korean language was originally written using the Chinese characters; it is now mainly written in Hangûl, the +% Korean writing system, optionally incorporating Hanja to write Sino-Korean words~\cite{venkatesan}. +% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. +% +% +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language (korean in hangûl script, first variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% +% \lneed{2} +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% La +% langue coréenne était originellement écrite en caractères chinois; elle est actuellement principalement +% écrite en caractères hangûl, en incorporant éventuellement des caractères hanja pour écrire des mots +% sino-coréens~\cite{venkatesan}. Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}. +% +% +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl première variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% +% \lneed{2} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul1> +\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul1}% +%% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul2'' language: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul2~>>: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language (korean in hangûl script, second variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% +% \lneed{3} +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Voir aussi les variantes dans les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul2> +\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul2}% +%% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003), Hangul captions +%% char. set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul3'' language: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixmldo{hangul3} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul3~>>: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixfile{hangul3} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language (korean in hangûl script, third variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul2.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul2.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul3.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul3.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul3> +\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul3}% +%% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2 +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hangul4'' language: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hangul4~>>: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language (korean in hangûl script, fourth variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul4.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul4.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul4> +\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul4}% +%% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg +%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2, +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), +%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{9} +% \section{``Hangul-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8} +% \or\relax +% \lneed{8} +% \section{Langue <<~hangul-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language (korean in hangûl script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken +% from the file \xfile{u8hangul.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. Input encoding is UTF-8. +% +% \lneed{3} +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{u8hangul.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8. +% +% \lneed{4} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hangul-u8> +\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hangul-u8}% +%% Hangul captions for Lambda. From the file u8hangul.tex +%% of the HLaTeX package by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hanja1'' language: \uxmldo{hanja1.mld}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hanja1~>>: \uxmldo{hanja1}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language (korean in the old script hanja, first variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hanja.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, première variante) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{hanja.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi +% +% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hanja1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hanja1> +\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja1}% +%% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg , Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), +%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hanja2'' language: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hanja2~>>: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language (Korean in the old script hanja, second variant) are taken from the file +% \xfile{hanja.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, seconde variante) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{hanja.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi +% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}. +% \fi +% \end{SMOOTH} +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hanja2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hanja2> +\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja2}% +%% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs +%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg . +%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), +%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung). Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hanja-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hanja-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language (korean in hanja script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken from the file +% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% Input encoding is UTF-8. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}. +% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. +% +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hanja, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hanja-u8> +\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hanja-u8}% +%% Hanja captions for Lambda. From the file hanja-u8.tex of the HLaTeX package +%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hebrew'' language: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hebrew~>>: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{hebrew}'' language (\emph{ivrit}) are taken from +% the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), +% with the associated fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}. +% See the hebrew alphabet (\emph{alefbet}): \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew}~>> (hébreu, \emph{ivrit}) sont tirés du +% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), +% avec les fontes associées. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}. +% Voir l'alphabet (\emph{alefbet}) hébreu: \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hebrew> +\ProvidesFile{hebrew.mld}[2001/02/28]% +%% Hebrew titles. Need hebrew fonts (see arabtex documentation) +\def\ptctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% +\def\plftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% +\def\plttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% +\def\mtctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% +\def\mlftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% +\def\mlttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% +\def\stctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% +\def\slftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% +\def\slttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% +% +% \end{macrocode} + +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hebrew2'' language: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hebrew2~>>: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{hebrew2}'' language are taken from the file \xfile{hebrew.dtx} +% (by \xname{Boris}{Lavva} and \name{Rama}{Porrat}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, which should be +% used, with the associated fonts and encodings. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew2}~>> (hébreu, une variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{hebrew.dtx} +% (de \name{Boris}{Lavva} et \name{Rama}{Porrat}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, qui +% devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes et codages associés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hebrew2> +\ProvidesFile{hebrew2.mld}[2006/01/11]% +%% From hebrew.dtx in the Babel package. Boris Lavva (lavva@tx.technion.ac.il) +%% Need hebrew fonts. +\def\ptctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % + \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\plftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % + \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\plttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ + \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% +\def\mtctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % + \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\mlftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % + \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\mlttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ + \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% +\def\stctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % + \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\slftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % + \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% +\def\slttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ + \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hindi'' language: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hindi~>>: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{hindi}'' language is just like ``\lopt{devanagari}'', +% so we just load \xfile{devanagari.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{hindi}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>>, donc nous +% chargeons \xfile{devanagari.mld} simplement (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hindi> +\ProvidesFile{hindi.mld}[2006/08/24]\mtcselectlanguage{devanagari}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hindi-modern'' language: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hindi-modern~>>: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.417475728\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.582524272\iwidth} + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \lneed{6} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{hindi-modern}'' language are taken from the \xfile{captions.dn} file +% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% in the Devan\=agar\={\i} +% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) after conversion. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. Specific fonts are required. +% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hindi-modern}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{captions.dn} +% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) +% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}), après conversion. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. +% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. +% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macro}{\dn} +% \begin{macro}{\qva} +% \begin{macro}{\re} +% \begin{macro}{\rs} +% \begin{macro}{\2} +% \begin{macro}{\8} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hindi-modern> +\ProvidesFile{hindi-modern.mld}[2006/08/29]% +%% Hindi modern titles from captions.dn in ``Devanagari for TeX'' +%% by Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k & +%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik +\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% +\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% +\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Hungarian'' language: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~hungarian~>>: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{hungarian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language, +% so we load \xfile{magyar.mld}. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>, donc nous chargeons +% \xfile{magyar.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*hungarian> +\ProvidesFile{hungarian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Icelandic'' language: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~icelandic~>>: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{icelandic}'' language (\emph{íslenska}) are taken from the \xfile{icelandic.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. See also~\cite{icelandic2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{icelandic}~>> (islandais, \emph{íslenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{icelandic.dtx} +% (par \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. Voir aussi~\cite{icelandic2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*icelandic> +\ProvidesFile{icelandic.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% From icelandic.dtx (babel). Needs inputenc with 8-bits encoding. Árnason, Einar +\def\ptctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% +\def\plftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% +\def\plttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% +\def\mtctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% +\def\mlftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% +\def\mlttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% +\def\stctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% +\def\slftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% +\def\slttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Indon'' language: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~indon~>>: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{indon}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{indon}~>> (indon) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*indon> +\ProvidesFile{indon.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Indonesian'' language: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~indonesian~>>: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{indonesian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{indonesian}~>> (indonésien) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*indonesian> +\ProvidesFile{indonesian.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Interlingua'' language: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{interlingua}'' language are taken from the \xfile{interlingua.dtx} file +% (by \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}. +% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common +% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French, +% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy, +% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages\footnote{The site +% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua +% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want to read some sample of it.}. +% See also: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, +% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/} +% \item interlingua-english dictionnary: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/} +% \item interlingua grammar (in french): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html} +% \item somes sites in interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua} +% \item other sites about interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm} +% \end{itemize} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~interlingua~>>: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{interlingua}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{interlingua.dtx} +% (de \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}. +% Interlingua est une langue auxiliaire, construite à~partir du vocabulaire commun de l'espagnol/portugais, de +% l'anglais de l'italien et du français, avec une certaine normalisation de l'orthographe. La grammaire est très +% facile, plus similaire à~celle de l'anglais qu'à celles des langues néo-latines\,\footnote{Le site +% {\froff\url{http://www.interlingua.com}} est écrit principalement en interlingua +% (comme l'est {\froff\url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}}), au cas où vous souhaiteriez en lire un exemple.}. +% Voir aussi: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, +% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/} +% \item dictionnaire interlingua-anglais: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/} +% \item grammaire de l'interlingua (en français): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html} +% \item quelques sites en interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua} +% \item d'autres sites sur interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm} +% \end{itemize} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*interlingua> +\ProvidesFile{interlingua.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Interlingua titles from interlingua.dtx (babel). Kleiweg, Peter +\def\ptctitle{Contento}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de tabellas}% +\def\mtctitle{Contento}% +\def\mlftitle{Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellas}% +\def\stctitle{Contento}% +\def\slftitle{Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Irish'' language: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~irish~>>: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{irish}'' language (\emph{gaeilge}) come from the \xfile{irish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} and \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}: +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{irish}~>> (irlandais, \emph{gaeilge}) viennent du fichier \xfile{irish.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} et \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*irish> +\ProvidesFile{irish.mld}[2006/02/28]% +%% From irish.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Gunn, Marion & Grant, Fraser +\def\ptctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% +\def\plftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% +\def\mtctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% +\def\mlftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% +\def\stctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% +\def\slftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Italian'' language: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~italian~>>: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.55\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.45\iwidth} + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language (\emph{italiano}) come from the file \xfile{italian.dtx} +% (by \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} and \name{Claudio}{Beccari}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian}~>> (italien, \emph{italiano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{italian.dtx} +% (de \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} et \name{Claudio}{Beccari}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*italian> +\ProvidesFile{italian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Italian titles from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors. +%% Maurizio Codogno (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it) & Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it) +\def\ptctitle{Indice}% +\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\mtctitle{Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\stctitle{Indice}% +\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Italian2'' language: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{italian2}'' language are the same as for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language, except at the part +% level (``Contenuto''). See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~italian2~>>: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian2}~>> (italien, variante) sont les mêmes que pour la langue «~\lopt{italian}~», +% sauf au niveau partie («~Contenuto~»). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*italian2> +\ProvidesFile{italian2.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Italian titles. Variant, from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors. +\def\ptctitle{Contenuto}% +\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\mtctitle{Contenuto}% +\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +\def\stctitle{Contenuto}% +\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}% +\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{7} +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese'' language: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese~>>: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.516379310\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.483620690\iwidth} + +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% There +% are several variants for the japanese titles. +% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language have been found (by a Google search) on +% the Web site of +% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}. +% +% \normalmarginpar +% But see also other variants in sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a +% plusieurs variantes pour les titres en japonais. +% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> (japonais) ont été trouvés +% (par une recherche avec Google) sur le site Web du Professeur +% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}. +% +% Mais il faut aussi regarder les autres variantes dans les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese> +\ProvidesFile{japanese.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese}% +%% Japanese titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. +%% From Kumazawa Toshiki +%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese2'' language: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language (japanese, second variant) are taken from file +% \xfile{JIS.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese2~>>: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> (japonais, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cap} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese2.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese2.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese2> +\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese2}% +%% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package +%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg . Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese3'' language: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language (japanese, third variant) are taken from +% file \xfile{JIS.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% +% \lneed{3} +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese3~>>: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> (japonais, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cpx} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont bien sûr nécessaires. +% +% \lneed{3} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Notez que les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas +% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{6} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese3> +\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese3}% +%% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package +%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg . Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC, preprocessed +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese4'' language: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language (japanese, fourth version) are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cap} of the +% \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese4~>>: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> (japonais, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cap} +% du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les +% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese4.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese4.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese4> +\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese4}% +%% From SJIS.cap in CJK package for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) +%% with LaTeX2e. Werner Lemberg . Version 4.5.2 (28/03/2003). +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese5'' language: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' (japanese, fifth variant) language are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cpx} of +% the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Special fonts are needed, of course. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~japanese5~>>: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> (japonais, cinquième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cpx} du +% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Regardez aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4} +% et~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese5> +\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese5}% +%% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package +%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. +%% Created by Werner Lemberg . Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) +%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS, preprocessed +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{11} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Japanese6'' language: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' (japanese, sixth variant) language have been found (by a Google search) +% on the Web site of +% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}. +% ^^A \lneed{4} +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~japanese6~>>: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6} +% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{japanese6}~» (japonais, sixième variante) ont été trouvés (par une recherche avec +% Google) sur le site Web du Professeur +% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}. +% ^^A \lneed{4} +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese6}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*japanese6> +\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mld}[2006/10/31]\mtcloadmlo{japanese6}% +%% Japanese6 titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. +%% From Kumazawa Toshiki +%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Kannada'' language: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixfile{kannada.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue «~kannada~»: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixgrf{kannada.mld} +% \fi + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{7.180851064mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% Kannada (``\lopt{kannada}'') (or Kannara) language is a dravidian language spoken in the Karnataka state +% (main town: Bangalore) of India. +% Titles are taken in the \xfile{kanlel.sty} package file from the +% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX} project~\cite{kannadatex}\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}} by \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} and \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}. +% Specific fonts are required. See the alphabet here: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}. +% \or\relax +% Le +% «~\lopt{kannada}~» (ou kannara) est une langue dravidienne parlée dans l'état Karnataka (capitale Bangalore) de l'Inde. Les textes pour les +% titres sont tirées du fichier paquetage \xfile{kanlel.sty} du projet +% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}~\cite{kannadatex}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}}} de \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} et \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}. +% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir l'alphabet ici: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*kannada> +\ProvidesFile{kannada.mld}[2007/02/22]% +%% From kanlel.sty of Kannadatex +%% (C. S. Yogananda yoga@math.iisc.ernet.in yogacs@users.sarovar.org) +%% (K. K. Subramaniam subbukk@users.sarovar.org) +\def\ptctitle{pariviDi}% +\def\plftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% +\def\plftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% +\def\mtctitle{pariviDi}% +\def\mlftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% +\def\mlftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% +\def\stctitle{pariviDi}% +\def\slftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% +\def\slftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Khalkha'' language: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~khalkha~>>: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ``\lopt{khalkha}'' is a synomym for ``\lopt{xalx}'', +% so we just load \xfile{xalx.mld} (see sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}): +% \or\relax +% Le <<~\lopt{khalkha}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{xalx}~>>, +% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{xalx.mld} +% (voir les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*khalkha> +\ProvidesFile{khalkha.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{xalx}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latin'' language: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin}'' language (medieval) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}. +% The latin +% language is still used by the Catholic Church and the Vatican for archives and some texts. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latin~>>: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin}~>> (médiéval) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}. +% La langue latine +% est encore utilisée par l'Église Catholique et le Vatican pour des archives et certains textes. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latin> +\ProvidesFile{latin.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Latin (medieval) titles from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\mlttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\slttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latin2'' language: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latin2~>>: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\ae} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin2}'' language (latin, medieval, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin2}~>> (latin, médiéval, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latin2> +\ProvidesFile{latin2.mld}[2007/04/06]% +%% Latin (medieval) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\mlttitle{{Tabul\ae}}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\slttitle{{Tabul\ae}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latinc'' language: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc}'' language (classical latin) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latinc~>>: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc}~>> (latin classique) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latinc> +\ProvidesFile{latinc.mld}[2007/04/13]% +%% Latin (classical) titles from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\mlttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\slttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Latinc2'' language: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc2}'' language (classical latin, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latinc2~>>: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc2}~>> (latin classique, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} +% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latinc2> +\ProvidesFile{latinc2.mld}[2007/04/06]% +%% Latin (classical) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel) +%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad +\def\ptctitle{Index}% +\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% +\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% +\def\mtctitle{Index}% +\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabvlae}% +\def\stctitle{Index}% +\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}% +\def\slttitle{Tabvlae}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Latvian'' language: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~latvian~>>: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.3649022507\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.635097493\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language\,\footnote{Note that ``\lopt{latvian}'' is the original name for +% ``\lopt{letton}''.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+letton}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>\,\footnote{Notez que <<~\lopt{latvian}~>> (latvien) est +% l'autre nom du <<~\lopt{letton}~>>.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+letton}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latvian> +\ProvidesFile{latvian.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% From latvian.ldf (Antomega project). +%% Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% +\def\plftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% +\def\plttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% +\def\mtctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% +\def\mlftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% +\def\mlttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% +\def\stctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% +\def\slftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% +\def\slttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Latvian2'' language: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file +% (by \name{Andris}{Lasis} and \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}) +% at~\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~latvian2~>>: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>> viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf} +% (de \name{Andris}{Lasis} et \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}) +% à~{\froff\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*latvian2> +\ProvidesFile{latvian2.mld}[2007/06/05]% +% Andris Lasis (andris_lisis@simms.lv) Ivars Drikis (drikis@lanet.lv) +% http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf +\def\ptctitle{Saturs}% +\def\plftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\plttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\mtctitle{Saturs}% +\def\mlftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\stctitle{Saturs}% +\def\slftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +\def\slttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Letton'' language: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~letton~>>: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{letton}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language, so we just load +% \xfile{latvian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{letton}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{latvian.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*letton> +\ProvidesFile{letton.mld}[2005/02/08]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Letton2'' language: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~letton2~>>: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{letton2}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language, so we just load +% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{letton2}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*letton2> +\ProvidesFile{letton2.mld}[2007/06/05]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian2}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lithuanian'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.442069741\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.557930259\iwidth} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{lithuanian}'' language (\emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf} +% file\footnote{Found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}.} +% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian}~>> (lituanien, \emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) sont simplement tirés du fichier +% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}\,\footnote{Trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}}}.} +% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lithuanian> +\ProvidesFile{lithuanian.mld}[2007/12/04]% +%% Lithuanian titles from lithuanian.ldf +%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip +%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt) +\def\ptctitle{Turinys}% +\def\plftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% +\def\plttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% +\def\mtctitle{Turinys}% +\def\mlftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% +\def\mlttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% +\def\stctitle{Turinys}% +\def\slftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% +\def\slttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lithuanian2'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{lithuanian2}'' language (variant) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf} +% file, found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}, +% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}. +% The L7x encoding and the Latin Modern fonts are needed. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian2~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian2}~>> (lituanien, variante) sont simplement tirés du fichier +% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}, trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}}}, +% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) +% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}. +% Le codage L7x et les fontes Latin Modern sont nécessaires. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lithuanian2> +\ProvidesFile{lithuanian2.mld}[2007/12/04]% +%% Lithuanian titles (variant) from lithuanian.ldf +%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20060928.tar.gz +%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt) +\def\ptctitle{Turinys}% +\def\plftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% +\def\plttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% +\def\mtctitle{Turinys}% +\def\mlftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% +\def\mlttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% +\def\stctitle{Turinys}% +\def\slftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% +\def\slttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \par +% +% \lneed{9} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lowersorbian'' language: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lowersorbian~>>: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Lower sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, +% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Lower Lusatia in the german +% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes +% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during +% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century). +% } (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) are taken from the \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% A shorter language name is \lopt{lsorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}). +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>> (bas sorabe)\,\footnote{% +% ^^A \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\interlinepenalty=10000\relax +% Le bas sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, +% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Basse-Lusace dans les \emph{länder} +% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves +% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale +% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle). } +% (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} +% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{lsorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar + + + +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lowersorbian> +\ProvidesFile{lowersorbian.mld}[2006/02/28]% +%% Lower sorbian titles from lsorbian.dtx (babel) by Werner, Eduard +\def\ptctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% +\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\mtctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% +\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\stctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% +\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Lsorbian'' language: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~lsorbian~>>: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{lsorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'', so we just need to load \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{lsorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*lsorbian> +\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{lowersorbian}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Magyar'' language: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~magyar~>>: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.588235294\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.411764706\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language are taken from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} +% (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} and \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, with help from \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) +% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. A synonym of ``\lopt{magyar}'' is +% ``\lopt{hungarian}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} for variants. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} +% (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} et \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, avec l'aide de \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. Un synonyme de <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> +% est <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} pour des variantes. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*magyar> +\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[2006/03/08]% +%% Magyar titles from magyar.dtx (babel). Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József +\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% +\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% +\def\stctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Magyar2'' language: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed +% in the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, +% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} and~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~magyar2~>>: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar2}~>> sont tirés d'une variante proposée +% dans le fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, +% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} et~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*magyar2> +\ProvidesFile{magyar2.mld}[2008/04/03]% +%% Magyar2 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel). +%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József +\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% +\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% +\def\stctitle{Tartalom}% +\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Magyar3'' language: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar3}'' language (third variant of magyar) are taken +% from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{The situation of the magyar language in +% the \pack{babel} package is not clear; some experimental versions exist.}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~magyar3~>>: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar3}~>> (troisième variante de la langue magyar) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{La situation de la langue magyar dans +% le paquetage \pack{babel} n'est pas claire; il existe des versions expérimentales.}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*magyar3> +\ProvidesFile{magyar3.mld}[2006/03/08]% +%% Magyar3 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel). +%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József +\def\ptctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% +\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% +\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% +\def\mtctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% +\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% +\def\stctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% +\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% +\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malay'' language: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malay~>>: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{malay}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{malay}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malay> +\ProvidesFile{malay.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-b'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-b~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.528700906\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.471299094\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-b}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% The Malayalam language is spoken from the western coast of +% Malabar to the extreme southern India, mainly in the Kerala state. It is one of the dravidian languages strongly +% bound to the Tamil language. +% The +% alphabet and the script are dated from the 8th or 9th centuries. +% This language option requires specific fonts (depending on the +% option of the \pack{malayalam} package). +% It should be used with the following options of the +% \pack{malayalam} package\,\footnote{There is a great variety of fonts for malayalam; hence I have attempted to limit +% the number of \suffix{.mld} files.}: +% \optp{aathira}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ambili}{malayalam}, +% \optp{anahka}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam}, +% \optp{chippi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gauri}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gopika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{jaya}{malayalam}, +% \optp{karthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam}, +% \optp{makam}{malayalam}, +% \optp{malavika}, +% \optp{mridula}{malayalam}, +% \optp{payippad}{malayalam}, +% \optp{periyar}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam}, +% \optp{revathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sabari}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sarada}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam}, and +% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-b}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% La langue Malayalam est +% parlée de la côte occidentale de Malabar jusqu'à l'extrême sud de l'Inde, principalement dans l'état de Kerala. +% C'est l'une des langues dravidiennes fortement liées au Tamoul. L'alphabet% +% +% et l'écriture datent du \textsc{viii}\fup{e} ou +% \textsc{ix}\fup{e}~siècle. +% Cette option de langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (selon l'option +% du paquetage \pack{malayalam}). +% Elle devrait être utilisée avec les options suivantes du paquetage +% \pack{malayalam}\,\footnote{Il y~a une grande variété de fontes pour le malayalam; j'ai donc essayé de limiter +% le nombre de fichiers \suffix{.mld}.}: +% \optp{aathira}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ambili}{malayalam}, +% \optp{anahka}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam}, +% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam}, +% \optp{chippi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gauri}{malayalam}, +% \optp{gopika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{jaya}{malayalam}, +% \optp{karthika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam}, +% \optp{makam}{malayalam}, +% \optp{malavika}{malayalam}, +% \optp{mridula}{malayalam}, +% \optp{payippad}{malayalam}, +% \optp{periyar}{malayalam}, +% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam}, +% \optp{revathi}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sabari}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sarada}{malayalam}, +% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam} et +% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-b> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-b.mld}[2007/12/04]% +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +%% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-keli'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli}'' language, +% with the ``Keli'' fonts, are taken from the \pack{malayalam} +% package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} and \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli}~>> (malayalam, écriture \emph{keli}), avec les fontes <<~Keli~>>, +% sont tirés du paquetage +% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} et \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-keli> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Malayalam: Keli fonts +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-keli2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli2}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts (keli second variant). +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli2}~>> sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (keli seconde variante).\ABK +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-keli2> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli2.mld}[2007/12/04]% +% Keli fonts (mkl) +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-mr'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-mr~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-mr}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts (traditional rachana). +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-mr}~>> sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana traditionnel).\ABK +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-mr> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-mr.mld}[2007/12/04]% +% mr fonts (rachana: mr1,...,mr6) +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-omega'' language: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue «~malayalam-omega~»: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is the Malayalam language implementation ``\lopt{malayalam-omega}'' +% based on \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (the version of \LaTeX\ for +% Omega) via the \pack{omal} package~\cite{malayalam-o} (by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}) of the Malayalam-Omega +% project\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}. As the titles contain characters in a special encoding, +% we must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. A lot of fonts are available via options of the \pack{omal} package. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% C'est l'implantation «~\lopt{malayalam-omega}~» de la langue malayalam lorsque vous utilisez +% \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (la version de \LaTeX\ pour +% Omega) via le paquetage \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o} (de \name{A.J.}{Alex}) du projet +% Malayalam-Omega\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}}. Comme les titres contiennent des +% caractères dans un codage spécial, nous devons charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. De nombreuses fontes sont disponibles +% via des options du paquetage \pack{omal}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-omega> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcloadmlo{malayalam-omega}% +%% from omal.sty (Alex A.J. indicTeX@gmail.com) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-rachana'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\C} +% \begin{macro}{\F} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana}'' language, +% with the traditionnal ``Rachana'' fonts (old lipi), are taken from +% the \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega} +% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana}~>>, +% avec les fontes traditionnelles <<~Rachana~>> (ancien \emph{lipi}), +% sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega} +% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-rachana> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana.mld}[2005/06/07]% +%% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, traditionnal. +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-rachana2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}'' language, +% with the reformed ``Rachana'' fonts (new lipi), are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}~>>, +% avec les fontes <<~Rachana~>> réformées (nouveau \emph{lipi}), sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-rachana2> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}[2006/01/13]% %% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, reformed. +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{9} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Malayalam-rachana3'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana3~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}% +% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macro}{\mm} +% \begin{macro}{\X} +% \begin{macro}{\<>} +% \begin{macro}{\C} +% \begin{macro}{\F} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}'' language +% are taken from the +% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% This language requires specific fonts (rachana). +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}~>> sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana). +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}. +% \fi +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*malayalam-rachana3> +\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}[2007/12/04]% % Rachana fonts (mr2,...,mr6) +\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% +\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% +\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Manju'' language: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~manju~>>: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{manju}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{bithe}'', +% so we just load \xfile{bithe.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{manju}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>, donc nous chargeons +% simplement \xfile{bithe.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*manju> +\ProvidesFile{manju.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{bithe}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{14.28125mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mexican'' language: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{mexican}'' language (\emph{español mexicano}) are taken from the \xfile{mexican.ldf} file +% (by \name{Luis}{Rivera}) in \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. +% Mexican is a spanish (castillan) dialect. +% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}. +% +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mexican~>>: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mexican}~>> (mexicain, \emph{español mexicano}) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{mexican.ldf} (de \name{Luis}{Rivera}) +% dans \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. Le mexicain est un dialecte de l'espagnol +% (castillan). +% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}. +% +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \def\LBAS{Less than 20\,000 speakers.} +% \def\LMED{From 20\,000 to 100\,000 speakers.} +% \def\LHAUT{More than 100\,000 speakers.} +% \else\relax +% \def\LBAS{Moins de 20\,000 locuteurs.} +% \def\LMED{De 20\,000 à~100\,000 locuteurs.} +% \def\LHAUT{Plus de 100\,000 locuteurs.} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mexican> +\ProvidesFile{mexican.mld}[2008/04/03]% +%% Spanish titles (from mexican.ldf) Rivera, Luis (jlrn77@gmail.com) +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi % <---- +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Meyalu'' language: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~meyalu~>>: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{meyalu}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld} +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{meyalu}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*meyalu> +\ProvidesFile{meyalu.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mongol'' language: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mongol~>>: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + + +% +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{22.8125mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{mongol}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% This language requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, +% \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2}, and \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% ^^A \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongol}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2} et +% \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% ^^A \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{8} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mongol> +\ProvidesFile{mongol.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Mongol (xalx) titles. Needs mongol fonts +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mongolb'' language: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld} +% This +% is an other variant for the mongolian titles, +% taken from the \xfile{mongolian.dtx} file~\cite{mongolian} (by \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}) +% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (hence the final ``\texttt{b}'' in ``\texttt{mongolb}''). +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mongolb~>>: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld} +% Ceci +% est une autre variante pour les titres en mongol. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongolb}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{mongolian.dtx}~\cite{mongolian} +% (de \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}) +% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (d'où le «~\texttt{b}~» final dans «~\texttt{mongolb}~»). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{mongolb}'' language use cyrillic characters and the X2 and T2 encodings and are derived +% from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{mongolb}~» utilisent des caractères cyrilliques et les codages X2 et T2 +% sont dérivés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et +% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mongolb> +\ProvidesFile{mongolb.mld}[2007/01/29]% +%% Mongolian titles from mongolian.dtx for the babel package +%% Dorjgotov Batmunkh (batmunkh@num.edu.mn) +%% Needs some cyrillic fonts and special cyrillic encoding T2 and X2. +%% Vladimir Volovich (TeX@vvv.vsu.ru) & Werner Lemberg (wl@gnu.org) +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax + \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% +\else\relax + \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% +\fi +\def\plftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax + \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% +\else\relax + \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% +\fi +\def\mlftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax + \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% +\else\relax + \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% +\fi +\def\slftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn + \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Mongolian'' language: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~mongolian~>>: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% This is an other name for the ``mongolb'' language, because +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} uses the name ``\lopt{mongolian}''. +% We just load \xfile{mongolb.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}. +% \or\relax +% C'est un autre nom pour la langue «~mongolb~», car le paquetage +% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} utilise le nom «~\lopt{mongolian}~» +% Nous chargeons simplement \xfile{mongolb.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*mongolian> +\ProvidesFile{mongolian.mld}[2007/02/05]\mtcselectlanguage{mongolb}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Naustrian'' language: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~naustrian~>>: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{naustrian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language +% (a revised version of the \texttt{germanb} variant of the german language), +% so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{naustrian}~>> (néo-autrichien) est un synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>> (néo-allemand) (une +% version réformée de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande), donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*naustrian> +\ProvidesFile{naustrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Newzealand'' language: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~newzealand~>>: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{newzealand}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', +% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} +% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{newzealand}~>> (néo-zélandais) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*newzealand> +\ProvidesFile{newzealand.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ngerman'' language: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ngerman~>>: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{ngerman}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A revised version of the +% \lopt{germanb} variant of the german language.}, so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{ngerman}~>> (néo-allemand) est un synonyme de la langue +% <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une version réformée +% de la variante \lopt{germanb} de la langue allemande.}, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngerman> +\ProvidesFile{ngerman.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ngermanb'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A variant of the german language, with revised spelling.} are +% taken from the file \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. +% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}, and~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une variante pour la langue allemande, avec une orthographe +% réformée.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian} +% et~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngermanb> +\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% New german (B) titles from ngermanb.dtx (babel). Raichle, Bernd & Schmidt, Walter +\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt % <----- +\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ngermanb2'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb2}'' language (revised spelling and +% short titles) are taken from the \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, and abbreviated. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb2~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb2}~>> (orthographe réformée et titres courts) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} +% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, et abrégés. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ngermanb2> +\ProvidesFile{ngermanb2.mld}[2005/09/27]% +%% New german (B) short (2) titles +\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% +\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% +\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Norsk'' language: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~norsk~>>: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.591188475\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.408811475\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.1875mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{norsk}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the +% \xfile{norsk.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help +% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés du +% fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx} +% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, +% avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \fi + +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*norsk> +\ProvidesFile{norsk.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Norsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard +%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset +%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\ptctitle{Innhold}% +\def\plftitle{Figurer}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\mtctitle{Innhold}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\stctitle{Innhold}% +\def\slftitle{Figurer}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Norsk2'' language: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{norsk2}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the +% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help +% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, and abbreviated. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~norsk2~>>: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk2}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés +% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, et abrégés. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*norsk2> +\ProvidesFile{norsk2.mld}[2005/09/27]% +%% Short norsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\ptctitle{Innhold}% +\def\plftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\mtctitle{Innhold}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\stctitle{Innhold}% +\def\slftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{``Nynorsk'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language\,\footnote{Created around 1800 +% by \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} to make a real +% independent and national norvegian language, in reaction to danish, from the various dialects spoken in the +% country. But nynorsk has never gained much popularity outside rural regions.} are taken +% from the \xfile{norsk.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help from +% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>> +% (néo-norvégien)\,\footnote{Créée vers 1800 par \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} +% pour construire une vraie langue norvégienne indépendante et nationale, en réaction au danois, à~partir des +% divers dialectes parlés dans le pays. Mais le néo-norvégien n'a jamais beaucoup gagné en popularité en dehors des régions +% rurales.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx} +% (par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de +% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*nynorsk> +\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Nynorsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard +%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset +%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\mtctitle{Innhald}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurar}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellar}% +\def\ptctitle{Innhald}% +\def\plftitle{Figurar}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellar}% +\def\stctitle{Innhald}% +\def\slftitle{Figurar}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellar}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Nynorsk2'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk2}'' language are variants of the titles of the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk2~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk2}~>> sont des variantes des titres de la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*nynorsk2> +\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Nynorsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) +\def\mtctitle{Innhald}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\ptctitle{Innhald}% +\def\plftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}% +\def\stctitle{Innhald}% +\def\slftitle{Figurliste}% +\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Occitan'' language: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~occitan~>>: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{1.\bigskipamount} +% + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% \lopt{occitan} language\,\footnote{I~used the site {\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} +% for the translations.} is still spoken in the south of France, +% from Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) and Toulouse +% (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) to Marseille (Marselha) and Nice (Niça), with many local variants. +% This bilingual street sign in Toulouse (Tolosa), like many +% such signs found in historical parts of the city, is maintained +% primarily for its antique charm; it is typical of what little +% remains of the ``lenga d'oc'' in southern French cities. +% See also~\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}. +% See also~\cite{occi}. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue occitane (\lopt{occitan} ou langue d'oc)\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le site +% {\froff\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} pour les traductions.} +% est encore parlée dans le sud de la France, +% de Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) et Toulouse (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) +% à~Marseille (Marselha) et Nice (Niça), avec de nombreuses variantes locales. +% Ces plaques de rue en deux langues dans Toulouse (Tolosa), +% comme de nombreux signes analogues dans les parties +% historiques de la cité, sont conservées essentiellement pour +% leur charme ancien; ceci est typique de ce qui subsiste de la +% <<~lenga d'oc~>> dans les cités du Midi de la France. +% Voir aussi {\froff\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}}. +% Voir aussi~\cite{occi}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*occitan> +\ProvidesFile{occitan.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Occitan titles (translations using http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx) +\def\ptctitle{Ensenhador}% +\def\plftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% +\def\plttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% +\def\mtctitle{Ensenhador}% +\def\mlftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% +\def\mlttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% +\def\stctitle{Ensenhador}% +\def\slftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% +\def\slttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Occitan2'' language: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~occitan2~>>: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The \lopt{occitan2} language provides an example of variants for the occitan titles. +% \or\relax +% La langue \lopt{occitan2} donne un exemple de variantes des titres occitans. +% \fi +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*occitan2> +\ProvidesFile{occitan2.mld}[2008/04/03]% +% Occitan titles (variants) +\def\ptctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de las figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% +\def\mtctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de las figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% +\def\stctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de las figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Polish'' language: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~polish~>>: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld} +% \fi + + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{polish}'' language (\emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) are taken from the \xfile{polish.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} and \name{Michael}{Janich}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish}~>> (polonais, \emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polish.dtx} +% (de \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} et \name{Michael}{Janich}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*polish> +\ProvidesFile{polish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Polish titles from polish.dtx (babel). Schalück, Elmar & Janich, Michael +\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\plttitle{Spis tablic}% +\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\mlttitle{Spis tablic}% +\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\slttitle{Spis tablic}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Polish2'' language: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~polish2~>>: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localpolish} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{polish2}'' language\,\footnote{``Polish2'' is a variant of ``\lopt{polish}''.} are taken from +% the \xfile{omega-polish.ldf} +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} and~\vref{s+mld+polski}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish2}~>> (polonais, seconde variante) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{omega-polish.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} et~\vref{s+mld+polski}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*polish2> +\ProvidesFile{polish2.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from omega-polish.ldf (Antomega). Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov, Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% +\def\plftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% +\def\plttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% +\def\stctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% +\def\slftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% +\def\slttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Polski'' language: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{polski}'' language (variant for polish) are taken from the \xfile{polski.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mariusz}{Olko} and \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}) +% in the \pack{polski} package~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~polski~>>: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polski}~>> (autre nom du polonais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polski.dtx} +% (de \name{Mariusz}{Olko} et \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*polski> +\ProvidesFile{polski.mld}[2008/01/15]% +%% Polski titles from polski.dtx. Olko, Mariusz & Woli\'nski, Marcin. +\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\plttitle{Spis tabel}% +\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\mlttitle{Spis tabel}% +\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% +\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% +\def\slttitle{Spis tabel}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Portuges'' language: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~portuges~>>: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The name ``\lopt{portuges}'' is another spelling for ``\lopt{portuguese}'' +% (see section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), so we just load \xfile{portuguese.mld}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Le nom «~\lopt{portuges}~» est une autre orthographe pour <<~portuguese~>> +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{portuguese.mld}: +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*portuges> +\ProvidesFile{portuges.mld}[2005/06/07]\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Portuguese'' language: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~portuguese~>>: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld} +% \fi + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% ^^A \def\ctextbf#1{\null\hfill\textbf{#1}\hfill\null} +% ^^A \let\ctextbf\textbf +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.35\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.65\iwidth} +% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} +% \reversemarginpar +% ^^A http://www.gastronomias.com/lusofonia/ +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{portuguese}'' language (\emph{português}) are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file +% (by \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}. +% The portuguese language is spoken in Portugal (with the islands of Azores and Madeira) , in Brazil, and in +% former portuguese colonies like Angola, Guinea-Bissau, Mozambique, Cape Verde Islands, Sa\~o~Tomé and Príncipe Islands, +% East Timor, and some old trading posts like Macao and Goa. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, because the titles are different in Brazil, even if the language is also portuguese. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{portuguese}~>> (portugais, \emph{português}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx} +% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}. +% Le portugais est parlé au Portugal (avec les Îles des Açores et Madère) , au Brésil, et dans les anciennes +% colonies telles que l'Angola, la Guinée-Bissau, le Mozambique, les Îles du Cap-Vert, les Îles de Sa\~o~Tomé-et-Príncipe, +% le Timor Oriental et quelques anciens comptoirs comme Macao et Goa. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, parce que les titres sont différents au Brésil, +% même si l'on y parle aussi le portugais. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*portuguese> +\ProvidesFile{portuguese.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Portuguese titles from portuges.dtx (babel). +%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro +\def\ptctitle{Conte\'udo}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\mtctitle{Conte\'udo}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +\def\stctitle{Conte\'udo}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Romanian'' language: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~romanian~>>: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld} +% \fi + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{romanian}'' language (\emph{român\u{a}}) come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file +% (by \name{Umstatter}{Horst} and \name{Robert}{Juhasz}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian}~>> (roumain, \emph{român\u{a}}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} +% (de \name{Umstatter}{Horst} et \name{Robert}{Juhasz}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*romanian> +\ProvidesFile{romanian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Romanian titles from romanian.dtx (babel). +%% Horst, Umstatter & Juhasz, Robert +\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\plftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% +\def\plttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\mlftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% +\def\mlttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\slftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% +\def\slttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{9} +% \section{``Romanian2'' language: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian2}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} and~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}. +% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~romanian2>>: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian2}~>> (roumain, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} +% et~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}. +% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*romanian2> +\ProvidesFile{romanian2.mld}[2006/08/03]% +%% Titles in RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx). Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl), +%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de) +\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\plftitle{Lista de figuri}% +\def\plttitle{Lista de tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\mlftitle{Lista de figuri}% +\def\mlttitle{Lista de tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Cuprins}% +\def\slftitle{Lista de figuri}% +\def\slttitle{Lista de tabele}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Romanian3'' language: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian3}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. +% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian2}. +% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~romanian3>>: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian3}~>> (roumain, autre variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) +% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. +% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian3}. +% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*romanian3> +\ProvidesFile{romanian3.mld}[2006/08/03]% +%% Romanian titles from RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx) variant. +%% Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl) +%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de) +\def\ptctitle{Tabla de materii}% +\def\plttitle{Indice de figuri}% +\def\plttitle{Tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Tabla de materii}% +\def\mlttitle{Indice de figuri}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Tabla de materii}% +\def\slttitle{Indice de figuri}% +\def\slttitle{Tabele}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian'' language: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian~>>: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% \or\relax + +% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} + +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount} +% + +% ^^A (RUSS +% ^^A RUSS) + + +% +% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \begin{macro}{\cz} +% \begin{macro}{\mz} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% +% for the ``\lopt{russian}'' language (\emph{russkiy yazyk}) are taken from +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian}~>> (russe, \emph{russkiy yazyk}) sont tirés +% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian> +\ProvidesFile{russian.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Russian titles +\def\ptctitle{Oglavlenie}% +\def\plftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% +\def\plttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% +\def\mtctitle{Oglavlenie}% +\def\mlftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% +\def\mlttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% +\def\stctitle{Oglavlenie}% +\def\slftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% +\def\slttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian2m'' language: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian2m~>>: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localrussian} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2m}'' language (``\lopt{russian2m}'' is a modern variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') +% are taken from the \xfile{russian2m.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. +% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2m}~>> (une variante moderne de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{russian2m.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian2m> +\ProvidesFile{russian2m.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from russian2m.ldf (Antomega project, russian modern) +%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% +\def\plftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% + ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% +\def\plttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% + ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% + ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% + ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% +\def\stctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% +\def\slftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% + ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% +\def\slttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% + ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian2o'' language: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian2o~>>: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localrussian} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2o}'' language (``\lopt{russian2o}'' is an old variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') +% are taken from the \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> (<<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> est une ancienne variante +% de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} +% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) +% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian2o> +\ProvidesFile{russian2o.mld}[2005/02/08]% +%% from russian2o.mld (Antomega project - russian old) +%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov +\def\ptctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% +\def\plftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% + ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% +\def\plttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% + ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% + ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% + ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% +\def\stctitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% +\def\slftitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% + ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% +\def\slttitle{\localrussian% +{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% + ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russianb'' language: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russianb~>>: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianb}'' language (``\lopt{russianb}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') +% are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}. +% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. The parttoc title varies depending +% on the presence of chapters defined or not by the document class. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianb}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianb}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) +% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} +% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}. +% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. Le titre des +% parttocs dépend de l'existence de chapitres dans la classe de document. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russianb> +\ProvidesFile{russianb.mld}[2006/02/15]% +%% Russian (russianb) titles from russianb.dtx (babel) +%% Lapko, Olga & Volovitch, Vladimir & Lemberg, Werner +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% +\else\def\ptctitle{% + {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% +\fi +\def\plftitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% +\def\plttitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% +\def\mtctitle{% + {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% +\def\mlftitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% +\def\mlttitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% +\def\stctitle{% + {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% +\def\slftitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% +\def\slttitle{% + {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space + \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russianc'' language: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russianc~>>: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\xalx} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianc}'' language (``\lopt{russianc}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'', +% used in the part of Mongolia under russian influence) are taken from the file \xfile{russian.def} in the +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est une variante du russe <<~\lopt{russian}~>>, +% utilisée dans la partie de la Mongolie sous influence russe) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.def} dans le paquetage +% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la +% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russianc> +\ProvidesFile{russianc.mld}[1999/03/16]% +%% Russian titles (Mongolia). Needs cyrillic fonts. +\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Oglawlenie}}% +\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-cca'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts. +% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} +% (by \name{Victor}{Boyko} and \name{Vadim}{Maslov}) +% file in the \pack{cmcyralt} package~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt. +% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty} +% (de \name{Victor}{Boyko} de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-cca> +\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca}% +%% Russian-cca titles. From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package +%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu) +%% Needs cmcyralt fonts and special input encoding. +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-cca1'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca1~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} file +% (by \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} and \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) +% in the \pack{cmcyralt} package\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}. +% \or\relax +% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} +% (de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} et \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-cca1> +\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca1}% +%% Russian-cca1 titles. From cmcyralt.sty in the cmcyralt package +%% with cmcyr fonts in alt encoding. +%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Alexander Harin (harin@lourie.und.ac.za) +%% & Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@phy.ncu.edu.tw) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lh'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lh~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LH fonts (``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language) are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} file +% (by \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}) +% in the \pack{LH} package~\cite{LH/russian.sty}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LH (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty} +% (de \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{LH}~\cite{LH/russian.sty}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lh> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lh}% +%% Russian-lh titles from russian.sty in the LH package +%% LH fonts in special encoding. By Sergei O. Naumov (serge@astro.unc.edu) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lhcyralt'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyralt~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LHCYRALT fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language) are taken +% from the \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRALT (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>>) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. The input encoding is ALT (code page CP866). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être +% générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est ALT (page de code CP866). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lhcyralt> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}[2006/03/10]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyralt}% +%% Russian-lhcyralt titles from lhcyralt.sty in the LHCYR package +%% LHCYRALT fonts in special encoding ALT (CP866). +%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lhcyrkoi'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrkoi~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LHCYRKOI fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language) are taken +% from the \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRKOI (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>>) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. The input encoding is KOI-8. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, +% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est KOI-8. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lhcyrkoi> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrkoi}% +%% Russian-lhcyrkoi titles from lhcyrkoi.sty in the LHCYR package +%% LHCYRKOI fonts in special encoding KOI-8. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Russian-lhcyrwin'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrwin~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The russian titles for the LHCYRWIN fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language) are taken +% from the \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRWIN (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>>) sont tirés +% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. The input encoding is CP1251. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas +% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. +% Le codage en entrée est CP1251. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*russian-lhcyrwin> +\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrwin}% +%% Russian titles from lhcyrwin.sty in the LHCYR package +%% LHCYRWIN fonts in encoding CP1251. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Samin'' language: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~samin~>>: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{samin}'' language come from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Specific fonts are required. +% ^^A +% ^^A \lneed{3} +% Note that several Sámi dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden, +% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there will eventually be a need for more \suffix{.dtx} +% files for, e.g., Lule and South Sámi. +% Hence the (artificial) name \xfile{samin.dtx} (and not \uxfile{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sámi +% case\,\footnote{Adapted from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file.}. These dialects and languages are part of +% the Finnic group. See also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{samin}~>> (Sámi (ou Sâme) du Nord) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{samin.dtx} +% (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. +% ^^A +% ^^A \lneed{3} +% Notez que plusieurs dialectes ou langues Sámi/Sâme sont parlés en Finlande, Norvège, Suède et dans la péninsule +% de Kola (Russie). Les alphabets sont différents, donc il y~aurait éventuellement besoin de plusieurs +% fichiers \suffix{.dtx} pour, par exemple, le Lule et le Sámi (ou Sâme) du Sud. +% D'où le nom (artificiel) \xfile{samin.dtx} (et non pas \uxfile{sami.dtx} ou analogue) dans le cas du +% Sámi (Sâme) du Nord\,\footnote{D'après le fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}.}. Ces dialectes et langues font partie +% du groupe finnois. Voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*samin> +\ProvidesFile{samin.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% North Sámi (samin) titles from samin.dtx (babel). Jernsletten, Regnor +\def\ptctitle{Sisdoallu}% +\def\plftitle{Govvosat}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeallat}% +\def\mtctitle{Sisdoallu}% +\def\mlftitle{Govvosat}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeallat}% +\def\stctitle{Sisdoallu}% +\def\slftitle{Govvosat}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeallat}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Scottish'' language: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~scottish~>>: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.275526742\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.358184765\iwidth} +% \setlength{\iwidth}{.366288493\iwidth} + +% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{5.508474576mm} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{scottish}'' language (gaelic scottish, \emph{gàidhlig}) come from the \xfile{scottish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% in the \pack{babel} language~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{scottish}~>> (gaélique écossais, \emph{gàidhlig}) sont tirés du fichier \uxfile{scottish.dtx} +% (de \name{Fraser}{Grant}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*scottish> +\ProvidesFile{scottish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Scottish titles from scottish.dtx (babel). Grant, Fraser +\def\ptctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% +\def\plftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% +\def\plttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% +\def\mtctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% +\def\mlftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% +\def\mlttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% +\def\stctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% +\def\slftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% +\def\slttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Serbian'' language: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~serbian~>>: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.500713267\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.499286733\iwidth} + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{serbian}'' (serbocroatian) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) language are taken from the \xfile{serbian.dtx} file +% (by \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} and \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}. +% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet +% (a variant). +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} . +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbian}~>> (serbocroate) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{serbian.dtx} +% (de \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} et \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}. +% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores +% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*serbian> +\ProvidesFile{serbian.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Serbian titles in serbian.dtx (babel). Muhamedagi\'{c}, Dejan & Slobodan, Jankovic +\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\plftitle{Slike}% +\def\plttitle{Tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\mlftitle{Slike}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% +\def\slftitle{Slike}% +\def\slttitle{Tabele}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{6} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Serbianc'' language: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~serbianc~>>: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language\,\footnote{The ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language is written +% with cyrillic characters.} have been gently provided by \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} and \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. +% Cyrillic fonts are required. +% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet +% (a variant). +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> (serbe cyrillique)\,\footnote{La langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> est +% écrite en caractères cyrilliques.} ont été aimablement fournis par \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} et +% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises. +% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores +% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante). +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}. +% \fi +% ^^A %% Abt. Biophysikalische Chemie | Küster +% \lneed{14} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*serbianc> +\ProvidesFile{serbianc.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Serbian cyrillic titles. Marko Èehaja Internut@Thetaworld.Org +%% Frank Küster, Biozentrum der Univ. Basel, frank@kuesterei.ch +\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% +\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% +\def\plttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% +\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% +\def\mlttitle{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% +\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% +\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% +\def\slttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5}% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Slovak'' language: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~slovak~>>: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld} +% \fi + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{slovak}'' language (\emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the \xfile{slovak.dtx} file +% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} and \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovak}~>> (slovaque, \emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovak.dtx} +% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} et \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3}% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*slovak> +\ProvidesFile{slovak.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Slovak titles from slovak.dtx (babel). Chlebîková, Jana & Schlemmer, Tobias. T1 encoding. +\def\ptctitle{Obsah}% +\def\plftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% +\def\plttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% +\def\mtctitle{Obsah}% +\def\mlftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% +\def\mlttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% +\def\stctitle{Obsah}% +\def\slftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% +\def\slttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Slovene'' language: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~slovene~>>: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% slovene language (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) is spoken in Slovenia, but somewhat also in Italy (Frioul), in Austria (Carinthia and Styria), in +% Hungary (Szlovénviék and Porabje), in West Germany and Sweden. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue slovène (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) est parlée en Slovénie, mais un peu aussi en Italie (Frioul), en Autriche (Carinthie et Styrie), en +% Hongrie (Szlovénviék et Porabje), en Allemagne de l'Ouest et en Suède. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{slovene}'' language come from the \xfile{slovene.dtx} file +% (by \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} and \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovene}~>> (slovène) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovene.dtx} +% (de \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} et \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*slovene> +\ProvidesFile{slovene.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Slovene titles from slovene.dtx (babel). Zavrtanik, Danilo & \v{Z}lajpah, Leon +\def\ptctitle{Kazalo}% +\def\plftitle{Slike}% +\def\plttitle{Tabele}% +\def\mtctitle{Kazalo}% +\def\mlftitle{Slike}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% +\def\stctitle{Kazalo}% +\def\slftitle{Slike}% +\def\slttitle{Tabele}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{10} +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish'' language: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish~>>: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld} +% \fi + + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{spanish}'' (\emph{español, castellano}) language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialy by \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}. +% Note that the ``\lopt{spanish}'' language is in +% fact ``\lopt{castillan}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). But note also that other languages are spoken in Spain: ``basque'' +% (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), ``\lopt{catalan}'' (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), and ``\lopt{galician}'' +% (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). Note that ``\lopt{spanish2}'' is a version of ``\lopt{spanish}'' +% with shorter titles (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}). +% And ``\lopt{spanish3}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) is a version for +% the \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} project; some titles are +% differents. +% And ``\lopt{spanish4}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{spanish}'' where \com{ptctitle} is shorter for +% articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) (\emph{español, castellano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} +% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialement par \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}. +% Notez que le <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) est en fait le <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). +% Mais notez aussi que d'autres langues sont parlées en Espagne: <<~\lopt{basque}~>> (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> +% (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), et <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien) (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). +% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> avec des titres plus courts +% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}). +% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) est une variante pour le +% projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}; certains titres sont différents. +% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> où \com{ptctitle} est plus court +% pour les articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}). +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish> +\ProvidesFile{spanish.mld}[2008/04/03]% +%% Spanish titles from spanish.dtx (babel) by Bezos, Javier & CervanTeX +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}\fi +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish2'' language: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file in +% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}, +% but made shorter for chapter and section levels. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish2~>>: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> (espagnol deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}, +% mais abrégés pour les niveaux chapitre et section. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish2> +\ProvidesFile{spanish2.mld}[2008/04/03]% +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}% +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% +\def\mtctitle{Contenido}% +\def\mlftitle{Figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{Tablas}% +\def\stctitle{Contenido}% +\def\slftitle{Figuras}% +\def\slttitle{Tablas}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish3'' language: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish3~>>: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\localspanish} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish3}'' language are taken from the \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} file +% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) +% of the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (espagnol troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier +% \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) du projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish3> +\ProvidesFile{spanish3.mld}[2005/09/06]% +%% Spanish titles from omega-spanish.ldf of the Antomega project. +\def\ptctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% +\def\plftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% +\def\plttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% +\def\mtctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% +\def\mlftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% +\def\mlttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% +\def\stctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% +\def\slftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% +\def\slttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Spanish4'' language: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish4}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) +% from the \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} package~\cite{spanish4}. +% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~spanish4~>>: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} +% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}) +% du paquetage \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}~\cite{spanish4}. +% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*spanish4> +\ProvidesFile{spanish4.mld}[2006/01/19]% +%% Spanish titles (from spanish.dtx in CervanTeX) Bezos, Javier +\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax +\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi +\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +%% +\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% +\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% +\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Swahili'' language: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~swahili~>>: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld} +% \fi + +% ^^A (SWA +% ^^A SWA) +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{swahili}'' language (\emph{kiswahili}) are taken from the \emph{obsolete} +% \xfile{swahili.tex} file\,\footnote{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}}, +% with adaptations and corrections given on the +% \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group (messages 57662, 57713, and 57717) by \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} +% and \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swahili}~>> (\emph{kiswahili}) sont tirés +% du fichier \emph{obsolète} \xfile{swahili.tex}\,\footnote{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}\,.}, +% avec des adaptations et des corrections données sur le groupe de discussion \texttt{comp.text.tex} (messages +% 57662, 57713 et 57717) par \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} et \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}. +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% Swahili is the main Bantu language and is spoken in East Africa: Tanzania, Kenya, +% Uganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar and in the area of the Great Lakes in the Democratic Republic of Congo (Congo-Kinshasa, +% formerly Zaire) and in the Republic of Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), in +% the north of Mozambique and the south of Somalia\,\footnote{\RaggedRight See +% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}, +% \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html}, and +% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}\,.}. See~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} . +% \or\relax +% Le swahili (ou «~souaéli~») est la plus importante langue bantoue et est parlée dans l'Afrique de l'Est: Tanzanie, Kenya, +% Ouganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar et la région des grands lacs dans la République Démocratique du Congo (Congo-Kinshasa, +% ex-Zaïre) et dans la République du Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), au +% nord du Mozambique et dans le sud de la Somalie\,\footnote{\RaggedRight Voir +% \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} +% dans~\cite{tlfq}, \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html} et +% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}}. Voir~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swahili> +\ProvidesFile{swahili.mld}[2007/07/02]% +%% Swahili titles from swahili.tex in articles: 57662,57713,57717 +%% in comp.text.tex by Giancarlo Bassi +%% & Enrico Gregorio +\def\ptctitle{Yaliyomo}% +\def\plftitle{Picha zilizomo}% +\def\plttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% +\def\mtctitle{Yaliyomo}% +\def\mlftitle{Picha zilizomo}% +\def\mlttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% +\def\stctitle{Yaliyomo}% +\def\slftitle{Picha zilizomo}% +\def\slttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Swedish'' language: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~swedish~>>: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.450276243\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.549723757\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.42\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.58\iwidth} +% \setlength{\cwidth}{.323437500\iwidth} +% \setlength{\dwidth}{.676562500\iwidth} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{swedish}'' (\emph{svenska}) language come from the \xfile{swedish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Sten}{Hellman} and \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, with a correction by \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}. +% The swedish language is spoken in Sweden and in some regions of Finland like +% the \r{A}land Islands. See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish}~>> (suédois, \emph{svenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{swedish.dtx} +% (de \name{Sten}{Hellman} et \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, avec une correction de \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}. +% ^^A +% La langue suédoise est parlée en Suède et dans certaines régions de Finlande, +% dont les Îles \r{A}land. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{7} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swedish> +\ProvidesFile{swedish.mld}[2006/01/13]% +%% Swedish titles from swedish.dtx (babel). Hellman, Sten & Östhols, Erik +\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\plftitle{Figurer}% +\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% +\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\slftitle{Figurer}% +\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Swedish2'' language: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld} +% The titles for the ``\lopt{swedish2}'' language (variant for swedish) are taken +% from the \xfile{rapport.doc} file (by \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) in the \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} package~\cite{slatex}. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}. +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~swedish2~>>: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld} +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish2}~>> (suédois, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{rapport.doc} +% (de \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) +% dans le paquetage \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*swedish2> +\ProvidesFile{swedish2.mld}[2006/04/04]% +%% Swedish2 titles from rapport.doc (slatex). Mattisson, Sven (sven@tde.lu.se) +\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\plftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% +\def\plttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% +\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\mlftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% +\def\mlttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% +\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% +\def\slftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% +\def\slttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Thai'' language: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~thai~>>: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai} +% \fi + +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language come from the \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} file +% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% and use fonts +% of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, +% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) provides the same titles in its \xfile{thai.ldf} file. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> (thaï) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} +% (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% et utilisent des fontes du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. +% Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex}% (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, +% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) fournit les mêmes titres dans son +% fichier \xfile{thai.ldf}. Voir aussi~\cite{thaistd}. +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} +% \normalmarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load +% \xfile{thai.mlo}. See also~\cite{thaistd}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, donc +% nous chargeons \xfile{thai.mlo}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*thai> +\ProvidesFile{thai.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{thai}% +%% From thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system +%% by Werner Lemberg +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Turkish'' language: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~turkish~>>: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld} +% \fi +% \newcommand{\TUL}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} + + +% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} + +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% The +% turkish language (\emph{türkçe}) is spoken mainly in Turkey and in Cyprus. +% The titles for the ``\lopt{turkish}'' language are taken from the \xfile{turkish.dtx} file +% (by \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} and \name{Turgut}{Uyar}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}. +% \or\relax +% La +% langue turque (\emph{türkçe}) est parlée principalement en Turquie et à~Chypre. +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{turkish}~>> (turc) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{turkish.dtx} +% (de \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} et \name{Turgut}{Uyar}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*turkish> +\ProvidesFile{turkish.mld}[2007/12/18]% +%% Turkish titles from turkish.dtx (babel). Burc, Mustafa +\def\ptctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% +\def\plftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% +\def\plttitle{Tablo Listesi}% +\def\mtctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% +\def\mlftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% +\def\mlttitle{Tablo Listesi}% +\def\stctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% +\def\slftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% +\def\slttitle{Tablo Listesi}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{8} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \lneed{7} +% \section{``Uighur'' language: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~uighur~>>: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld} +% \fi + +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.308755760\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.691244240\iwidth} + +% \lneed{3} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{20mm} +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{uighur}'' and ``\lopt{bicig}'' languages +% are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{bicig.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues +% <<~\lopt{uighur}~>> (ouïghour) et <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{bicig.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uighur> +\ProvidesFile{uighur.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Uighur2'' language: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~uighur2~>>: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{uighur2}'' and ``\lopt{bicig2}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{bicig2.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur2}~>> (ouïghour deuxième variante) +% et <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{bicig2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uighur2> +\ProvidesFile{uighur2.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig2}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Uighur3'' language: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~uighur3~>>: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{uighur3}'' and ``\lopt{bicig3}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the +% \xfile{bicig3.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \or\relax +% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur3}~>> (ouïghour troisième variante) +% et <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier +% \xfile{bicig3.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uighur3> +\ProvidesFile{uighur3.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig3}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``UKenglish'' language: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~UKenglish~>>: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{UKenglish}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' (``UK'' is for ``United Kingdom''), so we just +% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{UKenglish}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> («~UK~» signifie \emph{United Kingdom}, +% le «~Royaume Uni~»), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} +% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3}\normalmarginpar +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*UKenglish> +\ProvidesFile{UKenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ukraineb'' language: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ukraineb~>>: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{ukraineb}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{ukrainian}'', so we just load \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% See section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{ukraineb}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ukraineb> +\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{ukrainian}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Ukrainian'' language: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~ukrainian~>>: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld} +% \fi + +% +% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} +% + +% +% \setlength{\wkdim}{6mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \lneed{2} +% \begin{macro}{\cyr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{ukrainian}'' language (\emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) come from the \xfile{ukraineb.dtx} file +% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Cyrillic fonts are required. +% Another language name is \lopt{ukraineb} (see section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>> (ukrainien, \emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ukrainian.dtx} +% (de \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises. +% Un autre nom pour cette langue est \lopt{ukraineb} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*ukrainian> +\ProvidesFile{ukrainian.mld}[2006/01/33]% +%% Ukrainian titles from ukraineb.dtx (babel). Shvaika, Andrij & Lapko, Olga +%% Needs cyrillic fonts +\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% +\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% +\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% +\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% +\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk + \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{12} +% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Uppersorbian'' language: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Upper sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, +% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Upper Lusatia in the german +% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes +% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during +% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) +% are taken from the \xfile{usorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% A shorter language name is \lopt{usorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}). +% \or\relax +% \begin{SMOOTH} +% \section{Langue <<~uppersorbian~>>: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>> (haut sorabe)\,\footnote{Le haut sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, +% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Haute-Lusace dans les \emph{länder} +% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves +% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale +% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{usorbian.dtx} +% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. +% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{usorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}). +% \end{SMOOTH} +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*uppersorbian> +\ProvidesFile{uppersorbian.mld}[2006/02/38]% +%% Upper sorbian titles from usorbian.dtx (babel). Needs cyrillic fonts. Werner, Eduard +\def\ptctitle{Wobsah}% +\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\mtctitle{Wobsah}% +\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +\def\stctitle{Wobsah}% +\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% +\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \reversemarginpar +% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``USenglish'' language: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~USenglish~>>: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The +% ``\lopt{USenglish}'' language (``US'' is for ``United States (of America))'' is just like +% ``\loptd{english}''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the +% languages themselves have some differences, like the hyphenation rules, +% see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, so we just +% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \or\relax +% La +% langue <<~\lopt{USenglish}~>> (américain, «~US~» signifiant «~\emph{United States (of America)}~») est +% comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait être vrai pour les titres des mini-tables; les langues elles-mêmes +% ont quelques différences, dont les règles de coupure des mots, +% voir~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*USenglish> +\ProvidesFile{USenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Usorbian'' language: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~usorbian~>>: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{usorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'', so we just have +% to load \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{usorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement +% \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. +% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*usorbian> +\ProvidesFile{usorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{uppersorbian}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Vietnam'' language: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~vietnam~>>: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld} +% \fi + + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language (\emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) are taken from the \pack{vietnam} package~\cite{vietnam} +% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}). +% Vietnamese fonts are required; see~\cite{han2003,han2008}. The vietnamese language is spoken in Vietnam +% and in the vietnamese diaspora. +% See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien, \emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) sont +% tirés du paquetage \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}). +% Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises; voir~\cite{han2003,han2008}. Le vietnamien est parlé au Vietnam +% et dans la diaspora vietnamienne. +% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}. +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar + +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*vietnam> +\ProvidesFile{vietnam.mld}[1999/03/16]% Vietnamese titles +\def\ptctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% +\def\plftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% +\def\plttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% +\def\mtctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% +\def\mlftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% +\def\mlttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% +\def\stctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% +\def\slftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% +\def\slttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Vietnamese'' language: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~vietnamese~>>: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The ``\lopt{vietnamese}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language. +% So we just load \xfile{vietnam.mld}. +% Vietnamese fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}. +% \or\relax +% La langue <<~\lopt{vietnamese}~>> est simplement un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien). Donc nous +% chargeons simplement \xfile{vietnam.mld}. Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises, Voir aussi +% la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}. +% \fi +% \lneed{4} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*vietnamese> +\ProvidesFile{vietnamese.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Welsh'' language: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~welsh~>>: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld} +% \fi +% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} +% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} +% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.346020761\iwidth} +% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.653979239\iwidth} +% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} +% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} + +% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} +% \reversemarginpar +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles +% for the ``\lopt{welsh}'' language (\emph{cymraeg}) come from the \xfile{welsh.dtx} file +% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}: +% \or\relax +% Les titres +% pour la langue <<~\lopt{welsh}~>> (gallois, \emph{cymraeg}) proviennent du fichier \xfile{welsh.dtx} +% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) +% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}: +% \fi +% +% \normalmarginpar +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*welsh> +\ProvidesFile{welsh.mld}[1999/12/06]% +%% Welsh titles from welsh.dtx (babel), by Braams, Johannes~L. +\def\ptctitle{Cynnwys}% +\def\plftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% +\def\plttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% +\def\mtctitle{Cynnwys}% +\def\mlftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% +\def\mlttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% +\def\stctitle{Cynnwys}% +\def\slftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% +\def\slttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \lneed{7} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Xalx'' language: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~xalx~>>: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% Xalx (Khalkha) is the name of the Mongolian nationality residing in Mongolia proper. +% +% Their dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with +% Cyrillic letters. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% Xalx (Khalkha) est le nom de la nationalité Mongole qui +% vit en Mongolie proprement dite. +% Son dialecte forme la base du Mongol écrit en lettres cyrilliques. +% Voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}. +% \fi +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xalx> +\ProvidesFile{xalx.mld}[2005/11/16]% +%% Mongol (xalx) titles +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} + +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Xalx2'' language: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~xalx2~>>: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\mnr} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% This is a variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx2}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% C'est une variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xalx2> +\ProvidesFile{xalx2.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Mongol (xalx2) titles +\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% +\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% +\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \lneed{5} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \section{``Xalx3'' language: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld} +% \or\relax +% \section{Langue <<~xalx3~>>: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld} +% \fi +% \begin{macro}{\xalx} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx3}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% This is an other variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \or\relax +% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx3}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} +% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). +% C'est une autre variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). +% \fi +% +% \lneed{3} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*xalx3> +\ProvidesFile{xalx3.mld}[2006/03/31]% +%% Mongol (xalx3) titles +\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% +\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% +\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \cleardoublepage +% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin} +% \let\NC\relax +% +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \part{Complements}\label{p+complements} +% \or\relax +% \part{Compléments}\label{p+complements} +% \fi +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} +% \parttoc +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty} +% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty} +% +% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax +% ^^A \backrefenglish +% ^^A \or\relax +% ^^A \backreffrench +% ^^A \fi +% +% \nocite* +% \def\noopsort#1{\relax} +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \FTRfalse +% \bibliographystyle{en-mtc} +% \begin{raggedright} +% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS +% \let\name\oname +% \let\iname\oiname +% \let\inameA\oinameA +% \let\inameB\oinameB +% \let\xname\oxname +% \let\vname\ovname +% \bibliography{minitoc} +% +% \end{raggedright} +% \or\relax +% \FTRtrue +% \bibliographystyle{fr-mtc} +% \begin{raggedright} +% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS +% \let\name\oname +% \let\iname\oiname +% \let\inameA\oinameA +% \let\inameB\oinameB +% \let\xname\oxname +% \let\vname\ovname +% \bibliography{minitoc-fr} +% +% \end{raggedright} +% \fi +% \adjustmtc +% ^^A NEW HISTORY BEGIN +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter*{Changes history\markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}}\label{c+history} +% \markboth{Changes history}{Changes history} +% \mtcaddchapter[Changes history] +% \or\relax +% \chapter*{Historique des modifications\markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}}\label{c+history} +% \markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications} +% \mtcaddchapter[Historique des modifications] +% \fi +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \bgroup +% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}} +% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet} +% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet} +% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% % +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{00} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1990/10/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Original version, by \xname{Nigel}{Ward}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1991/11/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Revised to reuse \com{chapter}, \com{section}, +% \com{subsection} commands transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically, +% assorted other cleanup (by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{01} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite, or file descriptor, +% for each chapter (a deadly sin!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}). +% \item Added \com{chapterend} to terminate the scope of a minitoc. +% (\emph{If you forgot putting} \com{chapterend} at the end +% of \emph{each} chapter, an entry for the next chapter +% will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to \xname{Yufan}{Hu}). +% \item Replaced the \env{minipage} environment by a \env{verse} +% environment, to allow a minitoc being split across pages. +% \item All the layout of the minitoc is in the +% command, so if someboby wants +% to redefine that layout, he has just to rewrite it (and only it). +% \item You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter +% by preceding it with \ucom{minitocno}. (\ucom{minitocyes} +% is useless for the user, because it is implicit \emph{after} +% the \com{chapter*} pseudo-chapters). +% \item Problems: you \emph{must} have \com{chapterend} to terminate each +% chapter with a minitoc. How about avoiding this constraint? +% \item The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with +% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similar to \dcnt{tocdepth} for the table of contents). +% \item At least three passes (3) of \LaTeX{} are necessary to +% get correct minitocs (the first pass creates the +% \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X} files, the second uses them (but they may +% contain wrong page numbers) and recreates them, +% the third should be ok). +% \item Works with \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} and floating bodies. +% Works with two columns (but the minitoc is composed in +% one column; how to make it to spread over the two columns?). +% \item Some mods added to work with \pack{xr} (external +% references). \upack{xr} version~5 is much more tolerant. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{02} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added compatibility with \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (the package +% \pack{hangcaption} (if present) must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package). +% \emph{Beware} to options modifying \com{@caption}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version 3 not released (buggy). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{04} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \ucom{if@realch} to avoid contents lines from pseudo-chapters to go into the toc. +% \item The package \pack{mtcoff} allows you to use a \LaTeX\ document +% with minitoc commands and to make them transparent: just replace the \upack{minitoc} package by +% \pack{mtcoff}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{05} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things in the minitocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{06} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, removed obsolete \com{caption} stuff +% (filters are much better) added compatibility with \pack{toch} +% (\pack{toch} makes a table of chapters; +% if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}; in fact, it is the ancestor of +% the \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} package). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{07} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item (\emph{major differences}) Completely rewritten, using tricks from \pack{xr} (the version~5, by +% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). The info for minitocs is directly stolen from the \suffix{.toc} file. +% \com{chapterend} and \ucom{minitocno} are suppressed, \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} +% and \com{faketableofcontents} added. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{08} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Spacing adjustements. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{09} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added mods for MS-DOS (search for MS-DOS, uncomment; search for UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows +% only 3 characters for extensions in file names (what a pity!). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{10} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Works now with appendices. Detects now the obsolete versions of \xfile{latex.tex} +% (\com{@inputcheck} or \com{reset@font} not defined). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{11} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcSfont}, font for section entries, \com{mtcSSfont} for subsection entries, +% \com{mtcSSSfont} for subsubsection entries, \com{mtcPfont} for paragraph entries, +% \com{mtcSPfont} for subparagraph entries. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{12} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use \com{kern} in place of \com{vspace*}, and added penalties (\com{nopagebreak}) +% to avoid a page break just before last \com{mtc@rule}. +% \item Also added a \env{samepage} environnement. +% \item Removed old commented out lines from previous versions. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{13} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{minilof} and \com{minilot} stuff. For MS-DOS, uncomment the definition of \com{SHORTEXT}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{14} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected space under \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} and added a \com{raggedright} +% setting to avoid ``underfull'' warnings. +% \item Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s). +% \com{mtifont} is changed from \ucom{normalsize\bs bf} to \ucom{large\bs bf}. +% \item Some modifications suggested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (thanks): +% \ucom{@newread} becomes \com{newread}, not outer version of \com{newread}; +% \com{empty} replaced by \com{relax} in the spare definition of \com{reset@font}. +% \item Removed the setting of \com{clubpenalty} and \com{widowpenalty} +% to \texttt{10\,000} (done by \com{samepage}), and \com{noindent}. +% \item Simplified processing of optional argument in \com{minitoc}, +% \com{minilof} and \com{minilot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{15} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, \com{secttoc}, +% \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, with some commands and parameters parallel to those +% for mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, +% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, +% with some commands and parameters parallel to those for mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{16} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Bug fixes (typos). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{17} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item `\texttt{n}' (null) synonym of `\texttt{e}' (empty) in the optional argument of \com{minitoc}, +% \com{dominitoc}, and siblings. +% \item Compatibility with ``\LaTeXe''. Thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (who found the problem) and +% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (who gave the hints to solve). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{18} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Make \upack{minitoc} really compatible with \LaTeXe. +% \item Introduce the language files as options. Many thanks to \xname{Michel}{Goossens} +% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) who was inspired by the code of the \pack{babel} package +% (by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{19} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, sections) not starting at 1. \com{firstchapteris} etc. +% commands added. +% \item \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule} etc. commands added. +% \item Corrected a bug in \com{c@mti}. +% \item Corrected \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}). +% \item Corrected appendix in articles. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{20} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected spacing before and after minitocs and siblings. +% \item Added the \com{mtcpagenumbers} and \com{nomtcpagenumbers} commands +% (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without page numbers. Default: with page numbers. +% \item Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles. +% \item Corrected vertical spacing. +% \item Corrected a problem with chapters numbered with uppercase roman numbers. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{21} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc} and \xfile{minitoc.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{22} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/10/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{23} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a missing line in \com{sectlof}. +% \item Works with document classes resetting chapter (or section) number at each part +% (thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}). +% \item Added the notion of ``absolute numbering'' for the mini-tables. +% \item Removed stuff for \com{firstchapteris} and co. These commands are obsolete. +% \item Removed appendix stuff. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{24} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The \com{protect} commands have been removed from +% the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} and \suffix{.lot} files, so some internal macros have been +% corrected to be compatible with the \LaTeXe\ release of December 1994. Thanks to +% \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} who did the work. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{25} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} and added \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} on a suggestion from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{26} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Language specific files are now named \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} (replacing names of the form +% \texttt{mtc}\emph{language}\suffix{.sty}) because they are not packages and it makes shorter names. +% \item Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower and upper sorbian; renamed +% ``esperanto'' by ``esperant'' like in the \pack{babel} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{27} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections for starred sectionning commands. +% \item \xfile{english.mld} loaded as default language. +% \item Added \xfile{vietnam.mld} and \xfile{arab.mld}. +% \item Renamed \pack{minitocoff} into \pack{mtcoff} to keep the name short. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{28} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1997/10/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the afrikaan(s), brazil, and ethiopia(n) languages. +% \item Added autoconfiguration of extensions. +% \item Added the \opt{shortext} package option. +% \item Added \emph{coffee} stuff. +% \item Added \com{addstarred} stuff (for starred chapter stuff). +% \item Fixed bug in parttocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1998/06/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item A typo corrected by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% should probably be +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% (a backslash was missing after \com{let}). Thanks to him. +% \item Added the bahasa language. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1998/12/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{29} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the bicig, buryat, mongol and russianc languages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/06/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the armenian language (from \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} package options (default: \optd{dotted}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb, and welsh languages. +% \item Corrected a bug in \com{sltname} definition (\texttt{mlt} should be \texttt{slt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{31} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package, thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% who has also simplified some code and fixed the infamous \com{chapter*} bug. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{32} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/08/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added very (too) numerous new commands for the mini-table features: +% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK +% \com{afterparttoc},\ABK \com{afterpartlof},\ABK \com{afterpartlot},\ABK +% \com{thispageparttocstyle},\goodbreak \com{thispagepartlofstyle},\ABK and \com{thispagepartlotstyle}. +% \item Documentation improved by \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}. +% \item \com{nomtcrule} corrected. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{33} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added new adjustment commands: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, +% and \com{mtcaddpart}. +% These commands add stuff in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files for the +% \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} and \com{part*}) problem. From a suggestion by +% \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a feature in \com{mtcaddchapter} and~co. with a blank optional argument. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{34} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added\imess{I0046} in the documentation a section for use with the \pack{tocbibind} package. +% \item Added \suffix{.mld} files for alternate names of languages: so, \xfile{american.mld} just loads +% \xfile{english.mld}, which contains the real definitions. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{35} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2001/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added macros to test if a file is ``empty'' (i.e.,~empty, blank or +% inexistent) or ``non empty'' (i.e.,~useful). I used some code from \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}. +% \item Added the \optd{checkfiles}/\opt{nocheckfiles} package options. +% \item Replaced \ucom{The@chapter} by \com{The@mtc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/02/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld}, and +% \xfile{samin.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcselectlanguage}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed the \lopt{estonian} package option (missing). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the interlingua language. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{36} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected an interaction with \com{tableofcontents} which creates a \com{chapter*} or +% a \com{section*}, perturbing \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} counters (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a spacing problem with empty titles (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \item Workaround for the \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*} problem. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed test for empty files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \lopt{bangla} language. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Reduced depth of \com{mtc@strutbox}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~\#37 dropped. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{38} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{pt} becomes \ucom{@pt} and \texttt{0pt} becomes \ucom{z@}. +% \item \ucom{hrule} and \ucom{vrule} replaced by \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX). +% \item Added \com{mtc@zrule} for zero-dims rules. +% \item Added the frenchb language (synonym of french). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changed the test for empty titles. +% \item Added the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} package options. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are applied to +% \com{parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Package options \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} removed and +% replaced by the \opt{insection} package option (like \opt{flsectionb}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected numbering of SLF, SLT. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \lopt{frenchle} and \lopt{frenchpro} language options (synonyms of \lopt{french}). +% \item Corrected secttocs, at least. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected some vertical spacings and struts +% (I added some mods by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, many thanks to him.). +% A lot of cleaning remains to do, but the release seems to be needed now. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{39} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/04/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Modern font commands for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class. +% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} and \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{@fileswfalse} and \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} +% for the \pack{notoccite} package (requested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); added the +% \opt{notoccite} package option (loads the \pack{notoccite} package). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added language options and \suffix{.mld} files for dialects: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), \lopt{acadian}, +% \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}). +% \item Added comments in \suffix{.mld} files using special fonts. +% \item Documentation: added a paragraph about making a TOC for +% appendices, eventually not listed in the main TOC. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation; corrections about rules. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{40} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the japanese and castillan languages. +% \item Removed the test on the presence of the \pack{multicol} package in +% \xfile{minitoc.tex}, because \pack{multicol} is a required package. +% \item Added a figure in \xfile{minitoc.tex} about the need of three compilations. +% \item Added some infos in \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Added\imess{I0042} a paragraph about a problem with the \pack{appendix} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} and \xfile{minitoc.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \optd{hints} package option. This option is still experimental; your advice is welcome. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (french documentation in PDF format). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{41} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in documentation. +% \item Message added if some sectionning commands are not available. +% \item Replaced \ucom{typeout} commands in \upack{minitoc} +% by the \com{PackageInfo} or \com{PackageWarning} commands; with the line number when useful +% (\com{@gobble} if no line number). Hence, the package is less verbose +% (\com{PackageInfo} writes only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, not on the terminal). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands, +% with a much simpler syntax. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \AmS\ classes: \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are incompatible with +% \upack{minitoc}, \class{amsbook} needs precautions. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item Added a hint for recommending the \opt{insection} package option. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about the presence of \com{dominitoc} and co. +% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. +% \item Improved documentation about hints. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about using short extensions with more that 99~parts or 99~chapters or 99~sections. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} becomes \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added many new language files: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, +% \xfile{chinese2.mld}, \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, +% \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, +% \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetrules}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, +% \com{nomlfrule}, \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, +% \com{nopltrule}, \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, +% \com{nosltrule}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, and \xfile{russian2o.mld} +% as new language files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added tests on the \uenv{mtchideinmain*}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} +% environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~42 not released. +% \item Replaced ``language'' by ``langue'' in the french documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed a minor typo. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Upgraded \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}, forgotten to be inserted in v41. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{43} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~43: consolidation of v40, v41 and v42. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed a big bug in \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{mtcoff.sty} about \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed the \ucom{mtcset}\texttt{.{}.{}.}\ macros. +% \item Moved history to the end of package code. +% \item Added the \xfile{INSTALL} file and a chapter about installation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed a typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}). +% \item Completed the hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{minitoc} and \com{tableofcontents}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added comments about fonts. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (upper bulgarian). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} after the \texttt{\bs\bs} after the top rule of each part level mini-table. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the arguments of \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed \com{markboth} for minitocs (\ldots) and secttocs (\ldots). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{spanish2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint for the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the \env{stc@verse} environment. +% \item Added \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed \xfile{portuges.mld} as \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in \com{mtcskip}. +% \item First version in \suffix{.dtx} format. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, and stuff; unused. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a typo in \com{@dosectlot}. +% \item Added \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Print the documentation with ``\optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{many classes}}'' to have all marginal notes on left. +% Added the (extended to 54 floats) code of \pack{morefloats} (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) to allow more marginpars +% and floats. +% \item Added \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the index correctly. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed rules in parttocs, partlofs and partlots. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed chapter-level entries in parttocs, when page numbers must be removed. +% \item Added a hint about the \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about attempts to insert empty mini-tables. +% \item Added a hint about the use of obsolete commands. +% \item The mini-lists of figures or tables should not be printed empty even if \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. +% \item Added \com{mtcsetdepth}. +% \item The \optd{hints} option is the default and no more considered as experimental. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added an error message in \com{mtcsetdepth} if the counter is not available. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{portuges.mld}, which loads \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added three variants for the malayalam language: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}, +% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}, and \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added method for bilingual documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format correctly the index in french. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changed ``Liste des Tables'' by ``Liste des Tableaux'' in \xfile{french.mld}, and in the french documentation, +% to stick to the choices of the \pack{babel} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is now generated by \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added ``OUI'', ``NON'', ``oui'', ``non'', ``O'', and ``o'' as true/false keywords. +% \item Compacted the code about detection of short/long extensions. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added ``VRAI'', ``FAUX'', ``vrai'', ``faux'', ``V'', and ``v'' as true/false keywords. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correctly set the \com{ifFTR} flag to have the names of months in the right language in the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Set the flag \com{mtcoffwarn@true} in \pack{mtcoff} if a command \ucom{mtcadd...} is found. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{castillian.mld}. +% \item Renamed \xfile{portugues.mld} as \xfile{portuguese.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld}, and \xfile{USenglish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppressed ``General:'' in the changes history. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Replaced some \com{PackageWarning} commands by \com{PackageInfo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Restoring the correspondence of each language option with a \suffix{.mld} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removing unused some flags \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} and \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}. +% \item Added the \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, and \com{decrementstc} commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Improved some messages in \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Added a test on the version of the \pack{placeins} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a note about \com{FloatBarrier}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a note about an alignment problem in the minitocs. Updated \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Made two versions of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments, +% depending on the presence of the corresponding depth counter. +% \item The \class{memoir} class is incompatible if too recent. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a comment about the position of the \ucom{do.{}.{}.} preparation commands. +% \item Corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{guarani.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}. +% \item Added an optional argument to \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, and \com{adjuststc}. +% \item Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcloadmlo} to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a test to forbid direct calls of \com{mtcloadmlo} by the user. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld}, and \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \item Added a note about the \tool{rubber} tool. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the glossary. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed the page numbers in the glossary. Done in the \texttt{*mk} scripts. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{44} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changes history (glossary) typeset in \texttt{RaggedRight}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld}, and \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item New method for history: embedded lists on 3~levels. +% \item Removed \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Cleaned the \texttt{*mk} scripts. +% \item Added the \optd{listfiles} package option. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected typos. +% \item Added the name of the \suffix{.maf} file in the message of the \optd{listfiles} package option. +% \item Improved the cleaning in the \texttt{*mk} scripts, using a~\suffix{.maf} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Load the patch for the \class{memoir} class only if necessary; do not load it if \class{memoir} +% is dated after 2005/09/25. +% \item Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred +% sectionning commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \opt{nolistfiles} package option. +% \item Added a hint about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages +% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Fixed some marginal notes in the commented code. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \item Use the \tool{xargs} Unix command in the \texttt{*mk} scripts to remove the auxiliary files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added a short intro to the ``Frequently Asked Questions'' chapter and to \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Begin adding the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the french \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Adding \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} in \xfile{minitoc.l}. +% \item Adding a note about the need of running \scrp{imk} before \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir}. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class. +% \item Added \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont}, +% \com{slfSfont}, and \com{sltSfont} for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed a bug about fonts for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables. +% \item Added \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld}, and +% \xfile{khalkha.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Added testing via internal \emph{quarks} commands in \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Changed ``table'' into ``tableau'' in the french doc, where necessary. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Fixed typos in the bibliography. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Avoid some warnings ``Token not allowed'' from \texttt{pdftex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Reordering a long sequence of citations. +% \item Added \og{} {\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} in the mailing URLs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Correcting an hyperlink in the bibliography (for the \pack{xr} package). +% \item Attempting to avoid broken URLs, using \env{quote}, footnotes and \com{par}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \item Corrections of layout (some headers, a table). +% \item In the warning message of the hint about a number of mini-tables greater than~99 (if short extensions), +% give the effective number. +% \item Reduce the width of some info, warning or error messages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections of layout (some headers). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections of french quotes. +% \item Added some PDF options. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Corrected an URL to the \AmS\ in the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Made some messages shorter (mainly by removing stars). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction of typos. +% \item Added some labels. +% \item Added a chapter with the (explained) messages. Not yet sorted. +% \item The documentation needs 4~\LaTeX\ runs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Made some messages shorter. +% \item Corrections in the list of messages. +% \item Updating the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the placement of floats on pages of floats: to the top. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation (thanks to \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Added \oexam{addsec.tex} +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the flag \com{ifundottedmtc}. +% \item Correction to make \oexam{addsec.tex} work. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added ``\texttt{*}'' as keyword for the first argument of \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and +% \com{mtcsetrules} (asked by \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Removed ``\com{MessageBreak}'' from the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Corrected the bibliography entry about \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Used the \pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage} in the documentation to fix a float positionning problem. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Fixing a float positionning problem. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added the bahasam language. +% \item Added the albanian language. +% \item Added the hebrew2 language. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the documentation for the albanian, bahasa, bahasam, and hebrew2 languages. +% \item Updated \xfile{french.mld} (removing abusive uppercase letters). +% \item Corrected the \xfile{italian.mld} file. Added the italian2 language. +% \item Added the australian and newzealand languages (english). +% \item Renamed the bahasa language as bahasai; bahasa is synonym of bahasai. +% \item Added the malay and meyalu languages, synonyms of bahasam. +% \item Added the indon and indonesian languages, synonyms of bahasai. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the acknowledgements. +% \item Added references to the new bibliographic entries. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed an instability in page breaks in the documentation of \xfile{japanese3.mld}. +% \item Added comments in some \suffix{.mld} files. +% \item Added \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in \com{mtcaddsection}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Limitation of the initial depth of displayed bookmarks. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added some comments in point~34 of the FAQ (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about the initialization of fonts. +% \item Added \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Load some packages before \pack{hyperref}. +% \item Added \xfile{spanish4.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the table about default titles. +% \item Corrected the keywords for \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item Added \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated documentation for \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} +% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter +% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added a note in documentation of \xfile{serbian.mld} and \xfile{serbianc.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (for Omega). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Simplifications in the ``Messages'' chapter. +% \item Corrections in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added the ``Postface'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the ``Postface'' chapter. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added package \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} for the ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' entry in the bibliography. +% Its author's first name needs a double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; je l'ai aussi +% utilisé pour composer d'autres mots vietnamiens. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} and \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in \xfile{russianb.mld} and \xfile{spanish.mld}. +% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. +% \item Place \com{mtcfixglossary} before \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the acknowlegments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Updated the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld}, and \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed languages \texttt{u8hangul} and \texttt{u8hanja} into \xmldo{hangul-u8} and \xmldo{hanja-u8}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint about repeated preparation commands. +% \item Moved up the declaration of some flags relative to the \optd{hints} option. +% \item Added \com{mtcprepare}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} to class~6. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Corrected the position of tables in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Corrected \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Hints about the \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} class and the \pack{alphanum} package, +% incompatible with \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use bibliographic styles with an~\texttt{URL} field, built with the help of \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, with their +% \suffix{.mlo} files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, with their +% \suffix{.mlo} files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \pack{mtcmess} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The messages are now numbered. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added FAQ~37 about \suffix{.mld} files and \pack{babel}. +% \item Added \xfile{french1.mld} and \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{english1.mld} and \xfile{english2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{45} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression of the PostScript versions of the documentation. +% \item Added \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld}, and \xfile{xalx3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{swedish2.mld}. +% \item The \opt{insection} package option loads also the \pack{flafter} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \uxgrf{lamed.eps} and \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} as images for the \emph{Lamed} logo (built from \uxfile{lamed.tex}). +% \item Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use \pack{sectsty} to better format section titles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \com{ifmtcsecondpart} to check if the document has exactly 2~parts. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item In the \opt{insection} package option, load the \pack{flafter} package \emph{before} the +% \pack{placeins} package. +% \item Added a figure about the float barriers. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added notes in FAQ~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package. +% \item Added comments about the \opt{insection} option. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Begin correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added notes in \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package. +% \item End correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. +% \item Analogous corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added notes about the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. +% \item Added \oexam{hide1.tex} and \oexam{hide2.tex}. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hide.tex} to \oexam{hide1.tex}. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Use \com{MakeUpperCase} in \com{markboth} for page styles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added a hint about the \pack{captcont} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld}, and \xfile{uighur3.mld} (as synonyms for the bicig variants). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Added description of \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} in the jargon. +% \item Added a comment about the \scrp{imk} script in \xfile{INSTALL} and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \item Added an entry about ``package'' in the jargon. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file. +% \item Added FAQ 44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added the \oexam{gaps.tex} example file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item Spacing correction in \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{46} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Comment about the \pack{thailatex} package. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Generate some example files with \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item Added chapter ``Example files''. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed chapter ``Example files'' as ``Examples of documents''. +% \item Use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} in some of the examples of documents. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the examples of documents. +% \item Added the \oexam{second.tex} example file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{amem.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} and \oexam{mem1.tex} example files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} and \oexam{scr.tex} example files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{subf.tex} example file. +% \item Corrections about the depth of minilofs, minilots and siblings. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{tsfc.tex} and \oexam{tbi.tex} example files. +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections of typos. +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Added the \oexam{2c.tex} and \exam{mtc-bo.tex} example files. +% \item Correction in \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in minilots and minilofs (and siblings) about depth. +% \item Added the \oexam{hop.tex} and \oexam{cri.tex} example files. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} and \oexam{mu.tex} example files. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation. +% \item The not released versions are flagged by~\textbf{\textreferencemark} in place of~\ensuremath{\star}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The ``About this document'' section becomes a starred first chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \oexam{hir.tex} and \oexam{hia.tex} example files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Corrections in \oexam{add.tex} and \oexam{addsec.tex} for the index. +% \item Added the \scrp{xmk} script to typeset the examples into PDF documents. +% \item Updated the scripts to treat the examples. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Do not forget \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} in the list of files. +% \item In the scripts, the backup directory (\xfile{OLD}) is now \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}. +% \item In the scripts, the repartition directories (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) are +% now \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{47} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} (from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system~\cite{arabi}). +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed \com{l@xsection}. +% \item Fixed some spacings in mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a \verb|\kernafter...| vertical kern between each minitable and its bottom rule. +% \item Added point~45 of the FAQ. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor correction in warning message \texttt{F0008}. +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \item Shortened the result of some example documents by using the \class{report} class in place of the +% \class{book} class (hence using one side printing). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{48} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fixed typos. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item No preamble in \oexam{add.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the TOC formatting. +% \item Increasing \com{textwidth}. +% \item Correction of the preamble problem in \oexam{add.bib} and all generated files. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Remove comments about spurious lines in preamble of generated files. +% \item Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \item Corrected the \com{name} macro (for the documentation). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Correction (conversion) in \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added error \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} if \xfile{english.mld} is not found to set the default titles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Modified the \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} to have family names of authors and editors in small caps and years in +% old style digits. Titles are in emphasis. The \xfile{frplain1.bst} style is also updated. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Update the bibliography. +% \item Renamed \oexam{add.bib} to \exam{mtc-add.bib}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{add.tex} to \exam{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{addsec.tex} to \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{2c.tex} to \exam{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item The \optd{listfiles} package option is now active by default. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed \oexam{app-mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{apx.tex} to \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{bo.tex} to \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{ch0.tex} to \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{cri.tex} to \exam{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{fo1.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{fo2.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{gaps.tex} to \exam{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hia.tex} to \exam{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hir.tex} to \exam{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hide1.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hide2.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{hop.tex} to \exam{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{livre.tex} to \exam{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mem1.tex} to \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mini-art.tex} to \exam{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} to \exam{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{mu.tex} to \exam{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{scr.tex} to \exam{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{second.tex} to \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{subf.tex} to \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{tbi.tex} to \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{tlc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item Renamed \oexam{tsfc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography (added the Pentaglot). +% \item Corrected the format of two tables about NFSS. +% \item Example documents in alphabetical order in their chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a figure about systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-syn.tex} example document file. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{49} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Slightly modified the layout of the list of files (``Installation'' chapter). +% \item Simplifications in the scripts. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added point~46 in the FAQ and example file \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Corrections in the bibliography and the bibliographic styles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added ``\textbf{+}'' and ``\texttt{-}'' as synonyms for ``\texttt{on}'' and ``\texttt{off}'', respectively. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Fixed typos. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added a table of some encodings. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppressed the ``Summary'' entry in the summary, but added it in the Table of Contents. +% \item Improving some tables. +% \item Added the \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo} files. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Corrections in formatting a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Combine four figures in one (with sub-figures). +% \item Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with +% \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Completed the list of the standard classes. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. +% \item Added\imess{E0036} notes about the mandatory presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item The validation of the language options writes only informative messages in the +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and, if necessary, gives only one warning message. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{50} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Removed old examples of documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex}, +% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex}, and \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS structure for \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Added an item about the \index{TDS}TDS in the jargon. +% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the warning message \texttt{W0094} with the list of the missing minitoc languages files (\suffix{.mld} +% and \suffix{.mlo}). +% \item Corrections in the bibliography. +% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \item Changed the names of the scratch directories in some scripts. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of +% the package) to the distribution. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{51} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the index: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, options, +% language options. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the index: names. +% \item Updated some \suffix{.mld} files with names of the authors of titles. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Miscellaneous corrections. +% \item The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin. +% \item Added a \com{ProvidesFile} command to the example files. +% \item Indexing the environments (not perfect). +% \item Indexing the files. +% \item Renamed the file ``\texttt{catalog}'' into ``\xfile{CATALOG}''. +% \item Indexing the counters and depth counters. +% \item The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{52} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction of index ordering. +% \item Default option in boldface in the index. +% \item Adding some informations about authors for language specific titles. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added fake sections in the ``Examples of documents'' chapter. +% \item Removed the preparation of the documentation in PostScript format. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format into PostScript format. +% \item Removed \xfile{duplex2v.pro}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexing the referenced commands. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected the name \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (first name before last name, the english way). +% \item Corrected some other names. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% \item Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new cyrillic encodings T2 and X2 in \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item Trying to use a recent version of the \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} package (2003/11/04, 4.01) to allow +% sorting, but still clashes with \pack{hyperref}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Balancing the columns in the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction of the indexing of the environments. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improving the index layout. +% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} which loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexing the names of authors. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the acknowledgements. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{53} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item Corrected \com{kernafterminitoc} and siblings. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a header to the index, to explain notations. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Changed the style of page and line numbers in the index. +% \item Updated \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Dangerous bend symbols are now in the right margin. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Improved the presentation of example files. +% \item Using the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to sort the sequences of citations. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction in table~\vref{t+TDS}. +% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} into \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Use the \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} option of the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to compress the +% sequences of citations; the \pack{hypernat} package must also be loaded (after \pack{natbib} and +% \pack{hyperref}). +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added changing the title of the parttoc for appendices in \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{54} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features. +% \item Indexing the features. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}. +% \item Some mini-tables are set on two columns in the manual. +% \item Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin. +% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added internal hyperlinks for messages. +% \item Load the \pack{hypcap} package for hyperlinks in the documentation. +% ^^A \item Modification of \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, and \scrp{pmk} to remove \verb*|\ | from the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table. +% \item Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type. +% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file. +% \item Added flagging of macros in example files. +% \item The 2007 section in the ``Postface'' chapter was garbled. +% \item More internal links in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added a clickable table of all messages. +% \item Improved column breaks in the index. +% \item Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter. +% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% \item Grouped \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} pairs in tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{55} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} package (incompatible). +% \item Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions. +% \item Improve page breaks in the documentation. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changed the color of hyperlinks. +% \item Revised the format of the headers. +% \item Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{56} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/07/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Added \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Page headers modified in documentation. +% \item Added stuff (files) for figures (maps) for many language areas. +% \item Removed the \suffix{.eps} files. +% \item Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}. +% \item Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Many minor typo fixes. +% \item Darker colors for hyperlinks. +% \item Updated and corrected the bibliography. +% \item Corrected a typo in the \env{ptc@verse} environment (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Corrections of typos in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments +% (thanks to \name{Andrew}{Bowden}). +% \item Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid +% erasing the (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file). +% \item Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% \item The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part. +% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package. +% \item Complete indexing of the messages. +% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to increase the width of the pages of the bibliography. +% \item Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% \item Updated \xfile{czech.mld}. +% \item Removed \ucom{l@xsection}. +% \item Graphic files are indexed separately. +% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \item Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy. +% \item Updated \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},\ABK and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% \item Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Suppressed parasite entries from the index. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{57} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections in examples of documents. +% \item Added \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% \item Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% \item Added maps of Manchuria. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Better captions for maps. +% Added maps for Italy, Karnataka, Germany, Mongols and China. +% \item Added \xfile{occitan2.mld} and \xfile{mexican.mld}. +% \item Added a map of czech dialects. +% \item Added maps of danish dialects. +% \item Added a map of the dutch language. +% \item Added a map of french dialects. +% \item Added a map of galician dialects. +% \item Added maps of german dialects. +% \item Added maps of hindi dialects. +% \item Added maps of portugese dialects. +% \item Added a map of the turkish language. +% \item Added a map of the vietnamese language. +% \item Added a map of the armenian diaspora. +% \item Added a map of the sami dialects. +% \item Added a map of the nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia. +% \item Added a map of countries where spanish is an official language. +% \item Added a map of the sorbian area. +% \item Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon. +% \item Added a map of the minorities in Poland. +% \item Added a map of the bengali diaspora. +% \item Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% \item Added maps of the basque dialects. +% \item Added maps of the latvian dialects. +% \item Added a map for the swahili language. +% \item Added the turkish alphabet. +% \item The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% \item Added maps of the languages in Europe. +% \item Added maps of Kosovo. +% \item Added a map of the languages in Africa. +% \item Corrected an error of message number. +% \item Added maps for Russia. +% \item Added a map of the districts of Slovakia. +% \item Added maps about Islam. +% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters. +% \item Added a figure about chinese characters usage in the world. +% \item Added a figure about chinese dialects. +% \item Added maps about writing systems. +% \item Added a map of the regions where Finnish is spoken. +% \item Shortened the ``Installation'' chapter. +% \item Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16. +% \item Files \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} and \uxfile{lamed.tex} replaced by \xgrf{lamed3.png}. +% \item Added maps of the indigenous languages of México. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{58} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} into \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. +% \item Added a simplified linguistic map of Europe. +% \item Added a map of polish dialects. +% \item Added a figure about the russian alphabet. +% \item Added a map about the russian alphabet. +% \item Added a figure about the serbian alphabets. +% \item Added a map of the provinces of Vietnam. +% \item Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references. +% \item Added a map of albanian dialects. +% \item Added a map of Norway. +% \item Added flags for many countries. Added a light gray frame around the flags. +% \item Added a figure about lusophonia. +% \item Added a figure about germanophonia. +% \item Added a figure about hispanophonia. +% \item Added a figure about italophonia. +% \item Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult. +% \item Added figures about francophones countries. +% \item Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries. +% \item Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries. +% \item Added a figure about russian-speaking countries. +% \item Added a figure about english-speaking countries. +% \item Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}. +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}. +% \item Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \item Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries. +% \item Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~corrupted PDF files. +% +% \item \textbf{60} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/07/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Minor correction in figure. +% \item Updated the bibliography. +% \item Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% \item Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file +% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but +% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} +% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% \item Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item \textbf{61} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2015/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert passed away in 2009. So this package +% is now looking for a maintainer. +% \item Reduce size of documentation, by eliminating flags and other +% images, from 25+mb to less than 2mb. +% \item Remove the \texttt{CATALOG} file, as it was redundant and stale. +% \item Use \url{mirror.ctan.org} for CTAN references. +% \item Done by Nils Ole Tippenhauer (\verb|nils_tippenhauer| at +% \verb|sutd.edu.sg|) and Karl Berry (\verb|karl| at +% \verb|freefriends.org|). They are not prospective future maintainers. +% \item No functional changes. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item \textbf{62} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2018/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item sources moved to githib \url{https://github.com/minitoc/minitoc} +% \item Correcttion to \verb|\@ifundefined| usage that generates errors +% in current latex (and didn't work previously) +% \item Repository set up by David carlisle but permanent maintainers still +% required +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \end{itemize} +% \end{RaggedRight} +% \egroup +% ^^A MAJ-E +% \or\relax +% ^^A FRENCH +% \bgroup +% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}} +% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet} +% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet} +% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} +% \begin{RaggedRight} +% % +% \lneed{5} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textbf{00} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1990/10/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version originale, par \xname{Nigel}{Ward}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1991/11/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Révision pour réutiliser de manière transparente les commandes +% \com{chapter}, \com{section}, \com{subsection}, et engendrer automatiquement +% le nom du fichier minitoc, avec en plus d'autres nettoyages (par \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{01} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nouvelle conception, pour éviter d'allouer un newwrite, ou descripteur de fichier, pour chaque chapitre +% (un péché mortel!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}). +% \item Ajout de \com{chapterend} pour terminer la portée d'une minitoc. (\emph{Si vous oubliez de +% mettre} \com{chapterend} à~la fin de \emph{chaque} chapitre, une entrée pour le chapitre suivant +% apparaîtra dans chaque minitoc.) (Merci à~\xname{Yufan}{Hu}). +% \item Remplacement de l'environnement \env{minipage} par un environnement \env{verse}, pour qu'une +% minitoc puisse se répartir sur plusieurs pages. +% \item Toute la mise en page de la minitoc est dans la commande, donc si quelqu'un souhaite redéfinir cette +% mise en page, il a juste à~la réécrire (et seulement elle). +% \item Vous pouvez inhiber la minitoc pour le chapitre suivant en le faisant précéder par \ucom{minitocno}. +% (\ucom{minitocyes} est sans objet pour l'utilisateur: elle est implicite \emph{après} +% les pseudo-chapitres \com{chapter*}). +% \item Problèmes: vous \emph{devez} avoir mis \com{chapterend} pour terminer chaque chapitre ayant une +% minitoc. Comment éviter cette contrainte? +% \item La profondeur de la minitoc est ajustable par l'utilisateur avec le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similaire +% à~\dcnt{tocdepth} pour la table des matières.). +% \item Au moins trois passes~(3) de \LaTeX{} sont nécessaires pour obtenir des minitocs correctes (la première +% passe crée les fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X}, la deuxième les utilise (mais ils peuvent contenir des +% numéros de pages faux) et les recrée, la troisième devrait être bonne). +% \item Fonctionne avec \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} et les éléments flottants. Fonctionne en mode deux +% colonnes (mais la minitoc est composée sur une colonne; comment faire pour qu'elle s'étende sur les deux +% colonnes?). +% \item Ajout de quelques modifications pour fonctionner avec \pack{xr} (références externes). +% \upack{xr} version~5 est bien plus tolérant. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{02} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} (s'il est présent) +% doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}). \emph{Attention} aux options modifiant +% \com{@caption}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~3 non distribuée (erronée). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{04} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \ucom{if@realch} pour éviter que des lignes de contenu provenant de pseudo-chapitres +% aillent dans la table des matières. +% \item Le fichier paquetage \pack{mtcoff} vous permet d'utiliser un document \LaTeX\ contenant des +% commandes minitoc et de les rendre transparentes: il suffit de remplacer le paquetage \upack{minitoc} +% par \upack{mtcoff}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{05} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un mécanisme de sélection pour ne pas écrire des choses superflues dans les minitocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{06} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de problèmes sur les chapitres dans la table des matières, retrait de code obsolète pour +% \com{caption} (les filtres sont bien meilleurs), ajout de la compatibilité +% avec \pack{toch} +% (\pack{toch} crée une table des chapitres; si utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}; +% en fait, c'est l'ancêtre du paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{07} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item (\emph{différences majeures}) Réécriture complète, en utilisant des astuces de \pack{xr} +% (la version~5, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). Les informations pour les minitocs sont directement prélevées dans +% le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Suppression de \com{chapterend} et \ucom{minitocno}, ajout de +% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} et \com{faketableofcontents}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{08} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajustements d'espacement. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{09} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de modifications pour MS-DOS (rechercher MS-DOS, et décommenter; rechercher UNIX, mettre en commentaire). +% MS-DOS permet seulement 3~caractères pour les suffixes dans les noms de fichiers (pitoyable\ldots). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{10} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Fonctionne avec les appendices. Détecte maintenant les versions obsolètes de \xfile{latex.tex}: +% (\com{@inputcheck} ou \com{reset@font} non définies). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{11} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/08/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcSfont}, fonte pour les entrées de section, \com{mtcSSfont} pour les entrées +% de sous-section, \com{mtcSSSfont} pour les entrées de sous-sous-section, \com{mtcPfont} pour +% les entrées de paragraphe, \com{mtcSPfont} pour les entrées de sous-paragraphe. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{12} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de \com{kern} au lieu de \com{vspace*} et ajout de pénalités +% (\com{nopagebreak}) pour éviter une coupure de page juste avant la dernière \com{mtc@rule}. +% \item Ajout aussi d'un environnement \env{samepage}. +% \item Retrait de vieilles lignes mises en commentaire dans des versions précédentes. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{13} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1993/12/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de code pour \com{minilof} et \com{minilot}. Pour MS-DOS, décommenter la définition +% de \com{SHORTEXT}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{14} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'espacement en dessous d'une \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} et ajout de \com{raggedright} +% pour éviter des avertissements \og{} underfull \fg. +% \item Correction de quelques problèmes d'espacement (en évitant des~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s). +% \com{mtifont} est changée de \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} en \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}. +% \item Quelques modifications suggérées par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (merci): \ucom{@newread} devient +% \com{newread}, une version \emph{not outer} de \com{newread}; \com{empty} remplacée +% par \com{relax} dans la définition par défaut de \com{reset@font}. +% \item Retrait du forçage de \com{clubpenalty} et \com{widowpenalty} à~\texttt{10\,000} (fait +% par \com{samepage}) et \com{noindent}. +% \item Traitement simplifié de l'argument optionnel dans les commandes \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof} +% et \com{minilot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{15} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} pour la classe \class{book}, +% de \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} et \com{sectlot} pour les articles, avec des commandes +% et paramètres en parallèle avec ceux pour les mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{16} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections d'erreurs (typos). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{17} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \og{} \texttt{n} \fg{} (nul) synonyme de \og{} \texttt{e} \fg{} (\emph{empty}, vide) dans l'argument optionnel +% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}, et analogues. +% \item Compatibilité avec \og{} \LaTeXe \fg. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (qui a trouvé le problème) +% et \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (qui a donné les indications pour le résoudre). +% \item Ajout de la notion de \og{} numérotation absolue\fg{} pour les the mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{18} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Rendu \upack{minitoc} vraiment compatible avec \LaTeXe. +% \item Introduction des fichiers de langue comme options. Grand merci à~\xname{Michel}{Goossens} +% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) qui a été inspiré par le code du paquetage \pack{babel} +% (de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{19} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de code pour numéroter les chapitres (parties, sections) sans commencer à~1. +% Ajout des commandes \com{firstchapteris}, etc. +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule}, etc. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \com{c@mti}. +% \item Correction dans \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}). +% \item Correction de l'appendice dans les articles. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{20} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'espacement avant et après les minitocs et analogues. +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcpagenumbers} et \com{nomtcpagenumbers} (et analogues) pour faire +% des minitocs avec ou sans numéros de pages. Défaut: avec numéros de pages. +% \item Correction du problème (difficile) de l'appendice dans les articles. +% \item Correction de l'espacement vertical. +% \item Correction d'un problème avec des chapitres numérotés avec des chiffres romains majuscules. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{21} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc} et \xfile{minitoc.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{22} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/10/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{23} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une ligne manquante dans \com{sectlof}. +% \item Fonctionne avec les classes de document réinitialisant le numéro de chapitre (ou de section) +% à~chaque partie (merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}). +% \item Retrait du code pour \com{firstchapteris} et compagnie. Ces commandes sont obsolètes. +% \item Retrait du code pour l'appendice. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{24} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1994/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les commandes \com{protect} ont été retirées des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} et +% \suffix{.lot}, donc certaines commandes internes on t été corrigées pour être compatibles avec la version +% de \LaTeXe\ de décembre 1994. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} qui a fait le travail. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{25} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} et ajout de \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} sur une suggestion +% de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{26} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les fichiers spécifiques des langues sont maintenant nommés \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (remplaçant les +% noms de la forme \texttt{mtc}\emph{langue}\suffix{.sty}) parce que ne sont pas des paquetages +% et que cela fait des noms plus courts. +% \item Ajout des langues breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower- et upper-sorbian; +% renommage de \og{} esperanto \fg{} en \og{} esperant \fg{} comme dans le paquetage \pack{babel}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{27} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1996/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% \item \xfile{english.mld} chargé comme langue par défaut. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{vietnam.mld} et \xfile{arab.mld}. +% \item Renommage de \pack{minitocoff} en \pack{mtcoff} pour que le nom reste court. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{28} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1997/10/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues afrikaan(s), brazil et ethiopia(n). +% \item Ajout de l'autoconfiguration des suffixes. +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}. +% \item Ajout du code \emph{coffee} (pauses café). +% \item Ajout du code de \com{addstarred} (pour ce qui concerne un chapitre étoilé). +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans les parttocs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Un typo corrigé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}: +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% devrait probablement être +% \begin{quote} +% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} +% \end{quote} +% (une contre-oblique manquait après \com{let}). Merci à~lui. +% \item Ajout de la langue bahasa. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1998/12/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{29} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues bicig, buryat, mongol et russianc. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/06/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la langue armenian (d'après \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} (défaut: \optd{dotted}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 1999/07/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{30} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 1999/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb et welsh. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans la définition de \com{sltname} (\texttt{mlt} devrait être \texttt{slt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{31} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, merci à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% qui a aussi simplifié certains morceaux de code et corrigé l'infâme erreur sur \com{chapter*}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{32} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/08/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de très (trop) nombreuses nouvelles commandes pour les dispositifs associés aux mini-tables: +% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK \com{afterparttoc},\ABK +% \com{afterpartlof},\goodbreak \com{afterpartlot},\ABK \com{thispageparttocstyle},\ABK +% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}\ABK et \com{thispagepartlotstyle}. +% \item Documentation améliorée par \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}. +% \item Correction de \com{nomtcrule}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{33} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de nouvelles commandes d'ajustement: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection} et +% \com{mtcaddpart}. Ces commandes ajoutent des choses dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} +% et \suffix{.lot} pour le problème de \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} et \com{part*}). +% D'après une suggestion de \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un problème dans \com{mtcaddchapter} et~co. avec un argument optionnel blanc. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{34} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2000/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout\imess{I0046} dans la documentation d'une section sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. +% \item Ajout de fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les noms alternatifs de langues: ainsi, \xfile{american.mld} ne fait +% que charger \xfile{english.mld}, qui contient les vraies définitions. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{35} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2001/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de macros pour tester si un fichier est \og{} vide\fg{} (c'est-à-dire vide, blanc ou inexistant) +% ou \og{} non vide \fg{} (c'est-à-dire utile). J'ai utilisé du code de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}. +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}\\opt{nocheckfiles}. +% \item Remplacement de \ucom{The@chapter} par \com{The@mtc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/02/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld} et +% \xfile{samin.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcselectlanguage}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'option de paquetage \lopt{estonian} (manquante). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2001/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la langue interlingua. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{36} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une interaction avec \com{tableofcontents} qui crée un \com{chapter*} ou +% une \com{section*}, en perturbant les compteurs \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} (problème signalé par +% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un problème d'espacement avec des titres vides (problème signalé par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). +% \item Contournement du problème \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction du test sur les fichiers vides. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bangla}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2002/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Réduction de la profondeur de \com{mtc@strutbox}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~\#37 sautée. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{38} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \texttt{pt} devient \ucom{@pt} et \texttt{0pt} devient \ucom{z@}. +% \item \ucom{hrule} et \ucom{vrule} remplacées par \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX). +% \item Ajout de \com{mtc@zrule} pour les filets de dimensions nulles. +% \item Ajout de la langue frenchb (synonyme de french). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changement du test pour les titres vides. +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont appliquées à~\com{parttoc} +% (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb} retirées et remplacées par l'option +% de paquetage \opt{insection} (comme \opt{flsectionb}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de la numérotation des SLF, SLT. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues frenchle et frenchpro (synonymes de french). +% \item Correction des secttocs, enfin. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de certains espacements verticaux et d'étais (j'ai ajouté quelques modifications +% de \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, grand merci à~lui.). Il reste pas mal de nettoyage à~faire, mais il semble +% nécessaire de publier la distribution maintenant. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{39} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2003/04/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Commandes de fontes modernes pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}. +% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} et la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2003/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{@fileswfalse} et \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} pour le paquetage +% \pack{notoccite} (demandé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); ajout de l'option de paquetage +% \opt{notoccite} (charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des options de langue et des fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les dialectes: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), +% \lopt{acadian}, \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}). +% \item Ajout de commentaires dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} utilisant des fontes spéciales. +% \item Corrections dans la documentation: ajout d'un paragraphe sur comment faire une table des matières pour +% les appendices, éventuellement non listés dans la table des matières principale. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/09/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation; corrections sur les filets. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{40} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des langues japanese et castillan. +% \item Retrait du test sur la présence du paquetage \pack{multicol} dans \xfile{minitoc.tex}, +% puisque \pack{multicol} est un paquetage obligatoire (\emph{required}). +% \item Ajout d'une figure dans \xfile{minitoc.tex} sur la nécessité de trois compilations. +% \item Ajout de quelques informations dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} d'un paragraphe sur un problème avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} et \xfile{minitoc.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}. Cette option est encore expérimentale; votre avis est le bienvenu. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2004/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (documentation en français en format PDF). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{41} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Message ajouté si certaines commandes de sectionnement ne sont pas disponibles. +% \item Remplacement des commandes \ucom{typeout} dans \upack{minitoc} par les commandes +% \com{PackageInfo} ou \com{PackageWarning}; avec le numéro de ligne lorsqu'il est utile +% (\com{@gobble} si pas de numéro de ligne). En conséquence, le paquetage est moins bavard +% (\com{PackageInfo} écrit seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, pas sur le terminal). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) et \com{mtcsettitlefont}, +% avec une syntaxe beaucoup plus simple. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Classes \AmS: \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}, +% \class{amsbook} demande des précautions. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour recommander l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la présence de \com{dominitoc} et co. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. +% \item Amélioration de la documentation sur les \emph{hints}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation des suffixes courts avec plus de 99~parties ou 99~chapitres +% ou 99~sections. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} devient \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/01/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de nombreux fichiers de langues: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, \xfile{chinese2.mld}, +% \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, +% \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, +% \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetrules}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, \com{nomlfrule}, +% \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, \com{nopltrule}, +% \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, \com{nosltrule}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de nouvelles langues: \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, +% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, +% \xfile{russian2o.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de tests sur les environnements \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\env{mtchideinmain*}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~42 non distribuée. +% \item Remplacement de \og{} language \fg{} par \og{} langue \fg{} dans la documentation française. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un typo mineur. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}, oubliée dans v41. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{43} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Version~43: consolidation de v40, v41 et v42. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une grosse erreur dans \com{mtcsetformat}. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} à~propos de \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction des macros \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} +% \item Déplacement de l'historique vers la fin du code du paquetage. +% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et d'un chapitre sur l'installation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}). +% \item Compléter le \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence entre \com{minitoc} et \com{tableofcontents}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de commentaires sur les fontes. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (haut bulgare). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} après le \texttt{\bs\bs} après le filet supérieur de chaque +% mini-table au niveau partie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans les arguments de \com{mtcsetfeature}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait de \com{markboth} pour les minitocs (\ldots) et secttocs (\ldots). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'environnement \env{stc@verse}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld} et \xfile{magyar2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommage de \xfile{portuges.mld} en \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans \com{mtcskip}. +% \item Première version en format \suffix{.dtx}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/04/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait de \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, etc., inutilisées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'un typo dans \com{@dosectlot}. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Impression de la documentation avec \og{} \optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{nombreuses classes}} \fg{} pour +% avoir toutes les notes marginales +% sur la gauche. Ajout du code (étendu à~54 éléments flottants) de \pack{morefloats} +% (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) pour permettre +% davantage de notes marginales et d'éléments flottants. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en page l'index correctement. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction des filets dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction des entrées de niveau chapitre dans les parttocs, lorsque les numéros de pages doivent être omis. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les tentatives d'insertion de mini-tables vides. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation de commandes obsolètes. +% \item Les mini-listes de figures ou de tableaux ne doivent pas être imprimées vides même si \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-listes de figures/tableaux. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetdepth}. +% \item L'option \optd{hints} est le choix par défaut et elle n'est plus considérée comme expérimentale. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un message d'erreur dans \com{mtcsetdepth} si le compteur n'est pas disponible. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{portuges.mld}, qui charge \xfile{portugues.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de trois variantes pour la langue malayalam: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}, +% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une méthode pour documentation bilingue. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en forme correctement l'index en français. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changement de \og{} Liste des Tables \fg{} en \og{} Liste des Tableaux \fg{} dans \xfile{french.mld} et +% dans la documentation française, pour suivre les choix du paquetage \pack{babel}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est maintenant engendré par \xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{o} +% pour vrai/faux. +% \item Condensation du code de détection des suffixes courts ou longs. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{V} et~\texttt{v} +% pour vrai/faux. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Établir correctement l'indicateur \com{ifFTR} pour avoir les noms des mois dans la langue correcte dans +% la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Établir l'indicateur \com{mtcoffwarn@true} par \pack{mtcoff} si une commande +% \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} est trouvée. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{castillian.mld}. +% \item Renommage de \xfile{portugues.mld} en \xfile{portuguese.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld} et \xfile{USenglish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression de \og{} Général: \fg{} dans l'historique des modifications. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Remplacement de quelques commandes \com{PackageWarning} par \com{PackageInfo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Restauration de la correspondance de chaque option de langue avec un fichier \suffix{.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait de deux indicateurs inutiles: \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} et +% \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}. +% \item Ajout des commandes \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc} et \com{decrementstc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/07/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une bourde dans \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Amélioration de quelques messages dans \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Ajout d'un test sur la version du paquetage \pack{placeins}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une note sur \com{FloatBarrier}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème d'alignement dans les minitocs. Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \item Fait deux versions des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}, +% selon la présence du compteur de profondeur correspondant. +% \item La classe \class{memoir} est incompatible si elle est trop récente. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur la position des commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.} de préparation. +% \item Corrections dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{guarani.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}. +% \item Ajout d'un argument optionnel à~\com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc} et \com{adjuststc}. +% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un patch pour la version récente de la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utiliser \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers +% \suffix{.mld} \og{} secondaires\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger +% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un test pour interdire les appels directs de \com{mtcloadmlo} par l'utilisateur. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld} et \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. +% \item Ajout d'une note sur l'outil \tool{rubber}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour formater le glossaire. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait des numéros de pages dans le glossaire. Fait par les scripts \texttt{*mk}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{44} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Historique (glossaire) composé en \texttt{RaggedRight}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld} et \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nouvelle méthode pour l'historique: listes imbriquées sur 3~niveaux. +% \item Retrait de \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nettoyage des scripts \texttt{*mk}. +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/09/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos. +% \item Ajout du nom du fichier \suffix{.maf} dans le message de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. +% \item Amélioration du nettoyage dans les scripts \texttt{*mk}, en utilisant un fichier \suffix{.maf}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Charger la correction pour la classe \class{memoir} seulement si nécessaire; ne pas la charger si +% \class{memoir} est datée après 2005/09/25. +% \item Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre \og{} Questions Fréquemment Posées\fg{} (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}) +% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{nolistfiles}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et +% \pack{mcaption} (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Correction de quelques notes marginales dans le code commenté. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \item Utiliser la commande Unix \tool{xargs} dans les scripts \texttt{*mk} pour détruire les fichiers +% auxiliaires. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/10/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout d'une courte introduction dans le chapitre \og{} Questions fréquemment posées\fg{} et +% dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Début de l'ajout du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la version française du \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} dans \xfile{minitoc.l}. +% \item Ajout d'une note sur la nécessité d'exécuter \scrp{imk} avant \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir}. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}. +% \item Ajout de \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont}, +% \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans +% les mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction d'une erreur sur les fontes pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans les +% mini-tables. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld} et +% \xfile{khalkha.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Ajout de vérifications par des commandes \emph{quarks} internes dans \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Changement de \og{} table\fg{} en \og{} tableau\fg{} dans la documentation en français, là où c'est nécessaire. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Correction de typos dans la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/11/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Éviter quelques avertissements \og{} Token not allowed\fg{} émis par \texttt{pdftex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Réordonné une longue séquence de citations. +% \item Ajout de \og{} {\froff\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} pour les URLs de courrier. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction d'un hyperlien dans la bibliographie (pour le paquetage \pack{xr}). +% \item Tentative pour éviter des URLs cassés, en utilisant \env{quote}, des notes infrapaginales et \com{par}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes, un tableau). +% \item Dans le message d'avertissement du \emph{hint} concernant un nombre de mini-tables dépassant~99 (idans +% le cas de suffixes courts), imprimer le nombre effectif. +% \item Réduction de la largeur de certains messages d'information, d'avertissement ou d'erreur. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections sur les guillemets français. +% \item Ajout de quelques options pour PDF. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction d'un URL vers l'\AmS\ dans la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages (essentiellement en enlevant des étoiles). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos. +% \item Ajout de quelques labels. +% \item Ajout d'un chapitre avec les messages (expliqués). Pas encore triés. +% \item La documentation a besoin de 4~compilations par \LaTeX. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages. +% \item Corrections dans la liste des messages. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2005/12/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de la position des flottants dans les pages de flottants: en haut. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation (merci à~\name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Ajout de \oexam{addsec.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc}. +% \item Correction pour faire marcher \oexam{addsec.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \og \texttt{*}\fg comme mot-clé pour le premier argument de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et +% \com{mtcsetrules} (demandé par \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). +% \item Retrait de \og \com{MessageBreak}\fg de l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Correction de l'entrée bibliographique sur \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} dans la documentation pour résoudre +% un problème de placement de flottants. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Résoudre un problème de placement de flottants. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de la langue bahasam. +% \item Ajout de la langue albanian. +% \item Ajout de la langue hebrew2. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour les langues albanian, bahasa, bahasam et hebrew2. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{french.mld} (retrait de majuscules abusives). +% \item Correction du fichier \xfile{italian.mld} language. Ajout de la langue italian2. +% \item Ajout des langues australian et newzealand (english). +% \item La langue bahasa est renommée en bahasai; bahasa est synonyme de bahasai. +% \item Ajout des langues malay et meyalu, synonymes de bahasam. +% \item Ajout des langues indon et indonesian, synonymes de bahasai. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. +% \item Ajout de références aux nouvelles entrées bibliographiques. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction d'une instabilité dans les coupures de page dans la documentation de \xfile{japanese3.mld}. +% \item Ajout de commentaires dans quelques fichiers \suffix{.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans \com{mtcaddsection}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcfixglossary}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Limitation de la profondeur initiale d'affichage des signets. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de quelques commentaires dans le point~34 des questions fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}) +% à~propos de l'initialisation des fontes. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Chargement de certains paquetages avant \pack{hyperref}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish4.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction du tableau sur les titres par défaut. +% \item Correction dans les mots-clés de \com{mtcsetfont}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} +% et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} et +% d'un point dans les questions fréquemment posées (et dans in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'une note dans la documentation de \xfile{serbian.mld} et \xfile{serbianc.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (pour Omega). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Simplifications dans le chapitre «~Messages~». +% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Jargon~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Postface~». +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du pacquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour l'entrée «~The pdf\TeX\ Program~» dans la bibliographie. +% Le prénom de son auteur a besoin d'un double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans \xfile{russianb.mld} et \xfile{spanish.mld}. +% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. +% \item Mettre \com{mtcfixglossary} avant \com{mtcfixindex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld} et \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Les langues \texttt{u8hangul} et \texttt{u8hanja} sont renommées \xmldo{hangul-u8} et \xmldo{hanja-u8}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour des commandes de préparation répétées. +% \item Déplacement vers le haut de la déclaration de certains indicateurs concernant l'option \optd{hints}. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcprepare}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} à~la classe~6. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/02/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Correction de la position des tableaux dans le chapitre «~Jargon~». +% \item Correction de \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \emph{Hints} sur la classe \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} et le paquetage \pack{alphanum}, +% incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de styles bibliographiques avec un champ \texttt{URL}, construits à~l'aide de +% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld} et \xfile{magyar3.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld} et \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, avec leurs +% fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld} et \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, avec +% leurs fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Désormais, les messages sont numérotés. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la question~37 sur les fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \pack{babel}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{french1.mld} et \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{english1.mld} et \xfile{english2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{45} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/03/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression des versions PostScript de la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld} et \xfile{xalx3.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{swedish2.mld}. +% \item L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \uxgrf{lamed.eps} et \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} comme images pour le logo de \emph{Lamed} (construit depuis +% \uxfile{lamed.tex}). +% \item Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de \pack{sectsty} pour mieux mettre en forme les titres des sections. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \com{ifmtcsecondpart} pour tester si le document a exactement 2~parties. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}, charger le paquetage \pack{flafter} \emph{avant} le +% paquetage \pack{placeins}. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les barrières de flottants. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/04/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans la question~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. +% \item Ajout de commentaires pour l'option \opt{insection}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Début de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. +% \item Fin de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. +% \item Corrections analogues dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de notes à~propos des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. +% \item Ajout de \oexam{hide1.tex} et \oexam{hide2.tex}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Renommé \oexam{hide.tex} en \oexam{hide1.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Utilisation de \com{MakeUpperCase} dans \com{markboth} pour les styles de page. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/05/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{captcont} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld} et \xfile{uighur3.mld} (comme synonymes pour les +% variantes de la langue bicig). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout d'une description de \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} dans le jargon. +% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur le script \scrp{imk} dans \xfile{INSTALL} et le chapitre «~Installation~». +% \item Ajout d'une entrée «~paquetage~» dans le jargon. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et \com{mtcgapafterheads}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \oexam{gaps.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \end{itemize} +% \item Correction d'espacement dans \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{46} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/21 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Commentaire sur le paquetage \pack{thailatex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Engendrer certains fichiers d'exemples avec \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}. +% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommé le chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~» en «~Exemples de documents~». +% \item Utiliser le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} dans certains des exemples de documents. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour des exemples de documents. +% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{second.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} et \oexam{mem1.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/06/30 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} et \oexam{scr.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{subf.tex}. +% \item Corrections sur la profondeur des minilofs, minilots et similaires. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{tsfc.tex} et \oexam{tbi.tex}. +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections de typos. +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{2c.tex} et \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item Correction dans \xfile{french2.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/10 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans les minilots et minilofs (et analogues) sur la profondeur. +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hop.tex} et \oexam{cri.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} et \oexam{mu.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation. +% \item Les versions non distribuées sont marquées par~\textbf{\textreferencemark} au lieu de~\ensuremath{\star}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item La section «~À~propos de ce document~» devient un premier chapitre étoilé. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hir.tex} et \oexam{hia.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections dans \oexam{add.tex} et \oexam{addsec.tex} pour l'index. +% \item Ajout du script \scrp{xmk} pour composer les exemples en documents PDF. +% \item Mise à~jour des scripts pour traiter les exemples. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ne pas oublier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} dans la liste des fichiers. +% \item Dans les scripts, le répertoire de \emph{backup} (\ixfile{OLD}) est +% désormais \ixfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}. +% \item Dans les scripts, les répertoires de répartition (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) sont +% désormais \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{47} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} (d'après le système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}). +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de \com{l@xsection}. +% \item Correction d'espacements dans les mini-tables. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/07/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un crênage vertical \verb|\kernafter...| entre chaque minitable et son filet inférieur. +% \item Ajout du point~45 des questions fréquemment posées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction mineure dans le message d'avertissement \texttt{F0008}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}. +% \item Raccourcissement du résultat de certains exemples de documents en utilisant la classe \class{report} +% au lieu de la classe \class{book} (d'où une impression en recto seul). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{48} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de typos. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Pas de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/23 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans le format de la table des matières. +% \item Augmentation de \com{textwidth}. +% \item Correction du problème de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib} et tous les fichiers générés. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/24 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Retrait des commentaires sur les lignes superflues dans le préambule des fichiers générés. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/25 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \item Correction de la macro \com{name} (pour la documentation). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/28 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Correction (conversion) dans \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de l'erreur \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} si \xfile{english.mld} n'est pas trouvé pour établir les titres par défaut. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/08/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Modification du style bibliographique \xfile{plainurl.bst}\isuffix{.bst} pour avoir les noms de famille des auteurs +% et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) en petites capitales et les années en chiffres de style ancien. Les +% titres sont mis en emphase. Le style \xfile{frplain1.bst} est aussi mis à~jour. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/01 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et +% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.bib} en \exam{mtc-add.bib}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.tex} en \exam{mtc-add.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{addsec.tex} en \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{2c.tex} en \exam{mtc-2c.tex}. +% \item L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est désormais active par défaut. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/07 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommage de \oexam{app-mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-amm.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{apx.tex} en \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{bo.tex} en \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{ch0.tex} en \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{cri.tex} en \exam{mtc-cri.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo1.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo2.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{gaps.tex} en \exam{mtc-gap.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hia.tex} en \exam{mtc-hia.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hir.tex} en \exam{mtc-hir.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide1.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide2.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{hop.tex} en \exam{mtc-hop.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{livre.tex} en \exam{mtc-liv.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-mem.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem1.tex} en \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mini-art.tex} en \exam{mtc-art.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} en \exam{mtc-bk.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{mu.tex} en \exam{mtc-mu.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{scr.tex} en \exam{mtc-scr.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{second.tex} en \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{subf.tex} en \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{tbi.tex} en \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{tlc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}. +% \item Renommage de \oexam{tsfc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/08 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie (ajout du Pentaglot). +% \item Correction du format de deux tableaux sur NFSS. +% \item Exemples de documents par ordre alphabétique dans leur chapitre. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple de document \exam{mtc-syn.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{49} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/14 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Légère modification de la mise en forme de la liste des fichiers (chapitre «~Installation~»). +% \item Simplifications dans les scripts. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du point~46 dans les questions fréquemment posées et du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie et les styles bibliographiques. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/09/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de «~\textbf{+}~» et «~\texttt{-}~» comme synonymes pour «~\texttt{on}~» et «~\texttt{off}~», +% respectivement. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections de typos. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'un tableau de quelques codages. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/10/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression de l'entrée «~Sommaire~» dans le sommaire, mais elle est ajoutée dans la table des matières. +% \item Amélioration de quelques tableaux. +% \item Ajout des fichiers \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Corrections dans la mise en page d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. +% \item Combinaison de quatre figures en une (avec des sous-figures). +% \item Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de +% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Complété la liste des classes standard. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}. +% \item Ajout\imess{E0036} de notes sur la présence obligatoire du fichier \xfile{english.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item La validation des options de langue n'écrit que des messages informatifs dans le fichier +% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et, si nécessaire, donne un seul message d'avertissement. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{50} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Suppression des anciens exemples de documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex}, +% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex} et \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}. +% \item Ajout d'un item sur la \index{TDS}TDS dans le jargon. +% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/11/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du message d'avertissement \texttt{W0094} avec la liste des fichiers minitoc de langue manquants +% (\suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}). +% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. +% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». +% \item Changement des noms des répertoires \emph{scratch} dans certains scripts. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et +% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{51} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de l'index: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options, +% options de langue. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2006/12/20 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de l'index: noms. +% \item Mise à~jour de certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} avec les noms des auteurs des titres. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections diverses. +% \item Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge. +% \item Ajout d'une commande \com{ProvidesFile} aux fichiers exemples. +% \item Indexation des environnements (pas parfaite). +% \item Indexation des fichiers. +% \item Renommage du fichier «~\texttt{catalog}~» en «~\xfile{CATALOG}~». +% \item Indexation des compteurs et des compteurs de profondeur. +% \item Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{52} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'ordre dans l'index. +% \item Options par défaut en gras dans l'index. +% \item Ajout d'informations sur les auteurs pour les titres spécifiques aux langues. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de sections bidons dans le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~». +% \item Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript. +% \item Retrait de \xfile{duplex2v.pro}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/17 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexation des commandes référencées. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction du nom \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (le prénom avant le nom de famille, à~la française). +% \item Correction de quelques autres noms. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. +% \item Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}). +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. +% \item Essai d'utilisation d'une version récente du paquetage \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} (2003/11/04, 4.01) pour permettre le tri, +% mais reste en conflit avec \pack{hyperref}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Équilibrage des colonnes de l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de l'indexation des environnements. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/01/31 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/05 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} qui charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Indexation des noms des auteurs. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{53} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. +% \item Correction de \com{kernafterminitoc} et consorts. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/02/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un en-tête à~l'index, pour expliquer les notations. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Changement du style des numéros de pages et de lignes dans l'index. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{kannada.mld}. +% \item Les symboles de virages dangereux sont maintenant dans la marge de droite. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration de la présentation des exemples de fichiers. +% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour trier les séquences de citations. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/09 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction dans le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}. +% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} en \uxfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/19 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Utilisation de l'option \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour +% compresser les séquences de citations; le paquetage \pack{hypernat} doit aussi être chargé (après \pack{natbib} et +% \pack{hyperref}). +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout du changement de titre de la parttoc des appendices dans \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{54} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/03/27 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~». +% \item Indexation des dispositifs. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~». +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}. +% \item Certaines mini-tables sont composées sur deux colonnes dans le manuel. +% \item Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite. +% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \pack{mtcoff}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/04/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages. +% \item Charger le paquetage \pack{hypcap} pour les hyperliens dans la documentation. +% ^^A \item Modification de \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk} et \scrp{pmk} pour retirer \verb*|\ | de l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/06 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table. +% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table. +% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}. +% \item Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples. +% \item La section 2007 du chapitre «~Postface~» était en pagaille. +% \item Plus de liens internes dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages. +% \item Amélioration des coupures de colonnes dans l'index. +% \item Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}. +% \item Groupement des paires \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \lneed{5} +% \item \textbf{55} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le +% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible). +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, +% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/22 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement. +% \item Amélioration des coupures de page dans la documentation. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/06/29 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Changement de la couleur des hyperliens. +% \item Changement du format des en-têtes. +% \item Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer +% correctement \com{mtc@toks}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{56} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/07/02 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/08/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item En-têtes de pages modifiés dans la documentation. +% \item Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) des régions où sont parlées diverses langues. +% \item Retrait des fichiers \suffix{.eps}. +% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}. +% \item Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/04 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Nombreuses corrections typographiques mineures. +% \item Couleurs plus sombres pour les hyper-liens. +% \item Mise à~jour et correction de la bibliographie. +% \item Correction d'un typo dans l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} (\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Corrections de typos dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} (merci +% à~\name{Andrew}{Bowden}). +% \item Remplacer le suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter +% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}). +% \item Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). +% \item Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~». +% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} +% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}. +% \item Indexation complète des messages. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. +% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie. +% \item Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}. +% \item Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}. +% \item Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}. +% \item Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et\ABK \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. +% \item Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{57} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/11 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2007/12/18 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Corrections dans les exemples de documents. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, +% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, +% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/01/15 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. +% \item Ajout de cartes de la Mandchourie. +% \end{itemize} +% \item 2008/04/03 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Amélioration des légendes des cartes. +% Ajout de cartes pour l'Italie , le Karnataka, l'Allemagne, les Mongols et la Chine. +% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan2.mld} et \xfile{mexican.mld}. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes tchèques. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes danois. +% \item Ajout d'une carte du néerlandais. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes français. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes galiciens. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes allemands. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes hindi. +% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes portugais. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue turque. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue vietnamienne. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora arménienne. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes sâmes. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des pays où l'espagnol est une langue officielle. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la région sorabe. +% \item Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des minorités en Pologne. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora bengalî. +% \item Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. +% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes basques. +% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes lettons. +% \item Ajout d'une carte pour la langue swahilie. +% \item Ajout de l'alphabet turc. +% \item Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (merci à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). +% \item Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. +% \item Ajout de cartes des langues d'Europe. +% \item Ajout de cartes du Kosovo. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des langues d'Afrique. +% \item Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message. +% \item Ajout de cartes pour la Russie. +% \item Ajout d'une carte du Kosovo. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des districts de Slovaquie. +% \item Ajout de cartes sur l'Islam. +% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'utilisation des caractères chinois dans le monde. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les dialectes chinois. +% \item Ajout de cartes sur les systèmes d'écriture. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des régions où le finnois est parlé. +% \item Raccourcissement du chapitre «~Installation~». +% \item Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16. +% \item Remplacement des fichiers \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} et \uxfile{lamed.tex} par \xgrf{lamed3.png}. +% \item Ajout de cartes de langues indigènes du Mexique. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item \textbf{58} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/06/26 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} en \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. +% \item Ajout d'une carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes polonais. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'alphabet russe. +% \item Ajout d'une carte sur l'alphabet russe. +% \item Ajout d'une carte sur les alphabets serbes. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des provinces du Viêtnam. +% \item Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes. +% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes albanais. +% \item Ajout d'une carte de la Norvège. +% \item Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. Ajout d'un cadre gris clair autour des drapeaux. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie. +% \item Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation. +% \item Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais. +% \item Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, +% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, +% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}. +% \item Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. +% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais. +% \item Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~fichiers PDF corrompus. +% \item \textbf{60} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2008/07/16 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Correction mineure dans la figure. +% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. +% \item Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). +% \item Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux) +% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick} +% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier); +% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. +% \item Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item \textbf{61} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2015/07/13 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Voir l'anglais (d\'esol\'e). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item \textbf{62} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item 2018/07/12 +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Voir l'anglais (d\'esol\'e). +% \end{itemize} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \end{itemize} +% \end{RaggedRight} +% \egroup +% \fi +% ^^A MAJ-F +% +% ^^A ACK +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \chapter*{Acknowledgments\markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}} +% \markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}% +% ^^A \enlargethispage*{1.5\baselineskip} +% \mtcaddchapter[Acknowledgments]% +% \noindent +% I ought to thank the following peoples\,\footnote{And I apologize to all whose I forgot.}, for their help, their +% questions, their interventions in the news groups\,\footnote{Mainly, \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (in french) and +% \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english), but also \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (in german, but I do not read it well: +% send me also a mail in french or in english).}, +% and/or for their packages, classes, documents, and tools:\hfill\mbox{} +% \or\relax +% \chapter*{Remerciements\markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}} +% \markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}% +% \mtcaddchapter[Remerciements]% +% \noindent +% Il me faut remercier les personnes suivantes\,\footnote{Et que toutes celles que j'ai oubliées me pardonnent.}, pour +% leur aide, leurs questions, leurs interventions dans les groupes de discussion\,\footnote{Essentiellement, +% \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français) et \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais), mais aussi +% \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (en allemand, mais je le lis très mal: envoyez-moi aussi un courrier en français ou en anglais).} +% et/ou leurs paquetages, classes, documents et outils:\hfill\mbox{} +% \fi +% +% \begin{raggedright}\noindent +% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, +% \name{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}, +% \namea{Nabil}{Abu~El-Ata}{Abu~El-Ata}, +% \name{Tommaso}{Addabbo}, +% \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}, +% \name{Stéphane}{Aicardi}, +% \name{Vartan}{Akopian}, +% \name{A.J.}{Alex}, +% \namea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}, +% \name{Mark}{Alford}, +% \name{Viviane}{Alleton}, +% \namea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}, +% \name{Jérôme}{Andrieux}, +% \name{Ralf}{Angeli}, +% \name{Walter}{Appel}, +% \name{Achod~André}{Aradian}, +% \name{Patrick}{Andries}, +% \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}, +% \name{Tim}{Arnold}, +% \name{Jouko}{Arponen}, +% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, +% \name{Helmer}{Aslasken}, +% \name{David}{Aspinall}, +% \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen}, +% \name{Philipp}{Bachmann}, +% \name{Gonçal}{Badenes}, +% \name{Guillaume}{Balavoine}, +% \name{Jason}{Baldridge}, +% \name{Marin}{Balgarensky}, +% \name{Leonor}{Barroca}, +% \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi}, +% \name{Pierre}{Basso}, +% \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}, +% \name{Jean-Yves}{Baudais}, +% \name{David}{Bausum}, +% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, +% \name{Thierry}{Bayet}, +% \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, +% \name{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}, +% \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara}, +% \name{Benoît}{Belet}, +% \name{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}, +% \namea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}, +% \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, +% \name{Alexander}{Berdnikov}, +% \name{Jens}{Berger}, +% \name{Tobias}{Berndt}, +% \name{Karl}{Berry}, +% \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, +% \name{Javier}{Bezos}, +% \name{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}, +% \name{Olivier}{Binisti}, +% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, +% \name{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}, +% \namea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}, +% \name{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}, +% \name{Laurent}{Bloch}, +% \namea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}, +% \name{Patrick}{Boman}, +% \name{Onofre}{Bonvila}, +% \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}, +% \name{Patrice}{Bougette}, +% \name{Daniel}{Bourbonnais}, +% \name{Andrew}{Bowden}, +% \name{Victor}{Boyko}, +% \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, +% \name{Felix}{Braun}, +% \name{Jim}{Breen}, +% \name{Peter}{Breitenlohner}, +% \name{Roland}{Breton}, +% \name{Catherine}{Bricout}, +% \name{William}{Bright}, +% \namea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}, +% \name{Mimi}{Burbank}, +% \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, +% \name{Patrick}{Burgel}, +% \name{Alexey}{Burykin}, +% \name{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}, +% \namea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}, +% \name{Olivier}{Cardi}, +% \name{Samuele}{Carcagno}, +% \name{David}{Carella}, +% \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, +% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, +% \name{Manuel}{Carriba}, +% \name{Régis}{Caspar}, +% \name{Waldemar}{Celes}, +% \name{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, +% \name{Winston}{Chang}, +% \name{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}, +% \name{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}, +% \name{Pehong}{Chen}, +% \name{Céline}{Chevalier}, +% \namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}, +% \name{Otfried}{Cheong}, +% \name{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}, +% \name{Pai~H.}{Chou}, +% \name{Pierre}{Chuvin}, +% \name{Yves}{Citoleux}, +% \name{Marian}{Clegg}, +% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, +% \name{Maurizio}{Codogno}, +% \name{Bernard}{Comrie}, +% \name{David~B.}{Cook}, +% \name{Emmanuel}{Cornet}, +% \name{Oliver}{Corff}, +% \name{Prakash}{Countcham}, +% \namea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}, +% \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, +% \name{Adrian}{Daerr}, +% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan}, +% \name{Patrick~W.}{Daly}, +% \name{Peter~T.}{Daniels}, +% \name{Holger}{Danielsson}, +% \name{Alice}{Davison}, +% \namea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}, +% \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Demoustier}, +% \name{Andreas}{Deininger}, +% \name{Éric}{Depardieu}, +% \namea{Ben}{De~Rydt}{DeRydt}, +% \name{Bernard}{Desgraupes}, +% \name{Cécile}{Desprairies}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Desreux}, +% \name{Christine}{Detig}, +% \name{Antoni~R.}{Diller}, +% \name{Gérard}{Dorel}, +% \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}, +% \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}, +% \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer}, +% \name{Denys}{Duchier}, +% \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}, +% \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja}, +% \name{Ta~Quang}{Dung}, +% \name{Patrick}{Egan}, +% \namea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}, +% \name{Brian}{Elmegaard}, +% \name{Danie}{Els}, ^^A booktabs +% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, +% \name{Thomas}{Esser}, +% \name{Gilhooly}{Etienne}, +% \name{Karl~F.}{Everitt}, +% \name{Mike}{Fabian}, +% \name{Robin}{Fairbairns}, +% \name{Christian}{Faulhammer}, +% \name{Simon}{Fear}, ^^A booktabs +% \name{Jürgen}{Fenn}, ^^A l2tabu +% \name{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}, +% \name{Jeff}{Fessler}, +% \name{Ulrike}{Fischer}, +% \name{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}, +% \name{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}, +% \name{Daniel}{Flipo}, +% \name{Peter~L.}{Flom}, +% \name{Peter}{Flynn}, +% \name{Jim}{Fox}, ^^A dpfloat +% \namea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}, +% \namea{Danny~M.}{Fürniß}{Furniss}, +% \name{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}, +% \name{Federico}{Garcia}, +% \namea{Diego}{García~Morate}{Garcia~Morate}, +% \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, ^^A pict2e +% \namea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}, +% \name{Maarten}{Gelderman}, +% \name{Chuck}{Genschte}, +% \name{Jacques}{Gernet}, +% \name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, +% \name{Helen}{Gilhooly}, +% \name{Henri}{Giordan}% +% \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis}, +% \name{François}{Giron}, +% \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}, +% \name{Josiane}{Gonthier}, +% \name{Vitali}{Gontsharuk}, +% \name{Michel}{Goossens}, +% \namea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}, +% \name{Mathieu}{Goutelle}, +% \name{Bruce~K.}{Grant}, +% \name{Fraser}{Grant}, +% \namea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}, +% \name{Norman}{Gray}, +% \name{George~D.}{Greenwade}, +% \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}, +% \name{Loïc}{Grenon}, +% \name{Charles}{Grether}, +% \name{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}, +% \name{Olga~A.}{Grineva}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Grot}, +% \name{Micael}{Guignard}, +% \name{Marion}{Gunn}, +% \name{Guntermann}{Klaus}, +% \name{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}, +% \name{Thomas}{Hafner}, +% \name{Hans}{Hagen}, +% \name{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}, +% \name{Boumediene}{Hamzi}, +% \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}, +% \name{Thorsten}{Hansen}, +% \name{Patrick}{Happel}, +% \name{Yannis}{Haralambous}, +% \name{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}, +% \name{Alexander}{Harin}, +% \name{Russel~L.}{Harris}, +% \name{Michael~A.}{Harrison}, +% \name{Stephen}{Hartke}, +% \name{Danny}{Heap}, +% \name{Jim}{Hefferon}, +% \name{André}{Heider}, +% \name{Thorsten}{Hein}, +% \name{Sten}{Hellman}, +% \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, +% \name{Yvon}{Henel}, ^^A l2tabu +% \name{Hartmut}{Henkel}, +% \name{Thomas}{Henlich}, ^^A marvosym% +% \name{Stephan}{Hennig}, +% \name{Florence}{Henry}, +% \name{Stephen}{Herborn}, +% \name{Jörg}{Hesoll}, +% \name{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}, +% \name{David}{Hoadley}, +% \name{Taco}{Hoekwater}, +% \name{Alan}{Hoenig}, +% \name{Joe}{Hogg}, +% \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}, +% \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, +% \namea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}, +% \name{Umstatter}{Horst}, +% \name{Don}{Hosek}, +% \name{Yufan}{Hu}, +% \name{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}, +% \name{Dave~W.}{Huseby}, +% \name{Helene}{Hyna}, +% \name{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}, +% \name{Hiroya}{Ikeda}, +% \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}, +% \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, +% \name{Victor}{Ivrii}, +% \name{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}, +% \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}, +% \name{Youssef}{Jabri}, ^^A Arabi +% \name{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}, ^^A pearls +% \name{Roland}{Jacques}, +% \name{Christophe}{Jacquet}, +% \name{Bernd}{Jaehne}, +% \name{Radwan}{Jalam}, +% \name{Michael}{Janich}, +% \name{Frank}{Jensen}, +% \name{Alan}{Jeffrey}, +% \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}, +% \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}, +% \name{Loïc}{Joly}, +% \name{David~M.}{Jones}, +% \name{Christophe}{Jorssen}, +% \name{Robert}{Juhasz}, +% \name{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}, +% \name{Stefan}{Junge}, +% \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, +% \name{Akira}{Kakuto}, +% \name{Mikko}{Kanerva}, +% \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, +% \name{David}{Kastrup}, +% \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, +% \name{Jonathan}{Kew}, ^^A xetex +% \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, +% \name{Ki-Joo}{Kim}, +% \name{Bil}{Kleb}, +% \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}, +% \name{Rune}{Kleveland}, +% \namea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}, +% \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, +% \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}, +% \name{Markus}{Kohm}, +% \name{Helmut}{Kopka}, +% \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}, +% \name{Adamantios}{Korais}, +% \name{Vincent}{Krakoviack}, +% \name{Kai}{Kratt}, +% \name{Thankmar}{Kronzucker}, +% \name{Siep}{Kroonenberg}, +% \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}, +% \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, +% \name{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}, +% \name{Florian}{Kulzer}, +% \name{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}, +% \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, +% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}, +% \name{Stéphane}{Laborde}, +% \name{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}, +% \name{Klaus}{Lagally}, +% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}, +% \name{Fabio}{Lanari}, +% \name{Robert}{Lange}, +% \name{Dag}{Langmyhr}, +% \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, +% \name{Henning}{Larsen}, +% \name{Jean-Marc}{Lasgouttes}, +% \name{Andris}{Lasis}, +% \name{Christian}{Laucou}, +% \name{Jean-Philippe}{Lauffenburger}, +% \name{Arnaud}{Launay}, +% \name{Claire}{Lauvernet}, +% \name{Boris}{Lavva}, +% \name{André}{Lebacq}, +% \name{Olivier}{Lecarme}, +% \name{Jacques}{Leclerc}, +% \name{Iksop}{Lee}, +% \namea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}, +% \name{Jeanne}{Legrand}, +% \name{Philipp}{Lehman}, +% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, +% \name{Thomas}{Leonhardt}, +% \namea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}, +% \name{Stéphane}{Lepolozec}, +% \namea{Julien}{Le~Thuaut}{LeThuaut}, +% \namea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}, +% \name{Adam}{Lewenberg}, +% \name{Knut}{Lickert}, +% \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}, +% \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}, +% \name{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}, +% \name{Pierre}{Lobel}, +% \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}, +% \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}, +% \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}, +% \name{Tristan}{Lorino}, +% \name{Tim}{Love}, +% \name{Vincent}{Lozano}, +% \name{Daniel~H.}{Luecking}, +% \name{Ken}{Lunde}, +% \name{Anders}{Lyhne}, +% \namea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}, +% \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}, +% \name{Lars}{Madsen}, +% \name{Richard}{Mahoney}, +% \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}, +% \name{Pierre}{Malecki}, +% \name{Pascal}{Marchand}, +% \name{Bob}{Margolis}, +% \name{Cécile}{Marin}, +% \name{Nicolas}{Markey}, +% \name{Marcus}{Marr}, +% \name{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}, +% \name{Alan}{Marshall}, +% \name{Terry}{Mart}, +% \name{Éric}{Martini}, +% \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, +% \name{Henri}{Massias}, +% \name{Stephen}{Matthews}, +% \name{Andreas}{Matthias}, +% \name{Sven}{Mattisson}, +% \name{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}, +% \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}, +% \name{Ben}{McKay}, +% \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Mengin}, +% \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}, +% \name{Yanick}{Michou}, +% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, +% \name{Young~Joon}{Moon}, +% \name{Ross}{Moore}, +% \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}, +% \name{Florence}{Morgiensztern}, +% \name{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}, +% \name{Michael~A.}{Morrison}, +% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}, +% \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}, +% \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, +% \name{}{National Geographic Society}, +% \name{}{National Institute of the Korean}, +% \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}, +% \name{Lee}{Netherton}, +% \name{Frank}{Neukam}, +% \name{Cuong}{Nguyen}, +% \name{Julien}{Nicolas}, +% \name{Elke}{Niedermair}, +% \name{Michael}{Niedermair}, +% \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}, ^^A pict2e +% \name{Josselin}{Noirel}, +% \name{Tim}{Null}, +% \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, +% \name{Tobias}{Oetiker}, +% \name{Haruhito}{Okamura}, +% \name{Mariusz}{Olko}, +% \name{Tanguy}{Ortolo}, +% \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, +% \name{Jörg}{Ott}, +% \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}, +% \name{Scott}{Pakin}, +% \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}, +% \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, +% \name{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}, +% \name{Hubert}{Partl}, +% \name{Oren}{Patashnik}, +% \name{Jonathan}{Pechta}, +% \name{Kasper}{Peeters}, +% \namea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}, +% \name{Matthias}{Pelger}, +% \name{Philippe}{Pelletier}, +% \namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}, +% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}, +% \name{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}, +% \name{Paul}{Pichaureau}, +% \name{Éric}{Picheral}, +% \name{Bruno}{Piguet}, +% \namea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}, +% \name{John}{Plaice}, +% \name{Yves}{Plassereau}, +% \name{Ariane}{Poissonnier}, +% \name{Maria}{Polinsky}, +% \name{Philippe}{Pons}, +% \name{Monique}{Pontault}, +% \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}, +% \name{Fabrice}{Popineau}, +% \name{Nico}{Poppelier}, +% \name{Rama}{Porrat}, +% \namea{Camille-Aimé}{Possamaï}{Possamai}, +% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, +% \namea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}, +% \name{Glanville}{Price}, +% \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, +% \name{Sebastian}{Rahtz}, +% \name{Bernd}{Raichle}, +% \name{Claude}{Raimond}, +% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}, +% \name{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}, +% \name{Paul}{Rascoe}, +% \name{Keranen}{Reino}, +% \name{Arthur}{Reutenauer}, +% \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}, +% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}, +% \name{François}{Richaudeau}, +% \name{Luis}{Rivera}, +% \name{Yuri}{Robbers}, +% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}, +% \name{Will}{Robertson}, +% \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel}, +% \name{Christian}{Rolland}, +% \name{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}, +% \name{Chris~A.}{Rowley}, +% \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}, +% \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}, +% \name{Young}{Ryu}, ^^A txfonts +% \name{Enn}{Saar}, +% \name{David}{Samsoen}, +% \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, +% \name{Larry}{Sanger}, +% \name{Morgan}{Sangeux}, +% \name{Thierry}{Sanjuan}, +% \name{Eddie}{Saudrais}, +% \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}, +% \name{Bernd}{Schandl}, +% \name{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}, +% \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}, +% \name{Walter}{Schmidt}, +% \name{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}, +% \name{Uwe}{Schneider}, +% \namea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}, +% \name{Joachim}{Schrod}, +% \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}, ^^A everysel, ragged2e, multitoc +% \name{Ulrich}{Schwartz}, +% \name{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}, +% \name{Michael}{Shell}, +% \vname{Shin}{Jungshik}, +% \namea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}, +% \name{Ali}{Shoukat}, +% \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, +% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}, +% \name{Sindhu}{Singh}, +% \name{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}, +% \name{Petra}{Schlager}, +% \name{Kristian}{Slimak}, +% \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}, +% \name{John}{Smith}, +% \name{Robin~S.}{Socha}, +% \name{Nick}{Sofroniou}, +% \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}, +% \name{Lianyi}{Song}, +% \name{Yves}{Soulet}, +% \name{Gérard}{Sournia}, +% \name{Pierre-François}{Souyri}, +% \name{Arjen}{Steiner}, +% \name{D.~P.}{Story}, +% \name{Éric}{Streit}, +% \name{Ralf}{Stubner}, +% \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}, +% \name{Cyrille}{Suss}, +% \name{Robert~S.}{Sutor}, +% \name{Chris}{Swoyer}, +% \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}, +% \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, +% \name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}, +% \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}, +% \name{Philip}{Taylor}, +% \namea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}, +% \name{Yves}{Ternon}, +% \name{Manfred}{Thibud}, +% \name{Christina}{Thiele}, +% \name{Harold}{Thimbleby}, +% \name{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}, +% \name{Aurélien}{Thureau}, +% \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}, +% \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, ^^A pict2e +% \namea{Ton}{'t~Lam}{tLam}, +% \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}, +% \name{Cezare}{Tomczak}, +% \name{Laurent}{Tordella}, +% \name{Mark}{Trettin}, ^^A l2tabu +% \name{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}, +% \name{Ahto}{Truu}, +% \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, +% \name{Hideo}{Umeki}, +% \name{Un}{Koaunghi}, +% \name{Turgut}{Uyar}, +% \name{Jari}{Vaario}, +% \name{Christian}{Valantin}, +% \name{Piet}{van~Oostrum}, +% \namea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}, +% \name{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}, +% \name{Vincent}{Vaquin}, +% \name{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}, +% \name{Didier}{Verna}, +% \name{Sylvain}{Vesco}, +% \name{Boris}{Veytsman}, +% \name{Alexandre}{Vial}, +% \name{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}, +% \name{Florence M.}{Voegelin}, +% \name{Martin}{Vogel}, +% \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, +% \name{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}, +% \namea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}, +% \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, +% \name{David}{Walden}, +% \name{Jimmy}{Wales}, +% \name{Nigel}{Ward}, +% \name{John}{Warnock}, +% \name{Douglas}{Waud}% +% \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}, +% \name{Stephan~B.}{Webanck}, +% \name{Eduard}{Werner}, +% \name{Daphne}{West}, +% \name{Ferenc}{Wettl}, +% \name{Graham}{Williams}, +% \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, +% \namea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}, +% \name{Alexandre}{Wolf},% +% \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}, +% \name{Élisabeth}{Wolkowski}, +% \name{Mark}{Wooding}, +% \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}, +% \name{Tim}{Wright}, +% \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}, +% \name{Damien}{Wyart}, +% \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda}, +% \name{Adi}{Zaimi}, +% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}, +% \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}, +% \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}, +% \name{Charlie~S.}{Zender}, +% \name{Federico}{Zenith}, +% \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}, +% \name{Uwe}{Ziegenhagen}\ifcase\LANG\relax, and\ \or\relax\ et\ \fi +% \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}.\par +% \end{raggedright} +% ^^A NEW HISTORY END +% ^^A SEE.. +% \ifcase\LANG\relax +% \index{Suffixes|see{Extensions}} +% \or\relax +% \index{Extensions|see{Suffixes}} +% \fi +% \iftrue % ^^A to index authors from the bibliography (citations replace the page number) +% \bname{}{National Institute of the Korean}{korean-beg}% +% \bname{Iksop}{Lee}{kor-lan}% +% \bname{Bruce~K.}{Grant}{korean-chars}% +% \bname{Philippe}{Pelletier}{pelletier2003,pelletier2004,pelletier2007}% +% \bname{Philippe}{Pons}{pons2007}% +% \bname{Pierre-François}{Souyri}{pons2007,souyri1999}% +% \bnamea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}{japon-dc}% +% \bname{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}{chineco}% +% \bname{Yves}{Citoleux}{chineco}% +% \bnamea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}{chineco}% +% \bname{Jacques}{Gernet}{gernet1,gernet2,gernet3}% +% \bname{Viviane}{Alleton}{alleton2008}% +% \bnamea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}{mace2008}% +% \bname{Gérard}{Dorel}{atlasmi-us}% +% \bnamea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}{atlas-in}% +% \bname{Guillaume}{Balavoine}{atlas-in}% +% \bname{Pascal}{Marchand}{atlas-ru}% +% \bname{Cyrille}{Suss}{atlas-ru}% +% \bnamea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}{atlas-amla}% +% \bnamea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}{atlas-amla}% +% \bname{Yves}{Plassereau}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Henri}{Giordan}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Yves}{Ternon}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Cécile}{Marin}{atlasmi-eu}% +% \bname{Thierry}{Sanjuan}{sanjuan,chineco}% +% \bnamea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}{sanjuan}% +% \bname{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}{bisanwa}% +% \bnamea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}{bisanwa}% +% \bname{Victor}{Ivrii}{ivrii2007a,ivrii2007b}% +% \bname{Roland}{Breton}{breton2003,atlasmi-mo}% +% \bname{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}{breton2003}% +% \bname{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}{breton2003}% +% \bname{Stephen}{Matthews}{comrie2004}% +% \bname{Maria}{Polinsky}{comrie2004}% +% \bname{Catherine}{Bricout}{comrie2004}% +% \bname{Petra}{Schlager}{schlager2007}% +% \bname{Manfred}{Thibud}{schlager2007}% +% \bname{Monique}{Pontault}{OIF}% +% \bname{Alexandre}{Wolf}{OIF}% +% \bname{Christian}{Valantin}{OIF,OIF2003}% +% \bname{Florence}{Morgiensztern}{OIF,OIF2003}% +% \bname{Josiane}{Gonthier}{OIF}% +% \bname{Ariane}{Poissonnier}{AF}% +% \bname{Gérard}{Sournia}{AF}% +% \bnamea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}{AF}% +% \bname{Glanville}{Price}{LOE}% +% \bname{Peter~T.}{Daniels}{WWS}% +% \bname{William}{Bright}{WWS}% +% \bname{Bernard}{Comrie}{comrie1990,comrie2004}% +% \bname{Tristan}{Lorino}{lorino2006}% +% \bname{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}{ramsey1989,kor-lan}% +% \bname{Pierre}{Chuvin}{chuvin2008}% +% \bnamea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}{chuvin2008}% +% \bname{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}{chuvin2008}% +% \bnamea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}% +% \bname{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}{lua2005,lua2006}% +% \bnamea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}{lua2006}% +% \bname{Waldemar}{Celes}{lua2006}% +% \bnamea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}{ppvl}% +% \bname{Alan}{Marshall}{marshall1991}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Andries}{andries2008}% +% \bname{Roland}{Jacques}{ppvl}% +% \bname{Tobias}{Berndt}{berndt2007}% +% \bname{Joachim}{Schrod}{ilatex,guntermann1986,detig1994}% +% \bname{Guntermann}{Klaus}{guntermann1986}% +% \bname{Christine}{Detig}{detig1994}% +% \bname{Éric}{Martini}{martini2008}% +% \bname{Olivier}{Binisti}{rich2005}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Boman}{boman2005}% +% \bname{Christian}{Laucou}{boman2005}% +% \bname{François}{Richaudeau}{rich2005}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Burgel}{pluriels}% +% \bname{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}{cjkomega}% +% \bname{Haruhito}{Okamura}{cjkomega}% +% \bname{}{National Geographic Society}{atlas-china}% +% \bname{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}{beebe}% +% \bname{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{occi}% +% \bname{Elke}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}% +% \bname{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}{lipkin}% +% \bname{Michael}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}% +% \bname{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}{fnul,fgram,conju}% +% \bname{Claude}{Raimond}{enul}% +% \bname{Paul}{Rascoe}{texasmaps}% +% \bname{Christophe}{Jacquet}{mlatex}% +% \bname{Alice}{Davison}{hindi99}% +% \bname{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}{basque}% +% \bname{Jonathan}{Kew}{xetex}% +% \bname{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}{lowlands}% +% \bname{François}{Giron}{surlatex}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Egan}{nomentbl}% +% \bname{Brian}{Elmegaard}{nomentbl}% +% \bname{Ferenc}{Wettl}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}% +% \bname{Stéphane}{Aicardi}{aicardi}% +% \bname{Jouko}{Arponen}{practical}% +% \bname{Jason}{Baldridge}{jason}% +% \bname{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}{fancybox}% +% \bname{Frank}{Jensen}{calc}% +% \bname{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}{calc}% +% \bname{Akira}{Kakuto}{kakuto}% +% \bname{Lee}{Netherton}{nomencl}% +% \bname{Bernd}{Schandl}{nomencl}% +% \bname{Vartan}{Akopian}{armtex}% +% \bname{A.J.}{Alex}{malayalam,malayalam-o}% +% \bnamea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}{china-h}% +% \bnamea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}{icelandic}% +% \bnamea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}% +% \bnamea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}{ethno}% +% \bname{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}{ethno}% +% \bnamea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}{ingo}% +% \bname{Donald}{Arseneau}{notoccite,placeins,cite,overcite,wrapfig,chapterbib,url,ifmtarg}% +% \bname{Gonçal}{Badenes}{catalan}% +% \bname{Pierre}{Basso}{bibtopic}% +% \bname{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}{mongolian}% +% \bname{David}{Bausum}{trm-b,trm}% +% \bname{Benjamin}{Bayart}{JMPL1,texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Thierry}{Bayet}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Claudio}{Beccari}{beccari1998,latin,italian,beccari-pj-2007-1}% +% \bname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}{rubber}% +% \bnamea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}{magyar}% +% \bname{Jens}{Berger}{hypernat}% +% \bname{Alexander}{Berdnikov}{maccents,X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}% +% \bname{Karl}{Berry}{impatient,fr-impatient,berry1990,berry2003}% +% \bname{Berhanu}{Beyene}{ethiop}% +% \bname{Javier}{Bezos}{spanish4,spanish,guarani,titletoc}% +% \bname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}{aleph}% +% \bnamea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}{magyar}% +% \bnamea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}{latex-synthex}% +% \bname{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}{bulgarian}% +% \bname{Victor}{Boyko}{cmcyralt/russian.sty}% +% \bname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,dutch,english,irish,norsk,welsh,basque,% +% icelandic,catalan,latin,magyar,bulgarian,turkish,LaTeXbase,galician,galician2,slovak,italian,BEP,% +% frenchb,scottish,swedish,romanian,samin,finnish,interlingua,bahasa,bahasam,russianb1,danish,hebrew2,% +% czech,serbian,croatian,germanb,ngermanb,portuges,breton,esperanto,estonian,polish,ukraineb,greek,% +% lsorbian,usorbian,albanian,slovene,i-ntg,ntg,proc,classes,letter,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F}% +% \bname{Felix}{Braun}{jura}% +% \bname{Jim}{Breen}{breen}% +% \bname{Mustafa}{Burc}{turkish}% +% \bname{Alexey}{Burykin}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}% +% \bname{David}{Carella}{carella}% +% \bname{David~P.}{Carlisle}{LaTeXbase,xr,afterpage,ltxdoc,xr-hyper,color,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,ltclass,ifthen,backref,textcase}% +% \bname{Manuel}{Carriba}{galician,galician2}% +% \bname{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}{latex-synthex,ftb,TLC2F,jcc2008,ftds}% +% \bname{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}{kanji}% +% \bname{Pehong}{Chen}{chen1988}% +% \bnamea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}{slovak}% +% \bname{Bernard}{Desgraupes}{meta-des,desgraupes,unicode-des}% +% \bname{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}{subfigure,captcont,subfig}% +% \bname{Maurizio}{Codogno}{italian}% +% \bname{Oliver}{Corff}{mlsquick,pentaglot,mongol-web,montex}% +% \bname{Prakash}{Countcham}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Sergueï}{Dachian}{armtex}% +% \bname{Arnak}{Dalalyan}{armtex}% +% \bname{Patrick~W.}{Daly}{fullpage,dnatbib,natnotes,kopka,daly1998}% +% \bnamea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}{portuges}% +% \bname{Éric}{Depardieu}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}{montex}% +% \bname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}{texfaq-fr,shorttoc,minitoc-fr,minitoc}% +% \bnamea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}{BEP,TBT,comment,i-ntg,ntg}% +% \bname{Behdad}{Esfahbod}{farsi}% +% \bname{Mike}{Fabian}{cjk-suse}% +% \bname{Robin}{Fairbairns}{texfaq-en}% +% \bname{Jürgen}{Fenn}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen,Fenn-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{Daniel}{Flipo}{frenchb,CIL2E}% +% \bname{Peter}{Flynn}{flynn,veryshort,Flynn-pj-2005-3,Flynn-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}{farsi}% +% \bname{Michel}{Goossens}{latex-web,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,TLGC}% +% \bname{Mathieu}{Goutelle}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Fraser}{Grant}{irish,scottish}% +% \bnamea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}{gr-mil,gr-mmil,gr-fsl}% +% \bname{Norman}{Gray}{urlbst}% +% \bname{George~D.}{Greenwade}{greenwade}% +% \bname{Enrico}{Gregorio}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,gregorio2007}% +% \bname{Olga~A.}{Grineva}{maccents}% +% \bname{Marion}{Gunn}{irish}% +% \bname{Hans}{Hagen}{aleph-hagen,style-hagen,pdftex,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,luatex}% +% \bname{Hartmut}{Henkel}{luatex}% +% \bname{Taco}{Hoekwater}{luatex,luatex2007}% +% \bnamea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}{han,han2000,pdftex,vietnam,han2003,han2008,han2008a}% +% \bname{Patrick}{Happel}{lipsum}% +% \bname{Yannis}{Haralambous}{yannis1990,YH2004,YH2007,yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998,yannis2004,yannis+a}% +% \bname{Alexander}{Harin}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}% +% \bname{Michael~A.}{Harrison}{chen1988}% +% \bname{Sten}{Hellman}{swedish}% +% \bname{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}{norsk}% +% \bname{Yvon}{Henel}{texfaq-fr,l2tabufr}% +% \bname{Thomas}{Henlich}{marvosym}% +% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}% +% \bname{Florence}{Henry}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{David}{Hoadley}{btxfaq}% +% \bname{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}{norsk}% +% \bname{Umstatter}{Horst}{romanian}% +% \bname{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}{norsk}% +% \bname{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}{basque}% +% \bname{Youssef}{Jabri}{arabi}% +% \bname{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}{pearls}% +% \bname{Michael}{Janich}{polish}% +% \bname{Regnor}{Jernsletten}{samin}% +% \bname{Zhuhan}{Jiang}{vruler}% +% \bname{Loïc}{Joly}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{David~M.}{Jones}{hangcaption}% +% \bname{Christophe}{Jorssen}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Robert}{Juhasz}{romanian}% +% \bname{Mikko}{Kanerva}{finnish}% +% \bname{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}{thailatex,thaistd}% +% \bname{Axel}{Kielhorn}{koma,komab}% +% \bname{Ki-Joo}{Kim}{bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim,latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim}% +% \bname{Peter}{Kleiweg}{interlingua}% +% \bname{Rune}{Kleveland}{norsk}% +% \bname{Jörg}{Knappen}{bahasa,bahasam,esperanto,knappen2004}% +% \bname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}{cmt,texbook,metabook,ftb}% +% \bname{Markus}{Kohm}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Yuri}{Robbers}{robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}{robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Helmut}{Kopka}{kopka,kopka-bd1,kopka-bd2,kopka-bd3}% +% \bname{Attila}{Koppanyi}{magyar}% +% \bname{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}{antomega}% +% \bname{Dmitry}{Ivanov}{antomega}% +% \bname{Manfred}{Kudlek}{ethiop}% +% \bname{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}{effective}% +% \bname{Olaf}{Kummer}{ethiop}% +% \bnamea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}{alnumsec}% +% \bname{Klaus}{Lagally}{arabtex2,arabtex}% +% \bname{Leslie}{Lamport}{LaTeXbase,lamport-mkx,latex-manual,ntg,proc,classes,letter}% +% \bname{Olga~G.}{Lapko}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC,russianb1,FULLCYR,floatrow,russianb,ukraineb}% +% \bname{Henning}{Larsen}{danish}% +% \bname{Boris}{Lavva}{hebrew2}% +% \bname{Olivier}{Lecarme}{lecarme}% +% \bname{Jacques}{Leclerc}{tlfq}% +% \bname{Philipp}{Lehman}{TFIG}% +% \bname{Werner}{Lemberg}{russianb1,cjk,cjk2,vietnam,dblaccnt,cyrguide,ukraineb}% +% \bnamea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Knut}{Lickert}{minutes}% +% \bname{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}{fncychap}% +% \bname{Anselm}{Lingnau}{float}% +% \bnamea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}{czech}% +% \bname{Maurizio}{Loreti}{sfheaders}% +% \bname{Tim}{Love}{timlove1994,timlove}% +% \bname{Vincent}{Lozano}{lozano}% +% \bname{Ken}{Lunde}{lunde1993,lunde,lunde1999}% +% \bname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}{turkish}% +% \bname{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}{russianb}% +% \bname{Bob}{Margolis}{bahasam}% +% \bname{Nicolas}{Markey}{texfaq-fr,splitbib,ttb}% +% \bname{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Terry}{Mart}{bahasa,bahasam}% +% \bname{Sven}{Mattisson}{slatex}% +% \bname{Rowland}{McDonnell}{sectsty}% +% \bname{Surapant}{Meknavin}{thailatex}% +% \bname{Sébastien}{Mengin}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Jochen}{Metzinger}{ethiop}% +% \bname{Frank}{Mittelbach}{LaTeXbase,classes,letter,FMI1990,FMI1992,slides,multicol,varioref,doc,dblaccnt,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,enc-inter,TLGC}% +% \bname{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}{komab,koma}% +% \bname{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,Mori1-pj-2007-1,Mori2-pj-2007-1}% +% \bnamea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}{galician,galician2}% +% \bnamea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}{serbian}% +% \bname{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}{LH/russian.sty}% +% \bname{Frank}{Neukam}{koma,komab}% +% \bname{Rolf}{Niepraschk}{pict2e,texfaq-de}% +% \bname{Josef}{Tkadlec}{pict2e}% +% \bname{Josselin}{Noirel}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hypcap,ifpdf,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,makerobust}% +% \bname{Mariusz}{Olko}{polski}% +% \bnamea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}{swedish}% +% \bnamea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}{croatian}% +% \bname{Scott}{Pakin}{dtxtut,symbols,newcommand}% +% \bname{Palash~Baran}{Pal}{bangtex}% +% \bname{Anshuman}{Pandey}{pandey1999,devanagari}% +% \bname{John}{Smith}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Harold}{Thimbleby}{seealso,seealso1}% +% \bname{Dominik}{Wujastyk}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Kevin}{Carmody}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}{devanagari}% +% \bname{Oren}{Patashnik}{btxdoc,btxhak}% +% \bname{Kasper}{Peeters}{hypertex}% +% \bname{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}{norsk}% +% \bname{Bruno}{Piguet}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{John}{Plaice}{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}% +% \bname{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}{thailatex,thai-how}% +% \bname{Nico}{Poppelier}{BEP}% +% \bname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}{farsi}% +% \bname{Sebastian}{Rahtz}{latex-web,pdftex,hyperref.web,hyperref,TLGC,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,backref,nameref,rotating}% +% \bname{Leonor}{Barroca}{rotating}% +% \bname{Bernd}{Raichle}{germanb,ngermanb,texfaq-de,romaniantex}% +% \bname{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}{portuges}% +% \bname{Keranen}{Reino}{finnish}% +% \bname{Arthur}{Reutenauer}{reutenauer2008}% +% \bnamea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}{romaniantex}% +% \bname{Christian}{Rolland}{breton,rolland1999}% +% \bname{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}{esperanto}% +% \bname{Young}{Ryu}{txfonts}% +% \bname{Enn}{Saar}{estonian}% +% \bnamea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}{basque}% +% \bname{Eddie}{Saudrais}{saudrais2001,saudrais2005}% +% \bnamea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}{polish}% +% \bname{Tobias}{Schlemmer}{slovak}% +% \bname{Walter}{Schmidt}{ngermanb,Schmidt-pj-2006-1,psnfss,fftex}% +% \bnamea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}{multitoc,pdftex,msch2007}% +% \bname{Michael}{Shell}{btxfaq}% +% \bname{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}{ukraineb}% +% \bname{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}{thailatex}% +% \bname{Jankovic}{Slobodan}{serbian}% +% \bname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}{caption2,cap-anleitung,caption,caption-eng,rotfloat}% +% \bname{Joseph~A.}{Wright}{trivfloat}% +% \bname{D.~P.}{Story}{dpstory}% +% \bname{Éric}{Streit}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}{beccari1998,greek,syro2002,greek-ba}% +% \bnamea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}{varsects}% +% \bnamea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}{frenchle,frenchpro,frenchperso}% +% \bname{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}{quotchap}% +% \bname{Mark}{Trettin}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen}% +% \bname{Stefan}{Ulrich}{bibtopic}% +% \bname{Un}{Koaunghi}{HLATEX}% +% \bname{Turgut}{Uyar}{turkish}% +% \bname{Piet}{van~Oostrum}{teximpl}% +% \bnamea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}{texfaq-fr,thomasvo}% +% \bname{Vladimir}{Volovich}{russianb1,cyrguide,ukraineb}% +% \bname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}{Bechtolsheim+TB11-3-409,tex-bech}% +% \bname{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}{platex-pl}% +% \bname{Eduard}{Werner}{lsorbian,usorbian}% +% \bname{Graham}{Williams}{tcat}% +% \bname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}{stdclsdv,needspace,tocloft,abstract,appendix,tocbibind,tocvsec2,ccaption,docmfp,memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3,romannum,ifmtarg,ledmac,ledpar,ledarab,chngpage}% +% \bnamea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}{docstrip-prog,polski}% +% \bname{Damien}{Wyart}{texfaq-fr}% +% \bname{Adi}{Zaimi}{albanian}% +% \bname{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}{slovene}% +% \bnamea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}{latin}% +% \bname{Charlie~S.}{Zender}{latex-cheat}% +% \bname{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,lhcyr}% +% \bnamea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}{slovene}% +% \bname{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}{impatient,fr-impatient}% +% \bname{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}{impatient,fr-impatient}% +% \bname{Mark}{Alford}{alford}% +% \bname{Walter}{Appel}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Céline}{Chevalier}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Emmanuel}{Cornet}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Sébastien}{Desreux}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Paul}{Pichaureau}{ltximpat}% +% \bname{Helmer}{Aslasken}{aslaksen,aslaksen2}% +% \bname{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}{arabe}% +% \bname{Cécile}{Desprairies}{arabe,japo,chinois,russe}% +% \bname{Antoni~R.}{Diller}{diller}% +% \bname{Fabrice}{Popineau}{ftds}% +% \bname{Alan}{Jeffrey}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,ltnews,ltclass}% +% \bname{Chris~A.}{Rowley}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,rowley1999,calc}% +% \bnamea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}{LaTeXbase,letter}% +% \bname{Peter}{Breitenlohner}{etex}% +% \bname{Otfried}{Cheong}{cheong}% +% \bname{Pai~H.}{Chou}{chou}% +% \bname{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}{fergu90}% +% \bname{Maarten}{Gelderman}{gelderman}% +% \bname{Chuck}{Genschte}{pdfspec}% +% \bname{John}{Warnock}{pdfspec}% +% \bname{Helen}{Gilhooly}{japo}% +% \bname{Gilhooly}{Etienne}{japo}% +% \bname{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}{latex-web}% +% \bname{Ross}{Moore}{latex-web}% +% \bname{Robert~S.}{Sutor}{latex-web}% +% \bname{Thorsten}{Hansen}{multibib,bibunits}% +% \bname{Éric}{Picheral}{yannis1995}% +% \bname{Alan}{Hoenig}{unbound}% +% \bname{Hiroya}{Ikeda}{platex-jp}% +% \bname{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}{styleuse}% +% \bname{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}{styleuse}% +% \bname{Siep}{Kroonenberg}{MAPS22-13}% +% \bname{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}{lachand}% +% \bname{Denys}{Duchier}{docstrip-prog}% +% \bname{Mark}{Wooding}{docstrip-prog}% +% \bname{Young~Joon}{Moon}{young-mm}% +% \bname{Tobias}{Oetiker}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Hubert}{Partl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Helene}{Hyna}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% +% \bname{Tanguy}{Ortolo}{ortolo}% +% \bname{Jeanne}{Legrand}{ortolo}% +% \bnamea{}{{\LaTeX3}~{Project}~{Team}}{latex3}{ltnews,proc,docstrip,ltoutput,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,encguide,cyrguide} +% \bname{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}{park2003}% +% \bname{Jonathan}{Pechta}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bname{Federico}{Zenith}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bname{Holger}{Danielsson}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bnamea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% +% \bnamea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}{piska}% +% \bname{Mimi}{Burbank}{piska}% +% \bname{Christina}{Thiele}{piska,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% +% \bname{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}{venkatesan}% +% \bname{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}{voeg}% +% \bname{Florence M.}{Voegelin}{voeg}% +% \bname{Daphne}{West}{russe}% +% \bname{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}{russe}% +% \bname{Thomas}{Hafner}{texfaq-de}% +% \bname{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}{chinois}% +% \bname{Lianyi}{Song}{chinois}% +% \bname{Charles}{Grether}{chinois}% +% \bname{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}{syro2002}% +% \bname{Nick}{Sofroniou}{syro2002}% +% \bname{}{TWS-TDS}{ftds,tds}% +% \bname{Hideo}{Umeki}{geometry}% +% \bname{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}{TLC2F,hufflen}% +% \bname{Benoît}{Belet}{TLC2F}% +% \bname{Yves}{Soulet}{TLC2F}% +% \bnamea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}{TLC2F,jcc2008,yannis+a}% +% \bname{Samuele}{Carcagno}{carcagno}% +% \bname{Simon}{Fear}{booktabs}% +% \bname{Danie}{Els}{booktabs}% +% \bname{Martin}{Vogel}{marvosym}% +% \bname{Don}{Hosek}{morefloats}% +% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}% +% \bnamea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}{pict2e}% +% \bname{Winston}{Chang}{latexsheet}% +% \bname{Didier}{Verna}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bname{Bernd}{Jaehne}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bname{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}{ltx-primer,nomencl}% +% \bname{C.~S.}{Yogananda}{kannadatex}% +% \bname{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}{kannadatex}% +% \bname{Vadim}{Maslov}{cmcyralt/russian.sty,cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}% +% \bname{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}{Schmitz-pj-2007-1}% +% \bname{Federico}{Garcia}{Garcia-pj-2006-4,garcia2007}% +% \bname{Boris}{Veytsman}{Veytsman-pj-2006-4-design,nomencl}% +% \bname{Sindhu}{Singh}{Singh-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{Will}{Robertson}{Robertson-pj-2006-3}% +% \bname{Stephen}{Hartke}{Hartke-pj-2006-1}% +% \bname{Jim}{Hefferon}{Hefferon-pj-2005-4,Hefferon-pj-2006-4}% +% \bname{David}{Walden}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% +% \bname{Philip}{Taylor}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,taylor1996}% +% \bname{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,talbot2004,novices,flowfram,ffuserguide,talbot-admin,talbot-phd,talbot-thesis,talbot-mini}% +% \bname{Joe}{Hogg}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% +% \bnamea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}{Hoeppner-pj-2005-3}% +% \bname{Peter~L.}{Flom}{Flom-pj-2005-2,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,Flom-pj-2005-4}% +% \bname{Douglas}{Waud}{Waud-pj-2005-1}% +% \bname{Tim}{Null}{Waud-pj-2005-1,Null-pj-2005-2-bh02,Null-pj-2005-3-bh03}% +% \bname{Michael~A.}{Morrison}{morrison}% +% \bname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}{TLGC}% +% \bnamea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}{TLGC,voss2006}% +% \bname{Christian}{Faulhammer}{preusse}% +% \bname{Ulrich}{Schwartz}{preusse}% +% \bnamea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}{preusse}% +% \bname{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}{LMP}% +% \bname{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}{LMP}% +% \bpack{xargs}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}% +% \bpack{chngpage}{chngpage}% +% \bpack{ledmac}{ledmac}% +% \bpack{ledpar}{ledpar}% +% \bpack{ledarab}{ledarab}% +% \bpack{afoot}{ledarab}% +% \bpack{frenchle}{frenchle}% +% \bpack{frenchpro}{frenchpro,frenchperso}% +% \bpack{flowfram}{flowfram,ffuserguide}% +% \bpack{nomentbl}{nomentbl}% +% \bpack{minitoc}{minitoc-fr,minitoc}% +% \bpack{Aleph}{aleph,aleph-hagen}% +% \bpack{dblaccnt}{dblaccnt}% +% \bpack{nomencl}{nomencl}% +% \bpack{hypernat}{hypernat}% +% \bpack{fancybox}{fancybox}% +% \bpack{shorttoc}{shorttoc}% +% \bpack{appendix}{appendix}% +% \bpack{babel}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}% +% \bpack{hyperref}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}% +% \bpack{backref}{backref}% +% \bpack{nameref}{nameref}% +% \bpack{rotating}{rotating}% +% \bpack{hypcap}{hypcap}% +% \bpack{ifpdf}{ifpdf}% +% \bpack{notoccite}{notoccite}% +% \bpack{placeins}{placeins}% +% \bpack{tocbibind}{tocbibind}% +% \bpack{tocloft}{tocloft}% +% \bpack{titletoc}{titletoc}% +% \bpack{titlesec}{titletoc}% +% \bpacka{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}{arabtex2,arabtex}% +% \bpacka{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}{xetex}% +% \bpack{minutes}{minutes}% +% \bpack{needspace}{needspace}% +% \bpack{txfonts}{txfonts}% +% \bpack{ifmtarg}{ifmtarg}% +% \bpack{abstract}{abstract}% +% \bpack{xr}{xr}% +% \bpack{textcase}{textcase}% +% \bpack{ethiop}{ethiop}% +% \bpack{sectsty}{sectsty}% +% \bpack{subfig}{subfig}% +% \bpack{comment}{comment}% +% \bpack{ccaption}{ccaption}% +% \bpack{caption}{caption,caption-eng}% +% \bpack{caption2}{caption2,cap-anleitung}% +% \bpack{bibtopic}{bibtopic}% +% \bpack{bibunits}{bibunits}% +% \bpack{chapterbib}{chapterbib}% +% \bpack{multibib}{multibib}% +% \bpack{hangcaption}{hangcaption}% +% \bpack{varsects}{varsects}% +% \bpack{xr-hyper}{xr-hyper}% +% \bpack{stdclsdv}{stdclsdv}% +% \bpack{CJK}{aslaksen,aslaksen2,chou,cjk-suse,cjk,cjk2,kile-cjk}% +% \bpack{docstrip}{docstrip,docstrip-prog}% +% \btool{urlbst}{urlbst}% +% \btool{rubber}{rubber}% +% \btool{newcommand}{newcommand}% +% \bpack{float}{float}% +% \bpack{floatrow}{floatrow}% +% \bpack{trivfloat}{trivfloat}% +% \bpack{rotfloat}{rotfloat}% +% \bpack{fncychap}{fncychap}% +% \bpack{quotchap}{quotchap}% +% \bpack{romannum}{romannum}% +% \bpack{sfheaders}{sfheaders}% +% \bpack{alnumsec}{alnumsec}% +% \bpack{captcont}{captcont}% +% \bpack{vruler}{vruler}% +% \bpack{doc}{doc}% +% \bpack{shortverb}{doc}% +% \bpack{tocvsec2}{tocvsec2}% +% \bpack{thailatex}{thailatex}% +% \bpack{lipsum}{lipsum}% +% \bpack{subfigure}{subfigure}% +% \bpack{multicol}{multicol}% +% \bpack{geometry}{geometry}% +% \bpack{wrapfig}{wrapfig}% +% \bpacka{\eTeX}{etex}{etex,FMI1990}% +% \bpacka{\Arabi}{arabi}{arabi}% +% \bpack{color}{color}% +% \bpack{docmfp}{docmfp}% +% \bpack{splitbib}{splitbib}% +% \bpack{afterpage}{afterpage}% +% \bpack{multitoc}{multitoc}% +% \bpack{cite}{cite}% +% \bpack{booktabs}{booktabs}% +% \bpack{url}{url}% +% \bpack{varioref}{varioref}% +% \bpack{fullpage}{fullpage}% +% \bpack{marvosym}{marvosym}% +% \bpack{guarani}{guarani}% +% \bpacka{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}{mlsquick,montex}% +% \bpacka{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}{armtex}% +% \bpack{Antomega}{antomega}% +% \bpacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}{bangtex}% +% \bpacka{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}{spanish4}% +% \bpacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}{devanagari}% +% \bpack{malayalam}{malayalam}% +% \bpack{omal}{malayalam-o}% +% \bpacka{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}{platex-jp,kakuto}% +% ^^A \bpacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX}{polski,platex-pl}% +% \bpack{polski}{polski,platex-pl}% +% \bpacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}{slatex}% +% \bpacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}{farsi}% +% \bpacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}{HLATEX}% +% \bpack{LH}{LH/russian.sty}% +% \bpack{lhcyr}{lhcyr}% +% \bpack{cmcyralt}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,cmcyralt/russian.sty}% +% \bpacka{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}{romaniantex}% +% \bpack{flafter}{ltoutput,TLC2}% +% \bpack{alphanum}{jura}% +% \bpack{morefloats}{morefloats}% +% \bpack{natbib}{dnatbib,natnotes}% +% \bpack{overcite}{overcite}% +% \bpack{pict2e}{pict2e}% +% \bpacka{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}{kannadatex}% +% \bpacka{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}{hypertex}% +% \bpacka{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}{luatex,luatex2007}% +% \bpack{mcaption}{mcaption}% +% \bpack{minitoc-hyper}{minitoc-hyper}% +% \bpack{vietnam}{vietnam}% +% \bpack{calc}{calc}% +% \bpack{makerobust}{makerobust}% +% \bclass{memoir}{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{jura}{jura}% +% \bclass{amsart}{amslatex}% +% \bclass{amsproc}{amslatex}% +% \bclass{amsbook}{amslatex}% +% \bclass{scrbook}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrartcl}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrreprt}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrlettr}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{scrlttr2}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% +% \bclass{article}{classes}% +% \bclass{report}{classes}% +% \bclass{book}{classes}% +% \bclass{letter}{letter}% +% \bclass{slides}{slides}% +% \bclass{ltxdoc}{ltxdoc}% +% \bclass{ltnews}{ltnews}% +% \bclass{proc}{proc}% +% \fi +% \Finale +% \endinput -- cgit v1.2.3